(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Examination papers for 1891 [microform]"





IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 



1.0 



I.I 



^ 



US 



12^ 

2.2 



111 

■u 
u 



■40 






2.0 



U |L6 



Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporalion 




23 WfST MAIN STIiEfT 

WIBSTil»>.Y. 14SM 

(716)t72-4503 




CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 



CIHIVI/ICIVIH 
Collection de 
microfiches. 




Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiquas 





Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibiiographiques 



1 
t 



The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
original copy available for filming. Features of this 
copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
which may alter any of the images in the 
reproduction, or which may significantly change 
the usual method of filming, are checked below. 



□ 



D 



D 
D 



D 



D 



Coloured covers/ 
Couverture *!b couleur 



I I Covers damaged/ 



Couverture endommagde 



□ Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
Couverture restaurto et/ou peiliculie 

□ Cover t'tle missing/ 
Le titre de couverture manque 

I I Coloured maps/ 



Cartes g6ographiques en couleur 

Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bieue ou noire) 



I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 



Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 

Bound with other material/ 
Reli6 avec d'autres documents 

Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
along interior margin/ 

La re liura serr^e peut causer do I'ombre ou de la 
distortion le long de la marge intirieure 

Blank leaves added during restoration may 
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
have been omitted from filming/ 
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout6es 
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
male, lorsque cela 6tait. possible, ces pages n'ont 
pas 6t6 fiim^es. 

Additional comments:/ 
Commentaires suppidmentaires; 



L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
qu'il lui a At6 possible de se proct rer. Les details 
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du 
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
modification dans la mithode normale de filmage 
sont indiqu6s ci-dessous. 



1 

r 



f 



D 
D 
□ 
D 
D 



Coloured pages/ 
Pages de couleur 

Pages damaged/ 
Pages endommag^es 

Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
Pages restaur6es et/ou peiiiculdes 

Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
Pages ddcolor^es. tachetdes ou piqu6es 

Pages detached/ 
Pages d4tach6es 



t 

s 
c 

f 

s 





[7^ Showthrough/ 



n 



Transparence 

Quality of print varies/ 
Quality in6gale de fimpresslon 

Includes supplementary material/ 
Comprend du materiel suppiimentaire 

Only edition available/ 
Seule Edition disponible 



e 
b 
ri 
r( 
n 



Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
slips, tissues, etc.. have been refilmed to 
ensure the best possible image/ 
Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure. 
etc.. ont 6t6 fiimdes d nouveau de fapon d 
obtenir la meilleure image possible. 



This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 

Ce document est fiimd au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous. 

10X 14X 18X 22X 



26X 



30X 



U I 



12X 



16X 



20X 



24X 



28X 



32X 



The copy filmed hare ha* baan laproducad thanka 
to tha ganaroaity off: 

University of Toronto 
ARCHIVES 



L'axamplaira ffilmA fut raproduit grica i la 
gAnArosltA da: 

Univtrsity of Toronto 
ARCHIVES 



Tha Imagas appearing hare are tha best quality 
possible considering the condition and legibility 
of the original copy and in icaeping with the 
ffllming contract specifications. 



Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
beginning with the front cover and ending on 
the last page with a printed or illustrated inripres- 
sion. or the bacit cover when appropriate. All 
other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
first page with a printed or illustrated Impres- 
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
or illustrated Impression. 



The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
shall contain the symbol -^ (meaning "CON- 
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
whichever applies. 



Les images suivantea ont 4t4 raproduitea avac la 
plus grand aoin, compta tenu de la condition at 
da la nettetA de I'exemplaira film*, et en 
conformity avec las conditions du contrat da 
filmage. 

Les exemplaires originaux dont la couvarture en 
papier est imprimte sont filmAs an comman9ant 
par la premier plat at en terminant soit par la 
darnlAre page qui comporte une emprelnte 
d'impresslon ou d'illustration, soit par la second 
plet, selon le cas. Tous las autres exemplaires 
originaux ront filmto en commenpant par la 
premiere page qui comporte une emprelnte 
d'impresslon ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
la darnlAre pago qui comporte une telle 
emprelnte. 

Un des symboles suivants apparattra sur la 
dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
cas: la symbols — ► signifle "A SUIVRE", le 
symbols V signifle "FIN". 



Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
diffferent reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
entirely Included in one exposure are ffilmed 
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
method: 



Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent Atre 
filmte A des taux de reduction diff6rents. 
Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atre 
reprodult en un seul cllch6, II est filmA A partir 
de I'angia supArieur gauche, de gauche A droite, 
et de haut an has, en prenant le nombre 
d'images nAcessaire. Las diagrammes suivant^ 
illustrant la mAthode. 



1 


2 


3 




1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 



^*i%iij^ 



L 1 



"Clnivei-slt^ of Toronto. 



EiAMiNiTiON Papers 



SOR 



1891. 



TORONTO: 
ROWSELL & HUTCHISON, PRINTERS. 

1891. 



lIowsELL & Hutchison, 
Printers, Toronto. 






df^diuattau S^irnrtment, (^nturia. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



TPIE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



GREEK. 

PASS MATRICULATION. 



A. J, Bell, M.A., Ph.D. 



rA. J. Bell, M.A., 
Examiners : < W. Dale, M.A. 

(j. Fletcher, M.A. 



Note — Only one of the alter natives (a) and (5) in questionn 10 and 14to be taJken. 

A. 

1. Write down the nom. sing, of fia<rCKka, xepfft, aXridr), ravra, 

OTOV. 

2. Write down the positive of fiiyiaro^, •qZio)^ KpeirTcav, aXayi- 
aro^t and the comparative of eZ. 

3. Parse (giving the 1st person pres., fut., pf., and aor. ind. of 
the verb) €a\o>, iKrj(fi9'r}, eXei^drj, ikvcriOj Spdcrov. 

4. Distinguish o ayado^ hvr^p, and o aurjp ayaSoi. Auto? 
8ot)Xo9 and abT6<: SovKo<;. "AWot and oi aWoi. _ 

5. Translate into Greek : 

(a) He will order his boy to give the irtoney to you. 
(6) This man has taken five ships, crews and all. 

(c) The other of the two armies will march quickly against 
Babylon. 

(d) Who is that ? I will ask who it is. 

(e) He said that he himself thought virtue better than 
wealth. 



B. 

Translate : 

'EXdovTcov fieu yap Ylepa-m' kuI tmu rrvv avroh Tra/j.TrXrjOei 
CToXtp wv u(f)aviovi>T(ou ra? 'AOyva^, viroaTfjvai avToU 'Adrjuaioi 
ro\/j,>j(Tai>Te<i iviKi](Tav avrov^. Kal eu^ufiei'oi ttj 'ApreficSi, 
OTToiToi/? UP KaTaKcivoiev TOiv 7ro\efj,i(oi', roaavTa<i ')(ifiaipa<{ 
KaTaOuaeiv jfj 6ea>, kirei ovk el^ov Uavat evpeiv, eSo^ev nvroh 
Kar' eviavTou irevTaKocrla^ dveiv, Kal en Kal vvv dtroOuovaiv. 
"ETreiTa ore B.ep^r)^ varepov dyei'pa'i rijv ui>apid/xr}TOu aTpariav 
7]\6eu i-TrX tS]v 'liWdSa, Kal rare ipiKcou ol rjfieTSpot Trpoyovoi 
Tovf rovTwv irpoyovovi Koi Kara yrju kuI Kara dakarrau. 
*£lv eari fiev reKfit/pia opdv ra rporraia, /xeyiarop Be fiaprvpiou 
jj eXevdepia rcov rroXeiov, ev ah vp.eh eyei>f.a-de Kal irpdcfiTjre' 
obSsvU yap duOpco-rroi^ Beairorrjif, dXXa rou^ Oeov(i irpoaKwelre, 

Xkxoi'IIov, AnahaHbs, III. 

6. Parse (giving principal parts of verbs) vTroarrjfac, eupeiv, 
TjXOep, ipiKcou, irpd^rjre. 

7. Give rules for the case of Uepacou, aroXro, avrolf (uiroarijvai). 

8. «»? aj>avLovvru)v. Write a note on this idiom. 

9. KaraOvcreiv. When is the subject of the infinitive {n) 
expressed, (Jb) omitted ? 

10. (a) Sketch, and illustrate from the third book of the 
Anabasis, the character of Xenoplion. 

_ (6) Draw a rough map to show the route of Cyrus from 
Sardis to Cunaxa. 



/ 






c. 

Trasnlate : 

TeKvov, ritrre XtTTWv iroXepiov Opaavv elXt]Xov6a<i ; 
H fidXa Stj reipovat Bvcrwvfioi ules" 'A^y^iwi/ 
Mapvdfievoi rrepl aarv ce 8' evddhe Ovp.o'i dvi]K€u 
'EXdovr' i^ aKprji; TToXto? Alt ;)^;et/3a? dva<T)(elu. - 

AXXa fieu, o(f)pa Ke roi ueXirjhea olvov iveLKto, 
'£!<; (TTTeiay^; All rrarp) Kal aWoi? ddavdroiaiv 
npMTOu, erreira 8e k avro'i ovrjaeai^ ai Ke rrirjcrda. 
'AvSpl Be KeKfirjoiri jxevo'i fiiya oti/o? de^ei, 
11? TVift] KeK/jiy]Ka^ dpLvvcov aolatv errjsiv." 

HOMEH, Iliad, VI. 



^v*^ 



/ 



11. I'arso (giving princii)al parts of verbs) Xnruv, dvrjKev, apa- 
cr^elVf ae^ei, KeKfirjKa^. 

12. Oivo Attic Greek lor aicpvj^, «e, eVet'/cw, fieXirjBeay trirjada, 

13. K avTo<i ovrjaeai. What peculiarity in syntax ? 

14. ((t) What is an epic pooui ? What difficulty in applying 
the (.letinition to the Iliad ? 

(ft) Describe brieHy the .interview bet»veen Hector and 
Andronittohe. 

D. 

Translate at sifjht : 

'Atfoucrai^re? Tama eiretdovTo koX Bie^rjaav irplv Toi*? aWouv 
atroKpCvaadai. Kupo? 8' eVet f/a-dero hia^eBr^Korat^ fjadr) re 
Kalnw <TTpaT€VfiaTi Trifiyjra^ rXovu elirev " 'EiyoD fiev, & dvBp€<i, 
■>]St] vfia<i iiraivS)' otto)? Se Koi vfieif efxk eTraiviaeTe, iuol fie\i]<rei^ 
fj p,rjKeTi /lie Kvpop vofii^eTe." Ot fieu 8f} (npaTmiai ev eKiriai 
fieydXai<: oj/re? ev)(puTo ouTOf evTV)(fio'ai' Mivrnvi Be xal hatpa 
eXeyero Tre/Myfrat fieyaCKoTrpeirSi^. Taura hk 7roiij(Ta<; 8ie0aive' 
(TvveLTreTo 8e Kal to d\Xo a-Tpdrevfia avT^ airav. Kol t&v Sta- 
^aivovrwv rov iroTafiou ovBeU e^pe-)(dr} dvwTepo) rSiv fxatrdfav 

VTTO TOV TTOTap.QV. 

Xenophon, Anabasis, I. 
fieyaXoTrpsTrai'i, munificently ; fipix^^i ''■''^^ ! f^aado^f breast. 



r 



\ 



t 



! 



r 



\ 



dfiluation '^(pnrtmettt, (Dittntio. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1801. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEA.VINO, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



GREEK AUTHOllS. 

SENIOR LEAVING Al:D HONOR MATRICULATION. 



Bell, M.A., Ph.D. 

. _.ILE, M.A. 

(j. Fletcher, M.A. 



(A. J 

Examiners : -{ W. Dale, Al.A. 



Note. — Candida/en are allowed an option between que8tion» 4 and 5, between 
quentioua [> and 10, between queiitioiis I4 and 15. 

A. 

Translate : 

'ETTTa Zk Kot hcKa fikv TrXiov ■^fiara "rrovTotropevtov, 
^OKTcoKaiSeKaTTj S' i(f)dvr] 6pea CKioevra 
FatJ?? v/j,eT€pr]<i, y^drjae 8e /jloi <f)i\ov ^rop 
Av(Tfi6p^. ^ yap sfMsKKop ert ^vviaeadai oi^vi 
IIoW^, T1JU p-oi eirSipae Hocrethdoiv evoai-)(^da)Vf 
"O? fiot ei^opp.Yjaa'i itvefiovt KaTe8i]<re KeXev&a^ 
"npivev Se ddXaaaav adia^aTOV, ov8e ri KVfia 
El'a iiri a-^eSirj^ dSiva arevaxovra ^epeadai. 
Tt)v p,ev eiretra dveWa 8ie<TKe8aa\ avrhp eywye 
^T)x6fievo<i /xiya XaiTfia 8ieT/Mayov, 6<f)pa fie yalji 
'Yfieripr) iTreXaaae ^iptov avefwt re Kal vBatp. 

Homer, Odyssey, VII. 

1. Scan tlio first four verses, and notice some points of differ- 
ence between the metre of Homer and that of Virgil. 

2. <j>lXov ^Top. Write a note on Homer's ur3 of <f>iXov, and 
give its equivalent in Attic. 

3. Derive o-dctoevTa, 8va/j.6p(p, ivoai^xdaVy adia^arov. 






1 1 



4. (Jivo ail account of tlio Epic diiilnot, contrasting it with 
Attic, r.n<l illustratiii!,' from tho passiige givuii ahovo; 

;). (livo an account of the vni-ioiis theories that have been hehl 
as to the coin[)osition of tho Iliuil ami Odyssey. 

B. 

Translate : 

To<TavTa u€i> TOi'vvi' ')(pi)fiaTa ei\r)<f>a)<i Kai yP^a ttoWmv raXdvjOiv 
Ij^wi', &i> TO /xeV trap eKoi^rioif, to, 8' €K tow oi>ca)i> elcnrpdnei, h tT;? 
fita6(oaeti)<i efto Tfj<{ T/saTreJ"*;? Kal T»)<f aW?;? ovaia^, f)v KaTeXiire 
Ilaaicoi/, ci)(f)ei'\€To €K€ivrp Kal vvu TTapeiXj^aaiv ovtoi, leai ToaavT 
aptjXcoKw^ lia' vfiel'i ijKovaare, ovB^ ttoWc jtoj' /wepo? t'Sj^ Trpoauhfou, 
fiT) oTi Twj/ upyairov, elf to,^ Xeirovpyiaii, o/jbtaf dXa^oiievcreTai Kai 
Tpi7)pap-x^ia^ epei Kal ■^optiylaf. 

Dkmosthrnks, Pro Phormione. 

6. firf oTi Ttiiv dp-)(jiii(iiv. Esphiin tho construction, supplying 
the words necessary to make the sense cleai". 

7. TToXXoaTov. Derive, and show the exact force of this word 
hero. 

H. Write explanatory notes on TaXdvrwv^ Tpir]pap)(^ia<i, '^opr}'^ia<i. 

0. Give an account of tlie plea in support of which this speech 
was delivered ; 

10. Give .some of the indications afforded by this speech for 
determining the date of its delivery. 

c. 

Translate : 

uXXa vt} Aia ovk elffl toiovtoi. AXX' laaaiv vy.&v, w? iyo) vofil^a, 
iroXXoi Kal rov A'orifiov xal tvv 'Ap^^e^tdSijv kuI top XaipeTi/xourov 
eirnroXiov tovtovI, o'l fjied' rj/iepav fi^v iaKvBpwrrdKaai Koi XaKwvi^eiv 
<f>a<Tl Kal Tpi^Q)i>a<; e\ov(Ti Kal dirXai} vTroBeBevTai, iirethciv Bi <rvX- 
Xeyojai Kal (Ht dXXrjXwv yevcovrat, KaKotv Kal aiaypwv obhev iXXei- 
TTOvaf Kai ravra ra Xa/ATrpa Kal veaviKa iariv aviotv " oi) yap '^fieK 
fiapTvpijaofiep dXX>]Xoi^ ; oil yap rai/d^ f.Tai'pcov earl Kol <f)iX(ov ; ri 
Be Kal Beivou ecniv S)v Trapi^erai Kara aov ; Twnofievov <f)aai rtve? 
opav ; rifiei<> Be ^rjB^ ^(f>(fai to 7,apdiTav pLapTvprjaofiev. CKBeBvadai 
doljxdTiov ; tout' eKeivov^ irpoTepov TreiroirjKevai f)fiel<i fiapTvprjcofACV. 
TO ■^elXoi eppd<f)6at ; Ttjv Ke^aXrjv Be y i^fj.ei^ ^ erepov ti Kareayivai 
^'qaop.ev.*' 

Demcsthenes, Contra Cononem. 



11. laaaiu. Give this tenso iti full in all its inoodH. 

12. &v Trape^eTiH. Explain tho construction. 

13. Parse viroBeSeuTat, ^<}>9ai, ippd(f)9ai, Kareayevat, 

14. Wlmt kind of action was brought Ijy the plaintift' in this 
Huit? What reason does ho give for preferring this to the other 
legal course open to liint ? 

15. Write a life of Demosthenes. 

D. 

Translate : 

OlBa Be TTore 'avTov xal KpiTtovoi aKovtravra, «o? yaXeTrou 6 filo<i 
W.dtjvr}(Tiv eiTft'ipBpi ^ovXofiivip ra iavrov irpuTTeiV "Nvi^yap," e<f}r], 
"ifie Tiue<i etv Bixwi ayovaiv, ob)( oti dSiKovvTai utt' ifiov, d\\' on 
vo/xi^ovaiu ^Biou dv fie dpyvpiov reXeaai ^ Trpdyfiara eyeiv." Kat o 

oiKpaTT]';^ tuve fioi, €<f)T), a» Kpirtov, tcvi>a<{ be Tpc<pet<f, iva <toi 
Toiii XvKov^ ttTTo TWf TTpo^aTtou dvepuKCiXTi ;" " KaH /LtaXo," e^ri' 
" fiaXXov yap fioi XvaiTeXel rpe^eiv r^ firj, "Ovk &v o!ii> 0piyfrat<i 
ical &uBpa, otrTt? edeXoi re Kai Bvvano crcv dwepvKeiv Tot»? itri-^^eip- 
owra^ iiBiKelv <Te ;" '"HSe'ft)? 7' dp," '4(f>rj^ "el fit) ^o/Soifirjif, otto)? fih 
eir avTov fie ipwrroiro. li o ; etprj, ov)(^ opav, on troXXffi ^oiov 

iarrt yapi^ofievov o'lep <toI duBpt ■fj direj^^Sofiei'OU (i)<peXet(T6ai ; e3 ladi, 
OTt ela-iv evddBe Ttav toiovtcov dpBpav 01 Trdvv &u (fnXonfirfdeieu «pi\<p 
act ^fjadai." 

Xenophon, Memorabilia, II. 



VOCABULARY. 



aTrepvKeiu, to drive away. 
\t;«TtT6\etj/, to be profitable. 
(f>tXoTifie'i<x9ai, to be ambitious. 



(^tlurationnl iettaHm^nt, (^nintio. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNIVER- 
SITY MATRICULATION. 



GREEK GllAMMAR AND COMPOSLTION. 

SENIOR LEAVING AND HONOR MATRICULATION. 



Examiners : 



( 
1 



A. J. Bkll, MA., Ph.D. 
W. Dalk, M.A. 
J. Fletcher, M.A. 



NoTK. — BrculhiiKjs and acccntx are required. An option ia allowed between 

queaiiona 5 and 6. 

1. Translate into Greek : 

(a) The king himself departed on the same day. 

(b) Did you do that ? Certainly not. 

(c) Some they condemned to exile, others to death. 

(d) He did not conceal bis opinion from the country. 

2. What casts do irapa, Sia, Kara, em respectively govern ? Give 
examples in Greek to illustrate the different meanings of each 
preposition according to the different ca.ses which it governs. 

3. Illustrate, by examples, t'le chief uses of (a) the optative 
mood ; {h) the aorist tense {indicative). 

4. Give examples to show the use of the particle av with the 
indicative, subjunctive and infinitive moods. 

5. Translate into Greek : 

(a) If the enemy do this, we shall deprive them of their ships. 

(J)) It cannot be that he will do it. 

(c) We must remain wherever we are posted. 

{d) I was afraid that he would not succeed. 

(fi) They said that if he were wiser, he would be better. 

(/) Men are less indignant when suffering violence than when 
suffering wrong. 

fOYBF] 



6. Translate into Greek : 

(a) Man must not be honoured before the trutli. 
(6) Let no one enter liere who does not know geometry, 
(tf) You are so foolish that you hope to conquer. 
{(1) They deliberated whether they should approach the city 
by sea or by land. 

(e) He would not be invited, even if he were rich. 

(/) As it is not possible to save the country, let us die for it. 

7. Translate into Greek : 

And after him Mardonius spoke : " Not only, my lor.l, art thou 
the noblest of living Persians, but likewise of tiiose yet unborn 
(fut. part, of elfil). Most true are all the words which thou hast 
spoken. Bat best of all is thy resolve (ho^a) not to let the Greeks 
who live in Europe, and who are a worthless race (arcftcv) mock 
(KaTayeXdoo) us any more, it were indeed a monstrous (Seti'o?) 
thing, if after conquering and enslaving the Assyrians and many 
other mighty nations, not lor any wrong they had done us, but 
only from a wish to increase our empire, we should not then punish 
the Greeks, who have done us such wanton injury. What is it 
that we fear ? Their numbers or the greatness of their wealth ? 
We know the manner of their battle, and how weak their power 
is, for already we have subdued {icaTaaTpk^o) their childi-en who 
dwell in our country." 



(f duration ifprtrntnt, (Bntarjo. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMAEY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



LATIN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 

JUNIOR LEAVING AND PASS MATRICULATION. 



r A. J. Bell, M.A., Ph.D. 
Examiners : \ William Dale, M. A. 
(John Fletcher, M.A. 



'So'YY.. — Candidates will take sections A and B, and any Jive 

questions of section C. 

A. 

Translate into Latin : 

1. He thought that the boy would die, but all the rest 

thought that he would live. 

2. Don't you think that he ought to have forgotten how 

much they had injured him? 

3. I asked him which of his friends was favored by the king? 

4. No one was so cruel as to wish them to be put to the 

sword. 

5. I believe that the government ought to have ascertained 

the position of the enemy. ^ 



6. Translate into Latin : 



B. 



Elated with this victory he encamped that night upon the 
field {locus) of battle, intending upon the following day to go in 
pursuit of the enemy who had immediately withdrawn from the 
neighborhood (locus). At dawn, accordingly, he began the 
march, but had not advanced far, before ambassadors from the 
enemy made their appearance {appareo). Flinging themselves 
at his feet, they implored him with tears in their eyes (Jleo) to 
spare their countrymen. They acknowledged that by the in- 

(OVER.) 



juries they liiul inflicted upon liini they had deserved death ; 
that they hardly dared even to ask for peace. They he},'^ed that 
their offences {malcficUnn) might not prove their ruin (pcrnivicft). 



7. Write down the nom. sing, of nautis, deahn8, oviine, ossis, 
mvneri, plebi, pectore, noetic, virtute, multitudine. 

8. State tlie gender of nouns in question 7, giving tlie rule in 
each ease. 

9. Parse (giving the principal parts of verhs) cadet, caedet, 
jaciere, det, ferret, qiKieratur, qneretur, verere, rictus, vinctus. 

10. Give the principal parts of veto, aiigen, aiideo, tefjo, tcxo, 
rendo, reneo, veto, jaeeo, tollo. 

11. What verbs take ut with auhjun. for the English infinitive ? 
Translate: They ivill uecer -persiuide you not to do it. 

12. State the syntax of verbs oifearxmf. 

Translate: / was afraid that he teas not likely to do you much 
good. 

13. State the common forms for the negative imperative. 
Translate • Do not lose such an opportunity. 

14. What is a dependent question ? 

Translate: Have you, told them the nature oj the danger? 



\~t 



I ' 



I 



Cbiuatton §«Bartimnt, (J^ntario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PKIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



LATIN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 



SENIOR LEAVING AND HONOR MATRICULATION. 



Examiners , 



A. J. Bell, M.A., Ph.D. 
William Dale, M.A. 
John Fletcher, M.A. 



Note — An option is allowed between questions 4 and 5. 



A. 

1. Explain what is meant by {a) objective genitive ; (h) genitive 
of quality ; (c) genitive of definition ; and give in Latin an 
example of each. 

2. Show by examples the various ways in which the present 
jyarticiple in English may be expressed in Latin. 

3. Give examples in Latin to illustrate the different meanings 
of dum and nt. 

4. Translate into Latin : 

{a) We are fighting with an enemy who ought in no wise to 
be spared. 

(h) How few there are who have been, or will be, like him. 

(c) Their answer showed more dating than caution, consid- 
ering the perilous ground on which they stood. 

{d) Whenever he heard anything of this kind, he would 
instantly say that the story was invented by some 
neighbor. 

5. Translate into Latin : 

(a) If he does this, I shall be glad ; if not, I shall take it 
quietly. 

{h) These favors are greater than I can requite. 

[over.] 



I iM 



!ili 



((•) I received the tlianks of parliament and the natit)n for 
havinjj; been alone in not despairinj^ of thu Connnon 
Wealth. 

((/) Whatever his ^uilt, whatever his criminality, no one 
has a rif^ht to indict him in his absence and to con- 
demn him unheard. 

0. When is si followed l)y the indicative, and when by the 
subjunctive mood ? Give examples. 



B. 

Translate into Latin : 

The names of Catilina's associates show how noble were the 
families, how exalted the stations of the men who now prepared 
to plunge into a revolution. Amonf; them were two nephews of 
the dictator Sulla. Autronius and Cassius had been candidates 
for the consulship. Bestia was a tribune elect : even the Consul 
Antonius was suspected of a knowledfjte of tlieir designs. They 
counted upon the support of the men who had been impover- 
ished by Sulla, and hoped to intlame the turbulence which ani- 
mated the dregs of the populace. They expected moreover the 
armed assistance of the veterans who had already squandered 
the possessions they had so suddenly ac(p;ired. They proposed 
to excite against their conquerors the hostile feelings of the 
Italian races. Finally they resolved to seize the gladiators' 
schools at Capua : and some of them would not have scrupled 
to arm even the slaves and criminals. 



)■/ 



ij 



! rl 



(L.) 



(Sdui^ation g^partment, Ontario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



LATIN AUT HORS. 

JITNIOB LEAVING AND PASS MATBICX7LATI0N. 



[A. J. Bell, M.A., Ph.D. 
Examiners : William Dale, M.A. 
(John Fletcher, M.A. 



Note. — Candidates will take all the translation on the paper 
and any two of the questions in each of the sections A, B, 
and C. 



Translate 



A. 



Ariovistus ad postulata Caesaris pauca respondit, de suis virtutibus 
multa praedicavit: Transisse Rhenum sese non sua sponte, sed roga- 
tum et arcessitum a Gallis ; non sine magna spe magnisque praemiis 
domum propinquosque reliquisse : sedes habere in Gallia ab ipsis con- 
cessas, obsides ipsorum voluntate datos; stipendium capere jure belli 
quod victores victis imponere consuerint. Non sese Gallis, sed Gallos 
sibi bellum intulisse ; omnes Galliae civitates ad se oppugnandum 
venisse ac contra se castra habuisse ; eas omnes copias a se uno proelio 
pulsas ac superatas esse. 

1. Parse transisse, arcessitum, consuerint, oppugnandum and 
pulsas, giving the principal parts in each case. 

2. Derive obsides, stipendium, bellum, imponere and civitates. 

3. Rewrite in direct oration from Transisse Rhenum to im- 
ponere consuerint. 



B. 

Translate : 

Caesari omnia uno tempore erant agenda : vexillum proponen- 
dum, quod erat insigne cum ad arma concurri oporteret, signum 
tuba dandum, ab opere revocandi milites, qui paulo longius aggeris 

(OVER.) 



petondi causa procosaoraiit iircosRendi, ncicH iiiBtnioiidn, iiiilitos coliort- 
luuli, sif][mini iltindiiin. Quanim rcrum nmtj;iiiun pniteni teiiiporis 
brevitas et successus et incurHUs lioHtium impodiobat. His difticiiltat- 
il)us duae roH eraiit subsidio, Hcioiitia atque uhuh militiim, quod Kupori- 
oribuH prot'liis exercitati, quid fieri oporteret noii niiiiUH coinniodo ipsi 
sibi praescribere quam ab alii.s docfri pt)tc'rant, ot quod ab opei'o wing- 
ulisquo lo<i[ionibu8 siiigulos legates Caesar discedere, nisi muiiitis 
castris vetuorat. 

4. Parse all tlie words in agfjeris petendi causa processerant 
arceasendi. 

5. Write explanatory notes on vexillum, tuba, aignum, legio 
and legatos. 

6. Give an account of any one of the following events : (a) the 
defeat of the Helvetii, (b) the conference with Ariovistus, (c) the 
fate of the Aduatuci. 



C. 



Translate 



Attulit ipse viris optatum casus honorem. 
Namque furens aninii dum proram ad saxa suburguet 
Interior spatioque subit Sergestus iniquo, 
Infelix saxis in procurrentibus baesit. 
Concussae cautes, et acute in murice remi 
Obnixi crepuere, illisaque prora pependit. 
Consurgunt nautae et niagno clamore niorantur, 
Ferratasque sudes et acuta cuspide contos 
Expediunt, fractosque legunt in gurgite remos. 

7. Scan the last two verses, marking the csesural pause in each. 

8. Show the force of the prefixes in suburguet, concussae, ob- 
nixi, illisa, and expediunt. 

9. Account for the case of viris, aninii, spatio, clamore, and 
cuspide. 



Translate the following, writing notes on the italicized words 
in each : 

(a) Una omnes fecere pedem, pariterque sinistros, 
Nunc dextros, solvere sinus ; una ardua torquent 
Comua detorquentque ; ferunt siui flamina classem. 



fm\ 



(A) Victor! chlainydom uuratani, quain plnrima circum 
Purpura Maeamlnt duplici Mclihoni cucurrit. 

((•) et prinuiH elaiuore secundo 

Hyrtacidao ante omues exit locm Hippocoontis. 



E. 

Tmnslate at sight : 

His tunc cof^nitis robna ainici regis, qui propter retatem eius in 
curatione erant rogni, sive tiniore adducti, ut postea praodicabant, sol- 
licitato oxercitu regio no PotnpeiuH Alexandrian! Aegyptunique occu- 
parot, sive despecta eius fortuna, ut plerumque in calamitate ex ainicis 
inimici existunt, his, (jui erant ab eo rnissi, palam liberaliter respond- 
erunt eumciue ad regem venire juaserunt, ipsi clam consilio inito 
Aebillam, praefectuni rogium, singular! hominem audacia, et L. Sep- 
tiniiuni, tribununi militum, ad interficiendum Pompeiuni miserunt. 
Ab his liberaliter ipse appellatus et quadam notitia Septimii productus, 
quod bello praodonum apud eum ordinem duxerat, naviculam parvu- 
laui conscendit cum paucis suis : ibi ab Achilla et Septimio interficitur. 



Httllicitare, to tamper with. 
lihi'nilitfr, courteously. 
iiotitiii, knowledge. 



prnedo, a pirate. 
oriHnon ducerc, to serve as 
centurion. 



3h. 

oh- 
irid 



)rd3 



# 



(Education ^epartm^nt, Ontario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



LATIN AUTHORS. 

sEirioB LEAvnra and honor matriculation. 



r A. J. Bell, M.A., Ph.D. 
Examiners : -] WiLLiAM Dale, M. A. 
(joHN Fletchek, M.A. 



Note. — Candidates are alloiced an option hetijoeen questions 3 and 
4, and also between questions 9 and 10. 

A. 

Translate: 

diva, gratum quae regis Antium, 
praesens vel imo toUere de gradu 
mortale corpus vel superbos 
vertere funeribus triumphos, 
te pauper ambit soUicita prece 
ruris colonus, te dominam aequoris, 
quicunque Bithyna lacessit 
Carpathium pelagus carina. 
te DacuB asper, te profugi Scythae 
urbesque gentesque et Latium ferox 
regumque matres barbarorum et 
purpurei metuunt tyranni, 
iniurioso ne pede proruas 
stantem columnam, neu populus trequens 
ad arma cessantes, ad arma 
concitet imperiumque frangat. 
te semper anteit saeva Necessitas, 
clavos trabales et cuneos manu 
gestans aena. nee severus 

uncus abest liquidumque plumbum. 

— Horace, Odes, B. I. 

1. Write notes on Antium, praesens, triumphos, sollicita, 
Bithyna, lacessit, Carpathium, Dacus, ScytJuie, Latium. 

(OVER.) 



2. Soan tho first Atanzn, marking tlio quantity of oacli 
syllable. 

M. (liv'o in dotail tho moaninf? of tho abovo passafrc, show- 
InK tho connection of thought. 

4. Define the special cliaracteristics of tlie Odes of Horace, 
illustrating fioni your book where you can. 



B. 

Translate: 

ExiKHiaui enini vobis, Quirites, ux ((uil)UH gencribuH liouii- 
nuui isto) copiu! c'onji)aientur ; deinde Hingniis luedicijwun coiiHilii 
atque oratioius men', si quam potero, atl'erani. I'nuni ^tu'i*^ 
est eorum, qui magno in kih alieno nuijores etiani poHHtiSriioneH 
habent, quarum amore adducti dlHsolvi nullo niodo possiuit. 
Horum hominum species est honestissima ; sunt eiuni loou- 
pletes : voluntas vero et causa inipudentissinui. Tu aj^ris, tu 
ajditiciis, tu argento, tu faniilia, tu rebus oniiubus ornatus et 
copiosus sis, et dubites de possessione detrahere, accjuirere a<l 
iideni ? Quid enini exspectas ? iJellum '? Quid '? Ergo in 
vastatione omnium tuas possessioiios sacrosanctas futuras putas? 
An tabulas novas ? Errant qui istas a Catilina expectant. Meo 
beneficio tabulae novae proferentur, verum auctionariic. Neque 
f^nim isti, qui possessiones habent, alia ratione ulla salvi esse 
possunt. Quod si maturius facere voluissent, necpie, id (juod 
stultissimum est, certare cum usuris fructibus prtediorum, et 
locupletioribus his et melioribus civibus uteremur. 

— Cicero, In Cittilhunn. 

t). Give rules for the mood of comparentur, sis, uteremur. 

6. Write notes on istae, aere alieno, talmlae novae. 

7. " Consilii atque orationis. Henditidys." Explain. 

8. ''Locupletioribus. Predicative." Explain. 

9. Unum genus.. Describe, in your own words, the first 
class of Catiline's supporters. What is Cicero's advice to 
them? 

10. State the object of each of the four orations against 
Catiline respectively. 



\ 



c. 

Tivmsiato ut slp^ht: 

Aiidifo, midito (onHiilom, Judicos, nihil dicain urroguntiiw, 
tuntmn diciiin, totos dies atqiK^ noctt^s do nipuhlica co^it- 
untj'in. Noil uhciuo go L. Catilina rompubllcam despoxit 
at(|iio (MMitomsit, ut ui eopia, quain Hociiin odiixit, so banc 
(uvitiitoin opprosHuruni arhitrarotur. Latins patot illius sce- 
loris (^onta^'io, qnain qnisqnflni pntat : ad ]>lnrc8 pcrtinot. 
Intus, liitiis, iiKinam, est ciinns Trojanus; a quo nunqiiam, 
nio consulo, donniontos opprinioniiiii. Qiuoris a mo, qnid 
oj;o Catiliiiiim motnam. Nihil ; et cnravi, no quis motuorot: 
h<mI copias illins, (luas liic video, dico esse metuendas ; nee 
tnin tiinoiidiis est nunc exorcitus L. (^atilinu\ quani Isti, qui 
iUuni oxorcitnin dosornisse dicuntur. Non enini doseruernnt; 
s(m1 uI) illo in speculis atquo insidiis rolicti, in capito atque in 
cervicibus nostiis rcstitcrunt. 

— Cicoi'o, I'll) Muremi. 

Late pa to re, fte mde-Hprmd ; 

H\)ccuh\, icatrh-fotcer ; YQHto, remain behind. 



\i 



(Bducntion gcprtmcnt, Ontario. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



THE HIGH ij^CHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



FRENCH GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 



JUNIOR LEAVINa AND PASS MATRICULATION. 



IM. S. Clark, B.A. 

Examiners : Uowii Fetch, M.A. 

[joHN Squair, B.A. 



Note. — Candidates will take section A, the first four questions 
of section V>, and any two of the remaining five. 



A. 



Translate into French : 



Molicre, the great French author, was born in Paris in the 
year one thousand six hundred a-nd twenty-two. His father was 
the kinjjt's upholsterer (iapissier) and was probably a rather rich 
man. The son received a good educaition, although not much is 
known of his youth. When he was about twenty years old he 
(organized a company of actors, which was called L' Illustre 
ThMtre. But in this he did not succeed very well. He soon lost 
all his money, and with his troupe was forced to leave Paris and 
make a tour in the provinces. This tour lasted from sixteen 
hundred and forty-six till sixteen hundred and fifty-eight. Dur- 
ing these years he travelled over (parcourir) nearly the whole of 
France, and played in many of the large cities. After his return 
to Paris he became the king's favorite and produced the master- 
pieces for which he is so celebrated. At last after fifteen years 
of great prosperity he died in sixteen hundred and seventy-three 
at tlie age of fifty-one. 

(over.) 



^ B. 

1. Construct appropriate replies to the following, each answer 
to consist of at least twelve words : 

(fl) Aimeriez-vous que le Canada fut partie des liJtats-Unis '? 

(h) Quelle partie de I'annee preferez-vous ? 

(c) N' est-ce pas que I'etude est une helle chose ? 

(rf) Quels sont les plaisirs de campagne que vous aimez le 

mieux ? 
{(') Quels sont les devoirs les plus importants du jeune 

Canadien ? 

2. Translate into French : 

(a) He has not done it yet. 

(b) He has no more of them. ^ 

(c) We have scarcely any left. 

(d) Nobody will be there. 

(e) He has never done anything. 

8. Translate into French : 

(fl) Whom did you bring with you ? 
{h) What did you bring with you ? 

(c) To whom did you give it ? 

(d) Who is yonder in the field ? 

(e) Which of those ladies did you meet ? 



4. Translate into French : s 

(a) Let them go away. 
(h) Be silent. 

(c) Let them not be there. 

(d) The woman died. 

(e) He was born. 
(/) They will run. 
(gf) Do it now. 

(h) Let them be able to do it. 
(t) May he know how to do it. 
(J) That they might know how to do it. 

6. Translate into French : 

(a) I shall do what you are doing. 
(6) I shall give you what you need. 

(c) What did he teU you ? 

(d) He told me what you told him. 
(«) He whom I saw yesterday is dead. 



m\ 



^■M 



6. Translate into French : 

(a) There are three hundred and three men in the field. 
(/>) He came on . the sixth of July, one thousand eight 
hundred and ninety-one. 

(c) He gave me twenty-five franca and eighty-five centimes. 

(d) That man is ninety-seven years old. 

(e) He has two hundred and eighty francs. 

7. Translate into French : 

(a) Canada is our country, let us love it. 

(b) Dogs are faithful animals. 

(c) That sugar costs five cents a pound. 
{d) He comes here Mondays. 

(e) Virtue is always beautiful. 

8. Translate into French : 

(a) Queen Victoria was born on the twenty-foui ih of May 

one thousand eight hundred and nineteen. 
(h) We arrived on Tuesday morning at half-past seven. 

(c) We always rise at five o'clock on Saturday morning. 

(d) He comes Sundays at five in the evening. 

9. Tranulate into French : 

(a) That tree is sixty feet high. 

(b) Our house is twenty-two feet wide by thirty long. 

(c) He earns ten francs a day. 

{d; That house is five feet longer than ours. 

(f) That box is four feet long and t'To feet wide. 



(Kducation ie^artmcnt, Ontario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNL 
VER8ITY MATRICULATION. 



FRENCH GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 

SEllIOIi LEAVING AND HONOR MATRIJULATION. 



Examiners 



M. S. Clark, B.A. 
John Fetch, M.A. 
John Squair, B.A. 



Note. — Candidates will take section A, the first five questions of 
section B, and any two of the remaining five. 

A. 

Translate into French : 

A hungry fox Tvas one day looking for a poultry-yard. It was 
late in the afternoon, and as he was passing a farm house he 
saw a cock and some hens which had gone up into a tree for the 
night. He drew near and invited them to come down and re- 
joice with him on account of a new treaty of peace which had 
been formed between the animals. The cock said he was very 
glad of it, but that ho did not intend to come down before the 
next morning. "Eat," said he, "I see two dogs coming; I have 
no doubt they will be glad to celebrate the peace with you." 
Just then the fox remembered that he had business elsewhere, 
and, bidding the cock good-bye, began to run. "Why do you 
run?" said the cock, "if the animals have made a peace, the dogs 
won't hurt you. I know them, they are good, loyal dogs and 
would not harm any one." " Ah," said the fox, " I am afraid 
they have not yet heard the news." 

B. 

1. Translate into French : 
(a) How long have you lived in this country ? 
(6) I have lived here for twenty years. 

(c) I was at his place for two weeks last summer. 

(d) I have been in London many times. 

(e) He will be here in a fortnight, and will stay for a 

week. (OVER.) 



2. Translate into French : 

(a) I should like to havd some, can you give nic any V 
(6) Will you be so kind as to come to-morrow ? 
(c) "Will you come and see me V Yes, I shall come. 
{dy He will come ; will you come also ? 
(e) Will you send for the doctor ? Yes, I shall send for 
him. 



it 


m\ 


f\ 



3. Translate into French : 

(a) He ought to do it before next week. 

(b) He is to leave for France in a few days. 

(c) I was to have done it but I could not. 

(f/) You ought to have gone to see him when you were 

there. 
(e) My father and mother must have been there. 

4. Translate into French : 

(a) We were not there when you came. 
(6) There used to be very many of them in my father's 
fields. 

(c) When he would go out for a walk he would take a 

book with him. 

(d) When he used to come to our place he would say to 

me. 
(«) When I saw him yesterday I told him. 



5. 



6. 



Translate into French : 

(a) Whatever you do you will never be rich. 

(b) However good you are you will not succeed. 

(c) Whenever you come tell him to wait for me. 

(d) Whenever he came to see me he brought me some- 

thing nice. 

(e) Whoever you are you will not deceive me. 

Translate into French : 

(a) Do you not think you will be there ? 

(6) That does not hinder him from being a gentleman. 

(c) However important the affair is we must go away. 

(d) It is probable your father will be able to prevent 

him from doing it. 

(e) Is it not impossible for our friends to do it ? 



9, 



Translate into Fi'ench : 

(a) You may do it when you come if you wish. 

(b) You may not do it unless you have finished your 

work. 

(c) However foolish I may be I shall not do what they 

desire. 

(d) It may rain ; it looks very much like it. 

(c) That may be so ; I do not know ; ask your father, 

, Translate into French : 
(tt) Do you know whose horses those are ? 
(h) Those are the gentlemen whose horses we saw. 

(c) That is the man whose words I was thinking of. 

(d) I was speaking of what you told me yesterday. 

((') I was thinking of the man you were speaking of this 
morning. 

Translate into French : 

(a) Why did you get your hair cut, in this cold weather ? 

(b) He had his house built on a hill. 

(c) He had a coat made for himself. 

(d) Did that little boy not hurt his hand when he fell ? 

(e) He will not shave himself, he will get himself 

shaved. 



10. Translate into French : 

(a) Nobody will ever do Avhat you said. 

{b) I never saw anything so beautiful. 

(c) I nev^er saw any one who is so foolish as he. 

{d) He never had anything which pleased him so niiuch. 

(e) Did you ever see any one so poor ? Never. 



nt 



[lil 



I 



tt M 



; 



(Educntion icQartment, ODntario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PKIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MARTICULATION. 



FRENC H AU THORS. 

JUNIOB LEAVINa AND PASS MATBICX7LATI0N'. 



c M. S. Clakk, B.A. 
JEacaminers : ^ John Fetch, M.A. 
(jOHN Squair, 3. A. 



Note. — Candidates will take section A, and either section B or 

section C. 

A. 

Translate ; 

Quel homme est ce depute Bowelt ? le connaissez-vous ? 

— Mais un brave homme, a ce que je crois du moins, monsei- 
gneur. 

Le jeune homme, en entendant cette appreciation du caract^re 
de Bowelt faite par I'officier, laissa ^chapper un mouvement de 
d^sappointement si dtrange, de mdcontentement si visible, que 
Tofiicier le remarqua et se hata d'ajouter: 

— On le dit, du moins, monseigneur. Quant k moi, je ne puis 
rien affirmer, ne connaissant pas personnellement monsieur Bowelt. 

— Brave homme, rdp^ta celui qu'on avait appel4 monseigneur; 
est-ce brave homme que vous voulez dire ou homme brave ? 

— Ah! monseigneur m'excusera; je n'oserais ^tablir cette dis- 
tinction vis-ii-vis d'un homme que, je le r^p^te a Son Altesse, je 
ne connais que de visage. 

— Au fait, murmura le jeune homme, attendons, et nous allons 
bien voir. 

L'officier inclina la tSte en signe d'assentiment et se tut. 

1. le connaissez-vous (1.1)? Translate: I know him and 
his brother. 

2. ne connaissant pas . . . monsieur Boxvelt. Translate : I 
don't know those gentlemen but I know their names. 

3. Point out the various uses of que in the extract. 

(OVEE.) 



j^mm'^ 



, I'oifcct Subjunctive, 
the Present lo^^^"^ 
4 se h<Ua. Change into ^^.^^^^ 



of 



ottne ruv".^ 
/aite, at-ait aj^p^t^- 




-TP'^^a ^ture rouge et la ^_ . 

.e faS^»ft;r"S^^^^^^^^^^^^ avait .t6 rude 
figure <=atoe et de es ^ou ^^ p„^j,ig„„ a |a ;» » tait tomb« 

'- ~ ^* - ;;;' '!„, t.. ^nW a relaU. e... ^^_^^, 
6. N.- .»«« r« <";• ^„^„„. Parse ea«h ot the 



■words. 



7.^. ■«!«-—■■ the grammatical 

^iS^yru^iuniirultitutlonf,^^^^^^ ..„„, ,„„, 
ehauges you ^ „„«9U»t. "a 






10. Givu tho fii'Ht perHon, Binj^iilar aiul plural, of the Present 
and the Preterite Definite Indieative and of the Present Hubjunc- 
tive of the following verbs : effiu^dt, avail para, »'^tait-il lUt, par- 
rcnaitf/aiHait. 



c. 

Translate : 

"Bonjour, vieux! dit Tautin, en tendaut la main u Pigault. 
Quel Iton vent famine? 

— Uu service que je viens te deinander. 

— Merci ! c'eat fait! luais parle vite! tu vols que nous n'al- 
lons pas coucher ici ! 

— Je viens te deuiander un passage. 

— Pour toi ? 
-Non, pour un ami. 

— Tu sais ou nous allons ! 

— Au S(5n6gal, m'a-t-on dit ? 

— Juste! c'est la que veut se rendre ton monsieur ? 

— Oui . . c'est-iVdire non ! 

— Eh bien! il ne tient pas precisc^ment k faire un aussi long 
voyage . . mais il faut qu'il le fasse. 

— Ah ! je comprends ! c'est un indiscipline, k qui I'on man- 
age un tour du monde . . de correction. 

— Non ! reprit vivement Jean Pigault, c'est au contraire un 
trcs bon enfant. Mais il est la cause de grandes divisions dans 
la famille. 

— Entre le pfere et la m6re ? 

— Pas pr(5cis(5ment, mais entre le mari et la femme et on le 
sacrifie pour avoir la paix ! 

* « « » « 

— On ne pent rien lui apprendre. 

Et personne ne veut comprendre que I'eUve Maugendre a 
appris i\ hve en plein bois, par dessus l'(5paule de Clara, et que ce 
n'est pas la mSme chose que d'dtudier la gt^omdtrie, sous la ferule 
d'un pion hirsute. 

Voilk pourquoi I'^Uve Maugendre d^gringole de I'^tude des 
moyens dans I'^tude des petits. 

C'est qu'il y a une singulifere difference entre les leqons du 
Magister de Corbigny et celles de MM. les professeurs du college 
de Nevers, 

Toute la distance qui s^pare un enseignement en bonnet de 
peau de lapin, d'un enseignement en toque d'hermine. 

Le pfere Maugendre se desespfere. 



II lui seniblo que le torestior eii bicorno s'uloigiie t\ grander 
enjambJes. 

11. Vieux (1. 1). GivG the French of an old tree, an old woman. 

12. Un aenice que je riena te dcmnnder. Ro-writo, BuhHtitiit- 
inj5 ton frere for te and chanj^in^? je rienit to tho prcHcnt perfect. 

18. pour un ami {\. 8). TnuiHlato : For an old friend of mine. 

14. I'elice a ajtjrria. Translate : The lePHons wliich Clara has 
learned. 

15. Give the first person singular of the Imperfect, the Preter- 
ite Definite and the Future Indicative, also the first and second 
persons plum I of the Present Subjunctive of the following? verbs : 

t'amAne, tu sais, comprendre, veut, lire. 



1 1 



(6(lucntion jQrpnrtm^nt, ^Dntnrio. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, IH91. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL rillMAllY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VEIISITY MATRICULATION. 



FRENCH AUTHORS. 



SEinOR LEAVINQ AND HONOR MATRICULATION. 



r M. S. Clark, B.A. 
EjcaminerH:^ John Fetch, M.A. 
(jOHN S(iUAIIt, B.A. 



Note. — CaudklateH icill take section A, and either Hection B w C. 

A. 

Tnuislntc : 

II taut vous lai88cr cnformer, vos compngnons et vous, 
Jiisqu' uu moment oii jo jugcnii convenablo de vous rendro 
la libci't6. 

— Vous ^tcs lo ma!trc, lui r(''poiidis-jc, on Ic regardant flxe- 
nicnt. Mais puis jc vous adrcsscr une question ? 

— Aucuuo, Monsieur. 

Sur CO mot, je n'avais pas k discuter, mais k ob6ir, puisque 
toute rdsistaiicc efit did impossible. Je descendis a la cabiiie 
qu' occupaicnt Ned Land et Conseil, et je leur fis part de la 
determination du capitaine. Je laisse fi penser comment 
cette communication fut recue par le Canadien. D'ailleuis, 
Ic temps man(iua k toute explication. Quatre hommcs de 
Tc^-quipage attendaient i\ la porte, et ils nous conduisirent a 
cette cellule oij nous avions passd notre premiere nuit a 
bord du Nautilus. 

Ned Land voulut r^clamer, mais la porte se ferma sur lui 
pour toute response. 

** Monsieur me dira-t-il ce que cela signifie ?" me demanda 
Conseil. 

Je racontai k mes compagnons ce qui s'dtait pass6. lis 
furent aussi ^tonn^s que moi, mais aussi peu avanc^s. 

1. laisser enfermer. Translate: 11 faut vous f aire enfermer 

(OVER.) 



2. Jusqu' au moment oii, eAt ^M, je leurJiH part, mm rendre la 
lU}erM, ce que cela Htgnifie. Give an equivalent French ex- 
pression for eacli of these. 

3. Aucune, Mnmieur. Supply the ellipsis in full. 

4. Je descendis d la cahine. Translate : My companions (f.) 
have gone down to the cabin. 

5. c\ cette csllule oil noun avions poxx4, etc. Givp an equival- 
ent French expression for ou. Re-write the whole expres- 
sion, substituting occupi for pasni. 

6. Uh nous conduidrent, la porfe se ferma. Change each of 
these into the Present Perfect tense. 



B. 

Translate : 

Cabovbsat, metfant la lettre dans sa jwche. — De quel diable 
de d6faut a-t-il voulu me parler ? (Blanche 2)arait habilUe.) 
Tiens ! tu as fait toilette ? . . . , tu vas sortir ? 

Blanche, revenant par le premier plan d droite. — Qui, je 
dois, depuis longtemps, une visite k notre voisine, madame de 

Vercelles C'est une famille tr^s-influente et tr6s-port6e 

pour ton Election je prendrai la voiture. 

Caijoussat. — Un mot seulement Blanche, as-tu quel- 

quefois song6 a te marier ? 

Blanche, sournoisement Moi?. . . .jamais, papa ! 

Caboussat. — Enfin, s'il se pr6sentait un parti honorable . . 
un bon jeune homme affectueux, range jamais de li- 
queurs excepts dans son cafe .... 

Blanche, d part. — Monsieur Edmond ! 

Caboussat. — Eprouverais-tu quelque repugnance ? 

Blanche, vtmment. — Oh ! non ! c'est-a-dire je ferai 

tout ce que tu voudras. 



La vieille Lisbeth eta it venue voir ; son men ton tremblo- 
tait elle, n'osait approcher, et je I'entendais qui recitait 1' Ave 
Maria tout bas. Sa frayeur me gagnait lorsque I'oncle s'ecria : 

<' Lisbeth, ^ quoi penses-tu done? Au nom di ciel, es-tu 
folle ? Cette femme n'est-elle pas comme toutes los femr.ies, 
et ne m'as-tu pas aid6 cent fois dans mes operations? Aliens, 
aliens . . .maintenant la folic reprend le dessus. Va . . chauffe 
de lean ; c'est tout ce que je puis esp6rer de toi." 

Le chien s'^tait assis devant I'alcove, et regardait, k travers 
ses polls frisds, la femme 6tendue sur le lit, immobile et pale 
comme une morte. 



"Fritzel, me dit I'oncle, ferrae les volets, nous aurons 
moins d'air. Et vous, Koffel, faites du feu dans le fourneau, 
car d'obtcnir quelque chose maintenant de Lisbeth, il n'y faut 
pas penser. Ah ! si parmi tant de mis^res nous avions encore 
le boil esprit de rester un peu calmes ! Mais il faut que tout 
s'on m61e : quand le diablc est en route, on ne salt plus ou il 
s'arrfitera." 

Ainsi parla I'oncle d'un air desol6. Je courus fermer les 
volets, et j'cntendis qu'il les accrochait k I'int^rieur. En re- 
gardant vers la fontaine, je vis que deux nouvelles charettes 
do morts partaient. Je rentrai tout grelottant. 

7. a-t-U voulu me parler. What is the force of this tense 
here? 

8. Moi f . . . jamais, papa I Supply the ellipsis. 

9. Elle n'omit approcher. Give a list of verbs with which 
2)as is usually omitted. 

10. Et je I'entendiH qui r^citait. Express otherwise. 

11. d quoi pemes-fti done ? Translate : Think of me, old 
fellow ; also, The lady of whose boy I was thinking. 

12. Give the participles, and the .3rd Person Singular of 
the simple tenses of the Indicative and of the Subjunctive 
Mood of any three of the following verbs ; voir, s'dtait asm, 
obtenir, il faut, ferai, voudras. 



C. 



li 

J, 

3, 
c 

rs 
le 



Translate : 



Caboussat, d jjart. — D6cid6ment ce jeune homme-i^ ne 

nous convient pas du tout D'abord, il a un defaut. . . Je 

ne sais pas lequel mais c'est presque un vice. 

Blanche. — Eh bien, papa et cette communication ? 

Caboussat. — ¥0111*1 ce que c'est une b^tise un en- 

fantillage Poitrinas ne s'est-il pas mis dans la t^te de te 

marier k son fils Edmond .... 

Blanche. — Ah ! vraiment ? 

CabousSx\t. — Tu ne le connais pas je vais te le d6peindre 

. . . . Ce n'est pas un mauvais sujet . . . mais il est chauve, my- 
ope, petit, commun. .avec un gros ventre. . 

Blanche. — Mais papa 

Caboussat. — Ce n'est pas pour t'influencer. . ..car tu es 

parfaitement libre De plus, il lui manque trois dents 

par devant. 






Blanche Oh ! par exemple ! 

Cahoussat. — De plus . . . il a un defaut . . un d6faiit 6norme 

. . . qui est presque un vice 

Blanche, ejfmy^e — Un vice, monsieur Edmond ! 
# # « * 

Puis le mauser s'61oigna, serrant de nouveau la main de 
I'oncle ; on le voyait comme en plein jour marcher dans la 
rue d6serte. Enfin il disparut au coin de la ruelle des Orties, 
et, le froid 6tant tres vif, nous renti mes tous en nous sou- 
haitant le bonsoir. 

L'oncle, sur le seuil de ma chambre, m'embrassa et me dit 
d'une voix strange, en me serrant sur son coeur* 

" Fritzel .... travaille travaille . . . . et conduis-toi bien, 

cher enfant !" 

II entra chez lui tout 6rau. 

Moi, je ne pensais qu'au bonheur de garder Scipio. Une 
fois dans ma chambre, je le fls coucher i\ mes pieds, entre le 
chaud duvet et le bois de lit ; il se tenait Iti tranquille, la 
t6te entre les pattes ; je sentais ses flancs se dilater douce- 
ment k chaque respiration, et je n'aurais pas chang6 mon sort 
centre celui de I'empereur d'Allemagne. 

Jusque pass6 dix heures, il me fut impossible de dormir, en 
songeant a m:* f^licite. L'oncle allait et v^nait chez lui ; je 
I'entendis ouvrir son secretaire, puis fai? • du feu dans le 
poele de sa chambre pour la premi6re fo's a- i ''.iver ; je pen- 
sai qu'il avait I'id^e de veiller, et je flnib y-'V m'endormir 
profond6ment. 

13. Jm ne sais pas lequd. Show by short sentences the 
various uses of lequel. 

14. de te marier d sonfils Edmond. Translate : Blanche is 
not going to marry his son Edmond. 

15. serrant de nouveau la main de I'oncle. Translate : The 
Mauser and uncle are shaking hands. 

16. en me serrant sur son coeur. Wh'* not le coeur. Trans- 
late : Uncle kissed me on the forehead. 

1 7. pas chang4 mon sort. Translate : Do you believe that 
I have traded dogs with Jack ? 

18. Write the Participles, and the 3rd Person Singular of 
the simple tenses of the Indicative and of tho Subjunctive 
Mood of any three of the folloM'ing verbs : 

disparut, conduis-toi, je sentais, ouvrir, je sais, dipeindre. 



(Education icpartment, (©ntario. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



It 

of 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



GERMAN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 

JUNIOR LEAVING AND PASS MATRICJTLATION. 



[M. 8. Clark, B.A. 

^jjflwt'nera .- j John Petoh, M.A. 

(John Squair, B.A. 



Note. 



Candidates will take the first six .questions, and ttvo 
of the others. 



1. Decline throughout, the German equivalents of the follow- 
ing : 

Such a man ; 
The poor woman ; 
Our largest house ; 



(o) 

(c) 
id) 
(e) 1 poor boy. 



Poor old dog , 



2. Give, with the definite article before each, the nominative 
singular and plural of ten of the following : Thar, liegen, Ant- 
wort, Butter, Abe7id, Geschichte, Heer, Zeit, 3and, Hand, Wun- 
der, Name, Herz, Avpe. 

3. Write out : 

(rt) The singular of the present indicative active of essen, 
niiissen, lassen, helfen, tvissen ; 

(b) The 2nd person singular of the imperative, and of the 
imperfect subjunctive of — stehen, helfen, kommen, 
einladen, b9tzcn. 

4. Give Geru.an for — (a) in order that, (6) as soon as, (c) not 

only but also, {d) in this manner, (e) a month ago, (/) for 

your sake, (.9) along the shore, Qi) for Mary's sake, (i) I have been 
permitted to sing, (J) He ought to have come, {k) He would have 
become, (e) She will have been praised, (m) We could not have 
remained, (w) I shall have to ride, (o) My watch has stopped. 

(over.) 



5. Translate : 

{(i) I know one of the gentlemen at the door, but I cannot 
remember his name. 

(b) Yonder is the river ; on this side stands my house, on 

that side, his. 

(c) If anything else is needed the good lady herself should 

be applied to. 
((/) Had you gone away without his seeing you he would 

have been very sorry. 
(e) Whose is the book you are speaking of? It is your 

brother's. 



f 



1 

I'h 



m 



6. Translate : 

(a) When is the coldest weather in this country ? 

(ft) I had already put on my hat and was just on the point 

of going out. 
(c) You should never forget to thank those who help you. 
{(l) It is better to say nothing when one ''oesn't know what 

to say. 
(e) Our teacher insists on our writing a German exercise 

every day. 

7. Translate any six of the following : 

(a) I saw him going to school. 

(h) In riding to the country we met him walking to town. 

(c) He came running to me showing me his hand. 

(d) It is pleasant driving and conversing with a friend. 

(e) The man sitting looking out of the window. 
(/) People rely on his getting it. 

(g) In helping others we find the pleasure of doing good. 
(h) Forgiving and loving is more noble than hating. 
(i) Eeading the writing is more fatiguing than amusing. 
(;■) Are you thinking of going to college in the full ? 

8. Write at least forty words in German on either of the fol- 
lowing subjects : 

(a) What I shall do during the summer. 

(b) The last story I read. 

9. Translate : When the master came home for the first time 
from the morning walk the day seemed to him very long, which 
had seemed to him so short before, when he used to sleep late. 

10. Translate : Six times in the last fourteen days I have 
climbed at night over the wall and waded through the moat close 
to your gate, and nobody perceived me. 



11. Translate : But Doctor Muller concluded very gravely with 
these words : Whoever approaches princes, him the people stamp 
at once as a man of influence, do what he will. 

12. Translate: I have been told there are in this town two 
books, a red one and a black one ; in the red book the adherents 
ot tlie new order enter their names, in the black one its oppon- 
ents Jiave to inscribe theirs. 

13. Show how words are formed in German, giving one exam- 
pie with each of the following suffixes, and writing the examples 
on the tollowmg model : 

Fmcht, fruit ; fruchthar, fruitful : 

'turn, 'ling, 4cht, 'eln, 'en, 'ha/t, 'ung, 'lei, neren, -ei. 



/ 



'M 


:% 


m 


1 i 


s'f 


I 1' 



/ 



(Sduiiation gitprtment, Ontario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMAEY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VEE8ITY MATRICULATION. 



GERMAN AUTHORS. 



JUNIOR LEAVZNG AND PASS MATBICUI.ATION. 



Examiners : 



M. S. Clark, B.A. 
JohK Fetch, M.A. 
John Squair, B.A. 



Note. - Candidates will take section A, and either section B or 

section C. 



Translate : 

Cinft (c6 tear fiirj nod) ineliier S3er^elrati)ung) beieigte nielne grau ^ufi 
(iiif bit 3agb 5U get)cn. 3ci) ritt boran, mn ettvad aufju)ud)en, iiiib e9 batierte 
iiid)t longe, fo ftanb mein ^iiiib bor einer ^ette bon einigen ^uiibert^&l)uern. 
3d) toarte iniiner iinb iinincr auf meine ^rau, bie mit meinein l^ieutenant unb 
eiiiein 9teitfncd)te glcid) nad) inir toeggeritten toar ; 9lieinanb aber toar )u fei)cn 
nod) ill ll;l^ren. (fiiblid) tverbe id) unrul)ig, fei)re urn, unb nngcfd^r auf ber 
Ajalftc bc6 SBcgeS l)5re Id) cin augerft fiaglid)e6i SBlnfcln". (£9 fd)len niir 
jieinlid) nat)e ju [cin, unb boc^ toar toeit unb breit fcine lebenbige Seele p 
erblid'eu. 

3>d) ftieg ab, legte mein Dt)r auf ben S3oben, unb nun l)5rte id) nid)t nur, 
bag bice 3aininern^ u»'*er ber ©rbe 'max, fonbeni crfannte aud) ganj beutlid) 
bie (Stimme u'.winer gran, nieined lieutenants unt nieined 9leitfned)t&. 3ugleid) 
fat) id) aud), bag ni^t toeit bou mir bie Deffnung einer <Steinfoi)lengrube toar, 
unb e9 blieb mir nun leiber fein S'veifel me^r, bag mein armed 9Beib unb it)re 
SBcgleiter ba l)ineingeftiirjt* toaren. 

^ From klagen, to lament. * piteous cry. 



moanmg. 



* from stwrzen, to fall. 



1. Give the rules for the position in the sentence of such words 
as voran, um, and ab. 

2. Decline in the Singular and Plural, with the definite article 
prefixed, Ohr aud Weib ; also decline Niemand. 



3. Compare kurz, nahe, armes. 



(over.) 



I !! 



1 


I 


i_. 


J h 


-■■J 




*• 1 
' 1 




'*' 1 




r-1 


!; 



>■'. ' ' 



II!' i I 
I i 



4. Give the 3rd Person Singular of the Present Indicative, and 
the 2nd Person Singular of the Imperative, of litt, aehen, stieg, 
sah, erkannte. 

5. Give the Ist Person Singular of the Present Perfect Indic- 
ative Active of werde, gehen, warte, atieg ah, blieb. 



B. 

Translate: 
■ 'iikl tliircd)tc6 tl)at ®trl).i * 9tid)»rin Jiid)t, er tl)at nur and) ni(J)t6 
>Hcd)tcd. 3t^enl (Jiiifall, jtbcr !i^aiinc DtS «iirteiiblid'c6 flab er fid) bin; Wcfc 
(Sinfdllc abtr Relen, feltfam gemig, iiiemald ouf bie VIrbcit, \xKldft im ^liiflcn- 
blicf jw boUfiil)icn briiigenb ^ioth war. SiJcnu c6 gait, in ber 25>cbcrcl iuid)ju- 
Kben, bann l)atte cr bie grbfite iiuft, auSjurcitcn, unb »»enn er auffi^eii follte ju 
eiiiem fltitt iiad) ben beiiaft)barteii CWrafeiifd)l5fferii in Siicilbnrg, iCiUenburg 
obcr SiraunfelS, loo oft bebentcnbe ®efd)afte ab,in|"d)licRcn wann, bann bciiid)te 
c8 il)in »jiinberfd)&n bci ben SyebfHi^len. Stanben .ftdnfer im Syaareulager, 
bann fd)aiite SReifter fltid)tt)in h)Ol)l bHrd)'ft genfter feinen bbfen SJuben ^n, 
fann loie er lt)rer llnart bod) and) eininal h)ei)ren looUe, bcrgaB aber barl'iber 
geraume 3eit bie ^nnben nnb rebetc fie iuleljtinit grimmiger toSterlid)er«trengc 
an nnb fnt)t- niit ber @Ue inS ^tiiQ. aid tooUe er bie Adufer ftatt ber S5uben 

priigeln. 

****** * 

„9Rein lieber SDoftor SJiiUler! Gr inng ftd) nid)t einbilben, baft id) 3l)u 
n^egen Seiner dr}tlid)en ^unft ju meinein ^eibniebicud ernannt i)abe. 3d) 
n)ei^, bag &r anf Uniberfitdten nid)td gelernt l)at. ^Uein bie !r)oftore8 finb 
aUci'ammt 6i)arlatan6, unb ujer, gleld) 3l)m, feine ^rajiS friegt, ber furirt 
wenigfteuS Sliemanben ju Sobe, unb ift alfo faft in feiner <lrt ber Siefte. tiieil 
(5r aJlutterioilj unb ©efd)eiben^eit \)ai, baruin foil ©r mein ifeibar^t fcin, nid)t 
wegen Seiner SBiffenf(f)aft, uin \otld)t id) mid) ben 2eufel fflmmere. 3(i) laffe 
bie SItatnr n)alten, aid ben grSgten Slrjt, unb ^r foil mir uid)t brein ref^en (2:9 
ift altl)err5mmlid) an unferm ^ofe, bag ber geibmebicud jeben SKorgen ))rdcl9 8 
Ul)r im .ftabinette bed ^iirften erfd)eint, unb ba id) nad) altem S5raud) nun 
mieber einen Seibmebicud t)abe, fo n)iU id) 3t)n and) jeben ^^{orgen jur red)ten 
Stunbc toor mir fel)en. 3m Uebrlgen ffimmere (£r fid) nid)t uin meine ®efunb- 
l)cit unb fd)U)eige er bid id) 3i)n frage. €ei Sr tlug, ftille unb befd)cibeu, 
mein lieber !Doftor, unb Gr fann Sein ®liirf mad)en." 

6. Explain the grammatical relation of the clauses : 
(a) Wenn ee gait in der Weherei nachzusehen. 
{b) Standen Kdufer im Waarenlager. 

7. Wer, gleich Ihm, keine Praxis kriegt. (o) What is wer here ? 
(h) What could bo substituted for it? (c) How is wer more 
commonly used ? (d) If it vt^ere so used in the above clause, 
what would be the arrangement of words ? 



/I 



I 



8. Give, with the def. article preceding the Norn, and Gen. 
Sing, and Plur. of any five of the following nouns : - 

Kunat, Univerdtdten, Doktor, Leibarzt, Wisaenachaft, Hofe, 
Kabinette, Fiiraten, Branch, Augenblick, Orafendchloaaern, 
Kunden. 

9. Give (a) Mood and Tense, (6) principal parts, and 
(c) the 3rd Sing. Pres. Indie. Act. of any /we of the following 
verbs : that,^ gait, standen, sann, fuhr, vergass, ahzmchliessen, 
erscheint, sehen, schweige. 



C. 

Translate : 
Da ivebte iinb wimineltc eft nun niif einmal in beiii iStSMd)eii tvie in einem 
Vlinci|cnt)aufcn, i»cnn tin ^nabc mit beni Storf l).ineinft5ftt ; &enn bie fonft fo 
fricbfamen i'urrtcrflil)ltcn rool)!, iwatt e& l)clBe, g16 fiicafli^renbe SJlad)t auf blc 
^^iii)ne ;^u treten. 3n ben .^ranUdben nnb ^crfftdtten mar aUgemriner ^eier« 
tag, anf ben @affen bagcgen, in ben <Sd)enfen, ini 3ciidt)0ii9, im 9tatt)t)aud 
tpic"nld)t minbcr in» 3latl)0fpilcr njogtc 'Jung nnb *lt ge|'d)aftl9 bur(l)einanber. 
(fin 3eglid)cr battc %[h\t, aaarnungen unb ^ropl)Cjclnngen In bcr Jafd)e, 
Scber ivolUe reben, Ginlge fogar l)5rcn, maft ittnbere rebcten, nnb bora Scf)uftcr- 
jungcn bid jnni SBiirgernieifter cr|d)iencn Wlie al8 gcborene .^eerffi^rer unb 
Staatdnuinner, beren ®abcn bi&l)er niir berborgen gernl)t. SJorab aber gait 
cd aid bad 3cid)tn clne9 »Da()ren f^atrloten, boUlg ju bergcffen, bag c8 nod) 
Irgcnb ein anbcr !Ding In ber Siiclt gtbc alfi ble brol)cnbc gel)bc mIt bem !Dad)ft 
unb I'elnen <3picgge|ellcn. 



Dranf ber il5nlg grclft nad) bcni ffled)er fd)ncll, 
3n ben Strubel ll)n fd)leubcrt l)lnein : 
,,Unb fd)affft bu ben S}cd)er rair iolcbcr jur Stell', 
<go foUft bu bcr trefflld)fte atltter rair fein, 
Unb I'oUft fie aid &l)gemal)l l)eut' nod) umarnien, 
!JDIe je^t fiir bid) bittct mit jarteni erbannen." 

Da ergrelft'8 ll)m ble Scele mit ^inimeldgcloalt, 

Unb ed bll^t and ben ^ngen it)m fiil)n, 

Unb er fiehet erroten ble fd)5ne ®eftalt, 

Unb flet)t fie erblcld)en unb finfen t)lH ; 

Da trelbt'd ll)n, ben foftlld)en ^reld -ju erioerbcn, 

Unb ft&rjt t)lnnnter auf litfeben unb <iterben. 

aSol)! !)5rt man ble ©ranbung, n)Ol)l fel)rt ftc jurlicf, 

Sle bertiinblgt ber bonnernbe ®d)all; 

Da biicft fid)'d binunter mit llebenbera ©lid-, 

6d foramen, ed foraraen ble SSaffer all, 

gie ranfd)en berauf, fie raufd)en niebcr, 

Den Siingllng brlngt fclned ftlcber. 



■4^|ak><*¥-<- 



.. • *••-/ Give the force of 

Tell how it come8 to luive its sp ^^^ 

,, Give y,mtUAet,u'mcVVC^^I,^l°^ „„„„«: 

gtaUen, K(Mwk»ki, , a- „ at the Pres. nnd 

,3. Give the Infinitive, the 3rd Smg. ^^ ^^ „, ,^, 

. i^perf I»dic. Act v« Jd *e P«^t p ^^,^ ^„„. 



/ 



n;: 



(Sdumtion irpnrtmeni, ^ntarjo. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 18«1. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VER8ITY MATRICULATION. 



GERMAN AUTHORS. 



SENIOR LEAVINa ANT) HONOR MATRI0X7LATI0N. 



Examiners : 



M. 8. Clark, B.A. 
John Petch, M.A. 
John Bquair, B.A. 



Note. — CaruUdates idll take section A and eitJier section BorC. 

A. 

Translute: 

iJiad) finder ^cit fain S^aforoff ^irl'irf, fct^te fid) an ttn 51fd) »nb bcflonn 
5l)cc sn trintcn, alo ob cr ben flan^tn Sanioanir (Il)etnia|d)inc) lecrcn tooUtc. 
Tie bcibcn 4^ri'ibcr fahcn il)m id)\vciflcnb ^u nnb Ulrtobi beobad)tctc SJatcr unb 
biitcl mit i>crftol)lciicn S^licfcn. 

,,3inb 5ieiucit rtcflanflcn?" frafltc ^Jlifolai enblld). 

,,iMo f,\\ bcm Sumpf am (fnbc 3ibrcb (J|pcnUH'ilbd)vn6. 3ct) bnbc flinf 
obcr |*cd)0 i!iHiffcrfd)uc).>fcn anfflcjaflt. !C» tijnnttft fie fd)ieBcn, iJtrfabi." 

,,<Bk finb »»ol)l tcin !Jaflcr ?" 

„^kin." 

„3ic bcfdiaftigcn fid) KoryiflOiftifc mit g!ib»)fif?" frogte ^»aul. 

,,3a, i'lbcrhaiipt mit ^iatiini>if|cnfd)afttn." 

,,3^n bcr Ict^tcn 3cit lfilc» bic Okimancn In biefcn 81Mffenfd)aftcn Qxo^t 
J'5prtfd)rittc 9cmad)t l)abcn?" 

,,Vi:.nbing{» ! VInf bicfcm CWcbict finb bic ITcntf^cn nnfrc 8cl)rmtiftcr," gab 
iVifaroff nad)iaffig jnr «nt)port. 



Die von dem Parlamente erlaasene Navigations-Acte, 
wonach-«bei Strafe der Confiscation von Schiff und Ladling 
Auswilrtige fortan keine andern Waaren als selbst erzeugte 
nuf eigenen Schiften nach England bringen dUrften," ver- 
sctzte dem Holiandischen Zwischenhandel einen furchtbaren 
Schlag. Als die geforderte ZurUcknahme verweigert wurde, 
brach der Krieg aus, den Cromwell eben so sehr wUnschte, 
als ihn die Generalstaaten gern vermieden batten. 

(OVER.) 



iff 



1. Setztfi sirfi an ih'ii Tisch. Tniiis|jit(5 : IIo is sitting at tlu' 
table. At tiil)lo ho l« alway.s iimrry. 

2. »S'/V sind irnid bh) Jinji-i-. (iiv(^ tlic foi'co of /rr>A/ lioro. 
(Hvo with oxaiiiplos oth'M- usos of this woi'd. _) 

X Trausluto; I am not an lOiiK'lisliiiian but n K''i>>iiiH^ 
Prussian. 

4. Wntutfh hci SfniJ't' . . . (livo the phiMso for whicli n-oiuich 
stands hiM'O. Whon ninst siicli forms as wmuich bo iisodV 

f). W(nun'h lu'.'i Sti-nfe . , . den (Jroinircll ehen so sehr iriUixcUte. 
According' to what riilo aro thoso rohitivc chuises (;onstriict- 
ed witli rofoiciKio to thoir rospoctivo antocodciits V 

(5. Give tlio 2nd Person Sin^ii' ^' tlie Injporativo and tlic 
rm|)orfcct Subjunctive of he<jan. , jikan, schiessen, erltissen, 
hrm'h. 



Transhite: 

(n) 3>bn (fliiirtclt). 



B. 



,(l a r 1 . 



(fine (Jin))fcl)limrt nn ben ,?:tcmi ^U'pfcffor, iiiib \m unirtcn niit bcm .\laffcc 
auf il)ii. (.ftotTab. j 

I Obcrft. Sinn, baft il^artcii unir flcrabc iiid)t iibtl)!^, \w l)abcii ja s\i^ 

' tnnitcn. 

« b c I () c i b . SUlciiic 3ba nod) niri)t. 
Jba. «tiU'. 

Vlbclbeib. Syarnin bat cr fid) nnr al6 (Sanbibat nnfftcllcn Ini'fcn ? 
Gr I)at ol)ncbie6 eJcfd)aftc flcniifl. 

Obcrft. t.m gl)rrtci^ , ll)r ^tflbd)cn. 3n bicfcn Inn^cn .iwicn ftcctt 

bcr 3cnfcl bc& Ghrflciico, fr trcibt fit, \vic bcr !t)anH)f bic ^ocomotibcn. 

3 b a. Sicin, ^^atvT, cr l)at bnbci nid)t an fid) acbad)t. 

D bcr ft. I)ad ftcUt fid) !ticl)t fo nacft bar: id) will (Sarricrc niad)cn, 
obcr: id) \\s\\[ cln gcfcicrtcr SJiaiui wcrtcn. iDafl gcl)t fcincr lu. Da fonuncn 
bic flutcn ;^rcnnbc unb fagcn: (£& ift %\\\M flcgcn bic gntc Sad)c, bafj bu— co 
ift cin l<crbrcd)cn gcflcn bcin 3jlatcrlanb, iocnn bii nid)t— bir ift co ciu Dpfcr, 
abcr mir forbcrn c6 ;— unb fo ipirb bcr (ii tdfcit cin l)iibfd)cr *J)tantcl nnirtcl)angcn 

unb bcr ©al)lcanbibat fpringt l)crbor, uatiirlid) and rcincuj ^<atriotionuio 
«c()rt eincn altcn Solbatcn nid)t bic Siiclt fcnncii. mx, licbe «bcll)cib, fit^cn 
rnl)i8 unb lad)cn iibcr bicfc Sd)ipad)cn. 

5t b e 1 1) c i b . Unb crtragcn fie mit 9iad)fid)t, \u\\\\ uMr cin fo giitigcft 
.^crj t)abcn iDic Sie. 

D b c r ft. 3a, (frfa()run9 uiad)t flug. 

(6) So grosse Ursachen aber die Stadt Antwerpen hatte, 
die Spanier aus ihren Mauern entfernt zu halten, so wichtigc 
GrUnde hatte der spanische Feldherr, sich derselben, um 



f 



\i 



wolcliou Pr(»is (vs jiuch sol, zii h(»milclitlpMi. An d(Mn Bositzo 
dicMcr Sfadt liiii^ ^icvviHsfM'iiiassoii (l(!r Bosltz dcs pmzcii 
lii'iilninfisclMMi liMiulf's, w(d(!h(vs slcli ^r(5s.st(Mifli(Mls dmvli 
dit'scMi KfMial mit (Jcrh'ciihi uiis Scolaiul vcMsor^fo, uiid 
durch Fiimiahmc dorscllxMi vci'siclHM'to man skli zii;,'loi(h dio 
HcMTschairdcM' Si'hcld(5. l)(Mn Mral)aiitis(;lu'n Hitiido, dor in 
diosor SfadLsoiuo Vorsainmlunju'on liiolf, wiirdo init dor.soll)oii 
Hoino wichfi^sto St(Uz(^ ontzo^oii, dor pinihrliohc Kliitltiss 
ihros licispiols, iliror llatlisclililj^v, iliros (Joldos ant" dio puize 
Parfol fjoliommf, mid in don SchiUzoii Hirer Howohner 
don Krioj;'sl)odilrfnisson dcs K(ini^\s oino rolcho IlilHsquollc 
aufV'cthan. 

7. Write explanatory notes on the undorliiied parts of [a). 

H. danH du — (1. If)), tccnn da nirhf — (1. KJ). Supply the 
ellipsis in either of these cases. 

1). Wat'uni fiat er sick nnr . . . nnfxtellen fasten f Write this 
ns H clause dopondeut on the German of " I should like to 
know." 

10. Name the chief uses of the Imperfect Indicative in 
German, and indicate any examples of such use that may 
occur in the above passages. 

11. Account clearly for the position of Subject, Verb, and 
Direct Object in each of the clauses of the sentence begin- 
ning, So ijrosse Ursnclutn aber die Stadt, etc. 

12. Write the :}rd Singular of the Present Indicative and 
the Imperfect Subjunctive and the 2nd Singular Imperative 
Active of getvunken, konimen, halten, entzogen, stand. 

C. 

Translate : 
(n) .SUirl. iil^crbeii ^c^ .ticrr C'bcrft bciit nid)t oiiftrcitcn? 



b c r ft. iJiciu ! ill Dcii 3 tall iiilt Dcm Si^.iixU 1 



Al a r I. 3" S-^cfcl)!, .'Ocrr Dbcift. 



(«b.) 



D b c r ft (tliiiflrit, .ttnrl UMcDcr an bcr li)i'tr). 3ft baft ^^rdiilciii ^u fpred)en? 

Aarl. Sic ift in il)rciii 3'i"i'icr, bcr i^m Siiftiirotl) ift bci;cit8 fcit 
Ciller Stiiiibc bci ibr. 

D b c r ft . «lMc ? am friil)cii SDJorflcii ? 

Al a r 1. ^icr ift fie fclbft. (V(b, iia(i)bciii Vlbell)cib ciiigctictcii.) 
« D c 1 1) c i b , .ft r b (aii6 bcr 2l)lir rcd)t8). 

5J b e I b c i b (ju .ftorb). Sic blcibcn ivobl in bcr SJabc bcr ©artcntbiir, 
nnb ipcnn bcr bciDnfite jnngc .ticrr tomnit, baiiii flibrcn Sic ibn mi nn&- (Alorb 
ab.) Wntcu ^lorflcn, ^crr Dbcrft 1 (an ibn trctcnb nnb il)U l)citcr anfcbcnb.) 
2iiic ift baft aii^ctter bent ? 




die Luft 8f V,*^^' .. jviine bedecktcn, 1^'^"^, {"^^rt so dass 
„,assen, welc^e benachbarten FeMcr ^^ tT^u' von ^er 

man nachher mc ^^^^^ggj.„^, ^pp ^| y^j.eck- 

13 Write grammatical notes o 

^ar/ nicU gut zu sprechen ^^^^^ .^ eh 

1^ Write down in full ^f, f '^^^4nce beginning Vo.^ dern 

of '^'^ T^tlVSr^S^^^^ Wrse also Ware, rer- 

ScUage des entzuiMeten 

>»■'"">'• ^ i^lfcMm. Give the present in- 

16. ^«#*9!' C^et;el"'etflnitivesa.d show the 

finitive of each ajso denv .^ ^^^,, ^ase. 

change of me^mng tha ha J^^_^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^„„. ,, , 



J^airra.ywh.eachd.oe^^ . „_^___,„,„. 



^xVlain clearly what each d^o - ^^^^^^^ ^^^ 

"• ^"'^ rpCs^nTpeS indicative Act. of «»»«.<«. 



/< 



i 



(Education iepErtntPtit, Ontario. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



GRRMAN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 



SENIOR LEAYING AND HONOB MATBIOUIiATION. 



Examiners : 



M. S. Clark, B.A. 
John Fetch, M.A. 
John Squair, B.A. 



Note. — Candidates will take the first eight questions and one of 

the others. 



V 



1. Mark the syllable that has the principal accent in each of 
the following : 

Familie, anderthalb, aufstehen, Exemplar, Friedrichstrasse, 
Geschdftsangelegenheit, Wahracheinlichkeit, Unwahracheinlich, 
nachdem [conj.], Buchdruckerei. 

2. Give the meaning and the principal parts of : 
unterrichten, unterrichten, erfinden, ausflnden, bitten, . 

Helen, vollgiessen, vollenden, uherUgen, ilberliegen. 

3. Give the German equivalents of : — {a) It is we, {b) some- 
thing good, (c) a quarter to one, {d) most of the students, 
(e) good bye, (/) so much the less, (g) a regiment of a thousand 
men, (h) any one and every one, (i) have you ever . . . ? Yes 
always, ( /) anywhere and everywhere. 

4. Give a short example in German to show the use of each of 
the following, and translate each example into English : — 
wer, emerlex, was fur, drittehalb, aufa beste, alles (meaning 
persons), am besten, dock, binnen, vermoge. 

[over] 



5. Translate each of the following sentences with each of the 
pronouns iJu, ihr, Sie, man, for subject : 

(,'/) You think only of yourself and your own good. 
(h) Will you who are so rich not help your friends ? 

6. Write out the gen. and dat. singular and plural, of: 
{(i) the 8rd personal pronouns, 

(h) the def. article, 

(c) <Jer, die, das, as demonstrative pronouns, 

{d) der, die, das, as relative pronouns. 



/ 



7. («) For what pronoun forms do we use substitutes ? 
(/>) What are the s\ibstitutes in each case ? 

(<•) When are these substitutes used ? 

8. Translate : 

(rt) If I had been there when the steamer arrived, we should 

have gone to Germany together. 
(It) They must have seen us, for we did not start home till 

a quarter to five, 
(c) There are six of them, all strong and well. They ought 

to work instead of begging. 
((/) They would not work while they could ; now, they could 

not do so if they would, 
(c) Be there at the hour, a week from to-day remember. 

Let nothing prevent but impossibility. 

9. Translate : 

" A man who would have friends must show himself 
friendly. A man stopped at an inn over night. He had just 
left a town where he had been staying several years. The land- 
lord asked him why he left the place. He replied, ' Because my 
neighbors were so disagreeable and disobliging there was no liv- 
ing with them.' The landlord replied, ' You will find just such 
neighbors where you are going.' The next night another trav- 
eller happened to come from the same place. He told the land- 
lord he was obliged to leave the place where he was living, and 
that it cost him great pain to part with his neighbors, who had 
been so kind and obliging. The landlord encouraged him by 
telling him that he would find just such neighbors where he was 
going." 

10. Translate : 

" Here are a thousand dollars," the father had said on 
the morning Joe went away. " You want to leave us, so go ! 



f 



i 



This is all the help you can expect from me. If you lose it, you 
must shift for yourself. If you succeed, I shall look for you to 
pay it back. I wish you success, but I don't expect it." 

" I have thought, Jared, that if father would help me a little, 
now when I don't deserve it, I could feel better toward him, and 
we could be as father and son should be. I should know that 
he thought something of me. But I can't expect it, and I'm not 
going to ask you what he said, for fear he has been hard on me, 
and to save you the pain of telling me." 

11. Write in German, not less than a hundred words, on one 
of the following subjects : 

(a) " Spring in Canada." 
{h) " Summer in Canada." 
(c) " Autumn in the country." 



d 
d 

•y 

IS 



3n 

o! 



/ 



/ 



Fi 



(Sbutation g«parfm«nt, Ontario 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMAKY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 

ENGLISH COMPOSITION. 

JUmOB LEAVING AIVD PASS MATBICULATION. 



Examiners : ■ 



W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 

t. c. l. a14m8trong, m.a., ll.b. 

John E. Bryai^t, M.A. 



Write an essay on any one, but on one only, of the following 
subjects : 

(0) The Social Condition of England in the time of Richard 
I. as represented in "Ivanhoe." 

(b) The character of Richard I. as represented in "Ivanhoe" 

and its variations from the Richard of History. 

(c) Chivalry and the customs connected therewith. 

(d) The Newspaper in Modern Life. 

(e) City and Country Life Compared. 
(/) The Trial of Warren Hastings. 



/ 






ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



/ 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PEIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATEICULATION. 



ENGLISH COMPOSITION. 



SENIOR LEAVnra AND HONOB MATRICULATION. 



Examiners: 



W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 

T. C. L. Armstrono, M.A., LL.B. 

JoHK E. Bryant, M.A. 



Write an essay on any one, but on one only, of the subjects 
suggested in the following : 

(a) " Westward the course of empire takes its way." 

(6) " For woman is not undevelopt man, 

But diverse : could we make her as the man, 

Sweet Tx)ve were slain : his dearest bond is this, 

Not like to like, but like in difference. 

Yet in the long years liker they must grow ; 

The man be more of woman, she of man ; 

He gain in sweetness and in moral height. 

Nor lose the wrestling thews that throw the world j 

8he mental breadth, nor fail in childward care, 

Nor lose the childlike in the larger mind ; 

Till at the last she set herself to man. 

Like perfect music unto noble words." 

(r) Narrate the imaginary life and adventures of Prospero 
and Miranda from the time of their being sent 
adrift in the boat until the time of the opening of 
The Tempest. 

((I) Write in detail a story on which the following poem 
might have been based : 

' Why weep ye by the tide, ladle ? 

Why weep ye by the tide ? 
I'll wed ye to my youngest son, 

And ye shall be his bride : 
And ye shall be his bride, ladie, 

Sae comely to be seen' — 
But ays she loot the tears down fa' 

For Jock of Hazledean. 

(OVBR.) 



' Now let this nilfu' grief be done, 

And dry that cheek so nalo ; 
Young Frank is chief of Errington 

And lord of Langley-dale ; 
His step is first in peaceful ha' 

His sword in battle keen'— 
But aye she loot the tears down fu' 

For Jock of Hazledean. 

' A chain of gold ye shall not lack, 

Nor braid to bind jour hair. 
Nor mettled hound, nor managed hawk, 

Nor palfry fresh and fair ; 
And you the foremost o' them a' 

Shall ride our forest-queen' — 
But aye she loot the tear down fa' 

For Jock of Hazledean. 

The kirk was deck'd at morning tide, 

The tapers glimmer'd fair } 
The priest and bridegroom wait the bride, 

The dame and knight are there : 
They sought her baith by bower and lea'^ 

The ladie was not seen I 
She 's o'er the border and awa' 

Wi Jock of Hazledean.' 



/ 



(C) 



/ 



Cbttfation itfiartnwnt. Ontario 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 
THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 

ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND RHETORIC. 

JxnnoB leavhtq and pass matbioxtlation. 

|W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 
Examiners :\T. C. L. Armstrong, M.A., LL.B. 
(j. E. Bryant, M.A. 



Note. — All ccvdidates vrUl take section A. Candidates for the 
Junior Leamng Examination will take any one question 
of section B, and candidates for Junior Matriculation 
any one question of section C. 



A. 

This delusive itch for slander, too common in all ranks of people, 
whether to gratify a little ungenerous resentment ; Whether oftener 
out of a principle of levelling, from, a narrowness and poverty of 
soul, ever impatient of merit and superiority in others ; whether 
from a mean ambition, or the insatiate lust of being witty (a talent 
in which ill-nature and malice are no ingredients); — or lastly, 
whether from a natural cruelty of disposition, abstracted from all 
views and considerations of self ; —to which one, or whether to all 
jointly, we are indebted for this contagious malady, thus much is 
certain, from whatever seeds it springs, the growth and progress of 
it are as destructive to, as they are unbecoming, a civilized people. 
To pass a hard and ill-natured reflection upon an undesigning 
action ; to invent, or which is equally bad, to propagate, a vexa- 
tious report without colour and grounds ; — to plimder an innocent 
man of his character and good name, a jewel which perhaps he 
has starved himself to purchase and probably would hazard his 
life to secure ; — to rob him at the same time of his happiness and 
peace of mind, perhaps his bread : — the bread, may i^ , of a virtu- 
ous family ; and all this, as Solomon says of the madman who 
casteth firebrands, arrows, and death, and saith, " Am I not in 
sport ?" all this out of wantonness, and oftener from worse 
motives, — the whole appears such a complication of badness as 
requires no words or warmth of fancy to aggravate. — Pride, treach- 

(OVBR.) 



10 



16 



20 



ery, envy, hypocrisy, malice, cruelty and self-love may have boon 
said, in one shape or other, to have occosioned all the frauds and 
mischiefs that ever happened in the world; but the chances 
against a coincidence of them all in one person are so many, that 
one would have supposed the character of a common slanderer as 
rare and difficult a production in nature rd that of a great genius, 
whicli seldom happens above once in an age. 



25 



ao 



1. (rt) Write a grammatical analysis of the first sentence :— This 
delusive civilized peopb, 

{b) Parsfl the words in itah'cs throughout the extract. 

(c) ill-nature, self-love. — Why not illnature and selflove ? 
Classify self-love and selfishness as to word formation. 
Compare the methods of word formation to which they 
respectively belong as to origin and priority, stages of 
development and extent of usage in the language. 

2. Criticise briefly each sentence in the paragraph as to the order 
of words and terms, clearness and strength, shewing the effect of the 
rhetorical expedients employed. 

3. Discuss the propriety of each of the following phrases as used in 
the extract : — 

Delusive itch for slandar, too common, are no ingredients 
(11. 1-6), we are indebted (1. 9), contagious malady (1. 9), undesigning 
action (11. 12-18), reports without colour and grounds (1. 14), plunder of 
his character (11. 14-16), to purchase (1. 16), out of wantonness or 
worse motives (11. 21-22), to aggravate (1. 28), in one shape or other 
(1. 25), that ever happened (1. 26), the coincidence (1. 27). 

4. Corrector justify the following expressions as used in the extract, 
with reasons : 

From a natural cruelty (1. 7), thus much (1. 9), which perhaps he 
has starved himself . . . and probably would hazard his life (11. 16-17), at 
the same time (1. 17), may have been said (11 24-25), production in 
nature (1.29), perha^.d his bread (1. 18), which seldom happens above 
once in an age (1. 80). 

6. Of the following words taken from the extract 

(a) Trace any ten to their sources. 

{b) Select any five that survive from old beliefs and customs, ex- 
plaining each. 

(c) Give other existing forms of any five, accounting in general 

terms for the different forms and meanings of such words : 
Delusive, slander, rank, ungenerous, resentment, ill -nature, ambi- 
tion, witty, talent, consideration, reflection, undesigning, propa- 
gate, innocent, jewel, starve, secure, whole, virtuous, sport, 
person, chance, genius. 



/ 



f 



B. 



/ 



0. DiBcritninato the following pairs of words, and uso rach word in a 
\ !>»•« ie in which tho other could not be used : 

Kanks, classes ; resentmont, aniuiusity; merit, worth ; insatiate, 
ini .able ; talent, Kenius ; ingredient, component ; malady, disease ; 
invent, disaover ; vexatious, annoying ; plunder, rob ; hazard, risk ; 
complication, combination. 

7. (a) Discuss the use of each of thu three degrees of »djectivea in 
forming comparisons. 

{!)) Correct or justify each of the following: 

a. Of all the figures of speech none come so near painting as 

metaphor. 

b. He is not such an old man as you. 
He is just such an old man as you. 

c. Of all others the vice of lying ia the meanest. 
(/. The lesser of two evils. 

e. The head boy is a better reader than any boy in the class. 
/. He is the best reader of any boy in the class. 



^ 



8. Discuss the propriety and the order of each member of the follow- 
ing pairs of terms as used in extract A. 

Meanness and poverty, merit and superiority, ill-nature and malice, 
views and considerations, growth and progress, hard and ill-natured, 
colour and grounds, character and good name, happiness and peace of 
mind, words or warmth of fancy, frauds and mischiefs, rare and diffi- 
cult. 



9. State the principle of Syntax that is violated in each of the fol- 
lowing,', and make the necessary corrections : 



Having failed in this attempt no further trial was made. 
Nothing but grave and serious studies delight him 
(c) Everything favored by good usage is not therefore to be 

retained. 
((/) No man hath a propensity to vice as such ; on the contrary a 
wicked deed disgusts him and makes him abhor the author. 
[e) Neither will they be persuaded though one rose from the dead. 






/ 



} 



'i 



/ 



} 



(Education S^P^rtmrnt, €)ntaitio. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONH, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL nUMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 



SENIOR LEAVma AND HONOR MATRICX7LATION. 

Examiners. 



W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 

T. C. L. Armstrono, M.A., LL.B. 

John E. Bryant, M.A. 



Note. — Candidates trill take the first eight, questions and any 

three of the last five. 

If history has ever furnished a lesson, how an unscr':pul- 
ous tyrant, who has determined upon enlarging hib own 
territories at the expense of his neighbors, upon suppressing 
human freedom wherever it dared to manifest itself, with 
fine phrases of religion and order forever in his mouth, on 
deceiving his friends and enemies alike, as to his nefarious 
and almost incredible designs by means of perpetual and 
colossal falsehoods ; and if such lessons deserve to be pon- 
dered, as a source of instruction and guidance, for every 
age, then certainly the secret story of the negotiations by 
which the wise Queen of England was beguiled, and her 
Kingdom brought to the verge of ruin, in the spring of 1.588, 
is worthy of serious attention. 

1. Show in what respects this sentence is periodic. 

2. Point out the chief syntactical error and suggest a cor- 
rection. 

3. In the following compare as to meaning and force the 
words of the text with the suggested expressions. If history 
has ever, (if ever, etc.); has furnished, (furnished); has 
determined, (determined, or was determined); his own ter- 
ritories, (his territories); it dared, (dare, dares, should dare); 
manifest itself, (assert itself); deserve to be pondered, (ought 
to be studied); the secret story, (the story of the secrets of); 
brought to the verge of ruin, (brink of ruin). (over.) 



4. Criticise and paraphrase tiie following expressions, 
expanding each into a sentence where possible : 

With fine phrases of religion and order forever in his 

mouth. 
On deceiving his friends and enemies aliice. 
By means of perpetual and colossal falsehoods. 
As a source of instruction and guidance for every age. 
Is worthy of serious attention. 

r>. Criticise the whole sentence as to its expression of the 
author's meaning fully, clearly and forcibly. Rewrite it, 
beginning with the principal subject, rearranging and divid- 
ing it as you please,— making what improvements you think 
necessary. 



6. (a) Explain the nature of the articles, show their origin 
and ad\ antages, and give rules for their omission and repeti- 
tion. 

(6) Explain the peculiarity in each of the following : 
The saint, the father and the husband prays. 
He returned a sadder and a wiser man. 
A great many men. Full many a gem. 
The more the merrier. 

7. Trace the history and show the various present uses of 
who, what, which and whether. 

8. Account for our present methods of indicating the 
number and case of nouns, and give examples of redund- 
ancies and specializations in the old forms. 

9. Show why the original meanings of the verbs, have, 
be, can, shall, will, may and do, led to their use as auxiliar- 
ies, and how their original meanings have been modified in 
such use. 

10. Discuss the history, the comparative merits and the 
present tendency of flexion and symbolism in the English 
language. 

11. (a) What principles are to be observed in the employ- 
ment of figures of rhetoric ? define and illustrate three that 
depend on similarity or comparison, and three that consist in 
emphatic repetition. 

(6) Discuss the nature and requirements of rhyme, 
rhythm, metre and stanza. 



/ \ 



^ J 



/ \ 



p ^ *^ 



(c) What are the merits of the iambic pentameter that 

have led to its prevalence in English literature ? 

(d) Scan and name the following lines : 

" The flesh was a picture for painte^"- to study, 

Tiie fat was so white and the 16.1 v . ,s so ruddy." 
" Leave the deer, leave the steer 
Leave nets and barges. 
Come with your fighting gear, 
Broadsword and targes." 

12. Account for and correct what is obsolete in each of 
the following : 

(a) They are they that testify of me, 

There's two or three of us have seen strange sights. 

(6) Let them take whether they will, 
We testify that we do know. 

(c) Ye would none of ray reproof. 

I learn song, I can but small grammar. 

(d) The blind man said. Lord that I might receive my 

sight. 
The serpent beguiled me and I did eat. 

i;J. Write a note on the peculiarities of each of the fol- 
lowing : 

its, brethren, of .John's, in our midst, another, foremost, 
than, nearer, proven, listen, could, went, had. 



/ 



(' 



(Education irpartment, ^ntat[io. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



English: poetical literature. 



JUNIOR LEAvnra and pass matbiculation. 



|W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 
Examiners :\T. C. L. Armstrong, M.A., LL.B. 
(John E. Bryant, M.A. 



'^OTY.. — Candidates for the Junior Leaving Examination vnll 
take sections A and C. Candidates for Junior Matricu- 
lation vnll take sections A and B. Of the questions Tnaric 
ed with asterisks, only one is to he answered. 



A. 

1. What are the merits and defects of Evangeline as a poera ? 
Make your answer as definite as you can, and illustrate, as far as 
possible, by references to particular points or passages. 

2. Tell in good literary form the story of The Birds of Killing- 
worth, reproducing, as far as you can, the spirit of the original. 

3. Explain the italicised words in the following passages, 
carefully giving, in the case of common nouns, the exact shade 
of meaning: 

(rt) The wind seized the gleeds. 

(b) In the bivouac of life. 

(c) It glanced on flowing flag and vvpTplin^pennon. 

(d) No morning gun from the black fort's emhrasure. 
ifi) The right of eminent domain. 

(/) he hears in his dream? 



The Ranz des Vaches of old. 
ig) Softly the Angelas sounded. 



[over.] 



m 



n 



.? 



*4. Reproduce in your own words the sequence and develop- 
ment of thought in the poem entitled Rcsifi nation. 

*5 Indicate in what poem and in what connection the follow- 
ing passages appear : 

(a) Nor deem the irrevocable past 
As wholly wasted, wholly vain, 
If rising on its wrecks, at last 
To something nobler we attain. 

(6) Fame is the fragrance of heroic deeds, 
Of flowers of chivalry and not of weeds. 

(c) Sorrow and silence are strong, and patient endurance is 

godlike. 

(d) the cares, that infest the day, 

\ Shall fold their tents, Uke Arabs, 

And. as silently steal away. 

(e) Nothing useless is, or low; 

Each thing in its place is best. 

*6. Mark the scansion of the following passages, and discuss 
all variations from the regular metre : — 

(rt) He hears the parson pray and preach, 
' ■ He hears his daughter's voice, 

Singing in the village choii-. 
And makes his breast rejoice. 

(6) Robert of Sicily, brother of Pope Urbane • 
And Valmond, Emperor of AUemaine. 

(c) Mixed with the whoop of the crane, and the roar of the 
I grim alligator. 

{d) So in each pause of the song, with measured motion 
the clock clicked. 

(«) All were subdued and low as the murmurs of love, and 
the g|^at sun — 



B. 

Beautiful was the night. Behind the black wall of the forest, 

Tipping its summit with silver, arose the moon. On the river 

Fell here and there through the branches a tremulous gleam of the 

moonlight, 
Like the sweet thouglits of love on a darkened and devious spirit. 



Nearer and round about her, the manifold flowers of the garden 6 

Poured out tlieir souls in odours, that were their prayers and confes- 
sions 
Unto the night, as it went its way, like a silent Carthusian. 
Fuller of fragra?ice than they, and as heavy with shadows and night- 
dews, 
Hung the heart of the maiden. The calm and the magical moonlight 
Seemed to inundate her soul with indefinable longings, 10 

As, through the garden gate, beneath the brown shade of the oak-trees, 
Passed she along the path to the edge of the measureless prairie. 
Silent it lay, with a silvery haze upon it, and fire-flies 
Gleaming and floating away in mingled and infinite numbers. 
Over her head the stars, the thoughts of God in the heavens, 15 

Shone on the eyes of man, who had ceased to marvel and worship, 
Save when a blazing comet was seen on the walls of that temple. 
As if a hand had appeared and written upon them, '♦ Upharsin," 
And the soul of the maiden, between the stars and the fire-flies. 
Wandered alone, and she cried, — •' Gabriel 1 my beloved ! 20 
Art thou so near unto me, and yet I cannot behold thee ! 
Art thou so near unto me, and yet thy voice does not reach me ? 
Ah ! how often thy feet have trod this path to the prairie ! 
Ah ! how often thine eyes have looked on the woodlands around me ! 
Ah ! how often beneath this oak, returning from labours, 25 

Thuu kbot* Jain down to rest, and to dream of me in thy slumbers ! 
Wheii shall these eyes behold, these arms be folded about thee ?" 
Loud and sudden and near the note of a whip-poor-will sounded 
Like a flute in the woods ; and anon, through the neighboring thickets, 
Farther and farther away it floated and dropped into silence. 80 

" Patience !" whispered the oaks from oracular caverns of darkness ; 
And, from the moonlit meadow, a sigh responded, •' To-morrow!" 

7. What is the general idea set before the reader in this pas- 
sage ? Point out the relation of the thoughts, i.e. their relation 
to the general idea or to one another. 

8. Indicate concisely, with references to definite pohits and 
passages, the chief merits of this passage. 



C. 



Old Yew, which graspest at the stones 
That name the under-lying dead, 
Thy fibres net the dreamless head, 

Thy roots are wrapt about the bones. 

The seasons bring the flower again, 
And bring the firsthng to the flock 
And in the dusk of thee, the clock ; 

Beats out the little lives of men. 



not for thee tlie glow, the bloom, 

Who changest not in any gale, 

Nor branding summer suns avail 
To touch thy thousand years of gloom : 

And gazing on thee, sullen tree, 

Sick for thy stubborn hardihood, 

I seem to fail from out my blood 
And grow incorporate into thee. 

9. Tell concisely the subject of this poem, and of each stanza 
in it. 

10. Show the development of the thought in this poem and 
the appropriateness of the introduction of the idea which each 
clause expresses. 



/ 



^'i+W*' 



(gbucation gfpartmcnt, #tttari«. 



ANNUAL. EXAMINATlONSj 1891. 



/ 



>i^ 



m 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMAKY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION, 

ENGLISH POETICAL LITERATURE. 



SENIOB LEAVING AMD HONOR MATRICULATION. 

W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 
Examiners : T. C. L. Armstrong, M.A., LL.B. 
John E. Bryant, M.A. 



Note. — Candidates for Matriculation will take sections A and 
B. Candidates for the Senior Leaving examination will 
taJce sections A and C, 

A. 

1. Explain clearly and concisely the meaning of the following 
passages : 

(a) To think o' the teen that I have turned you to-, 
Which is from my remembrance I 

(6) Down with the topmast ! Yare I lower, lower I Brinp her to try 
wi' the main course. 

(c) At pick'd leisure, 

Which shall be shortly, single I'll resolve you, 
Which to you shall seem probable, of every 
These happen'd accidents. 

id) — You demi-puppets that 

By moonshine do the green sour rmglets make,. 
Whereof the ewe not bites. 

(e) Mine eyes, even sociable to the show of thine, 
Fall fel'owly drops. 

(/) If 't were a kibe 

'Twould put me to my slipper ; but I feel not 
This deity in my bosom. 

(g) — Urchins 

Shall, for that vast of night that they may work, 
All exercise on thee. 



(A) — Which now we find 

Each putter out of five for one will bring us 
Good warrant of. 



(over.) 



2. Name the speaker of each of the following paHHages ; indi- 
cate the context, and the circumstances under which each is 
Hpoken : 

(a) They'll take suggestion as a cat laps milk. 
(6) What seest thou else 

In the dark backward and abysm of time ? 
(n) Misery acquaints a man with strange bedfellows. 
(d) The rarer action is 

In virtue than in vengeance. 
(«) He that dies pays all debts. 
(/) The fringed curtains of thine eye advance, 

And say what thou seest good. 
(g) Sometimes a tliousand twangling instruments 

Will hum about mine ears. 
(A) We are such stuff 

As dreams are made on. 



/ 



i). Describe the character of Prospero. 

4. Explain fully and clearly the folio win<^ passaj^es : 

(a) — The yonge sonne 

Hath in the Ram his halfe cours i-ronne. 
(6) Ful ofte tyme he was knight of the schire, 

An anlas and a gipser al of silk 

Heng at his girdel, white as morne mylk. 

A schirreve hadde he ben and a contour ; 

Was nowher such a worthi vavasour. 

(c) This reeve sat upon a ful good stot 

That was all pomely gray, and highte Scot 
A long surcote of pers upon he hade. 

(d) —that telleth in this caas 
Tales of best sentence and most solas, 
Schal han a soper at oure alther cost. 

(c) The Mellere was a stout carl for the nones 
Ful big he was of braun, and eek of boones 
That prevede well, for overal ther he cam 
At wrastlynge he wolde have alwey the ram, 
There was no dore he wolde heve of harre. 

6. Describe in yom* own words (reproducing m as far as you 
can the effect of the original passages) any two of the following 
characters of the Prologue : the Squire, the Monk, the Parson. 

6. Either sketch briefly the plot of The Tempest, showing 
how each scene and personage contributes to' the whole 
effect, 

OR contrast the method of revealing character employed 
by Shakespeare with that employed by Chaucer in the 
Prologue. 



B. 

I, thus neglecting worldly ends, all dedicated 

To cloAeness and the bettering of my mind 

With that which, but by being so retir'd, 

O'er-priis'd all popular rate, in my false brother 

Awak'd an evil nature : and my trust, 6 

Lilce a good parent, did beget of him 

A falsehood, in its contrary as great 

As my trust was ; which had indeed no limit, 

A contidenco sans bound. He being thus lorded. 

Not only with what my revenue yielded^ 10 

But what my power might else exact— like one 

Who having unto truth, by telling of it. 

Made such a sinner of his memory, 

To credit his own lie— he did believe 

He was indeed the duke, out o' the substitution, 15 

And executing the outward face of royalty, 

With all prerogative. 

7. Express, as nearly as you can, in simple, clear prose the 
thoughts contained in this passage, being especially careful 
about those which are obscurely expressed in the original. 

8. Characterize fully the style of the passage, and point out 
the more striking peculiarities of the blank verse employed. 



Since what I am to say must be but that 

Which contradicts my accusation, and 

The testimony on my part no other 

But what comes from myself, it shall scarce boot me 

To say, ' not guilty'; mine integrity 6 

Being counted falsehood, shall, as I express it. 

Be so received. But thus : if powers divine 

Behold our human actions, as they do, 

I doubt not then but innocence shall make 

False accusation blush and tyranny 10 

Tremble at patience. — You, my lord, best know. 

Who least will seem to do so. my past life 

Hach been as continent, as cnaste, as true. 

As I am now unhappy ; which is more 

Than history can pattern, though devis'd 15 

And play'd to take spectators. For behold me, 

A fellow of the royal bed, which owe 

A moiety of the throne, a great king's daughter, 

The mother to a hopeful prince, here standing. 

To prate and talk for life and honour fore 20 

Who please to come and hear. For life, I prize it 

As I weigh grief, which I would spare ; for honour 

'Tis a derivative from me to mine, 

And only that I stand for. 

9. Express, as nearly as you can, in simple, clear prose the 
thoughts contained in this passage. 

10. Characterize fully the style of the passage and point out 
the more striking peculiarities of the versification. 



i_.= 



Cbuctttton department, ^ntuno. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



PHYSICS. 



JUNIOR LEAVING AND PASS MATBIOULATION. 

Examinera : 



G. Chambbrh, B.A., M.B. 
J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 
T. H. Smyth, M.A., B.Sc. 



Note.— iVoi more than tvo of the three subdivieiona, (a), (6), (c), 
of each question are to he answered. 

1. (a) Devise an experiment by which n unit of force may 

be established. 

(h) A spiral spring acts upon di£ferent masses; how can the 
masses be compared by this means? 

(c) What is the nature of the motion of a body falling from 
a great distance to the earth under the force of ter- 
restrial gravity only, the body starting from rest? 

2. (rt) How can the volume (in cubic centimeters) of an irregu- 

lar-shaped solid and the weight (in grammes) of an 
equal volume of water be simultaneously determined ? 

{b) What precautions must be taken in order to make accur- 
ate determinations of these values ? 

(c) How many grammes of gold (specific gravity say 20) can 
be suspended in water by 44 grammes of carbon 
dioxide gas contained in a weightless bag beneath the 
surface, assuming that the gas remains at a constant 
temperature of 0°C. and at normal pressure ? 

3. (a) What precautions should be taken in the manufacture 

of the barometer ? 

(b) What precautions are necessary in taking readings of the 

height of the mercurial column of the barometer ? 

(c) What properties of fluids are exhibited by the barom- 

eter ? Express the normal atmospheric pressure in 
dynes per square centimetre (density of mcr- 
cury=13.6). (over.) 



^T 



4. {a) The Kiffol Tow«r in to 1)« utilized in the liquefaction of 

HVLHm. How may thiH i)e (lone ? 
(h) HuppoHinp; the tower to bo HOI uietroH hi^,'h, what inten- 

Hity of i)reHHure could be obtained by njeanw of a 

liquid of HI), j^r. ISJ.O? 
(c) Explain brietly Home methodH of diminiHliinj^ the pres- 

Hure of ganen. 

5. (a) Show by rofer»'nce to experiment upon what property 

of matter any unit of temi)erature in baned, and also 

upon what property of matter any unit of heat in 

baHed. 
(h) DeHcribe an experiment to show that heat is a form of 

energy. 
((•) Why muHt atmoHpheric presnure be considered in the 

determination of the boiling point of a Centigrade 

thermometer ? 

0. (a) What happens when heat is applied to the bottom of a 
tin pail containing water at CC ? What happens 
when ice at 0°C. is applied to the bottom of the pail 
when the water contamed in it is at 10°C.? 

(h) When floating ice melts in water is the level of the 
water altered ? Explain. 

(<•) What takes place when ice at 0°C. congealed in a strong 
vessel is subjected to great pressure ? How may the 
change be demonstrated ? 

7. (a) Mention precautions necessary in the determination of 

the quantity of heat evolved by the condensation of 
ste.im. 

(b) When ice melts the water formed occupies less space 

than the ice. How may this change of volume be 
accurately measured ? 

(c) Compare the amount of heat required to convert a given 

mass of ice at— 3°.2C. into water at 38°C., with that 
required to convert the same mass of water at 38°C. 
into steam at 100°C. [The specific heat of ice is 0.5] . 

8. (a) A single Daniell cell, however large, will not electrolyse 

acidulated water, but two small Daniell cells can be 
made to do so. How may the electrolysis be accom- 
plished ? Explain this. 

(b) Describe the chemical reactions which take place in a 

Bunsen and in a Gravity cell respectively. 

(c) How would you show which of these cells has the 

greater electro-motive force ? 



r 



0. Wlmt will 1)0 tho effect : 
(n) When a current in pasHod through two wires of equal 

lungthH hut whoHe croHS suctionH are as 2 to 1 ; 
(h) When a current is passed through a wire in which a 

current of equal strength is already passing in an 

opposite direction ; 
(c) When a current is passed through a long-ooil galvano- 

meter ? 



10. (a) Explain the object of the iron hammer with its steel 
spring, employed in the induction coil. 
(/>) How may the electromotive- force of a dynamo be in- 
creased ? 

(f) What constitutes the internal resistance of a dynamo- 
electric machine ? 



I 

I 



L\ 



>) 



(gducHtion JOeprtmitut, (iBntario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



ARITHMETIC AND MENSURATION. 

JUNIOR LEAVING AND PASS MATRICULATION. 



(A. R. Bain, LL.D. 
Examiners :\N. F. Dupuis, M.A. 
II. E. Martin, B.A. 



ti\ 



Note. — Candidates for Junior Matriculation must take section 
A, and any four quesfiom in section B. Candidates for the 
Junior Leaving Ea'a.ninutio'n must take questions 4 and 5 in 
section A, any four questions in section B, and any three 
questions in section C. 



1. (a) How can you determinej by inspection, when a number 
is divisible by 5, 9? 

{h) State and illustrate the proof of Multiplication by cast- 
ing out the nines. 

(c) Find the value correct to four decimal places, of: — 

1 1 1 1 

^'^ 1X2 + 1x2x3 + 1X2X3X4"'" 1x2x3x4x5 '^ 

1 

1X2X3X4X5X6 

2. Distinguish between prime and composite numbers. Re- 
solve the composite number 277200 into its prime factors, and 
by this process find the great' . ;t common measure of 1071, 1092, 
2310. » 

3. The actual cost of making a pia^u is $256. The manufac- 
turer, importer and local agent each make 25% profit. Foi 
what amount does the agent sel! it ? 

(over.) 



^■:^m^' 



I 



4. One clock HtrikeH 5 Btrokcs in 6 seconds and another strikes 
strokes in 7 seconds. Tlioy strike the 10th stroke of 12 
together. If the first clock is correct, wluvt is tlie error of the 
second clock wlien the first clock begins to strike V 

5. A speculator is shipphii;; 80 horses, which cost $1(50 each, to 
Liveri)ool. For how much nnist he insure tlu-m at V\ '){, so that 
in case of loss he may recover the cost of the horses, and the 
l)remium paid foi nisurance ? 



B. 

6. Jones hougi. t\ house for $3,000 cuhIi ; it is assessed for "I 
its value, the rate of taxation hcing KJ] mills on the dollar. The 
insurangc is f % on f^ of the cost. If Jones could have loaned 
his money at 5 % what monthly rent is he paying for his house. 



. The expense of constructing a railway ia $5,000,000; of 
x'h 40% is borrowed on a mortgage at %, and the remainder 



7. 

'.vhich40% 

is held in shares ; what must be the average weekly receipts so 
as to pay the shareholders 5 \)v,y cent., the W(U"king expens(3s 
being (55 % of the gross receipts ? 



8. A Montreal merchant owes 5,000 francs in Paris. He 
buys a draft on London when sterling exchange is at a premium 
of 9; exchange between Paris and London 25.2 francs per £1. 
What does the draft cost him ? 

9. A man borrows $100 from a money-lender and pays it back 
in 12 monthly instalments of $10 each. These partial pay- 
ments are deposited in the Savings Bank at 4 % per annum, 
simple interest. What rate of interest per annum is realized ? 

10. A person buys °/, Bonds; the interest on which is payable 
yearly and which are to be paid off at par 3 years after the time 
of purchase. If he invests his interest when received at 4 % com- 
pound interest what should he pay for the Bonds to realize 7 % 
compound interest on his money '? 

I 

11. A farm is mortgaged for $4,500 bearing 7 % hiterest pay- 
able yearly ; the mortgage has 3 years to run. "What sum paid 
down now would be equivalent to reducing the interest on the 
mortgage to 5 %, money being worth 4 % per annum, all interest 
being compound? 



% 



'■i 

1^ 






) I 



c. 

12. A certain coi!) i» ^\ of an inch thick anil j of an inch in 
(haniotor ; anotlior has to ho made of '2i tinieH tho vahio and 
twice as thick. What will be itn size '? 

in. It iH reqnirtil to cover a piece of gfomul 80 feet Hijuare hy 
a pyramidal tent 80 feet in pevpendiculai- height ; (hul the cont 
of the i-e(piiHite (piantity of canvas at 15 cts. per wpiaro yard. 

14. A ball of lead 4 inches in diameter is covered with silver ; 
find the thickness of the silver in order that (a) the volume of 
silver may be equal to that of the lead, {h) the surface of silver 
may be twice that of the leed. 

15. A mast is 49 inches in diameter at the bottom and 28 inches 
at tho top, and contains 590.75 cubic feet of wood ; find its height 

10. The sides of a rectangle are 10 and 12 ; find the distance be- 
tween the feet of the perpendiculars drawn from opposite vertices 
to a diagonal. 



A 



1 1 



/J 



(^(luQtion iepartment, (iDntario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



EUCLID. 

JUNIOR LEAVING AND PASS MATRICULATION. 



(A. R. Bain, LL.D. 
Examiners : i }!i . F. Dupuis, M.A. 
(l. E. Mautin, B.A. 



Note. — Camlidafes for Junior Matriculation icill talce all the 
questions from section A, any ttco questions from section B, 
and any tico questions from section C. Candidates for the 
Junior Leacing Eaamination will take all the questions 
from section B and any four questions from section C. 



A. 

1. The two lines joining any point within a triangle with the 
ends of one of the sides are together less than the sum of the 
other two sides, hut contain a greater angle. Euclid I, 21. 

2. The complements of the parallelograms which are about the 
diameter of any parallelogram are equal to one another. Euclid 
I, 43. 

3. Divide a given straight line into two parts so thait the rec- 
tangle contained by the whole lire and one of the parts shall be 
equal to the square upon the other part. Euclid II, 11. 

4. If a point be taken within a circle from which there fall 
more than two equal straight lines to the circumference, that 
point is the centre of the circle. Euclid III, 11. 

5. The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the 
circumference, upon the same arc. Euclid III, 20. 



B. 

6. The opposite sides and angles of a parallelogram are equal 
to one another and the diameter bisects it. Euclid I, 34. 
Also the diameters bisect one another. (over.) 






7. If II, Htmif^'lit lino be divided into any two jmrtH tho s((iiiires 
on the wliole line and on one of tlie parts are to;j;etli('r e(|ual to 
twice the rectan«,de contained by the whole and that part, together 
with the .s([uare on the other part. Euclid II, 7. 

8. I)eKcri])e a square which shall he etpuil to a ;,aven rectan,!^le 
Euclid II, 14. 

9. Draw a tan,u«!nt to a <;iven circle from aj^'iven point without 
the circle ; also show that two tangents can he drawn, and tluit 
they are equal . 

10. If from any point without a circle a tan<,'ent he drawn to 
f'e circle ai d also a Htrai<j;ht Une cuttin;^ the circle, the rcctani^lo 
contained l>y the whole line cuttinjjj the circle and the ))ait witli- 
out the circle is eijual to ihe square on the tungent. Euclid 
III, 86. 

C. 

11. Being given a recliingle, to construct, on a given finite line 
as one side, a rectangle equal to the given one. 

12. The sum of the three medians of a triangle is less tlian the 
sum of the three sides. 

(A median of a triangle is a straight line from a vertex to the 
middle of the opposite side). 

13. Show that the circumference of a circle can pass through 
any three points not in line, aiul that only one circumference 
can pass through the same three points. 

14. If the finite line of question 3 is 10 inches long, find 
approximately the length in inch( s of the longer part. 

15. If a quadrilateral has the sum of two of its opposite angles 
equal to two right angles, it can l)e insciihed in a circle. 

16. The angle between two intersecting circles is defined to be 
the angle between tangents to the two circles at the point of inter- 
section. 

Hence draw a circle with given radius to intersect a given 
circle at right angles. 

17. Two circles intersect in A and li, and from any point P 
on the line through A and B, two straight lines are drawn cut- 
ting one of the circles in C and D, and the other circle in E 
and ¥. 

Then the rectangle contained by PC and PD is equal to that 
contained by PE and PE. 

18. If a finite line be divided into any three parts the square 
on the whole line is equal to the sum of the scpiares on the parts 
together with twice the sum of the rectangles contained by the 
parts taken two and two. 



d^duiiation g([partment» <iBntario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



EUCLID. 

SENIOR LEAVING AND HONOB MATBICTTLATION. 



(A. R. Bain, LL.D. 
Examiners :^N. ¥. Dupuis, M.A. 
1 1. E. Martin, B.A. 



Note. — Candidates must take all the questions of section A, 

any four of section B. 



A. 

1. (a) Upon the same base, and on the same side of it there 
cannot be two triangleH that have their Hides which are termin- 
ated in one extremity of the base, equal to one another, and 
Hkewise those which are termuiated in the other extremity. — 
Euc.I, 7. 

(h) Prove the foregoing directly from the assumed axiom, 
"a straight line is the shortest distance between two given 
points." 

2. (a) All the interior angles ol any rectilineal figure together 
with four right angles, are equal to twice as many right angles 
!|S the figure has sides. Euc. I, 32, Cor. 1. . 

(})) A, B, C, D, E are five vertices, in order, of the figure 
whose sides are AC, CE, EB, BD, and DA. Find the sum of 
the angles ACE, CEB, EBD, BDA and DAC. 

3. (fl) If a line be divided into two equal, and also into two 
unequal parts, the rectangle contained by the unequal parts, to- 
gether with the square on the line between the points of section, 
is equal to the square on half the line. Euc. II, 5. 

(h) If a line be divided into two parts the rectangle contained 
by the parts is greatest, and the sum of the squares on the parts 
is least when the parts are equal. [over.] 



4. {(i) The angle in a Heini-cirde in a ri^^ht anj^le ; the anj^lo in 
any other sej^nient in acute or obtuHe according as the segment 
is greater or less than a semicircle. Euc. Ill, !U. 

{!)) If through a fixed point any number of chords bo drawn 
to the same circle the middle points of the chords lie on a circle. 

5. (a) Inscribe a circle in a given triangle. 

(h) Show that the problem to draw a circle to touch three 
straight lines which form a triangle has four solutions, and find 
them. 

6. (n) Give a definition of simihir triangles and of lunnologous 
sides, and pmve that hi similar triangles the honiologous sides 
are proportional. 

(h) ABC is a triangle and DE is ixinillel lo AC, D being 
on AB and E on CB. DC and EA intersect in 0. Show that 
BO produced bisects AC. 

B. 

7. A, B, C, D are the vertices of a square and A, E, F the 
vertices of an equilateral triangle, both inscribed in the same 
circle. 

Find the angle betweeii BP] and DF, and also between I)E 
and BF. 

8. A and B are two points on the same side of a line L. Find 
a point, P, on L, such that the sum of PA and PB may be the 
least possible. 

9. Describe a circle, with a given radius, to touch, a given 
circle and pass through a given point. 

Show that there are two solutions, and examine the condi- 
tions under which the two solutions become the same, or become 
impossible. 

10. A, B, C, D is a square and AA', BB', CC, DD' are per- 
pendiculars upon any line L. 

Show that the square is equal to the difference between the 
sum of the squares on AA' and CC, and twice the rectangle con- 
tained by BB' and DD'. 

11. Two tangents are drawn from a point, P, to a circle whose 
centre is 0, and the chord, joining the points of contact of 
the tangents, cuts OP in Q. 

Show that the rectangle contained by OP and OQ is equal 
to the square on the radius of the circle. 



■a 



12. Similar trianp[les are to one ap'^ther in the duplicate ratio 
of their homologous sides. 

13. Draw two lines parallel to the base of a triangle so as to 
trisect the area of the trianj'le. 



14. The rectanf^le contained by the diap;onals of any quadri- 
lateral inscribed in a circlr is equal to the sum of the roetau^les 
on its opposite sides in pairs. 



Cbufution geyartmcnt. (!l)nt;mo. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, IMM. 



THE HIGH SCHOOTi PIUMAUY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VEKSITY MATRICULATION. 



CHEMISTRY. 



JUNIOR LEAVING AND PASS MATRICULATION. 



|G. Chamheuh, B.A., M.B. 
EjcaminersAi. J. Mackhnzik, li.A. 

(T. H. Smyth, M.A., B.So. 



"NoTFu— Candidates may take any dx questions. 

1. {<() DoHcribe ex])ciinu!TitH to show that one c.c. of Hydrogen 
GaH and one c.c. of Chlorine lias are found in two c.c. of Hydro- 
chloric Acid Gas, and one c.c. of Oxygen Gas and two c.c of 
Hydrogen Gas in two c.c. of Water Gas. 

{})) Draw the inference from the above experiments that the 
ratio of the weight of two c.c. of each of these compound gases 
to the weight of one c.c. of Hydrogen is twice the Specific Gravity 
of the Compound Gases compared to Hydrogen. 

2. Discuss the question as to the distinction between a com- 
bustible substance and a supporter of combustion. Illustrate by 
equations the chemical reactions which occur in the combustion 
of : 

(a) Hydrogen in Chlorine. 

{})) Oxygen in Marsh Gas. 

(e) Carbon Monoxide in Oxygen. 

{d) Sodium in Hydrochloric Acid Gas. 

(c) Hydrogen Sulphide in Oxygen. 

3. Explain the meaning assigned by Chemists to the following 
terms : [a] Oxidizing Agents, [b] Reducing Agents ; write equa- 
tions showing instances of oxidation, [c] by Oxygen Gas, [d] by 
Chlorine Water, [e] by Nitric Acid ; of reduction [/] by heat, 
[9 [ I>y Charcoal, [h] by Nascent Hydrogen. , 

OVER. 



^ 

^ ^ 

o '^*>. 




IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 



^>.*^!^ 




1.0 



I.I 



11.25 



UitTA 12.5 



1^ 



1.4 I! 



1.6 



-► 









Sciences 
Corporation 



23 WiST'UIN STREET 

WEBSTKt,N.Y. USSO 

(71«) 872-4503 



'^ 




^ 

^ 



4. frt] How would you prepare red PhosplioruH from the 
yellow variety ? Contrast their physical and cheuiical properties. 

[h\ How many grams of Phosphorus will he retpiired when 
completely burnt to take the whole of the Oxygen out of 1,000 
grams of air. l/-'=81.j 

5. Describe the physical changes and illustrate by equations 
the chemical changes which occur when each of the following 
substances is heated in a test tube, [(t\ Ammonium Nitrate, [h\ 
Potassium Nitrate, [c] Lead Nitrate, [d\ Calcium Carboiuite, [*'J 
Ammonium Chloride. 



/ 



6. Name and give the formula3 of the substances formed by the 
action of hot Concentrated Sulphuric Acid upon each of the fol- 
lowing bodies : [<i] Copi)er, [/> I Charcoal, (c] Potassium Chlorate, 

'il] Potassium Iodide, [f?! Ammonium Nitrate, [/J Ammonium 
Chloride, [[/] Calcium Carbonate. 

7. Explain the chemical and physical reactions which occur in 
the following experiments— give ecpiations in each case : 

[a] A small piece of Sodium is thrown upon Water. 

[b] A small piece of Potassium is thrown upon Wa<^^er. 

[c] Chlorine Gas is mixed with Hydrogen Sulphide. 

[d] Charcoal is heated with Sulphur Vapor. 

[e] Nitrogen Trioxide is mixed with Sulphur Dioxide. 

8. Describe experiments shewing how you would distinguish 
[a] Oxygen from Nitrous Oxide, 

[h] Nitrous Oxide from Nitric Oxide, 

[c] Hydrochloric Acid from Hydrobromic Acid. 

[d] Hydrobromic Acid from Hydriodic Acid. 

[c] Hydrogen Sulphide from Phosphuretted Hydrogen. 



I- 



(C.) 



h 



Cbutatton Steartrntnt, (?^ntano 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMAEY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



CHEMISTRY. 



SENIOR LEAVING AND HONOR MATRICULATION . 

G. Chambers, B.A., M.B. 
• Examimn : t J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 

T. H. Smyth, M.A.,B.Sc. 



Note. — Candidates tcill take any six of the eight questions. 

1. (a) The specific gravity of Hydrogen is 0.0692, that of 
Ammonia is 0.b9r> (air= 1). What is the molecular weight 
of Ammonia? Explain how you arrive at your conclusion. 

(6) The vapour density of Sulphur is said to be abnor- 
mal at .'500°C. and normal at 1000°C. Explain the meaning 
of these statements. 

(c) Describe experiments to show that Ammonium 
Chlcride is decomposed by heat into Ammonia and Hydrogen- 
chloride gas. 

2. A gas gives, on analysis, 

Carbon = 85.78 
Hydrogen = 14.32 



100. 
.SOO c.c. of the gas at 10"C. and 750 mm. Bar. weigh 0.35 
grams. Write the formula of the gas. 

3. (a) How can Barium Oxide be used as a means of pre- 
paring Oxygen from the air? 

(&) Compare the chemical properties of Oxygen and 
Ozone. 

(c) If the molecule of Oxygen consists of two atoms then 
the molecule of Ozone consists of more than two atoms. 
State facts in support of this statement. 

(OVER.) 



4. Chlorine, Bromine and Iodine are said to belong to tlie 
same natural family of elements. Explain and illustrate 
this statement. 

5. (a) How could you prepare the Tri-hydride of Arsenic 
(Arsiiie)? Compare its properties with Ammonia and Phos- 
phine. 

(6) Write equations showing the reactions which occur 
when Arsine, Phosphine, and Ammonia respectively burn in 



air. 



illustrating 



the action of Hydrogen 



6. Write equations 
Sulphide upon : 

(a) Chlorine Gas. 

(6) Ammonium Hydrate. 

(c) Nitric Acid. 

(d) Antimonous Chloride. 

(e) Solution of Ferric Chloride. 



7. A solution is known to contain Silver Nitrate, Mer- 
curous Nitrate, Mercuric Nitrate or Arsenious Oxide. How 
would you determine which it contains? 

8. (a) Give an account of the Chemistry of Calcium. H- 
lustrate its relations to Barium and Strontium. 

(b) What is the cause of the so-called temporary hard- 
ness of water. Explain the chemical reactions which occur 
in the different methods adopted for its removal. 



education ^fpartmunt, (Datario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1S91. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMAKY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



TRIGONOMETUY. 

SENIOR LEAVING AND HONOR MATRICULATION. 

(A. R. Bain, LL.D. 
Examiners:.^. F. Dupuis, M.A. 
(l. E. Martin, B.A. 



T 



Note. — Candidates are required to take all the questions of sec- 
tion A and any tico of section B. 

A. 

1. (a) Define an angle according to the usage of Plane 
Trigonometry. 

(b) Define the common units of angular measure. 

(c) Express in sign and magnitude in each of the units, 
the angle described by the minute hand of a clock between 
the times 9h.bm. and,llA.55w. 

2. (a) Define sin A, cos A, tan A, an'^ cot A, when A is less 
than a right angle. 

(6) Deduce from a geometrical construction the alge- 
braic value of —4- a, when « is less than JL. 
2 2 

(c) Find the value of each of the following : 
sm __, cos — , tan-ii. . 

3. (a) Express all the Trigonometric functions of a given 
angle in terms of its sine. 

(b) Find a value of d and of ^ from the equations sin d = 
^, and tan </> = yS. 

(c) Given sin 26 = cos 3^, find 6 and sin d. [over.] 



" / 



r 



sar 
thi 

•■ I 

(a! 

phi 

I 
wK 
air. 

G 
Sul 



7 
cun 

WOL 

i 

8. 

lust; 

r.ess 
intl 



4. {a) Prove that sin « + sin^9 = 2sin \ (« + ^9) cos \ (a—,% and 
write the corresponding value for cos« + coS;9. 

(6) Show that sin4rH-sin67^— sinJU"— sm 77^ = 8inrv, 

given sin 18°= ^^^~^ . 

4 

(c) Express cosiyid . cos n^. cos ^j^ as the sum of four 

cosines. 

5. In any triangle prove that : 

, , sin^ sin/? sinC 1 

(a) 



a 



(h) tan^{B—C) = 



c 

h—c 
b + c 



2R 

cotM. 



(c) tan^ + tan54-tanC= tan^.tani^.tanC. 

6. Find an expression for 

(a) The radius of the incircle (inscribed circle) of a tri- 
angle. 

(6) The radius of an excircle (escribed circle) of a tri- 
angle. 

(c) The radius of the circumcircle (circumscribing circle) 
of a triangle. 

7. (rt) Prove that 

r, cot — = r„ cot — = To cot — = r cot — cot — cot__. 
'^ 2 ^ 2 ^ 2 2 2 2 

(b) The centres of the excircles of a triangle are joined. 

Cll)C 

Show that the area of the triangle so formed is-^; — . 



) 



B. 

8. (a) Prove that 

sin a + sin/9 + sin/- — sin(« + ft -f ;-) 

cos« + cos/9 -)- cos;- -f cos(a +ft+y) 

(b) If /, m, n, are the altitudes of a triangle, drawn from 
the vertices A, B, C respectively, 

asin^-f &sini?-f-csinC = 2(Zcos^ + mca4j5 + wcos(7). 



= tan':i±i?tanl±Itan 



2 



2 



2 



nd 






Diir 



f 



9. (a) In any triangle a'^^b'^+c^ — 26ccosA Show from 
this tliat if c has two real positive values a is less than b, and 
the triangle is ambiguous. 

(b) If in the ambiguous case the ratio of the two values 
of the indeterminate side be v/3+2, and the given angle be 
4r)°, show that the angle between the two positions of the op- 
posite side is 60°. 

10. (a) Given a, b and C, write formula for finding A, B 
and c. . 

(6) The radii of tM'^o wheels, in the same plane, are R 
and r, and a belt goes around them and crosses between 
them at an angle 2ti. Find the length of the belt, and show- 
that the length is constant while the sum of the radii is con- 
stant. 



tri- 

tri- 

rcle) 



11. (rt) ABC \9, an equilateral l\, and E,onBC\^a, vertex 
of the inscribed square whose side lies along AC. Show that 
tan ^ilC=i (3— ,/.-}). 

(6) The altitude of a certain rock is a°, and after walk- 
ing b feet towards the rock up a slope of /9° to the horizon 
the altitude of the rock is then x°. Find the vertical height 
of the rock above the first position. 



ined. 



+ « 
2 • 

from 




Sup 



8. 
lust: 

ness 
intl 



(Education jOfpartmiint, Ontario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 



tup: lIKiH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



ALGEBRA. 



JUNIOR LEAVING AND PASS MATRICULATION. 

(A. R. Bain, LL.D. 
i:xaminera:\is. V. IJupuis, M.A. 
(I. E. Martin, B.A. 



Note. — Candidnfes for Junior Matrmdation icill take any eighf 
(jnestions in section A. Candidaten for the Junior Leaving 
eivamination iri/l take sin- questions in section A, and any two 
questions in section li. 



1. Collect and reduce to the simplest form 
x-\-y 2x 



(tt) 



+ 



x^ —x^y 

(3 — nn'2'. 



y x-JrV y^-x'y 

a h 



+ 



4 



{a—b){a—c)^{b-c){h—a)'^{c-a)(c—h) 

2. Find the value of x in (a) and the values of x and y in (6). 

(a) IrL^^+l + JiJZ: _ 4 
]/ 3a; + ] — v/3x 

(6) {a-h)x-^{c-d)y=^-\-q, {a-\-h)x—{c^-d)y=v-q- 

3. Resolve into factors : 

(a) a2^62_c2_^2_2a6 + 2cd. 

{})) 4a;4-f 6a;3 + 72a;-576. 
(c) a;8-7a;4-144, 

4. Solve the equations : 
(a) a!-|-_l_^3^^ 



2x 

(6) 3a!2-2aj+]/3^2z:4^i:6=18 + 2a;. 



(OVER.) 



J 



sill 
thi^ 



(A: 
ph 

wh 

ai 



Sul? 



7.' 
cure 
wou 

lUStl : 

ness 
in th 



6. Shew that 
b-c 



(a) 



+ 



a 



1 -f 6c 1 -t- a<l 



(), if ■ 



,« h — c c-a 

lfa;= , 2/=—^— 



2=. 



a 



a— & 






then xi/z \-x \-yi z~0. 




i). (a) Solve the equation, ax^-\-hx-\-c—0, and thence find tlie 
conditions for equal roots. 

{b) If the roots of x^ -px \-q^0 are « and ^9, and if «2 =,^^9, 
find the value of u in terms of ^9. 

7. Solve the following equations : 

(a) x-\-y=5, x'^-j-y'^=Go. 

(b) 2x'^—xy=6, 2y'^-\-'Sxy=S. 

8. (a) If 3a;=26 + 2c— a, 3?y=2a— &+2cand 3«=2a + 2^-c, 
shew that x^-\-y^+z^=a^-{-b'^-\-c'^ and xy+xz-^- yz=ab-\-ac -j- 
bc. 

(6) Prove that x* — ^2^*^+?*^"**^+** divided by x—a 
gives a* — pa^-\-qa'^ —ra-\-8 as remainder. 

9. If a ship requires 40 hands, a schooner 15, and a steamer 
10; if on a given day 36 vessels arrive in ])ort manned in all by 
750 men; and if the hands on the ships were sutticient to supply 
all the schooners and twice the number of steamers, how many 
vessels of each kind arrived that day ? 

10. The difference of two numbers is to the less as 4 is to 3, 
and their product multiplied by the less is 504 ; find the numbers. 

B. 

11. (a) When x=2-\-^/~y find the value of x^ -2x'^-\-x-\-18. 

<^^ Given 1 + Ji _-^=^ll +-^ to find x. 

\ « \ ' o 

12. (a) If the roots of cx'^-\-dx-irf=0 be « and /9, shew that 
the roots of c'^x'^ -j-c{d—f)x — df=0 are «-l-/9 and a/9. 

{b) x^-\-y'^=2x'^y^-15, x-\-y=xy + l. 

13. Find two numbers whose difference is 4, and tv,'ice whose 
product is equal to the cube of the less. 

14. A number consists of three digits, the square of the second 
digit equals the product of the other two. The number multiplied 
by 7 is 124 times the sumi of the digits, and if it be increased by 
594 the digits will be inverted. Find the number. 



(gbucation gefiarfrntnt, #rttarto 

MIDSUMMEU EXAMINATIONS, :«yl. 



THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



ALGJBBRA. 

SENIOR LEAVma AND HONOR MATRICULATION. 



(A. R. Bain, LL.D. 
Examiners: I a. F. Dupuis, M.A. 
(l. E. Martin, B.A. 



Note. — Camlidaten tdll take any se^n of the nine questiom. 

1 . {a) Assuming the Binomial Theorem for positive integral 
indices prove it for fractional exponents. 

(ft) Shew that when n is a positive integer the coefficient 
of the rth term in the expansion of (1 -\-x)n equals the sum of 
the coefficients of the rth and the (»• — 1)<A terms in the expan- 
sion of (1 -fa')"— 1. 

(c) Find the coefficient of a?* in the expansion of (1 +a!+ 

2. {a) By means of the expansion of (l+a?)^ find a series 
whose limit is \/~T- 

{h) Find the coefficients of a"* in the expansion ot'SlZIz^l . 

^ {1—xy 

(c) If (10-|-.3|/Tr)« =a+h where a and n are integers and 
ft is a proper fraction, prove that (a + 6)(l— 6)= 1. 

.3. (a) If the roots of ax^ +2bx+c = be imaginary, what 
relations subsist between the coefficients of the equation ? 

(ft) If X be real determine the limits between which 

x^+bx+4 , , , < 

— L — ' — can have no real value. 
x^+bx 

(c) Find the condition that y^ +axy-\-hx^ +cy +c?a;+e = 
may be resolved into two rational factors of the first 
degree. (over.) 



:l 



sai 
thi 



(Al 
ph) 

ain 

I 

i 



7: 

cure 
wou 

8.' 
lustr j 

ness 
in th 



4. Factor tho following oxpressloiis:— 
(a) x^+ {b—2a).v » f (a » —2ah).r + /wr " . 

+ (« + /#—'')'+(/'— '')"• 
(c) 2j,-4— 3a;»— 2U'«— 2.C + 24. 

»'). Solve the eqiintions, 

(/>) .x- + 7 ic^— 22 - 

(c) (l4-.t'»}(l+//'^) = 2(.r//— 1)», ii; + J/ = r>. 

6. (rt) If „6V denote the number of combinations of n tliin^H 
taken r tof^ether, prove that n-f-26V-(-l = n^V+l + 2,, 6V + 
nCr — !• 

(ft) If the total number of combinations of 2« things taken 

1, 2, H, 2«, in a group i-espectively be 129 times the total 

number of combinations of n things taken 1, 2, H. . . .w re- 
spectively, f.nd n. 

(c) Prove that the number of permutations of 2« things of 
which one-half are alike and the other half alike though 
different fi'om the first is equal to the greatest number of com- 
binations that can be made of the 2w things of which none 
are alike. 

7. (a) Deduce the formula for the sum of n terms of a Geo- 
metrical Progression. 

(b) If a G. P. whose ratio is r consists of An terms, shew that 
the sum of the first and last n terms is to the sum of the 
second and third n terms as r'^^ — r" -f 1 : »•", 

(c) If X, y, z be in H. P., a, x, b, in A. P. and a, z, h in G. P., 



prove that 2/ = 2(a + 6){^|-^i+^Ayj 



-2 



I 



8. (a) Define the terms ratio and jrtoportion, and explain 
what is meant by the statement that one quantity varies in- 
versely as another. 

(6) If xrfiy, and xytjiz^, prove that x^ -^y^ -\-z^m xyz. 

(c) Shew that any sum of money, twace the discount on it 
for a given time and the interest on the sum for the same 
time are in harmonical proportion. 



(^h-ay 



n thing'H 
2}| Cr + 

[?8 taken 

the totiil 

. . . w re- 

thinps of 
) thougii 
r of coiu- 
ich none 



9. (a) The sum of p terms of an Arithmetical Proj;rossion is 
7 and the sum of q terms is p, show tliat tlio sum of (/>— y) 
terms is 



(f^O 



(;^— 7)' 



(/>) Shew tliat the sum to n terms of tlie series, 

(c) If A bo tlie sum of the series formed by taking tlio 1st 
and every j)ih term after the first of an infiniro Geometrical 
Progression whoso first term is one and whose ratio i? less 
than one, and if li be the sum of the series formed by taking 
the 1st and every qth term after the first, prove 

A {li—l) ^ B (A—l) . 



of a Geo- 

hew that 
Ti of the 

» in G. P., 



i explain 
kraries in- 



■jixyz. 
ount on it 
the same 



I 



i 



I ! 



Cbutrtion gi»artmmt, (Ontario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY. 



JUNIOR LEAVING AND PASS MATRICULATION. 

Examiners 



W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 

T. C. L. Armstrong, M.A., LL.B. 

J. E. Bryant, M.A. 



Note. — Only 9 queetions in all are to he answered by any can- 
didate, namely, section A, 5 questions from section B, 2 
from section C, and 1 from section D. The two ques- 
tions marked with an asterisk are for candidates for the 
Junior Leaving Examination only, and both these ques- 
tions m,ust he taken by these candidates. 

A. 

1. Describe the grievances and complaints of the people 
of Canada which led to The Constitutional Act of 1791. 
Describe the provisions of this Act and the hopes of those 
who promoted it ; and shew wherein the Act was successful in 
allaying the discontents of the people and vhei-ein it was not 
successful. 



B. 

2. Describe graphically the conflict at Ligny, Quatre Bras, 
and Waterloo. 

3. Describe the policy of William Pitt towards Ireland. 
How far was he successful in carrying out his policy, and 
in what respects did he fail ? What were the causes of his 
failure and the results of it ? 

4. Sketch and contrast the respective attitudes of Burke and 
Pitt towards France during the prof^ress of the French Revolu- 
tion (1789-1798). State and account for Pitt's final attitude 
towards the French Government of that time. (over.) 



5. Give an account of the events in the earlier part of the reign 
of George III (1763-1792) which were concerned with the devel- 
opment of the freedom of the press and the increase of it3 
influence. 

*6. Sketch the personal character and political career of the 
elder Pitt (Lord Chatham) stating particularly his efforts 
(a) in upholding the honor of the empire abroad ; 
lb) in promoting the independence of parliament and parlia- 
mentary reform ; 
(c) in preventing the secession of the American Colonies. 
Mention any other notable efforts which Chatham made to pro- 
mote the welfare of the kingdom and advance its honor. 

7. Enumerate and describe the improvements and advance- 
ments made in the technical arts, manufactures, agriculture and 
commerce of Britain from 1750 to 1790. 

8. Describe and account for the religious revival which char- 
acterized the middle of the 18th century. Mention some results 
of that revival which extended beyond the immediate sphere of 
its action. 

*9. Give an account of Walpole as a Minister of Finance. 
What were the principles of his financial policy ? How far was 
he able to carry his principles into effect and wherein did he fail '? 
Describe the influence of his policy as Finance Minister and 
Premier upon the mercantile prosperity of the nation. 

10. Describe the difficulties and obstacles that stood in the way 
of the union of England and Scotland in the reign of Queen Anne. 
How were these overcome or removed '? What were the provis- 
ions of the Act of Union ? What have been the practical 
advantages of the Union ? 



C. 

11. Sketch briefly the political and military career of Julius 
Caesar, accounting as far as you can for its success. Give your 
estimate of Ceesar's character and abilities ; also of the influence 
of his career upon the history of the world. 

12. Sketch the career of Philip of Macedon, and give some 
account of the resistance offered to his ambition by Demosthenes. 
Give your estimate of the influence of Philip's successes upon 
the development of political freedom in the ancient world. 



the reign 
he devel- 
1,86 of its 



3r of the 

s 

id parlia- 

lonies. 
le to pro- 



advance- 
Iture and 



ich char- 
ae results 
sphere of 

Finance. 
V far was 
d he fail '? 
ister and 



13. Sketch the history of the Persian invasion under Xerxes 
(B.C., 480), describing more particularly the achievements of the 
Greeks at ThermopylsB and Salamis. Sketch briefly the mili- 
tary operations of the Persians and the Greeks during the next 
year (B.C., 479), and state your opinion as to the general influ- 
ence of the invasion upon the subsequent history of the Grecian 
States. 

D. 

14. Describe generally the extent and boundaries of the British 
Possessions in North America : 

(a) at the beginning of the Seven Years' War (1756) ; 

{h) at the close of the War of American Independence (1783). 

15. Describe briefly the position (using modern names) of the 
following : 

(a) Gallia Transalpina, (i) Cilicia, 

(//) Gallia Cisaipina, {j) Bithynia and Pontus, 

{c) Liguria, (k) Thracia, 

(d) Etruria, il) Dacia, 

(e) Lativim, (r«) Africa (propria), 
(/) Samuium, (n) Numidia, 

(ij) Apulia, {<)) Mauritania. 

[h] Asia (propria), 



n the way 

Ben Anne. 

le provis- 

practical 



• of Julius 

jive your 

influence 



give some 
aosthenes. 
jsses upon 
rid. 



Education ifparlment. Ontario. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNJ. 
VERSITY MARTICULATION. 



HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY. 

SENIOR LEAVING AND HONOR MATRICULATION. 



|W. J. Alexandeb, Ph.D. 
Examiners : T. C. L. Armstrong, M.A., LL.B. 
I J. E. Bryant, M.A. 



Note.— Ow?j/ six questions in all are to be ansicered. namely : 
ANY FIVE questions of section A, and either question of 
section B. 

A. ' 

1. Describe the relations and conduct towards England of 
William Prince of Orange, prior to the " Invitation." 

2. Describe the Act of Uniformity of 1662, the conditions 
which made it possible, and the consequences that flowed 
from it. 

3. Give some account of the development of physical sci- 
ence and natural philosophy during the 17 th century. 

4. Contrast the social and religious aspects which England 
presented before and after the Restoration. 

.5. Describe the ''New Model." Give an account of its 
political opinions, and sketch briefly its political conduct from 
the battle of Naseby (1645) to the expulsion of the Forty 
Members (''Pride's Purge" — December, 1648). 

6. Sketch the history of the Long Parliament from its first 
assemblage to the attempte(^ arrest of the "Five Members." 

7. Describe the means made use of by Charles I to obtain 
revenues during the years 1629-1640. Dlustrate your 
answer by references to particular acts. (over.) 



8. (tt) Describe the character of a typical puritan English 
gentleman in the reign of James I. 

(b) Describe the influence of the translation of the 
Bible into English, upon the intellectual, social, and 
moral life of the people. 

9. Sketch the character of Elizabeth, illustrating it by 
reference to her acts as monarch of England. 

10. Sketch the career of Thomas Cromwell, with special 
reference to (a) the power of the throne; (6) the status of the 
Church; (c) the status of Parliament. 



B. 

11. Describe briefly the gcogra 
leal significance of the following : 
considered a full answer.] 

(a) Sedgemoor, 

(6) Dover, 

(c) Breda, 

(d) Worcester, 

(e) Dunbar, 
(/) Wexford, 
(g) Drogheda, 

(h) Oxford (1642-1646), 

(i) Uxbridge, 

(J) Bristol (1643-1645), 



phical position and liistor- 
[NoTE. — Any ten will be 

(A;) Chalgrove Field, 
(/) Nottingham and North- 
hampton (1642), 
(m) York (1640), 
(n) Berwick, 
(o) Rh.5, 

(p) Kinsalc (1601), 
(q) Zutphen, 
(r) Pinkie, 
(.«) Flodden. 






12. Give brief geographical accounts of the foreign terri- 
tories acquired or lost by Britain during the Period covered 
by this examination (1492-1688), and also brief historical ac- 
counts of the principal events connected with their acquis- 
ition or loss. 



it 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

THE HIGH SCHOOL PBIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



ZOOLOGY. 



SENIOR LEAVING AND HONOB MATRICUI.ATION . 



Examiners 



G. Chambers, B.A., M.B. 
J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 
T. H. Smyth, M.A.,B.Sc. 



'Note.— Candidates must take question 1 and either question 2 
or S in section A ; one question in sectioii B, and two 
questions in section C. 



1. Diasect out and draw the appendages and mouth parts of 
the animal submitted. 

2. Dissect out and draw the aUmentary canal of this animal. 

3. Dissect out and draw the nervous system of this animal. 

B. 

4. This form is said to belong to the segmented animals ; the 
earthworm is also a segmented animal. Point out how the seg- 
mentation differs in this form from that of the earthworm. 

5. Give a brief account of the structure of the eye in this 
animal. How does it differ from the eye of the Vertebrates ? 



6. Point out the chief differences between the catfish and the 
Ganoid fishes. 

7. Explain briefly the effects which a parasitic mode of life 
may have upon the structure of an animal. 

8. Make a drawing to show the parts of the brain of a frog. 
What parts of the brain are more especially developed in man. 



€burHtion ^(yartnunt, #ntaho 

MIDSUMMER EXAMINATIONS, 1891. 

TPIE HIGH SCH( )L PRIMARY, LEAVING, AND UNI- 
VERSITY MATRICULATION. 



B OTANY . 

SENIOR LEAVING AND HONOR MATRIOUIiATION. 



Examiners 



G. Chambers, B.A., M.B. 
Mackenzie, B.A. 
Smyth, M.A., B.Sc. 



( G. Cha 
^ J. J. M 

(t. H. S 



Note. — OaniUdutes vitmt take the first six questions and any one of the re- 

mainiwj two, 

1. Describe fully the plant submitted. 

2. Refer it to its proper position among Phanerogams and 
name several allied Canadian plants. 

3. Draw : 

(a) A Floral diagram. 

(/>) A longitudinal section through the flower showing the 
relationship of the various organs. 

4. Point out the characters in this plant which you would 
consider belong: 

(a) to the Family, 
{h) to the Genua, 
(c) to the Species. 

5. Make a drawing of the microscopic preparation submitted, 
so as to show the different tissues giving their names. 

(Note— Candidates are not required to draw tlie wliole section, but only enough 
of it to sliow ali tlie tissues and ttieir relation to one another.) 

6. Show how a transverse section through a grass stem would 
differ from the preparation submitted. 

7. Give a brief account of the minute structure of a root. 
Explain how it performs its function of absorption. What 
other function may belong to it ? 

8. Mention some of the chief characters of the Algae. Give 
a brief account of their reproduction. 



1\ 



Qtnfuerciffo of Sovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



FIRST YEAR. 



GREEK AUTHORS. 



Examiner: Francis Huston Wallace, M.A., B.D. 



I. 

1. Translate : 

Kat tot' 'OSuffo-euv Sipro iroKivZ* t/jtev' axnap 'A6i]vij 
rioW^i' '^epa ^eOe <^t\a (j)poveova ^OSvafji, 
Mrj Tt? i^air'/Kwu /xeyaOvfitou nvTi^oKriaat 
KepTofjbioi T eVeecro-i Kat i^epeoiO' o Tt? eirj, 
'A\\' ore 8tj dp' efieWe ttoXiv SvaeaOai tpavurjv^ 
"E/^^a oi avTe06\r)(Ti- Oea yXavKCjirtt ^Adtjvrj 
HapdeviK^ iiKVia veijviBi, Kakiriv e^vcrrj. 
St^ Be irpoaff avTov' 6 8' dveipero oiof 'OSycro-cu?' 
'"D rsKo^, ovK dv fioi 86fiov dvepo<! ryyrjaaio 
'AXkivoov, 0? TOicrSe fier duOpcoTToiaiv dvd<r<rei ; 
Kat yap iyo) ^eivof TaXaTretpto? ivddS' ixdvo) 
TTjXoOev i^ d7rir]<{ ya(r)<i' too ov riva 6l8a 
' ApdpMTTtou, 01 TqvSe TToXiv Kat epya ve/xovTai." 

Homer, Odyssey, VII. 

2. Parse Xfiev, xeve^ <f>l\a, i^epioi9\ elKvia. 

3. Write philological notes on nrokiv^, r)epa, dvrifio- 
\ri<Ta<i, y\avKci>Tri'i, dvdpdyrroKriv. 

4. Give the principal parts of &pTO, efjUzWe, SvaeaBai, 
hveipero, iKavio. 

5. Translate : 

'^11? (j)d0', 6 8' op/MTjOeU 6eov ^pyero, ^aive S' doiBrjp 
"lEivOev iXwu tov ot fiev ivaaeXfKov eVt vtj&v 
Baj'Te? aTreTrXecoVy irvp iv KXiaiyai .SaX6vTe<i, 
'Apyeloi, Tol S' r]8rj dyaKXvTov dfi^' 'OSvarja 
ISilar evl Tpdxav dyopp KeKaXvpLfikvoi vKirifi' 



Afrrol yap fitv Tpwe? i<; uKpotroXtv ipvaamo, 
Xlv fiiu e<TTr)Kei, Toi, 8' axpira ttoAX' tvfopevov 
Hfievoi iifi<f>' avTuV rplxa hi ai^iaiv i^uBave ^ov\i}, 
'Hi StOTrX^fat KolXov Sopv prjXii x"^*?'. 
*H Kara trerpatov ffaXieiv ipviravTa<i iir &Kpr}<i, 
*H idav fiiy &ya\fia deuu 6e\KTijpiov elvai, 
Tj} trep Si) ical eirena TeXevrrjcreadai efieXXew 
Alca yap Tjv uiroXeadai, ifirjp 7r6\t? hixi^iKaXv-<^ri 
^ovpdreov fieyav 'itnTop, 56' e'laro 7rdvTe<{ apiaroi 
'Apyeiap Tpweaci ^ovov koX Krjpa <f>ipovTe^. 

Ibid., VIII. 

G. Parso and explain the syntax of hOev, iXibv a»9, 
fji.iv, BiuTrXfj^ai, efieXXep, uTroXeadai. 

7. Give an account of thu Homeric dotBoL 

n. 

1. Translate: 

Sfl. Tt Bal, & Avai/xaxe ; orrorep, &v oi irXeiovi 
CTraipSxTiP ■^fiMP, TovTOK fieXXeif y^ptjcrOai ; 
AT. t/ yap dp Tt<? Kat iroioi, &» Zcotcparef; ; 

211. 'H Kai av, u) MeXrjaia.ovTcof &v "ttoiok ; k&p 
€1 Tt<? TTepl dyQ}pia<s tov u/eo? aoi ^ovXrf ellrj rl yprj 
daKelu, apa rot? irXeiocrtp hv "qfiwp ireidoio, rj '«€tw/) 
otTTt? Tvyxdv€i VTTo TTaiBoTpl^fj diyadcfi Tre7ratBevfjiepo<i 
Kai ^aKi]K(o<i ; 

MF. 'EiKeipa ei«o? ye, & '^u)Kpare<i. 

212. AuTw ap' &.P fioXXop ireiQoio r) rerTapaip 
oIktip rjfiip ; 

ME. "Iffo)?. 

Sn. 'Ettiitt^/mp yap, olfiai. Set xptveadai, dX\* ob 
irXijdei, TO fAcXXop KaX&<; Kpi0ijae(T$ai. 

ME. Um yap ov ; 

2n. OvKovv Kai vvv XPV wpwTov avTo rovro 
tTKeylfaadai, el eari Tt? r}p,Siv Tevw/co? irepX ov ^ov- 
Xevofieda, fj ov' Kai el fikp earcPy exetpq) Treideadai. epi 
oi/Tt, TOW S' flfWou? edp' el 8i /*»/, aXXop ripk ^Tyrelv. 
^ irepl (TfUKpov oteade vvpi KivBvpeveiP koI av Kai 
Avai/ia'xp^, d\\' ov wepl tovtov tov KT'^fJuiTO<i h t&v 
vfierepiop fieyicrTov bp T^jy^^upei ; vUo)v yap ttov ^ 
'XpriaT&p ■f} T&pavTia yevofiipmp xal ttS? 6 oIko^ 6 tov 
fraTpo^ ovT(o<i olKi]<TeTai, orroidi ap Ttve? ol TratSev 
yepioPTai. 

Plato, Laches, IX. 

2. Parse Sat, irXelov^, K&Vf rjcKrjKWf oud^aeTai, 



3. Briefly dcHcribe the scene, the persons, the subject, 
and the coui-so of tliis Dialogue. 

4. Translate : 

NI. EC 7«, & Adxv^, 6ti obBiv otei av in Trpayna 
ehai^ 5ti auTOf dpri ifpdvrf^ dvSpeiai iripi, ovSiv 
elSo)^, &XV el Kai iyo) irepo% roiovro^ dva^av^aofiai, 
Trpo<i TOVTo ^Xiireii, Kai ovhku Srt Bioicei, cuv ioiK€, 
aoi fxer' ifiov p.'qhkv elBivai <ov irpoff^Kei iTriar^firju 
iyetv &vBpl oiofihtp Ti elvai,. ov fiiv oiv fioi So/vetf 
a>9 dXridm dvdpdmuov irpdy/ia ipyd^eaffai, ovBh 
TToof avTou ^Xiireiv '\\d tt^o? tou9 &X\ov9' iyot S* 
otfiai i loi irepi &v iXiyofiev vvv re iirieiKm elpfjadai, 
Kai et Ti airr&v fii) iKavm etprjrai^ Harepou iiravopdat- 
treadai icat fierd Ad/JMU0<;, oi av irov oXei. KarayeXaVf 
Kol ravra obBi i8a>v trayirore rov ^dfitova, Kat uer' 
&XX(ov, Kai iiretSdv ffefiauoaiofiai airrd, BiSd^to Koi 
<re, Kai ov <f>dop^<T6D' Boxeh yap fAOi Kat fidXa at^hpa 
Beladat, fiadelv. 

Ibid., XXX. 

5. Parse and explain the syntax of elB(i)<i, Btolaei, 
TrpoiTiJKely elpijadai, Beta Oat. 

6. Decline Trpdyfia, dvBpeia^, duBpt. 

7. Write out the perfect indicative active of fiadelv. 



umntvtuts ot ^roronio. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



GKKEK AUTHORS. 

HONORK 



Examiner: Francis Huston Wallace, M.A.,B.D. 



I. 

1. Translate : 

Tbv o avT€ Trpoa-ietTre 6eh <y\avK5)Tn<i 'Adjjvij' 
" N/jTTto? €t?, <w ^€iv, ■)) rrjXod eu el\^\ovda<i, 
Et 8f] TtjvBe ye yalav dveipeai' ovSi ri \iijv 
OvT(o v(OPV/x6<i eariv' Xaacrt 8e fiiu fioKa ttoWoI, 
'H/Liei' 6<Toi vaiovac 7rp6? tJw t' '^eXiov re, 
'H8' oaaoi jxeTOTTiade ttotI ^6(j)ov rjepoevra. 
"Hrot fikv Tprj^eta Koi ou^ t7r7rjj\aT09 iaTiv, 
OifS^ \i7jv Xvirprj, drap oiiB' eupeta rervKrai. 
'Ev fxev yap ol o-tro? d6ea<f)aToi{, eu 8e re olvo<f 
Viyverai' alet 8' o/x^po^ 6;^et TedaXvld t eeparj. 
Alyi^OTo<{ 8' dyaSij Kai 0ouI3oto<;' e<TTt fiiv v\r) 
IlavTOiT}, ev 8' dpSfiol eTrrjeravol irapeaaiv. 
TcS TOt, ^e'lv, '\ddKr,<i ye koX e? Tpoirjv ouofi ixei, 
Tijv Trep TrjXov <f)aa-iu 'A^a^'Sos efi/xevac aiTjv." 

Homer, Odyssey, XIII. 

2. Parse etV, dveipeai, lervKTai, jrapeaaiv, t^. 

3. Derive vqirio^, i^epoevra, WTTTT^XaTo?, ddea(fiaTO(i, 
hirrieTavol. 

4. Decline ficp, ^S). 

5. Scan the last four lines of the extract. 

6. Outline the story of the Odyssey from book 
XIII. to the end. 



7. Trnnslnto: 

"n? elTTtav dvopovae, Ti'Oei 8' apa ol irvpof eyyii, 
"Ebvrju, iv 8' oicou re Koi aiyS>v Bipfiar €$a\\ev. 
"Evd' 'Ohvaeix; KareXexT- iirl Bi -xKalvav ^d\ev axnw 
TlvKvr)v Kac ueydXTjv, rj oi TrapeKeaceT duoi^d^, 
"Evvvadai ore Tt? yeifiutv eicrra'/Ko'i opono. 

'^fiv fxiv evd' '08u(76u9 Kocfi'qcaTo, Tol Se Trap' aifrov 
"AvBpes Kot/A^aavTO veijviar ovSe av^MTtj 
"HvBavev abTodc KoiTOf, voiu airo Koifi7j$fjvat, 
'AW y' ap e^o) iwv wTrXtfero. ;\;at/3e B' 'OBva-aeixi 
"Otti pa oi ^lOTOV irepiK'qBeTO v6<T^iv eoi/T09. 
Up&TOV fieu ^l<f>o<i o^v TTepl crrc^apoU ^d\eT &fioi^, 
'Afi(f)t Be )(\aii>au eicraar dXe^dvefiou, fidKa irvKpr^u, 
*Av Be vaKTjv eXcT alyof evTpe^eo<; fieydXoio, 
Et'Xero B' o^vv aKovra kvvmv aXKTtjpa Kal dvBp5>v. 
B^ B' cfievai Keicov oOi irep cve<i dpyi6BovTe<i 
Uerprj vtto y7^a<pvpf] evBov, hopea vtt Icoy^. 

Ibid., XIV. 

8. Parse oi, irapeKecKeT , eeacraT , Keltov, Bo/oeoi. 

9. Explain tlie construction in evvvadai, Kot/Mijdfjvai, 

10. State briefly the main points at issue in the 
Homeric controversy. 

II. 

1. Translate : 

&ovKvBiBrj<; ' kdr)vaio<i ^vviypa-dre rov TToXe/xov r&v 
YleXoTTovvifjcriwv Kal ^Adrjuaitov, co? eTToXefirjaav Trp6<; 
dXX^Xovii, dp^dfievo^ ev9v<; KaOiarTafievov Kal iX7riaa<i 
fiiyav T€ eaeadai Kal d^ioXoyooTaTov t&v Trpoyeyevrj- 
fiivcov, TeKfiaipofievo^ oti UKfid^ovre^ re ^aav e? 
avTOV dfjk(f)6Tepni, Trapaaicevrj ttj Trday xal to dXXo 
'EXXtji/ikov opSiv ^vviardfievov Trpo? e/carepou?, to 
fieu evOii'i to Be Kal Biavoovfievop. Kivqai^ yap avTij 
fieyiarrj Bfi tow "EXXija-iv iyevcTO Kol fiepei rivl ^ap- 
^dpoop, m Be eitrelv, Kal eirl iTXelvrov dvdpdfirav. ret 
yap irpo avr&v koX to. en ircOutiOTepa <ra^w fiiv 
evpeiv Bid y(p6vov ir\r)do<i dBvvara ijw ck Be TeKfiripuou 
&v iirl fiaKporarov crKoirovvri fioc irKnevaai ^vfi- 
^aiuei oh fieydXa vo/jbi^(o yeveadai ovre xard tous 
TToXifiovi; ovT€ 69 TO, dXXa. 

Thucydides, I. 

2. Explain the construction in KaOta-rafievov, fjUyav, 
TO n'ev evdv<i, m<} Be eitrelv, Siv. . ^vfiBaivet. 



3. ^ovKvBiSr]^. Give a brief account of his life and 
literaiy labors. 

4. Describe the ostensible and the real causes of the 
Peloponnesian war according to Thucydides. 

5. Translate : 

" Tou? fiev AaKcBaifioviov^, & avSpa ^vfifiaypi, ovk 
&v en alriaa-aifjieda eof oil xal abrot iylnj^Kr/ievoi top 
TToXefiov elai Koi rjfia<i i^ tovto vvv ^vvT^yayov. j^pi) 
yap T0V9 rjycf.'Mva'i ra t'8ta e^ Xcrov vefiovjat rit tcoivh 
irpoa-Koireip, wairep xal ev a\Xot9 €« Trduratv Trport- 
fiSivrai. rjfxSiv hk oaoi fiiu ^ Adrjvaloifi rjBij ivifSXayq- 
trav, ov^t SiSaxv^ Beovrai &<ne <^v\d^acdai avroW 
row he Tr)v fieaoyeiau fiaXXov Kal fit) ev irop^ Kar^- 
Krjfievov^ uBevac ')^pr) oti, rot? /caro) r)v fir) Afivvaxri, 
yoKeirmTepav e^ovai ttjv KaraKOfiiBrju twv wpaicov 
Kai TToKiv avTiXrjylrip S)v r) ddXjiaaa rfj ritreiptp BLBaxn, 
Koi T&v vvv \eyofieva>v fit} KaKOv<{ KpiTa<i a«9 firj irpo- 
(TrjKovTov elvai, trpocrBe'^feaOai Be trore, el to. Kara 
TrpooivTo, K&y P-^XP'' ^^^^ '''o Beivbv irpoekdelv, Koi 
irepl avTwv ov^ ^(/<rov vvv ^ovXeveadai. 

Ibid. 

6. Parse and explain the syntax of alTcacraip,e6a, 
evrjWdyTja-av, dfivvcoat, TrpoarjKOVTcov, irpooivTO. 

7. Write a note on the speeches in Thucydides. 

8. Translate : 

'0 p.ev TleptKX^? roiavra ehrev. ol Bk 'A ^ijvaloi 
vop,iaavTe<i dpiara <T<f)iai irapaivelv ainov €'^r)(f>i- 
aavTO a eKeXeve, Kai Toif AaKeBaip^ovioi^ (VTreKpivavro 
Tfj exeivov yv(i}p,r), KaO' exaard re dxf €<f>pa(re Kat to 
^y/xTTov, ovB^v KeXev6p,evot iroi^aeiv, Biter/ Be Kara ras 
^vvdrjKa<i eTOip,oi elvai BiaXveadat irepl "^Siv eyKXrf- 
fiaTcov iiri tar} Kal 6p,oia. Kai oi nev direydtpr/aav eir 
oiKOV Kal ovKeri varepov eirpea^evovTO. 

Ibid. 

9. Explain the construction in KeXevouevoi iroi^aeiv. 
10. Give the gist of Pericles' advice here referred to, 



un\\^tvM9 of QTotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



ALL THE YEARS. 



GREEK PROSE. 



Examiner : W. P. Mustard, M.A. 



Translate into Greek : 

1. They said that they would beat the Athenians. 

2. He has a very beautiful head. 

3. The words which the soothsayer speaks are false. 

4. Some went one way, others another. 

5. Surely we do not persuade the gods with gifts, 
do we ? 

6. They were more numerous than brave. 

7. I went away that I might not see him. 

8. If the enemy do this, we f hall deprive them of 
their ships. 

9. The law takes care that this shall not occur. 

10. If he had had even three talents he would have 
ffiven them to his brother. 



a„wt«(t»jt Jtotonto. 

OUST AND SKCOND VKABS. 

GllEKK PROSE- 

HONORS. 
( MAtm.cE H«TTOK M^A. 

„,i h» the ini«UUe of 

Now In the end of ^}^^\y'^l^,J^.. iust at its 

.£; when the -— ^,"^-v^ ^^^^ J^. ^^^ , 

prime, with which I ^^'^^^^^^^^^ there happened to 
^nd have seen others ;««;l^^,°; phUerctvnos. Now 
W the aveat festival of "'^^^^'./'^aY he travelled 
tc the place where they ^'^1^^^^,^ ,i the wind 
bv the sacred w'^>^'°"V^^„a Cir sterns, in about 
afwaVH blow steadily ^f'^'^J^'^'^^ or bv a man ot 
Wtl day. and by a -^^^f.^^n something less, so 
decent waist, marching "^ *;i^'; . ^^en use the sacred 
that as well on this ^ccoun fcwe m ^^^ ^^^ 
wagons, and also because no ^^^y ^^^^^ the custom 
but especially the «;^^^J^^Xve than to give, and it is 
is established rather to recuve ^^^ ^een 

more shameful in their eyes not ^^^-. ^.otwiihstand- 
rsLd,than.having asked not^^^^^^^^^^ ^.^ote t.ns 

tng which it seemed good to Ihucj ^^^^^^^^ ^he 

Uftory. a sliip -^f ,f,t^ it v'come in. both other- 
Thraceward parts ^ fV"\' ^pense and to go to the 
-- "^"^ SrtctionrSn Tlnicyd^^^^^^^ 

to obliterate the fi/^f"\,Se ephemeral he thought 



the otnur slianicliilly, something havinj,' happened at 
examination. And when the antaj>oiiistip octoremes 
appeared it seemed to those hiol<iri<;on to he more like a 
solemn procession of some <j;od, or a hnryino; of those 
fallen in war, than a race: hut strai<,ditway there was a 
cliimour: hut to Thncydides it seemed most according to 
custom to yell " Well "rowed, ♦F(»ur ! " since he also was a 
citizen of my own city : which I did, adding to it with 
an oath, reasonahly, the mud simultaneously getting 
into my eyes and ascending my nose. 

C. E. Montague. 



Bnlbnnitp ot Sorant^. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATION!!) : I8ttl. 



FIRST YEAK. 



LATJN AUTHORS. 



Examiner: FitANcis Huston Wallace, M.A., B.D. 



I. 

1. TraiiHlate : 

Musis amicus trisfcitianj ot inetus 
Tradnm protervis in mare Creticum 
Porfcare ventis, queis sub Arcto 
Rex gelidae metuatur orae, 
Quid Tiridaton terreat, unice 
Securus. 0, quae fontibus ititegiis 
Oaudes, apricos necte flores, 
Necto meo Lamiae coronam, 
Pimplei dulcis ! Nil sine te mei 
Prosunt honores ; hunc fidibus novis, 
Hunc Lesbio sacrare plectro 
Teque tuasque decet sorores. 

Horace, Odes 1. 

2. tScan tlie first stanza, marking all quantities. 

3. Give the principal parts of all the verbs in the 
extract. 

4. Parse muais, queis, orae, Pimplei. 

5. Translate: 

Saepius ventis agitatur ingens 
Pinus, et celsae graviore casu 
Docidunt turres, feriuntque summos 

Fulgura montes 
Sperat infestis, metuit secundis 
Alteram sortem bene praeparatum 
Pectus. Informes hiemes reducit 

Jupiter, idem 



i 






Sinninovct. Non.si innh' nunc ft olim 
Sic erit. QiioikIiiiii cillinra tact'iitciii 
Siwcitat iimHain iicrpK! scniptM- ajviiiii 

Tcmlit Apollo. 
Rohns an;,fustis auimosuH at(|ii(.' 
Fortis appall! ; .sapioJitcr uNmii 
Contrahf.s vrnto iiiiniiiiii scciimlo 

Tmgida vela. 

M«)UA(!K, (JilcH II. 

6. Decline togtitlicM- twjeiiH pinuH, i/nioiure caaa. 

7. Parse infculis, Idem (in (•ij,'hth line of extmctj, 
a/ppare, cunlrakeu. 

II. 

1. Translate : 

Ncquo eiiim est hoc »lissinmlaii<liiiii, (juod 
obscurari non potest, sed pi.i' iiohi.s lurendum : 
ti'aliiniui oiniies laudis .studio, et optimus t|iiis(iue 
inaxiine gloria diicitur. Ipsi illi pliil<;.s(jplii ft,iajn 
iilis libellis, (juo.s de eonteinnenda gloria .scribunt, 
no; \«m Huuni in.scribunt: in eo ip.so, in (pio prai- 
'licafioneui nobilitatenKjuo despiciunt, pranlicari 
u» ie ac noiniimri vclunt. DociiiiiiHcpiidoui Jiriitu.s, 
Hiininui.s ille vir et iniperatoi', Aceii, ainieissimi siii, 
earminibus tein[)loriini ac niominiontornni aditus 
exornavit suoruni. Jam vero ille, (pii cum .Etolis, 
Ennio comite, bellavit, Fulviu.s, iioii dubitavit 
Martis mnnubias Musis consiiciarc Quanj, in (pui 
urbo imjieratores prope aruuiti poetarnm nomen «it 
Mu.sarum delubra coluerunt, in ea non dt.'bunt 
togati judices a iMusaruni liouore et a poetarum 
•salute abhorrere. 

Ckjeho, Pro Arr.hla. 

2. State the main points of this case, and outline 
Cicero's treatment of his subject. 

3. Write notes on iUi 'pkiloaophi, liJnnio, togafi, 

4. Ti-an slate : 

Quid enim tarn novum, quam adolescentuhini 
privatum exercitum ditticili reipublicai te^npoio 
conficere ? Confecit. Huic pnuesse ? Praifuit. 
Rem optime ductu suo gerere ? Gessit. Quid 
tarn pr»)ter consuetudineni, quam homini peradol- 
escenti, oujus a!ta.s a senatorio gradu longe abesset, 
. imperiuia atque exercitum dari ? Siciliam per- 



mitti nt(|no Afncam bellunuiuo iti on lulininiHimn* 
iliiiii i Fuit ui liiH provinciis ,siiiy[ulan inndCHjiitia, 
ynivitiito, viitiitc: 1h.'11uii» in Afiica niaxmuim 
cont'ooit, victoi'oni nxei'citinii iltjportavit. Quid 
V(>i'() tnni inaddifciiin, (|untii oqiiituiu Koiiuinuin 
triuinpliaro ( At oaiii (iiiO(iuo rum popnlus 
KomaiiUH non modo vidit, ned otiain oinni Mtudio 
visoridam ct concfOobrundain putavit. 

Cicero, Pro Lejp. Manllia. 

T). Parst! and OAplaiii the syntax of adrdescentuliim, 
dijj'u'dl, pi'tvvHHi',, iuiiociutiu, oimiiidaiii, 

G. Explain the historical allusiuiiH of thu uxtiuct. 

7. Tranwlato: 

8ed, ut undc ost orsa, in isodeni tovniinotur 
oratio, maxiina.s tibi onnios gratias agimus, C. 
iJiieHar, niaioroM ttiam hal>onius. Nam omncs idem 
Ncntinnt, (juod ex omnium precibus ct lacrimis scii- 
tiro potuisti ; sod (jiiia non est omnibus stantibus 
noccssc diccre amc curtodici volunt, cui nccesso est 
((tiodam modo, ct quod fieri dcect, M. Maicello a 
tt! linic oidini populoquc Romano ot rei publicao 
rcddito, fieri id intollijjo. Nam lactari omnes non 
de miius solum, sed de communi omnium saluto 
scntio. Quod autem Hununae benovolentiao est, 
quae mea crj^a ilium omnibus semper nota t'uit, ut 
vix C. Marcello, optimo ct amantissimo Iratri, 
praeter cum (piidein cedercm nemini, ([uiun id 
sollioitudine, cura, iaboro tam din praestiterim, 
qimni diu est de illius salute dubitatum, ccrte hoc 
tempore magnis curis, molestiis, doloribus libera- 
tus, piaestare debco. Itaque, C. Caesar, sic tibi 
jjratitts ago, ut omnibus mc rebus a te non con- 
servato solum, sed etiara ornato, tamen ad tua in 
mc unmn innuLiorabilia merita, quod fieri iam 
posse nonarbitrabar,maximus hoctuo facto cumu- 
lus accesserit. 

CiCKRo, Pro Marcello. 

iS. Parse and jxplain the syntax of orsa, stantibus, 
reddito, uniu8, irracditerhn. 



ZAni^ttnUp of Sorontd. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ARTS. 

LATIN AUTHORS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : Georqe Hunter Robinson, M.A. 



i; 

Translate : 

At rubicunda Ceres medio succiditur aestu ; 
Et medio tostas aestu terit area fruges. 
Nudus ara, sere nudus ; hiems ignava colono. 
Frigoribu3 parto agricolae plerumque fruuntur, 
Mutuaque inter se laeti convivia curant. 
Invitat genialis hiems curasque resolvit : 
Ceu pressae quum jam portum tetigere carinae, 
Puppibus et laeti nautae imposuere coronas. 
Bed tamen et quernas glandes turn stringere tempus, 
Et lauri baccas, oleamquc, cruentaque myrta ; 
Turn gi-uibus pedicas et retia ponere cervis, 
Auritosque sequi lepores ; turn figere damas, 
Stuppea torquentem Balears verbera fundae : 
Quum nix alta jacet, glaclem quum flumina trudunt. 

Virgil, Oeorgica, I. 

1. Point out any grammatical peculiarities in the 
words Ceres, fruges, puppibue, lauri, damas. 

2. Write brief explanatory notes on medio aestu, 
nudiis, genialis, coronas, BaUaris, 

3. Derive rubicunda, ignava, turn, quum, stuppea. 

4. Describe with drawings the Roman plough. 




i I 



ti. 



translate : ^g virgulta per agros, 

Quod superest.quaecuujHue P ernes J^^^ ^^^.^^ 

Sparge fimo V^^^ aut squaUtes infode conchas , 
Aut lapidem bibulmn, auv H . ^ubibit 
fntev e'nim labentur aqua . ^^^^^^^^ j^,^^,,^ ,epevU, 
Halitus, atque aminos to^^^^^^^^ ,^,tae 

Qui saxo super atque mg^^tisP ^^^ .^^^^^. 

Urgerent : hoc efi;^so« ^l^^^^^i, aestifer arva. 
Hoc, ubi hiulca siti findit «^ani ^^ .^ 



•' T 



reperti, siti. ^^^ duantities and 

2. Scan vv. 1, -i. d, »" & 

^^'"'^'' H.. sense of the passage without 

3. Briefly express the sense o 

figures of rhetonc ^^^^^^^^^^ ,£ this 

4. Give a briet summa>y "^ 

Book. 

III. 

Translate: .. „.,,icos ; feri'i coepta 

Lex dies fuit P'^oP^f^^tpnatu Kal^ndislann- 
nmnquam.deposita e.t m sena^ .^^^ convocasse 

ariis cum in CapitoUum nos ^^^^tu Bullae 

„.us, niWl est actum PJ ";' f ^j^^it, SuUam lUam 
Q. Metellus P^-a«^^',f!S Ex illo tempore L. 
rosationem do se nolle te?^"' n^ . agr'iriae legi, 
cLilius egit de ^e pu^^-^^^ est inter- 

quae tota a me ^ep^ehens^^^ ^^^g^^i- 

Issorem se fore P^^^^f ^„^ oritatem numquam 
onibus restitit. senatus aucto ^^^^„^ ^^ 
impedevit, ita se ge^it m tea nisi de vex 

dejosito domestic!^ officinh^^ .^ .^^^ ,^. 

publicae commodis cogita^^^^^^^^^ \^ ^^^ „^^,,,^ 
gatione ne per vxm quid l^^?^^^ Nonne omnis 
luUam aut Caecxhum ve^^^^^^^ ^^i^io ex 

ille terror, omnxs se^itioms txm ^.h ^ 

Autroni 1^^^^^*^^*^:^^^^^^^ concursatxo, stx- 

xninae ferebantur ; exus ^J/^itorum, nxetum nobxs 

patio, gi-eges l^^JJ^Xnt Itaque P. S« la hoc 
Lditionesque adfereb.nt i 1^ ^^.^^ ^^.^.ta- 
importunxssxmo cum.txon >rx», 






! 



tis socio atque comito et secundas fortunas amittere 
coactus est et in adversis sine uUo remedio atque 
adlevamento perraanere. 

Cicero, Pro Sulla. 

1. Point out any syntactical peculiarities in this 
passage. 

2. Brief explanatory notes on propoaita, Kalendi8> 
Gapitolium, agrariae legi, stipatio. 

3. Derive numquam, trihunatu, importunissiiiio, 
itaque, concuraatio. 

4. Briefly criticise, from the above extract, Cicero's 
diction. 

IV. 

Translate : 

Equidera existimo nullum tempus esse frequen- 
tioris populi quam illud gladiatorium neque con- 
tionis ullius neque vero ullorum comitiorum. Haec 
igitur innumerabilis hominum multitudo, haec 
populi Komani tanta significatio sine uUa varietate 
universi, cyira illis ipsis diebus de me actum iri 
putaretur, quid declaravit nisi optimorum civium 
salutem et dignitatem populo Romano caram esse 
universo ? At vero ille praetor, qui de me nun 
patris, avi, proavi, maiorum denique suorum om- 
nium, sed Graeculorum instituto contionem inter- 
rogare solebat, " velletne me redire," et, cum erat 
reclamatum semivivis mercennariorum vocibus, 
populum Romanura negare dicebat : is, cum cotidie 
gladiatores spectaret, numquam est conspectus, 
cum veniret. Emergebat subito, cum sub tabulas 
subrepserat, ut " mater te appello " dicturus vide- 
retur. 

Ibid., Fro Sestio. 

1. Write brief explanatory notes on gladiatorium, 
comit lorum, optimorum civium, praetor, Graeculoimm. 

2. Distinguisli equ'idem,quideui; temipuSftempestas ; 
universus, lotus, cuncti ; volo, cupio ; "is, ille, iste, hie. 

3. Explain the allusion in " mater te appello." 

4. Explain the legal terms de ambitu, de vi, rogatio, 
privilegiwni, adorgatio. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST YEAK. 
PASS. 



LATIN A^D GREEK. 

TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 



Examine 



,. .. H. R. Faikolough, M.A. 



A. 

Translate : . , „„„! cibum capere 

decima erat ^e^e diex horn q .^ ^^ 

consul milites jube*;^?/;;^ signum dedent 

quacumque diei ^^r Samnitium bella extolht, 
Ucis milites adloquitu^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ „,ultitudmem 

elevat Etruscos,nec hostem no ^^^^^^ ^^ ^g. 

ititudini covnpavandam ^^^ i^^^r ea 

taceri opus esse. ^^^.^™^^f ^^^^^ terntus 

hostes, quo anjn^«« y^^f ™J^entoconsederan^ 
restituevetur, et, quod ^^^e mmi ^.^^o 

;:ri similius evat quod B.m^^^^^^^^ ^ ,i, ^^e 

corpora q"^?JV .^.^"llp^ant : dolabrae calonibus 
tumultuexcitatiarinacat,.-;^»^^^ fossasque im- 

dividuntuv ad vallu^ F^ ^^^^ acie8,3electae 
plendas : intra «^"J»"^"^;X collocantur : date 
^ohortes ad P^^ ^'^^^^^ wem quod aestivis nocti- 
deinde signo P^^V^^J^^"^^^^^^^ est. prorate 

bus sopitae ^'^^^'"^1,^2^1^^^ invadit hostes, 

vallo erupit acies ; ^^^^^os j^^^^^ i^ cubiUbus suis 

^^-V-rtAet aHJTa trepidantes caedes 

maximam panem 

oppressit. LivY, IX- 



re 
it, 
it. 
lit, 
em 
te- 
ea 
bat 
itus 
a.nt, 
jibo 
jine 
bus 
im- 
ctae 
dato 
octi- 

(VUtO 

)ste8, 
\ suis 
ledes 



VOCABULARY. 

aeativuB, pertaining to summer. 

ambages, evasion. 

calo, soldier's servant. 

consido, take post. 

cubile, bed. 

euro, refresh, 

dolabra, pick-axe. 

elevo, make light of. 

proruo, throw down. 

sopio, put to .sleep. 

trepido, hurry with alarm. 

B. 

Translate : 

*£i/ Be rah 'Adripat^ rrj^ UapaXov d<f)iKOfietni^ w- 
/CT09 i\ey€To 17 (rvfi<f)opd^ kuI olfMrayf) ck tov Heipatw 
SiA TCuu fiaxpatv T6<;^a)i; etV aa-rv 8i^Kev, 6 erepo^ t^. 
erepy iraparfyeWtDV war eKeivij^ rfj^ vvkto^ obBeU 
iKQifnqdrj, ov fiovov tow? ottoXwXotos 7r5i;^o'5i;Te9» 
dWd TToikif fioXKou ert avrol iavTOv^, TreiaecrBai 
vofii^ome^ ola iiroiiforav Mi/X^oi/? t€ Acucehaifiovlav 
InroiKov^ 6vTa<!, KpaTrivavret iroKiopKia, ^al 'lo-rtat- 
ea9 Koi "SiKicovaiov^ Koi Toptovaiov^ Kat XiyivijTa^ 
Kat d\\ov<{ TToWou? TWi/ * ^XKrfvtov. rfj 8* vanpala 
€KK\f)(riav eiroii)aav, iv ^ eBo^e Tov<i 7e Xifiiva^ 
airo^coa-ai irXrju evo? Kol to, t€ij(V evrpeTTi^eiv Kat 
<f>v\aKd<i i^iCTuvai Kal fdXKa Trdvra eb? ew troXiop- 
Kiav vapaa-xevd^eiv Ttjv ttoXiv. Kal o5rot /lev irepl 
ravra ^,uav. 

Xenophon, Hititoria Graeca, II. 

VOCABULARY. 

avoiKO^, colonist. Koifiaofiai, sleep. 

aTTo^oavpvfjLi, bank up. olfuoyi], lamentation. 

Bi^KO), extend. irevdeo), bewail. 

evrpefri^m, make ready. <rvfi<l)opd, misfortune. 



[X. 



nnibttuittgt of croronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1S91. 



FIRST AND SECOND YEARS. 



GREEK AND LATIN. 

TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: Maurice Hutton, M.A. 



Translate carefully : 

1. 'El/ Bk Tfjai avvova-lfiai, raSai €v6atfiOfrt auT&v^ 
errehp hiro Belnvov yivtovrai, 'ir€pt<f>ipei dpijp pcKpov 
ep aop^ ^vKtpop Tmroirjfiipop, n€fiiiMi)fi4pop i<i rh 
fidXiffTa KUi ypa<f>f) koI Spy^, fiiyeOo^ 6<top re irdpr-q 
vrf^^yaiop, ff BiTrrjyyp' ZeiKvv<i 8e eKuar^ t&p avpiro- 
Te<op, Xeyef " 'E? tovtov opiap, iripi re Kal repTrev 
eaeai yhp dirodapap TotoOro?." TaOra fikv iraph Th 
avfiTToaia irotevari. 

Herodotus, II. 

2. Aict ravra ob pofiofi iart aefipvveadai top leu^p- 
PTfrrip, KaiTTsp aco^ovra f)pa^. oiiBe ye, & 0av/juuri€f 
TOP firj'XjCiPOTroiop, 09 ovre (TTpaTrjyov, fitf ori levfiep- 
PTfTov, ovre aXKov ovhevot eKdrrto £p(ore B6parai 
<r(0^€ip' TT'jXet? yap eartp ore o\a9 a-dt^ei. fi"^ <roi 
SoKel Kard top Bikupikop elpai ; Kairoi el BovKoiro 
Xeyeip, & KaWUXet^, airep vfieUy aefipvvfup to 
Trpayfia, Kara)(a>aeiep dp vfid<} to?? \6yoi<;^ Xiytop 
Kat irapaKcCkSiP eirl ro Betp yiypeaOai fiiJxapoTrotov^^ 
OK ovBip T&Wd earip' iKap6<t ydp ain^ a X070V. 
d\Xd av ovBep fJTTOP avrov Korat^popeh Kat t^9 
T^XP'<l'i T?)9 CKeivov, Kal ay; ip opeiBei a7roKa\t-:o-at9 &p 
fiiyyaponroiop, Kat to> vlel avrov ovt dp Boiipai Ovya- 
ripa ideXoiiy ovt' dp avTo<; t^ aavTov X-^elp rrjp 
eKetPov. KaiToc cf &p rd travroO eVati/et?, tipi BiKaim 



1 



\6y(0 Tov firi'yavoTroiov Kura^j. oveh tcai t&v aWmu 
Mif vvv hi, e'Keyov ; oI5' OTt (f}aii}<i &v ^eXriup ehai 
Kal €K fieX-iovdiv. ro hi ^eXriop el fiij eaTiu o ^^yo) 
Xtyw, &\\' avTo toCt' tarlu apen'], to aml^eiv avrhv 
Kal ra eavrov 6vra oirom ri<i hv^^e, KaTayeXaaro^ 
aoi 6 yfr6y</<; yiyverai Kal firfyavotroiov Kal unpov 
Ka\ T&v aXXwv Te^vbiV, oaai tov atii^uv heKu Treiroi- 
ijinai. dXX\ & fiaKupie, opa u/; aXKo ti to yevvalov 
Kal TO ayadhv y tov aw^eiv re xal ato^effdai. fit) yhp 
'.oiiTo fikv TQ f^i/ oTTOcov Bi] )(p6vov, TOV yc tus aXr]6(a<{ 
avtpa iaTCov earl Kal ov ^iXoyfrv^ijTeov, hXXa itn- 
TpeyfravTa irepl Tovrtov t^ 6e^ Kol tnaTevtravra TOtv 
yvvai^lu OTt, Ttjv eifiapfievqv ovS' (Jv cl? €K<f>vyoi, t6 

eVi TOI/Ty (TKeTTTeOV TIV Av TpOTTOV TOVTOP hv fliWoi 

j(p6vov ^i&vai a><> dpiana ^Cf/yr). 

Plato, Gorgiaa. 

8. Itaquo minime miruni est, nee Oppiam nee aliam 
ullam turn legem desideratam esse, (|Ui e niodum 
suniptibus mulierum faeeret.quuni aiirum et purpu- 
ram data et oblata iiltro non accipiebant. Si nunc 
cum illis donis Cineas urbem circuiniret, stantes 
in publico invenisset, quae acciperent. Atqiie ego 
nonnullarum cupiditatum nee causam quidem aut 
rationem inire possum. Nam ut, quod alii lieeat, 
tibi non licere, aliquid Ibrtasso naturalis aut pudo- 
ris aut indignatiunis liabeat ; sic aequato omnium 
cultu, quid unaquaeque vestrum vorotur, ne in se 
conspiciatur ? Pessimus quidem est pudor vel 
parsimoniae vel paupertatis : scd utrumque lex 
vobis demit, quum id, quod habere non licet, non 
habetis. "Hanc," inquit, "ipsam exaefjuationem non 
fero," ilia loeuples. "Cur non insignisauroetpur- 

{)ura eonspicior ? cur paupertas aliarum sub hac 
egis specie latet, ut, (piod habere non possunt, 
habiturae fuisse, si lieeret, videantur ? " Vultishoc 
certamen uxoribiis vestris iniicere, Quirites, ut 
divites id habere velint, <iuod nulla alia possit ; 
pauperes, ne ob hoc ipsuin contemnantur, supra 
vires se extcndant ? Nao, siniul pudere, quod non 
oportet, coeperit ; quod oportut, non pudebit. Quae 
de suo poterit, parabit : quae non potorit, virum 
rogabit. Miserum ilium virum, et qui exoratus, 
et qui non exoratus erifc! quum, quod ipse non 
dederit, datum ab alio videbit. Nunc vulgo alienos 
viros rogant, et quod maius est, legem et suffragia 
rogant, et a quibusdam impetrant, ad versus te et 



rem tuam ot liboroH tuoH inoxorabiles. Simul lex 
inoduin NUinptibus uxoriu tuac factiro doHierit, tu 
■lunuuain faciuH. Nolite eodoin loco exUtiinaru, 
QutntoH, futuram rem, quo fuii, antequam lex de 
hoc ferreiur. Et hominom iinprobum non accu- 
Hari tutiuH est,quam abHoivi : ctluxuria non mota 
tolorabilior uHset, quam erit nunc, ipHia vinculia, 
sicut furae boHtiae, irritata, doinde omisga. Ego 
nullo modo abrogandam legem Oppiain censeo. 
Von quod faxitin, deos omnes fortunate velirn. 

Livy. 



tt„i«t«tt» of ttotouto. 

FIRST YKAB. 

l(,m AND GREKK GlUMlUr. 

3. Compare waj/nopcre, muium, 

amahilis. , ^-Qund in fando> 

4. Specify tl- ^,^-^f ,SaSac^, cor.«HUt. clefess^, 
nori^t, ausce, and give p t; ^^ ^^^^;,^ 

5. Hovr do you express m LaUn V 

to march out of camp , ((>) 1 '^ 
TCwo'd you Uanslate «>e iUUci.ed worf, in 
the following sentence . betraycv, the 

He did not know the mo*?^;^ f \^^ ^^ttle. or the 
character of the general, the Ume 

Tlltte^tL various ways of e.pre.ing pem^. 
sion and cJuti/ in Latin. 



B. 

1. Decline in full, avijp, lepev^, veavla^, iJSu?. 

2. Compare 178U9, ala)(p6<i, KaKot, e^, fioKa. 

3. What is the nomnative sing, of vaura, arra, 
fid^ovi, rpi')(6<i, alSov'!, 6t<p ? 

4. Specify the form, and give the principal parts of, 
hifiaiv, eivra, XtTrerft), airrjei, iXOovai, \'n(l>9evTa, nrpa^ov. 

5. Write down the perfect indie, pass, of, ypdcfKo ; the 
aov. 2nd participle act. nom. sing, of laTrjiAi ; the pres. 
intin. act. ol 8ov\o(o ; the aor. ind. act. of hiSafii, ; the 
infinitives, middle and passive, of Xuo)" 

6. How does Greek compare with Latin in regard to 
the expression of purpose, and iniiirect narration ? 



I 



"'^mfm 



^nnuai.exaWations.i«»- 

FIRST YEAR 

L^TIN AW GMEK GRAMMAR. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner 



. H. R- Fairclouoh, M.A. 



't compare integer. .*.», ^-«- -P--^— 
bmevolus, mde. muUum ^^_^ . 

5 From fcffo. '«^*' *":'1('„Sl', Ci,ter«,;«pM., 
sha^p; eio. eat; /.o-T- 'SitoC word's that denote 
take and vereor, be J ""^ ,■', to grow hard ; (c) b«- 
Sa veader, to ««> jf^" ;.^„L° (e) to desire to eat ; 
\Z^aa to the sea; (d) *="Pf^j„ ' i„<, to Salamis; W 

A^L manikin, no one ; ») b^o V»^^^ ^^^^^^^^ 
Songing to Cythera- W taken p ^_j j ^ 

6. Parse the ^ono-^r^fJo^J^XZiiere. deeedam. 

Twateandespiainthesynta^onhefoUowin.. 
^■(aTodiodioquesumRomams. 

V Nescias, an te ?«y-™^„{*;^^,„i.s. 



flagitai 



i,re. 



(d) Tanta fuit caedes ut nemo superfnturus fuerit. 

(e) Hunc homineni, si uila in te esset pietas, 

colere debebas. 

8. Horace, Od. I., 11. 

Explnin the mood and tense of quaeaieria, dede- 
rint, erit, tribuit, reaeces, fugcrit. 

B. 

1. Decline in combination ai/ri; i} 7ui"7, (Jtel^au i/aC?, 

2. Give gen. sing, and dat. pi. of \e\vKm, \v0eiii 
/A6\a?, iJSu?, Kvau, ri)((i>, 761/09, OvyaTrjpj '^yefieoVf oiJ?. 

3. Compare v^picrTiji, ^/Xo?, 6\iyo<if p^io^, ftdKOf 

4. Write down aor. 2nd iraper. act. of TiOrjfii and 
XetTTO): imperfect indie, mid. of eyeo and imperfect 
indie, of elfic : perfect indie, act. of paivta and laTyfii : 
and perf. indie, pass, of Treldco. 

5. Parse the following forms: <f)ava>fiev, elaav, elSevai, 
fiadelu, iXelv, icopiou. BovXovu, utftLKTai, 

6. Translate the following, commenting on .syntax : 
(tt) cvK e)(Ofiev otov cItov aivrja-Ofieda. 

(6) OTTO)? Trept Tov trdkefiov firjheu t/oetv. 

(c) ^t\& oo-Tt? &u hyaOoi ^. 

((/.) ovK aireifn irplv hv I'Sw. 

7. Adapt G (c) to past time, and {d) to a preceding 



! 


ii 


1 


IK 




&iiUiftv»it^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



ALL THE YEARS. 



LATIN AND GREEK GRAMMAR AND 
PHILOLOGY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. C. Robkrtson, B.A. 



NoTR. — For First Year Ctuulidates sovonty-fivo per cent, will be 
coiisiilered a full papei', and for Second Year Candidates 
eighty-five per cent, 

I. 

1. In the followinof lines of Homer point out and 
account for the irregularities of scansion : 

ai'a-ifia Trapetircov 6 8' otto €0ev uxraTO ^ctpt, 
Xaol /xev pa yepovra fioyi'! e')(ov a<T')(a\6ujVTa, 
Tpaai re kui Tpcofja-t Kara irroXiv, oi (re 6eov cof. 

2. Give Latin cognates for cttov, ')(dafiaX6<i, 'ivda, afia, 
^aivoa, Saavi, and Greek cognates for vetas, -que, gravis, 
liber, Jido, vivo, mortalis. 

3. Account for the various forms the root assumes 
in the following verbs : e^^o), e^to, ea^^ov ; 7rao-%<», vrei- 
aofiai, TriirovOa, tiradov ; eXevaofiai, e\rjKvOa, ^Xdop ; 
^XcoffKO}, €fio\ov ; pea), eppvrjv ; Tripdta, ireiropda, eirpa- 
Oov ; yiyvo/Mai,, yev^aofxat, yeyova, yiyufiev ; airoepap, 
tvirovpa<i. 

4. Show how Comparative Philology tends to har- 
monize the variations in the Greek augment. 

5. What changes does original s undergo in Greek 
and Latin when (a) initial before a vowel, semi-vowel 
or licjuid, {h) medial between vowels ? Illustrate. 

Explain the following cases : aeva>, ae, (tvv, ykveai, 
XeXucrat, Xucro), irkirvcrai, 6paarv<f, /titVo?, <paaL misi, 
e<ii(,H((, desiint, esurlo. 






6. Account foi the following : pa in Trarpdai ; kind 
= septem ; r^fieh «= afiiie ; fiei^a = fxei^ova ; ■>]Bv<i = 
suavis ; honos = honor; uttu — rivii ; quern = rtVa ; 
est'" edit; conficio, dcsllio, for confdcio, dcsulio; lu. 
eU, f. fila, n. h ; the accent of •roKcu)<i ; firj /cXt'.TTe hut 
not fii] kXe^op. 

II. 

1. Trace the development of Hypotaxis from Para- 
taxis, paying special attention to the use of the Rub- 
junctive and optative moods in dependent sent(;nccH. 

2. Translate the following sentences, 'ami explain 
anything noteworthy or peculiar in the syntax : 

(rt) Si quid do his rebus dicere vellet, feci potes- 

tatem. (Cic.) 
(b) Jam dudum exspecto si tuuni officium scias. 

(Plaut.) 
•(c) Alius alia cayaa illata, quam sibi ad proficiscen- 

dum necessariam esse diceret, petebat ut 

ejus voluntate discedere liceret. (Caes.) 
{d.) Si licitum esset, comitia in a. d. V. Kal. Mart. 

edicebat, 

(e) Dicam id quod sentio, Quirites. (Cic.) 

(/) Multa bello passus, dum conderet urbom. 

(ViRG.) 

(g) Gabinium statim, nihil dum suspicantom, vo- 

cavi. (Cic.) 
(h) Die quid vis fnciain. (TjtR.) ' 

(i) Me caecum, qui haec ante non viderim. (Cic.) 
(k) Si illis temporibus natus essps quum ab aratro 

arcessebantur, compared with, Accepit 

enim agrum iis temporibus quum jacerent 

pretia praediorum. (Cic.) 

(l) Exireexurbejubet consul hostem. Interrogas 
me, num in exsilium ? Non jubeo ; sed 
si me consulis, suades. (CiC.) 
(in) Nunc age, naturas apibus quas Juppiter ipse 
Addidit, expediam. (Virg.) 

3. Translate the following sentences, and explain 
anything noteworthy or peculiar in the syntax : 

(n) 4>(.'Xt7r7ro? 'A\6vvri(Tov ihiBov, Arffioadcvrji; Be 
UTTijyopeve fii) Xafjt^uveiP. (Aesch.) 



/ 



Wl 






(h) El fit/ i^e^xr/omv eU AeX^oi*?, iKiv8vuev<rafiev 
airo\i<rdai. (Aesch.) 

(c) "Ofiiof 8^ hl...'ireipa(TOai 6irta<!ijv fiev Bvvtofieda 
KoKm viK&vret (rco^ditfieda' el S^ fti), bXK6, Ka\&<i ye inro- 
OvrjCFKOifiiv, uTTo-)(eipi,ot Be fxrjBeTroTe yeviofieda f&ij/Te? to« 
"rroXefxioa' ailfiai yap &v ■qfiat TOiavra Tradelp ola tov'9 
e')(6pov<i oi 6eol iroirjaeiav. (Xkn.) 

(d) OIk olB' &v el Treiaaifii. (Euil.) 

(fl) Ot Itrireh airoKrhvovart, tS)u ttvBpSiv ov fieiov 
7revTaKoaiov<i. (Xen.) 

(/) XPV "^hv (T(o^pova TToXivTov tV T^ avfidovXeveiv 
fir) Tuvovra Tfj<i 6p6r)^ yva>fir)<i ov^ OTTCOf ^rjfiiovu dWh 
p.iiV arifidtfiiv. (ThuC.) 

{g) 'E7rio";)^o)i' hv, &)? 01 7r\et<rTot r&v elmdoTcov 
yuatfirju d'rre<f>i^vavTo, el rfpeaxe rl fioi^ rfav^iav &u ^ov. 

(Dem.) 

(h) ®efitiTTOKXfj<i (fypd^ei r(f> vaVKXrjptp Sarit iinl 
Kal Si' h (fyevyei. (Thuc.) 

(i) 'H olfKoyri CK Tov Heipaiw Sid t&v fiaxp&v 
Tef)(wv ft? da-TV SirjKeu, 6 ere/oo? tcS eTep(p irapayyeXXatV 
&ar eKeivr)<i t»}9 vvKTot ouSet? eKoi/jLijdr}, ov jxovov Tov<i 
nVo\o)\oTa9 7rev6ovvTe<i... (Xen.) 

(Z;) TToW' du eyaiv erep elTtelv, trapaXehroi. (Dem.) 

(I) 01 ev Tft) BiKa(TT7)pia Tore BiKu^ovre^ ravra avv- 
iaaaiv. (Dem.) 

i^n) 0( AaKeSai/jioviot twv dXXoiv 'EWT^va)// rov 
^ovXofievov exeXevov eireaOai. irXrjv \(i>va)v Kal 'Aj(^aiaiv 
Kal eariv a)V dXXaw idvm: (Thljc.) 

4. (a) How does Latin express the ideas which in 
Greek may be conveyed by tlie ordinary use of the 
participle or infinitive ? 

(b) How does Greek express the ideas which in 
Latin may be expressed by the subjunctive in sub- 
ordinate sentences ? 

Arrange your answer in parallel columns, without 
examples. 



Bh 



f 



2ftniiier0Utf of Coroitto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



LATIN PROSE. 



Examiner: Geo. H. Robincon, M.A. 



There wns one Turnus Herdonius of Aricia who 
made a violent attack on Tarquin for his absence. No 
wonder, he said, they style him Proud at Rome ; for 
by this title he was already widel}' know, though not 
in public or beyond a whisper. Can anything show 
^^reater pride than thus to trifle with the Latin nation ? 
Thechiefsare summoned to a distance from their homes, 
while he who called the meeting stays away. Of 
course he is trying our forbearance, that, if we once 
accept the yoke, he may crush us under foot. For 
who can doubt that what he aims at is the sovereignty 
of Latium ? True, if his own countrymen did well to 
trust him with the crown — granting it came to him 
thiis, and not by violence and parricide — the Latins, 
too, may feel obliged to follow suit ; yet, no, not even 
then, considering his foreign birth. 



t 



/, 



/ 



2Aiillifr0ftv oC Toronto. 



ANNUAL FXAMINATIOMS : 1891. 



riRST YEAR. 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : William Dale, M.A. 



The friends of Cicero, more terrified and perplexed 
than ever, now made a last eflort to secure the protec- 
tion, or at leM.st ascertain the intentions of the consuls 
and triunjvirs. Tlwy dt'cmetl it inipossiljle that any 
men who aspired to hold the reins of government should 
continue to countenance the violence of a faction which 
had taken possession of the streets. But Gabinius 
treated their repreai^ntations with scorn. Piso, to whom, 
as a fnmily connexion, (.'ieero a))plied in person, though 
less rude, proved not nu»re tiactable. He explained to «t 
him that Gabinius was compelled by his poverty, if 
not by his inclination, to espouse the popular side, and 
that since he despaired of obtaining anything from the 
senate, his hopes of succeeding to a rich province 
depended upon the favour of the tribunes. It was his 
own duty, he argued, to advance the interests of his 
colleague, just as Cicero himself had catered for Anto- 
nius : irony the more cutting, since it was rumoured, 
falsely we may believe, that, in conceding to Antonius 
the goveinment of Macedonia, the orator had stipulated 
for a share of its expected profits. In conclusion he 
coldly took leave of his visitor, recommending him, as 
the common duty of every citizen, to provide for hi« 
own interests and safety. 



1 



!^ 



anfutrttftv of srotonto« 



SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR 



GREEK AND ROMAN HrSTORY. 



„ . f William Dale, M.A. 

Examiners: | jj p YAi^cLomu. M.A. 



NcTB.— Candidates are requeated to enclose the answers to questions 
in Bections A. and 6. in separate envelopes. 

A, 

1. Name some of the prominent Greek tyrants. 
What causes generally gave them powei*, and how were 
they overthrown ? 

2. What steps are noticeable in the growth of the 
democratic government of Athens ? 

3. Give an account of the leading men of Athens 
during the Peloponnesian war. 

4. Give an account of Greek literature during the 
Peloponnesian war. 

5. Sketch the development of Macedonian power. 

6. Write notes on Ajhsean League, Mantinea, 
Leuctra, Pythagoras, Arginusae, Coronea. 

B. 

1. Explain the origin and functions of the comitia 
centuriata and comitia trihuta respectively. 

2. Give an account of the war against Pyrrhus, with 
dates. 

3. Explain the meaning of the terms proviincia, 
Socii navales, rostra, triumphus, trihuni aerarii. 

4. Describe the legislation of C. Gracchus with dates. 

5. Name the first twelve Caesars, with dates for the 
accession of each, and give an account of the reign of 
any one of them. 



mxivzvfiiit^ of STototito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST EXAMINATION. 



algi:bra and trigonometry. 



„ . (John MgGowan, B.A. 

Examiners : | ^ jj b^^^laud, M.A. 



Note.— Canditlates will enclbac the answers to the Algebra and 
Trigouometvy in separate ouvclopea, and endorse them 
respectively Auikhha. and Trkjonomktry. 
Candidates in the departraent of Chemistry and Mineralogy 
will take (picstions 9 and 10, and will omit questions 2 
and 3. All other candidates will omit questions 9 and 10. 

1. A quadratic equation cannot have more j^tban two 
roots. 

The sum of the roots of x^ — px + q = is p and 
their pn luct is q . 

2. Solve the equation x + {5x + 10)' = 8, and show- 
that only one of I'e ^Jllues obtained for x satisfies the 
i>quation. 

Write out the equation to which the other value of x 
belongs. 

3. Solve fully the equations : 

{!) x^ + xy -^ X = li , t/ -\- xy -\- y = 2S ', 

(2) x(x + a) {x + 2a) {x + 3«) = 6* ; 

.„, 3.T - 2 , .--;, V— r^ (x + 1)2 

(3) ■ — 9 h ^Sx- — 5a; + 3 = ^ . 

4. If a, b, c, d ai e proportionals so also are a, c, h, d. 

In the same case find the fourtli j^roportional to 
fl- c -f- ac^ , h"^ d -{■ hd'^ , (a + cf ia terms of b and d. 

5. The weight of a given body at the surface of a planet 
varies directly as the mass of the planet and inversely as the 
square of its radius. The mass of Mars is to that of tlie 
earth as 5 to 47, and its radius is to that of the eartli as 21 
to 40 ; .show that 100 lbs. at the asirflice of the earth will 
weigh about 38 lbs. at the surface of Mars. 



6. Detennine the Aritlinictic Series wliocsc 5th term is 
3]^ and whose 8th term is 5. 

The sum of any two terms equidistant from the begin- 
ning and end of a series in A. P. is constant. 

How n)any terms of the series 2, 6, 8, »fec., will give 
301 for their sura 1 

7 . Find the sum of a set of quantities in G. P. 

The sum of the series 1, |, ^, &c., is always less than 
3, but continually approaches 3 as its limit if enough terms 
be taken. 

8. Define Harmonical Progression and from the definition 
deduce that if a set of quantities are in A. P. their recipro- 
cals are in H. P. 

If the ^"' tflrm of an H. P. is q and the 5'* term is 

p, the (p + 9-)"' term is 



pq 



P + q 

Sum the series to n terms whose »i"' term is 2^ — n. 

9. Find the number of combinations of 7t things taken r 
together, and show that if n^r be this number, 

10. Assuming the Binomial Theorem for a positive integral 
exponent, prove it when the exponent is fractional or nega- 
tive. 

Find the coefficient of .x"* in the expansion of 

(1-a.)-*. 

11. " There are two methods of measuring angles, 

(1) The rectangular measure, 

(2) The circular measure." 

Explain these methods and express in each, (o) the 
angle of a regular hexagon, (b) the angle of a regular octagon. 

12. Define the three principal trigonometrical ratios of 
an angle, and show that your definitions apply to an angle 
of any magnitude. 

13. Given one of the trigonometrical ratios of an angle 
less than a right angle, show that all the others may be found. 

The base andfperpendicular of a right angled triangle 
are resi^ectively ^/3 -f I and ^3 — 1 ; find all the ratios 
of one of its acute angles. 

14. Prove the following: 

(1) cos /> - cos C = 2 sin i [{C + D) sin h {C - D) ; 

(2) cos 2^ = 2 sin (45° -f A) sla (4r)° — A) ; 

(3) tan {A — n) = ^3 , when A ^ tan - • (2 + ^Z;',), 
/;== tan-i (2 — ^3). 



term is 
begin- 
vill give 



15. In any tiiaiigio show that 

(1) rt2 = b'- + c2 + 26c cos A ; 

._. sin (B-C)_^ sin {C - A) sin (A - li) 
{'I) ,-- 1 -t- 



(3) 



bo ca 

sin A + Bin B •\- siu C 2 area 
a -\- b -^ c abc 



ab 



= 0; 



ess than 
ah terms 

lefinition 
; recipro- 

''« term is 



g 2« — n. 
:s takeii J" 



ie integral 
,1 or nega- 



)f 



les, 



jh, (a) the 
ar octagon, 

il ratios of 
I) an angle 

»f an angle 
ly be found, 
led triangle 
11 the ratios 



\ (C - D) ; 



mu^tvuitp of CTotonto^ 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY- 

HONORS. 



„ f John McGowan, B.A. 

EmrmnevH : | ^ g b^^^lard. M.A. 



Note.— Candidates will enclose Algebra and Trigonometry in separ- 
ate envelopes, endorsing them accordingly. 

1. A lias to pay £ sjidls of $a and $6 at the end of a- 
years and y years respectively, iind the sum which he must 
pay at the end of t years to liquidate the debt. 

Deduce the ordinary rule for equation of payments. 

2. «„ is the /«"' term of a series and bo , Cg , &c., are the 
first terms of the first, second, tfec, orders of differences ; 
prove 



«n = b„ + Co {n — \) -\- do 



{n - 1) (« - 2) 
1.2 



-f «fec., 



Hence sho-.: that V -^ 2' n- •+• 3'a;'^ + ike, is a recur- 
ring series whose scalo of lelation is (1 — .r)~*. 

3. The Arithmetic mean of a number of positive quan- 
tities is greater than their Geometric mean. 

If a 6 c are the sides of n triangle and ^j -f 9 + »* = , 
tt^qr -f 6V/> + c^pq is negative. 

4. Prove that in the continued fraction 

a a. — _ V 

«, + «8 + 

(1) the convergents are in their lowest terms, (2) every 
fraction which is nearer to a continued fraction than any 
particular converger)t must have a greater denominator than 
that convergent. 

3 2 
Find the n'* convergent to 1 — s^ 

O — t> — .... 










5. If n is a poHitive quantity greater than unity 

(' + -)" 

increases with n . What are its limits 1 
Find log, (1 -f- ^) aud prove : 



6. The infinite series 
1 



1 



1 



IP "^ 2P ■*" 3P ■*" " " • 

is always divergent except when p is positive and greater 
than 1. 

Examine whether the series whose n''^ terms are 

respectively, are convergent or divergent. 
7. Sum the series whose n"' terms are 

(1) «il-f- ^0(« + ^t^) . ■ ■ ■ (g -I- ?7"— "1 rf) 
/>{b + ci) r. . . . (6 + «~^1 rf) ' 



(3) 



(2rt— l)3''i'' 
n + 2 






n (W + 1) 

8. If ju is a i)rime, 1 + [p- 1 is a multiple of p. 
If /> is a prime and > 2 

l U(/>-l) (" + (- l)*<^-*> is a multiple of /*. 

9. Find the radii of the inscribed and circumscribed 
circles of any triangle. 

Express the ratio of these i-adii to one another in 
terms of the sines of the angles of the triangle. 

Shew that the radius of the circumscribed circle is 
never less than the diameter of the inscribed circle. 

10. State and prove De Moivre's theorem. 

Employ it to express the cosine of any multiple of an 
angle in terms of the sine and cosine of the simple angle. 

11. Expand d in powei*s of tan 6. 

For what values of is the series convergent 1 
Obtain series for calculating the value of TT. 



12. Find tlie 8uni of the sines of a Beriea of angles which 
are in Hi-ithn^etical pi-ogresHion. 
Detluce t,he terms of: 

(1) cos a + cos (« + (?) + cos (« + 2/3) -f- 

(2) COB a — cos {a ■{■ fi) -\- cos (« + 2/5) — 

Find the sum to n terms of 

C082 a + cos'^ (« + /5) -f cos* (a -f 2/3) -|- .... 



) .■!■!> 



) 



I 'I 



■!LU 



CimucriQiUtf of Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONM: ISIII, 



FUIST YEAR. 



II 



EUCLID AND TRIGONOMETRY. 



„ (A. R Bain, LL.D. 

Examiners'. | ^^, h. Ballard. M.A. 



NoTK. -The uiiniUdivteB will plnco their luiHWcrs to the (|uestion8 
in K\ioli(l ill one envelope, and to tlumi! in Trigoiioniutry in 
another, endorsinjj; the envelopes accordingly. 

1. To circuinscribo ii circle about a j^iven squaio. 

A BCD is n Kquaro inscribed in a circle, /' isjiny point 
on the circiiinferonccs hIh^w that PA^ + PH' -f ¥C^ -\- PD^ 
is double the square on tlus diameter of tlio circuiuscribing 
circle. 

2. To inscribe a regular hexagon in a given circle. 

An equilateral triangle and a regular li(,'.\agon are in- 
scribed in the same circle, show that that the area of the 
tringle is halt' that of the hexagon. 

3. To inscribe a circle in a given triangh;. 

Is the more general problem, viz., " To describe a circle 
tangent to three given .straight linens," always po.ssible ? 
Illustrate your answer by a diagram exhibiting each case 
that may present itself. 

4. If a straight line be drawn parallel to one side of a 
triangle, it shall cut the other sides, or those sides produced 
proportionally. 

From P, a given point, in the side AC of the triangle 
ABC, draw a straight line to CB produced so that it will 
be bisected by AB. 

0. From a given straight line to cut oft' any part required. 
Divide a straight line into seven ecjual parts. 

6. Triangles which have one angle of the one equal to one 
angle of the other, and the sides about those angles recipro- 
cally proportional are equal in area. 



Prove tliiit ihc f)|iiilMtenil triangle ilcMcrilicd oit tlui 
liypotniiiiHo of a ri^lit-iin^Iol triiin^ltt in «t(|iml to tin- sum of 
tlie (!()iiilaUM(il tri(iM;,'lt'.s dt'scrilicd on tlin ntln-r two HJtltfs. 

7. Tiio recta»if(l«) contained \>y tli« diiinoiiaJH of a qiiadri- 
latoral inHiiiilMMl in a circle is ocuial to the Huni of tlio two 
roctan^l"'" contained liy its opposite sideM. 

VIM. "Tlioro is, liowover, a rule by 'vliieli, if we are 
pivon a eoniplete list of the loparithniH of niinilierH Iniving 
five signiticant Mf,'ure.s, we ean find tlie logarithms of ninnberH 
having six or seven Hif,'iiifioant fimircH." 

State tluH rule and give an example of ita upplicntiou. 

IX. Employ logaritiiniH to find 

(1) The value of ^ j 2 + v/ (-' + v/2) \ ; 

(2) Tl>e time in which a sinii of money will double 
itself at six per cent, per annum compound interest; 

(.3) The value of 1 — (l.UG)--'''. 

X. The sides of a triangle are lespectively jj and 1 of the 
base ; find the vertical angle. 

XI. Solve the triatigle a « 2081) , /; = 102!) , C = 84° 32'. 



r each case 



NUMHRR. 


Log. 


Ratio. 


L. 


1025)0 


01241;>4 


sin 27' 14' 


9.6603783 


10600 


025.30.')!) 


" 68' 14' 


9.9079013 


11000 


0413927 


" 84° 32' 


9.9980202 


14142 


ir)0r>i.'30 


tan 20" 30' 


9.5729235 


18478 


20(56445 


" 4;r 38' 


9.9792738 


19615 


2926002 


" 43° 39' 


9.9795208 


20000 


.3010.300 


cot 42° 16' 


10.0414990 


20890 


31!)9;J,S4 






22390 


3500573 






31180 


4938H20 






34142 


5332890 






38478 


5852125 







M 



! 



Sinfurcisitp of Eutronto 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



CONICS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: A. R. Bain, LL.D. 



1. Find the equation of a circle referred to any rectan- 
gular axes. 

A circle passes tli rough the origin and intercepts 
lengths a and h respectively from the positive parts of axes 
of refe''ence ; determine the equation of the circle. 

2. What is the polar of a point with respect to a circle 

Find the e.quation of the }>o]ar. Slie-.v that if points 
be taken on any stnught line the |tolars of those points will 
pass through a l'.;<ed point, and <letcrinine the locus of tlie 
pole if the polar of a give:i circle alway.s passes through a 
given point. 

3. Find the general polar ecpiation of a circle. 

Utilize the equation in j)roving that if a straight line 
be drawn from any point to cut a circle the rectangle c(»n- 
tained by the segments is constant. 

If the pole be on the circumference and the initial 
line be tangent, determine the polar equation of a tangent 
to the circle at the point whose vectoreal angle is Q. 

4. Find the locus of the middle points of the system of 
chords of an ellipse which are parallel to y s=s mx. 

5. Deduce the equation to the normal at any point of 
the ellipse. 

Shew that the straight line parallel to the major axis 
which passes through the intersection of the normals at the 
ends of a focal chord bisects that chord. 



In tprms of tlio focal tlistances of the point on the 
ellipse to wliiiih a noinial is drawn, tincl the length of that 
normal between that point and the major axis. 

G. Find the eo-ordinates of the point of tangency of that 
tangent to the ellipse which cuts the axes at an angle of 45°, 

7. Determine the condition required that 

ax* -j- bxy -f cy' + t^a; -f ev/ + / = o may represent 
two straight lines. 

If 3,/ _ g.'T.y — 3a;* + 30.r — 27 = o satisfies the 
above condition, find the angle of intersection of the lines 
represented. 

8. Find the area of the triangle contained by the axis of 
y and the lines y ™ ax -\- h and y s= ex -^- f : also the 
length of thi! iterpeiidiciilur from the intersection of the lust 
two lines on the y-axis. 

9. Determine fully the species and situation of the loci 
(1) 2/" + 6i/ — 12 a; -f 33 = 0, (2) y' -f 2xi/ + 3x* — ix 
5= o finding the co-ordinates of their centres, the value of 
their e(!(!cntricitios and semi-transverse axes. 

10. Find the eijuatioii of an hyperbola when referred to 
its asymptotes us axes of co-ordinates. 

A straight line so moves as to cut olf a constant area 
from two intersecting linos ; shew that its middle jmint 
traces an hyperbola of which the intersecting lines are the 
asyniptotos. If tin; words " its middle jmint" were rejilaced 
by " any fixed point in the line," wouKl theipiestion demand 
an impossibility ? 

A straight line drawn throiigh one of the vertices of 
an hyperl)ola and terminated by two straight lines drawti 
through the other Vttrtex parallel to the asymptotes will be 
bisected at the other point where it cuts the hyperbola. 



It'' 



^ni\)tvuitii of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



PROBLEMS 

HONORS. 



iiJiilil 



Examiners ■ I '^^^^^ McGowax, B.A. 
mammeis. | Alfred T. DeLuuy, B.A. 



Note. — Cundidatcs will encloae the Prolilcms numbered with lloinan 
and Arabic numerals in .senariito onvelopcH, indorsing the 
envelopes Roman and Arabic respectively. 

I. Find the value of 

(1) /o' log {vi^ — 2in7i cos X -\- n') dx ; 

pi 2 

{^)Jo 'c'e* dx 

II. ABC is a spherical triangle and A'Ji'C is its polar 
triangle; show that A A', BH', CC" meet in a point. 

III. If E denote the sherical excess, 



sin 


E 


COSi 


2A 




E 




sin 


s . s 


-• 


a 


4 




4 




= 


2 "' 




2 










A 










a 








( 


3in 


2 










COS 


2 







IV. Find the envelope of a fixed diameter of a circle 
which rolls along a straight line. 

V. Trace the curves : 

(1) 4ir»— 4xy2 + ay^ - Sax"^ = 0; 

(2) a' = axy -f "^^ • 

VI. The minimum triangle circumscribed to a given circle 
is equilateral ; and prove the corresponding proposition tor 
a polygon circumscribed to any oval curve. 



1. Find the euvoIoi)0 of tl<e jmlar planes of point on the 
circk- (s = a; a;'^ 4" y^ = 1) with respect to tlie ellipsoid 

(I- b" c- 

2. Find tJie locus of point.-! from which the tangent cones 
to im ellipHoid aro liglit circuliir. 

3. If the projeetiou on the plane s = of the section of 
the surface 

^! + ^! + 2^ = o 



d^ 



IP- 



by n plane througii the origin, is constant : find the locus of 
the centre of the section. 

4. From ma origin, lines fvie drawn equal and parallel to 
the radii of curvature of a ^ivcii ellipse : find the polar 
equation of the locus of the oxtrenuties of those lines. 

5. Show t .;ait the norniKl to nn ellipse which cuts the 
curve most oMiipiely at its second intersection with the 
curve, is parallel to one of the efjuiconjugate diametei-s. 

G. The equation, 
where m is a positive integer, has all its roots real. 



M 



dimtierfiiUff of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18!)l. 



FIRST YEA I!. 



ENGLISH. 



Examiner: A. H. Rkynaii, LL.D. 



SHAKKSl'EAIfE. 



1. To what .sta^'es in Sliakespeare's liteiaiy dovol- 
opinent bolontj Romoo and Juliet, Julius (Jiosar, and 
The Toniy)ost ? Show in each play tpialities that accord 
witli thoirpoot'.s stagv of dev(;lopincnt at the time of 
writing. 

•2. Sketch £ho types of women presented in these 
.splay and sliow how thoy are I'olated to the poet's 
thoughts of woman at the timt's when the plays were 
written, 

3. Does the passion of llomeo for "the fair Rosaline " 
contriVnite to tlu; unity of tlie work or does it mar 
that unity ? (Ji\o the grounds of your opinion on this 
point. 

4. Point out in llomeo and Juliet some lingering 
influences of the old dramatic style from which Shake- 
speare afterwards broke away. 

5. Describe the character of Mercutio What 
artistic rea,son is given for his removal from the play 
at .so early a stage f 

6. Describe the Orchard Scene, where Juliet ex- 
claims : •' Romeo, Romeo, where/ore art thou Romeol " 
What qualities give the peculiar charm to this scene ? 

7. Point out the strength and the wtiakness of 
Brutus in Julius Cajsar. To what was his failure due ? 



m 



8. Julius C'jusar, Act I IT., Sc, I, II. 147-1G3. 

" Jirutns. liutliure comes Antony. Welcouu', Mark 
Antony. 

Antony. mighty Cnmr ! Do,st thou Wa m low ? 

Are all thy coiuiucstH, <,'lones, triumph.s, .spoils, 

Shrunk to this littlt; meusuro i Faro theo well. .150 

I know not, gentlemen, what you intend, 

Who else must be let blood, who else is rank : 

If I myself, there is no hour so fit 

As Cjosar's death's hour ; nor no instrument 

Of half that worth ivs those your swords, made rich 155 

With the most noble blood of all tliis world. 

I do beseech yo, it you bear nic liard, 

Now, whilst your purpled hands do reek and smoke. 

Fulfil your pleasure. Live a thousand years, 

I shall not find myself so apt to die : 100 

No place will please 8o, no mean of death, 

As here, by Ccesar and by you, cut ott", 

The choice and master spirits of this age." 

(a) Write philological and explanatory notes on: 
Fare thee(i. 150), rank (1. 152), that ivortk aa (1. 155), 
beseech ye if you hear (1. 157), reek and smoke (1. 158), 
mean (1. 161), by Cttsar and by you (I. I(i2,) 

(6) Point out the skill of Antony in this address 
under the circumstances. 

(c) What replies are given to Antony by Brutus 
and Cassius ? Show how their different natures trans- 
pire in these replies 

9. The Tempest is sometimes called a Romance. 
Is this correct ? What are the characteristics of Ro- 
mance ? 

10. Point out resemblances between Shakespeare 
and Prospero in character and in achievement. 

11. How are the parts of Caliban and Ariel related 
to the general conception of the Tempest ? 

12. The Tempest, Act II., Sc. 2, 11. 170, &c. 

" Caliban. I prithee, let me bring thee where (170 

crabs grow. 
And I with my long nails will dig thee pig-nuts. 
Show thee a jay's nest, and instruct thee how 
To snare the nimble marmoset. I'll bring thee 
To elusturing filberts ; and sometimes I'll get thee 
Young scamels from the rock. Wilt thou go 175 

with me ? 



Slephnno. I prithee now, lead the way without any 
more talkin;,'. Trinculo, the king and all our company 
else being drown'd, we will inherit hero. Here, bear 
my bottle. Fellow Trinculo, we'll fill him by and by 
again. 

Caliban. [Sings drunkenly]. Farewell, master ; fare- 
well, farewell ! 

THneulo. A howling monster; a drunken monster 1" 

(a) Write notes on cra/>.s (1. I70),pignuta (1171), 
ma)'moHet (I. 173), acamela (1. 175), go with me (1. 176.) 

(/>) Compare the language of Caliban in this 
scene with that of Stephano and Trinculo. Why the 
difference ? 

(c) In what respects is Caliban superior to 
Stephano and Trinculo ? 




MiilMifMMMIH 







IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




1.0 ^i^isa 



1.1 



lU 

u 



14.0 



JZO 



L25 mu 



ny^i 



6" 



1.6 







.? 




^^' 
^ 








y 




Phofcigraiiiic 

Sciences 

CbrporaHon 




23 WEST MAIN STtEET 

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14SM 

(716)«72-4S03 






^^ ^\ ^f\\ 

4^ 







f 



.^^ 



% 



S 
#y^ 






/ 

1 1 



/ 



r 



antnerfiifti? of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1S91. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ENGLISH. 



I 



Examiners 



C. L, Armstrong, M.A., LL.B. 
s H. H. Dewart, B.A. 



(Prof. Rfanar. 



1. " Yes," resumed I positively, " A poet ; for of all 
writei'S he has the best chance for immortality. 2. Others 
may write from the head, but lie writes from the heart, 
and the heart will always understand him. 3. He is 
the faithful portrayer of nature, whose features are 
always the same and (always) interesting. 4. Prose 
writers are voluminous and umvieldy ; their pages 
(are) crowded with commonplaces and their thoughts 
expanded into tediousness. 5. But witii the true poet 
everything is terse, touching, and brilliant. (>. He gives 
the choicest thoughts in the choicest langwifie. 7. He 
illustates them by every thing that he sees most striking 
in nature and (in) art. 8. He enriches them by pictures 
of human life, such as it is passing before him. 9. His 
writings, therel'ore, contain the spirit, the aroma, if I 
may use the phrase, of the age in which he lives. 10. 
They are the caskets which enclose within a small com- 
pass the wealth of the language — its family jewels, 
which are thus transmitted in a portable form to pos- 
terity. 11. The setting may occasionally be antiquated 
and (may) require now and theii to be renewed, I ut tlie 
brilliancy and (the) inti'insic value of the gems continue 
unaltered. 12. (^'ast a look back over the long reach of 
literary history. IJJ. What vast valleys of dulness filled 
with monkish legends and accademical controversies 1 
What bogs of theological speculations I What dreary 
wastes of metaphysics ! Here and there only do we 
behold the heaven-illumined bards, elevated like bea- 
cons on their widely-separated heights, to transmit the 
pure light of poetical intelligence from age to age." 



(a) Estimate the correctness and the rhetorical 
force ot* the ]:)nssages in italics. 

(h) Discuss the julvi.sabillty of retaining or omit- 
ting the words enclosed in parentheses. 

(c) Characterize the imagery throughout the 
extract. 

((/) State generally the merits of these conversa- 
tional sentences, and, referring to them by numbers, 
show what function each performs in the sequence cf 
thought. 

(f) Criticise sentences 4 and 5 as to structure and 
harmony. 

« 

(f) Write a short critique on the whole Essay, 
estimating the author's taste in selecting his materials, 
in his sentiments and reflections, and also in choosing 
the dialogue form. 

2. What characteristics of Lamb's style are found in 
his " Imperfect Sympathies" ? 

Draw the distinction, after Lamb, of the "imperfect 
suggestive minds " and the " Caledonian mind," and 
point out the humour contained in his description of 
the latter. 

3. Discuss the literary merits of Irving and Lamb, 
and compare each wiiter with the sentiments ex- 
piessed in their respective Essays, Mut'^bility of Litera- 
ture and Imperfect Sympathies. 



/ 



mnlvtvults of {Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FfRST YEAH. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS. 



Examiners 



IH 



David R. Keys, M.A., 
H. Dewaut, M.A. 



I. 

1. What weie the values of the vowels in Old Eng- 
lish ? 

2. Explain the diacritical marks used with the let- 
ters c, g, e. 

3. What is the effect on a (1st) of a following x ; 
(2nd) of an i in the next syllable ; (3rd) of an n follow- 
ing it immediately. 

4. " A knowledge of the laws of gradation and mu- 
tation is the main key to 0. E. Etymology." lUus- 
ti'ate the truth of this ivith reference to groxlation only. 

5. Compare 0. E. with German as to gender. 

6. Decline the Anglo-Saxon for : the stone, this foot, 
that father, which ship, other hooks, good eyes. 

7. Decline in full the 1st and 2nd personal pro- 
nouns, 

8. Conjugate in full the present tense of cwef/ian, 
sellan, and witan, and the pret. of drincan, and lufian. 

9. Note the peculiar uses of the 0. E. dative. 



II. 

(a) Translate : 

■ GregOrius so halga pupa is rilitlTco gecwe- 
den Engllscre </tCoclc(ipoHtol. 27uT hC go'seah thwt so 
mresta dfwl thveiVQ thSodo his lave forsawon, tidi forlefc li5 
hie, and frccCus tfni hroi/inan leode. Gif se blinda blindne 
Ijutt, hie t'ealla/Zi hegen on unne p^'tt. So Halga Grist 
is lufu and willa /Aa)s Fajdei* and thmn Suna ; and hie 
sind eallo go'lice mihfcige. Betere is s6o sSwol thonne 
so niote, and betera se llchama thonne his sci-fid. S5o 
srivvol is gast, anrl bo eorthWcwm uiottum no leofa</<. 
Be"healdai^/i Mas ffeogendan fuglas, tho, no siiw&th no no 
vipa^/<, ac se heofonlica Fredor hie fffett. He cwmth, ' Ic 

neom 6^/irnm niannuni gelic ; ' swelce he cwaxle, ' Ic 
Una eom rihtwis and tJdi othre sind syim-fulle.' 

1. Point out all words of foreign origin. 

2. Arrange the strong and weak nouns in separate 

lists. 

3. Give principal parts of all strong verbs. 

4. Explain the declension of all adjectives. 

5. Write etymological notes on for-sawon, gect'as, 
It^ode, bdgen, llchama, g^st, Faeder, dfdtt, cwa3^/i, eom. 

(b) Translate : 

Hwset th^ Eadmund cyning, mid ths&m the Hin- 
guar o5m, stod innan his healle, thsss Hselendes ge'myn- 
dig, and a'wearp his wgepnu; wolde geefenlsecan (Vlstes 
gebysnungum, the forbead Petre mid wajpnum to win- 
nenne wip pa wselhreowan ludeiscan. Hwset pa 
Eadmund go'bundon, and ge'bismrodon huxllce, and 
beoton mid saglum, and swa siththan lajddon </tonne 
ge'leaffullan cyning to anum eor^/ifaestan treowe, and 
tlegdon bine thwiY-to mid heardum bendum, and hine 
eft swungon langlice mid swipum ; and he simle cli- 
pode be twix threm swinglum mid sSi/aim geleafan to 
Hrelende Ciiste ; and pa hjo/^Anan tha. for his geleafan 
wurdon wodlice ierre, for thnnn the he clipode Crist him 
to fultume : hie sciiton tha mid gafelocum him to, swelce 
him to gamenc, oth thmt he eall wa3s be'sett mid hiera 



/, 



scotungiun, swelce lies byrsta, swa swa Sebabtianus 
wies. Pft ge'seali Hinguar, so ftrloasa flotmann, thoit se 
veithe\(L cyning noldo Cristo wi^/isacan, ac mid anrjudum 
gelfiafaii hine jofre clipodo : hfit bine thi beheafdian, 
and tha Ymithn&n swa dydon. Be twix tlii&m the bo cli- 
podo to Cristo tha. tugon tha. hmthnein thone balgan to 
Hlego, and mid unum swengo slogon bim of thmt bfiafod, 
and bis sawol sT^Aode goMnlig to Cristo. Thtsr wros sum 
mann gelionde ge'beal.ien, //nub God bebydd thtvm 
hto//tnum, the thin gebiorde eall, and bit eft sregde, swa 
swa we bit secgaf/t ber. 

1. Give principal parts of fitod, forb6ad, winnenne, 
tiegdon, wurdon, clipode, geseab, dydon, tugon, saegde. 

2. Derive drl^asan, cyning, winnenne, so^^um, h{eth- 
nan, b^t, fultume, boafod. 

3. Write notes on tbe use of prepositions in tbe 
passage. 

1. Write full grammatical and etymological notes on 
tbe italicized words in tbe following passages : 

(a) Yet tbere tbe Steele stayd not, but inly bate 
J)eepe in bis flesb, and opened wide a red flood- 
gate. 

(6) Moo little needed from my rigbt way to have 
straid. 

(c) Mammon was much displeasd, yet note bo chuse 
But beare tbe rigour of bis bold mesprise. 

(d) To wbom Cymocbles said ; For wbat art tbou, 
Tbat makst tbyself bis dayes-nian, to prolong 
Tbe vengeance prest ? Or wbo sball let me now 
On tbis vile body from to wveake my wrong ? 

(e) Wo worth tbe man 
Tbat first did teach tbe cursed Steele... 

(/) Witb tbat be cry do ; Mercy doe me not dye, 
No deeme tby force by fortunes doome unjust 
Tbat bath (maugre ber spigbt) tbus low me laid 
in dust. 

(g) And all tbat pveace did round about ber swell 
To catchen bold of tbat long cbaine, tbereby 
To climbe aloft, and otbers to excell, 



4: 



2. "Thereat tlie lecncl his gnasliin;j; teeth did ffvato 
" And jjriev'd, so Ioii/lj to lack his <^a-cedy pray ; 
" For wr-Il he vvepin'<l, tliat so <j;lor!i>iis l»ayte 
•' Would teiiipt his giiost to take thei'oof assay." 

Whnt (igurc of speech (hesides alliteration) is 
found in this passajje ? 

li. Explain the metre and versification of the "Fae.y 
Queene," and mention the leadinL,' poems in which the 
same metre has been used by later [joets. 

4, Discuss fully the iihiloloyieal value of the " Faery 
Queene" to the student of the English Language. 

.'. Spencer has been spoken of as the precursor of 
Milton and Puritanism. In what njspects does the 
" Fairy (Queene " bear out this criticism ? 

G. Give in substance Spenser's description of Prince 
Arthur in the <Sth Canto, and outline briefly the events 
succeeding his entrance in Avhieli he fie:ures. 

7. Write a brief critique on Cantos V. to VIIL of 
Hook II., pointing out what you consider the chief 
literary merits. 



./ 



CAtiintrtiitff of crorotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 




PROBLEMS. 

HONORS. 



., f VV. H. Ballard, M.A. 

hxammerB: | j^^^^^ McGowan, B.A. 



NoTK.—Cttndi Jutes will enclose solutions to problems nuinbored with 
Arabic and Jtomon numerals in separate envelup«M, 
endorsing them accordingly. 

1. Solve the equntions 

(hzx 4- cxy — ai/z) yz = {ex if + ayz — bzx) zx 
B» {ayz + bzx — cxy) xy = {xyz)i. 

2. There are n draweirt numbered conHecutively from 1 to 
n, and such that any drawer, say the m'''., contains m labels 
numbtM'ed from 1 to m. In liow many ways may a set of 
labels numbered 1 to n be selected tuking one from each 
drawer? 

3. In dividing any numl>er by 11 the remainder may first 
be found, then tlie units' digit of the quotient, then the hun- 
dreds' digit, and so on until the whole quotient has been 
obtained. 

Prove this, and ascertain whether the same holds in 
dividing any number, radix r, by r + 1- 

4. fn obtaining the value of y from the equation 



1 - (1 + r)- 



suppose that there has been found, by 



trial or otherwise, a value y^ which cannot differ much 
from Yf shew that a close approximation to the value of y is 
given by either of the expressions : 

yi (\ A. a> — a \ . 

'^ V ^ o - « (1 + ^1) - « - V ' 



r^(i 



ll - 



a»-n(l -f ^i)-«-»^ 

1 ^ (1 + f)-n 
where o' = ^ — ~-^ — • 

r 

which of these gives the closer approximation ? 



■*-i- 



fi. If .1 + fi + C — 90°. Hhew that 

(1)2 C08'''/l i'OS^/i + '2 C08•^^ C08''C' + 2 0Oh'''C.' C08M 

■■ coB*A + coH*/i + coH*C + 4 coM^yl coB''^ c(m'*C ; 

(2) 4 8in 2 A 8in '2B 8in 2C can never l)e greater than 
nin 2A + sin 2i3 4- sin 2C. 

6. .Shew that 

n I 3 _6 7_ _^ 

9. n 



1.3 ft.7 ^ 



13.lrt 



8v/2 
7. 8uni to infinity 

(1) Bin B— ^ sin 2fl + i Hin 3© — . . . . ; 

(2) The series whose n'* term is 

tan"^ (co8'<'»^— 1) 
2n - 1 

r. If A BCD be a cyclic qnadri lateral, ylT the diameter of 
itH circuiiiHoiihing circhi ; prove tli<^ ditforencn of the 
triangles JiAD und JiCJJ in \ AC- sin 2 JJAl). 

II. J^Q wn chord of a c(»nic normal at /*, fioni the pole of 
PQ a line is drawn intersecting the conic in li and S; prove 
that the angle JiPS is bisected bv PQ., 

III. If the sum of the abscissae of two points on a para- 
bola be given, the locus of the intersections of the tangents 
at the points is a parabola. 

TV. If n circhi intei-sect hyperbola, the product of the per- 
pendionlaj'8 form the points of intersection on one asymptote 
is equal to the product of the |)erpendioulai-s on the other 
asymptote. 

V. If the foci be joined to two points on a conic the four 
lines will touch a circle. 

YI. Find the axis and focus of a parabola having given 
four points on the curve. 



Winlt^tvaiW of Eovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



ANCIENT HISTORY. 



Examiners . 



f William Dale, M. A.. 
( H. R. Fairclough, M.A. 



Note — Candidates are requested to enclose the answers to questions 
in Sections A and B respectively in separate envelopes. 



1. Describe concisely the causes which tended to 
give Rome its early predominance in Latium. 

2. Point ont the great crises in the contest for polit- 
ical equality between the patricians and plebeians with 
dates. 

3. Explain briefly the origin, the constitution and 
the powers of tlie Roman Senate. What changes were 
changes were made in the Senate (a) on the establish- 
ment of the Republic ; (b) by Sulla ? What is the 
meaning of the term Patres conscripti ? 

4. Write explanatory notes on Civis Romanus ; jus 
Lata ; peregrinua : atipendlum ; publicani; quaestio 
pevpetua ; novvs homo ; plebiacitum. 

5. What were the reforms proposed by Caius Grac- 
chus ? Give the date, and explain the condition of 
things they were intended to remedy. 

6. Describe Hannibal's march from Saguntum into 
Italy, OR the immediate causes which led to the out- 
break of the civil war between Pompeius and Csesar. 



B. 

1. Give an account of early Greek colonisation. 

2. Describe the constitution of Solon, and state what 
modifications were made by ClisthenevS and Pericles. 

3. What influence did Persia exert on Greece durinor 
and after the Peloponnesian war ? 

4. Give an account of the Expedition of the Ten 
Thousand. 

5. What events are connected with Argennoussae, 
Antalcidas, Granicus, Leuctra, Amphipolis ? 

6. Sketch the career of Demosthenes. 



(ZHniifenaifti? of ^Toronto* 



A^i^UAL EXAMINATIONS! 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



FRENCH. 



Examiner : W. C. P. Bremner, B.A. 



I. 

Translate : 

Caboussat, seul. — Tout en promenant mon chou, 
j'ai retl<5chi ^ ce que m'ii clit Machut. . . Je sei-ais maire, 
le premier niagistrat d'Arpajon ! puis conseiller 
gdn^ral ! puis ddpute !...et npres ? le portefeuille ! 
qui sait l...{Tristement.) Mais non ! 9a ne se peut 
pas !.,.Je suis riche, considerd, adord...et une chose 
s'oppose h mes projets...lagranimaire fran9aise !... 
Je ne sais ]>ns.., (regardant aufour de ltd avec in- 
(/Hietude) je lie sais pas I'orthographe ! Les par- 
ticipes surtont, on ne sait par quel bout les pren- 
dre., tantot ils s'aecordent, tantot ils ne s'accor- 
ilent pas... quels ficlius caracteres ! Quand je suis 
embai'rasse, je fais un pate...mais ce n'est pas de 
I'orthographe ! Lorsque je parle, ga va tres-bien... 
(;a ne se voit pas., j'dvite les liaisons... A la cam- 
pagno, e'est iiretentieux...et dangereux...je dis, Je 
suis al I e . . . {li 'pvononce sans Her Z's a.vec Va.) Ah ! 
dame ! de mon temps on ne nioisissait pas dans les 
dcoles,,.j'ai appris k (?crire en vingt-six le9ons, et 
a lire...je ne sais pas comment., puisjemesuis 
lance dims le commerce des bois de charpente...je 
cube, mais je ne rddige ^a,H... {Regardant autour 
de lui) Pas m^me les discours que je prononce... 
des discours etoimants ! ... Arpajon m'dcoute la 
bouehe ouverte...comme un imbecile! On me 
croit savant... j'ai une rt^putation...mais gr^ce a 
qui ?gr&ce a un ange... 



! Ill 



1. Give the Pi-os. Ind. and Pres. Subj. iu full, the 
Pres. Part., the 1st Sing, of the Pret. Def. »\nd of the 
Future, of rijieclti, dif, wraift, mif, pent, pvcndvp, fah. 

2. qui mil Translate: Who knows French ? Who 
speaks English ? 

3. j'ivite lea liaisons. Explain " liaison." 

4. (f ri. What does this stand for ? 
'). je me suis lancf^. Why suia ? 

II. 

Translate : 

Les officiers.les tambours, la cantini&re se rejiliai- 
ent en meme temps autour de la fontaine, tandis 
que les couipagnies se croisaient comme un jeu de 
cartes ; en moins d'une minute, elles formferent le 
carr^ sur trois rangs, les autres au milieu, et pres- 
que aussit6t il so fit dans la rue un bruit t^pou van- 
table, les Croates arrivaient; la terre en tremblait. 
Je les vols encore d<?boucher au tournant de la rue, 
leurs grands manteaux rouges flottant derrifere 
eux connne les plis de cinquante (^tendards et 
courbes si has sur leur selle, la latte on avant, 
qu'on apercevait a peine leurs faces osseuses et 
brunes aux longues moustaches jannes. 

1. croisaient. From what verb. 

2. manteaux rouges. What adjectives always fol- 
low the noun ? 

3. Jlottant. When does the Pres. Part, agree ? 

4. aux longues moustaches. Translate : There is the 
man with long black hair ? 

Translate : 

Moi, le coude sur I'oreiller, les yeux «^blouis, 
regardant la neige s'amonceler au bord des petites 
fenetres, je me figiirais tout cela, et je revoyais 
aussi les hi vers passes : la lueur de notre grand 
fourneau s'avan^ant et reculant le soir sur le 
plancher, le mausei-, Koffel, et I'oncle Jacob autour, 
le dos courbe, fuinant leur pipe et causant de 
choses indiffe'rentos. J'entendis le rouetde Lisbeth, 
bourdonner dans hi silence, comme les ailes coton- 
neuses d'un papillon de nuit, et son pied niaiqner 
la mesure de la complainte que chante la biiche 



verte an inilien du foyor. Puis dehors, je me 
reprt^sentiiim ]oh "glissades sur la rivifere, les parties 
<le traineau, la bataille a pelotes do neige, les 
t^clats de rire, la vitre cassde qui tombe, la vieillo 
f^rand'mere qui crie du fond de TaUee, tandis que 
la bande se disperse, les talons aux t^paules. 

Madame Thi^r^se. 

1. Le do8 courhe. Why singular ? 

Translate : They have large eyes but small noses. 

2. La vieille grantVmh'e. Explain the apostrophe. 
Write the masculine equivalent of the expression. 

III. 

Translate : 

II y a deux manieres de passionner la foule au 
thd^tre : par le grand et par le vrai. Le grand 
prend les masses, le vrai saisit I'individu. 

Le but du poete dramatique, quel que soit d'ail- 
Icurs I'ensemble de ses idt^es sur I'art, doit done 
tonjours etre, avant tout, de chex'cher le grand, 
coiinue Corneille, ou le vi-ai counne Moli^re ; ou, 
niitnix encore, et cost ici le plus haut sommet oh 
pnisst; iiionter le gt^nie, d'ntteindre tout t\ la fois 
le niand et le vrai, le grand dans le vrai, et le 
vrai dans le grand, comme Shakespeare. 

Car, rernarquons-le en passant, 11 a ^td donn^ k 
Shakespeare, et c'est ce qui fait la souveraint^ de 
son g^nie, de c(mcilier, d'lniir, d'amalgamer sans 
cesse dans son ceuvre ces deux qualitf^s, la v^rit^ 
et la grandeur, qualit^s presque oppost^es, ou tout 
au uioins tellement distinctes que le ddfaut de 
chacune d'elles constitue le contraire de I'autre ; 
r^cueil du vrai, c'est le petit; I'^cueil du grand, c'est 
le faux. 



IM 



/, 



Siitftierofli? of CToronto* 



ANNUAi. KXAMINATIONS : 1801. 



FIltST YEAK. 



FRENCH. 



Examiner : J. Squaiu, B.A. 



I. 

1. Translate: 

(a) Dogs and cats arc sometimes good friends. 
(6) But often thoy are not good friends. 

(c) That man understands French and German. 

(d) That boy speaks French. 

(e) We have neither friends nor relatives. 

2. Translate : 

{a) This sugar cost five cents a pound. 
(6) Those children earn fifty cents a day. 

(c) How much do those pears cost ? They cost 
two cents a piece. 

(d) Your father has grey hair. 

(e) Fie has his hand in his pocket. 

3. Point out the chief differences between the use of 
the definite article in French, and its use in English. 

4. Translate: 

(a) He takes me to church. 
(6) I go with him to school. 

(c) Let them not go away. 

(d) They will not be able to be there. 

(e) Let him know that I am here. 
(/) Be silent. 



(<j) That you ini<,'lit coiuo. 
(/t) Lot us not run. 
(i) I sliall cnll him, 
(j) I shall hnlfl it. 

5. Transliito : 

(a) I gave hiin soino, but hu did not >^i\ ' n. any. 

(b) Como to nie, and thon ^o to him. 

(c) Give them souu;, and givo ik* somo. 

(d) Why do _> )U ot give the a .ome ? 

(e) Give him nothing, he i.s not good. 

6. Translate : 

(a) You must give me somo. 
(6) I wish you to como and soo mo. 
(c) Be so kind as to givo him some. 
{d) I wish your father would do it. 
(e) It is certain we shall bo there. 

7. Translate : 

(ft) Whom did you see yesterday ? . 

(b) What did you do this morning ? 

(c) I did what you told nioto do. 

(d) What are you thinking of ? 

(e) What were you speaking of ? 

8. Translate : 

(a) The man whom I saw is here. 

(b) The lady who was here is dead. 

(c) The house in which we lived is old. 

{d) The tree which is behind the house is tall, 
(e) The man to whom I gave the money is gone. 

n. 

Translate : 

When the grass is green, and the flowers bright 
aiid gay, then the birds come back to see us after 
their long sojourn in warmer countries. 'J hen men 
and animals are glad. It is no longer necessary that 
the former should wear so much clothes m order 
to be warm, and the latter have no longer need to 



L-iglit 
after 



H^ay in ihoir holes. All may now coino out and 
111) glad under the bright Hky. The brooks (rtiis- 
ncdv) which were frozen now run free through 
the grocn fields. The birds build their nests in 
the ti'll troc^, and sing their sweet songs all day 
long. Who W( :\d not like to be a bird ? They 
havo ni books to road, and no examinations to 
pass (faire). They eat and sing, and build nests and 
feed their little ones without thinking of anything 
else. 



SliifMerttftff of Sorontc. 



ANNUAL KXAMI NATIONS: IWH. 



I-'IKST VKAlt. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS. 



Exammcr: J. Squair, B.A. 



I. 

Translate : 

Kxpulse do Dorlin en IHG'j, Liebktiecht so rixait 
a Lclpxii,', on il troiivait, a la vcnlle ct an hmdoniain 
do la yiiorro do IMGd, ratiditoiro lo plus favorable 
a Ha propatjando contro la PrusHe, (|u'il no cessait 
d(f dononcoj' coniiuo hxddenda (J((rthaf/o. Loh Alle- 
niands vonaiont do so cannoner cntro oux. Le 
soul nnni piussion cxcitait on Saxo les plus vio- 
Icntos passions. A rantipathie inveteroe do cos 
populations douces et polios pour la morgue ct 
i'juTOijancc! dos Junkers, so joignait rhiimiliation 
do la (b'faito. La nouvelle confddt^ration de TAlie- 
nia^no du nord laissait dans los etats du sud des 
l('^j,'ions do naicontents. Liobknecht oxprimait lo 
sontiniont i^ont'ral lorscju'd fit'trissait I'ht^gdmonie 
do la Prusse oonuno la malediction, la mutilation 
de la patrio, lorsqu'il det'endait I'idt^e, populaire en 
Saxo, do la Grande AUemagne, d'oti les frferes 
d'Autriche no seraient pas exclus, L'administra- 
tion militairo prussienno supprime son journal. II 
retourne h Perlin sur la foi do ramnistie, on I'em- 
prisonne. II revient onsuite a Leipzig sans res- 
sources, sans perspectives d'avenir. II y avait 
gajjntJ un partisan, I'ouvrier tourneur Bebel, qui en 
valait des uiiliers, 



!!|NJ! I 



:. ii 






ii|; 



1. Distinguish auditoire, audience, Mid assistance. 

2. Translate into French, ddenda Carthago. 

3. Distinguish 2>a.'M patvie, coutree and cnmpaijne. 

II. 

Translate : 

Et Jes paresseux, en train «le mettre rt rude 
epreuve la |)atience de leur nmitre, eurent la joie 
iudicible de voir ce dernier se lever prtcipifcani- 
ment aii milieu d'une pdriode latine qu' il no prit 
meme pas le temps d'achever, comnie s'il cut oublit? 
soudain jiisqu'^ leur existence. Tin jeu favori, 
eonsistant k se lancer a travers la chambre des 
filches de papier chargees d'encre qui tachaient 
les murs et les habits, fut repris aussitot et con- 
tinue sans interruption pendant une demi-heure 
que dura I'absence de M. Duranton. Celai-ci 
avait endoss(i a la hate sa redingote ecrldsiastique 
la plus neuve et abattu d'un rapide coup de brosse 
le toupet grisonnant que, d'habitude, ses doigts 
relevaient, par distraction, au-dessus d'une large 
face olivtltre, plus sympathique et plus franche 
qu'elle n'^tait distinguee. Tout en se boutonnant 
de travers, il pe'ndti'a, encore ahuri par la bonne 
nouvelle, dans la piece ou I'attendait " le prince 
beau comme le jour" dont avait pavl^ Henriette. 

1. voir se lever, change voir to /aire, 

making any other changes you considei" necessary. 

2. comme s'il eat. Explain this use of the subjunc- 
tive. 

3. que dura, dont a,vait parle. Explain the inver- 
sion In these cases. 

III. 
Translate into French : 

I often amuse myself by looking out of my window 
to see who are jwssing in the street. It takes all kinds 
of people to make a world, and as one sits by the 
window one can see all their varieties. There is the 
lounger, too lazy to work, and not rich enough to be 
grand. Then there is the other sort of lounger who is 
rich enough to make a figure in the world, but who is, 
however, not any better on that account. As he passes, 
he raises his umbrella to keep the rain-drops from 



»p(jiling liis new coat. It's a piuy the rain were not 
fire which should burn liis coat and make him work 
to get anothei'. There is the man of business who is 
always in u hurry. You would ^hink he had the 
whole weight of the universe on his poor shouldera. 
Yes, see how he bends over as he hurries along. No 
doubt if he does not cheat some one, he will hinder 
some one from cheating him. There is the student of 
the fourth year who has learned all the University can 
leach him, and who is thinking on what he will do 
when he has finished his studies. He intends to njove 
the world, in whatever profession he may find himself. 
I can see it in his look and he will do it, I know. 




• 






pi 1 i 



mnivttmxt oC QTovotfto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS. 



Exahihier: W. C. P. Bremnkr, B.A. 



Translate : 

((/) Bon ! qn'e.st-C3 que le sens? est-ce faire la moue, 
Nouei- lie longs projects qn'nn accident d^noue, 
Toujours pi-evoir, tonjouvs jipprehender ? Ma foi, 
(^e dont on pleur ailleurs uie met en gaite?, uioi ; 
.Te me livre an liasard qui nie mfene k sa guise, 
Fit chevauche, joyeux, de surprise en surprise. 
Les faits, et non pas moi, sont des extravagants, 
Temoin ceux qii'on a vu3 depuis tant6t cinq ans. 
Voila, vous I'avofti-ez, de rincomprc^hensible ; 
Ce serait monstrueux, si ce n'etait risible. 
Des bourgeois souverains, des rustres gdneraux, 
Des bottiers, des tailleurs, qui battentdes heros, 
Tandis que des marquis, par la contraire chance, 
Se font maitres d'escrime ou professeurs de danse, 
C'est absurde, a tel point que c' est divertissant. 
Voyez-vous oe monsieur, d'or tout resplendissant ? 
II fut de nies fenniers ; avec I'argent d'un terme 
II acheta les biens dont il avait la feraie ; 
II a des millions ; moi, je n'ai plus un sou ; 
Je tronve cela drole, et j'en ris comme un fou. 
Bref, depuis quinzie jours que j'y suis, j'dtudie 
Paris, et chaque instant m'oftre la comedie. 

Le Lion Amoureux. 

1. Who is the speaker ? Mention incidents, shewing 
how this character is kept up. 



I M! 



II 



ip;iii 



1 liiiti 

li ill ill' 



2. Wi-ite in full the Pres. Indie., and the 1st Pei'. PI. 
of the Pret. Def. and Fut. Indie, of tlic Tivs. mid 
Imperf. Subjun. of nil ineguiar verbs in tlio extiacfc. 

3. Write notes on <]t(e as used in the Krst two lines. 

4. qu'on a vuts. Why vm ? When is qui used as 
an object ? 

5. avoih'ez. Write a note on this form of the verb, 

Translate : 
(a) lis entr^rent tons trois chez la Rebec, et, en 
moins d'un quart d'heure, la grosse boiteuse rdus- 
sit k Icur servir nne omelette de bonne mine, du 
pain bis et du viii clairet. Les paysans no njan- 
gent pas vite, et le |)etit Pierre avait si grand ap- 
pdtit c|u'il se passe bien une heure avant que 
Germain pfit songer k se reniettre en route La 
petite Marie avait mantr^ pur compliiisance d'abord; 
puis, peu a peu, la faira dtait venue : car a seize 
ans on ne peut pas faire longtemps difete, et i'air 
des campagnes est imp^rieux. Les bonnes paroles 
que Germain sut lui dire pour la consoler et lui 
faire prendre courage produsirent aussi lenr etf'et ; 
elle lit effort pour se persuader que sept mois ser- 
aient bientot passes, et pour .songer au bonheur 
qu' elle aurait de se retrouver dans sa famille et 
dans .son hameau, puisqiie le pfere Maurice et Ger- 
main s'accordaient pour lui promettre de la prendre 
hi leur service. 

(h) Tiens, (;a me fait plus de peine (jue je ne peux te 
le dire, et j'ai envie de te ramener chez ta mhre au 
lieu d'aller k Fourche. 

(c) Pour le coup j'y renonce ! dit Germain en frap- 
pant du pied. On nous a jete un sort, c'est bien 
sAr, et nous ne sortirons d'ici qu'au grand jour. 
II faut que cet end.roit soit endiabld' 

La Mare au Diable. 

1. Put songer. Why Subjunctive ? 

2. " snt lui dire" " et lui faire prendre". Explain 
lui in each case. 

3. hi petite Muru. When is the article used with 
the names of persons ? 



Translate : 

Je lui expliciuai Ics motifs qui avaicmt dfi n«^ces- 
saircMieiit anioner ce rdsultat. Le premier t^tait la 
multiplicity! des emprunts at raccumulation des 
intdrets, dont il n'avait point sembld se prt^occuper. 
L'absence de comptabilitd (Jcrite et s^rieuse I'avait 
dvidemment tromp^ ! il ^couta mes explications 
les deux poings appuyes sur la table et les regards 
fixds snr les miens. 

Je comprends ! je coinprends ! dit-il, quand 
j'eus acliev^; j'ai fait entrer dans nion ^curie 
tons les chevaux qu'on a voulu me prater sans 
penser qu'ils me ruineraient en fourrage. Mille 
millions de diables! voilS, ofci Ton est conduit 
quand on ne sait pas tracer vos pattes de mouches, 
et qu'on ne connait pas votre grimoire ! Ceux 
qui n'ont que leur caboche pour grand livre dev- 
raient tout r^gler de la main a la main, et ne pas 
se Jeter dans les paperasses. C'est corame la 
riviere, vois-tu, on finit toujours par s'y noyer. 

Je lui demandai avec inquit^tude .■ 'il n'avait point 
d'antres ressources que celles dont je venais de 
prendre note, et si c*(?tait bien ]k son bilan d^finitif*. 

Du tout, du tout, reprit-il pr^cipitamment ; tu 
me (lis qu'il manque vingt-trois mille francs ? . . . . 
Eh bien i on les trouvera ; ils sont ailleurs. 

Confessions d'un Ouvriek. 

1, qui avaient (M. Translate : He ought to have 
ffoiie to school. 



2. qu' on a voulu. 
of voulu. 



Write a note or the agreement 



Ht 



3. tout r4<jler. Translate. : We have them all. 
has done everything. That's all. 

4. s'il n'avait point. What difference between looint 
and yas ? 

.5. vingt-trois raille. What numerals take the mark 
of the plural ? 



?*^ 



C9n(ber0ft|? of ^Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



GIIRMAN GRAMMAR AND (JOMPOISITION. 



Examinev : A. F. Chambkklain, M.A. 



I. 

1. Mention the Genuan prepositions that govern the 
Dative Case only, and give two examples of the idio- 
matic uses of each. 

2. Show by examples the nature and method of 
formation of German adverbs. 

3. State the force of the following suffixes, giving an 
example to illustrate each, and indicating their use 
in ■word-lormation : -chen, -hedt, -nis, -in, -tuvif -bar, 
-nchaft, -haft. 

4. Define the intiectional and .syntactical irregulari- 
ties of the verbs mogen and konnen. 

o. Write notes on the use of the Genitive Case in 
German. 

6. Examine the following sentences, and make any 
corrections necessary : 

(a) An die ufer des rheines stehen herrlichen 
Burge. 

(b) Man sagt er hat auf der Kirche gegangen. 

(c) Es gibt viel Beeten in den Garten des Herren. 

(d) Das Antwort und der Frage sind dieselben 
nicht. 

(e) Kennen sie wer diesen Mann ist! 



■M 






III! 



i 



;i! ; 



n. 

(A) Transluto into Ocniiaii itnij nix of tliu follow iiiy' 
sentences : 

(a) Which i.s the heavier, lead or gold ? 

(b) What has beco)ne of your friend (* 

(c) Tiie ship has sunk in the dce|> sea. 

((/) The twenty-fourth of May is the C^ueen's liirth- 
day 

(e) The days are lonjj;est in the month of June. 

(/) When did you begin to study Gernuin i 

{(j) Toronto is the largest city in Ontario. 

(k) The present Emperor of Germany is William II. 

(i) Have you ever been in Englaiul / 

(J) There are many long rivers in Canarla. 

(B) Translate into English am/ nix of the following 
sentences : 

(rt) Je holier ein V'ogel tiiegt, je kleiner scheint er 
zu werden. 

(6) Man sagt : Eine Schwalbe macht keinen Som- 
mer. 

(c) Wer gern giebt, fragt nicht lange. 

{d) Vergeben ist leichter denn vei-gessen. 

(e) Geht Ihre Uhr vor, oder geht sie nacli ? 

(/') Sie miissen die englischen Zeitungcn leseii. 

{(j) Stehen sie gewbhnlich friih des Morgons auf ? 

(/i) Es liisst sich nicht andern. 

(i) Er ging jeden Tag urn fiiftf Uhr aus. 

{j) Sieht es nicht nach Regen aus ? 

III. 

Answer, in German sentences of not fewer than six 
words each, any four of the following sentences : 

(a) Was fur Biicher lesen Sie ? 

(b) Haben Sie einen Bruder ? 

(c) Was fiir Sprachen studieren Sie ? 

{d) Auf welche Weise gedeidcen Sie diesen Sommer 
zuzubringen i 

(e) Wo sind Sie geboren, und in welchem Jahre ? 
(/) Gibt es heute etwas Neues ? 



(g) MiJchtoii sie nicht cine Reise nach Europa 
inacbon ? 

(/«,) Dor wicviolrttc ist heute ? 



IV. 



Translate into Entrlish 



(a) Napoleon Bonaparte war aiit' keineni Thron 
^oboren ; er stamintu aus eiiiur anncn adeliyeii 
Fiiuiilif) in Ajaccio, <ler bedeuteniUton Studt tier 
Iiisel Oor.siUa. Sein Vater war Rechtsgelclirter, 
.seine Mutte\", Liititia, eine der schonsten Frauen 
ihrer Zeit. Er war der zweito von acht Geschwis- 
tern and 1769 geboren. 

(6) Zwei Stiinder nach Mitternacht, es war am 
zwolfteii Oktobei*, riefen zwei Matro.sen der Pinta, 
welche vorau.seilte : " Land ! Land !" und gaben 
noch anderc Zeichen dei* Freude, Bie batten auch 
die Kii.ste in der That entdeckt. Sie waren nur 
noch zwei Meilen davon enti'ernt. Bei Tagesan- 
bruch sah man eine schone, flache Insel, in dem 
Sc'u.iiucke der Tropenvegetation. 



eAtiiHertfUtf of Toronto, 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



GERMAN AUTHORS. 



Examiners 



f W. H. 
• t G. H. 



vanderSmissen, M.A. 
Nkedler, B.A., Ph.D. 



*,* All CandidateB must take Parts 1. ami IV. Candidates for 
Honors in the Deimrtincnts of Natural Sciences and of 
Clieniistry and Mineralogy are allowed an option between 
Parts II. and III. ; otlier Candidates must talte Part II. 



Translate : 



I. 



(a) S3olii (am Jtfdjc \ir\U SSrtcfc fcfjneU Cffnent, l)ur(^=« 
fe()cnt mt mtt S3lctftift bejetdjncnb). 34) Ijabc bfe 
9ie»{fton berettg flcma(^t, aUtv <Zd)t\m, 

SWftUcr. '>)lid)t flanj. ^{er unten ifl noc^ ba« 2Wan* 
nfflfaltific, weld^eg ^crr 5BcUm(iua ten Severn gcfleben 
()ar. 

S3oli|. ^crbamU! (Ucjt in tcr 3cfmnfl) 2BSfc^c 
»om 93obcn flc|iol)len— DdUfngc flcborcn— Concert, 
Concert, SScrcindft^iuifl, Z\)tattv—Mt& in £)xtnnn^— 
^Icuerfunbenc 8ocomot{»c ; tic (^ro§c (Sccfc^lanfle gcfejicn 
(Sluffpn'nflcnt). SlUc 2Setter, fommt tcr wtcter mit ter 
alten ©cefc^langc I i6) woUtc, jtc wflrtc i^m aid ®clec 
fiercest unt cr mfi§tc jtc fait aufeffcn (eilt jur Sl^flr 
xt6)ti). S3ellmaud, Ungcldeucr/ fomm ()er»or ! 

©cltmaud (»on rcd^te cintrctcnt, tie geter in ter 
^ant). 2Bad fiicbt'g ? 5Boju ter Sfirm ? 

S3olj (fcicrlic^). 33eUmaug, aid wir tir tic (Sbre 
erwiefen, tic^ mit SSerfertigung ter 9lippedfa(()cn filr 
tiefed S3latt ju bctrauen, ta war tie SWeinunfl nid^f, 
ta§ tu tie ewicjc ftro§c ©ecfcblanflc tur^ tic (Spaltcn 
unferer Bcitunfl wfiljcn foUtcft ! — — 2Bic fonntejt tu 
tic abgetrofc^ene Siigc wictcr ^incinfe^cn? 

Freytaq, Die JoV'Timlisten, 




W-m 



1. PivrHo tho followinf; V(>rl).s, Kivin^ tho Inf., impf. 
In»l. l.st Hin;,'., nnd past imrt. of oavh : iiriirhi'n.ufsfolUcn, 
j/ehor&n, (/cni'Iu'ii, mi/rssni, l:<)iiiiii, /I'nirhisf/ini. 

2. Accontimtc (Inrchnchcml, Uciuh'khi, Mdnnig- 
fill f !;/(', Concni, VcrcinsttUtaiKj, TluiUer. 

.'{. Gclec. Indicatt! tlio propor prominciatioii of this 
word. 

4. Oivo tho ^'OTidnr of DriUinf/, Conrcri, VrreivftHU- 
zuiif/, ThcAiMr, Uwjchnucr, k^palte, with rulcH. 

T). Kommt dcr, dr. ; nic vnlvth — aii/r»n<'i). Write 
)iot(ss on tlio construction of tlx'so cIiiuhcs. 

G. Oivo tlio gon. Hinj^. and noin. pi. of Reiusion, 
Schelm, Concert, Loromollve, Uiujeheucr, Jilatt, 

Translate : 
(b) BoLZ. Dio klcMno Bcgcbenhoit ist wic hundert 
andore. nnd nio wiire niir ^ar niclit intcrcsHant, 
wenn ich sio niclit sidl»st crlclit liiitto. Dc^nUon 
Sii' .sicli oin altos ITaus, ich bin Student und wohno 
darin drci Trcppen hoch. In doin Hausc inir 
gc'j;c')i,!tor wohnt ciii jun;jj('r(Ji'J('hrt«'r : wii-kcjincn 
oii»ii);(or nicht. Mitten in der Nacht weekt mich 
ein .viister Liirni uml ein nierkwiirdi;,'(!,s Knistc^rn 
unter iiiir. Wenn das Miiuse w.-u-en, so nuis/ten 
sie (!inen I'^ackeltan/, auinihren, denn nieine Stidte 
war hell erleucht(!t. Ich springe; an das Fenster, 
da schlii^t die helle Flaniiiie ans deni Stoekwerk 
unt(!r niir his zu niir heraiif, nieim^ P\'nsters(:heil)en 
spriu'^en nni nieinen Kopf li(>runi nnd ein nichts- 
wUrdi<'er Qualm driiu't auf mich ein. Weil es 
iinterdiosen Llnistiinden un<^euiiithlich wiu'dc;, sich 
zuni Fonster hinaus/.uloi,'on, ho laufe ich an <lie 
Thiir nnd iiftne. Auch die Treppe kaini die (»e- 
nioinheit nicht verleui^nen, welche alteni IIolz 
ei^fen ist, sio hrcnnt in heller Fiannne. Dn.'i 
Treppcn hoch und koin Ausweg, ich ;;ab mich 
verloren ! — 

Ihul 



Impf. 

okUn, 



ivni ft' 
t)f this 

Write 



hundert 
)roKsn,nt, 
i)rnl<on 

(I VV()1»«»0 

uisc mil' 
ikonncn 
hkt micli 
Knistorn 
imis/ti'n 
lie Stnbu 

l<\nstev, 

,()ck\v»'rk 

sf.lx'iUen 

in uiri»tH- 

Wfil t'*< 
urd*!, sicli 
ih !Ui nio 
111 (lio («H- 
tom IIol^' 
no. I>ici 
•ral) iui(!h 

I hid 



II. 

Tmiisliito : 

Dfiiii ilio Klut (liij^Min, sicli zii viMlaufoii, iiikI diu 
KiilirtT iltii' Klottf. luis Fmvlit iiiit. ilircii scliWDrcn 
Fahi/ou^vM luilMt'in Stnui(U) />i lilcHn'ij, imd boi 
I'iiicm iiny;liicl<li('li('U Aiis^^'iiiij,' dcs Tictlciis duiii 
Fciiidc /111- l>iiitt! /u wi'rdiMi, /.();,'fn sich voii doin 
Diuninc /iii'iiclv und siiclitcii das litdio Moor /u 
;^e\viiiiiiii. Kaiim iHiucrUto dies Alexander, ho 
/(U^to i'V sL'iin'ii Tnippun dio Hicliciidoii SclutFo, 
iiihl miuit( 111' ^if aid', mit oiiiciii Kcimlii /u ciidon, 
dor .sich scUi.st aid'^i'^'ohi'ii li/ilit'. Dio liullilndi- 
sclicii Hiiil'Mtrupnoii warnii <liiu'r.stL'ii,wt'lche wuiik- 
ten, und l)ald rololiMi tlio SccliiiKh'r ilirmii iJcispiol. 
Sii! wart'i-ii sich fiii<4.st den l)aiiiin liuval), iiiii (hirch 
W'att'ii odi'i' SchwiiniiU!!! die Scliillo /u enfiehon, 
ftbur wt'il ilnu Fhiclit vicl /ii uiijj;t'.stiiiu gcschuli, 
so iiindi'itt'ii s'w. ciiinndcr .sclhst, und stUr/teti 
haufniiwcise mitrr tloiu Scli'.vort dcs nachsot/un- 
tlon Sioj^crs. ytdhst an ilen Schitlcn i'anden Violo 
noch ilir (hab, wcil jeder dcini andorn /uvoiv.u- 
komnien suclitc, und inohreie Falir/ou<;o untcr 
clur Last dorur, die sich hinoinwart'on, untursankun. 
ScHiLi.Kii, Belagevuwj von Antivcrpen, 

1. Account lor the position of each of the following 
words in its scntiMUH! : an, (1. ]), hlciban, zo<jon, Alex- 
luide)', zei(jt<\ liabc, t^ecldmlci', Iwnib, (jesclui/i. 

'2. Accentuate hinelmvarfcn, untei'nanki'n, giving 
reasons. 

3. aufgeychen habe. Parse, and account for the mood. 

III. 

A. Translate one only of the following extracts, 
answering the (piestions attiiched to (a). 

(d) Bei andercn lillenienten, wie z. W bcini Qucck- 
.silber, /ink und (Jadniium, i.st Atom und Molecid 
identisch. Man kann die relativcn (jewiclitf) 
der Atonic bestinnnen, indem man dem Atom 
irgend eines Klementes ein bcstinnntes Atom- 
gewicht willkiiilicli ertheilt, mit welchem man 
die Atomg(!wichto anderer Elemente verglei- 
clien kann. J)ieso relativcn (Jcwichte hei.ssen die 
Atomgewlcldc. Da der VVasserstotl' von alien Elc- 
mentondas nie(hig.ste Atomgewicht besitzt, so hat 
man sein Atomgcwicht als Einheit gewuhlt. Das 



pi J! 



i 



! m 



Moleculargewicht oines Elernentes oder einer Ver- 
bindung ist die Summe der Gewichte der sie 
bildenden Atome. 

Hodges, Scientific German, Pt. I. 

I 1. z.B.t d.h. Write these two contractions out in 

full. 

2. Give the principal parts of heaitzen, lassen, verglei- 
chen, heissen, enthaltcn. 

3. der sie bildenden Atome. Show the relation of 
these words to one another, substituting a relative 
sentence. 

(6) Da die Nahrstoffe durch die geschlossenen Wan- 
dungen der Zellen hindurjhtreten miissen, uin in 
diese hinein zu gelangen, so folgt, dass sie in gelos- 
ter, fliissigcr Form vorhanden oder gasformig sein 
miissen, Sie gelangen auf dem Wege einfacher 
Diffusion in die zur Aufnahme geeigneten Zellen. 
Der Kohlenstoff wird den Pflanzen hauptsachlich 
dadurch zugefuhrt, das die blattgriinhaltigen Or- 
gano Kohlensaure aufnehmen, dieselbe unter dem 
Einflusse des Lichtes in ihre Elemente zerlegen, 
den Kohlenstoff fiir sich behalten und den Sauer- 
stoft' wieder abscheiden. Der Wasaerstof gelangt 
in alle stickstoti'freien Verbindungen wohl nur 
durch Zersetzung von Wasser; in die stickstoft- 
haltigen, ausser auf diesem Wege, vielleicht auch 
noch durch Aufnahme von Ammoniak. 

Ibid. 
B. Translate into German : 

(a) Energy means the power of doing work. 
There are two kinds of energy which are being con- 
tinually changed into each other, and these are the 
energy of actual motion (o7' kinetic energy), and the 
energy of position (or potential energy). Energy is 
not destroyed by impact, but is converted into heat. 

Also any two of the following sentences : 

(b) Elastic fluids have been divided, for conveni- 
ence sake, into gases and vapors. 

(c) The intensity of sound is inversely as the 
square of the distance of the sonorous body from the 
ear. 

{d) More than three-fourths of the elementary 
substances possess metallic properties, and among them 
are all the useful metals. 



IV. 

Translate : 

(a) Die Schlaeht von Marignano war gewonneii 
iind setzte den Konig Franz I. in den Besitz von 
Mailand. Der junge Konig war so freudetrunken 
liber diesen ersten Sieg, dasz er das Vtrlangen 
auszerte, hier auf deui Schlachtfelde in der Mitte 
der Helden nach alter Weise zura Bitter geschlagen 
zu werden. Er wandte sich an Bayard, den Bitter 
ohne Furclit, und sagte : " Ich kenne niemand in 
dem Heere, der so allgemein geschatzt wird als 
dieser Bitter. Ja, Bayard, lieber Freund, von 
Eurer Hand will ich heute zum Bitter geschla- 
gen werden, well derjenige, der sich in so vielen 
Schlachten als einen vollkommenen Bitter gezeigt 
hat, am meisten berechtigt ist, andere zu Bittern 
zu machen." Bescheiden blickte Bayard auf die 
anwesenden FUrsten und Herren und erwiderte, 
solche Ehre komme nur diesen zu. Umsonst ; sie 
selbst munterten ihn dazu auf. Noch zbgerte er 
beschamt. " Nichts, nichts ! " rief der Konig, " ich 
befehle es." Und der Konig kniete nieder und 
empfing den Bitterschlag. 

(b) Hinaus in die Feme mit lautem Homerklang, 
Die Stiinnien erhebet zum mannlichen Gesang ! 
Der Freiheit Hauch weht machtig durch die Welt, 
Ein freies, frohes Leben uns wohlgefallt. 

Wir halten zusammen, wie treue Briider thun, 
Wenn Tod uns umgrauet und wenn die Waffen 

ruhn ; 
Uns alle treibt ein reiner, f roher Sinn, 
Nach einem Ziele streben wir alle hin. 

Der Hauptmann, er lebe! er geht uns kiihn voran ; 
Wir folgen ihm mutig auf blut'ger Siegesbahn. 
Er flihrt uns jetzt zum Kampf und Sieg hinaus, 
Er flihrt uns einst, ihr Briider, ins Vaterhaus. 

Wer woUte wohl zittem vor Tod und vor Gefalir ? 
Vor Feigheit und Schande erbleichet unsre Schar ; 
Und wer den Tod im heil'gen Kampfe fand, 
Ruht auch in fremder Erde im Yaterland ! 



1 \ 



m 



Mi 



\m 



\ ill' 



|1 i!.> 



liiUI 



IB' 



iill!!^ 



!lii> 



Hi 



m 



■ HP 



l!|:i i 



ainftotreffi) oC ^Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



GERMAN. 

HONORS. 



ICxamlner: G. H. Needler, B.A., Ph.D. 



I. 

Translate : 

3cl; lebtc fltU unt ^avrnlo^ — bag ®efc^o§ 
9Dar auf teg iOaltcg %kxt nur gert(^tct, 
2)icinc ©ebanfcu wavcn rcfu »on 2Worb — 
2)u ^aft aug meinem gvi'ebcn m\ii ^craug 
l*5ef(^rerft ; in cjat)rcnb Dradjcnfifft ^afl bu 
S)ic ^M) ter fvommcn !Denfavt nttr scrwanbclt ; 
3um Ungcbeurcu ^afi tu m\6) gewiJ^nt — 
5Cfv fid) tc0 ^tntcg ^aupt 3,uni Z^dt fcjjte, 
!Der faun au^ trcffcii tn tag ^crj teg gci'ntg. 

2)tc armen »^tnblctn, btc unfd^ulttflen, 
2)ag trcuc 2i5ctb mug td; »or bciner 2Sut 
^efc^il^en, 8ant)»c-rtt ! — 3)a, alg tdb ten 53ogcnjtranfl 
Stnsr-rt — alg miv tic -^ant erjittcrtc — 
2llg tu mit gvaufam teufelifcfjcr 8ufl 
5D?id; jroangjl, aufg |)aupt teg ^intcg anjulcgen — 
Sllg id^ o|)nmad)tifl flc][>cnt rang »or tir, 
Damalg gclobt' id; mx ixi meinem 3nnern 
WliX fur^tbarrm eitfdbwur, ten nur ®ott gel(>0rt, 
S)a^ meincg nadjften ©clbuffeg erfteg Bid 
!Dcin ^crj fein foUtc — SCag x^ mir gclobt 
3n jcncg ijiugenblirfeg ^iJlIcnqualen, 
3fl eine (jeil'gc ©d;ult — i4> will fie ja^len. 

Schiller, Wilhdm Tell, 

1. Who is here speakitig ? Explain the connection 
of this extract with the plot. 




I' III 



I li 



2. in gdhrend Drachcngift. Give the prose fonn of 
this expression. 

3. Give the principal parts of trcfcn, anzocj, zxcaiujd, 
anlegen. 

4. Sketch the part taken in the play hj- Ulrich von 
Eudenz, Arnold von Melch thai, and Iledwii!' [Tell's wife). 

5. What was Schiller's motive in introducinff Jo- 
hannes Parricida ? Give an i;ccoimtof his reception at 
Tell's house. 

II. 
Translate : 

Hennino. Vater Lange, icli habvi Euch schon 
einnial gesagt, dasz Ihr mir die Dorte geben sollt. 
Daj5umal habt Ihr niich au.sgelacht, und ich habe 
es 'runterwUrgcn miissen. .Tetzt muint' ich nur, 
das Lachen ware Euch am Ende vcrgangen, von 
wegen — (niacht die Gebiirde des Hangens) und 
wenn Ihr die Augen zngemacht habt, — nnd dcnn 
Haus und Hof ohne Herrn — und weil die Dorte 
niich will, so freiten wir uns am Ende docli, und 
da war's doch besser, — Ihr gebt nns Euern Segen 
— man wuszte doch, woran man ware — und das 
Sterben wurde Euch nicht so sauer, wenn Ihr 
Eure Tochter — 

Lange (der sich inzwisehen uragewandt \..&i.) 
Halt, Spitzbube ! Hab' ich Dich erwischt auf 
Deinem fahlen Pferde ? Ein Satan von einem 
Bauernliimmel, schlau wio die Siinde ! Macht 
mir erst die Hblle heisz, damit ich weichmiitig 
werden soil, der durchtriebene Mordhallunke, und 
dann soil Vater Lange seinen vaterlichen Segen — 
nee, mein Sohn ; um Vater Langen ubern Lottel zu 
balbieren, muszt Du friiher aufstehn. 

Heyse, Hans Lange. 

1. Under what circumstances did this conversation 
take place ? 

2. Describe any two of the following events in the 
play: 

(a) Bugslaff brought before the duchess, with 
Enoch's account of his arrest. 

{h) Achim's attempt to surprise Eugslaff' at Hans 
Lange's house, and bring him to Rugenwalde. 

(c) Bugslaff's appearance as victor at the castle, 
and what follows to the end of the play. 



III. 

Translate : 

Das unbekanntc! Wasser lag so schwaiz um ihn 
her, liinter sicli hbrto er das Springon eincs Fisches ; 
es wurde ihm plotzlich so unlieimlich in dem frem- 
den Eiemente, dasz er mit Gewalt das Gestrick dor 
Ptianzen zerrisz, und in athemloser Hast dem 
Lande zuschwainni, Als er von hier auf.den hJee 
zuriickblickte, lajj; die Lilie wie zuvor fern und 
einsam iiber der dunklen Tiefe. — Er kleidete sich 
an und ging langsam nach Hause zuriick. Als er 
aus dem Garten in den Saal trat fand er Erich 
und die Mutter in den Vorbereitungen einer kleinen 
Geschaftsreise, welche am andern Tage vor sich 
gehen sollte. Wo siud deim Sie ao spat in der 
Nrtcht gewesen ? rief ihm 'die Mutter entgegen. 
Ich ? erwiederte er ; ich wollte die Wasserlilie 
bcsnchen; es ist aber nichts daraus geworden. 
Das versteht wieder einmal kein Mensch ! sagte 
Erich. Was Tausend hattest du denn mit der 
Wasserlilie zu thun ? Ich habe sie friiher einmal 
gekannt, sagte Reinhardt; es ist aber schon lange 
her. 

Storm, Irtimensee. 

1. lag, gekannt. Give the principal parts of licgen, 
legen and lugen ; kennen and konnen. 

2. nach. Explain the difference in the use of nach 
and zu as equivalents of •' to." Illustrate by forming 
four distinct sentences in German. 

3. To what extent is this effort to gain the water- 
lily symbolic of Reinhardt's life-experience ? 

IV. 

(a) Translate : 

Es giebt eine Art guter Kopfe.die in der Jugend 
vornehmlich verkannt werden; und unter diese 
gehorte auch Lessing. Auch die besten Vorsch- 
riften sind fUr sie nicht; sie mussen durchaus 
ihrem eignen Gange ganz Uberlassen werden. 
Ihrem Studieren eine andere, und wie man glaubt, 
eine bessere Richtunggeben,ist soviel, als sie davon 
abwendig machen ; und wenn sie sich sogar aus 
eigner tJberzeugung nach fremder Vorschrift 
zwingen wollen, so fiihlen sie doch das fur sie 

[OVEB.] 




nicht passonde Jocli. Fallen sie aber auf ctvvas 
von freien Stiickcn, so lebcn unci wobun sie ganz 
darin, rnd lassen nicht cher ab, als bis sie es z'nm\- 
lich crsclilipft zu luibon glauben. Unterdessen 
nehnieii sie aber nichts anders vor; selbst ihre 
Erholungen babcn davauf Beziehung. J(; gros/cr 
der Umfiing ihrer Kenntnisse wi/'d, jc langer halt 
ihr Fleisz an. Dal)ei sind sie aber doch sehr der 
Zerstreuung ausgesetzt, iind kbnncn loicht auf 
einen andein Gogcnstand mifc eben der Hitze uiid 
Anhaltung gebracht Averdeti. Das Planmiiszigo 
fallt also ganz bei ihnen wcg, das jeder andero 
Studierende beobachten musz, wenn er die Uni- 
versitat nicht vergebens besucht haben will. 

I Nur Ged ;ld, wenn Spotter j*asen, 
1st die Drohung oft nur Wind, 
Eichen wachsen oft aus Stoinen, 
Vor dergleichcn Ruthen \v<inen, 
Zeigt ein unbesonnen Kind. 

Nur Geduld ! das falsche Gliicke 

Priift die Helden durch den Streit : 

Ohne Blut ist wol kein Siegen ; 

XJnd ein wahres Selbstvergniigen ' 

Kommt nicht ohne Kampf und Leid. 

Nur Geduld, wenn Neider prahlen, 
Denn es ist ein Uebergang : 
Eh' wir oft die Hand verkehren, 
Wird ihr Lachen schon zu Ziihren 
Und die Lust ein Mordjjesansr. 

Nur Geduld, die rechte Liebe 
Griinet auf Bestandigkeit ! 
Laszt uns manche Schbnheit warten, 
Gibt uns endlich doch ihr Garten 
Blunien der Zufriedenheit. 






Cftnftif risftff of ^Toronio, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



GERMAN. 

HONORS. 



Emmmers:^^ H. Needler, Ph. D. 



I. 

1. Indicate the various uses of the Geriiiiye and 
Dative Cases in German, ilhistratihg your answer by 
examples. 

2. Give an account of the comparison of German 
adjectives and adverbs. 

3. Tell what you know of the syntax of appositive 
nouns in German. 

4. Write a note on the use of the prepositions um, 
zu, nach,von. 

ir. 

Translate into English the following : 

(a) Der Hirsch ist ein schones, edel gebautes Tier, 
mit schonen, groszen feurigen Augen, kleinem 
Kopfe, mit dem herrlichen Geweih geziert, und 
mit Fuszen, die schlank, jedoch kraftig gebaut 
sind. Sein Geruch und Gehor sind scharfer, denn 
sein Gesicht. Wenn er hoi'cht, regt er die Ohren 
und richtet den Kopf in die Hohe, um jeden 
Schall besser auffangen zu kbnnen, Wenn ihm 
der Wind entgegen kommt, riecht (vernimmt) er 
auf mehrere hundert Schritte den Menschen. Er 
ist neugierig, schlau und listig. Wenu man ihm 
von weitem zuruft oder pfeift.oder wenn er Musik 
hort, so bleibt er siehen und sieht sich um ; be- 






l-Ji 



iim 



merkt er oinen Menschen ohne Oewehr unrl Hund, 
so geht or stolz vovuber, denn er weisz bald den 
Jtitrer von dem Holzhauer und Wandrer zu unter- 
scheiden. 

(b) Die Erde sao;t es den Lerchen an, 
Dasz der Friihling gekommen sei. 
Da schwingen sie sich himmelan 
Und singen es laut und frei. 

Es hort's der Wald, es hort's das Feld, 
Die Wiesenblumen und Quellen, 
Und endlicli hort's die ganze Welt 
Auch der Mojisch in seinen Zelleii. 
Der Mensch hort es zuletzt und sieht 
Nur, wie der Friihling ihm entflieht." 

Hoffmann von Fallersleben. 

(c) Das ist der Tag des Herrn ; 
Ich bin allein auf weiter Flur ; 
Noch eine Morgenglocke nur ; 
Nun stille nah und fern 

^Anbetend knie ich hier. 
suszes Qraun ! geheimes Wehn ! 
Als knieten viele ungesehn 
Und beteten mit mir. 
Der Himmel, nah und fern, 
Er ist so klar und feierlich, 
So ganz, als wollt er bfihen sich, 
Das ist der Tag des Herrn. 

LuDwia Uhland. 

m. 

A. Translate into German any eight of the following 
sentences : 

1. I am sorry that you have been obliged to 
wait so long for me. 2. I have heard it said that 
he will have to leave the city, 3. The father 
departed after he had seen his son arrive. 4. Dur- 
ing the fine weather the invalid goes driving every 
second day. 6. The beggar asked the rich man 
for a little money, but he gave him none. 6. Mr. 
B. has not yet been able to take ship for Europe. 
7. Believe me, it is impossible for that man to tell 
the truth. 8. I had already forgiven him before 
he begged my pardon. 9. It would not surprise 
me at all if we should Live more rain to-day. 
10. /.J soon as June comes we shall say good-bye 
to the city. 



(Ion 
iter- 



B. Translate into German : 

At thi£i time Burke wrote his famous treatise 
on the difference between old English and new 
French liberty. We cannot, he said, go to work 
carefully enough in this respect. In England each 
estate has inherited extensive liberties. But a 
wise foresight, founded upon experience, has set 
a limit to these liberties. In France they pro- 
claim the natural rights of men and the principle 
of equality. Ours is a practical liberty, theirs a 
theoretical. Ours has a historical basis, theirs a 
purely philosophical one. Ours rests upon clear 
definitions of the laws, theii*« upon the arbitrary 
definitions of their philosophers. 



JEN. 



LAND. 



ollowing 



oliged to 
said that 
\e father 
4. Dur- 
ing every 
rich man 
J. 6. Mr. 
)r Europe, 
aan to tell 
lim before 
ot surprise 
tin to-day. 
Y good-bye 



m i 



m 



m\i 



m 



fdnilicrfiiUtt of roronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIllST YEAR. 



ITALIAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : Wm. Olduight, M.A., M.D. 



1 . TranHlato : 

IL TAMBURINO SARDO. 
(liacconto mevnile.) 
Nclla prima giornata della battaglia di Custoza, 
il 24 luglio del 1848, una sessantina di soldati d'un 
regginiento di funteria del nostro esercito, mandati 
8opra un'altura a occupare una casa solitaria, 
si trovarono iinprovvi.saiiiente assaliti da due com- 
pagnie di soidati austriaci, chc tempeHtandoli di 
t'ucilatc da varie parti, appena diedero loro il 
tempo di rifugiarsi nelhi casa e di sbarrare preci- 
pitosamonte le porte, dopo aver lasciato alcuni 
raorti feriti pei campi. Sbarrate le porte, i 
nostri accorsero a furia pile fines tre del plan 
terreno e del primo piano, e cominciarono a fare 
un fuoco fitto Hopra gli assalitori, i quali, avvici- 
nandosi a grado a grado, disposti in forma di semi- 
cerchio, rispondevano vigorosamente. Ai sessanta 
Holdati italiani comandavano due uffiziali subaltemi 
e un capitao, un vecchio alto, secco e austero, coi 
capelli o i baffi bianchi ; e c'era con essi un tambu- 
rino sardo, un ragazzo di poco piu di quattordici 
anni, che ne dimostrava dodici scarci, piccolo, di 
viso bruno olivastro, con due occhietti neri e pro- 
fondi, ehu scintillavano. II capitano, da una 
stanza del primo piano, dirigeva la difesa, lanciando 
dei coraandi che parean colpi di pistola, e non si 






vedovH siillu Sim Fiicciii IVri'ii iicMsiin m';^nu tli 
coiiMDoziono. II tiiiiiburiiK), un :>()' pnllido, ma 
sultlo sullc y;iiiiil)(', Hiilito sopni 111) tiivolino, iilltiji- 
^ava il collo. tratti'iu'iidosi ullapaift*'. |» r ^'imrdar 
fuori (\a,\U' foiK'stic ; o vi'dcvn a traviTMo ul fuiuo, 
pci cainpi, le clivi«ti l»iancli«! (U'^'ll Aiistriaci, cliu 
venivano avanti leiitaniontc. 

2. Writo tlio (lato in the huuoikI liiu', using words 
instead of fij^MJies. 

3. giorvnta, HesH<nii'n\(( , jxiretc. Give synony and 
point out the diHerences. 

4. Give the principal parts of diedero — em — ve.deva. 

SANUUK ROMAUNOLO. 

5. Translate : 

Quella sera la casa di Ferrucio era pin qtiiota 
del solito. II padre, clie teneva una piccola botte^a 
di inerciaiolo, era andato a Forll a far dellt; com- 
pere, sua moglie I'aveva acconipagnnto eon Lui- 
gina, una bimba, per portarla da un medico, che 
doveva operarle un occnio malato ; c non dovevaiio 
ritornaro che la mattina dope. Mancava poco 
ttlla mezzanotte. La donna che veniva a far tlei 
servizi di giorno so n'era andata suH'inibrunire. 
In casa non riniancva che la nonna, paralitica 
delle gambe, e Ferruecio, un i-agazzo cli tredici 
anni. Era una casetta col solo piano teri'eno, posta 
sullo stradone, a un tiro di fucile da un villaggio, 
poco lontano da Forll, citt^ di Romagna ; e non 
aveva accanto che una casa disabitata, rovinata 
due mesi innanzi da un incendio, sulla quale si 
vedeva ancora I'insegna d'un'osteria. Dietro la 
casetta c'era un piccolo orto circondato dy una siepe, 
8ul q\iale dava una porticina rustica ; la porta della 
bottega, che serviva anche di porta di casa, s'apriva 
sullo stradone, Tutt'intomo si stendeva la cam- 
pagna solitaria, vasti campi lavorati, piantati di 
gelsi. 

G. Compare piu, piccolo, quieta. 

7. dci un medico. 
uses of da. 

8. Point out all augmentatives and diminutives in 
the above extract, name the words from which they 
are derived, and state how they modify these. 



Give the various meanings and 



di 
, uia 
illuii- 
iirtlur 
I'lnno, 
i, che 

wordH 

and 

edeva. 



quietti 
)()ttoj^a 

coiu- 

ico, die 
ivevnno 
a poco 

fnr dei 
oruniro. 
irnlitica 

tredici 
10, posta 
illaggio, 
; e non 
rovitiata 
quale si 
)ietro la 
ina Hiepe, 
Dvta della 
,, s'apriva 

1 la cani- 
antati di 



0. Tian«liito : 

I! citixdaz ^Vi acco.st6 al viso una lanturna c \o 
gnardo. Poi iHhho : — Sfca bone. 

II ragazxo gli l)aci6 la uiano. 

— Stanotto dormimi in nn cari'o, — soggluiiMo il 
an.iiataz, lasciandolo ; — dunmttina alio quattro ti 
Hvoglioro. Duenati nochvM, 

La matiina allu nnattro, al lunie dollo Mtollu, la 
lunga Hla «lei catri hi niiHo in rnoviniento con grando 
8tr«»pito : ciascun cmiio timto da sei hovi, segniti 
tutti da un gmn i umero di aninmli di ricambio. 
II ragazzo, .svogliato o niosso dontro a nn doi ciivri, 
sui sacchi, .si riaddormcnt6 subitt), profondanieate. 
Quando isi sveglicX il convoglio era forino in un 
luogo solitario, sotto il sole, e tutti gli uomini — i 
peoncH — stavan .soduti in ccrchio intorno a un 
quarto di vitollo, che arroMtiva all'aria aperta, inti- 
lato in una specie di spadone piantato in terra, 
accanto a un gran foco agitato dal vento. Man- 
giarono tutti insiemo, dormirono e poi ripartirono ; 
6 cosl il viaggio continud rogolato come una niar- 
cia di .soldati. 

10. Stanotte, domattina, feiino. Give the full forms. 

11. Alle quattro... a un quarto. Substitute fuller 
expressions, and parse quarto. 

12. Give the plnral and singular forms respectively 
of luogo, ccrchio, aacchi, epecie, uomini. 



nngs 



and 



lutives in 
hicU they 



®miitt0it» of Cotonto. 

Ai.NUALEXAWriONS..1891. 
FIRST YEAH. 

ITALIAN. 

HONOBS. 



Examiner 



. Wm. Oldright, M.A., M.D. 



. „^ forms of the definite article. 

"T'^vf ^hell. to.„« o. -pavatives of (.egu- 
la.-)'a<lj«t'^'=»' with exainples. . ^^^ 

ToWe the principal parts ofaregula-verbotea^h 

conjugation. preterite definite and the 

6. Write out ^'J. ^"•y^^^f/.lfond conjugation. 

they modify ? 

Translate: «t.ii -.^J^ buy John's 

,„) Come into the hou^. ^.11 J 
house? aotoMr.SmiUi8. 



(6) He saw her in church — at St. Peter's church. 
Toronto, a city of Cjinada. 

(c) I drink water. Give me some water. Give me 
a glass (bicchiere) of water. 

(d) Am I not right in saying that ? We are agreed 
(accordo). 

(e) The old man had white moustaches. " Red as a 
rose is she." 

(/) My Bible (Bibbia) is older than John's ; it was 
printed (stampare) two hundred years ago ; I have had 
it more than twenty years. 

(g) That is a most beautiful palace (palazzo) ; it is 
the most beautiful in the world, and larger than St. 
James's. 

(h) Where is that brother of yours ? What a great 
man he has become (diventare) ! What book are you 
looking for (cercare) J What kind of book are you 
looking for ? 

(i) I all) twenty years old. 1 was there twenty 
years ago. You have here twent3'-one books. 

(j) It was a quarter to three of Monday, the third 
day of May, eighteen hundred and fifty-six. Henry 
the Fourth succeeded (succedere) Richard the Second. 

(Jc) Look at him walking up and <lown (passecfgiare) 
the street (strada). Here I am working (lavorare) 
for you. 

(l) Give it to me. No, do not give it to him, give it to 
me. 

(m) M. Ghiandinelli wishes me to ask you (lei) if 
your wife has seen his wife. 

(n) He had just arrived, when I was on the point 
of setting out. 

(o) I saw the boy whose father came to see you. 

(p) Let him laugh (ridere) who wins (guadagnare). 

(q) He arrived before the palace gate before the clocks 
of the city struck ten. 



unitnuits of srorotito< 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891, 



FIKST YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 

PASS. 



Examiner 






J. M. HlRSCHrELDER. 
McCURDY. 



1 . Translate : 

n»na Pi3'')2b n^n tisi yi^n i^^lpi d''nb» -iTssin 
V-i»n-ni< iKb?ai inn^ ^ns d'^nb^ "i?a»''i d''nb&^ 

I t T T ■■ • ' ' T - 

rrin-bsDi d-i^Bn qijn^ d^n ntina imi ntfdDi 
Gen i. 24. 28. ; y-ifc^rTby nipT^nn 

2. Parse the words njarked * in the above extract, ac- 
counting for all peculiarities of pointing. 

3. Decline V-j^, giving also the forms of the singular 
with suffixes. 

4. Translate : 

di'in ni"!^ laa ^bnin^ d-trib^ n^n•> bip-n» i^Jsttfii 
di7 ■•3' STS8T pa ■'?i5;3tt) ^bp-n» n>a»'>T : "jan 

Gen. iii. 8, 10. J^dHKl ''DJfc^ 

•• r *• T • V 

5. Explain the construction of the first clause of the 
former of these two verses. Parse and inflect 55•Tm^. 
Discuss the forms t^drtfl^T ***^ KdHKl* 



6. Tranilate: 

: ^■'5» ibB3 n>abT '^b n^in nwb Vl?"^^ "^"'' "'^^''^ 

n»ttn pin^b n'^ts'^n »b d»t t\»xd aip""?) d» vibn 

Gen. iv. 6, 7. j ia-btt)?;pi HD^T itipDiwcn ^^»") ysi 

7. Parse HTtD^tl' tlS^'QJ- ^'^® **" alternative form for 
the latter, anu quote the ])hrase containing it. Write the 
last two words of the second of the above verses without 
Makkeph, and account for the present pointing with it. 

8. Translate : 

nsb D^tt's ti'^si i\'^nvi »*bn qor b.^ bK^ti?:' ">'3»'"'» 
i5pD «"'»n n?a»'iT : ''53n ib n?a»'«-i urnb^ ^nb«»T 
nni^ DGi'' nbn HD^ni nsbD d''"»73k npijoi' "is nr)3 
nam "lian b» p^i^n ntf^ : "iPina dksi^n T^n^ 

Gen. xxxvii. 13, 17, 29.^ 
^' nDTli' riDbSt nsb- DiscuHS the use of the affix J^— 

T ; T Til*. T I 

in these words. 

Parse '7^1^, ^tiD'^lt dfe^I2?3''1' ^^y '" ^'^^ vowel 
retained in the penult of the word last named ? 

10. Translate into Hebrew : The woman went to that 
great city to dwell there. They shut up the house and 
watched the men who were in it all the night. He looked 
for his brother and found him at home, and took him by his 
hand. 

11. Give a brief sketch of the geographical distribution of 
the several divisions of the Semitic race. 



I •11 



Mi 



iiniiier0ftv of Coronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL SCIENCE. CHEM- 
ISTRY AND MINERALOGY, AND PASS. 

CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner: T. Pkoctor Hall, M.A., Ph.D. 



ii 



1. State exactly the meaning of the sentence, " The 
molecular weight of oxygen is 31.92." Calculate tlie 
molecular weight of nuxrsh gas independently from each 
of the following data : — 

(1) The formula is C H,. 

(2) Density (air = 1) is 0.554, 

(3) One liter 0"G. and 750""° weighs 0.7 gram. 

When lO*'" of marsh gas are exploded in a endi- 
ometer with 33''" of oxygen, how much gas, and what 
kind, remains ? 

2. What reasons have yon for believing that atoms 
exist ? What is known of their nature ? Mention a 
ditt'erent theory of the constitution of matter, and 
compare it with the atomic theory. 

3. From the equation 

TiOa + 2 CI2 + 2 C = Ti CI, + 2 CO 

find what weight of titanium dioxide is reduced by 
three grams of carbon, and what volume of carbon mo- 
noxide measured at 23°C. and 720""* is produced by 
the same. 



.'he 



Write similar equations for the preparation of 
Silicon tetrachloride and boron trichloride. The atomic 
weight Ti — 48, C ■■ 12, O = 16, may be used in these 
calculations. 

4. In MendelejofT's table, carbon and silicon are in 
the same group. Point out any relations between 
them which would justify such an arrangement. 

If the element fluorine were unknown, which 
of its properties could be predicted by its position in 
the table ? 

6. Give the preparation and properties of hydrogen 
chloride, and compare with it the hydrides of the otner 
elements. 

7. Upon what evidence have chemists adopted 
Avogadro's theory, that equal volumes of gases, at the 
hame temperature, and pressure, contain the same 
number of molecules ? Indicate, in j'our answer, the 
use made of this theory in the determination of atomic 
weights. 



8ltiiiieir0ftff of Coronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YKAH. 



BIOLOGY. 

PASS. 



Examiner : J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



Note. — Pass Cnndidates will answer any six questions. 
Civn(U(lat<J8 the quustions marked *. 



Honor 



1. Explain briefly the nature of chlorophyll and 
give its functions. 

*2. Outline the method of reproduction in the 

Mosses. 

*8, What are insectivorous plants ? How do they 
obtain their food ? Mention a Canadian example. 

"4. Explain what is meant by Hoteroecism. Give 
an example i'rom the vegetable and animal kingdoms. 

*.'). Show by diagrams the causes of short and long 
sight. How may these <lefects be remedied ? 

*G. Outline the classification of the fishes. What 
groups are represented in Canada ? 

7. Show how a parasitic mode of life tends to modify 
the structure of an animal, using the Tape Worm as an 
example. 

*8. Explain what is meant by homonomous and 
heteronoinous segmentation, and give examples of 
each, 



rt*il»»W»V ."WW.""W« 



I 



■i 



;J ^ a 



, 



Pi 



mnmv^its of raronto< 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FIRST YEAR. 



NATURAL SCIENCE. 

BIOLOGY. 

HONORS. 



f«< 



Examiner: J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



1. Describe carefully the mouth appendages of the 
Crayfish, and compare them with the typical abdomi- 
nal appendage. 

2. Explain how respiration is carried on in the Cray- 
fish and Waterbeetle, describing the respiratory organs. 

3. What is meant by the visceral skeleton of a fish ? 
Give a description of this in a typical fish. 

4. Describe fully the structure of Hydra. 

5. Describe fully the structure and mode of repro- 
duction in Spirogyra. 



^ni\$tvnna of Soronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST EXAMINATION. 



ELEMENTARY GEOLOGY AND PHYSICAL 
GEOGRAPHY. 



Examiner: F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1 . Define the following terms, as applied to rocks : 
formation, slaty, massive, amygdaloidal, schistose, 

laminnted, oolitic, conglomerate, false bedding. 

2. Upon what evidence is the existence of a high 
subterranean temperature assumed ? 

What different theories are held regarding the 
condition of the Earth's interior? 

3. Givo examples of strata which owe their origin 
to: 

(a) St. ictly chemical agencies. 

(b) The agency of animal life. 

(c) The agency of vegetable life. 

4. To what after effects are sedimentary rocks sub- 
jtcted ? 

Give any instances from your own observation. 

5. Name and figure four typical coal plants : 

Give their living representatives where such exist. 
G. Of what strata are the following fossilized organ- 
isms characteristic : 

Ammonites, Corals, Graptolites, Belemnites, Echi- 
noids. Barnacles, Trilobites, Laraelli-branchiata ? 

Sketch any six, and state to what class of living 
animals each is related. 

7. Explain the mode of formation of : Icebergs, Eain, 
Snow, Hail, Dew, Hoar Frost. 

8. How do you account for the different tempera- 
tures experienced by the Pacific and Atlnntic coast 
regions of North Anierica, in the same latitude ? 



Slniiier«ft|^ of SToroiuo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



FFTtST YKAR. 

J)KPARTMKNTr! OF CHEMTSTRY AND MINER- 
ALOdY, AND NATURAL SCIENCKS. 



ELEMENTAKY PHYSICS. 

HONORS. 



,, . f A. C. McKay, B.A. 

hxcminers: | j ^ Martin; B.A. 



1. Define the terms, raoss, onomentwni, ener<fy,work. 
What is meant by the statement that tlie acceler- 
ation of a falling body is 980 ? 

2. How much energy (measured in ergs) must be 
given to a mass of .50 grammes that it may rise 4 
seconds ? 

Give some examples of transformations of energy. 

What do you understand by the conservation of 
energy ? 

3. Describe an experiment to show, 

(a) that the pressure in a liquid increases with 
the depth, {i>) that air possesses weight. 

4. How could you deternune accurately, 

(a) the volume, (b) the specific gravity of an 
irregular piece of glass ? 

Describe any common form of hj'drometei'. 

'). State the laws of reflection and refi-action of light. 

What \fit\\Q principal focus of a concave spherical 



nnrror 



A candle is placed before a concave mirror. 
Show l)y a drawing, the position and sijse of the image. 



I 



6. State Home of tlio general effects of the application 
of heat to bodies. 

Distinc?uish between heat and temperature. 
Give fully the method of construction of a mercu- 
rial thermometer, orradunted in Fahrenheit degrees. 

7. What is meant by the term specific heat ? 

How could you determine the specific heat of a 
small piece of brass ? 

Why are places in the vicinity of water less pub- 
j'jct to extremes of heat and cold than places inland ? 

8. Describe, (a) a Grove cell, (h) a Daniell cell. 
State a method you would use for the detection 

of very weak currents. 

Describe minutely the electrolysis of water. 

9. (1) Make a sketch of four cells connected, (a) in 
series, {b) in multiple arc, (c) abreast, or 

(2) Make a careful drawing showing the essen- 
tial parts of a Ruhmkorf induction coil. 



I"li 









sinlneriiiUtf oC ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18UI. 



FIRST YEAR. 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND MINER- 
AL' Y. 

CONICS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : A. R. Bain, LL.D. 



III 



1. Shew tliut ovory o'luation of the lirst dcj^roo between 
two variabh's {Ax -\- lii/ 4- C = 0) is tlie e(iiiatioii of a Htraight 
line. 

Find the equation of the straight lino, axes being reet- 
angular. 

(1) in terniH of the angle which the line makes witii 
axis of abscissas and the co-ordinates of a ^'i veu point thi'oiigh 
which it passes. 

(2) in terms of the intercepts on the axes. 

(3) in terms of the perpendicular from the origin upon 
the line, and the angle made by such perpendicular with the 
x-uxis. 

2. Given the lines 

X 2 

y = - — 3, y = — 4a3 — 8, and y = — g-a^ + 10i 

to find, 

(1) the co-ordinates of the point where the piirpendicu- 
lar from the intersection of the iirst and the second line meets 
the third line. 

(2) the length of that perpendicular. 

(3) the cosine of the angle between the first and the 
third line. 

3. Deduce the equation of the ellipse referred to its centre 
and semi-axes, having given the statement that an ellipse is 
the locus of a point whose distance from a fixed point bears 
a certain constant ratio to its distance from a fixed line. 



' 



u- 



4. Find tlio equation of tlio noiumi to tho oUipso. 

I'love tlmt the noiinal ivt any point of the elliimo 
bisoctH thoaiighi fonnod by lino- (Uawn from that point to 
thu foci. 

5. If a lino bo drawn from one extiomity of the minor 
uxiH to one of the foci and bo produced ; find in terms of 
the H(!mi-nmjor axis and tho eocentricity — the abHciHHa of 
tlie point wi'iere il. intersects tho ellipse the second time. 

(). If r be the radius of a circle, and (,7,/) the co-ordinates 
of its cBiJtre referred to itjctangidar axes, lind the rectangu- 
lar equation to the circle. To what form does this equation 
reduce if tho centre be taken as tho origin of co-ordinates ? 
Make this latter form analogous to (2) in (juestion 1. 

Decide whether the following equations represent cir- 
cles or not : 

(1) .V-J + Hxy - 7 if +2a; — % -f 8 =- 0. 

(2) 5*2 _ 5y2 + 3a; — 2// + 7 = 0. 

7. Form tho eijuation of the circle which passes through 
tho origin and makes on the two axes respectively tho inter- 
cepts -j- // and -f- k. 

Find where x -j- y -|- 1 = intersects a;^ -j- y'^ = U. 

8. Deduce the equation of a parabola referred to its tran.s- 
verse axis and directrix. 

In the equation Aif -\- Ilxij +Cx'-+ Dy ^ Ex-{-F=(i, 
what relation must exist amidst the values of A, JI and C, 
if the eqiuition is that of a parabola 1 

Does the required njlation exist in tho following : 

(1) 4;*;' -f \'2xy + V + ^^ — 10^ + 5 = 0. 

(2) 5/ - Qx -f Uy - 7 = 0. 

What variety of the parabola is represented by 
4a;2 — V2xy + 9v/'^ — 25 = '\ 

y. If the co-ordinates of the extremities of a chord of the 
parabola are (x', //') and (a;", y"), hnd the equation of tlio 
chord, from it deduce the equation of the locus of the middle 
j)oints of a system of parallel chords, and hence prove that 
all diameters of a parabola are parallel to tho transverse 
axis. 



he 



bre 
\ is 
ars 



>!., 



&iiUUev«(Ctt PC coroitto* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



.SECOND YEAR. 



GREEK. 



,, f Mahiuck Hutton, M.A. 



* Encloso tlie DomosbhonoH in uno onvolnpo, thu Sophocles in tlie 

otlier. 
No cau'lidatu will nnas who omits the qutrntions on parsing and 

syiitivx. Ill t'xpliiiiiiii^ tlio syntax of vurbx oxphiin always the 

roaaoii of its iiiooil, and in paiHiiig aoriHlH distinguish between 

first ami Hoi'ond, 

SOPHOCLKS, ANTIOONK. 

1. Translate carefully, with notes wliero necessary : 
{a) rl B', Si Ta\ai(f)pov, el rah' iv Toyrot?, ^70) 
\vov(T &v fj <f)drrTov(ra Trpoadeiftrju ttXcov ; 

{b) ava^, ^poTOiatv oi/Seu ear' inrwfioTov. 
yfreuSei yhp r} 'irivoia Ttjv •yvoiur^v' itrel 
a-)(0\fi TTov rj^eiv oevp av e^rjvyovu eyo) 
Tat<f cratv uTretXat?, ah i^et/jidadTjv totc. 
dXK', rf yhp eACTov koX trap i\mBa^ X°'P°' 
eoiKev aWrj fifJKOf: ovBev I'jBov^, 
rjKoi, BC opK(ov Kaiirep (ov diroofioTo^, 
Kopijv dycov TijvS', ^ Kadnvpedri Td<f>ov 
Koafiovaa. KXrjpo'i iuOdB' ovk eTrdWero, 
dXK' ear ifiov dovpfiaiov, ovk aWov, ToBe. 

(c) vvv yap iaydra^i inrip 

pl^a^ o rerayo <f)dos iv OIBittov Bo/mok, 
KaT aH viv <f)oivia 6eo)v t&v 
vepjepuiv dfia kottU, [? /eovt? ?J 
\6yov T dvota Ka\ (jipevSip 'Eptvv^. 

(d) w TTpiff/Sv, irdvTei} wan To^orai (tkottov 
Tofeuer' dv8p6<i rovBe, KovBe /iavTiKf}<; 
dirpaKTO^ vulv elfit, t&v 8* viral yevovf 



it 1 ■ 

.4 



ii 



e^rfinrokriixai KaiCTre<\)6pri(rfiai "rraXai. 
KepBalver', ffnroXaTe tov irpo^ ^dpBetov 
TjKcKTpov, el (SovXeaOe, Kat rov ^Xv^ikov 
j^pvaov Tu<f)(p 8' kxelvov oir)(l icpv-^ere. 

2. Parse and explain the syntax of : 

(a) irpoffdeifiTjv. 

(/>) 'mvoia, i^rjv'xpvv, aireiKah, eKro^, firjuoi, 6ovp- 
fioiov. 

(c) e<r')(ara<{, kut, ptv, a{ia, /cottI?. 

{d) fiavriKrj<i, viral, yevov<;, KuKTretjiopTia-fjiai. 

HONOUS ONLY. 

3, (a) What do you conceive to be the moral of the 
play. 

(b) Point out in the play any indications that 
Sophocles niijjht have excelled in cuniedy. 

(c) Explain and illustrate Soplioch-s' "irony." 

(f?) epco^ o? eV KTi'ifiaa-i TTtTTTet?. Translate! and 
explain. 

(e) What is the. nieaping of aWre., yap above in 
(h) ? Distinguish other slififlitly diHerent uses of it. 

(/) What is the force of the tens(> eVaWero in (6)? 
w:m()STHknks, i)k corona. 

NfM'K. — Que8tion.s marked thus * .-ii'e for llovon* only. 
Questions marked thus t are for Paax oii/i/. 

1. Point out the principal violations of good taste 
in the De Corona. 

2. Give an account of the negotiations leading up 
to the peace of Philocratcs, ; and show how Philip 
effected an entrance into central Greece. 

*3. Compare Detnosthencs v/ith Pericles (a) as an 
orator. (6) as a statesman, (c) as a war minister. 

Translate : 

(a) 'KireiBr) toIvvv eiroiijaaTo ttjv elprjvi)V 17 7ro\t9, 
. evravda iraKiv <TKe-\^aa6e tI rjixStv eKarepo^ irpoei- 
Xero TTpdrreiV KoX yap e'« tovtcov etaeade, li'i rju 
^tXiTTTry avvaycovi^ofievo^, Kal Tt<j 6 TrpuTTcov virkp 
vfxS)v Kat TO Tjj TToXet avfi^epov tiijT&u. €70) fiev 
Toivvv iypaylra ^ovXevtov, airoTrXelv Ttfv raylvTiiv 



ft- 

f 



ep 

,6V 

rjv 



Tou? 7rpecr^ei<; eVl touv tottou? er oU &v ovra ^iXtTT- 
TToi; irvvddvtovTai,, kuI tou? bpKov^ airoKa^i^dvetV 
01)701, B' ovBe ypdylravTo^ ifiov ravra iroieiv i^OeKfjcrau. 

4. Give tlio force of the tenses of, 

(a) iTTOf^aaro, a-Kei^aade, dtroXafiSdveiv : 

(6) opKov:. Explain the use of the plui'al. 

6. Parse and explain the syntax of eiaeade, ra^^iir- 
T'lyi', TTwddvcovTai, '^pdi^avTo<{. 

(b) 'Tfielf S' v<f)op(i)fji€voi tA ireTrpayfieva teal Sva\€pal- 
vovrei, rfyere rrju eipiivrjv ofica<i' ov yap ^v o ri &u 
eVotetTe. xat oi a\\oi S' "EWT^i/e?, ofioio)^ vfuv 
'!re(f)evaKicrfievoi Koi BLrjfiapTrjKOTef: wv riXTTixrav, ^yov 
Ttj'j elpjjvriv aKfxevot, koI avTol rpoTrov tlv e« ttoWoO 
troXefiovfievoi. 

*6. Explain the force of koX and he {koX oi dWoi 8^). 

(c) 'Aw' ovTTco irepl tovtwv. Kal kuXov fxkv eTronjaaTe 
Kai to <r&<Tai Ttjv vi](toi>, ttoWu. 8' eTi rovrov kuWcov 
TO Karatndvres Kvpioi, Kal rci)i' aw^drwv koX tmv 
TToXewv, diroBovvai lavra BiKaita avroi^ toI. e^i)- 
fiapTTjKoaiu 619 u/AHV, (iijB^u tjiv i^BiKijade ev oU 
eiriaTevdrjO' viroXoyiadfievou 

'7. Kxplain thy syntax of to (r&aai, rovrov, Kvpioi, 
TToXeccv. 

Parse Karaardvra, e^ijfiaprrjKoaiv, T^BUrjade. 

*8. Give the forc-e of the tense of rjBiKriade : and 
explain tlie negative fxTjBkv. 

Translate, with ex})lan.itory notes : 

{d) Kal 7/3a0et9 rov dyiova rovrov et? u/ua? elafjXOov 
Khrrec^vyov, Kal ro fiepo'i r&v yfrij^cov 6 Biwkcov ovk 
eXa^ev. Kalroi rroau y^ptj/iara tov? r]ye[Ji6va<i rmv 
avfifjLoptMv rj Tou? SeuTepoi/? Ka) rpirov^ o'Uade fioi 
BiBovai, axrre fidXiara fxev firj detvai rov vofiov 
rovrov^ el Be fiij, Kara^dXXovr edv ev vrrtoixoaia; 

'H). Paj\se and explain the syntax of ypa^eU, rfye- 
fiovav, Kara^dXXovra, delvai. 

*10. Explain the meaning of ei Bk nrj : and the fotvo 
of the voice of Oeivai.. 



II 



yir 



dntnerisltff of ^Toronto; 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 
SECOND YEAR. 



GREEK. 

HONORS. 






„ . f G. A. H. Fraskr, M.A. 

Examiners : | ^ j ^^^^^^^^ g ^^ 



Enclose the Aristophanes and the Euripides in one envelope; the 
Thucydides in another. 

I. 

ARISTOPHANES, WASPS : EUIUPIDES, BACCHAE. 
1. Translate: 
(ft) CTt 8' Tj ^ovXt] ^o) 8r}fio<i OTav xpivai fiiya Trpayfi 
cnroptjar}, 
i\fr^(f)icrTai rov<; d8iKovvTa<! Toiac BiKaa-rai^ trapa- 

Bovvaf 
elr Eva6\o<} ;^a) fieya^ outo? KoXaKoovv/xo<! aairiZa- 

ovyi TrpoBaxreiv ^(ia<! <f)aalv, rrepi rov ttXij^ou? 8e 

fiayeia-dai. 
Kav rrp B^fi^ yvdofirjv oi/Set? 'rrwiroT ivlKriffev, eav firj 
iiirri ra BiKaarijpt acfielvai TrpdoTiara fiiav 8iKd- 

aavTa<i' 
avTO<i 8' 6 KXeo)!/ o KCKpa^iBdfia^ fiovov fifia^ ob 

irepiTpdyyei, 
dwh <f>v\dTTe(, Bia ^eipo^ ^X"**^ *'*^ "^^^ fivia^ dtra- 

fivvet. 

Aristophanes, Wasps. 

(6) ovS" ore TTpatTOV y rjp^e BiSdaKciv, dvdpdiirot^ ^rja 
iirideaOac, 
dW 'HpaK\ion<i opyqv riv lE'^oiV roirri (leyiffroif 

dpaffim f v(rT^9 ev6v^ air dpj(rjii avr^ t^ Kapyapo' 

BoVTl, 



oi> Seii/oTarai fiev air otpddKfi&u Kvtfvrj^ oKTive^ 

eXafiTTov, 
ixaTov Bi KUK\q> KC^aXat KoXaxoyv olfj,o)^of4,evtov 

irepi TTjv xe<f>a\fiv, tfxavijv 8' el^ev ')(apd^pa<; SXedpov 
teroKvias. 

Ibid. 

Determine from the metre the division of the 
Parabasis f rom which this extract is taken; and account 
for the appropriation of that particular metre to that 
division. 

2. Write brief syntactical notes on (a) iyfr^^iarai, 
etTTji, 8iKd<rauTa^. 

Write brief explanatory notes upon (a) KoXaKco- 
vvfjio^ a<nnBa'rrofi\r]({, kolv rai Sijfi^ ... 8iKd(TavTa<i, (6) 

KvVV7)<i, oifKO^OfieVOiP. 

3. Translate and explain : 

(a) XO. ov8^ fieu 7' ovS" iv <TeKiv(p <robcTTW oyS' eu Trrjydvcji' 

TOVTO yap irapefidaXovfiev twv TpiyoiviKOiv iirav. 

(b) XO. ravra Kari8a)v inro ri fiixpov eTndrjKicra' 

4. Translate: 

(a) eZSe? 8' &u ^ TrXevp rj 8i-)(rj\ov ifi^cunv^ 
piTTTOfxev avm re koL Kdrca' Kpefiaarh Be 
ecrra^' vir iXdrai^ duairetjyvpfiev aifiaTi 
Tovpoi 8' v^piaral Kat Kepa^ dvfiov/xevoi 
TO TTpotrdeu i<r<f)dWovTO 'irpo'i yaldv 8e/*a?, 
fivpidfft, ysip5>v dyo/jLevoi veauiBayv. 
6d<T<Tov ok tie^opovvro aapKof ivBura 
fj ae ^vudy^ai ^Xk^apa ^aaiXeiot<i Kopat.^. 
"XCipovcn 8 (0(tt' opuide^ dpffelcrai, 8p6p^, 
TreBiwv uTroraoetv, at Trap' 'Acramov poah 
evtcapirov CK^dXXovrc Sij^aitov ard')(yv. 

Euripides, Baah te. 

(6) iTto BUa (f)avF.po'i, "tw ^c^Tj^opa, 
^vevovaa XaifioiV BtcpTrd^ 
Tou adeov, avoixovy d8iKov 'Ej^ioic^' 
Novov yrjysi'Tjy 

OS d8U(p yvdtfj-a irapavopay r' opya 
trepl aa, JiaK^i,', opyia fiarpo'i re (rd<{ 
fjMveia^ TTpaTTcBi 



? ? 



irapaKOTTtp re \»J/LM»Tt areWerai, 
TCLv aviKajov <o? Hpa.T^<T(t)v ^iav. 
yvtafiav ardxfypov,' h dvaroi^ dirpo^aalmoi^ 

i<i TO, diS)V 6^U, 

fiporeiav t' exeiv aXuTro? /9to<r. 

Ibid. 

5. Account for the attitude assumed in the Bacchae 
towards the popular religion, explaining whether it is 
a recantation of previous rationalism. 

6. Sketch briefly the purpose with which the Wasps 
was written ; and outline the political and social posi- 
tion of Aristophanes. 

II. 

THUCYDIDES, II. 

1. Translate: 

Lioirep Kal tow? rSivhe vvv TO/eea-y oaoi Trdpea-re 
ovK 6\o(f>vpofiat fiaWou «) 7rapafivd^(ro/jt,ai. iv ttoXv- 
tpotroi^ yap ^vfi^opaU iirit/Tavrai rpa<l>ivT€^' to S' 
€VTV)(^e<!, 01 &u T^<f evTrpeireaTciTr]^ Xdj^wo-ti/, mtrtrep 
o'ihe fieu vvv TcXefTiJ?, vfieh Bi Xinnj'i, Kat oh 
evevhaifiovijaai re 6 ySi'o? 6p,oi(ii<i Koi evTcKevTrjaai 
^vvefi€Tpi]6ri. 

(a) Parse T/sa^eVrc?, eifTV)(i^. 

(b) Explain the syntax of vvv, ivTeXevTrjcrai. 

2. Translate: 

'O yap ^opp,io}v Trapa7r\eovTa<i avTov<; e^to rov 
koXttov injpet, jSouXo/ievo^ iv rfj €bpv)((opiq iiridea- 
6ai. oi 8e Kopivdioi Kat ol l^vfijxayoi trrXeov fi^v ov^ 
ft)? eVi vavfia^iav, iiWa (TTpaTiayTiKWTepov irape- 
aK€vaa-fJi€voi c'v rrjv 'Axapvaviav, Kal ovk av otofMevoi 
TT/JO'? eTTTo, Kai TeaaapoLKovTa vav<{ Ta<; a<f>6T€pa<; 
ToXfirjffai Toil? ^ Kdrjvaiovi eiKoai rai'i eavT&v vavfia- 
■^lav iroitja'aadai' eTreihf) fievroi avrvTrapatTKeovrdf; 
re €(op<ov avTov<i, vapa yrjv c<f)&v KOfii^ofiiptov, Kat 
ex YlaTptov t^? 'Avaia? Trpo? t^v avTVirepa<{ ijireipov 
Bia^aWovicov eVi AKapvavla<; KareiSov row 'AOrj- 
vaiov^ dtro t?j9 Xa\«tSo? Kai, toO lS.vrjvov rrorafiov 
irpocnrXiovTas <T<f)iai. xal ovk eXadov vvkto^ v<f)op' 
(iiaan^voi, ovrto Br/ dvayKa^ovrai vavfia^eiv Karh 
fiiaov rbv Tropdfwv 

(a) Kout^ofiivmv. Is the rule governing the use 
of absol'He clauses violated ? 

(b) Explain this passage fully. 



I' 



3. Why did Oretk yuncrals always address tlieir 
troops before going into action I 

4. (a) "VVlion I want a good old gentlenianl}' vice 

1 think I will take up with avarice." — Byron. 

(6) *H TOVTO fidXiara ayaOrjV ttoXiv iroiel ivov Koi 
iv TvaiBl Kal Ji/ yvvaiKi Kat hov\(fi koX e\ev6epq» Koi 
Brj/Mcovpym Kal apxovri Kal ap'xofievtp^ on to avrov 
eKaa70<i eh i>v tirpayre Kal ovk i'/roXuTrparffiovet. — Plato, 
Republic. 

What do you infer would liave been the atti- 
tude of Pericles toward these saying.s ? 

5. Translate, with brief noica: 

(a) ^66vo<{ yap toI? ^&tn Trpo? to avTlfra'Kov, to Se fii) 
efiTToBoJV avapTuycoi/iaTtp ei/voia TeTifirjTa:. 

(6) oflTTt? 8' iTrl p,eyia-Toi<{ to itri^dovov Xufx^diec, 
opdm l3ov\€veTai. 

6. "Set speeches are a sort of oratoracal lie which 
the historian used to allow himself in old times." — 
Voltaire. 

Why did Thucydides allow himself this oratorical 
lie. 

7. W^rite concise explanatoi-y notes on : irpo^evof;, 
^(vay6<}, Bi€K7rXov<;, ^evrfXaaia, viroaTrovBov^ tov? veKpov<i 
Ko/jitXe<T0ai, ovXiT&u rrapovTwv vavuu'x^eiv. 



^r 



nnli^tvniw of {Toronto^ 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



8EC0ND YEAR. 



LATIN AUTHORS. 



Examinetfi 



f Maurice Hutton, M.A. 
i Wilfrid Mustard, M.A, 



" 



Note.— (1) No Candiilate will patiK v/ho omitH tliu <iue8tion8 on 
pursing a»'l -iyiitav ; in oxpiainijvj^ tlie wyntiix of verbs 
uxplaiu alwa}*- tht- reaHon tor tli*} mood. 
(2) Candidates are warned againHt cuntining their attention 
to eitlior one ('*■ ilie two authors prescrilied. 

1. 

1. Translate carefully : 

(a) Forte (juadam utili ad t^iinpub ut comitiis 
praeesset potissiini.m M. Duellio sorte evenit, viro 
priulenti et ex continuatione magi.stratus invidiam 
iniiniiienteni cernenti. Qui quuni ex veteribus 
tribunis negarot ulHus sc vationeni habiturura, 
puonarcntque eollegae, ut liberas tribus in suf- 
fra<niun mitteret aut conccderot .sortem comitiorum 
cullegis, liabituris e lege potius comitia quaui ex 
voluntate patrum, iniecta contentione Duellius 
consules ad subsellia accitos (juum inter rogasset, 
(juid de comitiis consularibus in animo haberent, 
respondissentquc se novcs consules creatures, auc- 
tores })opu lares scntentiae baud popularis nactus 
in contionem cum iis pi-ocessit. Ubi quum con- 
sules producti ad populum interrogatique, si eo8 
populus Romanus, memor libertatis per illos 
receptae domi memor militiae rerumque gestarum, 
consules iterum faceret, quidnara facturi essent, 
nihil sentcntiae suae mutassent, eoUaudatis con- 
sulibus, quod perseverarent ad ultimum dissimiles 
dcccmvirorum esse, comitia habuit, et quinque 
tribunis plebi creatib, quum prae studiis aperte 



Nj 






|)(jt(!iitium noveiii tribunomin alii carulidati tribus 
IKJU oxplorcnt, coiiciliuiii dimisit iicc cleinde comi- 
tiurum causa habuit. Satisfactum lej^i aicbat, 
quao nuincio misijuam praotinito tribunis, modu 
ut reliiKjuerontur sancirct, at ab iis ([ui creali 
ossent cooptari collc^'as jubcret. 

LlVY, III. 

II. 

(I)) Descrta omnia, sine ca})ite, sine viribus, dii 
j)raosi(les ac fortuna urbis tutata ost, quae Volscis 
yA'quisijUo i»i'{U!<l(>Minu potiiis iiiontoui quani Iio.i- 
tiiun dedit. Ad(3u cnini nullani .spuin non potiundi 
injodo, sod no aiUsundi ((uidcin Romana nioonia 
animus eorum cepit, tecta(|ue procui visa atquu 
imminentes tumuli avertore mentes (.-orum, ut, 
totis passim castris fromitu orto quid in vasto ac 
deserto agro inter tabeni pecoruni honiinumque 
desides sine pnieda tompus tercrcut, (juum Integra 
loca, Tusculanum agrum opimum copiis, pcterc 
possent, signa repente convellerent. 

lb. 
2. Parse and explain the Syntax of: 

(a) quadmu, praeesset, cernenti, habiluris, re- 
spondinsent^ craato i'om, nadus, fuditri, sentcntiae, 
(before siuia) viutanNent, habuit, (alter comitia) ctiusa, 
legi, siiiiciretyjaberet. 

(b) avertere, tcrcrcnt, possent, convellerent. 

1. Translate : 

"Nate dea, tjuo fata trahunt retraluintc^ue, se(juamur ; 
C^uidquid erit, superanda omnis Ibrtuna ferendo est, 
Est tibi Daidaniiis divinae stirpis Acestes ; 
Hiinc cap(! consiliis socium et conjungo volentem, 
Huic trade am issis superant (jui navibus et quos 
Pertaesum niagni incepti riii'umque tuaruni est; 
Longaevosq u(; senes ac fessas aequore matres 
Et quidcjuid tecum invalidummetuensciut; pericli est, 
Delig(i et his hal>eant tenis sine moenia fessi : 
Urbem appeilabunt permisso nomine Acestam." 

Vekgil, Acn. V. 

_ Parse : stirpia, naoiban, incepti, pericli, habeant, 
sine. Scan the last three lines, marking the quantity 
of each syllable. 



^'>. 



2. TranHlate : 

Cerberus haoc ingens latratu rogna trifanei 
Personat, adverso recubanH iminanis in antro. 
Cui vates, horrero videns jam colla colubris, 
Mello Hoporatam et modicatis frugibus offam 
Obicit. I lie famo labida tria guttura pandons 
Corripit objectam, atquo iinmania terga resolvit 
Fusus liurni, totoquo ingons extenditur antro. 
Occupat /Eneas aditum custodo sepulto, 
Evaditque celer ripam inromoabilis undae. 

lb. VI. 

Parse : regna, objectam, humi, celer. 

Give a brief outline of the Sixth Book of the Aeneid. 






I 



WinibttnUv of CorotitOi 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIi>NS: 1891. 



SKCOND YKAR. 



LATIN. 

HOiNOllS. 



Examiner: R. J. Bonneh, B.A. 



I. 

1. Translates: 

Noil usitata iioi; teiiui ft.-nir 
Poiiiui biformis per licniidum aothera 
Vatos, McijiU! ill tcnis inoiahor 
Ijon;:(uiH, invidiatHK' major 
IJrluss n'liii(|iiain. Ni.n ('<,'() pauperuiu 
Sanguis parol itu in, iioii ^\'^^o, quciii vocas 
])il(!i't(i MaoctMias, obilx), 
Noc! Styj,'ia cohibebor uiicla. 

HouACic, Odes II., 20. 
(<0 Kxplain th»? meaning' of non u»itata * ♦ ♦ pend. 
(h) Qin'iii imuiH ililrcfe Mdvccnaa. 

Mention the diHt'icnt (explanations of these words, 
that have been ottered. 

2. Transhitc : 

Da lunae propeie novae, 

Da noctis mediae, da, puer, auguris 
Mnrenae : tiibus aut novein 

Misccntur cyathis pi>culaeoininodis. 

Ih., III., 19. 
Explain the syntax of lunae, commodia. 

3. Tranhlate : 

Quae cura patruin quaove Quiritii^ip 
Plenis honorum niuneribus tuas, 
Auguste, virtutes in aevum 
Per titulos inemoresque fastos 
Aeternet, o, qua sol habitabiles 
Illustrat eras, maxime principuin ! — 

76. IV. 14. 










IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 





^ 
^ 




/ 




.^^ 



^ 

*\^ 



.V 



.^> 



v* ^< 




^ 



^ 



^ 



1.0 



1.1 



UiR21 

^ tiS. 12.0 



■ ?2 

Mm 



11.25 



I 



1.4 



|l.6 



6" 







V 






r 



'/ 



Photographic 

Sciences 

Corparation 







33 WIST MAIN SIRRT 

w»nGi,N.Y. usao 



'^ 






Is 



vV 



Explain fully the meaning of honorum ,i)ri'ncipum. 
Parse honor mn. 

4. Translate with notes on difficulties in syntax : 

(a) Nulla cevtior tiimen 

KajjaciH Orci tine destinata 
Aula divitem manet 
Heruni. 
(6) Patriae quis exul 

Se quoque fugit ? 
Explain the meaning of these lines. 

5. Translate : 

• Naevius in manibus non est et nientibus haeret 
Paene reeens ? Adeo sanctum est vetus onine poema. 
Ambigitur quoties uter utro sit prior, aufert 
Pacuvius docti famani senis, Accius alti, 
Dicitur Afrani toga convenisse Menandro, 
Plautus ad exemplar Siculi properare Epicharmi, 
Vincere Caeciliiis giavitate, Terentius arte. 

Kpidles II. 1. 

(a) Write explaiiatory notes on Afrani toga, pro- 
perare, arte. 

(6) Explain the reason of the high reputation of 
ancient dramatists. 

6. Translate : 

Ergo i'ungar vice cotis, acutum 
Reddere quae ferruni valet, exsors ipsa secandi ; 
Munus et officitim nil scribens ipse docebo, 
Unde parentur opes, quid alat formetqiie poetam ; 
Quid deceat, quid non ; quo virtus, quo ferat error. 

Ars Poetica. 

(a) Show how Horace fulfils this promise. 

(6) Explain the meaning of virtus. 

7. Translate, \vith notes on difficulties in syntax : 
(a) IJaec tibi dictabam post lanum putre Vacunae 

Excepto, quod non simul esses, ceteia laetus. 

Eiristles I. 10. 
(h) Alter rixatur de lana saepe caprina, 
Propugnat nugis armatus : 

8. Discuss with quotations : 

(a) Hoiace as a poet of nature, 
or (6) Horace as a moralist. 

9. Desciibe the political role of Horace. 



f 



i I 






II. 

1. Translate: 

Senatus, inchonntibus, prirnoribus jusjurandum 
concepit, quo certatiin omnes rnagistratus, ceteri 
ut sententiam rogabantur, deos testes advocabant 
nihil ope sua factum quo cujusquam salus laede- 
retur, neque se praoinium aut honorem ex calami- 
tate civiuin cepisse, trepidis et verba jurisju rand i 
per vai'ias artes mutantibus, quis tiagitii eonscien- 
tia inerat. Probabant religionern patres, perjurium 
arguebant. Eaque velut censura in Sariolenum 
Voculara et Nonium Attianum et Cestiuni Seve- 
rum acerrime incubuit, crebris apud Neronem 
delationibus famosos. Sariolenun» et recens cri- 
men urgebat, quod apud Vitellium molitus eadem 
foret. Nee destitit senatus manus intentare Vo- 
culae, donee curia excederet. Ad Paccium Afri- 
canum transgressi eum quoque proturbant, tan- 
qnam Neroni Scribonios iratres Concordia opibus- 
que insignes ad exitiuni monstravisset. Africanus 
neque tateri audebat neque abnuere poterat : in 
Vibium Crispuin, cujus interrogationibus fatiga- 
batur, ultro conversus, miscendo quae defenders 
nequibat, societate culpae invidiam deelinavit. 

Tacitus, Histories IV, 41. 
jusjurandum concepit. Explain the exact mean- 
ing. 

Illustrate by other passages the meaning of mi- 
scendo. 

Write explanatory notes on velut censura: delatio- 
nibus. 

2. Illustrate by quotations from this book : 
(a) The epigrammatic style of Tacitus. 
(6) Greek constructions. 

(c) Imitations of Virgil. 

3. Sketch the characters of Helvidiua Prisciis, 
Musonius Rufus, and Civilis. 

4. Write explanatory notes on : 
(a) Praefectura praetoHi. 
(6) Praetores aerarii. 

(c) Praefecti trihunique. 

(cl) Procurator. 

(e) Piieris puellisque patrimis matrimisqne, 

[over.] 



6. Translate with brief notes : 

(a) Nee tarn Musonius aut Publius quam Priscus 
et Marcellus ceterique, motis ad ultionem animis, 
exspectabantur. 

(6) Ne Roxnunis quidem ingratura id bellum, 
cujus ambiguam fortunam Vespasiano iniputatu- 
ros : victoriae rationem non reddi. 

6. Explain the government of Gaul. 

7. What is the origin and meaning of cum masQime ? 



i 



CAnfUer0ftl> of {Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS. 



LATIN AND GREEK. 

TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 



Examiner: W. P. Mustard, M.A. 



I. 

Translate : 

Paulo Fabio L. Vitellio consulibus post longum 
saeculorum ambitum avis plioenix in Aegyptum 
venit praebuitque niateriein cloctissimis indigena- 
rum et Graecorum nuilta super eo miraculo dis- 
serendi. de quibus congruunt et pluva ambigua, 
sed cognitu non absurda promere libet. sacrum 
Soli id animal et ore ac distitictu pinnarum a 
ceteris avibus diversum consentiimt qui formam 
eius effinxere ; de numcro annorum varia tradun- 
tur. maxime vulgatum quingentorum spatinm : 
sunt (jui adseverentmille quadringentos sexaginta 
unum interici, prioresque alios tres Sesoside pri- 
mum, post Amaside dominantibus, dein Ptolemaeo, 
qui ex Macedouibus tertius regnavit, in civitatem 
cui Heliopolis nomen, advolavisse, miilto ceterarum 
volucrum comitatu novam faciem mirantium. 

Tacitus, Awials VI. 

VOCABULARY. 

congruo, agree. 

dissero, discuss. 
diatinctus, various tints. 

indigena, a native. 



I 



, 



11 

Translate : 

"Akovc B^, <f>aai, /tto'Xa koKov Xoyov, hv <ri> fiiv 
i77»jo-6t fivdov, m iyat olfiai^ £70) 8^ Xoyov eof h\r]dfj 
yap 6vTa aoi Xe^tu h /neXXfii Xiyeiv. Mairep yhp 
"O/iTjjOo? X67et, SieueifiavTO Tr,v cip^ijv 6 Zev? leai 6 
Hoa-eih&v Kal 6 IWovrau, eVetS^ Traph tov Trarpov 
trapiXa^ov. ^v otv v6fio<i oSe irepl kvOputrrtov itrl 
Kpovov, Kal ael Kat vvv en eariv iu 6eoKj r&v 
avdpamtov tov iikv BiKaio)^ tov ^iov SieXdovra Kat 
offtft)?, iireihav TeXevTijar}, el<i fiaKapoov vijaov^ ani- 
ovra oIk€IV ev irdcr) evBatfiovia e/erof kuk&v, tov Bi 
a8t«a)? Kal hOeay'i et? to t^? Ttffeo)? re Kai BiKT)<i Beafia>- 
rripiov, S 8^ TdpTapov KaXovaiv, Uvai. tovtchv Bk 
BiKaa7a\ eVl Yipovov Kal In veccarl tov A<6? tj)(/ 
dpj(r)v €'xovTO<; ^S)VTe<} ^aav ^oiVTtov, eKeivrj tj) ^ftept^ 
St/cafoi/TC? p fiiXXoiep TeXeinqtv. 

Plato, Gorgiaa. 

VOCABULARY. 

Bea/itoTi^piov, prison. 
oiavi/jito, divide. 
BiKaaTi]<!, judge. 

■^yiofiai. consider. 

IJLv6o% fable. 

veaaTi, lately. 

Ttat?, punishment. 



1 1 . 



: It 



f 



f 



^nmvnitv of STotonio. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1S91 



SECOND, THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS 



LATIN PROSE. 



Examiner : Geo. H. Rouinson, M.A. 



In the beginning of the action, the son of Decius, a 
youth of the fairest hopes, and already associated to 
the honours of the purple, was slain by an arrow in 
the sight of his afflicted father, who, summoning all his 
fortitude, admonished the dismayed troops that the 
loss of a single soldier was of little importance to the 
Republic. The conflict wa^s terrible, it was the conflict 
of despair against grief and rage. The first line of the 
Goths at length gave way in disorder ; the second, 
advancing to sustain it, shared its fate ; and the third 
only remained entire, prepared to dispute the passage 
of the morass, which was imprudently attempted by 
the presumption of the enemy. Here the fortune of 
the day turned, and all things became adverse to the 
Romans ; the place deep with ooze, sinking under those 
who stood, slippei'y to such as advanced ; their armour 
heavy, the waters deep ; nor could they wield, in that 
uneasy situation, their weighty javelins. 



1 



it; 



( 



8AttfllfC0ftff Of CotOtltO. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



SECOND YEAR. 



LATIN PllOSE COMPOSITION. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : William Dale, M.A. 



When Ceesar subdnocl the Gauls, that great nation 
was already divided into three orders of men : the 
clerg}', the nobility, ai.d the common people. The first 
governed l)y superstition ; the second by arms, but the 
third and last was not of anv weioht or account in 
their public councils. It was very natural for the ple- 
beians, oppressed by «lebt, or apprehensive of injuries, 
to inn)lore the protection of some powerful chief, who 
acquired over their persons and property the same 
absolute right, as, among the Oreeks and Romans, a 
master exercised over his slaves. The greatest part of 
the nation was gradually I'educed into a state of servi- 
tude : compelled to perpetual labor on the estates of 
the Gallic nobles, and confined to the soil, either by 
the real weight of fetters, or by the no less cruel and 
forcible restraints of the laws. During the long series 
of troubles which agitated Gaul, from the reign of 
Galliences to that of Diocletian, the condition of these 
servile peasants was peculiarly miserable; and they 
experienced at once the complicated tyranny of the 
masters, of the barbarians, of the soldiers, and of the 
officers of the revenue!. Their patience was at last 
provoked into despair. On every side they rose in 
multitudes, armed with rustic weapons, and with irresis- 
tible fury. The ploughman became a foot soldier ; the 
shepherd mounted on horseback, the deserted villages 
and open towns were abandoned to the flames, and the 
ravages of the peasants equalled those of the fiercest 
barbarians. 



/ 



SiiifMf mftff of Corotito. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: IHIU. 



SECOND, TiriRI) AND KoUUTH YEAKH. 



UTIN AND GIlllKK (JllAMiMAll. 

PASS. 



Examiner: J. C. Roukrtson, B.A. 



NoTK.— Thinl and Fourth Year Candidaten taking Greek, and 
Second Vvur C'lmdidiitcH taking Latin only, will take any 
four (iu(!!4tionH in uacli part on which they write. Third 
and Fourth Vinir Candidates taking Latin only, will take 
all of I'ar'; 1. Meuond Year Candiifatoa taking Greek will 
take any three (|uoHtionB in eauh part. 

I. 

1. Translate' into Latin : 

Thoy have been forbidden, (veto) ; you have con- 
quered; they saw; they follow; wo had bound ; while 
doing ; having come ; they are coming ; they shall be 
bound ; after sending soldiers ; it should be done ; on 
being conquered; you will be forbidden ; you are being 
bound ; you will be conquered; he is going to set out; 
while being followed by us; we shall set out; after 
setting out ; he was dying ; we used to delay ; we shall 
do ; he was persuaded ; wo had been persuaded ; they 
must be conquered ; they used to come. 

2. Translate into Latin, omitting the words enclosed 
in brackets : 

(ci) (He said) that we had come ; (6) (they said 
this) that we might come ; (c) (they said this) that we 
might venture to come ; (d) (he promised) to come ; 
(e) (they were ordered) to come ; (/) (he urged us) to 
come ; ((/) (the storm was so great) that no one has 
ventured to come ; (h) (he said this) to persuade us not 
to come ; (i) (we asked him) who was coming ; (/«) (he 
answered, his biothcr) was coming ; (l) (we asked him) 
when he was coming ; (m) (he answered) that he was 
coming (the next day 1 ; {n) (1 know) who he is ; (o) (he 
was curtain) that we would be persuaded. 



3. Give the pronouns that would be fouiul in the 
Latin translation of the following : 

(a) He pronii.sed to follow tlion; (b) he himsolf 
ordered them to foUo'A' him ; (c) they betook themsolves 
to him ; {d) the city itself was taken ; (e) we betook 
ourselves to their enemies ; (/) he drew up his foices ; 
(,7) this is my province, Cii'sar, that yours ; (/a) they 
were ordered to await his arrival ; (a) he ordered them 
to await his ariival ; (k) he awaits their arrival ; (/) 
alarmed by his arrival, not ours ; (m) his own arrival 
had been unperceived ; (n) he sent his own son ; (o) a 
large number of us ; (p) through fear of you, my men ; 
(q) they led out with them ; (r) he sent her to them ; 
[a) on the same day ; (t) on that very night ; (?t) the 
scarcity of these things ; (v) for the whole of this day ; 
(w) the same camp to which we qame and from which 
j'ou had fled ; (x) the army which our forces had 
defeated. 

4. Translate into Latin, omitting the words enclosed 
in brackets : 

(a) (He advised them) to go; (h) (he hopes) to 
go; (c) he wishes to go ; (d) he was unwilling to biing; 
(c) I shall go (to-morrow) if lean ; (/) do not become 
(angrj); (g) they are going to bring back; (/t) he ought 
to go ; (i) they ought to have gone ; (k) (the men) 
while crossing ; (I) it is impossibb for us to go ; (in) 
(the storm was so great) that they are unwilling (to go) , 
(n) (the storm was so great) that they preferred (to 
remain) ; (o) he could have gone ; (2?) you ought to 
persuade them ; {^q) if he had gone, we should be able 
to come whenever you wish ; (r) (he did this) to be- 
come oonsul. 

5. Translate into Latin, omittino- the words enclosed 
in brackets : 

(Slain) by a brave man; a few days before; coming 
with larger forces they took the smaller camp ; more 
money ; (superio ' in might ; ^superior) in everything; 
a man of courage ; in another manner ; of the best 
citizens; a more difficult route (iter); the easiest route; 
as quickly as possible ; three thousand cavalry; in the 
other city ; (coming) from the ship ; (at the dictation) 
of no one ; all places ; out of two houses ; (he seized) 
two h.imdred and twenty men. 



I 



11. 

1. Translate exactly' tlie following partn of tlie vovbs 
aipeo) seize, mid. choose ; Travo) check ; navdauto learn ; 
vTTiayykofiai, promise ; aTrotrTeWo) despatch. 

ripovv, ekovaa, "va eXoiade, '(va aipoladCf iav ^Xqre, 
iiravcTto, travaba, iravov, fit) TraiKrrjTef ivavov, fiadeiv, /lav- 
fidviiv, fiadovaiv, viroa')(e(T6ai^ VTnax^i>eiTO, vTna\yovuTai, 
a7roffTa\et<?, airoareXovfiev, aireaTeiXav, anovTeCKaiev av. 

2. (a) How does Greek represent the various ideas 
expressed in Latin by the ablative case without a pre- 
|:)osition ? 

Q)) He urged him to speak the truth r.iay be trans- 
lated into Greek in two ways. What is the distinction ? 
Tu what moods and how does Greek make the distinct- 
ion ] 'J'ranslate in two ways, using KeKevco and aXrjdeva). 

3. What parts of the verb are the following forms 
in all probability ? State clearly in each case the signs 
by which you have judged, and where alternatives 
exist, state how you would decide by reference to a 
dictionary : 

e/jLTriTrXaaai,, ijOpoiaOat, iieicpidev, eTrevdpwTKei, eire- 
BevovTo, i^rjXXayfiivijv, pr]$el<rav, Trpo^ereTeTeXeKet, edia- 
T€ou, €^>ira^6fMr)u, riprjfjbivov, e.udv/iir)0eti}Te, TrapwfidpTOw, 
KaTiyevev, irKpava-Koi, ct/xeKJidcoaiv, crvveTratveaa<;y xare 

(f)6lT0. 

4. Decline the Greek for this father, the same woman, 
ship, liarid ; the feminine of the adj. for better; the mns- 
caline of the adj. for true, swift ; the neuter of the adj. 
for one, three, all. 

5. Give the synopsis (i. e. the first form of each mood) 
of olBa, elhov^ €l/j,i, el/jiif irjfii,^ e^iji/. 



i 



uni>^fvnits ot ^Toronto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR 



PHYSICS. 



„ . f A. C. McKay, B.A. 

Examiners: | j. e. Martin/ B.A. 



i 



1. Define acceleration. What is the acceleration of 
a particle moving with a uniform velocity v, {a) in a 
straight line, (6) in a circle. 

2. Define force. What constant force will gen- 
erate in a mass of 10 grammes, a velocity of 10 centi- 
metres per second, in 10 seconds ? 

3. Define energy. How much energy must be given 
to a mass of 1 kgm., that it may rise 4 seconds ? 

What is the eneigy of a mass of m grammes, 
moving with a velocity ot" v centimetres in one second ? 

4. State the conditions of equilibrium of co-planar 
forces. 

State the principle of the triangle of forces. 

5. A stone is thrown into the uir, at an angle of 30° 
with the horizon, with a velocity of 19.6 meti'es per 
second. How long before the stone reaches the 
ground ? (g = 9.8.) 

6. What causes the weight of a body to vary in dif- 
ferent parts of the world ? 

Distinguish between 'weight and mass. 

7. State Boyle's Law. Describe an experiment to 
verify it for pressures less than one atmosphere, 



I 



8, What is the resultant pressure on a solid wholly 
immersed in a liquid ? 

Describe the method of use of the specific gravity 
bottle. 

9, Make a cai-eful drawing, showing all essential 
parts of the force pump, or of the hydrostatic press. 

10. Define heat and temperature. 

Describe an aiv-thermometei". At 0°C., the vol- 
ume of a certain mass of air is 50 litres. What will 
bo the volume at 15°C., under the same pressure ? 

11, Dehne specific heat. 

If 10 grammes of lead at temperature 80°C. be 
put into 5 grammes of water at lo'^C, and the 
resultant temperature is 20*^0., find the specific heat of 
lead. 



12, Desci'ibe any common form of hygrometer, 



\ 



\ 



^nibtv$iH9 of {Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATI0N8 : l«ni. 



.SFX'OND YEAK. 



PHYSICS. 

HONORS. 



J. . ( IvA E. Martin, B.A. 

Examnm's : )^ ^ C. McKay, B.A. 



1 . Shew that the differential exjiression for acceleration of 

. . . , ,. . cVia 
a point moving \\\ aright line is -.-y • 

Deduce the fundameiitHl formulae of motion when the 
acceleration is constant. 

Prove that the distances passed over in successive 
equal intervals of time by a point starting from rest and 
moving M'ith a constant acceleration are proportional to the 
terms of the series 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 

2. Define force, mass, weight. 

What is the weight of a mass of 80 grammes at a 
place where a falling body moves from rest over 327 centi- 
metres in X" 1 

An hotel lift moving without friction is observed to 
descend 4 ft. from rest in 2 seconds ; supposing that the lift 
with its contents is 2 tons and the tension of the chain 
supporting it is uniform find the tension. 

3. A particle is projected from a point on an inclined 
plane of angle with velocity u at an angle u to the horizon 
so that its path is in the same plane as the line of greatest 
slope in the plane ; with what velocity must one move in the 
plane so as to be always vertically under the pR.rticle 1 

4. When two perfectly elastic j)articles /', Q, impinge 
with velocity u and r, prove that the energy interchanged 
between them is 2 P.Q. (Pu -f Qv) (« _ r) 4. (P + Qyi . 



I 



I 



ft. Tlic roHiiltant of two fnrceH, one ro|)rPsontp(l by ii liii« 
1, iind tlio otlior ropresentecl by n times the line OB Ih 
roprfisoiited liy (n 4- 1; times the line joininji; to the point 
which (lividos Ali .a the nitio of n to 1. 

What is the Iocuh of a point which is such that.tlm 
rcHultfint of the tbices repiesentt-d by ()A, OH, OC, where 
A, //, C are fixed points, is of given magnitude. 

(). Forres act at /*, the intersection of perpendicnlars of 
a triangle A lit' from A, /I, C upon the opposite sides, and 
are represiMitcd by these perpendieidar ; shesv that the sums 
of thelc moments about each of th(i angidar points cannot bo 
zero unless the triiingle is equilateral. 

7. Three heavy particles are placed at the angles A, Ji, C 
of a triangle, their weights being proportional to the opposite 
sides a, I), <• ; prove that the distance of the centre of gravity 
of the particles from A is 

2 be cos — • 
'Ji 

a -\- b + c 

8. State the Imvs of friction and define limitiitg angle of 
/riction (\). 

A particle rests on a i-ough curve whose equation is 
/(j^y) = and is acted on by forces the sums of whose com- 
pouenis along the axes of .r and // are X and }" ; prove that 
the particle will rest at ail points on the curve at whicli 

9. If IG parts by mass of sand {S,Jf = .21')) at 7')", and 
20 parts by mass of iron {S^, I J = . 1098) at 45' are thrown 
into 50 of water at 4°, find the teinpeiature of the mixture. 

10. A cubic metre of air at 20° is found to contain 11.56 
graunnesof a queous vapour. What is the relative humidity 
of tiiis air, tlie maxiunun pressure of vapour at 20° being 
17.39 mm. 



1 



/ ! 



\ 



f 



> 



SAitfUftttUj^ Of CToronlo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 

HONORS. 



( 



., i John McOowan, B.A. 

hxatuivers: [Alfred T. DkLury, B.A. 



1. ExplHin integration aa the inverse of differentiation 
unci alHo HH suiuniation. 

The iiidoHnite integriil in the fonntM' case with its 
added constant is etjuivalent to tlic definite integral in the 
latter case with one Ihnit variable and the other constant. 

2. Find the following integrals : 

--- , /- , / .^•^ sin ax ax, 

%/ar2 ^ aH ' ./ 2 + cos a; ' -^ 

/a' (a + 6x''^)8 dx, fx tan— *a-c/a. 

3. Reduce ycoH"*a; sin «a; c/«, fa'^x'^dx; 

and by means of Jq a;'" (1 — a;)" show that 

7»(n— 1)(« — 2) .... 1 



(m 4- 1) (,» 4. n + 1) 



1 



n 
T 



1 



m + 1 1 ' m + 2 
n being a positive integer. 

4. Evaluate 



n(n— 1 ) 
- ____ 



i 



m. + 3 



— «&c. 



f' 



, ..x2 



. /"» log (1 + a» ««) , 



■0 • •"" 1 + 

5. Find the area between the cnrve r ss a (sec Q -\- tan ff) 
and its asymptote r = 2a sec 0. 

Prove Holditch's theorem. 

6. ITind the volume of one of the wedges contained by 
the surfaces x^ + y^ ^ a^ , z ~ bx and z ^ ex. 

7. Find the mean of all the lines drawn from the origin 
to the curve r =i a (cos + sin 0). 



slnftifr0Ufi oT Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 

HONORS. 



„ . (John McGowan, B.A. 

Exammevs: | alfrkd T. DeLury, B.A. 



1. If the limit of the ratio of two infinitedmals is nnity, 
they differ by an infinitesimal of a liigher order th;m their 
own ; and conversely. 

Show bv a aeometrical construction that if be a small 
quantity of the first order, and sin differ by a .small 
quantity of the third order. 

2. If y y/\ - x'"' — sir— ^.c, use Leibnitz's Theorem to 
prove 

3. Show that the remainder after n terms of the expansion 
of f{x-\- h) by Taylor's Theorem is 

— /(n) (a; + eh) where » > and < 1 . 
The limiting value of when h tends to zero is — —— 

4. Show how to find the values of the indeterminate forms 
{ and ^ , and discuss the latter form when its actual value 
ii zero. 

Evaluate 

tan X i. 

~i^ when xss - ^and (cos mxf* when x smQ . 



i 



log (« - i) 



i 



6. In the equation y =» f («), y is a mnximum or inini- 
mum when 



dy 



^- = o according as -^^ 






is negative or positiva 

Illustrate geometrically the cases when the second and 
higher derivatives also vanish. 

Find the maximum and minimum values of 
sin a: (1 + cos x) . 
6, Obtain the following formulae : 

1 ^ "^ \Tx) I dr ^ dp 






dp 



Find the radius of curvature at the origin for the curve 
2a:* — 5axhj — 2axy^ + '2a^y^ a . 

7. Show how to find the multiple points on a curve. 

The curve (y — aj)^ = (1 — x^f has two cusps : find 
their poiiitioiis and the tangents to them. 

8. Change the independent variable from oj to » in the 
equation 

nd^ „ dv ff2 
"'J + 2.J+^y = 0whena..= l. 

9. Trace the curves : 

(1) r^cos^i = o^sin 30. 

(2) xY = a^ (y* -a') . 






V 



ti 



2iniii(tfiiUa^ of sroronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: IS'Jl. 



SECOND YEAK. 
HONORS. 



/ 



THEORY OF KQuATiOiNS. 



Examiners : 



f Alfred T. De Lury, B.A. 
( John McGowan, B.A. 



1. Define and illustrate, algebraic function, rational 
function, integral function. 

Establish the continuity ot a rational integral function 
of a single variable and hence shew that every equation oi' 
odd degree has one real i-oot. 

2. If an equation with real coefficients ha« a root of the 
form a -+- x/ j . ji it has also a root a — %/ __ j . |.S . 

Shew how Descartes' rule of signs may sometimes be 
employed to fix an inferior limit to the number of imaginary 
roots, and state when this method fails. 
Ex. a;^ — 3a: + 1= 

3. Investigate a practical iiiethod of transforming a given 
equation into one whose roots are each greater by a given 
quantity than those of the given equation. 

If the roots ■ " aa? + 3 6a;2 + 3 ca; -f rf = are in 
A. P., shew that those of the equation 

( o2rf — 3 aic + 2 63 ) a:3 + 3 ( ac — 62 ) a; -I- 1 „ 
are in //. P. 

4. If n is prime and a any imaginary root of a;" — 1 = 
all the roots are given by 1, a, a^ .... a""" ^ 

Shew how to solve aj^ — i = : a;* — 1 = , and 
infer the roots of a;^^ — 1 = 

Find the equation which has for roots the special roots 
of a;^' — 1 = 0. Can this equation for the special roots 
be solved directly ? 



V 



5. Form tlie ('(iiiation whose roots are tlnj Hquared dif- 
ference of eveiy two roots of a^ + q x -\- r =0 and obtain 
the criterion of tlie nature of the roots of the given cubic. 

6. Give any solution of the bequadratic. 

7. Enuntiate the theorems of Fourier and Sturm. 

Apply Sturm's Theorem to find the nature and posi- 
tion of the roots of a;* -f 3 (b^ + 7 a!2 ^. 10 a •+ 1=0 

8. pc^ — Gjc — 14 = has v. root between 3 and 4 : 
find the root correct to five decimal places. 

9. A multiple root of the order m of the equation 
/ (a;) = is a multiple root of order m — • 1 of the first 
derived equation. 

The equation x^ — 5a^ — 5jc3 -f i5x^ — 108 = has 
one set of three equal roots : find all the roots. 

10. "A symmetric function of the roots of an equation is 
a single- valued function of the roots." Explain, 
o,, a,, flg, ai'o three roots of a biquadric, how many values has 

'i «i + ^« «j + 4 a. ? 
The sums of the similar powers of the roots of an 
equation can be expressed ratioua ly in terms of the 
coefficients 

If a, -f a, + a, = then 
a ,2 + c,2 + a,2 ".' + g/ + <»,' _ a,» -f o/ + a," 
2 ' 3 ~ 6 



I 






'■'.'^ 



anfUftttftff of (ETotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY AND 
NEWTON 1. 



HONORS. 



Emiminera 



I John McGowan, B.A. 
(Alfred T. DeLury, B.A. 



1. Great circles on a sphere bisect each other, and the 
angle between their planes is measured by the arc joining 
their poles. 

If the angles of a spherical triangle are each leas than 
two right angles the sides are each less than a semi-circle. 

2. Use the properties of polar triangles to find the limits 
of the sides and angles of an equilateral triangle. 

If the opposite angles of a sphe.ical quadrilateral are 
equal to each other so also are the opposite sides. 

3. Prove 

(l)tani(a-6) = ^j^|i^-^jtan-. 



(2) sin" I = Bin' ^ 



+ sin* - , when A + li^C. 



4. If CDA and BSA be two aras intersecting in A, and 
having the' angles BCA and DEA each right angles, show 
that tan AD. tan AC = tan^^. tan AB. 

If an arc of a great circle pass through a fixed point 
the tangents at its intersections with a small circle intersect 
on a fixed arc. 



6. Prove 



tan r = tan ^ sin (» — a) 



and deduce from this equation 

A 
2 

a 



(1) tan ri a tan -^ sin « ; 



cot i? Ml cot g co» {S — A)- 







6. Find the area of a spherical triangle. 

If the angular points of one triangle are diametrioftllj 
opposite to the angular points of anothtr triangle, the trian- 
gles are equal in aiea. 

7. State and prove Lemma I. 

How must the "assigned difference" be measured 1 
Two triangles CAB and cAb have a common angle A 
and the sum of the sides containing that angle is the same 
in each ; BC and he intersect in D : prove that in the limit 
when be coincides with BC, CD \DB w AB\ AC, 

8. Prove Lemma V. 

From a familiar method of describing an ellipse show 
that ellipses which have the same excentricity are similar. 

9. State and prove Lemma VIL 

Find the limiting ratio of the segments of two equal 
chords of a curve when they move up to coincidence. 

10. State and prove Lemma XL 

In an arc PQ of continued curvature ^ is a point at 
which the tangent is parallel to PQ : prove that the ultimate 
ratio of PR to RQ when PQ is diminished indefinitely is 
onto of equality. 



( 







5 







QlnfattivUtf of SToroneo. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATlONoi IW)I. 



SECOND VKAIl. 



SOLID GFMETIIY. 

HONORS. 



/ 



„ . ( Ai.FUKD T. 1)k Lruv, B.A. 

EMimnern: -J j^^^^ McGowan. B.A. 



1. One equation nniong the coorcUnatos x, y, z denotes a 
nurface, niul two o<|uatioiiH denote a line. 

Obtain the equation of the atraiglit line in the form 

«?— « ^ !/ — i^ _ f — r , 
I m n 

How mnny independent constants in the equation of a 
straight line ? 

2. Obtain t!i< equation of a pUttio in the form 

Ix -f 7UI/ + nz — ^> ■■ 0. 

If Ai denotes li x -f mi y -f «i s — ;>i , iti'., Hnd tlie 
locus of the intersection oi A\ — kA^ = 0, with A^ — kA^ = 0, 
for different values of k. 

3. Find the perpendicular distance of a point from a given 
stnught line. 

A point moves so as to bo equidistant from three 
given straight lines ; tind its locus and shew what this locus 
becomes if the three lines pass through the origin. 

4. Find the centre of the surface given by the gf-neral 
equation of the second degree. 

Find the conditions for (1) a line of centres, (2) a plane 
at centres, (3) a centre of infinity ; and state what classes 
of surfaces these conditions determine. 

5. The plane Ix -|- my + wa — p =o will touch the 
ellipsoid 



y 



.2«2 



-^ + -^ + -^ - 1 = if ;ja = a2 /2 + ja ,„2 _|. c2n 

Find the locus of the intersection of three perpendicular 
tangent planes to an ellipsoid. 



N 



n. Kind t.lio f'(|iiatioii for thn loiiRtlw of the iixpk of iiiiy 
jtliint' tM'iitr'il w»(!tioii of 



-I- 



-1-0, 



n» 6« "^ r« 

and doduce 

( 1 ) Tlu) aim of the section. 

(2) Tho condition that thoHOction may Ijc ttrootanguliir 
liypcihola. 

(In (2) tak« t-'* with a negative Hign). 

7. In t)w hy;«**>l.oloid of one sheet there are two syHtenis 
of generating lints, and shew tluit all linoH of one system 
interxect all lineH of the other, but that no two Hues of ono 
Hvsteni inturHeut. 

What is the nature of the section of this surface by a 
tangent plane ] 

H. Kind tho equation of the osculating plane at any point 
of a oiirvo in spare. 

Find the osculating pli'ne and the radius of spherical 
curvature at a point on the helix, 

,»; « n cos ; v/ =» n sin ; z 'sa a tan a, 

!). Di'tlno indicatrix and explain its use in the theory of 
curvatiiio ot" surfaces. 

Ji ami Jii aretheprin(;ipal radii of curvature at a point 
»»n a sui r.ice. it the radius of (Mirvatnre of a normal section, 
the angle Ix'tween this swition and (he eonjngate normal 
siiftiiin ; shew that // is giv(M» by the e<|iiation 

f,i „i„.; II — ( /i' -f. Jf,} sin- (I + /i' /ii = 0. 





[/ 


\ 






f 

I. 


,/ 




• 




k 




> 



q 



..■!■• 



( 



\ 



.iifiiiijiiawgiiiiiiiii^ 



Unitttuttv cf srorctito. 



ANNUAL EXAiMlNATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



HISTORY. 



Esoaminer : Herbert Hartley Dewart. B.A 



/ 



1. Qive a brief account of the Salic Law, stating 
succintly the events and causes that led to its estnblish- 
ment in France. 

2. Discuss fully to what extent the Feudal system 
advanced the national greatness of France, and outline 
clearly the leading causes and events that brought 
about the subversion of the s^ stem. 

3. Describe the constitution of Florence in the earlier 
part of the 13th century, outlining the most important 
changes that took plar3 in that and in the succf^eding 
century. 

4. "Venice grew into being as a city, not of the 
Western Empire, but of the Eastern." Trace the 
growth of the Venetian republic, showing clearly what 
IS meant. 

5. Describe the origin, constitution and importance 
of the Hanseatic Union. 

6. Qive the most important features in the Constitu- 
tion of the Cortes of Castile, and contrast it with 
the civil polity of England under the Plautagenets. 

7. Write explanatory notes upon : Golden Bull, 
Danegeld, Purveyance, Janizaries, Peace of Bretagny, 
Simon de Montfort, 



) 



I 



8. Give the leading events of the Third Crusade, and 
state concisely the most important effects of the 
crusades upon the intellectual and political lite of 
Europe. 

9. Explain the circumstances under which the 
Channel Islands became a British possession, and point 
out any anomalies in their form of government that 
still survive. 






) 



um^tvuits ot ^Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



HISTORY. 

HONORS. 
Easaminer : E. C. Jeffrey, B.A. 



I 



NoTK. — Candidates may write on any five of the questions. 

1. Outline the developmental history of land tenure 
in Europe, and indicate its influence on polity. 

2. Contrast the political evolution of England with 
that of France. 

3. Account for the superior vitality of the Eastern 
Roman Empire. Are there any paralells in the life- 
histories of the two Musselraan Caliphates ? 

4. Give a general account of the originof the Euro- 
pean town. 

5. What were the influences which ushared in the 
Middle Ages ? What phenomena marked their close ? 

6. Trace the influence of racial and physical factors 
on the political geography of Mediseval Europe. 



\ 



) 



wnfmga^mmmrmKmmm^ 



^ 



&niUvuU9 of Toronto < 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ANCIENT HISTORY. 

HONORS. 



) 



) 



„ . ( William Dale, MA. 

Lxamtneva : | ^ j ^^^.^^^^ g.A. 



Candidates are requested to enclose the Roman and d reek History 
in separate envelopes. 

NoTR. — Candidates are requested to enclose tbj answers to questions 
in sections A and B in separate envelopes. Only nix ques- 
tions of section A are to l}e attenipteif. 

A. 

1. Describe the original races of Italy, pointing out 
as far as possible their origin and their connection with 
the Indo-Germanic people, together with the evidence 
on which that connection rests. 

2. What circumstances contributed to the early 
predominance of Rome in Latlum. Explain carefully 
the expressims: Roma qtuidrata, Septimontium, llo- 
mani collini, Pons aubliciua. What was the origin of 
the plehs ? Who were the clientea ? 

3. Translate: Lihertatiaoriginemiindemagia^quia 
annuum imperium consvlare fadurrh est, quam quod 
deminutum quicquam, sit ex regia potestate, numeres. 
Explain the terins imperium and potestas, and state 
what constitutional changes immediately followed the 
expulsion of the Kings. What were the causes of that 
expulsion ? 

4. What events are connected with the names, 
Spurius Cassius, Caw,iUu8,Coi'iolantus, Appius Clau- 
dius, Canuleius, Cineas, Ahala, M.'Ciirius. Give dates. 



'). Sum up briefly tlio chief political ami social 
features of the century of 3GG-2G6 B.C. Explain tlio 
origin, the duties, and the influence of the censors. 

6. Give a clear account of the 2nd Samnitc war, 
with dates. 

7. Narrate the causes which led to the conquest of 
the Latins ? Give an account of the great Latin war, 
with dates. When did Rome close the Latin Con- 
federacy ? Explain what is meant by jits Latii, viuni- 
cipium ? 

8. Explain the meaning of Senatorea pedarii, pro- 
vocatio, transveetio equihtm, centuria praerogativa. 
Lex cuiiata, Prisci Latini, clavum anni movere, 
pomoerium, pecunia, possessio. 

9. Describe carefully the constitution of Servius 
Tullius under the following heads : 

(I) Causes ; (2) Comita f^enturiata ; (3) results. 

10. Explain the political effects of (1) the Gallic 
war of 390 ; (2) the 2nd Samnite war ; (3) the war 
with Pyrrhus. 

B. 

(JRKKK HISTORY. 

NoTK. — Not more thaii./J'rc questions tire to be attempted of whicli 
tiro must Ih! selected from the^firnt three. 

1. Account for the strenuous resistance offered by 
Athens to the Persians, and the easy suiTender of 
Boeotia. 

2. Shew clearly the relation existing between church 
and state in a typical Greek city and illustrate the 
influence of i*eligious rites and practices on Greek 
politics during the Persian and Peloponnesian wars, 

3. Trace the history of the Oligarchic party in 
Athens from the beginning of the Peloponnesian war 
to the year 411 B. C. 

4. Sketch the origin and development of the 
Athenian empire. 

Discuss the reasons of the ■ 'volt of Mytilene as 
given by the envoys, and the subsequent fate of the 
cit^\ 



\ 



5. Compare Greeks with Persians : 
(a) As citizens. 

(6) As soldiers. 

6. 'Ef &p &\Ka T€ iroWa dm iv neyaKxf TroXet koI 

ov ToaovTov yvoifiij^ afidpTtjua rjp 7rpo9 ow iirpeffaVf 
6<Top ol ixirifiyp'avTe'i ov rh wpoc^pa rotv ot^o/uevot? 
i'/TijyiyvaxTKovTe^, dXKa /ear^ tA? iBla^ Sui/9o\a9 Trepl 
T^9 Tov ^fiov TrpoaTOffla^ to re iv tc3 arparoTrko^ 
dfi^Xvrepa iirolovu Koi tA trepX rifv woXiv irpSnov iv 
dWijiKoK iTapd')(dr)<Tav. 

Thucydides, II. 

Explain the causes of the Sicilian expedithn. 
Discuss and illustrate this statement of Thucydides. 

7. Describe and classify the constitution of Sparta 
and explain the relations existing between her and 
her subjects and allies. 

8. Outline the policy and fortunes of Plataia during 
the Persian and Peloponnesian wars. 



\ 



"»A 



anfUeviUtt Of coroiito* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : iSttl. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS. 






) 



E, . f David R. Keys, M.A. 



1. State the arguments for and against the use of 
the term " Anglo-Saxon." 

2. Define Mutation, Qradation, Breaking. Explain 

the phonetic meaning of the following: — e (i, eo) 

a (», ea) u (o). 

3. Trace the process by which the past tense of 
giefan became geaf. 

4. Illustrate what is meant by "grammatical change." 
Classify such changes as they occur in Anglo-Saxon. 

5. What traces of Reduplication are to be found in 
Anglo-Saxon ? 

6. Give rules for the declension of adjectives. When 
are the weak forms used ? 

Translate : 

We sind ealle cuman on //ussum and-weardan 
life, and ure eard nis na her ac we sind her swelce 
weg-ferende menn an eyiiath other iserth. Hwelc 
mann aeltft his bearne nseddran gif hit fisces bitt 
.^Ic th£brsi the bitt, he on-feh<^ ; and se the secth, 
he hit fint. No gsdth eelc thaxa. on heofona rice 
the cyfithth to me Dryhten, Dryhten ' ; ac s6 the 
vfyrcth mines Feeder willan the on heof onum is ; 
se gse^^ on heofona rice. Nis hit na g5d, thsei man 
nime bearna hlaf and hundum weorpe. 



1. Give principal parts of all Htrong vcrbH, rofcrrinjLC 
oacli v«;rb to its propor class* 

2. Explain all Hubjunctiv&s. 

3. Selth. Give principle parts of this verb. Trace 
it back to Go. saljan, ami explain itH modern meaning. 

4. Write etymological an<l grammatical notcH on 
0</ter, t&erth, fisces, on-feli//t tint, heofona, csvithth, god, 
bearna, hiaf. 

5. Give modern English repreHcntativf of eard, 
Hwelce, nime. 

Naeddran. What is the modern lurm i Gito 
other words that have suHcred a like change. 

7. Faeder. Account for the present form. How 
does this word illustrate Vemer's law ? 

II. 
Translate : 

Seo cw6n scBgde thvat hiere nsere be healfum 
doBle gosa)gd be Salomones mtBitho, and seo gast- 
lice cwen, Godes gela^/tung oththo gehwelc halig 
sttwol, thonna hco cymth to ^Aa3re heofonlican 
Hierusalum, thonnc gesih^/i heo miclo maran 
mcertho and wuldor thonne hiere ror on life thurh 

witegaii othtlie apo.stolas gecydd wrere. Ne maeg 
nun €age on ^Ai-s-sum life gesSon, ne nan eare gehi- 
ei'an, ne mines mannes heorte usmean tho. thins thQ 
God ge&rcektk thsdm the hine la^&tk. Tha ^mug 
we magon begietan, ac we ne magon hie asmean, 
ne us nsefre ne athrlett thara gOda genyhtsumnes. 

1. Refer each noun in the above extract to its pro- 
per class in the strong or weak declension. 

2. Give principal parts of sregde, geseon, asmean, 
lu&ath and athriett. 

3. Derive witegan, gastlice, Godes, gecydd. 

4. cwen. What pair of doublets has Modern Eng- 
lish derived froui this word ? Give other instances of 
such dimorphism. 

5. asmean, gehwelc. Give the force of the prefixes 
in these words. 

6. hine. Account for the survival of the dative 
form. 

7. iEr. Give the idomatic force of this particle. 



; 



L, 



III. 

1. Skuich tho plot of tho Htory in thai part of the 
Fairv Qucono wiiiuh you have read and give its moral 
Hignitlcance. 

2. Write an article on tho language of Spenser, 
showing tho influence it exercised on later writers. 

3. Contrast the lives of Spenser and Shakespeare. 

4. Quote acotiple of stanzas from the Faery Queene, 
scan them and point out their beauties and defects, 
referring particularly to the Spenserian mannerisms 
they may contain. 



J 



; 



&nl»tvuit9 of CTorotito* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ENGLISH. 



,V3 ' 



PASS. 



Examiner: H. H. Dewart, B.A. 



HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 

1. Give the distinguishing characteristics of each of 
the " three main stages of development " of the English 
language, and indicate approximately the period 
covered by each. 

2. What were the direct and indirect effects of the 
Norman conquest upon the language ? 

3. Discuss whether English should be classed with 
Teutonic Platt-Deutsch or with Scandinavian. 

4. (a) Write a short paper on the English dialects 
of the 12lh atid 13th Centuries, pointing out the main 
characteristics of each, and accounting for the diver- 
sitv. 

(6) To what causes was the subsequent develop- 
ment of a standard foi m of English due ? 

0. Give an account of the various translations of the 
Bible from early Saxon times down to the beginning 
of the l7th Century, and estimate the philological 
importance and formative influence of each. 

6. Give an account of the " Ormulum," pointing out 
its importance to the student of the English language. 

7. Write a short paper on the " Scotch " of Robert 
Bums, showing by internal and external evidence its 
exact relationship to Modern English, and to its most 
direct Old Engliuh antecedent. 



u. 



mu\itt»ii» of CTovoiUo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAH. 



FRENCH. 



Examiner : W. H. Fraseu, B.A. 



1. Give the various forms (masc, fem., plur.) of the 
Possessive Pronoun, and translate into French: 

(a) We have our books and she has hers. 

(b) These pens are mine. Those pens are his. 

(c) Go and get my gloves and your own. 

(d) My aunt has brought a friend of hers to see us. 

(e) I only ask for my own. 

2. Translate into French : 

(a) To whom have you given the money ? To 

them. 

(b) I am speaking both to him and to her. 

(c) Will you have the kindness to introduce me to 

, him ? 

(d) Some one is knocking at the door. Is it my 

friends ? It is they. 

(c) He who commits a fault deserves punish- 
ment. 

3. Make a table of Interrogative Pronouns and In- 
terrogative Adjectives, including the English equiva- 
lent of each form given, and tl'anslate the following 
into French : 

(a) Which one of his sisters has accompanied him? 
(6) Let me know to whom he has told that. 
(c) Whose house is that yonder ? 
{d) What is making that noise ? 

(e) What books has the book-seller sent ? 



4. Give the Pres. Indlc, the Iiupf. rmJie., tlio Condi., 
the Proa Subj. oi falloir, ami translate the tbllowiiijLj, 
using falloir : 

{a) You will have to remain. 

{b) He has had to speak. 

(c) One must do one's duty. 

{cl) I should need one hmidred francs at least. 

(e) He had already been obliged to sell his carriage. 

5. Translate the following, and remark upon the 
tense of verbs in italics : 

(a) II y a longtemps cjue je reve d'un ofiicier qui 
m'a sauve la vie. 

(6) Je commeu^'ais h me faire a ce tete-a-toto lors- 
que kavvint un incident. 

(c) Enfin, je me suis hoe brusquement. " Qu'ost- 
ce que c'est ? ai-je dit." 

(d) Si mon his le re7ieonti'e, il lui fera tout le bien 
qu'il 'pourra. 

(e) J'attendrai qu'il vienne. 

6. Translate into French : 

(a) Do not go away {a'lm aller). (b) I should 
run if I could, (o) We .«hall gather flowers to- 
morrow, (d) He does not i'eel the cold, (e) The 
queen is dying ; the queen is dead. (/) What can 
1 offer you ? {(j) We shall come next week, (h) I 
shall have to go home soon, (i) He hates his 
neighbors and his neighbors hate him. (;') They 
(f.) have sat down, {k) I shall go when I can. 
(l) Do you know how to read and write ? (m) 
This will be worth more than that after a few 
days, (n) When shall we see you again ? (o) I 
.should like to know that myself. 

II. 

Translate : 

A votre compte, quand un individu, que vous 
ne connaissez que pour lui avoir marchti sur le 
pied, vous ecrit : " Monsieur, trouvez-vous k tel 
endroit, afin que j'aie la satisfaction de " vous 
egorger en reparation de I'insulte que vous m'avez 
faite," il faut qu'on se rende aux ordres du qwidani, 
et qu'on prenne l)ieu garde de le i'aire attendre. 
Chose eti'ange 1 il y a des honnnes qui ne risque- 



TIic 
can 

(}<)} 
his 

They 

can. 

(m) 

few 

(o) I 



raient pas mille francs pour sauver Thonneur bL leur 
ami, la vie k leur pfere, et qui risquent leur vie 
dans un duel pour une parole Equivoque ou ])our 
un regard de travers. Mais alors, qu'est-ce done 
que la vie ? Ce n'est done plus un bien sans lequel 
tous les autres sont fort peu de chose ? C'est done 
un haillon qu'on jette au chittonnier qui passe, ou 
une piece de monnaie efiacde qu'on abandonne hu 
premier aveugle qui vient chanter sous votre fenf- 
ire? 

III. 

Translate into French : 

The first of the long line of English poets is really 
Csedmon. At the feasts, in those times, everybody 
used to sing in turn to amuse the company, but 
Csedmon used to leave the table before the harp 
was given to him. One evening when (que) he 
had done thus, he went to the stable and lay down 
to sleep, after having cared for (soigner) the cattle, 
because, 'you must know, he was only a farm- 
servant in the monastry at Whitby. As he slept, 
some one appeared to him and said, " Caedmon, sing 
a song to me." " I cannot sing," he replied, " for 
that cause I left the fetWit." " Nevertheless," was 
was the answer, " you must sing to me." " What," 
then, asked Cfedmon, " shall 1 sing ?" The other 
replied, " sing the beginning of created things." 
Thereupon he made some verses, which in the 
morning he still remembered (se souvenir de). 



ii 



vous 
ur le 
tel 
vous 

avez 
dam, 
ndre. 

que- 



^iitiier»it9 of Cotonta* 

ANNUAL EXAMINAllONS : 1891. 
SECOND YEAR. 



FRENCH AUTHORS. 



Examiner : A. J. Bell, M. A., Ph.D. 



Translate : 

(a) Tout Strasbourg est forcd de reconnaltre que 
le docteur Marchal a rajeuni de dix ans. Quand 
il passe en courant dans la rue. vous diriez qu'il a 
des ailes; il fend I'air, on croit voir un sillage 
lumineux deirifere lui. 11 entre dans les maga- 
sins, dans les plus beaux rnagasins de la ville, et 
il achate sans marehander tout ce qu'il y a de plus 
cher. II paye et s'enfuit comme un fou, sans 
attendre sa monnaie. A I'hopita), il est charmant 
pour les nialades, pour les intirmiers, pour les .soeurs; 
il voit tout en beau ; c'est le m^decin tant inieux, 
il donne des ewcdi k ceux qui les demandent ; il 
ordonne du vin, du poulet, des c6telettes k qui en 
veut. A son cours, il professe lea theories les plus 
cotisolantes, il nie leu maladies incurables, il ne 
voit pas poui'quoi Thouune sage, heureux et nmri*? 
ne vivrait pas un siecle et demi ! On I'^coute, on 
sourit, et pourtnnt on convient que jamais il n'a 
n>ontrd taut de talent. Ses dlfeves I'applaudissent 
h tout rompre; hiei", ils I'ont attendu devant la 
Faculty pour lui faire une ovation ; mais bonsoir ! 
il s'^tait enfui par derriere et roulait d4}k sur le 
chemin de Hagelstadt. 

About, La Fille du Chanoine. 



(b) Mme Benott ^tat si pvessde de jouir de la vie et 
du faubourg, qu'elle aurait mari^ sa fille k quinze 
ans si elle I'avait pu. Maiu Lucile k quinze ens 
n'dtait encore qu'une petite fille, L'fi,ge ingrat se 

Jrolonrjea pour alio au il^l^ des lirnites ordinnires. 
1 est k remarquer que les onfants des villages sont 
inoins piecoccs que ceux <k\s xilles : c'est sans doute 
par la mSme raison qui fait qiie les fleurs des champs 
retardent sur celles des jardins. A seize jiiis, 
Lucile commen^a de prendre figure. Elle ^tait 
encore un peu maigre, un peu rubiconde, un peu 
gauche"; tontefois sa gjuicherie, sa niaigreur et ses 
bras rouges n'<^iaient pas des epouvantails ^effa- 
roucher Tamour. Elle rcsseniblait k ces chastes 
statues que les sculpteurs allemands de la Renais- 
sance taillaient dans la pierre des cath^drales ; 
mais aucun fnnatique de I'art grec n'ou». dddaigu^ 
de jouer aupr^s d'elle le r61e de P)'gmaliou. 

About, 7.a Mere de la Murqulfie. 

1. a qui en vent. Explain this construction. 

2. ^ponvantailn. Give a rulo lor t'oiniing the plural 
of nouns ending in nil. 

3. eiifiii. Indicate the oiigin and force of the prtitlx 
€7) here. 

4. Note any verbs in these extracts that take either 
d or de before a following intinitive. 

5. Write explanatory iiote.s on le vi^ileciii t uit laieux, 
dii faubourg, 1(1 Renuim'rue, le r(Ue <le Pygiualio)t. 



II. 



Translate 



(«) Gourniantlez done les tiots tuniultuex ! 
Enchainez I'ocdan, Xerces prdsoniptuenx ! 
— Ah ! le doute est pennis en face de Ja taehe, 
Parler est imprudent, et se taire est bien l&che, 
Faut-il se retirer sans avoir romliattu, 
Et, se r^fugiant <]ans sa froide veitu, 
Consid^rer d'en bant, philosophe dgoiste, 
La sombre tragddie a laquelle on assiste ? 
Mais c'est autori.ser d'autres assassinats. 
Qu'est-ce qu'une vertu qui ne s'indigne pas ! 
Faut-il faire dclater une sainte colore ? 
Mais c'est exasperer la fureur populaire, 



) 



tmim 



1?^ 



Attifler le foyer de nos cHsyensions, 

Et. hAter I'iiiPf'ndie ei les destructions. 

— Peut-«itn! n'e8t-ce pas sans un travail ^noruiu, 

Sans d'iininenses douleurs, qu'un Etat se trauH- 

t'ortne. 
Ce long enfanteuient d'un monde jeune et fort 
Ades convulsions coninie eu auraitla niort. 
Nous y p^rirons tous les uns apr^s les autres, 
Toute id^e est niortelle k ses premiers apdtres. 

CUAHLOTTE OORDAY, Act I. 

1. Notice some of the uses of the circumflex accent, 
illustrating from the extract. 

2. Distinguish rich fronj sufficient ihynies, pointing 
out examples of both in the exur^nt. 

in. 

Translate : 

UoNDON. Oni.et pour quelque autre raisoti en- 
core. II y a, de par le monde, une joiie petite dame 
de Mek'ourt. 

Dklnau. Y penses-tu ? la fenime d'un academi- 
cien ! Un instant, monsietir, respect k nos chefs, 
aux v^t^rans de la littdrature ! 

RoNDON. Oh ! je snis pr^t a 6ter mon chapeau ; 
mais il n'en est pas moins vrai qu'un mari acadd- 
niicien est ce qu'il y a de plus commode ! d'abord, 
['habitude qu'ila ont de fermer les yeux. 

DELMAR. Halte-lti, ' ou nous nous f^cherons. 
Madame de Melcourt est la .sagesse mSme. Avant 
son manage, c'etait une anne de ma siieur ; et il 
n'y a entre nous que <le la bonne amitid Ingrat 
que tu es ! c'est a elle que nous devons nos succes ; 
c'est notre providence litte^raire. Vive, aimable, 
spirituelle, ripandue dans le grand monde, partout 
elle vante tous nos ouvrages. Dimii ! delicieux ! 
(((Inilrahle ! elle ne sort pas de 1^ ; et il y a tant 
de gens qjii n'ont jamis d'avis, et qui sont enchan- 
tds d'etre I'fecho d'une jolie femme. Et aux pre- 
mi6res representations, il faut la voir aux loges 
d'avant-scene ! Elle rit a nos vaudevilles, elle 
pleure ^ nos operas-comiques. Dcrni^rement en- 
is fait un m^lodrame. 



J 



qui 



qui 




fait pas de stittifie i j'aviiit) fiiit iin niitflodranie k 
Feydeau ; elle a eu la |n>5.s('iic»' dVsprit de s'^va- 
tioiiir au second actu, ce\n a donn^' I'ttxeriple ; cela a 
gajjnd la preJuiJfie ;„'alerie ; tontes les dames ont 
ou des atta(|ue.s de nerfs, ct inoi un succ^b fou. Si 
ce ne soiit pas Id. des obli,ij;ationM I 

RoNDON. AUons ! alluns ! tv. on raison ; niais il 
faudra lui pa^! r de notre pifece d'aujourd'hni, 
celle que je viens de lire, pour que d'avance elle 
rannonce dans les bais ei dans les .soci^t^s ; cela 
fait Lpuer des loges. 

SoKiBE, Le Gharlatanlsme, Sc. IV. 

1. de par le monde. Explain the construction. 

2. vaudevilles. Derive and define. 

3. un m^lodrame i Feydeau. Explain. 

4. aujourd'hui. Account for the presence of the 
apostrophe in this word. 

5. dernih'cnif.nt. When and why is the feminine of 
thii adjective used iu forming adverh^j ending in merit? 

IV. 

Translate into French : 

A former governor of a large city in Japan, 
after spending an evening at a friend's table with 
several con»panions, was unaV>le to find his cairiage, 
and determined to walk home. Losing his way, 
however, in the narrow, winding streets, he applied 
to a policuntan to direct ids erring footsteps. To 
his surprise the .solemn functionary could not .solve 
his perplexity. He was not acquainted, he saiti, 
with the location asked for. A ha])py expedient 
suggested itself to the inquiier : " Be good enough 
to direct me to the residence of the Governor of 
the city," said the Governor. " I don't know 
where that is either," responded the policeman. 
What ! not know where the Governor lives ? J 
shall report you to morrow. I am the Governor." 
" Well," was the caustic rejoinder, " how do you 
expect me to know where you live, if you don't 
know where you live yourself?" 



if: 



\ 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 1891. 
SECOND YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS. 



EMtmlner: W. 0. P. Bremneh, B.A. 



\ 



Tratiulatu : 

Mais h Chateaubriand, le premier, echut lo 
vaste du Dt^sert aiiK^ricain, de la forSt transatlanti- 
. que. 

Ce fut sa grande conquSte. Depiiis il a su pein- 
dre en maitre bien des cieux et des contrdes, la 
Cainpagne roinaine, le rivage attique, la valMe du 
Jourdain : il a pu etre plus parfait, plus correct 
de lignequ' il ne I'avait 4i6 d'abord, plus classique: 
nulle part il n'a egale ces premieres pages de de- 
scriptions, celles que nous retrouverons dans Atala, 
pour la grandeur, I'^tendue, la vivacitd originale 
des impression;, la majestd toute naturelle des 
tableaux. C'est qu' uu moment oh il les ecrivait il 
sentait ces grands objets dans leur entiere nou- 
veautt^ et avec cette Iraicheur avide de Ykme, qu 
on n'a qu' une fois. II semble que le fond d'une 
&me d'artiste soit avide d'un certain iddal in- 
connu, d'une certaine impression premiere: comme 
ces murailles pi-^parees pour la t'resque, elle boit 
aussit6t la premiere couleur, les premieres images, 
que la nature, ce grand peintre, y jette en courant. 

Sainte-Beuve. 

1. What writers before Chatcubriand have painted 
nature ? 

2. ne. Explain the use of each "ne" in the extract. 

3. Parse toiUe {naturelle), soit (avide). 



TrauHlato : 

(a) Au thd, lo capitaine chaniia do nouvoan Mihn 
Lyilia par hmh liistoire do vcudottf tt'dnHversnlc, 
encore plus hizarre <iuo la premioro, «t il achevn 
de rentnousiasmor pour la Corse en lui dt^crivant 
I'aspoct etrange, Hauvago ilu pays, lo caracitoro 
original de ses habitants, lour ho.spitalit(5 ot lours 
moeurs primitive.s. Enfin, il mit i\ hch piods un 
joli petit stylet, n)oin« rcnianpiable par Ha forme 
que par son origine^ Un fanieux bandit I'avait 
c^d<^ au Capitaine Ellis, garanti pour s'etre enfonct^ 
dans quatrcH corps humiuns. Miss Lydia lo passu 
dans sa ceinture. le niit sur sa table de nuit, et lo 
tira deux fois de son fourreau avant de s'eiidormir. 

(6) — "Pas d'argent entre nous lieutenant," dit 
Brandolaccio d'un ton r^solu. 

— " L'argent fait tout dans le nionde" dit (Jast- 
riconi ; "mn'i dans le niaquis on ne fait cas quo 
d'un coeur brave et d'un fusil qui ne rate pas." 

— " Je ne voudrais pas vous quitter" ropiit Orso, 
" sans vous laisser quelque souvenir. Voyons, quo 
puis-je te laisser Brando ?" 

Le bandit se gratta la t6te, ot, jetant sur le fusil 
d'Olrso un regard oblique : 

"Dame, mon lieutenant... sij'osais.. niais non, 
vous y tenez trop" 

— " Qu'est-ce que tu veux ?" 

— " Eien... la chose n'est rien... II faut encore 
la mani^re de s'en servir. Je pense toujours h ce 
coup double et d'une seule mam... Oh, cela ne se 
fait pas deux fois." 

— C'est ce fusil que tu veux?... Je te I'apportais; 
mais sers-t^en le moins que tu pourras." 

Ml^RIMEE. 

1. Give the Past Part., Ist sing, of Pres. and Pret. 
Def. Indic, and Pres. Subjun. of decrivant, mit, cede, 
s'endormir, voyons, tenez. 

2. le paaaa dansaa ceinture. Write sentences showing 
different uses of passer. 

3. le moins que tu pourras. Why Future ? 



TrariHlato : 

(a) Hurce8 outmfuitoM on riM;ut don nouvellus ilo 
Jmnpuis. 11 otait- instaild a Nico ot doniiait I'orco 
(Ustailti Nur son inMtallation. " Le l>oau payn, inun 
Daniul, et comtiio cotto tiver qui 08t \k nam iiich 
fen^tioM t'inHpirerait ! Moi, je n'en jouis gu^re ; 
jo ne RorH iainaiH. . . Im MarqniH cUctc tout lo 
jour. DialJo (rhomrae, va ! Quelquefoiu, entro 
doux |)hrase», jo love la t6te, je voIh une petite voile 
rouge h. rhurizoti, puix tout do Huito le iiez ^ur 
ihon papier. . . MadonioiMelle d'Hacqueville est 
toujours V)ien tnalade ; je rentcnds au-desMUs do 
nouB qui tousse, qui tousse. . . C'est Tennui de 
ce payH, tout le monde touHMC. 

(h) n faut dormir, 

Mais un moment aprus, j« reoomtnenee de plu8 
belle. 

— £t Rougot, Jacques, Kougdt de la fabrique . . 
Est-ce que tu t'en souviens ? 

Lti-desauM, nouveaux (Eclats de rire ec causerie.s h 
n'en plus iinir. 

Soudain un grand coup do poing dbranle la cloison 
de mon c6t^, du c6to do la ruelle. Consterna- 
tion g^nt^rale. 

— C'estCoucou- Blanc . . me dit Jacques tout bas 
dans I'oroille. 

— Coucou-Blanc. . . Qu'est-ce que cola ? 

— Chut . . pas si haut. . . Coucou-Blanc est iiotre 
voi.sine. ... Elle so plaint sans doute que nous 
remp^chons de dormir. 

— Dis done, Jacques, quel dr61e de nom ellc a 
notre voisine ! 

Daudet. 
Translate : 

I then placed the first stone, after which Albert 
laid one, tlien the children, according to their ages. 
All the Indies and gentlemen placed one ; and 
then every one came forward at once, each person 
carrying a stone and placing it on the cairn. Mr. 
and Mrs. Anderson were tnere ; Mackay played ; 
and whiskey was given to all. It took, I am 
sure, an hour building ; and whilst it was going 



on some merry reels were danced on a stone op- 
l)0site. All the old i)eople (even the gardener's 
wife from Corbie Hall, near Aberj^eldie,) danced ; 
many of the children, Mary Symons and Lizzie 
Stewart especially, danced so nicely ; the latter 
with her hair all hanging down, roor dear old 
" Monk," Sir Robert Gordon's faithful old dog, 
was sitting there amongst us all. At last, when 
the cairn, which is, I think, seven or eight feet 
high, was nearly completed, Albert climbed up to 
the top of it, and placed the last stone; after 
which thfee cheers were given. It was a gay, 
pretty, and touching sight ; and I felt almost in- 
clined to cry. The view was so beautiful over the 
dear hills ; the day so fine; the whole so gemiith- 
lick. May God bless this place, and allow us yet 
to see it and enjoy it many a long year. 

V. R. 



.11.' , 



; 



^nfHerstcttt of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : W. H. Fraser, B.A. 



) 



I. 

Translate : « 

(a) L'onde semblait me dire : " E^fere ! aux mauvais 

jours 
Dieu te rendr«i ton pain !" Dieu me le doit toojours ! 
C'dtait men l^lg4r\e, et I'oracle prcspere, 
A toutes ines douleurs, jetait ce mot : " e.gpi;re, 
Espare et chante, enfant, dont ]e berceau trembla, 
Plu.s de frayeur, Camilla et ta mfere sont Ik. 
Moi j'aurai pour tes chants de longs-^hos. . . . — " 

Chimbre ! 
Le tossoyeur m'a pris, et Camille et ma m^re. 
J'avais bien dcs amis ici-basquand j'y vins, 
Bluet dclos parmi les roses de Provins ; 
Du sommeil de la mort, dv. sommeil que j'envie, 
Presque tons maintenant dorment, et, dans la vie, 
Le chemin dont I'dpine insulte a mes lambeaux 
Comme une voie antique est bordd de torn beaux. 
Dans le pays des sourds j'ai promen^ ma lyre ; 
J'ai chante sans dchos, et, pris d'un noir d^lire, 
J'ai bris^ men luth, puis, de I'ivoire sacr«^ 
J'ai jet(^ les di^bris au vent .... et j'ai pleurfe. 

H^G^SIPPE MoREAtT. 

(ft) La vie des habitants, ou du moins ce qu'on en 
voit, a quelque chose de calme, de reposd de pla- 
cide. Vous devinez, a la lenteur aist^e do leurs 
mouvcments, que le ciel a fait pour eux des heures 



w 



de cent et quelques minuteH etde.s annt^os de six h 
sept cents jours. lis ont le droit, ces bienhenreux, 
de remettre incessamnient les affaires au lende- 
main, et la preuve, c'est qu'ils resteraient une 
heure i\ voir passer la diligence, si la diligence 
mettait uno heure h ))asser. En ^t4, le seuil des 
portes est peupl*^ de figures beates, arrondies par 
I'oisivet^ eclairdes a demi par des yeux presque 
dteints, comnie des lampes dont on a baiss^ la 
m^che afin de nidnagei" I'huile. En hiver, les 
m^mes figures s'appliquent aiix fenetres, dpatant 
centre la vitre un ncz honnete et bienviellant. Et 
le voyageur de I'inipt^riale, fouette de front et de 
c6t^ par une bise acariA,tre, en vie la douce odeur 
de renferm^, le suave parfum de poussifere patriar- 
cale qu'on respire assur^ment dans ces int(?rieurs-la. 

About. 
II. 

Translate into French : 

(a) A positive man is often disagreeable, but this 
negative man is still worse. He never rides on horse- 
back, and he never takes a walk ; he hardly moves. 
Sometimes one finds him In his study, sometimes in his 
garden, but never on the road. He no longer smokes ; 
he hardly speaks ; he has had no misfortunes, and he 
does not complain of his appetite. Sometimes he gets 
up in the morning, passes the greater part of the day 
in his study, and goes to bed at night without saying 
ten words. The vicar has spoken to me about him. 
He went to see him yesterday, and found him as usual 
in his study. He will not go again he says. He 
asked him if he ever took a walk. " No, never." You 
do not like society ? " No." Have you many friends ? 
" No, not one." " Not a friend. You are indeed un- 
fortunate." " Oh no ! quite happy. I have no friends, 
and I have only one enemy, and yet I am quite con- 
tented. I like solitude, especially this morning." After 
this polite remark the vicar left, saying to himself, 
" Never, never, will I visit that man again." 

(b) The princes of Europe have found out a manner 
of rewarding their subjects who have behaved well, by 
presenting them with about two yards of blue ribbon, 
which is worn about the shoulder. They who are 
honoured with this mark of distinction are called 
knights, and the king himself is always the head of the 



*SEiaa 






order. This is a very frugal method of recompensing 
the most important services ; and it is very fortunate 
for kings that their subjects are satisfied with such 
trifling rewards. Should a nobleman happen to lose 
his leg in a battle, the king presents him with two 
yards of ribbon, and he is paid for the loss of his limb. 
Should an embassador spend all his paternal fortune 
in supporting the honour of his country abroad, the 
king presents him with two yards of ribbon, which is 
to be considered as an equivalent to his estate. In 
short, while an European king has a yard or two of 
blue or tfveen ribbon left, he need be under no appre- 
hension of wanting statesmen, generals, and soldiers. 

Goldsmith. 






I 



la 



* 



&ni\^tvuit9 of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH YEARS, 
AND FOR PRIZE. 



FRENCH PPvOSE. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiners 



••{ 



J. Squaiu, B.A. 
W. H. Fraser, B.A. 



9 



Note. — Pass Candidates of tho Fourth Year, and Honor Candidates 
of the Second Year, who do not desire to compete for the 
prize, may omit section I. 



Translate into French 



I. 



Every r lan cannot be a poet ; but every man 
may give himself some trouble to cultivate that 
kindly and genial sensibility on which the writing 
and the appreciation of poetry depends. To live 
poetry, indeed, is always better than to write it; 
better for the individual, and better for society. 
Now a poetical life is just a life opposed to all 
sameness and selfishness ; eagerly seizing upon the 
good and beautiful from all quarters, as on its 
proper aliment. Let a young man, therefore, above 
all things, beware of shutting himself up within a 
narrow pale of sympathy, and of fostering unrea- 
sonable hatreds and prejudice against others. An 
honest hater is often a better fellow than a cool 
friend ; but it is better not to hate at all. A good 
man will, as much as possible, strive to be shaken 
out of himself, and learn to study the excellences 
of oersons and parties to whom he is naturally 
opposed. 

John Stuart Blackie. 



tl. 

Write a Composition in French on one only of the 
following topics : — 

(a) La premiere des vertus est le ddvouement k la 
patrie. 

(6) La France en 1789. 

(c) Stanley le grand explorateur. 

(d) Les grandes inventions du XIX* sifecle. 

(e) La litt^rature franchise au XVII* sifecle. 

(f) Von Moltke. 



■■ 



I 



I' 



(Anftoerofti? ot ftotrontd. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



GERMAN AUTHORS- 



., . f VV. H. vandeiiSmisskn, M.A. 

ExammevH:^^^ M. Nkedleh, B.A.. Ph.D. 



CaniliilateM for Honors in any subjoct may take any three of the 
first four parts of this Paper. Candidates for Honors in the 
Department of N'«tnral Soiences, and of Chemistry and 
Mineralogy, are allowed un option between Parts IV. and 
VI., and may take any two ni the first three parts. Other 
Candidates must take Parts I. to V. inclusive. All Candi- 
dates must take Part V. 



Translate 



I. 



2Bit ftngen unb foflcn »om ®rafen fo flcrit; 
Der ^ier in tern Sc(>loffc gc^aufet, 
VcL, wo it)r ben Snfcl bed feltQen ^errn, 
Den ^eute »erm^()(ten, befi^maufet. 
9{un ^atte ftd; jener tm ^eiltc^en ^rteg 
3u Si)ren flcftdtten buvcj) inonntgcn @ieg ; 
Unb aid er ju ^aufc »om SRSffelein picg, 
Da fanb er fein 8(i^l8ffele{n oben, 
Do4) Diener unb ^abe jerfloben. 

Da bt|l bu nun, ©rfifletn, ba bifi bu ju ^aud. 
Dad i)eimtf(^c ftnbcji bu fdfjUmmer ! 
3um genflcr ba jtc(>cn bfc aCinbc ^tnaud, 
Sie fommen bur(^ aUc bic 3«nmcr. 
SBad ware ju tt)un in ber ^crbftli^iett 5Wac^t? 
(So l)flb' id) bod) man(!(>e noc^ fd()Ummcr »oUbrad)t 
Der 2)Uni\cn ^at atlcd wo^l beffer gemac^jt ; 
Drum rafd) bci tcr monblic^en ^elle 
3n'd 58ctr, in bad @tro|), in'd ®efleUe ! 

Goethe, Hochzeitli'-d. 

1. Jener. Who ? 

2, Manniyen. Give the usual form. 



f: 



3, By whom are the last five lines Hpoken ? 

*4. Sketch the plot of this ballad. 

*5. Show by quotations or othorwise your knowletlgo 
of any other two of Goethe's ballads. 

* Honor CuiuUdatus will answer thusc (juuations in (ttirnmn, 

n. 

Translate : 

Kaiim wird in meii Armen mir ein Bruder 

Vom grimm'pfen Uebcl wundervoU und schnell 

Geheilt, kauni naht ein lang' erflehtes Sehift', 

Mich in den Port der Vaterwelt zu leiteii, 

So legt die taube Noth ein doppelt Laster 

Mit ehrner Hand mir auf : das heilige, 

Mir anvertraute, viel verehrte Bild 

Zu rauben und den Mann zu hintergehn, 

Dem ich mein Leben und mein Schicksal danke. 

O dasz in meinem Busen nicht zuletzt 

Ein Widerwillo keinie ! der Titanen, 

Der alten Gbtter tiefer H&sz auf euch, 

Olympier, nicht auch die zarte Brust 

Mit Geierklauen fasse ! Rettet inich, 

Und rettet euer Blld in meiner Seele ! 

Goethe, lj)higenie auf Tauris. 

1. Hintergehn. Accentuate and distinguish between 
hintergehn and hintergelien. 

2. Explain the connection of this passage with the 
plot. 

*3. Sketch the history of Iphigenia's ancestors. 
* Honor Candidates will answer this qnestion in German. 

*4. Quote in whole or in part the song of the Parciu. 
* For Honor Candidates only. 



Translate 



III. 



Wie einst mit flehendem Verlangen 
Pygmalion den Stein umschlosz, 
Bis in des Marmors kalte Wangen 
Empfindung gluhend sich ergosz, 
So schlang ich mich mit Liebesarmen 
Um die Natur, mit Jugendlust, 
Bis sie zu athnien, zu erwarmen 
Begann an meiner Dichterbrust. 



Und, theilend incino Flammontriebo, 
Die Stumnio eiue Spmche i'and, 
Mir wiedorgab den Kuhz der Liobo 
Und iiR'ineM HeizeriH Klang vurstand ; 
Da Icbto m\Y dor Baum, die Rose, 
Mir snug der Quellen Silberfall, 
Ks t'liiilto selbst das Seelenloso 
Von meines Lebens Wiederhall. 

Schiller, IJie Ideale. 

1. Pygmalion, die Stwnime. Explain. 
*2. Give an outline of tliis poem. 

♦3. Sketch in outline with quotations any two of 

Schiller's balliula. 

• These questions are to he anaweied in dorniiui Ity Honor 
Candidates. 

IV. 

Translate : 

Ihr Geist wirkt in einem auszerordentlichen 
Grade intuitiv, und alle Ihre denkenden Krafte 
scheinen auf die Imagination, als ihre gemein- 
scbaftliche Reprasentantin, gleichsani konipromit- 
tiert zu haben. Im Grund ist dies das Hbchste, 
was der Mensch aus sich machen kann, sobald es 
ihm gelingt, seine Anschauung zu generalisieren 
und seine Emptindung gesetzgebend zu machen. 
Darnach streben Sie, und in wie hohem Grade 
haben Sie es schon erriecht ! Mein Verstand wirkt 
eigentlich mehr symbolisierend, und so schwebe 
ich, als eine Zwitterart, zwischen dem Begrifl" und 
der Ar)schauung, zwischen der Regel und der 
Empfindung, zwischen dem technischen Kopf und 
dem Genie. 

SCHILLEU AN GOETHE. 

*1. Contrast the appreciation here shown of Goetlie 
with the first impressions of Schiller. 

*2. How does this passage show the diffoi-enco 
between the genius and methods of the two poets ? 

*3. Mention the chief works of Schiller and Goethe 
alluded to in this correspondence. 

* For Honor Candidates only. 

[OVKB. 



V. 

1. Contrast tho outward circumHtAticos of the Hvcm 
of Schiller and Ooctlu' rt'Hpectivoly. 

2. Oivc a brief account of one driuimtic work of 
each poet. 

:i. What were Schiller's historical works ? 

4. Sketch any one of Goethe's romances. 

VI. 

A Translate : 

Das Schwungrad «li«nit (ia/u, die Bewegung d«r 
Maschine gleichfb'rmig zu erhalten. Wonn auch dur 
Druck des Dampfos anf den Kolhen g«nz unvor- 
Underlich ware, so wiirde or doch nicht bei alien 
Stellungen der Kurbel gleichviel zu deren Unidre- 
hung beitragen kiJnnen. In der That kann man 
den Druck, welcher diirch die Treibstange auf die 
Kurbel wirkt, in zwei zu einander rechtwinkligo 
Krafte zerlegt denken ; die eine, in der Richtung 
der Kurbel solbst ala Druck auf die Axe wirkend, 
triigt nichts zur Unidrehung bei, welche ganz allein 
durch die nndore, tangential zur Kurbelbnhn 
wirkende Seitenkraft hervorgebracht wird. Die 
Grbsse dieser beiilen Krafte andert sich aber in 
jedem Momente. 

HoDOES, Scientific German. 

B. Translate into German three only of the following 
sentences : 

(1) The foundation of every branch of natural 
science is the simple observation of nature. {'!) 
We have to thank the rays of the sun for the 
heating (Erwarmung) of the earth's surface and of 
the atmosphere. (3) Since the volume of a body 
depends upon the degree of its heat, the expansion 
of a body can serve to measure its temperature. 
(4) Every man and evciy animal devours (verzehrt) 
in a yearaweight of bread, meat or other nutritive 
substance (Nahi-ungstoff) which many times sur- 
pas.ses the weight of his body. 



nnftif mUff of Sotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATTONS: 1801. 



SECOND EXAMINATION. 



GERMAN AUTHORS- 
HONORS. 



) 



Examiner 



(A. J. 
'*• to. H. 



Bell, 
Needle II, 



M.A., Ph.D. 
B.A., Ph.D. 



1. 



Translate : 

^m ! {)m ! — tvunbcrKd; ! — ffitc fjl 
iWiv tcnn ? — 20ag wiH tcr (SuUan ? wag ? — 3d) bin 
*<)luf ©fit flcfa^t, unb cr luiU — 2Cal)rt)eft. 5Cal)r()fit ! 
lint) ujfll fie fo, — fo bar, fo blanf, — ale ob 
Die SBabrbeit SDiilnjc ware ! — ^a, roenn notf> 
Uralte SWilnjc, tit flcwoc|cn marb ! — 
I)a« flinge nod; ! Slllein fo neue 9)Jilnjc, 
Die nur fccr 8teinpel mad)t, bic man anf<J SBrett 
9iur j«blen barf, bag ifl fie bocb nun nid^t ! 
SBic ®flb in ©ad, fo firid^c man in topf 
2luc(> SBabrbeit cin ? Ser ift benn biev bcr 3ube? 
3cb ober cr ? — Dod; wic ? 8oUt' er oud; nrobl 
Die SBabrbeit fobcrn ? — ^mt, 
3tt)ar ber SBerbacbt, ba^ er bie SBabrbcit nur 
2llg galle braud)e, war' auc^ (\ax ju flcin ! — 
3u flein ? — 2Sag ifi fiir einen (S)ro§en benn 
3u flein ? — @ewi§, gewi§ : er ftttrjle mit 
Der Xf)iiu fo ing ^aug ! SWan pod)t bo4), b«5rt 
Doc|> erjl, wenn man alg greunb fic^ nabt. — 3c^ muf 
53ef)utfam fle^n ! — Unb wie ? wic bag ? — ©o ganj 
©torfiube fein ju woUen, geljt fc^on nicbt. — 
Unb fianj unb gar nic^t 3ube, gcbt no^ minber. 
Denn, wenn fein 3wbc, bitrft' er m\6) nur fragen, 
SBarum fcin SWufelman ? — Dag wor'g! Dag fann 
SWtc^ retten ! — ««ic^t bie Minber blo^ fpeift man 
SWit 3»firc^cn ab, — (Sr fommt. (£r fommc nur ! 

Lessinq, Nathan der Weise. 



1. Allein 80 netie Milnze . . . .dock nun nicht ! Ex- 
plain Nathan'8 meaning. 

2. Muaelmavn. Give and account for the plural of 
this word. 

8, Sketch the plot of the play, showing the connec- 
tion of this scene v^ath it. Answer in German. 

4. Give an account of the dispute which led to the 
publication of this play. Answer in German. 

11. 

Translate : 

Aber durch welche Hand er auch mag gefallen 
sein, so musz uns dieses auszerordentliche Schicksal 
als eine That der gcoszen Natur erscheinen. Die 
Geschichte, so oft nur auf das freudenlose Geschiift 
eingeschrankt, das einformige Spiel der mensch- 
lichen Leidenschaft aus einander zu legen, sieht 
sich zuweilen durch Erscheinungen belohnt, die 
gleich einem kiihnen Griff aus den Wolken in das 
berechnete Uhrwerk der menschlichen Unterneh- 
mungen fallen und den nachdenkenden Geist auf 
eino hcihere Ordnuni; der Dinge verweisen. So 
ergreift uns Gustav AJolfs schnelle Verschwin- 
dung vom Schauplatz, die das ganze Spiel des 
politischen Uhrweiks mit einemmal hemmt und 
alle Berechnungen der menschlichen Klugheit 
vereitelt. Gostern noch der belebende Geist, der 
grosze und einzige Boweger seiner Schbpfung — 
heute in seinem Adlerfluge "nerbittlich dahinge- 
stUi'zt, hei'ausgerissen aus einer Welt von Ent- 
wurfen, von der reifenden Saat seiner HofFnungen 
ungestUm abgerufen, liiszt er seine verwaiste Partei 
trostlos hinter sich, und in Triimmern fallt der 
stolze Bau seiner vergiiuglichen Grosze. 

ScHiLLKii Geschichte des SOjdhriyen Kriega. 

1. mag gefallen nein. Write a note on the order of 
the words. 

2. durch icelche Hand. Give Schiller's account of 
the matter. Answer in German. 



\ 



(I 



m. 

A. Translate : 

Ich erzahlte ihtn meine Unterredung mit der 
Sangerin von Anfang bis zu Ende. Er verschlang 
meine Worte. Ich fuhr fort, ihm meine eigenen 
Ansichten von der Sache vorzutragen ; er stand 
Rede und Antwort, schiittete mir nicht geradezu 
sein Herz aus, aber verhehlte nichts, das ich richtig 
errieth, und das war die ganze Wahrheit. Das 
Wesen der Gaussin hatte ihn bezaubert, er war 
vollig in ihren Netzen verwickelt und hatte sich 
so darin verwirrt, dasz er keiner seiner Bewegun- 
gen mehr Herr war. Ich dachte an das Beispiel 
der Rose mit den Dornen. O, wenn es die Dornen 
allein gewesen waren ! Seine Einsamkeit im 
Gefiihl der Leidenschaft, der Zwang, weichen er 
sich anthat, die ununterbroohene Verletzung seines 
Herzens hatten ihn so empfindlicli geraacht, dasz 
er auf dem Punkte war, seinen Verstand zu ver- 
lieren. Als er beiiu Reden erhitzter wurde,sprach 
er seltsame Dinge, deren Inhalt ich oft nur erra- 
thrn konnte. 

Herman Grimm, Die Sangerin. 

1. an, in, auf. Give examples, showing the dift'er- 
ent cases governed by each of these prepositions. 

2. Explain the difference in meaning between ver- 
wickeln, einwickeln, entivickeln ; empfindlich and emp- 
findsam. 

3. meine Unterredung mit der Sangerin. What 
was the narrator's object in this Unterredung? Tell 
concisely what Mile, de Gaussin said on the same occa- 
sion regarding the relation between herself and the 
Marquis. Answer in German. 

4. Give an account of the fortunes of Emma and 
Albert from the time of their departure for Italy, as 
told in Das Kind, Answer in German. 



« 



IV. 



Translate 



(a) Wahrenddem steckte ich hinter den Damen und 
betrachtete mii* den Herrn genauer. Er hatte die 
schlanke, feingebaute Oestalt des alien Herrn ira 
braunen Hut und auch seine Stimme ; aber das war 
ja unmoglich d' 3sen Kopf. Ueber der jugendlich 
glatten Stirn lag ein Streifen dicker, aschblonder 
Haarwellen und Ringel, die allerding.s im 3chrag- 
einfallenden Licht einen intensiven Silberschein 
annuhmen. Auifallend orschienen unter diesem 
mattglanzenden Haar die . anklen Brauen. Fest 
und kuhn die blauen Augen uberwolbend, gaben 
sie dem blassen, vornehmen, wenn auch nicht 
gerade schbngebildeten Gesicht einen Zug von 
Kraft. — Ich sah, vie sich allmahlicti eine kleine 
Falte zwischen ihnen vertiefte — Uses VorUag 
miszfiel iLm offenbar, er hatte nicht die mindeste 
Lust, sich mit der Sache zu befnssen ; hi'^ ' nd da 
warfer einen Seitenblick auf den neben ihm lie- 
genden, auf'gesthlagenen Folianten ; man sah, es 
war ihm fatal, gestdrt worden zu sein, wenn er 
sich auch hofiicher Weise Miihe gab, eine autmerk- 
same Haltung zu zeigen. 

E. Marlitt, Das Ilaideprinzeszchen. 

(6) Wo ist denn nun mein Ehrgeiz hin ? 
Wo sind die flUchtigen Gedanken, 
Womit ich oftmals aus den Schranken 
Gemeines Gliicks geflogen bin ? 
Es reizt mich kein beriihirter Titel, 
Es rlihrt mich weder Hof noch Praeht, 
Ich finde, daucht mich, viel ira Kittel, 
Was kluge Seelen glucklich niacht. 

Dies, grosze Weisheit, dank' ich dir, 
Dies dank' ich dir, du sUsze Liebe ; 
Durch cure Lust, durch eure Triebe 
Erfind' ich selbst mein Gliick in mir. 
Bleibt Phyllis mir nur treu ergeben, 
So ficht mich wol kein Wunsch mehr an, 
Als dasz ich mit ihr ruhig leben 
(Jnd einmal freudig sterben kann. 

GuNTHER, Oedichte, 



(I 



I 



^i 






) 



^nit^ttniw of STorotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND yf:ar. 



GERMAN GIUMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 

PASS. 



Examiner: A. J. Beix, M.A., Pu.D 



I. 

1. Enumerate and illustrate by examples th(; various 
forms of declension of the substantive, giving a rule for 
the occurrence of the Umlaut. 

2. Give the gender of Macht, Staid, Gefiide, Berlin, 
Antivort, Messer, Abend, A ft f el, Sladttlior, and Gesell- 
schaft, giving a rule in each case. 

3. Describe the various uses of der, noting the varia- 
tions in its declension. 

4. Give the modal auxiliaries, and frame examples 
illustrating their leading uses. 

5. Enumerate the conjunctions proper, and show 
how they ditier from the remaining ela.sses of Co- 
ordinating (^onjunciions. 

II. 

Translate into German : 

1. Yesterday afternoon I sent vou the p'.ch; re. Mavo 
you not received it ? ■ Yes, the s ( > ant gp>o, ^t m '..hi.s 
morning. J shall not be able to return it beioie Mon- 
day next. In my opinion it is very tine ; do yon I.now 
where I can get a copy of it ? Yes, there are hl- voral 
copies of it for sale at a bookseller's on King street, 



I 



M 







5. An oM farmer was riding along the road, when 
h<; met tlir(H' mereliants. As he asked what o'clock it 
was, the first took out his watch and answered that it 
was just hali'-past one. To the second, who asked how 
far it was to the next village, the old man replied that 
they would read) it in about two hours and a half. 
He added that he himself intended to go there that 



same evening. 



3. I do not feel very well. What ails you ? I have 
just heard that my brother is ill, and I feel anxious 
about him. There are few people who can decide so 
important a question without consulting a friend. I 
am son-y that I did not explain the matter sooner. Of 
all the trees in Mr. Brown's garden there is but one 
that will bear fruit this year. 

4. The days are longest in June and shortest in De- 
cember. The longer the days the shorter the nights. 
We shall reach Vienna in a couple of days at most. I 
had rather stay in Munich t(j-night, for the sooner we 
return home the better. We heard Patti sing in 
Leipsic two weeks ago to-day. 

III. 

Translate into German : 

A young man who had paid great attention to 
his studies, and consequently had made rapid 
. progress, was taken by his father to dine with a 
company of literary men. After dinner, the con- 
versation turned naturally upon literature and 
the classics. The young man listened to it with 
great attention, but did not say anything. On 
their return home, his father asked him w^hy he 
had remained silent, when he had so good an 
opportunity of showing his knowledge. " I was 
afraid, my dear father," said he, " that if I began 
to talk of what I do know, I should be interro- 
gated upon what I do not know." " You are 
right, my dear boy," replied the father, " there is 
often more danger in speaking than in holding 
one's tongue." 



anfberisUtt of sroroiuo* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATJUNS; INOJ. 



SECOND YEAR. 



GERMAN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 

HONORS. 



Examiner ; A. .1. Bell, M.A., Ph.D. 



I 



I. 

1. Conipo.se cxainple.s in German to illustrate iAm 
meaning and use of the i-elative pronouns. 

2. Show how adjectiNcs and adverb.s aiv compared, 
}i[iving exa;aple.s of irreguUu' and defective coiiipurison. 

:-{. (!la !sif r' the pretlxe.s of <Jom]iotiiid Verijs. accord- 
ing as they ire separable or iiisepinalile, and indicatt- 
by examples the usage in the case <>t Double Prefixes. 

4. Give the leadinu' uses of the genitive, illustrating 
by examples. 

5. Enumei-ate the uses of the infinitive v\ ithout zu. 

II. 
Trranslate into German : 

1. He was of the opinion that we could not succeed, 
but that if \vc had followed his advice, all would have 
been well. However that may be, 1 should think you 
would do well to consult your friends. He sold his 
house that he might pay his debts. He will, I hope, 
be able to inform us, where our Iriends are spending 
their holidays. They will probably have retuined to 
the city by to-moi-row morning. 

2. They will not venture to come alone without hav- 
ing first asked the wa3\ We rely on obtaining a 
favourable an.swei from the njinister. They will be very 
much annoyed at our coming so late. On hearing this 
I insisted on his coming in at once. 1 insist on his 
telling us why he went home instead of coming here. 



3. Being a stranger, he will certainly lo.se his way. 
A man ]>aH,sing on the .street told me where you lived. 
Knowing that lie had nmch ex[)erience in .such matter.s, 
I asked hi.s advice. I cannot understand what you 
wore thinking of, wiien yoii hehaved with such indif- 
ference to your friend. He is afraid of death. 

* III. 

Translate into German : 

(a) The king found in Munich (mly a forsaken 
palace, for the elector's treasures had heen trans- 
ported to Werfen. The magnificence of the buil- 
aing astonished him, and he asked the guide, who 
showed the apartments, who was the architect. 
" No other," replied he, " than the elector him.self." 
" I wish," said the king. " I had this architect to 
.send to Stt)ckholm." " That," ho was answered, 
" the architect will take care to prevent." When 
the arsenal was examined, they found nothin.g but 
cairiages, stripped of their cannon. The latter 
had been so artfully concealed under the floor, 
that no traces of them remained, and but for the 
treachery of a workman, the deceit would not 
have been detected. " Rise up from the dead," 
.said the king, "and come to judgment." The floor 
was pulled up and one hundred and forty pieces 
of cannon discovered, some of ex/raordinary calibre, 
vvhi(^h had been principally taken in the Palatinate 
and Bohemia. A treasure of thirtv thousand jjold 
ducats, concealed in one of the largest, completed 
thi' pleasure which the king received from this 
valuable acquisition. 

(/>) There is a twofold value in the study of poetry. 
Fir.st. — There is the good moral effect which it 
has on the student, by strengthening his principles, 
sharpening his sense of the good and the beauti- 
ful, and refining his nature. Secondly. — There is 
the educational discipline, inasmuch as poetry 
exhibits language in its most perfect and subtle 
forms, and improves the understanding by exer- 
cise. Accoi'dingly, in a classical education, the 
poets are employed from the very first; being, 
indeed, the mediums through whom real famili- 
arity with the ancient languages is ultimately (if 
ever) attained. Not the less should a reader. 



i"! 



anxious to have a liboral general knowledge of 
our own literature, pay attention to its poetry ; 
which, for depth of .sentiment and feeling For 
nature, to say nothing of minor (lualities, is the 
richest and grandest body of poetry in the world. 

Jamls Hannay. 



I) 



5 






f' 



/ 






anmetKifttt of Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: 1891. 



SKOOND YEAU. 



ITALIAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: \Vm. Oldhioht, M.A., M.D, 



i 



i 



; 



1. Translate : 

Lo donne, i cavalier, Tarme, gli umori, 

Le cortesie, I'auclttci imprese io canto, 

Che t'uru al tiMiipo, che pttswaro i Movl 

D' Africa il mare, e in Francia nocqiier tanto ; 

Segiientlo I'ire, c i giovenil furori 

D'Agramiintcj lor re, cIjj si die' vanto 

Di vendicar la niorte di Trojano 

Sopra re Carlo, iinperatoi* Romano. 

Diro d'Orlando in un modesmo tratto 
Cosa non detta in pro.sa mai ne in rima ; 
Che j)cr amor venne in furore, e matto, 
D'uom, che ,sl sagj^io era stimato prima ; 
So da colei che ta! (jua.si m'ha fatto, 
Che '1 poco ingegno ad ora ad or mi lima, 
Me ne sar^ pero tanto conce.sso, 
Che mi ba.sti a tinir quanto ho promes.so. 

AuiosTo, Orlando Fnrioso, Canto I., St. 1, 2. 

2. Write notes on furo, pitasaro, die', giovenil. 

3. In what metre is the Orlando Furioso written ? 

4. Translate : 

Co.sl con volont^ de la donzella 
La dotta incantratrice il libro chiuse 
Tutti gli spirti allora ne la cella 
Spariro in fretta, ove eran Tossa chiuse 



^. 








V 



IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 









1.0 ^1^ 1^ 
itt m |j22 

M » X Kb 
u lift 

U£ |Z0 



I.I 



us 

lU 

u 






6" 






V 




y 




Rx)lographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 




iV 



^'^ 













;\ 



23 WIST MAIN STMH 

VVIBSTni,N.Y. 14SS0 

(716)«73-4S03 



'^ 






1 



V 



Qui Bradamantc, poi che la favella 
Le fu concessa usar, la bocca schiustj, 
E domando : Chi son li duo si tristi-, 
Che tra Ippolito e Alfonso abbiau'o visti ? 

Veniano sospirando, e gli onchi bassi 
Parean tenei-, d'ogni baldanza privi ; 
E girlontan da loro io vedea i passi 
Dei frati si, che no pareano schivi. 
Pai've ch' a tal doinanda '•' cangiassi 
La maga in viso, e fe' uogli occhi rivi ; 
E grido : Ah sfortunati, a quanta pena 
Lungo instigar d' uomini lei vi mena ! 

Ibid, Canto III., St. GO, 61. 

5. Write notes on de la donzella, ne la cella, l^pa- 
riro, Vo88a, poi che, li duo, vlsti. 

6. Rewrite the last of the above stanzas in modern 
Italian prose without making any unnecessary changes. 

7. Translate : 

Ott. (Va raccoyliendo du, terra tatte le minute 
cose che trova). Questo pezzo di carta sara buono 
per involgervi qualche cosa... Questo spago servira 
per legare un sacchetto. Ii? cjuesta casa tutto si 
lascia audai" a male : se non t'ossi io che abbadassi 
a tutto, povero me ! 

Tra. (Cavwiluando forte con una sporta in 
mano). 

Ott. Va piano, va piano, bestia, che tu non 
rompa le uova. 

Tra. Lasci, ch'io vada a fare il desinare, accioc- 
ch^ non si consumi il fuoco. 

Ott. Asinaccio ! chi t'ha insegnato ad accendere 
il fuoco cosi per tempo ? Io I'ho spento, ed ora Io 
tornerai ad accendere. 

Tra. Sia nmladetta I'avarizia ! 

Ott. ISi, si, avarizia ! se non avessi io un poco 
d' economia, non si mangerebbe come si fa. Vien 
qua, hai f atto buona spesa ? 

Tra. Ho girato tutta Bologna per aver le uova 
mezzo baiocco I'uno. 

GoLDONi, 11 Vero Amico, Att. 1., Sc. 7. 

8. da terra. Why is the article omitted? Give 
some similar sentences. 

9. involgervi. Translate : To place (metter) there 
twenty-one eggs. 



A 



h 



10. Translate . 

(DalV alto del proapetto, cava faori la testa 
dallii tappezzeria, e dice : Oh! vecchio maladetto! 
guarda quant'oro !) 

Ott. Queste doppie di Spagna son nial tagliate, 
ma soiio di peiiettissimo oro, e, quelle die 6 da 
stimarsi, sono tutte di peso. 

Tka. (Oh ! io le faro calare.) 

Ott. Queste le ho avute in iscambio di tanto 
argento colato, portatomi di nascosto da certi 
galantuomini che vivono alia campagna, per rispar- 
miare la pigione della easa. Oh ! h pur dura 
questa pigione ! Quando ho a pagar la pigione, 
mi vengono i sudori freddi. Quanto volentieri mi 
comprerei una casa ! Ma non ho cuore di speudere 
due milascudi. 

Tra. {Getta un piccolo saaso verao to acrigno, 
e ai naaconde.) 

Ott. Oimfe ! Che h questo ? Oim^ ! Casca il 
tetto, precipita la easa ! Caro 11 mio scrigno ! Ah ! 
voglia il cielo che tu non resti sepolto sotto le 
rovine ! 

TitA. (Maladettismimo ! Ha piti paura dello 
scrigno che della sua vita) {Starnuta, e ai naaconde.) 

Ott. Chi ^ \k ? Chi va \k ? Presto. Povero 
me ! Gente in camera ! sono assassinato. Ma qui 
non vi h nessuno ! La porta h serrata. Eh ! sono 
malinconie. Caro il mio oro. 

Tra. Lascia stare, lascia stare (contraffacendo 
la voce forte.) 

Ott. Chi parla ? Come ? Dove siete ? 

Tra. II diavolo. (Parte). 

Ibid, Att. III., Sc. 2. 

11. Parse the first line. 

12. Write notes on di peao.in lacambio, di nMSCoato, 
Caro il mio. 



t \ 



! I 



Mi 



f 



I 



Slnfiiet»ui? of s:otontQ. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR 



ITALIAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: Wm. Oldrtght, MA., M.D. 



1. Translate : 

Egli era cos\ alto, che, per entrai'e dal grande 
arco nella galleria Vittorio Emanuele, fu co- 
stretto a plegarsi ed a camminare colle manaccie 
puntate sui femori poderosi, e solo nell' ottagono 
potfe lasciare rincomoda positura ; ma nel rizzarsi, 
avendo preso male le misure, di& del testone nella 
cupola, e ruppe parecchie lastre di vetro, che gli 
caddero ai piedi con fracasso. Poco dopo si mosse 
ed usci, come era entrato, da un arco laterale. 
Per le vie camminava sp< dito, ed in pochi passi fu 
ai vecchi portoni di Porta Nuova che scavalcS 
senza arrestarsi ; quaudo giunse in piazza Cavour, 
seguito da una moltitudino a cui egli non badava, 
spinse uno sguardo enorme sopra i tetti della cittS, 
di Milano, poi si chino verso il gruppo di giovani 
acacie piantate dal Municipio per dar ombra alle 
generf.zioni future, ne prese una delicatamente, e 
se la infilo con gar bo nell' occhiello del farsetto. .. 

Faring , II Signor lo. 

2. Compare all adjectives and adverbs in the above 
extract, giving regular as well as irregular forms, and 
taking care not to change gender or number. 

3. grande arco, What are the peculiarities of 
grande? 



4. Point out all diminutives and augmentative 
affixes in this extract ; mention the woids which they 
modify, remaikino' on any chanf^e of gender that may 
have occurred. 

5. In the first eiglit lines resolve the compounds of 
prepositions and articles into their component words. 

6. Translate : 

Mi sen.bi'a ingegnoso il suo metodo di pigliare 
un lettorato oscuroe di metterlo con eni'asi accanto 
ai piii noti, per scntenziarc che vale pin di tutti 
quanti insicnie, sobhene non valgji gran che. Certo 
e ingegnosissinio qnoll' altro espediente di disscp- 
]iellire un morto jicr accopparc un vivo ; ma pii\ 
di tutto, mi rionipie di n^eniviglia la sicurezza con 
cui, dopo avermi circoiidato di rovine, egli per 
riposare il mio spirito soigottito, tenta di con- 
durlo con dolce violenza alia c(mtonii)lazione esta- 
tica deir idea del libro che scriverti un giorno. 

lbi<l 

7. Give the principal parts of all irregular verbs in 
the above extract. 

8. Giorno. 
eiffhifications. 



fjiornata. Compaie their uses and 



9. Condurlo. When does the pronoun follow the 
verb ? What orthographical changes may then take 
place ? 

10. Translate: 

Non pretendiamo qui spiegare (explain) la 
supremazia oggi riconosciuta del popolo d'lnghil- 
teiTa e di America, la quale forse niette le sue 
prime radici in certe qualita di razza, di I'linia, di 
tomperaniento, impossibili a valutarsi giustamente ; 
ma naturale che in un'eta come la presente, ove 
le nioltitudini sentono ardenteniente il bisogno 
(need) della liberta e uclla giustizia, primeggi 
(be lyve- eminent) quel popolo presso cui le passioni 
non soverchiano (overivhelni) la ragione, e I'opcro- 
sita (activity) h coniniaudata dal doveic e non 
stimolata dall' orgoglio (pride.) Chi oserebbe ora 
nepare che in questo renultamento non entri per 
niolta parte (juella certa combinazione di ricerca 
sperimentale e di ragionamento teorico, quel good 



sense che regna negl'intelletti Anglo-Sassoni, piii 
che presso ogni altra nazione dopo la riforma della 
filosofia e dopo la proclamazione del metodo speri- 
mentale ? 

Carlo Matteuci, Lezioni di Elett'HAyitd. 

11. Translate: 

Toronto, 16th May, 1891. 

My very dear friend, 

I called (pasaare) this morning at Mr. Thomp- 
son's and also at your house. I was sorry 
(rinrrescerai) at not finding you at home. When 
I passed through Paris I had the pleasure (piacdre) 
of seeing your wife (moglie) also your brother and 
his wife. I thought your brother looked (parere) 
older than he is ; he has all the appeaaance of a 
man of more than thirty years ; and yet it is so few 
years ago that we were boys (ragazzi) together. 
When I called upon him he was in the garden 
(giardino) by himself. " There he is walking up 
and down (passeggiare)," said your wife, and I 
went to meet (rincontrare) him. He did not 
remember (ricordare) me, although he knew I was 
somebody he had dnown at school. When I told 
him I was called (chiamare) Kent, " Oh yes," said 
he, " the Duke ; " the spontaneous (spontoneo) ad- 
dition of the old time jocular (di scherzo) cogno- 
men (cognome) made us both laugh. Your wife 
intended (avere intenzione) to leave Paris on the 
following Monday. I hope to be more fortunate 
on my return journey (viaggio) and to see you then. 

Meanwhile (Intanto) I am your sincere friend, 

John Kent. 
1 2. Translate : 

This year the examiner {esaminatore) has tried 
{cercare) to lessen {far meno) the difficulties (diffv- 
coltd) of the students of the second year by care- 
fully selecting (scegliere) words (parola) with 
wliich they have probably (prohabilmente) met, 
and by giving many Italian words. This he has 
done because they did not have Italian last year. 
The students of next (venturo) year must not take 
this for an example (escnipio). 



Uni^tvniw of SToconto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



JTALIAN. 

HONORS. 



Ej'um'mer: W, H. Fraser, B.A. 



1 . Give in tabular form the endings of : (a) the pres. 
fsubj., 1st conjugation ; (/>) the condl., 2nd conjugation ; 
(c) the iiapf. subj., 1st conjugation; {d) the past def., 
1st conjugation ; {e) the pres. subj., 2nd conjugation. 

2. Translate into Italian, giving in each instance 
your reason for the position of the conjunctive pro- 
noun object : 

(a) Introduce (2 pi.) her to them. 

(/>) Seeing us, they began to run. 

(c) Look (2 sing.) at him ; do not look ai him. 

{d) They have told it to us. 

(e) We have ^iven it to her. 

(/) Do not (3 sing.) break the pen ; do not break it. 

ig) Give (3 plus.) some of it to us. 

(/i) Say (2 sing.) it. 

(i) Here we are. 

(k) I can see thee. 

3. Turn the following into the plural : 

II hello scajfale. 11 bel quadro. Che hella pit- 
tiira ! L'amico. II vero amico. La grande 
cittd. Una ciliegia. Un [/ran medico. Buon 
uomo. II mio lapis. 



4. Write one cxiuiiplo lor oacli of tlio t'ollowin;^, 
showing its correct U80 in aMentence: L'anu e I'altro, 
niente, coloro, qiu'lla (pron.), ({ludef la qiudi, ciil, cofculu, 
8b,ci (prononi. udv.) 

3. Write examples to show how the hour of the (hiy 
is expressed (includir)g half hours, (|nartc'r hours and 
minutes, before and after the hour). Show also by 
examples how dates are expressed (including year, day 
of the month.) 

G. Translate the following, remarking on the con- 
struction of the italicised portions : 

(a) Quando il padrone comanda, »l lid da obbediie. 

(b) £ un mese ch'io son ospite in casa vostrn. 

(c) Avrh detto che ho d' andare per mm lettera che 

tratto di mio zio. 

(d) Non so dove io (ibhia la testa, 
(c) Ah lo volcsnc il cielo ! 

(/) Muto restava, mi cred'io, se quolla non gli 

rendea la voce e la t'avelia. 
(g) ah s'anco utesse a te di torre e darli, mi parebbe 

che '1 cambio convenisse. 
(Ji) Io vado a parlare col di lei padre, e poi saro 

da voi. 

7. Give the comparative and superlative of bene, 
piccolo, buono, male, bello. 

8. Show in tabular form the irregularities of avere, 
cadere, fare, condurre, piacere, soiogliere, stare, volere, 
valere. 

II. 
Translate into Italian : 

1. (a) He would have a prize if he were studious, 
but he is very idle. 

(b) 1 knew that gentleman in Paris when 1 was 
there with my father. 

(c) Have you forgotten where I live ( Yes, sir, 
because it is a very long time since I have had any 
news of you. 

(d) On what ship have they embarked ? On the 
" Columbus," 1 think. 

(e) If I told him so, he would not believe me. 



i 



2. (a) In olghtoc'ti Inindi'od and ninoty-two tliore 
will be a great exhibition at Chicago. 

(/>) He is a most trusty friend. He is my most 
trusty friend. 

(c) Give me those newspapers if you do not need 
them. 

{d) Here they are, I liuve finished reading them, 
and 1 am going to take a walk. 

(e) I am glad of that. Tliu weather is very Hnc 
and you will enjoy yourself. 

ti. (ii) Have tlie goodness to teU me what o'clock 
it is. 

(b) I am afraid my master will not go away to- 
morrow. 

(c) I have put out the fire, but I shall light it 
again (use tornare) at once. 

(il) How much would you have given him for his 
horse if ho luid wanted to sell it ^ 

(e) It is better to go home now. Let us go. 



*mr 



1 



eiinitiet0ftv of ITorouto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



SECOND AND THIRD YEARS. 



SPANISH. 

HONORS. 



Lxammcr: W. H. Fuaseu, li.A. 



Note.— CundiiluteB will not tnviitiliUe extruut (a) in section I., uul 
will UU8W01- ivU (iuutttiona on text. 

I. 

(a) La condesa. (<i la cloncella.) Llama en seguida & 
An.selmo, quo venga al momento. 

Victoi'^ina. Es imposiblo, sefiora, ya va niuy lojos. 

La Gond. No imj)orta v(^ A bu.scarle. 

Vict. Pero, seflora i cdmo voy & liacorlo ? Mire 
listed, ya vuelve. 

La Gond. i Solo quizas?...; QiK^miro! Viene 

con el otro. 
i Qut^ es lo (lue he hccho ! j Ah ! Ya estoy arrepen- 
10 tida. 

Oigo que suben. 

Vict, (aparte.) ^ Quit^n seri ?. La senora no 
estA satisfecha con nada. Continfia la tor- 
men ta ; me voy antes que empiecen los truenos. 

1. d Anselmo (\.2). Explain the construction, stating 
the general principles upon which its use depends. 

2. que venga (1. 2). Why subjunctive ? 

3. v4 a buscarle (1. 4;. What verbs require d before 
a following infinite ? Examples. 

4. hacerlo (1. 5). What is the antecedent of -lo ? 

5. mire uated (1. 5). Turn into the plural. 

6. lo que (1. 9). Parse. 

7. serdl (1. 12). Why future ? 



I u 



I 



8. La SeTiora no estd aatisfccha con nada (1. 12) 
Turn this expression into the affirmative. 

9. Show in tabular form tho irregularities of venga, 
oigo, eatd, satiafecha, enipiecen. 

Translate : 

(h) Ansehno. (I'l su ania.) Senora, he rovuelto toda 

la casa, y no he poclido encontrar mas que esto. 

(Saca de la funda el armazon de un parAguas 

viejo y muy grande y le abre.) 
5 La Vondesa. (al Desconocido.) Ya ^'^o V., cabal- 

lero, que no le falta m»s que la tela. Creimos 

quo haria buen tiempo y no hemos pensado en 

traer par^guas de Madrid. 
An8. Y odem&s, seril inlitil dentro de pocos 

minutos. La lluvia ha cesado, y cualquiera 

diria que el sol va ^ salir. 
La Gond. (corriendo hacia la ventana). i Sera 

posible ? Va a salir el sol. i Qut5 alegria ! 

Hara buen tiempo y vendran los amigos que 

es]>ero con tanta ansiedad. Ansel mo, sube al 

momento a la azotea y cada cinco minutos 

baja fi. decirme cu^l es el estado del cielo. 
Ans. (Pues, senor, vamos arriba a desenipeSar 

las fuueiones del baromotro que se hizo 

;)edazos esta mauana.) (Vase.) 

revueltu (1. 1). Write the present indie, in full. 

podido (1. 2). Write the preterit dof. in full. 

csto (1. 2). What is the antecedent ? Remark 
on the gender. 

4. saca (1. y). Give the 1 sing. pres. suDJ. and the 
1 sing, past def. 

5. creimos (1. 6). Give the 3 sing, past def. 

6. traer (1. 8). Write the past def. in full. 

7. diria (1. 11). Write the past def. in full. 



10 



15 



20 
1. 
2. 
3. 



8. hdcia (1. 12). 



Distinguish 



in meaning from 



para con. 



9. sube (1. 16), baja (1. 18). Turn into the negative. 
10. cada cinco tniniUos (1. 17). Explain this agree- 



ment. 



n 




Vargas ? 



Translate : 

(c) Desconocido. 

La Oondesa. Si, un bandido que ha sido el terror 
de este pais, y que me ha hecho pasar noehes 
terribles. S61o con nombrarle me echo & 
temblar como una azogada. 

Decon. (Voy 4 vengarme de ti.) En efecto, 
ahora recuerdo que ayer arrestaron a ese cdle- 
bre banido y que hoy le he visto en el camino 
de hierro. 

10 La cond. Gracias a Dios que nos vemos libres de 
ese hombre. 
Deacon. No tan libres como V. cree. 
La cond. \ C6mo ! Pues j que ha sucedido ? 

Descon. Hombre de una destreza y de una 
15 ■ t'uerza iucreibles, ha logrado romper los 
hierros que le aprisionaban; ha herido a cuatro 
guardias que le custodiaban, y ech6 & correr 
por esos campos sin que fuera posible darle 
alcance. 

1. Give the plural of terror, este, pais, me, te. 

2. me echo d temblar como una azogada (1. 4). What 
is the literal meaning of ecltar ? Explain azogada. 

3. recuerdo (1. 7). Distinguish recordar and acor- 
darse. Examples. 

4. camino de hierro (1. 8). Give a Spanish equivalent 
expression. 

5. Oracias d Dios (1. 10). Supply the ellipsis. 

6. Write in full the pres. indie, of hecho, the past 
def. of sido, the pres. subj of voy, the impf. indie, of 
visto, the pres. subj. of herido. 

II. 

Translate into Spanish : 

1. (a) Let there be some one at the door. Let no 
one come in (jpa^ar). 

(b) When the sun goes down among clouds it is a 

sign that the following day will be overcast 
or stormy. 

(c) What kind of weather is it going to be to- 

morrow ? It will be very hot I am sure. 



;M ! 



(d) He who makes .shoes is called a shoemaker ; 

he who mends them is called a cobbler. 

(e) The train has just arrived and will not go out 

again to-day. 

2. (a) Let us take a walk around the Puerta del Sol. 
Oh no ! Let us be off to Don Manul's. 

(6) The house in which we used to live was much 
larger than this one, and it opened on a large 
and beautiful garden. 

(c) Many Spaniards breakfast at seven or eight 
o'clock, lunch at half-past eleven or twelve, 
and dine between .six and seven in the evening. 

(d) If you were to help me to-day, I .should help 

you to-morrow. 

(e) We ought to learn something new every day. 



Wini\^tvnitp nt Cotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND AND THIRD YEARS. 



SPANISH. 

HONORS. 
Icaminer: W. H. Fraser, B.A. 



I. 

1. Explain the use of the accent-mark in the fol- 
lowing forms : qu^?, ese, lUil, Idatimayddmelo.sdjenih- 
onente, and explain why no accent-mark is needed in 
verdades, hablamos, comen. 

2. Give the fem. plur. of each of the following: 
cualquiera, peor, azul, and<duz, cortes, atroz, ingUs, 
nacional, traidw, menor. 

3. Translate into Spanish : 

(a) She seems wiser than she is. 

(b) He is more of a child than I thought. 

(c) The year eighteen hundred and ninety-one. 

(d) He has given me more than half his money. 

(e) A good boy. Good boy^j. 

4. Translate the following, using usted or its sub- 
stitutes : 

(a) I tell you ladies, we shall have fine weather 
to-morrow. 

(6) Do you remember the 10th of May. 

(o) I shall come to see you (pleonastic constr.) and 
tell you the news. 

(d) An acquaintance of yours told me so. 

(e) My friends and yours will arrive here this 
afternoon. 

5. Write one example for each of the following, 
illustrating its coiTect use in a sentence : lo qiie, ctiyaa, 
cudles, ajeno8, eso, tan, alld, para, por, sino. 



(^'^ 



G. When is the past participle variable ? Exam- 
ples. 

7. Make a table of the endings of, (a) the condi- 
tional, (h) the pjist def. 1st conjugation, (c) the pres. 
subj. 3rd conjugation, {d) the impf. subj. 2nd conjuga- 
tion, (e) the fut. subj. 3rd conjugation. • 

8. Translate the following, remarking upon the 
mood of italicized words : 

(a) Me admiro que no lo confiesea con franqueza. 

(6) Tampoco fue el 6nico que en su siglo emj^ren- 
diese guerras religiosas. 

(c) Yd quisiera que vinieaeia esta noche & tomar 
el t6 con nosotros. 

{d) Seria mejor que leyeaea despacio. 

(e) Si ^1 tuvieae dinero contante no pondria en 
venta su casa. 

(/) A no set yo el que lo pedi,no tendria inconve- 
niente. 

9. Give, (a) the various forms of the present stem, 
(6) of the preterite stem, (c) of the future stem of the 
following : tener, huir, pedir, aentir, penaar. 

10. Translate into Spanish, giving in each case your 
reason for the position of the personal pronoun object : 
(a) I am go. ng to look for them. 
(6) Let us go (irae). Let us not go. 

(c) He leads them (f.) to them (/.). 

(d) Having told you (2 sing.) so. 

(e) Have the goodness to hand (entregar) me it. 

IL 

Translate into Spanish : 

1. (a) The customs of Morocco are very different to 
those of Europe. 

(b) I saw one hundred soldiers drawn up in the 
public square. 

(c) The royal palace is larger than any of the 
houses in the city. 

(d) Last night occurred a most shocking attempt 
against the king's life. 

(e) They are in that room writing exercises ; their 
exercises to-day are more difficult than those of yester- 
day. 



2. (a) If the children were to behave well at school, 
they would have a present. 

(h) I need a pen, ink, and paper. Now I have 
what I want, and shall begin to write. 

(c) What have you to do this afternoon ? I have 
a great deal to do. 

{d) Where is the house in which you used to 
live ? It is in the second street to the right. 

(e) How old is your little brother ? He is about 
ten years old. 



I 'I 



Uni\^tvnU9 of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 

PASS. 



A'^^.,, • ( 'J- M. HiRSCHFELDEH. 



1. Translate Exotl. ii. .^ 12: 

2. J^2l (v- 5)- Give the root. What is it a contraction 

of 1 Translate : my daughter, their 

daughters. 
Parse H^'til^ST v. 5, nisbn V. 5, -iS^i-! V. 12, flfl- 

V. 12. 
ynib ^'- ^- Tn what does this verb differ from the 

verb Q^5 to wash ? 

3. Translate Ruth ii. 11 : 

piijl tj?as5T Ti-i^aj ""^WfiT :|ffi"»fi« m'?a •'nn^ ijiniari 
• DtJbia bi?3Fi piJT'-Kb i^rs^ ns-bfe^ ■'DbriT ?i?\nbia 

I. :--iT - •|M-I.. -* 



ilril 



4. ^3n *»5n , Parse, and explain tliiH construction. 

'n*!^^. a. Give the constr. ding., and absol. plural. 

Translate : hia father, your fathem. 
h. Give the other nounH which form the 
cnnstr. sing, like this noun. 

VTi^T ?|73&5T' Poi"* out the tonesy liable in these 

words. Give your reason. 

5. TranslHte 1 Kings v. 9, 10 : 

- I : , .. 1 - I • TIT • ti 1 •• • - 

n«Dn?3 rijabra n^aDn i-i?^t = Q^n neip-b? -nriii bins 

SI, 

G. Qn ^^ Decline the Ist noun in the singular, and 

the 2nd in the plural. 
Parse ^"ifn, and inflect the uncontracted form. 

7. Translate 2 Kings xviii. 19, 20 : 

n?35^-n3 in-iDTn b^ u^r'n^s^ npwni snb» -i^a^ti 

•t;"' • Tl-T ^ - T- 

8. "l^{i^ii Give other verbs yjg which form the future 

''■'• 

like this verb. What was the dato of 

this speech, and the historical situation ? 
Wliat were the Rabshakeh's chief argu- 
ment 1 

9. Translate Isa. ii. 8, 9 : 

7*1- -I I- : • T T ••^-11-: • • vi I - .. T • - 

= tjnb 

V T 

10. Parse :nnfir|^\ nffi'V.' fc^feS?' T^fn^aS^- Explain 
the formation of the last named word, 

11. Translate Psalm viii. 3, 5 : 



> 



t. » 



12. TJ-'pp 






Give the root of the second noun. Trans- 

Iftte his month, my strength. 
In what does it differ in ita use from ^i^ ! 



■:^ 



1 1 



nnintr^ftff of Coronta. 



ANNUM. EXAMINATIONH : 1801. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 



Examiners 



•I 



J. M. HllUSCHFELDEH. 
J. F. McCURDY. 



HEBREW SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 

1. What is the true theory of the origin and syntac- 
tical history of the relative l^j^ ? Illustrate this I'roni 
tlie present uses of the word. How may the relative 
idea be expressed otherwise than by employinfj; Ifljj^ ? 

2. Translate into Hebrew : 

When a young man gets married it is his cus- 
tom to invite his friends to a feast. Any one who 
is not there at such a time after being invited is 
not considered (SDn) a- friend. 

3. What various ideas may be expressed by apposi- 
tion in Hebrew ? 

4. Translate into Hebrew : 

It is a great plague upon [any] land when hail 
or heavy rain falls upon the .standing crops. Such 
a plague was sent upon the land of Egypt in the 
old days, and all the pecj^le of that land, and the 
sons and daughters of the king himself, rose up 
and said to him . " Intercede for us, that this evil 
be removed from us." 

5. Give proofs from any constructions known to 
you that the adjective in Hebrew was properly an 
ab.stract noim In what way.s may our superlative 
degree be expressed in Hebrew ? 



T.l 



, 



6. Translate: 

It waH HMi\ that all tho (bpntaHon ( = the sent), 
from tho ohleHt of thoin t.) the vi.unR.-st of them, 
were eloquent men ; hut it becan.e known from 
their sneaking that ten of thoin wore in truth 
mere clmttererH (men of lips). 

7. Give a summary of the various usch of the Perfect 
tense in Hebrew. 



k 



!:1 




Mitftiernitto of {Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : I8»l. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 



(ARAMAIC.) 



n, . f J. M. HlRStJHFKLDKK. 



I. 

WBST ARAMAIC. 

1. Translate : 

Va «»'^B»? «''?affln ^rpia v")"''^? V^\ "'"' "i^»*''* 

y\TO, ''3'a'abi v^^fi^* V^^^ ^'^''1 ^^^"'^* V^"* ^'?^'! 
»nn3»b K-^TattT »5'p-ia ■j'^ninab pn'^V* : •^■'ptfi iiTji 

»mn5 n-iT Attain iDbtti^b i^an »"nn5 n*' ^^aian 

-••I f" T~;;" 

Onkelos, Gen. i. 14-16. 

2. Parse the words marked *. (Jouipare them with the 
corresponding forms in Hebrew, explaining phonetic changes 
in the consonants when it is necessary. 



' 



3. Translate : 

J i*bb^?a mib Dn»n nini ■».^nn »n7?ti3 '•n'ispwa 
. tti-i^b atj yn V'??'^ "•Hi"*''!? ^b?»'? '\b"'»'i 

Onkelos, Gev i'i. 6-9. 

4. Is the construction of the verbs in v, 6 the exact 
equivalent of the Hebrew 1 Explain the use of the last 
word in v. 7 as representing the original term. 

5. Parse "imSDfi^ (^- ^) *"^ explain the origin of the 
suflix as compared with the corresponding Hebrew. Ac- 
count for the form ^JiJa (v. 9). Cite a similar form of 
like oiigin. 

6. Mention the chief vowel and consonantal changes 
exemplified in words of the same origin as they api>ear in 
Hebrew and Aramaic. 

II. 

EAST ARAMAIC. 

1. Translate : 

V V 

'"wak'ra 'Alaha I'yabblsta 'ara wal'kensa d'maya k ca 

yam'me wah'za 'Alalia d'sapplr. "Wg'mar 'Alaha tapp'^k(y) 
'ara tad'a esba d'niezd'ra' zara I'genseh. Gen. i. 10, 11. 

2. Parse 'appek(y) (v. 11). Is there any justification for 
the final y in the i)resent text? Parse mez I'ra' (v. 11), and 
explain the form. Inflect the '''^rfects k'rd (v. 10), and 
'ema/r (v. 11). 

3. Turn the above passage into Targumic and Hebrew. 

4. Translate : 

V V 

p'raw was'gaw wam'law 'ara w'kubsiih wi»s 'latw b'nunay 
yamraa wab'parah'ta das'maya. (Gen. i. 28.) 

5. Inflect the imperatives in the above passage. 

6. What are the principle differeuces between East and 
West Aramaic in the noun and verb forms and their 
inflections 1 



I 



' 



samnerjoiUtf ot STotonto* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 



(TEXTS ANi) GRAMMAR.) 

r J. M. KlRSCHFKLDER. 



Examiners : 



\ J. F. MCCUHDY. 



1. Translate : 

•^ns^ton cnbi^ n^a&^^n y^T^^\>^ ntrJab s^^p-^i n3?"iB nbttf^i 

T I - -I I- T T \ I r - I 

Tyn-ns8 •'tifi^^s nB?a rbst -i^as^iT : nTs^b i^stifi KbT 
js^b nnnm pb^n;" imbpn mn*' bs< •'ss n» tSiSi* 

Exodus ix. 27-29. 

2 Write in order with the vowels the words above left 
unpointed. Parse the words marked * ; and give the con- 
struction of each in the present connection. 

3. Translate : 

tib'iT trb "Tnam -"Di^n^-n^ -aii ■•rii^npb mn-* nipi- 

If •• - lAT • : - • • • .. ; - - - I 1 ,JT . 

nssti rifi^ vbK i^a^iT nrbn b» n-nb» n]?^V : •'Stp 
mn"" Dto^V : nnTJaz b-^sT is bi?»T ^jtidi^' rinaT;ari 

... T- --T , - - ^ .,-, II.- 

: nann hdt pbn b» iri -i?a»^-! tiyba -"sa nm 
: nfi^-?a ■'itD bDi »in itib^-b:? nsLD nam Tbi^'ntfin" 

Numb, xxiii. 3-6. 



i' 



,« 



4. Kxplaiii the cliangeH produced in Hiiy forniR iii the 
abovt^ KXti'Hct through tlie influence uf ttie ]>ause, and also 
through the employment of Waw Consecutive. DiHtinguish 
btitweon tlie use of ^^TlH (^* *^) *"** 323 (^- ^)' Inflect 
the Imperfect ami Imperative of "tjt. 

T), Tranxlate : 

^brV : c-s^n nnx3 TiT'm "•rT'bm inin »b lo'si 
nam s^b iffls trnb cnn'' n:?n» DTiwbs 1310 nb 

A "I - 

vb» -i?355!m -nna nb a^"-" aii^m* : Dna nmoxm 

: iria 5ii3 »bT td'k -in-i-ira m53n-b''nB 
•• ■ -1 1- » I - I 

Jud. xvi. 7-9. 

6. Explain the use of tlie tenses in v. 9. Parse "irT'inS 
and express the same sense, putting the verb in a finite con- 
struction. Inflect the Perf. and Imperf. of nbn- Decline 
the nouns of Class I. occurring in the above verses. 

7. Translate : 

;iTbS3D iri» inan»a n-i-ia nim ■^^^^^■' riiDM 
T\1b in3n"'T vby "i«*k r':>7^r\ n» '\r\r\rv^ l:ras£ni«V 
bDa Tn &5S^,y J nian ^jt -iPttfi^ i^t iann i5'\ r^?a^ 

: biKO nas? ■'3"«5a d:i- crn-bD •«3-'r a at3""T n?anb7an 

"I - T T . . - 

Sam. xviii. 3-J>. 

8. Parsp itnani^a (^- ^)- Mention other verbs which 
adopt a similar form in the like constructions. Give the 
derivation of the proper names occuring in these veities. 






V 



-.111-.'- 



„ 






mnihtvuits of STototito. 



„ 



■!' 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 



UTERATURE AND ANTIQUITIES. 
Examiners : < j* 



M. HiRSCHFELDER. 
F. McCUKDY. 



1. What systems of writing were prevalent among 
the ancient Semites ? Give a brief sketch of the 
history of each, as far as it can be made out 

2. Give a classification of the Aramaic dialects. 
What was the character of the inflence exerted by the 
Aramaeans in history and also in literature ? How 
did Aramaic come to supplant Hebrew as a spoken 
language ? 

3. Through what principal changes has the Hebrew 
text of the Old Testament passed ? 

4. Name the divisions of the Hebrew Bible, the 
books included in each, and the principles followed in 
the classification. 

5. What were the oldest forms of literary composi- 
tion among the Hebrews ? Cite specimens. What insti- 
tutions preceded and conditioned historical composition, 
properly so called? 

6. What is the chief motive of the Book of Kings ? 
Trace the general connection between History and 
Prophecy in the Old Testament. How were both 
determined by the relations of Judah and Israel to 
other nations ? 

7. What were the principal stations of the Israelites 
between Goshen and Sinai ? What countries and 
rivers were traversed by them between Mount Hor and 
their most northerly march east of the Jordan ? What 
were some of the literary results of each of these jour- 
neys? 



/ 



dtnlhemitv of Toronto. 



HT. MICKAKLS (.'OI.LKi}!-;. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: IBOI. 



^?. 



SECOND YEAH. 



LOGIC. 



Emminer: Rev. P. S. Dowdall, D.D. 



1. Logic is the science of the laws of thought. 
Logic is the art and science of reasoning. 
Logic is the art of thinking. 

Criticize these three Definitions. 

2. Wiiat have you to remark about the Principles 
of Ide?u,ity being enunciated by the proposition A is A ? 

3. Is the Principle of Causality equally well stated 
by: 

(a) Every event has a cause ; 

(6) Every effect has a cause ; 

(c) Nothing exists without a sufficient reason ? 

4. Formulate the laws governing a sound logical 
Division. 

o. Taking the Proposition: Oysters are nutritious, 
illustrate by modifications of it, Contrary, Contradic- 
tory, Subaltern, and Sub-contrary opposition. 

7. Show that to reach a valid conclusion, the mid- 
dle term must be distributed at least once in the pre- 
mises. 

8. Of what form and quantity is the conclusion 
drawn from premises, one of which is affirmative, and 
the other negative, according as both premises are 
universal, particular, or singular Propositions ? 

9. How is the Figure of a Syllogism determined ? 
Give an example of each figure. 



ir. 



lO. What laws imist l>u ol)sorvo<l to guarant«!o tho 
validity of a DiMJunctivo Ilypotbotical Syllogism ( 

Jl. Sight, hearing, smell, touch atul taste are somu« 
times for um an occasion of error. 

Examine in what this Syllogism is anomalous, 
the regular Deductive Syllogism being the standard. 
On what principle has it a logical value ? 

12. Give oxauiples of the fallacios of Compo.sition, 
Division, and Begging the Question. 



*■'• I "^ 



I 



*■•■ 1 "^ 



cnnfUtrttftt? of (ETotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



REOOND YEAR. 



ff^\ 



LOGIC 

PASS. 



if 



mi 



Examiner: Thos. H. Mitchkll, B.A. 



1. What is the relation of Induction to Deduction ? 
Distinguish the three acts of mind called Simple Appre- 
hension, Judgment, and Reasoning. 

2. What do you understand by the Laws of Univer- 
sal Causation, and of the Uniformity of Nature ? As 
to the origin of the belief in these Laws, what differ 
ent views are held by two rival .schools of psycl .ilo- 
gists ? 

3. Estimate the relative values of Observation ari/» 
Experiment for purposes of inductive research. 

4. Does the following theory satisfy the conditions 
of a genuinely scientific hypothesis : 

" Falling bodies are dragged to the earth by the 
action of invisible spirits." 

5. Give a brief exposition of the method of agree- 
ment, indicating its imperfections and its chief value. 

6. What do you mean by the distribution of a term ? 
Assuming the falsity of the respective propositions 
A, E, I, 0, what may you affirm in each case as to 
the truth, falsity, or doubtfulness of the remaining 
three ? 

7. Define Inference and Conversion. Indicate four 
processes by which conversion may be brought about, 
and g'' c an example to illustrate each method. 



*•', 



y 



&¥x 



o^ly Negative conclue^ions. .^ 

The world ^^d a begmnm ^^^^^ ^^^.^^ ,^ ^^ 
have had a cause, loi eveiy 
must have a cause. 



/ 



m^ 



rr 



g"-' 



•« ' 



t' ■ 



,-t' 



l\ 



umiitxuiw of tovonU* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



LOGIC. 

HONORS. 



"i ' 



f ■ 



Examiner : J. McD. Dtjncan, B.A. 



1. (a) Give Mill's definition of Logic, and state his 
objections against definitions with wliich he contrasts 
his own. 

(6) What objects are served by Classification and 
Division ? 

2. (a) Classify connotativo and non-connotative 
names. 

(b) Explain the connotation of privative and of 
relative names. 

3. (a) Discuss fully the import of propositions. 

(6) Should a doctrine of the categories precede or 
follow a doctrine of the import of propositions ? 

4. Examine Mill's view as to the universal type of 
reasoning. 

5. Can the theories of predication held by Mill and 
Hamilton respectiv 'y, be traced to a common source ? 

6. Reduce the rules of the syllogism to the smallest 
possible number. 

7. State and examine the various definitions given 
by Mill of Induction. 

8. t^hat ground is there for believing that what is 
truQ in certain actually observe! cases, must be true in 
other cases tis it have not been actually observed ? 
Iii^other words, what is the ground of induction ? 

9. Illustrate by examples the four methods of indue* 
Ivc inquiry. 



uni\^tvm» of STovotuo. 

ST. MICHAELS COLLKtiK. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 180L 



SECOND YEAlt. 



LOGIC. 

HONORS. 
Examiner : Rev. P. S. Dowdall, D.D. 



1. Enunciate the principles or primary laws of 
Logic. Which of these is prior to the rest ? ISliow 
how in Logic a negative principle may be prior w a 
positive principle. 

2. What are the conditions necessary for the validity 
of the principle of contradiction ? 

3. State briefly the aristotelian doctrine of uni- 
versals. 

4. Point out clearly what is meant by heads of 
predicables and categories ; and what relation exists 
between them. 

5. Distinguish real definition and logical division. 

6. " Judgments are also divided into judgments a 
prion or analytical, and judgments a poderiori or 
synthetical." Examine. 

7. Has the proposal to quantify the predicate of 
all propositions any logical basis ? 

8. State the laws of the conversion of propositions. 

9. What are the two principles on which the syllo- 
gism is based ? Show bv reference to formulated 
syllogisms that in the various moods summed up in 
the mnemonic for any one of the figures, these principles 
govern. 



.4 



10. («) All Just men are religious: 

Some men are not religious ; 
Some men are not just. 

(b) Every charitable person is loved ; 
Some charitable persons are well-oH" ; 
Some well-off' people are loved. 

(c) All ingrates are selfish ; 

Some politicians are not selfish ; 
Some politicians are not ingrates. 

Reduce (a) and (6) to the first figure ; and prove 
(c) by reduction per impossibile, 

11. UXi(iZ,A hB; 
But (a) X is Z; 

(b) X is not Z ; 

{c) A is B ; 

{d) A is not B. 

What conclusions may be drawn according as 
(a), (b), (c) or (d) is stated ? 

12. Put into syllogistic form and point out anomalies 
and fallacies, if any, in the following : 

(a) Some statesmen are tyrants ; for, like the 
hitter, they are not frieftds of liberty. 

(b) There aie in the Athletic Club only four 
officers, each of whom has taken the pledge. There- 
fore al! the officers of the Club are temperate. 

(c) Jt has been observed on several occasions 
that a fall of the barometer is invariably followed by 
rain ; and that a fall of rain is invariably preceded by 
a fall of the barometer, consequently when the baro- 
meter falls, and only when it falls, we shall soon have 
rain. 



•< 



8itiftiev»fttf of Coronto. 



ST. MICHAKF/S COLLKilK. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: IWM. 



HKOOND YKAH. 



PSYCHOLOGY 



Kxam'mer: Rev. P. S. Dowdai.l, D.D. 



1. Examine tl>e relations of contrast, similarity and 
mutual intev-dependence between Psychology «»nd 
Logic. 

2. " The hypothesis of faculties has led to the false 
supposition that mentnl activity instead of bein;; one 
and the same throughout its manifold phases, is a 
juxta-position of totally distinct activities answering 
to a bundle of detriched powers." — (Sully). Criticize. 

3. " My present knowledge of an extended material 
universe independent of my mind is inexplicable unless 
at least in some of my percipient acts there is contained 
an immediate apprehension of extension." — Maheh. 

(a) What are your groundu for believing in the 
existence of an extra-mental material world ? 

Q)) Investigate the ultimate hypothesis necessi- 
tated by the denial of this inexplicahuity, 

(c) Examine what percipient faculties give us a 
direct immediate presentation of HUjterficial extennion 
and distance. 

4. Enunciate the chief ])rinciples conditioning the 
reproduction of phenomena in the mind, and examine 
them comparatively under the aspects of far-roaehing- 
ness and fundamentality. 



"». Point «)Ui till) prominent featurcH of contrnst 
(ti) ]{(>tw-cM>n ci'oationN of tlio itna^^inatiun and 
ohjt'cts of tlie iimtcrial world. 

(/>) Ik'twcon plmiitasms and concepts. 

0. " Iiiti'lli'ct Wfiy lio dt'fineil broadly as the facultj^ 
of thou^dit. Under tli()U<,dit we includo attention, 
jmlgnu-nt, icflcxion, Mulf-con.siou.sne.ss, the formation of 
concepts, jiutl till! proccHH of reasoning. These modes 
of activity all oxliihit a distinctly supra-sensuous ele- 
ment."- Majiku. Prove this last statement. 

7. Di'scrilic the limits within whica you accept the 
doctrine of the ndativity of knowledge ; and within 
these liiiiits deti'iinino tlio comparative perfection of 
the sensuous arul supra-sensuous cognitioJis of primary 
and secondary (jualities of matter, 

8. Demarcate hellof from knowledge. 

0. Invest iyatd the natuii! of pleasure, an 1 the con- 
tlitions (Ictciinining its intensity, duration and (pialita- 
tive variation. 



&in(liet0ftii» of «:otonto« 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR 



PSYCHOLOGY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner : J. McD. Duncan, B.A. 



*, 'Candidates will enclose their answers to I. and II. respectively 
in different envelopes, and write on each envelope the name of 
the examiner. 

I. 

1. Examine carefully the principal objections urged 
against the opinion that consciousness is the only 
method by which we can become directly acquainted 
with the phenomena of mind. 

2. Classify and define the functions of mind. 

3. Analyse the perception of an external object. 

4. (a) Discuss the relation each to the others of the 
laws of association as ordinarily classified. 

(6) How is the suppression of certain links in a 
chain of association accounted for ? 

5. Explain the general character and grounds of 
of illusion. 

6. Define analj'tic and synthetic judgments. What 
warrant is required by each of these classes of judg- 
ment ? 

II. 

Examiner : F. Tracy, B.A. 

1. Carefully define emotion, distinguishing it from 
sensation on the one hand, and from thought on the 
other, 



2. Classify emotions according to their objective 
reference, or according to their exciting cause. 

3. Describe the emotion of Fear, Anger, the Ludic- 
rious, the Sublime, with special reference to their phy- 
siological expression. 

4. Discuss Mr. Darwin's position that most of the 
expressions of the emotions are hereditary, being the 
result of " servicable associated habits," formed in the 
course of ancestral experience. 



IJ^ 




n 



Wttitifrfius of Coroiito. 

ST. MICHAEL'S COLLKCSK. 
ANKUALExlMi^ATI0NH:lS91. 
SECOKD YEAB. 

PSYCHOLOGY. 

HONOKS. 



• ,.. Pirv P S. DOWDALL, D.D. 
Eicaminer: KEv. r. c. *^ 

"•Its" •;'=-"*-'-■• 

cial Joms of mental activity . _^ _ .^ 

. ,p«e8 sw"!-*' ""^ ;j ^^^, immediately make 
.„ot.frrth:Srr^^Hyotl.e,.tl,a«o,.- 

^'T.— e{heai^e^;n...n..n.^^^^^^ 
+n +he Aristotelian Poctrine. ^ 

ty means of « ^J^^J.^a Helf-«on«cion»ne«s. 
,0 Dhcuss the theory of v;!"'"^*"."""'- 



f ;. 



m 



11. How would you show the existence of the " In- 
tellectu8 agens t " 

12. By what intellectual process do I affirm as neces- 
sary the " Principle of Causality ? '* 

13. What is your opinion of the school which holds 
that conscience is a special original aptitude of the 
mind capable of feeling the moralquality of actions ? 



1/ 



^1 



Qitii)ift0lt|^ of Coronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATION'.: IWl. 



SECOND YEAR. 



MENTAL PHILOSOPHY. 

HONORS. 



EoMminer : J. McD. Duncan, B.A. 



1. " Ideae aliae innatae, aliae adventitae, aliae a me 
ipso factae niihi videntnr." (Some ideas appear to me 
innate, others to have come from without, and still 
others to have been formed by myself.) — Descartks. 

(a) Enumerate all possible views as to the depen- 
dence of human knowledge upon experience and mental 
function respectively. 

(6) Determine which of these views was held by 
Locke, and state clearly the truth and eiror of his 
position. 

2. Give Locke's account of the idea of solidity. Is 
his account of this idea consistant with his definition 
of primary quu'.cies ? 

3. Perception, as it is the first faculty of the mind 
exercised aoout our ideas, so it is the first aud simplest 
idea we have from reflection. 

Locke, Essay. 

(a) Point out the confusions involved in this 
account of perception. 

(h) Explain how Locke came to represent the 
mind as passive in the reception of its original ideas 
(a) of sensation ; (6) of reflection. 

4. Is a science of nature compatible with the accep- 
tance of Locke's doctrine of essence ? 



5. What law8, according to Hume, does tne imatfiiia- 
tiou geiiwally follow in brinjj^inff up successive ideiM ? 
Criticise Hume's classification oF these laws. 

<). (a) Trace the derivation of Humo's theory of 
" general ideas" from Locke through Berkeley. 

(6) J)oe8 Hume, in treating of " general ideas," 
make any assumptions inconsistent with his general 
philosophical position ? 

7. Examine the ground of Hume's rejection ot in- 
finite divisibility. 

8. State and criticise Huwe's Theory of Belief. 



f 



mnltierisfti? of 5totouto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE. 

CANADIAN CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner 



'' ■• { A. 



M. McEvoY, B.A. 
T. Thompson, B.A. 



N.B. — Candidates are requested not to attempt more than eight 
questions. 

1. Outline the Government of Canada under the 
rule of French Trading Companies. 

2. Describe the system of Government established in 
Canada in 16G3. Note any important changes in its 
structure during the next hundred years. 

3. What rights were guaranteed to the French 
Canadians at the capitulation of Quebec and of Mont- 
real, and by the Treaty of Paris ;' What addititmal 
rights are they entitled to at the hands of Canadians 
of British extraction ? 

4. What was the policy of the Quebec Act ? 

5. What changes in the Constitutions of the Canadas 
were recommended by Lord Durham ? Was his policy 
justifiable 1 

6. Outline the struggle fur " Responsible Govern- 
ment" in Upper Canada between 1791-1840. 

7. Distinguish between " Responsible Government," 
as understood and administered by Sydenham and 
Metcalfe on the one hand, and Lord Elgin on the other. 



8. Out of what did the question of " Clergy Re- 
serves" arise, and in what manner was it settled ? 

y. What do you understand by " Cabinet Gove n- 
ment V 

10, Describe the functions of either Townsliip Coun- 
cils or County Councils in Ontario. 

IJ. Describe the state of political affairs at the time 
it entered Confederation of p.ither British Columbia or 
New Brunswick. 

12. Compare very briefly the relations between the 
Provinces and the Dominion as established by the 
B. N. A. Act, with those between the States and the 
Uxiion as established by the American Constitution. 



2An(lier0(t!? ot STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAiMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 

POLITICAL SCIENCE. 

HONORS. 



Examine 



-{ 



J. M. McEvoY, B.A. 
A. T. Thompson, B.A. 



N.B. — Candidfttes are requested not to attempt more than eight 

questions. 

POLITICAL KCONOMY. 

1. Examine the assumption made by some Econo- 
mists, that all persons will act in such a manner as 
will .secure their own best interests. 

2. What are the relative advantages and disadvan- 
tages of the division of labor ? 

3. Co-opei"ation in production has not been so suc- 
cesful as co-operation in distribution. How would you 
account for this ? 

4. Define value. How is the value of connnodities 
determined ? 

6, " The fundamental cause of rent is ditierence in 
fertility. — Symes. Criticize. 

6. What do you understand by " average rate of 
profit?" 

7. State the theoretic arguments, if any, in favour 
of protection and the practical disadvantages, if any, 
in its application. 

8. What are the objects of trades unions ? How 
far are they suited to the attainment of these objects ^ 

S). State the various circumstances which explain 
and justify the payment of interest. 



10 What would be tliu rosult if the goveiimient 
were to issue bills to every fanner to the extent of 
$500 on the security of his real estate ? 

11 Illustrate the correct and incorrect use of the 
phrase " a violation of the laws of Political Economy." 



eiiKlirteitp of (Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE. 

HONORS. 



„ . f A. T. Thompson, B. A. 

^«'«^'"^''«"|j.M.McEvoY. B.A. 



Note. — Not more than seven questions must be attempted, of' which 
the liixl muni he ow. 

ENGLISH (CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY. 

1. " The Englisli yystetii was .stroiifj in its sub- 
structure, weak in its super-.structure: the Normal) 
system .strong in its .super-stfiietme, weak in its .siili- 
structure. The Norman conquest phiceil the strong- 
Norman super-structure on the strong Englisii sub- 
structure." Explain. 

2. Criticise Kemble's " Canons " concerning the 
powers of the Witan. 

3. Under what circumstances did Taxation, in its 
modem sense, begin in Enghuid, and, prior to this, how 
were the burdens of government borne ? 

4. How did William I. modify Continental Feudal- 
ism for the purpose of strengthening the central power ? 

5. Trace the growth of Parliamentary Representa- 
tion during the lath and 14th centuries. 

6. " It is not probable that so despotic a govern- 
ment as that of the Tudors could have been established 
at any other period in English history." Explain and 
criticize. 



7. What important Acts were pnssed by the Long 
Parliament, and how did they affect the constitution. 

8. How was the constitutional pnwer of the Privy 
Council wcakonctl dinin'^ tlie Tudor and Stuarts 
jieriods, and what was Sir William Temple's scheme 
iur restt)rin<^ it to its lormer importance? 

9. What was the nature of the Reform Bill of 1832 ? 
What have Ix^en its eHects on the Government of Eng- 
land ? 

10. Translate and comment upon the following pas> 
sages : 

(a) " NuUi sint in civitato vel burgo vel castello 
vel extra. . . . qui vetent vicecomites iutrare in terram 
suam vel socam suam ad capiendum illos qui rettati 
fuerint .... quod sint robatores." 

(h) " Sciatis nos .... concessisse Deo .... quod 
Anglicana ecclesia libera sit." 

(c) " Communia placita non sequantur curiara 
nostram scd teneantur in aliqiio loco cirto." 

((/) " Praemimientes priorem et t-apitulum ecclosiae 
vestnie, archidiaconos, totunjque clerum vt-strae diocesis, 
facientes quod iidem prior et archidiaconi in propriis 
personis suis, et dictum capitulum per unum, ideuique 
clerus per duos procuratores idoneos. . . .una vobiscum 
intersint." 

Comment upon the following passage : 

(c) "Levying money for or to the use of the Crown, 
by pretence of prerogative, without grant of parliament, 
for longer time or in other manner than the same is or 
shall be granted, is illegal." 



sittfUeriUff of Votonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATI0N8: 1801. 



SECOND lEAll 



NATURAL SCIENCES. 

PHYSICS. 

HONORS. 



Examiners 



:{t 



A C. McKay, B.A. 
E. Mahtin, B.A. 



1. Define /orce. Wlmt is a t/yne f 

A moBH of lOgrainnies is moving with a velocity of 
100 cm. pur second. What constant force acting on it for 10 
seconds will reduce the mtiss to rest t 

2. Define energy. State the principle of the conservation 
of energy. 

Show that the kinetic energy of a mass m moving with 
velocity v, is \ in v^- 

3. Shew how to meusuie the pressure at a point in a heavy 
liquid. 

Find the pressure in dynes per square centimetre at a 
point one metre below the surface of water. 

4. State the law connecting the pressure and volume of a 
gas under constant temperature. 

Modify the statement of the law so as to include varia- 
tions of temperature. 

5. Describe and give the theory of any common form pf 
SftUweter, 



0. CInHHify the miceHtivo otInctH prnducod by tiie oontinu- 
ouii iipplictitioa of hunt to ti pit^uu of vury uuld ioti. 

The coorticient of liiimi- ()X|)anHiou of glam being 
.0000085, Hiid'tlie cootHcinnt of cultiual uxpnimion, 

7. Dofiiio tempf.ratnre, nhnofutc tnniierntnre. DcHcribo 
th« iiiflttiod of gi'uduutiiig ii ceiitigrado tliurinoniotor. 

Show how to niiiku a therinoinotot* that will i-ogiHtor 
the highoHt tunipemture iittaiiKnl dining u given period. 

8. Define latunt heat. 

One kilcgmninie of Hteaui at 100''C. ig pnHged into 10 
kilograminoH of water at 20°C., giving a tenii)ei'ature of 
7G°C. Deduce the latent heat of vapoii/ation. 

9. Describe carefully any common form of voltaic cell. 
Statu and detine the units of electromotive /orce, reaittance, 
and current, 

10. State the lawH of currents induced by currents. 
Explain the couHtruution of the induction coil. 

1 1 . DoHci-ibe the ordinary apparatus used for telegraphing, 
or that for telephoning. 

NoTK. — CatiiUdutut will writu on only eight queitions. 



snnfbrt0ftjD of roronto« 



j%] 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL i=tr:TRNCE. 

INORGANIC CHRMISTRY. 



Examiners 



( W. H. Pike, M.A., Ph. D. 

\ T. Proctok Hall, M.A., Ph. D. 



1. DescriVie the preparation and properties of the 
element nitrogen. It is required to fill a ga.. 'lolder 
with iiitrogen at a pressure of 743""° and IQTC, calcu- 
late the weights o*' the materials necessary for each 
cubic metre ot gas. 

In what way could nitrogen be shewn to be 
present in nitre acid ? 

2. Write equations representing 

(a) the solution of silver in nitric acid 
(1) dilute, (2) concentrated ; 

(6) precipitation of the silver by hydrochloric 
acid. 

(c) reiniction of the precipitate by zinc. Calcu- 
late the volume of hydrogen chloride (at 0° and 760°) 
required for each gram of the silver-salt in solution (6). 

3. To account for errors in determinations of the 
atomic weight of Tellurium the presence of an un- 
known element of the same group, with higher atomic 
weight, has been suggested. What pnjperties, physical 
and chemical, would you expect such an element to 
have ? 

4. State the evidence for Avogadro's law. Kow are 
exceptions explained ? Deduce the rule. " 22.327 liters 
of any gas at 0"C, and 760'""' weighs its molecular 
weight in grams." Calculate the molecular weight of 
a gas whose density (air = 1) is 2.08. 



5. What relation has been found between atomicity 
or valence and atomic weight ? 

Write constitutional formulae of the principal 
compounds of sulphur so as to show the atomicity of 
this element. 

6. A sample of bromine is believed to contain some 
chlorine. Describe how you would ascertain whether 
this i.s, or is not the case. 

ah. Write a brief description of the method of de- 
tecting manganese in qualitative analysis. Write 
equations for each of the reactions which occur in the 
detection, assuming that the manganese was present as 
permanganate of potassium. 

7. Write a short account of the chemistry of man- 
ganese and its compounds. 



6 antl 6A are alternative queations. 
for HA. 



Greater credit will be given 



> 



^nlbtvuitp of ^Toironto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1391. 



SECOND YEAR. 



BOTANY. 



Examiner : J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



1. Give an account of the reproduction of the horse 
tails (Equesetaceae). 

2. What i.s meant by Saprophytic and Parasitic 
plants ? Describe briefly their physiological peculiari- 
ties, and give examples of both groups. 

3. Give a full account of the structure and functions 
of sieve tissue, and of its occurrence in the plants. 

4. Give an account of the structure and formation 
of cork tissue. What are its chief functions ? 

5. Describe fully pallisade tissue. Where does it 
occur ? What are its functions, and what condition.s 
govern its formation ? 

6. Proterandrous, Protogynous, Trimorphic, Dimor- 
phic : explain these terms. In connection with what 
special character of flowering plants are they used ? 



SAtiftierfliUff of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ZOOLOGY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



1. Describe fully the structure of the heart, and give 
the circulation of the blood in the cray-fish. 

2. Describe fully the structure of the brain of the 
froff. and jrive an account of the course and distribu- 
tion o<" the cranial nerves. 

.3. (iive an account of the jjarasitic forms of Prota- 
/oa, shewing this relationship to tlie nun-parasitic 
forms. 

4. Describe fully the structure, reproduction, and 
life history of Echinorhynchus gigas. 

'). Outline the classification of the Amphibia, and 
mention some of the connnoner Canadian fornis. 

G. Give a deso'iption of the reproduction and v^xcre- 
tory organs of the common earthworm. 



W^nibtvuitv ot ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS; 1801. 



SECOND YE All. 



KUMKNTAUY MINKKaLOGY. 

HONORS. 



Kxamlmr: V. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. Arrange tlie followinf,' tnineral.s in (jctonuinativo 
groups : 

Graphite, Stibnitc, iMispickcI, Copper Glance, 
Fluorspar, Burytiiie, iMolybdciiite, Spocular lion, An- 
tliracite. Garnet, Corundum, Ai'UL;()nite. 

State the composition of each. 

2. What plionomena may be observed when a mineral 
is subjected to the fusion test ( 

What happens vvlien Gypsum, Sphalerite, Preh- 
nite, Malacliite, Celcstine, and Schorl are so treated ( 

3. State the uses to which {a) Oxide of Copper, 
('>) Potassium Iodide, (c) Potassium ('y.-mide, and ((/) 
Carbonate of Soda, ai(! put in Itlowpipe aiudysis. 

What reaction takes j)lapc in the formation of 
colored glasses with Boiax and Phosphor Salt on 
platinum wire ? 

4. Give the blowpipe cliaracters of (d) Pyromor- 
phite, {h) Dark Ecd Silver Ore, (c) Chromite, ((/) Cinni- 
bar, (e) Pyrolusite. 

5. Define the following terms as applied to minerals : 
Dichroism, Refraction, Aspect, Isomorphism. Give two 
examples of each. 

C. Describe the class of Oxides, and name six com- 
mon examples, with the composition and mode of 
occurrence of each. 



\ 



7. TTnilor wlmt, cironinHiancoH docs color lu'coini' o 
value in (letcinninin;,' tins eoiiipoHition of ii nuiuiml i 
H. What is tho couipositioti of Tanadiaii Apatite ? 

What forms aro exhibited by its crystalw ? 

Whore does it occur ? 




IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




1.0 



1.1 



11.25 



Li|2j8 



■ 20 

U 11.6 






- 6" 






^/v^' 

^ 




/^ 






Photograiiiic 

Sciences 
Corporalion 



2? WEST MAIN STREET 

WfBSTtt,N.Y. t4SM 

(716) •72-4503 





\ 








f<^^ 



\\ 




1* 








6^ 



<t. 



t 



^ 



\ 




> 



•; t 

^ 



) 



sinibfteUtf of {Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



NATURAL SCIENCE. 

PHYSIOLOGY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



1. Describe fully the structure af the human eye. 

2. Give an account of the changes which the blood 
undergoes in passing through the tissues of the body. 

3. Describe fully the processes of digestion in the 
small intestine. 

4. What is meant by reflex action ? 

Describe experiments illustrating your answer. 

5. Give an account of the various forms of muscle 
fibre found in the animal body. 



1 



1 



^ni\itvuit9 oC ^Totoitto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR 



PALAEONTOLOGY-INVERTEBRATA. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. Define the term "fossil" as used in geology. 
Point out the different ways in which organic bodies 
may be fossilized and preserved. 

What causes the imperfections in the geological 
record ? 

2. State the zoological oi botanical relation of the 
following genera, and their range in geological time : 
Favosites, Zaphrentis, Calamites, Sigillaria, Orthis, 
Nummulites, Paradoxides, Chonetes, Cephalaspis, Pro- 
ductus, Trinucleus, Petraia, Asaphus, Ostrea. 

3. Of what strata are the following genera charac- 
teristic : 

Serpula, Murchisonia, Columnaria, Halysites, 
Michelinea, Aulopora, Orthoceras, Balanus, Calymene, 
Petraster. 

4. Under what groups are trilobites arranged ? Des- 
scribe each group, and give the name of a typical genus 
in each, with its geological position. 

5. Describe a typical brachiopod. 

Sta*-e the geological range of representatives of 
the class. 

Name any living genera. 

6. Into what orders \ir,\y the cephalopoda be ar- 
ranged? Give the distinctive characters of each, the 
leading fossil forms at)d their range. 



.'\ 



/ \ 



amiiet^Utt ot Soronto. 



A 



ANNUAL p]XAMINATIONS : 1891. 

NATURAL SCIENCES. 
THIRD YEAR. 



/ S 



CRYPTOGAMIC BOTANY. 



Examiner: J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



1. Describe fully the structure and methods of re- 
production in the Siphoneae. 

2. Describe minutely the reproduction of the Brown 
Sea "Weeds. 

3. Give n complete account of the structure and 
development of the thallus of Chnra. 

4. Describe fully the structure and methods of re- 
production of Penecillium.* . 

5. Give a full description of- the histology of 
Equisetum. 



p. 



\ 



h 



• 11 



I ! 



I) 



J^,... 



A 



K. 



i) 



2lnlMrr«(t|? of 9^otonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



ELEMENTS OF CYRSTALLOGRAPHY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. Define the following terms as used in crystallo- 
graphy: 

Cry.sta], holohedral form, pyramid, dome, basal 
plane, ditnovphism, brachydome, primary form. 

2. To wliat agencies do crystals owe their origin ? 
Which have yon seen in operation ? 

3. Law of Constancy of Interfacial Angles : 
State, and give examples of this law. 

4. State the Law of Synnnctry. 

What difi'erent forms may result when modifica- 
tions take place in crystals in accordance with it ? 

.5. Describe the holohedral forms of the rhombic 
system, and sh<j\v by diagrsun the [)osition of the various 
geometrical elements of the crystals of this system. 

Name six minerals belonging to this sy.stem. 

6. Name the more common ii'regularities met with 
in crystals. 

7. Name the forms present in the following com- 
binations : 

(a) Rhombic Dodecahedron with its four-planed 
angles truncated ; 

(b) Cube with angles re|jlaced by three four-sided 
planes ; 

(c) Pyramidal Cube with its cube edges truncated; 

(d) Tetragonal Pyramid with all its edges trun- 
cated ; 

(e) Hexagonal Pyramid with basal edges bevelled ; 
(/) Rhombohedron with polar edges truncated. 



i 



\ 



f) 



anidemftff of rotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAM1NAT10N.S: 1801. 



SECOND ^EAR. 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND MINER- 

ALOQY. 

PHYSICS. 

HONORS. 



Examiners 



jA C. 
• 1 1. E 



McKay, B.A. 
Martin, B.A. 



1. Define /orce. What is a(/y/«e ? 

A inusB of 10 grammes i« moving with a velocity of 
100 cm. jwr second. What constant force acting on it for 10 
secouda will reduce the mass to rest 1 

2. Define energy. State the principle of the contervation 
of energy. 

Show that the kinetic energy of a nia»s in moving with 
velocity v, is J m r^- 

3. Shew how to measure the pressure at a point in a heavy 
liquid. 

Find the preusure in dynes per square centimetre at a 
point one metre below the surface of water. 

4. State the law connecting the pressure and volume of a 
gas under constant temperature. 

Modify the statement of the law so as to include varia- 
tions of tempeineture. 

5. Describe and give the theory of any com«aou form of 
Si^Umeter. 



NER- 



G. Olawify tbu suceiisivp eftootB produced by the oontina* 
oua rtppliciition of heiit to h |»'i«oe of very ot)ld ice. 

Thfi coofficieut of linear oxpan'sion of glawi being 
.0000085, find the eoetllciont of culiical expiiiiHion. 

7. DoHne temperature, ahnnlutc temperature. DeMoribe 
tlie method of graduating a contigrttde tlierinonieter. 

Show how to inak'ii a thormoineter that will regiHter 
the highest temperature Attained dming a given period. 

8. Dettne lute.nt heat. 

One kilcgrainmo of steam at lOO'C. Ih passed into 10 
kilogrammes of water at 20"'C., giving a temperature of 
TCO. Deduce t'le latent heat of vaporization. 



ocity of 
; for 10 



rvalion 
[\g with 

i heavy 
bre at a 
me of a 



',\ 



a vana- 



form of 






'T 



i Ml 



ill 



sntifUftsitj? of SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



GEOLOGY AND PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. What are the objects of geolopiical research, and 
by what means does it procedfd ? 

2. Briefly outline the various changes wrought upon 
rocks througli tlie agency of air and of water. 

3. Describe the following vai'ieties of rocks, and 
state the composition of eacli : 

Jasper, dolomite, gneiss, syenite, porphyry, chlor- 
ite, serpentine. 

4. Of what strata are fossil remains of the follow- 
ing especially characteristic : 

Reptiles, Cycads, Tnlobites, Scorpions, Ferns, 
Graptolites, Ganoid Fishes, Marsupials, Insects? 

5. Wi-itea short description of the typical Palaeozoic 
locks, having especial reference tc their lithologicai 
character, and the principal fossils contained in them. 

6. Enumerate, and briefly describe, with diagrams, 
.six genei-a of plants oecurriiig in the Carboniferous 
Formation. Give their botanical relations, and living 
representatives. 

7. " During the Palaeozoic and Mesozoic ages, and 
the earlier epochs of the Cacnozoic age, the entire sur- 
face of the globe appears to have possessed a warm and 
comparatively uniform temperature, resembling that 
which now prevails in inter- tropical, regions As 



m 



time passed on, a great climatic change appears to have 
crept slowly over all the northern portions of both the 

eastern and western continents Under its influence, 

the once warm climate gradually gave place to all the 

ri<*ours of an Arctic winter"— Chapman's Minerals 

and Geology of Ontario and Quebec, pp. 206 and 207. 

Upon what evidence do the above statements 

rest ? , « t V i.- 

What reasons have been assigned for the climatic 

change above referred to ? 

8. Constant and Variable Winds : 

Name the more notable examples of each of these 
classes, with their causes, and location. 



,As 



n 



f 



irr' 



i I 



t 



2Aiiflier»itp of Coronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: IN'.H. 



SECOND YEAR. 



OHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY. 

(JALOinJiS. 

HONORS. 

„ . ( John McGowan, B.A. 

Exarmners : | ^^^^^^^^ ,p DeLuky, B.A. 



1 . Explain what is meant by u function of a quantity. 
What does the differential coefficient of a function of 

a variable quantity represent? 

2. Prove the following : 

rfa;» =s ?ta5"~^ d.c, duv = udv + odu, 

dx 

d tan X = sec'^a: dx, d log x = 



X 



3. Differentiate : 



X 



log z—=^i ^t («"''+.'«^) tan 



— 1 



X" 



j;e *="* ', sin ^inx. 

4. Asisuniing that./' (a; 4- y) can beexpanded in a.scending 
powers of y, prove 

/{x +y) = /(a;) + y./-' (a;) + ^-^ f (x) -f &c. 

Expand log (1+a;), cos x, sin — ^a;. 

5. Find the greatest right cylinder that can be cut from 
a right cone whose height is ft, and the i-adius of whose base 
is a. 

6. Find the equation of the tangent and normal to the 
curve y s= f (x) . 

Find them for the curve d^x = y (x — a)^ at the point 
as = y = 2a. 

7. Obtain the ordinary expression for the radius of curva- 
ture of the curve y =/(x) at the point (», y) . 

Find the radius of <urvature of the curve xy = m^ at 
at the point whose abscissa is a . 



\Y. 



B.A. 



quantity, 
function of 



J. 



8. Prove 
'/{x)dx=^/{a)ilx+/{a + dx)dx+ .... -\-/{b^dx)dx. 

Find the values of /cot xdx, J'xeMx. 

9, Find the area of the part of tlie circle x^ + ?/'^ = ""'' 
between the limits as = « and a; = 6 . 

Find also the volume generated by its revolution 
round the axis of x, and the surface of the zone so generated, 
the limits in each case bein'g the same as before. 

10. Find the centre of gravity of the area enclosed by the 
carve y^ =» nix and the line ;*; = n . 

Find also the centre of gravity of volume generated 
by the revolution of the same curve around the axis of x, 
the limits being the same. 



S aiwn'mx. 
ascending 



B cut from 
vhose base 

ual to the 
b the point 

i of curva- 



f = in^ at. 



n' 



I 'M I 






CAmUftttfttf of SToirotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND YEAR. 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND 
MINERALOGY. 

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 

FIRST PAPER. 



„ . ( W. H. Pike, M.A., Ph.D. 

I'Mnmievs: | r,, Pkoctou Hall. M.A., Ph.D, 




1. The element Iodine is said to dissociate at high 
temperatures, the cxperimentnl density approaching 
that required by a molecule containing a single atom. 
From the following figures obtained by Victor Meyer 
at 1500°C. in an estimation of the density of iodine gas 
by his process, calculate the apparent molecular weight 
and the percentage of the molecules I, which have 
undergone dissociation. 

0.0704 gram, iodine displaced 10.74cc. air measured 
at 720""" and 13.8°0. 

Give a short description of the apparatus used. 

2. Explain the reasons which led chemists to assume 
that the atomic weight of tellurium was less than 128, 
before any review of its atomic weight had been made. 



3. The molecule of ozone is thought to be O,. On 
what fact is this conclusion based ? 



4. Writo oiiuatlons for fclio following reactions t 
(o) Ammonium sodium phosphate is heated. 

(6) Nitric acid on ferrous sulphate and sulphuric 
acid. 

(c) Nitric acid on copper. 

(rf) Sulphuric acid on copper. 

(c) Ferric sulphate is heated. 

(/) Sulphuric acid on thiosulphato of sodium. 

5. 163.7cc of carbon dioxide are set free by tlio action 
of nitric acid on 0.976 grnm. of a mixture of calcium 
and barium carbonates, measured at 14.5°C. and 749""". 
Calculate composition of the mixture. 

G. Give a short account oi. the chemistry of Sulphur 
and its compounds. Give the formula of chromium 
compounds, which justify its comparison with Sulphur. 

7. From the data 

[C, OJ = 96900 
[H„ O] = 68400 
[CH,. OJ = 213500 

Calculate the heat of formation of marsh gas. 

How would you proceed to find the heat of 
vaporization of C ? 

H. Discuss the probability of the existence of the 
compounds Bi H, ; Brj 0, ; Ag, CI ; Pb Cl«. 



, I 



■ ■ i 
1 'I 



i I 



IIS 



Winibtvttn» ot STotronto. 



m 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18!)1. 



SECOND YEAK- -SECOND PAPER. 
CHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY. 



INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 



Examiners : 



m 



{ W. H. Pike, M.A., Ph.D. 
I T. Proctor Hall, M.A., Ph.D. 



1. Describe the preparation and properties of pure 
dry hydrogen iodide. Give equations for its[_action on 
nitric acid, and on acid solutions of chromic and per- 
manganic acids respectively. 

2. A mixture of nitrous oxide and nitric oxide are 
exploded with excess of hydrogen, and the contraction 
on explosion observed. 

Volume of the mixt are .... 17.4"" J All at the same 
After addition of hydrogen. .38.8'" > temperatureand 
After explosion 17.55''" N pressure. 

From these data calculate the composition of the 
mixture, and its density in terms of air. 

3. Why is the density of ammonium chloride said 
to be abnormal ? Discuss fully the nature of the 
abnormality and the exr rimental evidence by which 
the suggested explanation as to its nature has been 
supported. 

4. What facts led chf mists to assume the existence 
of the element fluorine, before it had been isolated in the 
elementary form ? What properties would you expect 
the element to have from its position in Mendelejeff's 
classification ? 

5. Write a short account of the chemistry of iron 
and its conpounds. 



0. How may cobalt be <leteeted In qualitative analy- 
sis ? Write equations for each reaction used in the 
detection. 

7. " Charcoal does not assume the form of a per- 
manei.tly elastic fluid which one would expect of a 
very light element." Dalton, 1810. 

How far are the properties, chemical and physical, 
of the elements considered to depend upon the atomic 
weight of the present time ? 

8. A current of electricity is passed through a series 
of vessels containing silver nitrate, copper sulphate, and 
dilute sulphuric aeid respectively. What weight of 
copper, and what volume of mixed oxygen and hydro- 
gen measured at 16.4°^ and 752""" will be set free for 
each 1 grm. of silver deposited ? 



i i H 



CiitfUetfiifttt of EovotxU^ 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GREEK. 



Examiners , 



( Maurice Hutton, M.A. 
I G. A. H. Fraseu, M.A. 



,* Candidates are cautioned against confining their attention to 
either one of the two autnors. No Candidate will pass who 
omits the questions on parsing and syntax. In explaining the 
syntax of verbs explain always the reason of its mood, and in 
parsing aorists distinguish between first and second. 

Candidates are requested to fold their papers on the two authors 
separately, and write "Xenophon" "Aristophanes" on the 
back before placing them in the envelope. 

XENOPHON: MEMORABILIA, IL, III., IV. 



ov 



1. Translate carefully : 

(a) " 'Ireoi/ &v eirj deaaofiivov^," e^ 6 "ZfOKpaTrji} 
yap 8f) aKovaaai ye to '\6yov KoetTTOi/' eari xara- 
fiadelv" Kai 6 hirjjyqa-dixevo^^ 'OvK &v ipddvoiT" 
€<f>11. " CLKoiKovdovvTef!." 

(b) " Ater^/ooi/ 8e Kai to Bia tt/V dfiiXeiav yrfpdaai wplv 
IBeZp eavTOv, ttow? &u KaWiffTot Kal KpariaTO^ toS 
ffco/vTTfc yivoiTO' ravra Si om ttTTiv Iheiv h/jkeXovvTa' 
ov yap i6i\et avrofuiTa ylr/veadat," 

'Opyi^onivov Be iroTc Tivo<i, oti Trpoaenratv run 
"Xaipeiv om avmrpoaeppridffy " TeXolov" <^<fn}, "to, el 
fiiv TO a&fia Kamov ^yovri cmrivrritrd^ t^, (ii, &v 
opyi^eadai' 8ti 8k Trjv "^V'xrjv hypoiKoripm Siaxei- 
likvtp irepiervxe^j tovto ae XuTrct." 

"AXXou 8^ \iyovTo<i, on &rjh&<i ea$loiy "'Akou- 
fievb'i" €<fyi}, "tovtov <j)dpuaKov dyaSov BiBdaxei" 
'Epo/Ltcvou 8k, " llolov ;" " llavffaadai eadiovTa" 
ti^yri' " Ka\ ri8i6v re Kal eineXkarepov koX vyieivo- 
repop" [<t>varl,] "Stafeti; Travadfievov." 



assssam 



"AWou S' ai> Xe70fT0?, on Bepfibu e'ir) Trap' e&VTtp 
TO vhtop, & TTivoi, ""Orau ap\" €(f>r}, " ^ovXr) depfi^ 
Xovaaadac, ^roifiov earai aoi." " 'AWA "^vypov" 
eqyq, (oare Xovaaaoat, ccttiv. 

(c) Et 8e Tit, OTt, (f)da-KOPTO<i abrov ro Baifioviov 
SavTot Trpoaijfiaipeiu a re St'ot kuX h fit] Beoi iroielv, 
VTTo T&v SiKa<TT(ou KaTeyvaxrdt} 6di'aTo<}, oterai avrop 
i\€y^€<T0ai trepl tov 8aifiouiou ylrevho/xevov^ ivvoi)- 
adrm irpSiTov fikv, oti ovTa)<; rjSr] Tore iroppm t^s 
rjkiKia'i ?Jf, aJo-T*, et koX firj rore, oVk &v ttoWo) 
varepov TeXevTrjaai, tov ^I'ov elTa oti to /liv h^detvo- 
jaTov TOV 8iov Kat iu <|) TTai/re? Tr)v Bidvoiav /ieiovvTai 
direXeiTrev' avTi he tovtov t^s' '^v^V'* t^v pdifi'qv 
iTTtSei^dfievof emXeiav TrpoaeKTiia-aTo, tijv re Sckijv 
irdvTmv dvdptiyrr'w h\r)6kaTaTa Kat eXevdepmTaTa 
Koi SiKaiOTara cIttcdv, Kat Ttjv KUTayvooaiv tov davd- 
TOV TrpaoTara Kat dvSpwBeaTaTa eveyKoav. 

2, Parse and explain the syntax of : . 

(a) Itcov, deaa-o/Mevovi, aKovaraal, to, \6yov, d>dd- 

V01T€. 

(b) eo-VTov, dfiekovvTa, uvTofiaTU, Tft), firj dv 6pyl^€- 
adat, Trjv ■\^V)^r)v, iadiovTa. 

(c) Tt?, KaTeyvwadr), 6dvaT0<i, ivvo'>]odTa>, ovk &v, 
reKevTrjaai, Trjv Sidvoiav, TrpoaeKTt'ja-aTO (what is the 
force of the tt/oo?) Sikijv, iveyKwu. 

HONORS ONLY. 

3. Point out any discussions in these books in which 
•Socrates holds an attitude different to that attributed 
to him on the same subject (1) by Plato in the Re- 
public, (2) by Aristophanes in the Clouds. 

4t. Trpoirijfiaiveiv a re 8ioi Kat h fii] 8eot k.t.X. (c). How 
does' this passage compare with Plato's account ? 

ARISTOPHANES : CLOUDS. 
I. Translate : 

(a) eXdcTe ^t, & TroXvTtfiijTot Nc^e'Xat, Tm8' ek eir(- 

Bet^iv 
€it' iir' 'OXv/Mtrov KOpv^ah lepah ;^toi/o/3\7jTOto-i 

KddrjaOe, 
eiLT SlKeavov iraTpo'i iv k^ttoii} iepov x°P^v la tutc 

eiT apaNelXov 7rpoj(oai<} vMtcov ')(pv(riai<i dpvTearde 
'irp6')(ov<nv, 



i\ 



/ 



■ff Mai&Ttv Xifivrfp ej^cr' ^ aKo-rreKop vi^oepra Mi- 

viraKoxxrare Se^dfievai dv<r(av xai roU Upolai X°'P^^' 
aai. 

(b) AW' ohB' &9 xffi&u'irod' excav trpohmam roix} Se^iov^. 
i^ OTOV yhp ivOdh' vir avSpwv, oU iJSu koI Xiyeiv, 

6 ad)<l>p<ov re j^o) KaTatrvywp dpiar ffKovcdrriv, 
KoTfon, TrapdivQi; ycLp er' *}, kovk i^v irm fioi Te/tetf, 
i^WijKa, irah 8' iripa tw \a0ova' di/f'Xero, 
vfiei^ S' i^edpiyjraTe y€vpalta<i KnTraiBtvirare' 
ix rovTov fioi irnTTCt wap^ vfuv yucofirj^ HaO' opxia. 
vvv oiv ^HXeKTpap Kar eKeCmiv ^8' ij Kotfi^Bla 
^ijTova-' ^\6, Tjv irov 'inTvj(rj dearaK ovtw ao^K' 
yv<oa€Tai yap, ^inrep iBjj, raSeX^ot) top ^6(rTpvj(pv. 

(c) \4f ft) Toivvv Ttjv apyalav TraiSe/ai/, a>? ZUKeiro^ 

or' ir^ta rh Blxcua Xeytov fivdovv Kcl aoi^poa'vv'i) vevo- 

flliTTO. 

irp&Tov fikv iBei 7rat8o9 <f>a>viiv ypv^avTo^ p,i)Biv 

aKovaai' 
elra fiaBi^ecv ev ralaiv oBol^ evTUKTm^ et? KiOapia-rov 
Tovi Hafirfra^ yvfivov^ d(fp6om, Kel Kpifipatat) xa- 

rapiffMi. 
elr o5 irpo/xadetp ^ap! iBiBaaxep, ra> fitjpo) fifj ^vpi- 

XOPTW, 

fj llaWdBa irepaerroXip Beiphp, rj TrjXeiropop rt, ^oafjka, 
ipT€ipap>ivoi/<} Tr)p dpfioplap, f)p oi Traripa irapiBtoKap. 

II. Parse and explain the construction of : 

(a) Tft)6', vBdrtop, irpoxpvtrip, xf^pelcrai ; (6) otov, 
dpeiXero, 'TriTvxJl ', (c) Kidapiarov, Karavt^oi. 

III. (a) Explain why the Chorus is an incongruous 
element in Comedy ; account for its presence, and for 
the need of the so-called Attachment of the Chorus. 

(b) Write brief explanatory notes upon : 6 am^ptop 
T€ yui Karavvymp : nrapdhot yap .... reKeip : iravi B' 
krkpa. . . .dpeiXero : pvp oiip ^HXixTpap . . . .fiovrpv^pp. 

(c) Scan the second line in extract (c), namirg 
the metre, and accounting for its use in this passage. 
Whom are the .Just and the Unjust Cause probably 
intended to personify ? Give reasons for your answer. 

IV. Who were the Sophists with whom Aristophanes 
identifies Socrates ? Were there any grounds for such 
identification ? Discuss concisely the justice of the 
charges brought by Aristophanes against the new 
educational system. 



Wini\^tvnttp of ffotonto* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GRKKK. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: Maurice Hutton, M.A. 



SOPHOCLES, AJAX ; ARISTOPHANES, ACHARNIANS ; 
THUCYDIDES, VIL 

1. Translate carefully, with notes where necessary : 

((t) Kol TOP fiev Tjaro irXeiarov a<f>6oYyo<: 'xpovov 
eireiT ifiol ra heiv" iTTijTreiXrja hnj, 
el fir) ^avoirjv Trap to <rvvTV)(ov irddo^, 
Kavriper ev t«3 7rpdyfiaTo<! Kvpoi irore. 
Ktiym, (^(.'7^0^, heiaaaa Tov^eipyaa-fievop 
eXe^a Trap oaopirsp i^rpnardfirjp. 
6 S' ev6v<i k^ccfxm^ep oifjLa)yh<i \vyph<f, 
&? ovTTOT abrov irpoadep elai^Kova eyo). 
7rpb<i yhp KUKOv re Koi ^apw^v'xpv yoovi 
roioija^ del ttot dpSpb^ e^rjyeiT' ej(eiv' 
oW' dyfr6<f>ijT0'{ o^eow KcoKVfiaTtaP 
inrearipa^e ravpof w? ^pv)((ofi€PO<t. 

(h) TET. eyoi Be y apSp' oirmva fia)pla<i TrXetop, 
o? ep KaKoh v8pi^e roto-t tcjp TreXa?* 
Kar avTOP elcriotop tk efi^epr)<i ifioi 
opyqp 6' 6fioi,o<i etTTf toiovtop \6yop, 
apSpcoTre, fifj Spa tou? Tedpr)K6',a<i Kaxw' 
el ydp TTOtJ/o-et?, i(rOi iriifiapovfiepo^. 
ToiavT dpoX^op aphp ipovderei Trapcop. 
opat Se Toi pip, KatniP, eov eiwi hoKel, 
ov8ei<: TTOT dWo^ rf av. fi&p rjpi^dfitjp ; 
ME. direip.t,' Kai yap al<T')^pop, el irvOono rif 
\070t9 Kokd^eip ft) ^id^eadai Trdpfj. 



i I 



F 





1 






i 1 








i 






i 






!| 




y 


1 





8<? ovBeirdiTroT eltrev, av0paKa<{ mpiw, 
ovK S^o<i, ovx ^Xfltoi', ovB' ijBriu irpio), 
aW' ahrot etftepe ttuvtu x^^ "rrpiav iiTrrjv. 
vvv otv kTexvm riKta 7rape<rKevaafi€voii 
^oav, vTroKpoveiv, XocBopetp Toix} p^Topa<;, 
idv rif aWo 7r\i)i^ irepl elpi)vrffi \^r}- 
aW' ol trpvrdva'i yap oinoit fjLearffi^pivol. 
OVK rjyopevov ; toOt' iKclv ovyto '\eyov' 
elf TT]u irpoehpiav Trav avr^p dxTTi^erai. 

(d) OvBe-rroT iyw lUXefiov oiKaS' imoU^ofiai, 
obhk irap e/iol ttotc top 'ApfioBiov naerai 
^vyKaraKXiveh, oti nTapolvu)<i dvrjp e^v, 
6(TTi<} eVi TrdvT hyaff e)(OVTa<i i'mK(i)fid(Ta<;, 
elpydauTo 'rrdvra Kaxa KaviTpeire Kh^ey^ei, 
KafidxeTO, Koi Trpoaeri iroWd irpoKaXovfMevov. 
TTive, KaraKeicro, Xa^e T^vf)e t^tXoTrjalav, 
T09 ;^a|oa«a9 i^Trre iroXv fidWov ev tm irvpt, 
e^evet d' nuStv Bla top olvov e/e twv duTreXoyv. 
eiTTepiOTai t ctti to oenrvov a/xa Kai fjieya/ui orj 

<j>povei, 
Tov ^iov 8' efe/SoXe Belyfia rdBe rd tnepd irpo 

T&v dvpatp. 
& KuTrpiSt T7J KaXfj Kat Hdpiffi ratf ^iXaif ^vv- 

Tpo<f)€ AtaXXayjj, 
ta? KoXov e^pvaa to irpdaotyirov ap' iXdv6ave<{. 

(e) Kat fierd ravra ereixi'^ov ol ^vpaKoaioi koI oi 
^vnfia\oi 8id T&v 'KTrnroX&v diro t?)<? TroXeo)? hp^d- 
dvot, irpot to iyKdpcTiov TeiXo^ aTrXoOf, otto)? ol 
\\6rjvaioi, el fifj hvvaivjo KwXvaai, fii}Kert olol re 
Sioiv diroreiyiaai. kuI o'l re ^Adrjvalot hva^e^^Keaav 
■^Bt] dva>, ro eirX ddKaaarj Tetvo? eiri.reXeaavTe'i, koX 
6 TvXimrof, ^v ydp ri rolt 'Ad7}vaioi<i rov rei^ov't 
do'depi^, vvKrof dvaXa^wv rrjv arparihv eTT'pei tt/oo? 
aino. ol S' ^ AOijvaioi, erv^ov ydp e^w avXi^ofxeyoi, 
o)? ijaffovrOy dvreirrjeaav. 

(/) 'SitwaveiretOe 8e Kat 6 'FipfioKpdrrjff ov^ rjKKrra rov 
rait vavat firj ddvfietv CTrix^tp'^a-eiv TT/ao? Toy? ^AOrj- 
vaiov<i, Xeyav ovBe eVtiVoy? irdrpiov rrjv ifirreipiav 
ovBi dtBiov rrjf 6aXd<7a-r)<! ex^iv, dXX' ^TretpcoTa? 
fidXTwv r&v ^vpaKoaiwv ovra<} Kal dvar/Ka<r6evra<i 
vTTo Mr/Sft)V vavriKovf yeveadai. Kat Trpo? dvBpa<i 
roXfirjpovf oiov<} Kal 'A6r)vaiov<; tou? dvriroXfi&vrafS 
')(aXeTr(ordrov<i \dv\ avroh ^alveadai' w ydp cKeivoi 
rov<i 7reX«9, ov Bvvdfiei earw ore rrpovyovref^ ru> Bk 



"1 



dpatrei iTrix^ipovvTef! KaTcuf)ofiovai, Koi a<f)a^ &v to 
avTo ofioicD^ Toh ivavrioi^ vTroaj(eiv. Kal ^vpaKo- 
aiov<i cS elBivai e<fyr) tw roKnijaai awpoaSoK'^Ttt)^ 
Trpo? TO 'AOfjpaicop puutikop apTurrfjpai ttX^op ti hih 
TO TotoOTov tKirXayipToiP abroip "rrepieao/xipov^ rj 
' Adtivaiov^ rfj iTntmjfiTj r^p ItVpaKoaldip aireiplav 
/9\a"^oi/Ta9. Upai, o^p eKeXevep e? rr/p irelpap rov 
pavTCKOV Koi fir) ivrroKPHP, 

2. (a) Parse <f>apo('^p, r^ TrpdyfiaTot. 

(h) Parse K^r\ fxatp, §5, Trapfj. 

(c) Parse irpio}, jjSijp. Note the different uses of 
a\\h,..yhp, octtw. 

{d) Parse ^tXoTrja-iap, iirrepunai,. 

(e) Explain the direction and position of the 
Ter;^09 aifkovp here referred to, and the meaning of the 
))hra.se avafie^rjKeaap i^hrf apa>, to iTrl doKdaa-ri, k.tX. 
What portion of the Athenian wall is Gylippus here 
attacking hy this night march ? What is the meaning 
of 6^0) ahXi^ofiipoi ? 

(/) Comment on <r(f>a<:, xmoayeip. 

3. What are the difficulties in this book connected 
with the use of the words: (1) kvkKo^, (2) Eu/3w;\o?, 
(8) cvpereixi'trO'V to "Xjovttop Tot? ^vpaKoaioit fii'xpi tov 
eyKapaiov T6t;^ou? ? 

4. What are (a) the assertions made by Nicias in 
this book in reference to the unsoldierly qualities of 
the Athenian army ? (h) the evidence furnished by 
the text to the justice of his words ? 



snniber^ftff of coronto* 



ANNUA!. KXAMINATIONS I 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GKEEK. 

HONORS. 



Eccaminr.r: Maurice Hittton, M.A. 



ARISTOTLE, ETHICS, I-IV. 

1. Translate carefully, with notes where necesRary: 

(a) M67oXo'^^u;^o9 (ikv ovv 6 eipr}nei>o<i. 'O yap fiiKpiiv 
a^iof! Kai TovTUiv u^iuiv kavTov cr(a<\>p(av, /ieya7u>yfrv)(p^ 
8' oij t'l/ fieyedei yap 17 fj.eya\oyfrV)(^ia, axTTrep Kat To 
/cuWo? iu neydXfp <r(OfiaT(, 01 fxtxpcl B' hareioi Kat 
cvfi/xerpoi, kuXoI 8' ov. 'O Be /xeydXcov eavrbv h^i&v 
uvd^iof &V ')(avvo'^' 6 Si p,ei\^6vta» ^ &^(.0'i ov 7ra? 
"Xavvo^. 'O 8" iXajTOVdiv fj a^iot fitifpoylrv^o^, idv 
re fieydXmv idu re fierpiatu, idv re xal fjLiKpctf &^to^ 
b)u en €}uitt6v(i)i> aifrou d^iot. Kat fiaXurra &v 
So^eiev 6 p,€yd\fi)if ci^ms' tI yap hv itroUi, el fi^ 
TOdovroiv ij// d^io'i ; "Ectti ht) 6 /jteya\6yfrv)^o^ T(fi 
fikv fieyedei aKpo<;, TtL he w? 8et /itecro?' rov yap kut 
d^lav avTOV d^iol. Ol 8' uirepffdWovai Kai iWel- 
vovtrip. Ei Se 8)} fieydXtov kavrov u^ioi a^t,o<t &Uy 
Kai fxd\i<TTa rayu fieyitTTccu, Trept ^v fidXicrra &v eiif. 
*H 8' ift'a Xiyerai, 7rp6<{ tA ^«to<? dyadd. McytcToi/ 
he rovT hv deirjfiev h toU Oeoh dvoue/jiofiep, kuI ot 
fidXiar i^ievrai nl ev a^icouaTi, Kat to eVt Tot? 
KaXXi<rToi<i S,dXou. Tocovt)V 8' 17 rifi-q' fieyiffTou yhp 
hf) TOVTO Ttav €/cTo? dyaOoiv. Tlepl rtp.hf} hq xai 
arifila^! 6 p.eyaX6-^V)(o<i eariv &)<? hel. Kat^ avev he 
Xoyov (paipovrai 01 ixeydX6->jrv)(^oi irepl Ttfxr}v elvai' 
Tifir}<i yap (idXiaff oi fieydXoi, t't^iovariv kavrov^, kut 
d^iav he. 'O he /j,iKp6y{rvj(o<i eXXetTrei Kai tt/oo? 
iavTov Ka\ 7rp6<; to tov fieyaXoylrv\ov d^imfia. 'O 8k 
')(awo^ Trpoi eavTov /jLev imepfidXXei, ov firjv tov ye 
fityoKoyjfv^^ov. Ethics, IV, 






f I 



(6) Uepi T^v Totainas ?>/ jJSoi^nv fj ato^iitxruvrj ^Kat ^ 
aKoKaaia iarlv S)v Kai ra Xoittii fy"a Koiuwvfl, 86(V 
dvBpa-rroBiohei'i Hal 6ripiu)^ei<i (^aivoVTai' avrat, 8' 
tialv u<^i} itaX yemtt. <l>ali>oi>Tai 8// Kal t^ yevaei 
eVJ fiiKpuv fj oi)0(v y^p?)adai.' rt)<i yhp yeixrtm iaitv 
ij Kpiai<i Tojv ')^v^i&v, oTTtp •noiovatv oi row oivuv^ 
BoKinu^ovTef Kai to, Sy^a uprvovrts' ov ttuvv hk 
yalpovai tovtok, fj ob)(^ o'i ye dfcoXatrrai, aWa rf) 
a-iToXavaei, f) yi'verai mdaa 8i «0»)9 Kai iu antoi^ 
Kal et> TTOToU. A(o Ka) i/yfttid Tt? 6yfro4)(iyo<! &v 
rhv (fxipvyya aini[) fiuKpurepou yepdvov yeveaOai, ox? 
/;86/iei^o9 T^ u(l>fj. KoivoTurtj Bif Jtov aladi]<Tetdv KaB' 
ifv ff dKoXaaia- Kai Bo^euv hv hiKaioi^i k-nov€ihia70<i 
etvat, on oh-)(^ ji RvOptairol iafiev imup')(fi, n\)C f/ 
{»Pa. To hfi TotoyTot? •)(aipii,v Kai fidXicna dyatrap 
6npi<a8e<}. 

Ibid., III. 

(c) TpiS)u yhp SvTrov twi^ et? Trt? alpeaets Kal rpmu 
T&v ctv T<is' <f)vyu<i, KuXoit avfi^epovros iJStov, Kal 
rpiSiv T&v ivavrloiv^ ai<T^pov fiXaSepov Xvirrjpov, 
irepl iruvTa fxiif lavju 6 nyado<i KaTopf)(a7iK6<i iariv 
6 ok KaKO<i dfiapTTjTiKiU, fxiiXiaTd 8^ irepi ii)v 7]8oi»'iP' 
Koiur'j T6 yap avrrj rots ffjiots', Kui iraai xotv viro ri)v 
a'tpeaiv irapaKoXovOel' Kai yap to KaXitv Ka). ro avfi- 
(f>€pov ^hv (paiveTai. "Ert 8' ck vrfiriov iraaiv r}ixiv 
avvredpaiTTai' 8jo ;j^aX67roi/ dvoTpiylraadai tovto i6 
TTudo^ iyKCXPino'p-evov 7i[> ^iifi. Kavovi^ojiev Be kuI 
TO? irpu^ei.'i, oi p,^v fiaXXov oi 8' ^ttov, 7)8ovfj Kal 
Ximj). Ata tout' ovv dvayKalov eluai Trepl ' "Sna 
rr)p iraaav TTpayfiareiaV ov yap p.iKp6v etV tos 
Trpd^eii ev fj KaKW ')^aipeiv Kal XvmlaOai "Eti Be 
yaXeirwrepov i}8oi'fj p,u)(ea6ai ^ ^y/tiji, Kaddirep (l>T)atP 
Hpa/c\etTo<f, Trepl Be to yaXeTrdiiepov del Kal 'te-)(iit} 
yiverai Kal dpei)]' Kal yap to ev ^eXriov ev rovT^n 
"flo'Te Kai Bid TOVTO irepi i)B vd<i Kal Xuttov Trdaa 17 
TrpayfiaTCia Kal t^ opeT^ Kal tji ttoXitikt}' 6 fiev yap 
eC TouTOi? ■)(^p(i)fi€i'0<i dyado^ tOTai, t Be KaKOtf KaKof. 
"Oti p,kv oJ/v eaT\v 7) dpeTi] irepl r)Bovd<; itnl XoTrav, 
Kal OTt ff b}u yiueTai, vvo tovtwv Kal av^cTui Kal 
d deiperai fiij oxravTO)^ yivofiamv, kuI St* ef o)v eye- 
peTO, Trepl Tama Kal evepyel. eiptjaOo). ATToptjaeie 
8' ap Tt?, 7ra>? Xeyo/xei oti Bel Ta fiev BiKaia TrpetT- 
Tovraf BiKalov; yipeadai, tu Be adi^popa aduppopa'i' 
el yhp TrpdTTOvac to BiKaia Kal Ta <rd><f>popa, "^Bt) 
fiai BiicaiQt. Kal aii>4>pope<i^ wjTrep et ra ypapLfxaTMd 



hui 



tea) rei fiovaiKti, ypafifiajiieoi Kal (xovamoL *H '*>^ 
i-nt r&v T«XPtav ovrtof l^^ei ; 'Bi^S^^erat 7^^ ypafi- 
fiariKuv Tt 7r(Ht')(Tai Koi utto tiJj^tjv koi &\\ou vtro- 
dtfiivov. ToT« oSf Sarai ypafiftariKo^f ihv Kai 
ypa^ifiaTiKou ri Troirjirfj Kat ypafifiaTiKUt^' rovTO 8' 
iari TO Karh rffv iv avrta ypafJLfiajiKt'fV. 

Ibid., II. 

{d) "Eirvt hr) Kai ^10^ abr&v Ka$' avrov iJSu?. Ti 
fiiv yhp ffhtaSai TOtu \jrv)(iK&v, iKaara K iarlv ■fjjhii 
7rpo9 & Xe7«Tat AiKoroiovros, olov Irriro^ fikv rcj! 
f^CKi-mrtfi Oeafia oi T(|! <f>i\o0e<op^' tov abrbv Si 
rpoTrou Kal rh, BUata T((> BiKattfi Kal 5\a>v t^ Kar* 
aperijv tiJi ^iXapir^. Toi; fxiu o^v ttqWok ih ^£ea 
/xuytrat hia to ur) <\)vaei roiavr eXvai, toU Si <f>i\o- 
KuXoif ^(TTd/ r)bea la (f>vaet t;6ea. LotauTa oi 
Kar (ipeTTjv Trpafetv, (uare /vat toutoiv e^Vlf i^Seiat 
Kal •caS' avTti^. Ov8ii> Bf) frpoahelrai t^v 17801/^? 6 
/9(ov ain&u wairep trepidirrov riv6<i, «\V ^vet tj/j/ 
r}hovr}v ev iavn^. Ilpo? Totv etpij/xii>oc^ yap ohS' 
ear'iv aya06<i 6 /xj) ■)(aip(ov Tat? «a\fftv Trpd^eaiv 
(iVTe yap hiKaiov ovheh &i> eiwoi tou fir) ^aipovra Tq> 
BiKatoTTpayelv, out' i\ev6epi,ou rov fit) ')(ai^'Ovra Tat* 
eXevOepioit irpd^eaiv. 

Ibid., I. 

2. How did Aristotle differ from Piato in reference 
to the proposition "virtue is knowledgf^?" 

3. Compare Aristotle's theory of courage with Plato's. 

4. " EnHn it est des iridividus nes uierconaires qui ne 
font aucun bien a leurs amis on a leurs proches parce 
qu'ils lo doivent, tandis qu'en rendant service a des 
inconnus ils en recuiellent un gain d'amour propre," — 
Balzac. 

Which of Aristotle's heroes do these words fit ? 

5. "The devil's darling sin is the pride that apes 
humility." 

What is the Greek word for this quality in Aris- 
totle, and what names does he quote to illustrate it? 

6. Greek ethics lay more stress on the pursuit of 
truth and the training of the intellect than is laid by 
the ethics of Christianity. 

Explain and illustrate. 



n 






I 



Ti- 



pjii 



of 



4P 



"1 



mnfueroitj? of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GREEK. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: William Dale, M.A, 



Translate : 

'A/j' ovu Kat eKiiaTT) t&v Te-j^y&v eari ti ^vfitpepov 
aWo 7} Ti fidktaTa reXeav elvai ; IIw? tovto 
€pMTa<} ; "ncTTrep, e^rju iyo), et fie epoio, el e^apxel 
<r{o/xaTi elvai a-dofiari t] irpoaBeiTai rivo<;, eiTToifi &u 
oTi travraTraaL fiev ohv TrpocrSeiTai. Bta ravra xai r) 
Te')(yr) eoTiv -q larpiKi] vvv evprjfiivij, oti aS>iid eari 
TTovijpbv Kal ovK i^apKei avraj roiovrqy eluai. tovto) 
oZv oira)<i eKiropi^rj ret ^vp,^epovTa, SttI rovrrp trape- 
(TKevdcrOr) ■>) Te)(i>r}. ^ dpOwt croi Sokw, €<f>rjv, av eiTrelv 
()VT(o Xiycjv, ■^ ov ; 'Op6S>i{, €<!»}. Tt Se S/;; ainrj 
ff larpiKi] i(TTi TTOvqpd, rj aWrj rts Te)(pr] eaO' 6 Tt 
irpoahsilrai tivo<; dpeTrj^, wairep 6<^6a\ixoi oyfreo)^ Koi 
o)Ta uKorj'i Kal 8id ravra ^eir avroi^ Set Tti/6? re-)(yrj'i 
rri<i o ^v/j,(f}epov 6t? ravra cTKeylrofievr]^ re kuI eKtropi- 
i^ov(Tt)<i ; dpa Kal iv avrfi rfj rivyrj evi Tt? Trovqpia, 
Kal Set cKdarij re^vrj aWrj^ Te^fj/?, ijrit avrfj to 
^vfKJyepov (TKe-^lrerat, Kal r^ aKoirovfieuT) eripa^ av 
roiavrrjf;^ Kal rovr eariv direpavrov ; rf avrrj avrf) 
TO ^vfi^epov a-Kcylrerai ; rj ovre avrr]<} ovre dWi]<i 
•rrpoaBeiTai cTrt rfjv avrrj<i irovqpiav to ^vfi^epov 
oKoirelv. 

Plato, liepuhlic, I. 

1. Show clearly the grauimaticul structure of the 
piis-sago from Mcnrep, ecfyrfv. 

2. roiovT^ ehai. What does this refer to ? 

li. Contrast the Socrates in Book I. witli thi; Socrates 
of Books II., III., IV. 



iff 



i^N 



i 



4. reXeof. How does this tUft'er from Aristotle's 

.'». Translate : top jxh fiovtrtKov S^ttou ^povwov \eyeii, 
Tov Be afiovcov a<f>pova. Explain the meaning; of fiovsnKo<i 
and <f)p6vtfio<i (?) What is the meaning of 6 (f)p6vi/xo^ 
in Aristotle ? Quote an example of his use of the word. 

Translate : 

Om olada, riv B' iy(o, oTt to ye a>? oKijdw ylf€vBo<{y 
ei olov re rovrc '-^etv, irdvre^ 6eoi re Kat dvdpcoTTOi 
fiiaovaiv ; il v , t^, Xeyei^ ; Ovrax;, Tjv 8 eydt, 
071, Tft) Kvpiardr^ irov eavT&v yfrevSeaOat Kal irepl 
To KupiforaTa oi/BeU ckcov e6e\ei, aWa TrdpTiov 
■ fid\i<7Ta (ftodelTOt eKei avTo KeKTrjadaL OvBe vvv 
TTw, Tj S' 09, fiauOdvci). Oiei ydp ri fie, €<f>ijv, aefivov 
\eyeiv' eyo) Be \e7ft), oTt Trj yfrv^ trepX ra ovra 
ylrevBeaOai re xal i^jrevtrdai Kal dfiaOrj elvai xal 
evravda e^eiv re Koi KexTrjcrdai to yfrevBo<i irdvref; 
7]Ki(na hv Be^aivTO Kal fiiaova-i p-dXiara aino ev to. 
TOUiVTtp. Yio\v 76, e^T). 'AWa pL7)v opBoraTa y 
dv, vvv Br} tkeyov, tovto a>? d\r}6&<i -^eiJoo? xaXotTOy 
r) ev Trj yfrv)(T] ayvoia ij row eylrevap-evov iirel to 76 iv 
Tot9 Xo70ts /iifirjfid Ti TOV tv rfj ylrv^f} ecnl iradrj- 
fiaro^ Kal varepov yeyovh<i elBuikov, ov irdvv uKparov 

'^fvBo^. fj OV^ 0UTft)9 ,• ! irivV flkv otiV. 

Ibid., II 

1. Point out the connection o this passage with the 
general argument. 

2. Explain to ye (09 aXi]6&<i '\jrevBo<: : to ye ev Tot? 
X670t9. . .eiBaiKov. 

Translate : 

Tovto toivvv aino Tjv ek^ov on XP^^V BiOfio\o- 
yi]craa6ai, iroTepov eaaofiev tou9 TrotrjTdii fAifiovfie- 
vov<! r)filv Ta9 Birjyi[(Tec<i "^oieisQai, rj rh fiev fiifiov- 
fievovt, TO. Be /xij, Ka? oiroia exdrcpa, rj ovBi fiifieicrOai. 
MavTevofiat, e^rj, j-Koireladai ae, ehe TrapaBe^ofieda 
TpayaBlav Te Kal KtofiqiBiav ek ttjv ttoXiv, eire Kat 
ov. "Icro)?, ^v 3' eyd)- 'ia-cot Be Koi irXeim en tovto^v' 
ov yap Bt] e7a)7e irto olBa, dW oirv cLv 6 \6709 wairep 
•jTvevfia (jiipp, ramrj heov. Kat KaXm y, €<f)T), 
Xiyei<!. ToBe toivvv, Si ' ABel/xavTe, ddpei, iroTepov 
fMi/xrjTiKov<i ■^/.iiv Bel eli^at, toli? (j)vXaKa<i fj ov ; ^ Kal 
TOVTO Tot9 efiTrpoadev erreTai, oti eU eKaaTOf ev fiiv 
av eTTiTi'iBevfia «a\ft»9 eTriTtjBevoi, voXXd 8' ov, &\V 



11 



ei TovTo eTn')(€ipol, 'rroW&u e^aTrrofieve^ irdvToav 
inroTvy^^avoi ar, wo-t' eivai irov iWoytfiOf; ; Tt S' 
01) fieWei ; Ovkovv Kal trepl fitfi'^aeto^s 6 avTo<! 
\0709, OTi TToWa ai/TO? fiifielcdai eC wairep ^v ov 
SwaTo^i ; 

Ibid., III. 



oTTola exaTepa. Explain. 

What are Plato's objections to poetry ? Whence 



1. 

2. 
derived ? 

3. Point out the rescuiblances between Plato's 7ro\t- 
reia and tlie historical Spai'ta. 

Translate : 

TovTo Toivw, rjv 8' iyd), ^ddi fi€ Tore fiovXeaOai 
Xeyeiv el Spa vvv e/ia^e?, otl oaa earip oln elvai tov, 
avra fjieu fiova avT&v /loptov ia-Ti, t&v 8e nroiSiv 
Tivcav TTOia ciTTa. koI ov ti Xeyto, w?, oitov &v fi, 
ToiavTU Kal €(TTiv, a>9 dpa Kal t&v vyieiu&v Kal 
voatoSciv -q €Trt<TTi]/jLr) vyieivrj Kal voo-coSt]^ Kal r&v 
KaK&v KoX T<au uyadcov KaKtj Kal hyaQif oW cTeiBi) 
ovK avTov oinrep iiria-Ti^fii] ea-rlv eyevero iiria-TijfiT], 
dWd TToiov Tiv6<;, tovto 8* r^u vyieivov Kal voaa)8e<;, 
iroia Bi] Tt9 ^vve^T) Kui avrrj yevetrOai., Kal tovto 
avrrjv eTToitja-e fir)K€Ti eTTKni'jixrjv a7r\w? KaXeladai,, 
dWa TOV TTOiov Ttvo? Tvpoayevofievov laTptKrjv. "Efia- 
60V, €<j)i], Kai uoi 5o«6t ovTutt ex^iv. To hi hr) hly^o^, 
Tfv 8' iyd), ov TOVTCJv 6^crei,<i t&v Tti»o? elvat tovto 
oirep e<TTiv ; Cffrt 8e Sr'jTTov 8tT|ro9 ; "£70)76, ^ 8' o?* 

TTW/iaTOf 76. 

Ibid., IV. 

1. Show the bearing of this passage on the general 
argument. Explain the distinctive features of Plato's 
ps3'chology. 

2. Describe after Plato the parallel between the 
individual and the state. 

3. Define clearly Plato's conception of BiKatoavvq. 

4. T&v Tivt><i ktvai. Explain the construction. 



aniDetfltfti! of ^loronto. 



ANNUAL EXAIMNATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD AND FOURTH YKARS. 



GKEHK PIlOSIl. 

HONORS. 



r 



Exiwiiners 



j Mauh 
• \ Will 



Maurice Hutton, M.A. 
lAM Dalk, M.A. 



CONCERNING GOLF. 

Translate into Aristotelian Greek : 

And because it is bettei- to hit few times than many 
— for the good is finite, but the man who goes round 
in three hundred strokes stretches out in the direction 
of the infinite — some have said that here too we ought 
to remember the saying of" Hesiod, " The half is better 
than the whole," thinking not rightly, according at 
least to iny opinion: for in relation to your adversary 
it is much better to win the Hole than the half. And 
Homer is a good master both in other respects and 
also here : for he alone has taught us how to lie as is 
necessary, both as to the hole {kuHoXov) and otherwise. 
Again, ever^ art and evety method, and likewise every 
action and intention aims at the gaod. Some, there- 
fore, making a syllogism, aim at a Professor : for Pro- 
fessors, they say, are good (because dry things are 
good for men, as has been said in the Ethics), aVid this 
is a Profeshor : but perhaps they make a wiong use of 
the major premise. At any rate, having hit him, it is 
better to act in some such way as this, not as trage- 
dians seek a I'ecognition {dvayvcopiaK) ; for this is most 
unpleasant {fiiapov), and perhaps leads to a catastrophe. 
It is «loubted, whether the man who killed his tutor 
with a golf-ball acted voluntarily or involuntarily ; for 
on the one hand he did not do it ddiberately, since no 



one deliberates about the results of chance, as, for in- 
stance, whether one will hit the ball this time at any 
rate or not ; yet he wished to kill him, and was glad 
havinj^ (lone it : and probably on the whole it was a 
mixed action. Are we, then, to call no man happy till 
he has finished his round, and, according to Solon, to 
look to the end ? for it is possiljle to be fortunate for a 
long time and yet at last to fall into the ditch : and to 
the man in the ditch there seems to be no good any more, 
nor evil. But this is perhnps of another consideration: 
and, at any rate, it has been discussed sufficiently 
among the topics of swearing. But it is a question 
whether a " caddie " can be called happy, and most pro- 
babl}' he cannot ; those who seem to b(3 so are congra- 
tulated on account of their hope. (C. E. Montague.) 






&ni\^tvnit9 0t Coronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD YEAH. 



GKKEK AND LATIN. 

TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: Mauhice IlurroN, M.A. 



Translate : 

(a) "On 8i Kal ^ttov ala-ypct dxpaffia tj rov dvfMv ff 
17 rmv itnBvfimVy 6ea)pi)a(ouev. "Eot^e yap 6 dvfio^ 
iiKovetv (lev ti tov \6yov, irapaKoveiv 8e, Kadd-rrep 01 
Ttt'xeU T<av ZiaKovtov, ol irptv &Kovaai trdv to Xcyo- 
fievov iKdeovmv, elra dfiapTavovcri, rrji Trpoara^ecdf, 
Kal ol Kvv€<i, TTplv <TK6y^aadat, el <f>iXo<i, &v fiovov 
')lro<f»}(rri, vXaKTOvaiv' outo)? o 6v/i6^ Bid depfiOTrfTa 
Koi TaxorfJTa t»)? <f)Vcretoi dKov<ra<{ fiiu, ovk iTriTorffia 
S' aKovtra'i, opfia 7rp6<i Tr)v Ttfiapiav. 'O fi^v ydp 
X6709 r} 17 (f)avTa(ria on v^pit ^ dkiyapia iSijXaxrev, 
6 B' woTrep avWoyiadfjuevoi on Bel no Toiovrro noXe- 
fieiv 'vaXeTraivei 8^ evdv<!' 17 8' itndvfila, idv p-ovov 
eiTTji on jJSiJi \6yo<i fj 17 ai(rBij(ri<{, opp^ Trpo? rrjv 
diroKavenv. "ilafP 6 fihv 6vp.o^ dKoXovdel t'" "Koy^ 
TTft)?, ij 8' etriOvp.ia ov. Atff^tW oiv 6 fiev ydp rov 
dvp.ov UKpari}!; rov \670u 7ro)9 lyrraTat, 6 Be rrfi 
€7ri6vp,ta^ Kal ov rov Xoyov. "En raK <j)vaiKaK 
fiaWov avyyvtop,'] uKoXovdeiu ope^eaiv, eVet Kal eVt- 
6vfiiai<} Tat? Toia\jTai<; p,dXXov oaai KOivai irdat, Kal 
e<f)' 6(Tov Koivat'.' 6 Bi 6vp.o<i (f>v(TiKa>Tepop Kal 17 vaXe- 
TTOTijv Tcjv e'm6vp.i&v r&v rij^ v7rep8oXr}<; Kal toii* p.Tj 
dvayKaicov, wairep 6 drroXoyovpevoii on rov irarepa 
TinrToi. " Kal ydp ovto<{" e^n) "rov eavrov KUKelvo^ 
rov avtouev, Kai to iraio^op oei^a<i Kat ovto? ep£ 



S^rf, "6rav avijp yevr}Taf avy<yevi>{ yap ^fxlv." Kaj 
6 i\K6fiepo<i virii rov viov •naveaOai tVt'Xeue Trpos' ratv 
0vpaiM' Kai yap aino'i i\Kvaai rov Trarepa fiixP''^ 
evravda. "Ert uSiKtoiepoi ol eirifiovXoTepoi. '0 fiiv 
ovv Ovfia)Bi)<! ovK im'0ov\o<;, oi;8' o Ovfio^ aWa 
(Pavepof' V 5' etriBvfjLiat KaOuTrep rrjv 'A^poSirrjv 

fliikiinh'ixiin fiifi xuK/myivii'i'i' 

Kal TOP KecTov ifjLuina "Ofiijpo^' 

Kafi^ants', »] r' ixXtt/'s vi'tov irnxa ntf> (f/tii>iiivTof, 

"Clar eiTrfp hBiKtarepa Kal alax^top 17 aKpaala avrtf 
T»79 'rrepi rov 6vp.6i> tan, Kal aTrXw? uKpaaia Kai 
KUKia 7ra>?. 

Eiidemian Ethics, 

(b) rff^xyq-r ToX/ittSi;?, irplv ifKovv efjov avptov 
7r\ev<Tai, Koprjp Aktijv fjv (meKopi^tT "A/vrtoi/. 
fierpios fi^v TjjiS' o fiL<T(^b<! p.eTpio^ S' ^]v avTOi} ov. 
Tt? Kopivdidu Tp/nre^av 'napadeir hv o^oXov ; 
TToXXa rovT evedvfiur iv virepi(t(p vrjarii: &)>, 
etra ftvaiai ttju trpka^eipav t&v arpariryov rov Kopwv. 
oCto? avrov fiev irevrjr ovr ov rrdvv Trpoaierai' 
ayauuKrel fievroi Kopyp et icopr) yijpdaerai' 
AireS^^aT Svp to irpaypM, Kai dvyarpo^ et? rpofi)t]v 
SieTrpd^aff utcrr dp-)(ovra TrepKrrfjvai, ToXixiSrjp' 
o 8' o^p fiiardo^ &<Tre yrjfiaf To\/u,t&;? \iyei rdSe 

efie TOUT eptora (pijaip Aktiop y epiora re. 
fia>pdTrei7rerr)p arparriyov; aly\ ev^rfnei' troWovhel. 
'rrpoavoceirat fidWop ort Xvaraav fiaipdS' eKvoaei' 
(ttwi? efirjyaparo tout' ^p elyop tout' iyo) fiadeiv, 

i>)t» €97; Kopia TTotet ypovp fioi \€i,\(OP arroppeip. ) 
iroWdxa S' ep rai<i hyviah ^5e poao'i elXe viv. 
Kai ravr iv re rfj^ <TrparT}ylBo<i (rrparriyov r 6fifia<TiP. 
o\lyo<; hic(f)v ')(p6vo^, ^^ a-rparijyov dvydrijp 
hireScoKSV ^Svu fxrf rif fidpya ol yevoir dprip' 
To\/ii8r)^ \a^a>v dvei)^er' evae^el ;)^a/oei? ^opa. 
yrjfiai fxkv yap ov Be y dp^eiv ^Kciikv fj puivia. 
AKrfj Trefi\jfa<} aKvrdXrjv xal Xafijiavtov €<f>6Sia 
yaipeip elire rfj arparriyov Xvaawv ylrafifiaKoaia. 
AKrfi ypd<f)ei 8' r) arparrjyU of 6 rX^p>(OP efidvrj. 
»; 8' avayvova' exdji^^a^e ToX/xiBrj yijp.ap.evq' 
pvv Kadrjrai 8' rj arparT)yh orrevofjuepr] rrdXai 
eare rr)p rrarpo<i fiapoiaiv oi ye puiKpol ToXfjbi8ai. 

[i^8ai TTpvraPeiai.] 



(c) Nunc vonio ad trans /cvMum ilium extremao 
cplstolao tuao v(>rNictilum, in (|Uo nio adinonoH do 
Hororo : (juao res ho sic habot. Ut veni in Arpi- 
nuin, cuMJ ad ino frator vonisnot, in primis noniH 
Hcrnio, 'm[\ui juiiltuH, do to fuit: ox quo voni ad oa 
(luao fuoranius a^u ot tu intor iioh de sororo in 
TuHGulano locuti. Nihil tain vidi inito, nihil tarn 
phicatmti (|uain f uu mou.s frator crat in Hororom 
tuam ; nt otiam, si qua fuorat ox ratiuno sumta 
oftbnsio, non apparorot. Illo sic die. Postridio ox 
Arpinati profccti suinus. Ut in Arcano Quintus 
nianoret, dies fecit; ogo A(iuini; sod prandimuH in 
Arcano: nosti liunc t'unduni : (}uo ut veniinuM, 
hunianissitno Quintus, " Pomponia," inquit, "tu 
invita niulioros ; ogo vero acciani pueros. ' Nihil 
potuit (mihi quidem ut visum est) dulcius ; idquo 
uutn verbis, turn otiam animo ac vultu. At ilia, 
audientibus nobis, "Ego sum," inquit, "hie hos- 
pita." lu autem ex eo, ut opinor, quod antecesserat 
Statins, ut prandium nobis videret. Turn Quintus 
" En," inquit mihi, " haec ogo patior quotidie." 
Dices," Quid, (juaoso, istuc erat?" Magnum: itaquo 
me ipsum commoverat: sic absurdo et as^pere vorois 
vultuqtio responderat; dissimulavi dolons. Discu- 
buimus omnos, praetor illam; cui tamei Quintus de 
mensa niisit; ilia rojocit. Quid multu ? nihil moo 
fratre lenius, nihil usporius tua sorore, mihi visum 
est: et multa praotoreo, (juao tum mihi majori 

stomacho, quam ipsi Quinto, fuorunt Haec 

ad to scvipsi fortasse pluribus, quam necosso fuit, 
ut videres, tuas quoque esse partes instituendi et 
monendi. Cicero. 

(d) (1) Hoc iacet in tumulo raptus puerilibus annis 

Pantagathus, domini cura dolorque sui, 
Vix tangente vagos ferro resecare capillos 

Doctus et hirsutas excoluisso genas. 
Sis licet, ut debes, tellus, placata levisque, 

Artificis levior non potes esse manu. 

(2) Callidus effracta nummos fur auferet area, 
Prosternet patrios impia flamma lares : 
Debitor usuram pariter sortemque negabit, 

Non reddet sterilis semina iacta seges : 
Disponsatorem fallax s[)oliabit arnica, 

Morcibus extructas obruet unda rates. 
Extra fortunam est, si quid donatur amicis ; 
Quas dederis, solas semper habebis opes. 

Mabtial. 



ftin(tier«Utf of STovonto. 



.\NNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 181)1. 



THIKI) YEAR. 



LATIN. 



Kxaminer: 0. A. H. Fhaseu, M.A. 



SALLUHT, OATILINK. 

1. Translate : 

(«) Sell po.stciUHiii C!ii. Pompeiiw ad belluin 
maritiiiunn atque Mithritlaticurn missus est, plebis 
opes iiiuuinutae, paucorum potcntia crevit. Hi 
inagistratus, provincias, aliaque omnia tcnere ; ipsi 
iuuoxii, Horentes, sine mctu aetatem agere; ceteros 
jucliciis terrere, (|U0 plebem in umgiNtiatn placidius 
tractarent. Sed nbi primum, (bibiis rebus, novandi 
spes oblata est, vetiis eertanien aninios eoruni 
arrexit. C^uoil si prinio proelio Catilina superior 
aut aeipia uianu discessissot, prot'ccto magna clades 
ut<iue cuhuuitas rempublicam oppressisset ; ncque 
illis, qui victoriam adepti i'oreni, diutius ea uti 
licuisset, quin detessis et exsanguibus qui plus 
pussft imperium atque libertatem extorqueret. 

(/>) Sed ubi Tanjuiiiius (Jrassum nominavit, 
homineMi nobilem, maximis divitiis, summa poten- 
tia, alii rem incredibilein rati, pars tametsi verum 
existimabant, tamen (juia in tali tempore tanta 
vis hominismagis lenienda quam exagitanda vide- 
batur, plerique Crasso ex negotiis privatis obnoxii, 
conclamant indicem t'alsum esse, deque ea re postu- 
lant uti ret'eratur, Itaque cousulente Cicerone fre- 
quens senatns decernit, Tarquinii indicium t'alsum 
videri, enmqiie in vinculis retinendum, neque 
amplius potestatem faciendam, nisi de eo indicaret, 
en jus consilio tantam rem es ■ mentitus. 



(c) Est locus, in carcere (luod TulliaTiiim 
appelktur, ubi paullulura descenderis ad laevam, 
circiter duodecim pedes humi depressus. Euni 
muniunt undique parietes ntque insuper camera 
lapideis fornicibus vincta; sed incultu, tenebris, 
odoi-e foeda atque tenibilis ejus facies est. In eum 
locum postquam demissus est Lentulds, vindices 
rerum capitalium qui bus prneceptum erat, laqueo 
gulam tVegeie. 

2. Parse and explain the construction of : 

(a) tradarent, cUsceaaiaset, licuisset, defessis, pos- 
set ; (6) divitiis, indicaret, mentitus esaet ; (c) descen- 
deris, 

3. (a) Write brief explanatory notes upon helium 
maritimum atque Mithridaticum ; quo i)lehem in 
magistratu iilacidius tractarent. 

To whom is the probable reference in qui iilus 
posset ? 

{b) Account for Crassus' commanding position in 
the State at this time ; and discuss his probable cogni- 
sance of the conspiracy. 

4. Mention and briefly account for the attitude 
adopted towards the Catilinarian conspiracy by (a) 
Caesar, (h) the Senatorial party, (c) the general public. 

5. Write a short criticism on Sallust's literary style : 
comparing it with the current diction of the day. 

JUVENAL, Satikes I., III., IV., V., VII. 

1. Translate: 

(a) Nil erit ulterius, (juoi^ nostris moribus addat 
Posteritas ; eadem cupient facicntquo ininores ; 
Omne in praecipiti vitium stetit. fJtere velis, 
Totos pande sinus. Dicas hie forsitan, " Unde 
Ingenium par materiao ? unde ilia priorum 
Scribendi, quodcumque animo flagrante liberet, 
Simplicitas ' cujus non audeo dicere nomen ? 
Quid refert dictis iguoscat Mucius,an non V 
Pone Tigellimim : taeda lucebis in ilia, 
Qua stantcs ardent, qui fixo gutture fumant, 
Et latum media sulcum deducit arena." 

{b) Quuni jam semianimum laceraret Flavins orbem 
Ultimus, et calvo serviret Roma Neroni, 



If 



Incidit Adriaci Bpatlura admirabile rhombi 
Ante domum Veneris quam Dorica sustinet Ancon, 
Implevitque sinus: neque enim minor haeserat illis, 
Quos operit glncies Maeotica, ruptaque tandem 
Solibus efi'undit torrentis ad ostia Ponti, 
Desidia tardos et longo frigore pingues. 
Destinat hoc monstrum cyuibae linique magister 
Fontifici summo. Quis enim proponere talem 
Aut emere auderet, quum plena et litora multo 
Delatore forent ? 
(c) Die igitur, quid causidicis civilia praestent 
Officia, et magno comites in fasce libelli ? 
Ipsi magna sonant, sed tunc, quum creditor audit, 
Praecipue, vei si tetigit latus acrior illo. 
Qui venit ad dubium grandi cum codice nomen. 
Tunc immensa cavi .si)irant mendacia foUes 
Conspuiturque sinus. Veram deprendere messem 
Si libet : hiuc centum patrimonia causidicorum, 
Parte alia solum russati pone Lacemae. 
Consedere Duces : surgis tu pallidus Ajax 
Dicturus dubia pro libertate, Bui Ico 
Judice. Rumpe miser tensum jecur, ut tibi lasso 
Figantur virides, scalarum gloria, palmae. 

2. Parse and explain the constraction of : 

(a) addat, velia, dicaa, acribendi, ignoacat ; (6) aer- 
viret, auderet ; (c) praeatent, magna. 
Scan line 5 in (a) ; and line 1 in (6). 

3. (a) " Gujua non audeo .... Muciua an non ? " 
Whose words are these ? What is the grammati- 
cal relation of the quotation to the rest of the sentence ? 
Illustrate and account for the absence of this aimpli- 
citaa under most of the Emperors. Explain taeda 
lucebia in ilia .... aulcum deducit arena. 

(6) Indicate the several points of the satire in 
extract (6) ; with sufficient explanation to shew the 
force and appropriateness of each. 

(c) Write brief explanatory notes upon con^ui- 
turque aimua ; riiaaati iMcenme ; 'paUidua Ajax ; 
Bubulco judice. 

4. Mention the principal heads of Juvenal's arraign- 
ment of contemporary society, as contained in the 
above five Satires ; discuss the justice of his criticism 
in each instance ; and examine cases in which his con- 
ventionality of view affects the soundness of hir judg- 
ment. 




Trai 



anfUevofti? of 9:orotiio* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



LATIN. 

HONORS. 






Examiner: William Dalk, M. A. 



Translate : 

Incolunt prope AUobroges, gens jam inde hulla 
Gallica gente opibus autfanta inferior. Turn dis- 
cors erat : regni certamine ambigebant fratres : 
major et qui prius imperitarat, Bmnons hohline, 
minore ab fratre et coetu jiinioruin, qui jure minus 
vi plus poterat, pellebatur, Hujus seditionis per- 
opportuna disceptatio quum ad Hannibalem rejecta 
esset, arbiter regni faetus, quod ea senatus prin- 
cipumque sententia fuerat, imperium majori resti- 
tuit. Ob id meritum commeatu copiaque return 
omnium, maxime vestis, est adjutUs, quam inf^nies 
frigoribus Alpes praeparari cogebant. S»datis 
Hannibal cei'taminibus AUobrogum quum jam 
Alpes peteret, non recta regions iter institUit sed 
ad laevam in Tricastinos flexit, inde per extemam 
oram Vocontioruin agri tendit in Tricorios baud 
usquam irapedita via, priusquam ad Druetttiam 
flumen pervenit. Is et ipse Alpinus amnis longe 
omnium Galliae fiuminum dimcilliraus transitu 
est : nam, quum aquae vim vehat ingentem, non 
tamen navium patiens est, quia nullis coercitus 
ripis, pluribus simul neque iisdem alveis fluens, 
nova semper vada novosque gurgites — et ob eadem 
pediti quoque incerta via est — ad hoc saxa gla- 
reosa volvens, nihil stabile nee tutum ingredienti 
praebet. 

LiVY, XXt 



1. Write explanatory notes on iam iiide: ad Inevani; 
infames frigorihus. 

2. Criticize briefly Livy's account of Hannibal's pas- 
sage of the Alps. 

3. Translate and explain : 

(a) Vergiliarttm aidei occidente. 

(b) Ausonia Saguntus. 

(c) Occupavii tamen Seipio Padum trajicere. 

(d) Latuin inde ad populum, '' vellent, juberent, 
populo Carthaginienfii bellnm indici." 

4. Explain the meaning of praevogativa milUaris ; 
euniculos excipere ; vectigalia ; atipendiaHus. 

Translate : 

Sub equestris finem certaminis coovta est pedi- 
tum pugna. Primo et viribus et animis pares 
constabant ordines Gallis Hispanisque : tandem 
Romani, diu ac saepe conisi, aequa fronte acieque 
densa impulere hostium cuneum nimis tenuem 
eoque parum validum a caetera prominentem acie : 
impulsis deinde ac trepide referentibus pedem 
insistere, ac tenore uno per [)raeceps pavore fugi- 
entium agmen in mediam primum acieni illati 
postremo nuUo resistente ad snbsidia Afrorum 
pervenerunt, qui utrimque reductis alis constite- 
rant, media, qua Galli Hispanique steterant, ali- 
quantum prominente acie. Qui cuneus ut pulsus 
aequavit frontem primum, deinde cedendo etiam 
sinum in medio dedit, Afri circa jam cornua fece- 
rant irruentibusque incaute in medium lloraanis 
circumdedere alas, mox coi'nua extendendo clau- 
sere et ab tergo hostes. Hinc Romani defuncti 
nequiquam proelio uno, omissis Gallis Hispanisque, 
quorum terga ceciderant, et adversus Afros inte- 
gram pugnam ineunt, non tantum in eo iniquam 
quod inclusi adversus circunifusos, sed etiam quod 
fessi cum recentibus ac vegetis pugnabant. 

LiVY, XXII. 

1. Describe clearly the battle here referred to. 

2. Translate and explain : Omnes earn rogationem, 
qnique Romae, quiqxia in exercitu erant, aequi atque 
iniqui, praeter ipsum dictatorem, in contumeliam eius 
latum acceperunt. 



"? 



3. Translate and explain : 

(a) THumviri menaarii facti aunt, 
(h) Et ita in demoHuorum locum ae auhledwimm, 
iU ordo ordini, non homo homini praelatua videretur. 

(c) Vocati augurea vitio creatum (ac. Marcellum) 
videri pronuntiaverunt 

(d) Ante Kalendaa Junior printaa. 

Translate : 

Quum censores ob inopiam aerarii se jam loca- 
tionibus abstinerent nedium saerarum tuendarum 
curuliumque equorum praebendorum au similium 
his rerun), convenere ad eos frequentes qui hastae 
hujus generis adsueverant, hortarique censores ut 
omnia perinde agerent locarent ac si pecunia in 
aerario esset: neminem nisi bello confecto pecu- 
niam ab aerario [)etiturum esse. Convenere deinde 
domini eoram. qnos Tib. Serapronius ad Beneven- 
tum manu emiserat, arcessitosque se ab triumviris 
mensariis esse dixerunt ut pretia servorum acci- 
perent: caeterum non ante quam bello confecto 
accepturos esse. Quum haec inclinatio animorum 
plebis ad sustinendam inopiam aerarii fieret, pecu- 
niae quoque pupillares primo deinde viduarum 
coeptae conferri, nusquam eas tutiu3 sanctiusque 
deponere credentibus qui deferebant quam in pub- 
lica fide. Inde si quid emptum paratumque pu- 
pillis ac viduis foret, a quaestore perscribebatur. 
Manavit ea privatorum benignitas ex urbe etiam 
in castra, ut non eques non centurio .stipcndium 
acciperet, mercenariumque increpantes vocarent 
qui accepisset. 

LiVY, XXIV., c. 18. 

1. Quote, or refer to, passages in these books (XXI.- 
XXIV.), which illustrate the special characteristics of 
Livy as a historian. 

2. Explain the form triumviri, and derive pupillaria 
and vidua. 




Trai 



1. 

2. 
phil( 
quoi 



eilnibrrsiyUv of SToronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : IKUI. 



THIRD YEAH. 



LATIN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: William Dale, M.A. 



Translate : 

Ita, quae mutat, ea corrumpit, quae sequitur, 
sunt tota Deniocriti, atomi, inane, imagines, quae 
etSeoXa noniinaiit, quorum incursione non solum 
videanms, seel otiam cogitemus: infinitio ipsa, 
quam direipiav vocant, tota ab illo est ; turn iri- 
numerabiles inundi, qui et oriantur et intereant 
cotidie. Quae otsi niihi nuUo modo probantur, 
tamen Democritum, laudatuni a ceteris, ab hoc, 
qui eum uiuim secutus essot, nollem vltuperatuni. 
lam in altera philosopliino parte, quae est quae- 
rendi ac disserendi, quae \oyiKri dicitur, i.ste vester 
plane, ut mihi quidem videtur, incrmis ac nudus 
est. Tollit detinitiones ; nihil de dividendo ac 
partiendo docet ; non quomodo efliciatur concluda- 
Lurquc ratio, tradit ; noji, qua via captiosa sol- 
vantur, ambigua distingvantur, ostendit ; indicia 
rerum in sensibus ponit, quibus si semel aliquid 
falsi pro vero probatum sit, sublatum esse omne 
iudicium veri et falsi putat. 

Cicero, De Finibus, J. 

1. Quae mutat, ea corrummt. Explain. 

2. €i8o)\a. What two meanings has this word in the 
philosophy of Democritus ? What is the meaning of 
quorum incursione .... cogltemus ? 



' 






I 



3. Judicia rerum. What is the mcaniiifj ? What 
is the test uccoriliiij,^ to the Stoics, Epicureans and 
Academics respectively ? 

4. Explain carefully the meaning of kuvopik^, irpo- 
Xijyjn^, VTr6\r}yfn<if and drapa^ia. 

Translate : 

Quaero autuni, quid sit, quod, cum (lissolutione, 
id est, morte seusus omnis extmgvatur, et cum 
reliqui nihil sit omnino, quod pertiiicat ad nos, 
tarn accurate tamque diligenter cavent et sanciat, 
ut Aviynomachna ct Timocnites, hercdes (mi, de 
Hermarchi sentfintia dent, quod satis sit ad diem 
agendum natalem suum quotannis menso Oame- 
lione itemque omnibus mensibus vicesimo die 
lunae dent ad eorum epulas, qui una secum philo- 
sophati sint, ut et sui et Metrodori •nxemovia 
colatur, Haec ego non possum dicere non esse 
hominis quamvis et belli et humani, sapientis vero 
nuUo modo, physici praesertim, quern se ills esse 
vult, putare ullum esse cuiusquam diem natalem. 
Quid ? idemne potest esse dies saepius, qui semel 
fuit ? Certe non potest. An eiusilemmodi ? Ne 
id qvidem, nisi multa auiiorum intercesserint 
milia, ut omnium siderum eodem, unde profecta 
sint, liat ad unum ttmpus reveisio. 

Ibid, II. 

1. Point out the connection of shis passage with the 
general argument of the Book. 

2. State briefly Cicero's argument against the position 
of Torquatus. 

3. Quid ? semel fait ? Explain. 

4. Explain after Cicero how we arrive at the notion 
of honestum. 



Translate : 

Druso propinquauti quasi per officium obviae 
fuere legiones, non laetne, ut adsolet, neque insig- 
nibus fulgentes.sed inluvie deformi et vultu, quam- 
quam maestitiam imitarentur, contumaciae pro- 
piores. Postquam vallum iutroiit,portas stationibus 
ifirraant globos armatoiuni certis castrorum locis 
opperiri iubent; ceteri tribunal ingenti agmine 
circumveniunt. stabat Drusus silentium mauu 



poscons. illi quotiena oculos ad multitudinem 
retiilorant, vocious tniculontis stropere, ruisum 
viso Oaesare tropidaro ; irmrinvr incortuin, atrox 
clamor et roj)ento quies ; diversis aniinoruni 
inotibus pavobant turrobantque. tandem inter- 
rupto tuinuitu literas patris recitat, in quis per- 
scriptuin crat, praecipuam ipsi fortissimarum 
legionuni ciiram, quibuscum pluriina bella tolera- 
visset; ubi priinum a luctu rcquioHset animus, 
actuviun apud patres de postulatis eoram ; misi.sse 
interim HIium, ut sine cunctationu concedoret 
quae statim tribui possent ; cetera senatui servanda, 
quern neque gratiae ncque severitatis expertem 
haberi par esset. 

Tacitus, Annala, I. 

1. Imitarentur. Explain the use of the mood. 

2. Illustrate from this passage the characteristics of 
the style of Tacitus. 

S. PluHma bella. Explain. 

Translate : 

Post quae rettulit Caesar capiendam virginem 
in locum Occiae, quae septem et quinquagiuta per 
annos summa sancbimonia Vestalibus sacris praese- 
derat ; egitque grates Fonteio Agrippae et Domitio 
Pollioni.quod oti'erendo tiliasde officio in rem publi- 
cam certarent. praelata est PoUionis filia, non ob 
aliud quam quod mater eius in eodem coniugio 
manebat: nam Agrippa discidio domum immin- 
uerat : et Caesar quamvis posthabitam deciens 
sestertii dote solatus est. Saevitiam annonae 
incusante plebe statuit frumento pretium, quod 
emptor penderet, binosque nummos se addi- 
turum negotiatoribus in singulos modios. neque 
tamen ob ea parentis patriae delatum et 
antea vocabulum adsumsit, acerbeque incre- 
puit eos, qui divinas occupationes ipsumque 
dominum dixerant unde angusta et lubrica 
oratio sub principe, qui libertatem metuebat, adu- 
lationem oderat. 

Ibid, II. 

1. Gapiendum. Explain. 

2. Describe the attitude of Tiberius towards (1) 
Germanicus, (2) the plebs. Quote passages from Tacitus 
to support your assertions. 



3. Write explantitory noto.s on : militare neravimn ; 
ccnt<',Hlma reriim veudiiwm; 7iiitniciin<t ct colon iae; 
commendativ ; maiestas; Hodalcs Auguetalea ; ooUega 
imperii. 



CAnflirrttUff of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: IHOI. 



THIRD YEAR 



LATIN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : G. A. H. Fraseu, M.A. 



PLATUS : CAPTIVI AND TRINUMMUS. 
1. Translate with brief explanatory and grammatical 
notes where necessary. 

TY. Nunc senex est in tonstrina • nAnc iam cul- 

tros dttinet 
Ne Id quidem, involticri inicere v61uit, vestcm 

ut ne inquinet. 
Sfed utrum stx'ictimne dttonsurum dicara esse, an 

per pectinem, 
nt^scio ; verAm si frugi est, Asque admutilabit 

probe. 
HE. Quid tu ? servosne «^sse an liber mdivelis ? 

meinprd mihi. 
PU. Proxumum quod sit bono, quodque d malo 

longissume, 
id volo ; quamqudm non raultum fuit molesta 

survitus, 
n^e mihi secus er&t, quam si essem fdmiliaris 

filius. 
TY. Etigepae: Thal^mtalentondnemamMildsium; 
nam dd sapientiam huius ille nimius nugat6r fuit. 

Capi'Ivi, Act II. 

(6) ER. Ttim lanii autem, qui concinnant liberis orbds 

OVCo, 

qui locant caediindos agnos, 4t dupla agnindm 

danunt 
qui petroni ndmen indunt v^rveci aoctario ; 
eorum ego si in vid petronem publica conspdxero, 
et petronem at ddminum reddam mdrtales misdr- 

rumos. Ibid. IV. 






(()) PH. Scmpdr tu hoc facito, Lc'shonico, c6gitcH, 
Id optuinuiii axHo tutu uti h'\h (SptuuiUH : 
Si i([ iio(|uoaN, Haltom ut ^)ptutniH hIh prdxuinuH. 
Nunc coiiclitiuiioin hanc, ([uuin 6go fuio ut (|Uaiu 

ap.s tt5 puto, 
Daii) At(|uu accipcro, fAsbonico, tc' uolo. 
J)i (HuituHHunt, <Iooh docunt opuliintiao 
Et iViutioncH : udiiim nos hoinCmculi 
Salilluin aniinau, (\\\&.m quoin uxtoinplo cmlHimiiH, 
Ao(|U(5 inomlicus ^itcjuu illu opulcntissumus 
Cciisi'tur ceiisu ad Achcruntein in6rtu().s 
ST. Mii'Ain quia tu illo tticuin diuitids furas : 
Vbi tu6rtuos hIh, ita sis ut nom^n cluot. 

TttlNUMMUS, Act II. 

{d) Sdlipotcnti ct mtiltipotonti Iduis fratri aothorct 

Nuptuno 
La^tus lubuns laudoH ago gratas gi'dtisquo habeo 

ut fl(ictibu.s.salsiH. 
Qa6s pcno.s mei [i'uit] ])otu.sta.s, b(Sius muis (piid 

t'orot dt nioau uitac, 
Qu6m suis me ex locis in patriam urbcin <isquc 

incoluniL'Ui rt'duceiu fauiunt. 
Atquo tibi ego, Nopttino, anto alios dcos gratis 

ago atque hubeo .summas. 

Jbld, Act IV. 

2. Translate and explain : 

(1.) J'Jt ill'ic isti qui aputatur moibt^ interdum 
venit, 

(2,) Sine aacvis hereditatem sum aptua ecfertiaau- 
mam. 

(2). Poatld, frumenti quom alibi mesaia maximaat. 
Tribua tantia illi minua redit quam opneveria, 

(4) Ibit atatim aliquo in maxumam malam 
crucem, 
Latrocinatum aut in Aaiam aut in Ciliciam. 

3. Scan line 2 in extract (a) ; line 5 in (b) ; lino 4 in 
(c) ; and line 4 in (c^). Alention the four principal 
metres used by Plautus ; and give some account of the 



stylo of Hul)joctH for which thoy aro rospcctivoly oin- 
ployrd ; indicatii)}(, with illustmtiutiH, tliu litumry 
Nignificuncu of chiuigOH front ono inutru to unoihur. 

4. Oivo a conciHO oMtiinato of IMnutuw, (a) oh a liter- 
ary artist ; (/>) as a factor in tho I'uruiatiou of public 

charactur and nioralH. 

• 

5. Account for tho olworvanco of tho Unities of 
Time, Place, and Action, in tlie Greek and Roman 
drama ; and mention any important violations of any 
of these Unities, with illustrations from the Captivi 
and Trinummus. 

III. 

1. Translate with briof grammatical and explanatory 
notes where necessary. 

JUVKNAL: HATIRKS, VIII., X., XL, XII., XIII. 

(a) Consumtis opibus vocem, Bamasippe, locasti 
Hipnrio, clamosum agores ut Phasnm CatuUi. 
Liiureolum vclox otiam bono Lcntulus egit, 
Judice mo dignus vera cruce. Nee tamen ipsi 
Ignoscas populo : populi frons durior hujus, 
Qui scdot et spoctat triscurria patriciorum, 
Planipodes audit Fabios, ridere potest qui 
Mamercorum alapas. Quanti sua funera vendant, 
Quid rofort ? Vendunt nullo cogonte Norone, 
Nee dubitant celsi proBtoris vondore ludis. 
Finge tamen gladios inde, atquc hinc pulpita pone: 
Quid satius ? Mortem sic quisquam exhorrult, 

ut sit 
Zelotypus Thymeles, stupidi collcga Corinthi ? 

Sat. VIII. 

(6) Interca Mogalesiaca3 spectacula mappae, 
Ida3um sollemne, colunt, similisque triumpho 
Pr%da caballorum preetor sedet ac, mihi pace 
ImmonssB nimisequo licet si dicere plebis, 
Totam hodie Romam Circus capit et fragor aurem 
Percutit, eventum viridis quo colligo panni. 
Nam si deficoret moestam attonitamque videres 
Hanc urbem, veluti Cannarnm in pulvere victis 
Consulibus. 

Ibid., XI. 

[over.] 



(c) Scd si cimcta vides simili fora plena querela, 
Si, decies lectis diversa parte tabellis, 
Vana supervacui dicunt ohirographa ligni, 
Arguit ipsorum quos litera gemmaque princeps 
Sardonychum, loculis quae custoditur eburnis ; 
Ten', delicias, extra communia censes 
Ponendum ? • Jbid., XIII. 

2. Estimate the justice of Juvenal's attack upon the 
nobility in Satire VIII., having regard both to the 
satirist's point of view, and to any considerations 
which may be urged in palliation of the degeneracy of 
the upper classes. 

3. Outline and illustrate the effect of the despotism 
of the Empire upon literature. 



1 •• -1 



&nt\$nmt9 of {Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS. 



LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

HONORS. 






Examiner: William Dale, M.A. 



The proudest and most perfect separation which can 
be found in any age or country, between the nobles 
and the people, is perhaps that of the Patricians and 
Plebeians, as it was established in the first age of the 
Roman republic. Wealth and honors, the offices of 
the state, and the ceremonies of religion, were almost 
exclusively possessed by the former, who, preserving 
the purity of their blood with the most insulting 
jealousy, held their clients in a condition of specious 
vasalage. But the.se distinctions, so incompatible with 
the spirit of a free people, were removed, after a ong 
struggle, by the persevering eflforts of the Tribunes. 
The most active and successful of the Plebeians, ac u- 
mulated wealth, aspired to honors, deserved triumphs, 
and after some generations, assumed the pride of 
ancient nobility. The Patrician families, on the other 
hand, whose original number was never recruited till 
the end of the commonwealth, either failed in the ordi- 
nary course of nature, or were extinguished in so many 
foreign and domestic wars, or through a want of merit 
or fortune, insensibly mingled with the mass of the 
people. Very few remained who could derive their 
pure and genuine origin from the infancy of the city, 
or even from that of the republic, when Csesar and 
Augustus created from the body of the senate a com- 
petent number of new Patrician families, in the hope 
of perpetuating an order, which was still considered 



honorable and sacred. But these artificial supplies 
(in which the reigniny; house was always included) were 
rapidly swept away by the rnge of tyrants, by frequent 
revolutions, by the change of manners, and by the 
intermixture of nations. Little more was left when 
Coustantine ascended the throne, than a vague and im- 
perfect tradition, that the Patiicians had once been the 
first of the Romans. 



mni\)tvtntp of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIKD YEAR. 



Examiners . 



STATICS. 

HONORS. 



f IvA E. Martin, B.A. 
( A. C. McKay, B.A. 



1. Define yjw'ce and state how it is measured in statics. 
Find the relations between three forces in equilibrium 

acting on a particle. 

If Ji be the resultant of any number of forces, 

/*!, P2, P^i acting on a particle, prove that 

^2 = ^pi I 22/'i P2 cos 01.2 
where 6i,% is the angle between 1\ and P^. 

2. Find the condition of equilibrium of a particle acted 
on by any foices and constrained to remain on a given 
smooth curve. 

A particle rests on an ellipse acted on by forces 
Xa:"' /u»/"' parallel to the axes of x and y respectively ; find 
its position of equilibrium. 

3. The sum of the virtual works of any number of forces 
acting at a point is equal to the virtual work of the result- 
ant. 

Deduce from the principal of virtual work the condi- 
tion of equilibrium of a system of forces acting on a particle. 

4. Define Force Polygon, Funicular Polygon, Astatic 
Equilibrium, Astatic Centre. 

Find the astatic centre of a System of Coplanar forces 
acting on a rigid body. 

5. Two equal carriage wheels whose centres are connected 
by a smooth bar are placed on a rough inclined plane ; deter- 
mine whether the equilibrium of the system will be best 
preserved by locking the hind or the fore yheel, 



6. Define a moment of a force and couple. 

Find the resultant of any ntimber of couples acting 
in any planes on a rigid body. 

7. Prove tliat a system of forces can be reduced in an 
inKnito nuiiibor of ways to a pair of equal forces, whose 
directions make any assigned angle with one another ; and 
find the distance between these forces when the angle is 
given. 

Determine tiie central axis where there are two forces 
P and Q whose lines of action are defined by z = c, y = x, 
tan a, and z = — c, 1/ => — x tan a lespec lively. 

8. Find an expression for the centre of mass of an arc of 
a curve. 

Determine the coordinates of the centre of mass of the 

c / 5. * 



H 



2\e'^ 



+ 



^ between the points (0, c) and 



curve y -. 

9. A string is stretched over a rough plain curve ; find 
the tension at any ])oint, and the pressure on the curve in 
the limiting position of equilibrium. 

Two equal weights P, Q are connectad by a string 
without -veiglit which passes over a rough fixed horizontal 
cylinder compare the focus required to raise P according as 
P is pushed up or Q pulled down. 

10. Find the resultant attraction of a homogeneos spheri- 
cal shell of verv snjall thickness on a particle outside the 
shell. 

Deduce the resultant attraction of a sphere on a par- 
ticle outside it. 



canftiev0ittt of Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



PARTICLE DYNAMICS AND NKWTON. 

HONORS. 



1 



„ . f IVA E. Mahtin, B.A. 

Examiners: | a. C. McKay. B.A. 



PARTICLE DYNAMICS. 

1. A point moves in a plane curve, find the component 
Hccplerations (a) alontj and purpemlicular to tlio tangent, (/>) 
along and perpendicular to tli<! radius victor. 

2. Express in mutliciuatical form the inferences drawn 
from the laws of motion, wliicli give the equation of motion 
of a particle. 

Compaie the tensions of a string to which a mass is 
attached which revolves round a point in a horizontal jircio 
ten times in a second with the weight of the mass itself, the 
string being a yard long. 

3. A particle is constrained to move in a straight line, 
and is acted on by an attraction directed to a point not in 
that line, and expressed by a function (?•) of the distance. 
Determine tha time of a small oscillation. 

Find the time of quickest descent down a focal chord 
of a parabola whose axis is vertical. 



4. Prove the equation -rrri 4- « 

a0^ 



-5- and find 



an ex- 



pression for the velocity. 

Three forces u\D, u^D, uj) reside in fixed points, and 
a partitcle is projected in any direction ; prove that the 

periodical time is 



\/u\ -+• t*J + ttg 



6. Prove' tliat tlie velocity in the hodograph ih the nccele- 
ration in the curve. 

The hodograpli of a particle moving in an elipse about a 
centre of attraction in tli<« focus is a circle. 

The liodograph is a circle deHcribed with constant an- 
gular velocity about a point in its circumference, find the 
original path. 

6. A string of length I hangs over a smooth peg so as to 
be at rest. One end burns away at a uniform I'ato v. Shew 
that the other end will, at time /, bufore the whole slip.s oS* 
the peg, be at a depth x below the peg given by the equation 



,, Jdh' , V . dx 



dl 



2(/.x. the unit of length of the 



string conttiining the unit of mass. 

NEWTON. 

7. If a body bo revolving in an olHpse, find the law of 
centripetal forco tending to the cuntro of the ellipse. 

A body describes an ellipse about a centre of force in 
the centre ; prove that if y, -y', bo two radii victore.s and a 
the angle between them, the time of describing the inter- 



cejited 



arc 



1 

-=-. sni 
\/tt 



_j 7. 7'. sin a 
ah 



8. A body is moving in a parabola, find the law of force 
tending to the focus. 

The ratio of the axes of the orbits of two planets is 
18 : 13 ; find the period time of one when that of the other 
is given. 



i). 



?JitiiUfV0iti> of 3:ototito. 



.\NNrAL EXAMINATIONS; ISOI. 



TiriRD YEAR. 



GEOMETRICAL OPTICS. 

. HONORS, 



„ . f A. C. Mc'Kav, B.A. 

Examiners: j^ ^ ^^^^^,^^^^ g^ 



1. State the laws of ordinary refraction. Sliow that 
the deviation pro(hiced by a single refraction inci'eas(>.s 
as the angle of incidence increases, and tliat the devia- 
tion increases faster and faster as the angle of refraction 
increases uniformly. 

2. Show that the deviation is a minimnm when a 
ray of light passes through n prism in a principal plane, 
making the angles of incidence and emergence equal. 

When the incident ray is nearly perpendicular to 
one face of a prism of small angle, show that the 
deviation is proportional to the angle of the prism and 
is independent of the angle of incidence, 

3. Show how to measure the refractive index of a 
prismatic solid. 

How could you determine the refractive index of 
an irregular fragment of a transparent mineral ? 

4. Find the conditions that two lenses made of 
different kinds of glass, and placed close together, may 
be achromatic for two given colours. 

Show that when light is refracted at a plane sur- 
face, the di.spersion is proportional to the tangent of 
the angle of refraction. 

o. Describe Huyghens' eye-px^ce. 

Draw a figure showing the course of tiie rays of 
light through a compound microscope with a Huyghens' 
eye-piece. 



What Jirc* iintiiersion objoctives? What object is 
JitfcaiiKid by their use ? 

0. The range of vision of an unassisted short-sighted 
eye beinjjj given, determine the range when a double 
concave lens of given focal length is placed close to the 
eye. 

Under what circumstances does one require dif- 
ferent spectacles for reading and for viewing distant 
objects ? 

7. Account fully for the formation of the second- 
ary rainbow. 

What is a caustic surface ? 

Find the caustic when parallel light falls on a 
concave spherical reflector. 

8. Find the ab:n'ratiori of a pencil which passes 
obliquely tlirongh a plate of given thickness. 

Find the aberration of a pencil directly reflected 
at a spherical surface. 

0. Describe any connnon form of Heliostat. 



• \ 



^tituit0ft|? of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATION.S : 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



HYDROSTATICS. 

HONORS. 



,, I IvA E. Martin, B.A. 

hxaimners: |^ ^ ^^.^-^^^ ^^ 



1. Oiitain an expression for tlie pressure at any point of a 
fluid acted upon by any system of forces. 

A vessel coiitixiiiin<:f liquid moves vertically upwards 
with an uniform acceleration, find the piessure at any point. 

2. Define Potential. Linen of Force.. Surfaces of Equal 
Pressure. Level Surface. 

Prove that a necessary condition of e(pulibriura is that 
the lines of Force may be the noi-mals to the Surfaces oj 
Equal Pressure. 

The source of the Mississi))pi River is nearer the centre 
of the earth than the mouth is. What can be inferred fiom 
this about the slope of Level Surfaces on the earth ? 

3. Find an expression foi- the whole pressure, and the 
position of the point at which it may be supposed to act on 
a given plane. 

If A B C D {a the section of a reservoir wall, the vertical 
face of which {B C) is towards the water ; the width of the 
top of the '.-," (j> i<)\& a; the inclination of AD to the 
vertic'u is y, aud >; is ue specific giavity of the material of 
the wa.]] ; ssov.' thp*^ 
■wall the equ(>t on o" 



( - -i- t^ 



ianij/ 



The axes of x and 



■vs.uL the water reaches the top of the 
the 111 1 3 of resistance is 

3x {y—a) tan — 3a {2y — a) = 0. 
being BC and BA lespectively. 



\ 



) 



] 



4. Find the conditions of equilibrium of a body floating 
in a fluid. 

A body when suspended from an extremity of an 
elastic string, whose natural length is a, stretches the string 
to a lenth na. If the body be now susj tended from a point 
whose height above the surface of a fluid is a, shew that it 



will sink to a depth a (n — 2 
fluid is ii~^. 



71-^) if the density of the 



5. Define Surface of Floatation, Surface of Buoyancy, and 
Metacentre. 

A solid, floating at rest in a homogeneous liquid, is 
made to turn through a very small angle in a given vertical 
plane ; determine whether the fluid pressure will tend to 
restore it to its original position or not 

6. State the laws regulating (1) The pressure of gases at 
different temperatures. (2) The pressure of the mixture of 
gases. (3) The pressure of gases at diffident volumes. 

A cylindrical diving bell, of height a, is sunk in water, 
until the water rises half-way up the axis ; find the depth, 
the height of the water barometer being h. 

If the temperature of the air in the cylinder be raised 

t", shew that the water receiles a distance equal to 

'2a he t , 

— ; — — nearly. 
2/t 4- a ^ 

7. A flexible surface of any foi-m is exposed to the action 
of a liquid ; find tlie relation between the pressure, principal 
tensions, and the curvatures in the directions of these tensions 
at any point. 

Equal quantities of the same material are formed into 
two thin splieiical vessels of given radii ; compare the great- 
est fluid pressure they will sustain. 

8. State the laws governing the theory of the existence of 
a surface tension. 

Obtain the equation to the capillary curve in the form 

2s 

1> 



tan 



tan ~ 
4 



Explain the possibility of floating a needle on the sur- 
face of water. 



) 



Wimy^tvMp of Cotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



lUGlD DYNAMICS. 

HONORS. 



Examiners 



J A. C. McKay, B.A. 
tl. E. Mautin.B.A. 



1. Define moment of inertiu, radiuH of (jyvaiion. 
Show tliat the moment of inertia of an elliptic lamina 
about a tangent varie.s as the squaiu of the perpendic- 
ular from the centre on the tangent. 

If the momentnl ellipsoid of a l)ody, at the centre 
of in(;rtia, is a spheroid, there exists in the body a 
point such tliat the moments of inertia about all a.\es 
through it are the same. 

2. Any displacement whatever of a rigid body may 
be reduced to a tianslation and a rotation about an 
axis. 

Explain fully the principle known as " The paral- 
lelogram of angular velocities." 

3. Show that if a rigid body be thrown vertically 
up from the earth, the motion of the cer^tre of gravity 
will not be afiected by any rotation the body may 
have. 

4. A cube is swinging freely, suspended from one 
edge in the horizontal position. B'ind the length of 
the equivalent simple pendulum. 

What is the least angular velocity when in the 
lowest position, that the cube may make a complete 
revolution ? 



^ 



( 



5. Define centre of percuasion. 

Find the centre of pereuHsion of a triangular lam- 
ina, one of the sides being the axi.H of rotation. Find 
the centre of percussion of n uniform rod, freely sus- 
pended from one end. 

6. Determine the general e(|uation8 of motion of a 
cube, free to move about a point midway between the 
centie and one corner. 

Determine the pressure on the point for any given 
motion. 

7. A rigid body is moving freely in space, when 
suddenly a point becomes fixed. Determine the initial 
subsequent motion. 

A cube rolls on a perfectly rough plane. Show 
that when the axis of rotation changes from one edge 
to another, the angular velocity is reduced in the ratio 
one-fourth. 

8. A body is moving freely about a fixed point, 
under the action of no im])ressed forces. PCxplain 
Poinsot'.s representation of the motion. 

9. A roiigli spliere of radius a, rolls in a vertical 
plane in a horizontal cylindur of radius /;. Show that 
the period of small oscillations is 



2^ J' 



7 {b -a ) 

5 g " 

10. A heavy uniform string hangs at rest over a 
.smooth peg. Suddenly one fourth of the string on 
one side is cut off. Find the instantaneous change of 
pressure on the peg. 



( 1 



i / 



S.inftiet0f(tf of Soronio. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 181)1. 



THiHI) YEAR. 



PHYSICS. 



jc'^.^v. 3 A. C. McKay, B.A. 



1. Distingiiixli sluuiotv, umhrn, ppiuonhrn. " When suii- 
li'^ht passos throut,'li the spucoH IwitWfcu tin* leaves ot treus, 
circular piitulios of lij^lit aro mwn on tlin ^loiind." Why ? 

2. .Statu thd laws of rcHt^L'tiou of light. 

81iow wjjy tilt! iiniiy;t! of mi oWjecjt placed befoio ti plane 
mii't'or is foiinud at an etiual distanoo l)chin I the mil ror. 

3. What is the focal loujtk of a uoiicavu uiinor \ Find 

the torniula -f = • 

I' u r 

Draw a tigur ■ sliowiuy tlui position ami size of the 
image of a ciiidlc, formed by r«Hoi:ti(iti in a coiioave mirror. 

4. 8how how to determine! practioally the focal iongtli of 
a convex lens. 

E.xplain the principle of the simple microscope. 

Distinguish real and virtual images. 

5. Mako a drawing of a magic lantern, showing carefully 
the use of all essiaitial parts. 

6. What IS meant by the strength of the cnrrent produced 
by a given cell .' 

Will two cells in the circuit prnduc? liouble the current? 

7. Describe a connuoii form of the tangent galvanometer. 

Show why the tangent of the angle of deflection is 
proportional to the strength of the current. 

H. Define potential, electromotive J orce, resistance. 

De.scribe the construction of a direct-reading volfc-meter 

y. What is meant by declination and inclination as applied 
to the magnetic needle? 

Define intensity of the magnetic field. 
Why is a magnetic needle tleticcteil by an electric 
current 1 






IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 






/ 











1.0 



1.1 



■a Bi^ W2.2 
2.0 









6" 



■> 






J 



»" ^ 




^^'»*' 

^ 





y 




FkjlDgrapliic 

Sciences 

CGrpocation 






i\ 



4V 



^. 





<^ 



-r^ 

O <* 

^ 



^^V 




3: WIST MAIN STREIT 

WfBSTIR,N.Y. 14SM 

(7I«)«72-4S03 







;\ 



( 



i 



nni^nnlta of Saronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



PROBLEMS. 

HONORS. 



„ . f IvA E. Martin, B.A. 

^«'«'^*^^^«-|a.C. McKay. B.A. 



s:0. 



1. If forces P, Q, B acting at the centre of a circular 
lamina along the radii OA, OB, OC be equivalent to foices 
PS Q^, R^ acting along th« sides BC, CA, AB of the inscribed 
triangle, shew that 

P.P' Q.Q^ R.R^ 
BC "^ CA ^ AB 

2. Two weights P, Q, of similar material, resting on a 
rough double inclined plane, are co:inected by a fine string 
passing over the coniniou vertex, and Q is. on the point of 
motion down tha plane : prove that the greatest weight 
which can be added to P without disturbing the equilibrium is 

P sin 2j , sin (« 4- /5) 
sin [a — e) . sin /S — e) ' 
a, fi being the angles of inclination of the planes and e the 
angle of friction. 

3. A very small bar of matter is moveable about one 
extremity which is fixed ha'fway between two centres of 
force attracting inversely as the square of the distance ; if / 
be the length of the bar, and 2a the distance between the 
centres of force, prove that there will be four ])ositions of 
equilibrium if the ratio of the absolute intensity of the more 
powerful force be to that of the less powerful is greater than 

a ■\- 21 

a - 21 ' 

4. A heavy perfectly elastic particle is dropped from a 
point within a smooth fixed sphere which is distant hori- 
zontally |\/3 - ■^'j times the radius from the centre : prove 
that it will retrace its path after two rebounds. 



C: 



I 



-M«Mil«)ite<>*iii>i 



I 



6. A uniform string is placed on the arc of a smooth 
curve in a vertical plane and moves under the actiou of 
gravity : prove that the equation of motion is 

I being the length of the string, « the arc described by any 
point of it at a time t, and yi,y2, the depths of its ends 
below a fixed horizontal st. line. 

6. A liquid is acted on by two central forces, each vary- 
ing as the distance from a fixed point and equal at equal 
distances from these points, one attractive and one repulsive ; 
prove that the surfaces of equal pressure are planes. 

7. A uniform rod rests in an oblique position with half 
its length immersed in liquid and can turn freely about a 
point ill its length whose distance from the lower end is one- 
sixth of the length ; compare the densities of the rod and 
liquid and prove that the eq.iilibrium is stable. 

8. In viewing a small object with a convex lens of 1 inch 
focus the lens is ^ inch from the eye, and |th of an inch 
from the object. Determine tlie mugnifying power under 
tliese conditions. 

9. One end of a heavy rod rests on a horizontal plane 
and against a vertical wall. All the surfaces being smooth, 
if the rod slips down determine the motion. 

10. A uniform rod of length 2a can turn freely about one 
extremity. In its initial j)osition it makes an angle of 90° 
with the vertical, and is projected horizontally with angular 
velocity w ; show that the least angle it makes with the 
vertical is given by the equation 'Itau)'^ cos Q =i Sg sin* 0. 

11. A sphere is projected obliquely down a rough inclined 
plane, the motion being pure rolling ; detei-mine the friction 
brought into play, and the path, neglecting the couple of 
rolling friction. 



a 
i- 
kre 



( 



c 



2nnf\ierfiiUj^ of {Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



ENGLISH. 



Examiners : { ^; ^ Alexander. Ph.D. 



Dewart, B.A. 



1. State the main changes which came over the 
thoiisfht and form of literature in the second half of 
the Eighteenth Century, and show how these are exem- 
plified in the lending writings of the time. 

2. With regard to eiout of the following quotation 
name the writer, the work from which each is taken, 
and indicate the connection in which the passage 
appears, 

(a) blest retirement, friend to life's decline, 
Retreats from care that never must be mine, 
How happy he, who crowns in shades like those, 
A youth of labour with an age of ease ; 
Who quits a world where strong temptations try, 
And since 'tis hard to combat learns to fly ! 

(h) Me,let the tender office long engage, 
To rock the cradle of reposing Age, 
With lenient arts extend a mother's breath. 
Make Languor smile, and smooth the bed of Death. 

(e) But when to mischief mortals bend their will, 
How soon they find fit instruments of ill ! 

(d) What cannot praise effect in mighty minds. 

When flattery soothes and when ambition blinds ? 
Desire of power, on earth a vicious weed. 
Yet sprung from high is of celestial seed ; 
In God 'tis glory, and when men aspire 
'Tis but a spark too much of heavenly tire, 



(e) Fate never wounds more tleep fche jren'roiis heart ; 
Than when a blockhead's insult points the flart. 

(/)Say why are Beauties praisM and honourM most 
The wise man's passion, and the vain man's toast ? 
Why deck'd with all that land or sea aftbrd, 
Why Angels call'd and Angel-like ador'd ? 
Why round ourconches crowd the white-glov'd beaux 
Why bows the side box from the inmost rows ; 
How vain are all these glories, all our pains, 
Unless good sense preserve what beauty gains ! 

(</) Better to hunt in fields for health un bought 
Than fee the doctor for a nauseous draught. 
The wise for cure on exercise depend ; 
God never made his work for man to mend. 

(h) But knowledge to their eyes her ample page 
Rich with the spoils of time did ne'er unroll. 

(t) The mighty master smiled to see 
That iove was in the next degree ; 
'Twas but a kindred sound to move, 
For pity melts the mind to love. 

(j) With arms .sublime, that float upon the air, 
In gliding state she wins her easy way ; 
O'er her warm cheek, and rising bosom, move 
The bloom of young Desire, and purple light of Love 

(k) Beyond the measure vast of thought. 
The works, the wizard Time haJs wrought ! 

The Gaul, 'tis held of antique story 
Saw Britain link'd to his now adverse strand, 

No sea between, nor cliff" sublime and hoary 
He pass'd with unwet feet through ^1 our land. 

(l) Nowair is hush'd, savewhere theweak-ey'd bat, 
With short shrill shriek flits by on leathern wing. 

3. Tell with the greatest possible conciseness what 
you know of six of the following : 

JJudibraft, Covgreve, Young's Night Thoughts, Pil- 
grim's Progress, Tristram Shamhj, Pepy's Diary, 
Hind and Panther, Osstan, Bishop Berkeley. 

4. (a) Narratf^ very concisely the life of Pope ; (b) 
describe his personal character, (c) and liis liteiarv 
meiits and defects, 



ft. (a) DoKcribo in a general way the character of the 
" Speciafov" Ensnys, and (/>) nreservinj,' in as far as you 
can the spirit ol tlie original, either describe Sir Roger 
(le Cover'.ey, or reproduce any one of the Essays 
devoted to him. 

(J. EiTHEii show tlie satiric power and other merits 
of Swift's Voyage to Lillipv.t, 

Or show in what respects tlie Rape of the Lock, 
(which has been called the " Epos of Society in the 
reign of Queen Anne") is particularly representative 
and characteristic of its own age. 



Stn(Vierofttf of ^Toroitto 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: ISIU. 



TlIIUl) YI3AR. 



fJxanilners: 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS. 

( W. J. Ai.KXANDKii. PhD. 
"I H. H. Dewaut, B.A. 



A. 

1. (Jimtru.sfc till! two jiiK'ts 'riioinson aiul C/owper Ity 
pointing oiifcdifJeruiiee.s in matter and nuinnor between 
J^ook ] V. oi' the S('<i!U)ii» {Winter) and Book VI. of the 
Tdnlc ( Whilcr W<tll,- at JS'oon), illnstnitiug fully by 
detinito rcleivnces to ])oints and passages in the two 
Books njentioned. 

2. Give a critic d estimate of Goldsniith'.s Vicar of 
Wakeficlii, and point ont resemblances between his 
novel and his poems. 

3. Exemplify fj'om liis speiicli on A)ncrti:(in Tiua- 
t'ion, the charaetei'istics of l^tirke's intellect, of his style, 
and of his political principles. 

4. Name the writers, point out the stylistic pecu- 
liarities, the merits and defects of each of the following- 
passages : — 

(a) But there are other judges who think I ought 
not to have translated Chaucer into English, out of a 
quite contrary notion. Tlu^y suppose there is a certain 
veneration due to his old language ; and that it is little 
less than profanation and sacrilege to alter it. They 
are farther of ojiinion that somewhat of his good sense 
wid suli'er in tiiis transfusion, and much of the beauty 
of his thougiiis will infallibly be lost, which appear 
with more grace in their old habit. Of this opinion 
^vas that exocileiit jierson whom I mentioned, the late 
Earl of Leicestoi-, u ho valued Chaucer as much as Mr, 



CowU'V (loHpiMcl Mill. My 1<»i(l <lis',uiul(Ml hk; From 
this iitttMiipt (I'or I WHS tliiiikiiij^ dI' it somf yi'iiis licforo 
hi.s (loutlij, iiiul his iiutliori'A- picviiik'd so far with iiio 
as to (U-'fiT my un(h'rtiil<iii;^' whik- ho livt'il.iii tlci't-ri'iu'c* 
to liiin. Yi't my rcavinii wii.s not (H)iiviiu'i'(l with what 
he urirud a<rainst it. It' tht* tirst fiid ot a wiiu-r is to 
bo undorstnod, then, aH his hiii;4Ua<|t' <j;i'()Ws obsolute, 
Ills tliouj^lits nnist grow oliuiiit'. Wlu-ii nil niiitioiit 
word for its soniid and si'MiiHcaiicv di^sorvt-s to he 
revivod, I have that reasonable vi.'noratioii for anti- 
quity to rt'stonj it. All beyond this is siiporstitioii. 
Words are not like landmarks, so sacrod as never to bu 
removed. (./'uHtoms are ehaii;,f(.d ; and even .statutes 
are silently repealed, when the reason ceases for which 
they were (inacted. As to (he other ]iart til' the ary;u- 
ment, that his thon^ht will lose of their orii.jinjil l)eauty, 
by the renovation of words: in the first plai-e, not only 
their beauty, but their being is lost, wlien they are no 
longer tinderstood ; whi(!h is tlio present case. I grant 
that .something must be lost in all transfusion, that is, 
in all translations ; but the sense will remain, which 
would otherwise be lost, or at least bo maimed, when 
it is scarce intelligible, and that but to a few. How 
few are theio who can read Chaucer ,so as to under- 
stand him perfectly ! And if imperfectly, then with 
le.ss profit ami no ])leasure. 'Tis not for use of .some 
old Saxon friends that 1 have taken the.se pains with 
him : let them neglect .ny version, because they have 
no need of it. 1 made it for their sakes who under- 
stand .sen.se and i)oetry as well as they, when that 
p<jetry and sense is put into words which they under- 
stand. 

(b) Yet these failures, however fretiuent, may 
admit extenuation and apology. To havci attempted 
much is always laudable, even when the enterprise is 
above the strength that undertakes it ; to rest below his 
own aim is incident to everyone who.se fancy is active, 
and whose views are comprehensive ; nor is any man 
.satisfied with him.self because ho has done much, but 
becau.se he can conceive little. When first I engagc-d 
in this work, I resolved to leave neither words nor 
things unexamined, and pleased my.self with a pros- 
pect of the hours I .should revel away in feasts of 
literature, the ob.sctire recesses of Northern learning 
which T .should enter and ran.sack, the treasures with 
which I expected every search int(j those neglected 



/ 



/ 



iniiuis to rowftvd nty lalxnir, and tlio ttnini|»li with 
wliicli I slioiiM display my ac(|iii.sition.s to inruikind. 
Wlum 1 Imd tlnis iii(|\uiiM| into tJ\<< orij^inid of words. I 
n'.solvcil to ])i('rci! dct-p into every scicnci', lo in(|niri( 
tli(! natui'c of (ivcry substanci' of which I iii.si'rti'd the 
name, to limit every idea l»y a definition strict!}' loj^'i- 
ual, and t!xhil)it cvcfvy production of ait or nature in 
an ac(Mirat(; deHcrription. that my l)))ok mi^ht he in 
phice of all other dictionaries, wlietlii'V appellative or 
technical. Hut these wer<! the dreams of a poet 
doomed at last to wnktf le.xicojifiaplier. I soon t'oii'id 
that it is too late to look for instruments when the 
work calls for e.\eeution, and that wluitever ahllitie.M J 
ha<l brouj^ht to the my task, with those 1 nnist finally 
perfoim it. To deliherate whenev(.'r I douhted, to 
iiKpiin; whenever 1 was it'iioi-ant, would have protract- 
ed the undertakiuLf without (ind, and, perhaps, without 
improv(Mnent ; foi I did not find l)y my first experi- 
ments, that what 1 hiul not of my own was easily to 
he obtained ; 1 saw that one inquiry only <.javo occasion 
to anothei", that book referred to book, that to search 
was not always to find, and to Hnd was nut always to 
be informed ; nnd that thus to pursue perfection, was, 
like the tii'st inhabitants of Arcadia, to chase the sun, 
which when they had reached the hill whore he seemed 
to rest, was still beheld at the same distance from thorn. 

B. 

5. Describe the character of Lady Macbeth, and her 
infiuence in the development of the plot. 

G. Name the speaker of each of the following' pass- 
ages, and indicate the circumstances under which it is 
uttered ; also express concisely and accurately in your 
own words the meaninf^ of each passage : 

(a) My thought, whose murther yet is but fantastical, 
Shakes so my single state of man that function 
Is smothered in surmise 

(b) All that impedes thee from the golden round 
Which fate and metaphysical aid doth seem 
To have thee cro'vn'd withal 

(c) The love that follows us sometime is our troul)le, 
Which still we thank as love. Herein I teach you 
How you shall bid God 'ield us for your paiii^ 
Anil thank us for your trouble. 



(V/) Come, fate, into the list 

And champion me to the utterance 

(c) In .such bloody distance 

That every minute nChis being thrusts 
A<:?ainst my nenr'st of life 

7. Desovibe as vividly as you can the Banqueting 
scene. 






s^m^rtjfttt of SToroKto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1S9I. 



THIRD YEA.R. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS. 



r, . f David R. Keys, M.A., 

Lmminevs: -J ^ ^ Dewart, M.A. 






ANGLO-SAXON. 
I. 

1. Wliat causes led to the study of Anglo Saxon in 
the 16th century < Sketch the progress of the study 
up the present tinie. 

2. How did Anglo Saxon conson.uits differ in pro- 
nunciation from their English modern representatives ? 

3. Write down the mutation forms of a, ea, o, 5, eo, 
and give examples of words thus related. Explain the 
cause of mutation. Compare English with Gothic 
Icelandic, and 0. H. G. in this regard. (Jite instances 
of u umlaut in Anglo Saxon. 

4. What is meant l)y the expression " 0. E. original 
a" ? By what phonetic laws has this « been influenced, 
and what are its common modern forms ? 

5. Give the A. S. gradation series with illustrations. 
Explain the vowel change in feallan. . f6oll. 

6. Give rules for gender in A. S. Account for the 
gender of God, wif, mona, cildhad, wifmann, deofol. 

7. Give Sweet's classification of strong nouns, and 
compare with that of Sievers. 

8. Translate and derive accounting for the phonetic 
changes, forma, other, fifta, siexta, eahta, endlufon. 



9. Decline in full the inteirogative [U'onouns inclu'.l- 
ing hwelc. 

10. Translate and give principal parts of boatan, 
beoclan, bidan, biddan, bitan, fieogu-i, tleon, sloan, swe- 
rian, teran. 

11. What in the force of the following prefixes and 
suffixes : H'g-, for-, to-, -ing, -nth, -unga. 

12. How is the genitive used in A. 8. ? 

13. How did the A. S. use of tenses differ from that 
in Modern English i 

II. 
Translate : 

Se mona his leoht ne Holth and deon'an of 
heofone iealhth. He for-Iet call woruld-^Mng. 
Gif se biscop d^th be his agnum willan and wile 
bindan thone unscyldigaii and thouG scyldigan alie- 
san, thonne for-liest he tlia, mild tha him God for- 
geaf. Se llchama, the is tiiveve sawle reaf, and- 
hld&th thwH miclan domes, and theah he beo to 
duste formolsnod, God hine drwrth. Ttvegen menn 
eodon into Godes temple hie to gebiddenne. Se 
witega uwrat be /Aami fuower nietenum tliQ him 
atiewdu wreron, i/iset hie hn'fdcn eagan him on 

idee healfe. '' Hwone secga^A menn ^/tset sle man- 
nes Sunu ? " Hie scufon ut lilera scipu and gew- 

endon him begeondan s«e. God is us her to beonne. 

1. Write etymological notes on the words in itcdics. 

2 Parse beo, to gebiddenne, atiewdu, luefden, sie, God. 

3. Explain the change in construction that is levealed 
by comparing the above passage with the English 
translation. 

III. 

Translate : 

Sum cwen wa;s on su^A-dsele, Saba gehaten, 
snotor and wis. Tha gehierde heo Salomones 
hlisan and com fram f/uvm su/Aernum genuvrum 
to Salomone binnan Ilienisalem mid micelre fare 

and hiere olfendas bteron anthevnc wyrta and 
deorwierthe gimm-stanas and ungerTm gold. Seo 
cwen thii lia^fde spra'ce \v\tli Salomon and smgde 
him swfi hwa;t swu heo on hiere heortan ge^/tohte. 






Salomon tldi liie Icevde and hiere seegde ealra thara. 
worda and^iet the h6o hine Twcode. Tlai geseah 
sgo cwen Salomones wisdom and thmt iiiaere tem- 
pel the he getimbrod luefde and tha lac the man 
God oflVode, and thaea cyningen nianigfealde 
f/iegnunga and wmn to thmm swI/Ae of-wundred 
thsBt I160 naefde i'ui//tor nanne gast for thximthe, 
heo Miihte nfi fvLvthor smean. Hgo cwu-^/t tha, to 
thssiin cyninge : Hoth is thtet word the ic gehierde 
on minum eavdebe tin and be ^/dnurn wI.sdome,ac 
ic nolde gellefan ser theeni the ic self hit gesawe. 
Nu ha>bbe ic afandod thivt mC najs be healfum 
dajle thin mvertho geiytheii. Mare it 'thin wisdom 
and thin weorc #/ionne so hlisa wtere the ic gehi- 
erde. Eadige sind thine f/tegnas and thine thSo- 
was the simle setforan the standa^/i^ and ^/:inne 
wisdom gehlev&^.h. Gebl6tsod sle se aelmihtiga 
God, the the geceas and gesette ot'er Israhela rice ; 
thxt thin domas sette and rihtwisnesse. 

1. Illustrate from the above extract the A. S. usage 
in respect {a) of the declension of adjectives, (6) of the 
employment of the subjunctive mood. 

2. Give principal parts and conjugation of all strong 
verbs. 

V. 

Translate : 

Tha comon on sumne siel ungesselige theoH&H 
eahta on anre uihte to thmm arweor^Aan lialgan : 
woldon wtelan thii maf/anas the nxenn thider broh- 
ton, and cunnodon mid crsefte hic hu inn cuman 
mihten. Sum slog mid slecge awithe tha hfespan, 
sum hiera mid feolan feolode ymb iltan, sum eac 
under dealf tha duru mid spadan sum hiera mid 
hlseddre wolde on-lucan thmi eag-thyvel ; ac hie 
swuncon on Idel and earmlice ferdon, swa thoit se 
halga wer hie wundorllce geband telone swa h6 
stod strutiendne mid tole thset hiera nan ne mihte 
thset morth gefremman ne hie fh&non ilstyrian ac 
stodon swa oth mergen. 

1. Parse stel, mihten, s-wlfhe, strutiendne, lifespan. 

2. Cunnodon, wolde. Conjugate these verbs in full. 
Account as far as you can for their peculiarities. 



3. Write etymological notes on nngeseelige, menn, 
Hwlthe, 6ac, duru, eag — thyrc], swuncon, wer. 

4. What trace of Latin may here be found ? Refer 
to other evidences furnished by the Primer of the 
foreign elements in Anglo Saxon. 

5. Show the poetical character of this extract. Who 
was its author ? 






8Anftiet0fti;^ of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



HISTORY. 



Examiner: E. C. Jeffrey, B.A. 



Note. — Candidates may write on five of the questions only. 

1. Discuss the settlement and political development 
of Canada, up to the passage of the British North 
Anierica Act. 

2. Recount the causes and results of North German 
federation. 

3. Outline the effects of the French Revolution and 
the American War of Independance, upon British 
North American history. 

4. Contrast the colonial histories of England and 
France. 

5. Trace the growth of democratic government in 
modern Europe. 

6. Describe the influences which made for Canadian 
federation. 



/" 



SlnfUerttfta^ oC Cotonto< 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



HISTORY. 

HONORS. 



ij» ,« r^k 



V 



\ 



Examiner: H. H. Dew art, B.A. 



1. Give the principal provisions of the Peace of 
\Vosti)halia and discuss its effect upon subsequent 
European history. 

2. Contrast the political importance and territorial 
power of Spain at the death of Philip II., and in 1815. 

3. (a) Give an account of the origin of the Seven 
Years' war, and detail the leading circumstances of the 
war in America, (b) What was its exact effect upon 
the territorial power of England and France respec- 
tively upon this continent ? 

4. Point out the effects of the French Revolution 
upon (a) France, (b) Europe, (c) America. 

5. What were the causes and results of North Ger- 
man Federation ? 

6. Give an account of the rise and establishment of 
responsible parliamentary government in England. 

7. What were the principal provisions and political 
effects of the Quebec Act of 1774 ? 

8. Outline briefly the position of affairs in Canada 
immediately prior to the time of Lord Durham's Report, 
and give the most important features and results of this 
report. 



( 



Jfr*%>f 



\ I 



{AttinrriQiUtf of Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 181)1. 



( 



\ 



THIKD VEAK. 



ANCIKNT HISTORY. 

HONORS. 



K 



Ei^,.,^ •,,.„. (William Dale, M.A. 
( R, J. Bon NEK, B.A. 



Note. — CaudidateH.ire lequestod to enclose the answerB to i^viestiom 
in Keotionn A and B in aepariite envelopes. Not more 
than four nuestioua in section A art' to be uttempted. 
Dates are required wlierever necessary. 

A. 

1. Translate : " jS'eqae dmn. UoAiitibaL in Italia 
moratur, neque iHoximis pout, exccssam eiiiH tninis, 
vacavit JiomauLs coloniafi comlere ; etna I'tiset in hello 
cotiquirendun potian luiU.s, qiuvfa dimittendii.s, et post 
helium vires re/ovendae matjis, qamii ttpaiyeadco:." 

(a) What colonics were founded during the period 
(264-168 B.C.) f VVlmt was the object of e.ich, and to 
wiiioh class ot colonies did eacli belong ? 

(6) Describe the condition of Italy at the close of 
the Second Punic War. 

(c) Distinguish between aTroiKui, colonia and 
colony. 

2. (a) Give an account of the rise and growth of the 
Carthaginian Empire up to the time of the First Punic 
War. 

(6) Compare the condition of the allies and sub- 
jects of Carthage with that of the allies and subjects 
of Rome. 



Translate : ^rjfieiov Be TroXiretav avifTerayfiivrf^ rh 
rov h^fiop i-)(ov(Tav (hc. Ti)f toXiv) Siafxiueiv iv rfj rd^ei 
T!)<i TToXtTciav, Koi /nijre cndanv 6, ti kuI a^iov uinlv, 
yeyturjadai fiijTe ivpawov. 

Is this remark tru<; of Carthage ? 

3. IVaiislate: On, Sclpioiiem cum pnllin crepUluqiie 
inanibiddi'c in (jipnnaulo, libellis cum palaedi'iieque 
operayn dare: tuque mifnitrr molliterqut' vohortem 
totam Si/racuaariim ,onoe)iitiile frui: Cartkuffhiem 
atque Hajirnhnlem ctvidistii' dc 'menwrlti : c.verritum 
omnem lAcentia corruptutn. What is the meaning of 
cohors 1 

Desciibe the career and character of Cn. Cornelius 
Scipio Africanus. 

4. (ft) Give the history of the dictatorship from B.C. 
218 onwards. 

(h) JJcHcribe the financial expedients of the Ronmn 
government during the becond Punic War. 

5. Give an account of the; life, writinffs and character 
of Marcus Porcius Cato. 

6. Describe the effects of HeUeu'iHin (the influence 
of Greece on Rome) during this period (a) in politics ; 
(6) in literature. 

Translate and explain : 

Sperna 'mores tranmiuirinoK, nnlle hahertt ojfuciaK. 
Cive Romano per orbem nemo v'unt rcctius. 
Quippe inaiim unum (^^afonem, quamtvecentos So- 
crataa. 

7. Estimate the economic effects of the conquests of 
this period (a) on the Romans proper ; (h) on the 
Italians generally. 

8. Trace the causes which h.'d to the outbreak of the 
Third Macedonian War, and describe the settlement of 
the affairs of the East at its close. 



t6 



im 
of 






r-^ 



NOTK.- 



B. 



Not more i\\n,nj0Hr nuuitinnM nro to he attempted, of 
two mimt be iioleotua from the Jii-itl Ikftf. 



irhioh 



1. Contrast tlio rulo of Spurtu with that of Atheas, 
Rtating clearly thu data upon which our knowledge of 
the riue of Sparta rests. 

2. Give an account of the conspiracy of Kinadon as 
told by Xenophon, showing, by suitable comments on 
interesting and suggestive points in the narrative, the 
light it throws on the internal condition of Sparta. 

3. (a) Note the principal defects in Xenophon as an 
historian. 

(6) Wliat circumstances peculiarly fitted him to 
be the histoiian of this period ? 

4. Describe the relations existing between Sparta 
and her Peloponecesian allies from the peace of 
Autalkidas to 3(j() B.C. 

6. Give a concise account of the rule of " The 
Thirty" in Atheas. 

Outline, and tli.scuss the ade(|uacy of, the defence 
of Theramenes. 

6. Trace the revival and progress of the naval power 
of Athens from 404 B.C. to 370 B.C., pointing out the 
causes and importance of each advance that was made. 

7. Account for the sudden ascendancy of Thebes. 

8. Compare the efficiency of Greek commanders and 
soldiers with that of Persian commanders and soldiers, 
drawing your conclusions from the events of this 
period. 

Why did Greek commanders so seldom lay siege 
to a city ? 



h 



\ 



i I 



W:**.' 



tAniHtcMltv of Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONs- |Mt»|, 



A 



THIllD YEAH. 



FRENCH. 



Exanuntr : A. J. Bell, M.A., PhD, 



I. 

LA BRUY^RE, LKS CARACXfeRKH. 

Translate: (a). 

Un honmu* do la cour qui n'apasun asscz beau 
nom, doit I'ensevelir sous un meillour ; rnais s'il 
I'a tel qu'il ose lu porte, il doit alors insinuer qu'il 
est de tous les noins le plus illustre, comnie sa 
mnisoii de toutes les iiiaisons la plus ancienne ; il 
doit tenir aux Princes Loriains, aux Rohans, aux 
Chastillons, aux Montniovencis, et, s'il se peut.aux 
princes du sang ; ne pailer que de dues, de car- 
dinal] x et de n)inistres ; faire entrer dans toutes 
les conversations ses aieux paternels, et y trouver 
place pour I'oriflaninie et pour les croisades ; avoir 
des sal les parses d'arbresgdn^alogiques, d'c^cussons 
charg«ls de seize quartiers, et de tableaux de ses 
anc^ties et des allit% de ses anc^tres ; se piquer 
d'avoir un ancien chMeau a tourelles, k creneaux 
et k m&checoulis ; dire en toute rencontre ; ma 
race, ma hranche, mon nom et men arme» ; dire 
de celui-ci qu'il n'est pas homme de quality, de 
celle-1^ qu'elle n'est pas demoiselle ; ou si on lui 
dit qu' Uyacinthe a eu le gros lot, demnnder s il 
est gentilhomme : quelques-uns riront de ces con- 
tre-tetnps, niais il les laissera rire : d'autres en 
feront des contes, et il leur permettra de conter ; 
il dira toujours qu'il inarche nprfes la inaispn r^g- 
nante, et, h force de le dire, il sera cm. 



lb) Celui qui flit : Je dinai hier d Tibur, on *. 
j'y soupe ce soir, qui le rdpfete, qui fait dix fois 
entrer le nom de Flducum dans les moindres con- 
versations, qui dit : PI'.uicus me demandoit . . je 
disois a Plmicus ...celui-la meme apprend dansce 
moment que son li^ro." vient d'etre enlove pnr une 
morte ex trn ordinaire. 11 part *Ie la main, il ras- 
semble le peuple dans les places ou sous les poiti- 
ques, accuse le moi't, decrie sa conduite, dt^nigre 
son consulat, lui ote .jusqu' a la science des details 
que la voix piiblique lui accorde, ne lui passe point 
une nit^raoire heureuse, lui refuse I'l^loge d'un honi- 
me s(5v^re et laborieux, ne lui fait pas I'lioiineur 
de lui croire panni les ennemis de i'empire un 
ennemi. 

1. contre-temps. Give rules for forming the plural 
of compound nouns, illustrating by examples. 

2. Cite the explanation usually given of the proper 
names in extract (/>). 

3. aux princes Lurraina .... atto; Montmorencis. 
Mention any members of these families eminent in 
French history. 

4. jetez-moi dans les troupes comme un sim^'th sol- 
datyje suis Thersite ; mettez-moi d Id fete d'utte arm6e 
dovtju/ie a r^pondre d foate l'Euroj)i',je suis Ackille. 
Give La Bruy^re's reason for this. 

5. Trnnslate and explain : La prince n'a point assez 
de toute sa fortune pour payer un basse complaisance, 

si Ton en juge par tout ce que celui qu'il veut recom- 
penser y a mis du sien ; et il n'a pus trop de toute sa 
])uissance pour le punir, s'il mesure sa vengeance au 
tort qn'il eiA a reiju. 

n. 

LA FONTAINE, FABLES. 
Translate : 

Un homme de moyen age, 
En tirant sur le grison, 
Jugea qu'il ^toit saison 
De songer s,u mariage. 
11 avoit du comptant, 
Et partant 
De quoichoiser: toutes vouloient lui plp'*re : 
En quoi notre amoureux ne se pressoit pas tant ; 
Bien adresser n'est pas petite affaire. 



_y. 



t 






Deux veUves 8Ur soil coevlr eurent le plu.s de part : 
L'une encor verfce, et I'autre un peu bien mdlre, 

Mais qui rej.n oit par son art 

Ce qu'avoit diitruit la nature. 

Ces deux veuves, en badinant, 

En riant, en lui fnisant f^te, 

L'alloient quelquefois testonnant, 

C'est-ti-dire ajustant sa t^te. 
La vieille, k tout moment, de sa part emportoit 

Un peu du poil noir qui restoit, 
Afin que son amant en Mt plus k sa guise. 
La jeune saccageoit Ics poils blancs k son tour. 
Toutes deux firent tant, que notre t^te grise 
Denieura sans cheveux et se douta du tour. 
" Je vous rends, leur dit-il, mille graces, les belles. 

Qui m'avez ai bien tondu : 

J'ai plus gftgnd que perdu ; 

Car d'hymen point de nouvelles. 
Celle que je prendrois voudroit qu'^ sa facon 

Jo v^cmse, et non k la mienne. 

II n'est tSte chauve qui tienne : 
Je vous suis obIig(i, belles, de la le9on. 

1. de quoi. Illustrate, by examples, any uses of this 
phrase as a substantive. 

2. en luifaisant fe'te. Translate (a) II celihroit sa 
fite ; (h) 11 prduient, il s'ofie, il se fait defe'te; (c) 11 
n'est pas tons les jours fe'te. 

3. I'aUoient Write a note on the position of ihe 
pronoun here. 

4. les belles. Account fqr the use of th 3 article. 

5. nouvelles. Translate into French (a) I have just 
heard from him ; (6) Have you ever heard of his 
brother Henry ? (c) I have just heard that he came 
back yesterday. 

6. 11 n'est tite chauve. Cite analogous completions 
of the negative. 

III. 
Translate : 

Di^ne fille de saint ^douard et de saint Louis, 
elle s attucha du fond de son coeur k la foi de ces 
deux grands rois. Qui pourrait asse/. exprimer 
le z^le dont elle brtdait pour le rdtablissement de 
cette foi dans le royaume d'Angleterre, oii Ton en 



conserve tant de pr^cicux iiioiiunients ? Nous 
savom qu'elle n'eAt pas craint d'cxposer sa vie 
pour un si pieux dessein : et le cie) nous I'a ravie ! 
Dieu! que prepare ici voire ^ternelle providence? 
Me perniettrez-vous, 6 Seigneur, d'envisager en 
treniblnnt vos saints et redoutables conseils ? Est- 
ce que les temps de confusion ne sont pas encore 
accomplis ? Est-ce que le ciime qui fit cdder vos 
v^rit^s saintes k des passions malheureuses est 
encore devant vos yeux, et que vous ne I'avez pas 
assez puni par un avcuglenient de plus d'un sifecle ? 
Nous ravissez-vous Henriette par un efll'et du 
m^me jugement qui abrdgea les jours de la reine 
Marie, et son rhgne si favorable h I'Eglise ? ou bien 
voulez-vous triouipher seul ? 'jt, en nous otant les 
nioyens dont nos ddsirs se flattaient, rdservez-vous, 
dans les temps marques par votre predestination 
feternelle, de secrets retours i\ I'dtat et k la maison 
d'Angleterre ? 

1, pour le rdtahlissement de cette foi. Describe the 
part played by Henrietta in the plot to bring this 
about. 

IV. 
Ti-an slate into French ; 

It is no doitbt a pleasant thing to have a library 
left you. The present writer will disclaim no such 
legacy, but hereby undertakes to accept it, how- 
ever dusty. But, good as it is to inheret a library, 
it is better to collect one. Each volume then, 
however lightly a stranger's eye may roam from 
shelf to shelf, has its own individuality, a history 
of its own. You remember where you got it, and 
how much you gave for it ; and your word may 
safely be taken for the fiist of these facts, but not 
for the second. The man who has a library of his 
own collection is able to contemplate himself 
objectively, and is justified in believing in his own 
existence. No other man but he would have made 
precisely such a combination as his. Had he been 
in any single respect different from what he is, 
his library, as it exists, never would have existed. 
Therefore, surely he may exclaim, as in the gloam- 
ing he contemplates the books of his loved" ones, 
" They are mine, and I am theirs." 

Obiter Dicta. 



mvii\ittuitp of Sotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



FRENCH. 



Examiner: W. C. P. Bremner, B.A, 



Translate : 






V 



I. 

Val^re. 



Que parlez-vous ici d'Albe et de sa victoire ? 
Ijrnovez-vous encor la moiti^ de I'histoire ? 

Le ViEiL Horace. 
Je sais que par sa fuite il a trahi I'Etat. 

ValiSre. 

Oui s'il eut en fuyant termini le combat ; 

Mais on a bientot vu qu'il ne fuyait qu'en homme 

Qui savait manager I'avantage de Rone. 

Le ViEiL Horace. 
Quoi ! Rome done trioniphe ? 

Val^re. 

Apprenez, apprenez 

La valeur de ce fils qu' a tort vous condamnez. 

Restd seul contre trois, mais en cette aventure, 
Tous trois ^tant blessds, et lui seul sans bless'ire, 
Trop I'aible pour eux tous, trop fort pour chacun d'eux 
II salt bien se tirer d'un p;\s si hasardeux ; 
11 fuit pour mieux combattre, et cette prompte ruse 
Divise advoitement trois freres qu'elle abuse. 
Chacune le suit d'un pas ou plus ou moins pressd, 



y 



Selon i}u'il se rencontre ou plus on moins bless^ ; 

« « ♦ ♦ ' « 

Hoi'ace les voyant I'un de I'autro ^cart(^s 

Se retourne, et c\4}k les croit demi-clompt^s : 

II attend le premier, et c'etait votre gendre ; 

L'autre, tout indign^ qu'il ait osd I'attendre, 

En vain en Vattaquant fait paraitre un grand coeur, 

Le sang qu'il a perdu ralentit sa vigueur. 

1. What peculiarity of the French classic Theatre is 
seen in the extract ? 

2. Encor. Why not encore ? 

3. C itait voire gendre. Write a note on the use 
of ce, as a pronoun. 

II. 

Translate : 

Dans ce deaordre ^ mes yeux se presente 
Un jeune enfant couvert d'une robe ^clatante, 
Tels qu'on voit des H^breux les pr^tres rev^tus. 
Sa vue a ranimt^ mes esprits abattus ; 
Mais lorsque, revenant de mon trouble funeste, 
J'admirais sa douceur, son air noble et modeste, 
J'ai senti tout k coup un homicide acier 
Que le traitre en mon sein a plough tout entier. 
De tant d'objets divers le bizarre assemblage 
Peut-etre du haaard vous parait un ouvrage : 
Moi-meme quelque temps, honteuse de raa peur, 
Je I'ai pris pour I'effet d'une sombre vapeur. 
Mais de ce souvenir mon ^me poss^d^e 
A deux fois en dormant revu la mSme id^e ; 
Deux r>3S mes tristes yeux se sont vu retracer 
Ce mSme enfant toujour^^ tout pr6t k me percer. 

Athalie. 

1. Note any peculiarities in construction, and any 
words that have not their usual meaninsr. 

2. Write a short note on French verification. Scan 
lines 1, 2, 3, 4. 

3. Give the principal parts (give Fut.), writing the 
Pres. Indie, in full, of voit, revitm, abattus, senti, 
plonge, dormant. 



III. 

TranHlate : 

Oathos. (a) En effet, jo trouve que c'est renchdrir 
sur le ridicule, qu'une personne se pique d'esprit, 
et ne sache pas jusqu' au moindre petit quatrnin 
qui se fait chaque jour; et pour moi j* auraia 
toutes les hontes du monde, s'il fallait qu'on vtnt 
k me demander si j'aurais vu quelque chose de 
nouveau que je n'aurnis pas vu. 

Ma-SCAK. II est vrai qu'il est honteux de n'avoir 
pas des premiers tout ce qui se se fait. Mais 
ne vous mettez pas en peine ; je veux ^tablir chez 
vous une acad^uue de beaux esprits ; et je vous 

?romets qu'il no so fera pas un bout de vers dans 
'aris que vous ne sachiez par coeur avant tous les 
autres. Pour moi, tel que vous me voyez, je m'en 
escrime un peu, quand je veux ; et vous verrez 
courir de ma fa9on, dans les belles ruelles de Paris, 
deux cents chansons, auf ant de sonnets, ♦ * * 

1. Explain the cases of the Subjunctive in the 
extract. 

2. Qu' on vint d me demander. Translate : He 
came to call on me, but I had just gone out. 

3. Quilque chose de nouveau. Translate : Those are 
very interesting things. 

4. Napoleon is said to have recognized Molifere's 
success in this play, in a striking manner. Explain. 



IV. 



Translate : 



Ce n'^tait pas un temps (passez-moi I'expression) 
de beaucoup d'dcriture et de paperasserie ; k coup 
s&r la multitude des actes ofhciels rddig^s sous un 
rfegne ne prouverait pas grand'chose aujourd'hui en 
favour du gdnie du souvorain; il en est autreroent 
du r^gne de Charlemage : nul doute que le grand 
nombre des actes publics de tout genre qui nous 
en sont restds ne soit un temoignaofo irrecusable de 
cette activity prodigieu.se et contagieuse qui dtait 
peut-^tro sa plus grando superiority et sa plus 
s{lre puissance : voici le tableau et la classification 



de ces actes, de ceux du inoins (jui out t'tt^ iinprim^s 
dans les recueils savants : beaucoup d'autres sans 
doute se sent pcrdus ; assez d'autres, probable- 
ment, sont rest^s manuscrits et ifjinor^s. 



GUIZOT. 



V. 



1. Give 
Comeille. 



an account of French Tragedy before 



2. What are the characteristics of the works of 
Comeille and Racine ? Compare these two writers. 

3. Give some reasons for the prominence of Theology 
in the 17th century. Notice the most important 
writers on the subject, with their works and inHuence. 



SUHIietttUtt Of Covonto, 



I sans 
3able- 



OT. 

lefore 

Ics of 

•s. 

ology 
rtant 
lence. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. Squair, B.A. 



I. 

Translate into English : 

{a) II disoit que Ton devoit son cors vestir et 
acesmer en tel maniere que li preudome de cest 
siecle ne deissent qn'il en feist trop, ne que li 
jeune ome ne deissent qu'il en feist peu. 

{h) Li seeaus de la letre estoit hrisUs, si qu'il 
n'i avoit de remanant fovs que la moitit? des jam- 
bes de I'iniage deu seel le roi et reschamel seur 
quoi li rois tenoit ses j)ies. 

(c) Quant je et tni chevalier venimes hors de 
Tost aus Sarrazijis, nous trouvames bien sis mile 
Turs, par esine, qui avoient laissiees leur herber- 
ges et s'estoient trait aus chans. 

(d) A r esmouvoir I'ost le roi rent grant noise de 
trompes, de nacaires et de cors sarrazinois. 

(e) A nous tout droit, qui gardions le poncel, 
vint li cons Pierres de Bretaigne, qui venoit tout 
droit devers la Massoure, et estoit navr^s d'une 
espee par mi le visage si que li sans li cheoit en la 
bouche ; seur un bel cheval bien fourni seoit, ses 
renes avoit getees seur I'arcon de sa sele et le 
tenoit a ses deus mains, pour ce que sa gent qui 
ejtoient darieres, qui mout le pressoient, ne le ge- 
tassent deu pas. 



1. Parse the italicized words. 

2. Derive carefully, letter by letter, Hhewitig whetlier 
the changes are regular or not, the following : niedfi, 
deiasent, jamben, hors, eame, eapee, mi, cheoii, bouche, 
Tioiae. 

3. Compare with the following their modern forms, 
and explain the reasons for the changes they have 
undergone : corn, tel, feist, letre, pUs, sin, herbergea, 
chans. 

4. Explain the phonetics of the forms, aeeaus and 
aeel. 

5. Write notes on interesting changes in the mean- 
ing of : preudome, herbergea, noise, navrda, aeoit. 

6. Re-write extract (e) in modern French. 

II. 

Tranclate into English : 

(a) Car en lieu do six adonques 
J'en demanderai plus qu'onqucs 
Tout le ciel d't^toiles n'eut, 
Plus que d'ar^ne poussj^e 

Aux bords, quand I'eau courroucde 
Contre les rives s'esmeut. 

(b) De vostre douce haleine 
Evantez ceste plaine, 
Evantez ce sdjour : 

Ce pendant que j'ahannc 
A mon bid que je vanno 
A la chaleur du jour. 

(c) Tu vois en ce temps nouveau, 

L'essaim beau 
De ces pillardes avettes 
Volleter de fleur en fleur, 

Pour I'odeur 
Qu'ils mussent en leurs cuissettes. 

(d) Va-t'en, chanson, au sein d'elle to mettre, 
A qui I'honneur — qui ne me doit permettre 
Telle favour — est plus cher que la vie. 
Ha, que ma main porte a ton heur d'envie ! 
C'est trop pleurd 



hether 

niecle, 

)ouche, 

forms, 
^ have 
berges, 

■8 and 

mean- 



(«) Bacchus ! qui vols nostro dcabauche, 
Par ton saincl portrait que j'esbaucho 
En m'enhiminant le nmsoau 
Do ce trait que je boy sans eau. 
Explain this extract. 

(/) Co n'est pas I'humblo ver, lea abeilles dordes, 
La verte domoisello, aux ailes bigarrdes, 
Qu'attendent sos petits, brants, do faiui presses ; 
Non, c'est I'oiaeau douteux, qui dans la nuit vdgfete. 
C'est i'immondo lizard, c'est le serpent qu'il jette, 
Hideux, aux aiglons ht^risses. 

(g) J'aime vos tours k t^te grise, 

Oh se brise 
L'eclair qui panse avec la brise. 
J'aime vos profonds escaliers 
Qui, tournoyant dans les entrailles 

Des murailles, 
A I'hymne dclatant des ouailles 
Font rdpondre tons les piliers. 

(h) Sur ses larges bras dtendus, 

La for^t oti s'6veille Flore, 
A des chapelets de pendus 
Que le matin caresse et dorc, 
Ce bois sombre, oii le ch^ne arbore 
Des grappes de fruits inou'is 
MSme chez le Turc et le More, 
C'est le verger du roi Louis. 

Explain this extract. 



i I 







CAtilneviiftt? of Soronto* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS i 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



FIlllNCH. 
HONORS. 



Examiner : W. II. Fraskr, B.A. 






I. 

Translate : 

(ft) Oh si, tristo rAveur, passant los bois, les plaines, 
Lcs rocliors bnis-sonnoux (jn'ornent los orois lon- 

taines, 
Til t'arr^tes un soir siir co roc colossal 
Oh I'asjiir s'assomhrit antonr d'nn froid cri.stai; 
Si ton rofjnrd, jierdn dans les neiges des cimes, 
Rencontre le matin dans la nuit des abimes, 
Et si, tout halctant de surprise, d'effroi, 
Tu planes sur ce nionde oil Dien t'a crd^ roi, 
D'un ineffable amour que ta veine s'enflamrae, 
Car un monde n'est rien au prix d'une seule &me ! 
Alors, chante plut6t, chante ce grand rdveil 
Oil I'lime secoftra sa fange et son sommeil .... 
En un hymne d'amour rdpand ta poe^sie 
A ce banquet fun^bre oh nous ravens la vie, 
Ne chantons plus, mon ame un monde sans attraits, 
Oh, pour nous rappeler la seconde patrie, 
L'avenir n'est qu'espoir, Ic passd que regrets ! 

MONNfiROiN. 

(b) On ne saurait dire que Napoldon avec son gdnie 
n'ait pas eu toutes les sortes d'iddes politiques pro- 
fondes ; mais trop sou vent ces id des ne faisaient 
que lui ti averser en c'olair la pensde, et n'y sdjour- 
naient pas avec la fixitd et la predominance qui 
conviennent aux vraies iddes politiques. Le Je n^ 




Nrls <|Hoi <lo pij,'ni)tos(|Uc, cnmiMe jo I'ai npprli', 
I'l'iili'vait ail flcliV (U'liif si positiF jdurtant dims 
Ic detail son idc^al Hortait liors dii possilik'. Hon 
dernier niot, qnand il I'articidail, tcnait pcut-i'tro 
antant ct plus dii poMo «|Uo dii p(»liti(|iu!. II y 
Mvait daiiN (titc pciiHiv, niriiic .si tVruie, niu; crr- 
taiiu' liauttur oTi coinnii'iu.'ait Id ivve. Annsi des 
honiuics (|ui ni' 8ont qu'au Hccontl rang, si on los 
compare a hii, onisu sc poussci', ciix ct loin' patrie, 
il df8 t'urtmies plus Hlal>lt>s ct sc niaintcnir dans 
]e\\i' Huccl's. ("est ravantnj,'c (luc gnrdcnt siu' 
lui dans ritistoiio los ('ronnvoll, los (hiillaunio 
il'Orai.gc, t't t'(! ;,'cnio cond)int' do l^itt. ot do Wel- 
lington, ((ui Hnal«'inont I'a vaincn. 

Saintk-Hkuvk. 

(c) Formde au niilieu dos luttes de la plaou publf- 
que, olio pourra exprinior, dcs I'originc, tons los 
intdrets, toutes les passions du inonde social. Kt 
c'est par 1»\ (pi'dlo .so distiny;uora, en naissant do 
la langue proven^alo (pii, nourrie do sentiments ot 
d'aspirations .solitairos, rosbait onoore improprc anx 
conceptions t^piquos. Cost d'ailleurH k 1^ lorenco 
que s'accomplit la prcmioro revolution, qui, paries 
arts du dessin, afi'rancliit do I'lincionno torrcur 
Timagination humaino. L'hommo du moyen Ago, 
ploin d'dpouvante, .s'avan(;ait dan.s Ics voies de la 
maciiration sans oser .sodotourner pour contemplor 
face h face la nature sensuelle et niaudito. Sou- 
dain il rencontre en Toscano de.s dt^bri.s de statues 
payennes. Malgrd lui, cette beautd I'dtonno ct le 
ravit. Edqar Quinet. 

II. 

Translate into French : 

(a) There were G0G7 books ])ublished in England 
last year, including now edition.s. Of these already 
the greater number are forgotten. It does not 
follow that all these works are useless. There 
is a more charitable view. A good many discuss 
subjects of the day that lose their interest when 
the question is .settled. But every year has a very 
big literary rubbish heap. Out of the above 
number of publications the licviteDcs DeAix Mondes 
.^elected nine as important contributions to litera- 



iiiro. Such statiHticH as those are nad reading 
for the youn^ autlior. Unfortunately for most 
of those who writu hookH.thc nIeaHun! of production 
is their only rocomponHe. But authorH have ever 
huon a Han^uine riicu, and are not likely to be 
Hcared into Hiloncu l>y any figurcN the publishers 
have to show. 

(b) And iiow, O men who have condonnnod ine, I 
would fain prophecy to you ; for I am about to 
dio, and that \h tho hour in which men are gifted 
with prophetic power. And I prophecy to you 
whonre mv inurderors, that immediately after my 
(loath punishment far heavier than you have in- 
flicted on me will surely await you. Me you have 
killed because you wanted to escape the accuser, 
and not to give an account of your lives. But 
that will not bo as you suppose : far otherwise. 
For I say that there will bo more accusers of you 
than there are now ; accusers whom hitherto I 
have restrained : and as they are younger they 
will bo more sovore with you, and you will be 
more oflTended at them. For if you think that by 
killing men you can avoid the accuser censuring 
your lives, you aro mistaken ; that is not a way 
of escape which is either possible or honorable ; 
the easiest an<l noblest way is not to be crushing 
others, but to be improving yourselves. 







Ml!: 



CSnfberoittf of UToconto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18!)1. 



THIRD YEAR. 



FUENCH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. Squair, B.A. 






MOLIEIIE. 



Note.— Candicktea are cuutioned against vague general sUtementa 
in an&wering. Exact references to xVIoliere's plays or 
(luotations from them will be highly valued. 

1. Le Misanthrope. Sketch its plot. Say a few 
words about Moliere as a plot maker. What is the 
real motive of the play ? Deduce from it a description 
of the honnete homnte. Is the play really a comedy ? 
What docs it teach us regarding Moli^re's own char- 
acter and family relations ? 

2. Point out the position each of the following ex- 
tracts holds in the play to which it belongs : 

(a) O cervelle indocile ! 
Faut-il qu'avec les soins qu'on prend incessament, 
On ne te puisse appendre k pavler congrAment ! 
De pat< mis avoc rien tu fais la recidive ; 

Et c'est, comme on t'a dit, trop d'une negative. 

(i) Point out the comique of the dialogue of 
which this forms a part. 

(ii) What is Moliere satirizing in the words 
indocile, congntment, rdcidive? 

(b) que c'est un mariage, niadame, ou vous vous 
imaginez bion que je dois avoir de la repugnance ; que 
vous n'ignorez pas, sachant ce que je suis, comme il 
choque mes interets, et que vous voulez bien enfin que 
je vous disc, avec la permission de mon pfere, que, si 
les choses d^pendalent de moi, cet hymen ne se ferait 
point. 



[1: 



In what does tho piquancy of this dialogue eon- 
sist ? 

(o) Elle monsiovn- ? voilc\ line belle niijiiuiiV, une 
piinpesoue'e bien bsibie, pour vous donuer taut (rjiniour I 
Je ne lui vois rien tjue ile tivs mediocre ; et vou.s troii- 
verez cent personnes qui seroiit plus dignes de vou.s. 
Premiferement, elle a les yeux petits. 

(i) Translate the extract. 

(ii) To what actual person h <: -e a reference ? 

{d) j3'abord chez le beau nionde on vous I'ei'a venir. 
Vous irez visiter, pour votre l)ienvenue, 
Madame la baillive et niadanie I'elue, 
Qui d'nn siege pliant vous feront honorer. 
L{\ dans le carnaval, vous pourrez esperer 
Le bal et la yrand'bandeji savoir, I'.eux launetten, 
Et parfois Fagotin et les mario)idtes. 

(i) Explain the italicized portions. 

(ii) What is the point of humour in the exti-act. 

(e) II ne raanquerait pas de vous parler d'un pain de 
rive h. biseau doro, i-eleve de croilte partout, croquant 
tendrenient sous la dent ; d'un vin a seve veloutt^e, 
arm^ d'un vert qui n'est pas tro]) comnKUiduut; d'un 
carre de niouton gourmandd dc persil ; d u.V' 1- iige de 
veau de riviere, longue comnie cela, b'in r d 'licate, 
et qui, sous les dents est une vraie pate dap.f'ide ; de 
perdrix relevees d'un fumet surprenant; et poar son 
op^ra d'une soupe a bouillon perl*^, soutenue d'un jenne 
gros dindon, cantonnee de pigeonneaux. 

Translate the extract. 

{f) Vous moquez-vous? vous n'avez pas besoin de 
cela, et vous ^tes d'une pA,te h vivre jusqu'a cent ans. 

(i) Translate the extract. 

(ii) Show the cleverness of this dialogue. 

((/) Je puis vous dissiper ces craintes ridicules, 
Madame ; et je sais I'art de lever les scrupules. 
Le ciel defend, de viai, certains contentenients ; 
Mais on trouve avec lui des accomodements. 

II est uiie science 

De rectifier le mal de Taction 
Avec la pvu'et^ de notre intention. 

To what important discussion is there a reference 
here ? 



■^^—^ 



!>ue con- 



ivto, vine 
iriunoni" I 
ons ti'ou- 
I (le vous. 



ircnce ? 
I'a venir. 



er. 

: musettes, 



extract. 

m ])ain de 
, cruquant 
I veloutt^e, 
iaut; (I'un 
: ioiige de 
f d -lioatc, 
naudo ; de 
) podv son 
d'un jenne 



8. Translate and explain the following ; 

(«) C'est Stre bieii coitte, bien pvevenu de lui, 

Que de nous deniontir suv le lait d'aujourd'imi. 

(6) Je sals I'afFaire, et ne prcnds point le change. 

(c) Ah ! ah ! L'honuue de bien, vous m'en voulie/ 

donnei- ! 

(d) II n'y a point de inonsieui niaitre Jacques pour 

un double. 

(e) V'oilc\ qui n'est pas sot, et (;es gens-la se tre- 

nioussent bien. 

(/) Diantre soit de I'ane bate ! 

(g) C'est 51 dire un esprit chausse tout i\ rebours. 

(//.) Le sort a bien donne la baie a mon espoir. 

(i) Et, en glieu de rabot, un grand mouchoir de cou 
a resiau, aveue quatre grosses houppes de linges qui 
leu pendont sur I'estomaque. 

(j) Ignia hinieur qui tienne. Quand en a de Tanii- 
i\m4 pour les parsonnes, Ten bailie toujou queuque 
petite signifianco. 

4. From Moliere's plays what would you condlude 
regatding tiie estimate his contemporaries had of the 
beauties of nature and the pleasures of country life ? 
(Be precise in your answer.) 



besoin de 
cent ans. 

le. 

?ules, 
crupules. 
iteiiionts ; 
ments. 
s science 



a leference 



"Ffl 



■ 



I! 



i iiiil 



rki 



T 



Unit^tvnitp ot Sotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAK. 



I 



GERMAN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION. 



Examiner : W. H. vanderSmissen, M. A. 



*,* Candidates for Honors are not required 'm take this paper. All 
Candidates' are required to take Dictation at the end of the 
Division. 

I. 

1. How is the Passive Voice formed in German ? Give 
four German sentences, each containing a different verb 
in a different tense of the passive. 

2. Form five German sentences, each containing a 
principal and a dependent chiuse, and two of them con- 
taining a modal auxiliary in a compound tense. 

II. 

(a) Translate into German eight of the following 
sentences : 

(1) I do not know the song, the title of which you 
have just mentioned. (2) Had I not been so hoarse, I 
should have sung with pleasure. (3) I hope the rain 
will not spoil your trip to the country. (4) I do not 
believe every .story I hear. (5) Those students have 
unfortunately lost a great deal of time, but now^ they 
are beginning to study most industriously. (6) The 
weather is usually coldest in the months of January 
and February. (7) Mr. Brown is such a lazy man, that 
he would do no work, if necessity did not compel him 
to. (8) What day of the month is it ? To-day is the 
2nd of May, 1891. (9) The train left Toronto at half- 
past nine in the morning, and did not arrive at Mon- 
treal before a quarter past five in the following after- 
noon. (10) Napoleon I. died on the 5th of May, 1821, 
at the age of 52 years. 



rr 



I ! 



I 



I i'ii. 



(6) Translate into German : 

A tedious visitor had so grontly annoyed a 
gentleman that he at last ordered his servant not 
to admit this person a^ain. AVlien the unwelcome 
visitor caiiic and asked the servnnt, " Is your 
master at home ?" the latlei', wishing to dismiss 
bim politely, said that he was gone out. Then 
the visitor remarked : " 'I'ell your mistress that I 
should like to see her, as I have sometliing to say 
to her." The servant answered that she too was 
out. The visitor remarked that he would wait for 
her, but as it was cold, he would take a seat by 
the fire in the parlor. But the servant replied 
with the greatest calmness : " That's out too.' 



III. 



Translate 



(a) „^'annft tu tid) crinncrn, ibn jc ncfcl)m ju Ijafecn ?" 
fprod; tcr Slcitcr auf t^ianjOfifd; ju Wni ^a^cn. „^it, 
mm Satcr/' antwortftc ttcfcr. ,,Sr l>it tid) fo crftauiU 
anflcbltcft," fuljr tcv 9)?avciuid fovt, „ta9 td; faum jwciflc, 
tein ©cfid)t fci tl)m bcfannt vovrtcfommrn. Si'tc ! wcnu 
eS ctncr tcr Splonc ware, tic ung unj^liicfUdKn gliidjt* 
lincjcn ouflauern, urn leu ^retig ju novtnncn, tcr auf 
tic'Siufanpng cfucg jcteu Jpuflcuottcu gcfc^t ijt! O 
mciuc Jod)ter,'wcnn cr untcr tcr .<;ii(Ic teiucr 2?crf(ei* 
buufl tid) wictcicrfanut Ijcittc !" Unt) iricterum bltcftc 
tcr a)?arqut^ riicfwcirt?, falj abcr mit S3cfrtctii^unft, tag 
tcr gremtlin(\, tcr bet ter ^voljeu ^lific uid)t iauger 
C|lctd)cn Sd)rttt lutt tern i^fcrte l)allcu founte, ein 
bctrad)tlid)rg Stilcf jun'icfi^cblicbeu war. „3d) foUtc 
fafi cl)cr fliaubcu, tag er fclbrr ciu 5iild)tliufj ff{, un'c 
n>tr." fa(\tc tie 3:cd;tcr. ,,Scmc Jilcituufl (ft au6 
Stucfen ,^u|"ammcu(jffrl/t, tic nid^t ju einauter paffcu." 
^I^ann batte er ftd) fcii e (SJavtciebc auf fef)r unsorftcb* 
ti^e 2Betfc flcwciblt," bemciftc tei SBatcr. „Gutwctcr 
ttiu§ cr fid) »oUflantig alg jtavah'er flciten, oter alS 
flen)(l()nl{d)er ©firmer. SOJir fommt er \>or wtc ein 
0efat>rli(i^cr Slbcntcurcr unt UM'r woUcu lua^^eu, to§ er 
une ^anilid^ an^ tern ®ejid;t »crliert." 



!y annoyed a 
s servant not 
10 unwelcome 
it, " Is j'oiir 
ng to dismiss 
out. Then 
listress that I 
etliinj]f to say 
t she too was 
ould wnit for 
ake a seat by 
L'vant replied 
out too. 



'U gu l^dkn ?" 
pa^cn. „9Jic, 
tj'il) fo crjiauiU 
i) faum juvific, 
. 31Me ! wcnn 
fl{d)cn giud;t* 
»inncn, l>cr auf 

tdrnv 33crf(fi* 
ictnum Mi'rftc 
Ttcbi'viuiifl, tag 
c m'cl)t iangcr 
u foimte, (in 
. n'-M) foUtc 
inline^ ff{, un'c 
tuiifl {ft aug 
fliitcr paffcn." 
fc^r un»orfic^* 
r. „GiUwctcr 
•I'tfit, opcr als 
S)or wfc dn 
notfjen, ta§ cr 



(6) Sim gcwnlt{flcn Tltii, 

3n ter 5WiUcrnad)t, 
So tcr SDoi^cn .^ccr 
Slit tic gclfcn frad)t, 
!;« fc()au' id) yom Xurm ^inaud. . 
^i) crl)fl>' fincn Sniifl 
Slud fJarfer 33nifl 
lint mifd)e ten ^lang 
3n tic wiltc Sufi, 
3n tie 9ia(^t, in ten ©turni/ in ten ®rau«. 

!Drinflc tur^ tringe turd(> 

9led()t frcuten»oU, 

SWein Sirt, son ter 93urg 

3n tdi ^turnifleroU. 

©erfilnt' ed wcit tur* tic ^a^t, 

Jffio fd)wanft ein S^iff 

Durd) tie glut entlnnfl, 

SBo fd)TOintdt am SRiff 

3)c6 SBantrvfViJ ©anjt, 

Dag obeu ein 2Wenfd; l;icr ^^^^ai^l 

gin frafti^er SWann, 

SRcd;t frifit/ bcreit, 

2Co er l)clfcn fann, 

3w wentcn tag Seit 

2Wit SRuf, mit 8cud)t', mit .0ant. 

3ft ju fcjiwarj tie 9?a(^t, 

3ft ju fern ter Ort, 

Da fdjicft er mit ^a^t 

©cine Stimmc fort 

5Wit $;roft iioer ©ec unt ?ant. 

SIBer auf 95?o(\en fd)tt)cbt/ 

®cf)r Irrf fcin Ita^n, 

9Ber tm SBaltc Icbt. 

SEo fid) SRauber na()n, 

Dcr tcnfc : ®ott ^ilft m\)l gteid^. 

SBen tag wilte 9Wrer 

©c^on l)inunterf(|)lin{\t, 

2Sem teg SRaukrg ©peer 

3n tie ^flfte trinc\f, 

2)er tenf an tag |)immclrci(l^. 



mtm 



IV. 

1. Write notes on Klopstock, Wieland and Lessing, 
giving some account of the chief works of each. 

2. Give some account of the Romantic School. 

3. What influence had English on German litera- 
ture ? 



I : ; it 



* ill 



and Lessing, 
each. 

School. 

rman litera- 



&nl»tKi$it» of SToronlo* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : ISttl. 



THIRD YRAR AND CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GERMAN PROSE COMPOSITION. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: W. H. vanderSmissen, M.A. 



I. 

Translate into German one only of the following 
extmcts : 

(ft) One may hope, Germany is no longer to any 
])ev.son that vacant land, of gray vapour and chi- 
meras, which it was to most Englishmen, not 
many years ngo. One may hope that, as readers 
of German have increased a hundredfold, some 
paitial intelligence of Germany, some interest in 
things German, may have increased in a propor- 
tionably higher ratio. At all events. Memoirs of 
men, German or other, will find listeners among 
men. Sure enough, Berlin city, on the sandy 
banks of the Spree, is a living city, even as Lon- 
don is, on the nmddy banks of Thames. Daily, 
with every rising of the blessed heavenly light, 
Berlin sends up the .smoke of a hundred thou- 
sand kindled hearths, the fret and .stir of five 
hundred thousand new-awakened human souls ; — 
marking or defacing with such smoke-cloud, mate- 
rial or s|)iritual, the serene ol our common all- 
embracing Heaven. One Heaven, the same for 
all, embraces that smoke-cloud too, adopts it, 
absorbs it, like the rest. Are there not dinner- 
parties, ' aesthetic teas ;' scandal-mongeries, chan- 



r 



I ; 



! ! 



ffCH of miniHtry, poUco-poNcs, litoiavy j^a/.cttos ? 
Tho elixck of t()nj,'m's, the sound of liainincrM, 
inonnts up in tluit coiikt of tlx' IMiiiiet too, ioi* 
certain centuries of 'J'iino. J3iilin lias its royal- 
ties ami diplonjacics, its tiafVickiiiy;s, travailinj^s; 
literatures, sculptures, cultivated heads, male and 
femalo ; and boasts itself to bo ' tho intellectual 
capital of Germany.' Nino volumos of Memoirs 
out of Berlin will surely contain sometliiag for 
us. 

(b) " ' I thought,' said the curate, ' that you gen- 
tlemen of tho nrmy, Mr. Trim, never said your 
prayers ut all.' ' I heard the poor gentleman say 
his prayers kst night,' said the landlady, ' very 
devoutly, and with n»y own ears, or I could never 
have believed it.' ' A -e you sure of it ? ' replied the 
cuiate. ' A .soldier, an't please your reverence,' 
said I, ' piay.s as often (of his own accord) as a 
pari*on ; and when lie is fighting for his king and 
for his own life, and for his honour too, he has the 
most reason to pray to God of any one in the 
whole world.' " " Twa.s well said of thee, Trim," 
said my uncle Toby. " 'But when a soldier,' said 
I, ' an't please your reverence, has been standing 
for twelve hours together in the trenches, up to 
his knees in cold water, or engaged,' said I, ' for 
months together in long and dangerous marches ; 
harassed, perhaps, in his rear to-day ; harrassing 
others to-morrow ; detached here ; countermanded 
there ; resting this night upon his arms, beat up 
in his shirt the next ; benumbed in his joints ; 
perhaps without straw in his tent to kneel on ; he 
must say his prayers how and when he can, 1 
believe, said 1, for I was piqued, qu(»th the corpo- 
ral, for tho reputation oi the army, ' I believe, an't 
. please your reverence,' said I, 'that when a soldier 
gets time to pray, he pi-ays as heartily as a parson, 
though not with all his fuss and hypocrisy.'" 
" Thou shouldst not have said that. Trim," said 
my uncle Toby, " for God only knows who is a 
hypocrite, and who is not. At the great and gen- 
eral review of us all, corporal, at the day of judg- 
ment, (and not till then,) it will be seen who have 
done their (juties in this world and who have not ; 



gazettes ? 

liauuncis, 
let too, jbr 
s its royal- 
[■availiiijis; 
•<, male and 
iitelluutual 
tf Memoiis 
etljiag for 

it you gen- 
said your 
tlenian say 
adv, ' viT}' 
oulci never 
replied the 
reverence,' 
coord) as a 
IS king and 
he has the 
one in the 
hee, Trim," 
Dldier,' said 
in standing 
uhes, up to 
said I, ' for 
IS marches ; 
harrassing 
itermanded 
ns, beat up 
his joints ; 
neel on ; he 
he can. I 
the corpo- 
aelieve, an't 
en a soldier 
as a parson, 
lypocrisy.'" 
Trim," said 
ITS who is a 
at and gen- 
ay of judg- 
n who have 
> have not ; 



and Wf shall I"' advanneil, Trim, ai'ponlingly," "I 
hope w«' shall," said Trini. " It is in tlu* Scrip- 
t\n'(>," waid my undo 'I'ohy, " and I will show it 
then to-morrow. In the meantime we may depend 
upon it, Trim, for our comfort," said my uncle 
Toby, " that (»od Almighty is so good antl just a 
(lovernor of the world, that if wo Jjave done our 
duties in it, it will never bo inciuii jd into whether 
we have done them in a red coat or black one." 
" I hope not," said the corporal. " Jjut go on, 
Trim," said my uncle Toby, " with the story." 

II. 

Write a composition on one of the following subjects : 
(a) Die Kreuzziige. 

(fc) Rittertum und Poesie im Mittolaltor. 
(o) Die deutsche Spracht. 
(d) Sommerfreuden und Winterfreuden. 



! I 



III! I 



\ > 



Win\bnnit9 of coronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 1801. 



THIRD YEAK. 



GERMAN AUTHORIS. 



., (A.J. Bell, M.A., Ph.D. 

Luuminer, : | ^ ^ Needleu. B.A.. I'li.D. 



*»* CiimlidivtoM for UonoiH iir«) ro<|uiru(l to iiimwor all i|iicf«tinn8 in 

Gurinun. 



Translate : 



I. 



1)cd) wire fv nic »crflicflcn ? 31* mcin ^axi 
Slud) fcincr fo ^mi^, ten 5)lctjunf|fii 
Dcr imuinfdjrilnftcn SWajcftat ju troficn ? 
910(1) t)l cin flro^cr la^^ jurttrf — fin Za^ — 
$Bo ticfer 4?cltcnfinn — id) will @ie ma^ncn — 
3n cincr fd^wcicn ^robe finfcn wirb. 
Xon ''3.M)llipp ftirbt. C^arl nl>t ba« flrfifte 9lcict) 
Dcr e()riften^eit. — (Sin uni^c()curcr ®palt 
Slci^t »om @cfc^le4u tcr i2tcrblid)cn i^n lo«, 
lint ®ctt ift beut, wcr f^cftcrn SDienfc^ nod) wax. 
3c&t bat cr fcinc <Sd)wac^cn incl;r. Die ^flid)tcn 
Dcr Gwiflfcit ycrOummcn ibm. Die 9Wcnfd;^eit 
— 9iod) bcut' ein (iri>9e«? 2Bort in fcinem O^r — 
SScrfanft fid) felbfl unt fricd)t urn i()rcn ©iJpen. 
©ein a)iitflffttl)l Iflfd^t mit bent Seiten ani, 
3n 2CoUilften cnnattet feine Sugcnt. 
^iiv feine Ibor^eit fd;tcft il)m ^cru @olt), 
gftr feine Safter jicl)t fein iof ibm Jieufel. 
(£r fci[)l(lft beraufd^t in ticfem ^immel ein, 
Den feine <Sfla»en liftifl urn i^n fc^ufen. 

Schiller, Don Carlos. 



1. Write nctos on the use of erbt, kriecht, lonchi aus, 
zielit, in this extract. 

2. schufen. When is this verb weak in (-onjugation ? 
Mention any other verb of like peciiHarity. 

3. Show the connection of this speech with the plot 
of the play, and sketch the characters of Posa, the 
Count of Lerma, and the Duchess of Olivarez. 

II. 

Translate : 

Ich lernte neulich auf dem Spaziergange eine 
Fraulein von B. kennen, cin liebenswurdiges 
Geschopf, das sehr viel Natur mitten in dem 
steifen Leben erhalten hat. Wir gefielen una in 
unserem Gesprache, und da wir schioden, bat ich 
sie um Erlaubnisz, sie bei sich sehen zu dlirfen. 
Sie gestattete mir das mit so vieler Freinmthig- 
keit, dasz ich don !?chicklichen Augenblick kaum 
erwarten konnto, zu ihr zu gehen. Sie ist nicht 
von hier, und wohnt bei einer Tante ini Hause. 
Die Physiognomic dor Alten gefiel mir nicht. Ich 
bezeigte ilir viel Aufmerksamkeit, mein Gespriich 
war meist an sie gewandt, und in minder als einer 
halbon Stuiide hatte ich so ziemlich weg, was mir 
das Fi liiilein hernach selbst gestand : dasz die liebe 
Tante in ihrem Alter Mangel an alleni, kein an- 
standiges Verniogen.keinen Geist, nnd keineStutze 
hat, als die Reilie ihrer Vorfahren, keinen Schirm, 
als den Stand, in den sie sich verpallisadiret, und 
kein Ergotzen, als von ihrem Stockwerk herab 
iiber die biirgerlichen Haupter wegzusehen. In 
ihrer Jugend soil sie schcin gewesen seyn, und ihr 
Leben weggecfaukelt, erst mit ihrem Eigensinne 
manchen armen Jungen gequalt, und in den reife- 
ren Jahren sich unter den Gehorsam eines alten 
Offlziers geduckt haben, der gegen diesen Preis 
und einen leidlichen Unterhalt das eherne Jahr- 
hundert mit ihr zubrachte, und starb. Nun sieht 
sie im eisernen sich allein, und wiirde nicht ange- 
sehen, ware ihre Nichte nicht so liebenswurdig. 

Leiden des juvgen Werthers. 

1. Give the principal pans of all strong verbs in the 
extract. 

2. Ich lernte kennen. Write a note on this 

use of the infinitive, illustrating by further examples. 

3. das eherne Jahrhundert. Explain. 



4. Give an account of the circumstances under which 
this work was w^i'itten, and show how far the charac- 
ters and incidents were modelled or suggested by real 
characters and events. 

III. 
Translate : 

Nun gibt es nichts Geschick teres, als eine abwes- 
ende Person vorzunehmen und gar eine solche, die 
so viel zu sprechen gibt wie Petrowitsch. Es kam 
nur darauf an, welche Tonart man anschlug. 
Annele und die Lowenwirthin hatten schon den 
Mund gewetzt, sie muszten aber unter dem ban- 
nenden Blicke des Lbwenwirths still halten, und 
der Schultheisz-Doktor begann den Petrowitsch 
zu loben : er thue nur so rauh, weil er sich vor 
seinem weichen Herzen fvirchte ; gegen den Schul- 
lehrer und Lenz gewandt sagte er : " Der Petro- 
witsch ist wie Steinkohle, das sind Baume, die einst 
bei der sogenannten SUndliuth verkohlt sind, sie 
haben aber reichen Warmestoff in sich ; so auch 
der Petrowitsch." Der Schulmeister lachelte ein- 
verstandlich, Lenz sah verdutzt drein und der 
Lowenwirth brummte. Die alteste Tochter des 
Doktors sagte : Petrowitsch habe Freude an der 
Musik, und wer Freude an der Musik finde, 
habe auch ein gutes Herz. Lenz nickte einver- 
standlich, und Annele lachelte holdselig. Die 
Lowenwirthin durfte sich's nicht nehraen lassen ; 
sie hatte das Gesprach auf einen so ergiebigen 
Gegenstand gebracht, es durften nicht Andere 
sich seiner bemachtigen; sie lobte die Gescheitheit 
des Petrowitsch und gab zu verstehen, dasz sie des- 
sen innigste Vertraute sei, wobei nicht undeutlich 
durchschimmerte, dasz sie auch gescheit sei und 
einen soichen Weisen richtig zu wurdigen verstehe, 
was naturlich nicht Jedermanns Sache ist. 

AuE REACH, Edelweiss. 

1. Write notes on the formation of the following 
words : Petrowitsch, Annele, Lowenwirthin, Schult- 
heisz-Doctor. 

2. Give short sketches of the Lowenwirth, Pilgrim 
and Franzl. 

3. Es ist eine schwere, herhe, ja, fast unharmherzige 
Geschichte, aber die Sonne der Liebe dringt endlich 
hellleuchtend dvrch. 

Explain this by giving an account of Lenz and 
Annele from the time of their engagement. 



Translate ; 



IV. 



Der Rittnieister spvengto zuriick zur Lagcr- 
wache, walirencl der General, den sich die oniporteu 
Regimenter aus ihren Reihen ireiwillig erwtihlt 
hatten, mit den Oftizieren berieth. Kurz daraut" 
ritt der Bote des Marschalls mit seineni Begleiter 
durch die Lagergasse. Er war ein junger Edel- 
mann von entschlossenem Wesen und sein (lesicht 
ware hlibsch gewesen, bis auf den unstaten w^ilden 
Blick der Augen, hatte nicht das wUste Lagerleben 
ihm vor der Zeit Furchen eingegraben. Er sah 
hochmUthig Uber die diistern, feindseligen Mienen 
der Reiter, welcho herandrangten, imi den wohlbe- 
kannten Mann zu betrachten. A-ls er am Fusz des 



Hugels abgestiegen war, verbeugte er sich mit 



hohnender Artigkeit gegen denFeldobersten,dieser 
abersclinitt ihm die Anrede ab, indom eranseinen 
Hut ruhrend im Tone ruhigen Befehls sagte : " Das 
Schi'eiben des Marschalls Turenne ist mir iiber- 
geben, ihr werdet hier die Antwort des Kriegs- 
raths erwarten." — Dabei wandte er deni Boten 
den Riicken und schritt mit seinem Gefolge dem 
Zelte zu, welches in eiiiiger Entfernung eilig auf- 
geschlagen wurde. 

GusTAV Fheytag, Did Geschtvider. 

Ein Tanzbar war der Kett' entrissen, 

Kam wieder in den Wald zurlick 

Und tanzte seiner Schar ein Meistei'stiick 

Auf den gewohnten Hinterfiiszen. 

" Seht," sclirie er, " .las ist Kunst, das lernt man in 

der Welt. 
Thut mir es nach, wenn's euch gefallt, 
Und wenn ihr koimt!" — "Geh," brunnnt ein alter Bar, 
" Dergleichen Kunst, sie sei so schwer, 
Sie sei so rar sie sei, 
Zeigt deinen niedern Geist und deine Sklaverei." 

Ein groszer Hofraann sein, 

Ein Mann, dem Schmeichelei und List 

Statt Witz unci Tugend ist, 

Der durch Kabalen steigt, des Fiirsten Gunst 

erstiehlt, 
Mit Wort und Schwur als Komplimenten spielt, 
Ein solcher Mann, ein groszer Hofmann sein, 
Schlieszt das Lob oder Tadel ein ? 

NG, Gedichte. 






{imuerfiiUtt of 3:oronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMIXATIONS: 18!)1. 



THIRD YEAH. 



GERMAN. 

HONORS. 



Exiiiidner : G. H. Neldlkh, B.A., Ph.D. 



/t; 



i/ >v* 



906 



!)10 



915 



I. 

Trasaslate: 

Dos fronte sich cliu reine maget. 
do ez vil kume was tfetajiot 
do ^'io si da ir herrc slief. 
sill trutgoinalielo irne rief, 
si .spracli ' herre, slafent ir ? ' 
' iiein icl), gemaliele, sage mir, 
wio bistu hiute also fiuo ? ' 
' heri'o, dfi twiiiget mich derzuo 
der jamer iuwerr sieclieit.' 
ev .spj'ach ' gemaliel, ihiz ist dir leit: 
daz erzeigest du iin inir wol, 
als ez dir got vcrgeUoii sol. 
mine mag es dehoiu rat .sin.' 
' entriuwen, lieber herre min, 
iuwer wirt vil !>uot rat. 
sit ez alsus uiube inch stat 
daz man iu gehelfeii inac, 
ichn gesume iucli niemer tac. 
herre, ir hunt uns doch gesaget, 
ob ir hetent eine maget 
diu gerne den tot durch iucli lite, 
da, soltent ir geneseii mite, 
diu wil ich weizgot .selbe sin : 
iuwor lebon ist nlitzer dan daz min.' 
Hahtman von Ouwe, Dev arme Heinnch. 

1. Give the jM'incipal jDarts of f/i« (905), sZi6'/"({)0o), 
>itm (91«), lite (92:3). 

2. Parse Des (90.S), Hick (903), hnmrr (9ll),c.3 (915), 
mive,}' (917). hwh (920), tac (920). 



920 



3. State the ordinary difference in Use between nic 
and nismev, ie arid iemer. 

4. Give the NHG. equivalents of tlie following 
words, writing notes on the changes the vowels have 
undergone in each : vil, kninc, sar/e, jamer, wof, sin, 
geneaen. 

5. dill reine. Decline singtdar and plural (feminine 
only.) 

6. Compare Der arnvi Heinrich with Longfellow's 
Goldfin Legend, noticing particularly the spirit of devo- 
tion on the part of the peasant's daughter and Elsie, 
and contrasting the underlying motives of each. 

II. 

1. Decline tac, hirte, znnge, tokter, dirre (all gen- 
ders), giving the con-esponding NHG. forms in parallel 
columns. 

2. Explain the general relation of MHG. to NHG. 
with respect to orthography, illustrating by examples. 

3. Enumerate the MHG. diphthongs, showing their 
NHG. equivalents by giving examples of correspond- 
ing words in the MHG. and NHG. periods. 

4. Show by a table the sub-divisions of High Ger- 
man, and give the relative geographical position of the 
different dialects, beginning with the southerrmiost. 

o. Write notes on : 

(a) Einigung im schriftlichen Oebrauch der 
deutschen Sprache. Here refer particularly to Luther's 
influence. 

(6) Nachtheile der Einigung. 

(c) Kennzeicltcn des NeuhoclulciUschen. 



^C ^'^ 



in. 

Translate into modern German : 

So die bluomen \\z dem grase dringent, 
same si lachen gegen der spilden sunnen, 
in eineni nieien an dem morgen fruo, 
Und diu kleinen vogellin wol singent 
in ir besten wise die si kunnen, 
waz wUnne mac sich da genozen zuo ? 
Ez ist wol halb ein liimelrtche. 
suln wir sprechen waz sicb deme geliclie, 
so sage ich waz mir dicke baz 

in minen ougen hat getan, und taete oucli noch, 
gesaehe ich daz. 

SwA ein edeliu frouwe schoeue reine, 
wol gekleidet unde wol gebunden, 
durch kui'zewile zuo vil liuten git, 
Hovelichen hohgemuot, niht eine, 
umbe sehende ein w^nic under stunden, 
alsam der sunne gegen den sternen st4t, — 
Der meie bringe uns al sin wander, 
waz ist dk s6 wUnnecltches under, 
als ir vil minnecltcher lip ? 

wir lazen alle bluomen stin, und kapfen an daz 
werde wip 

Walter v. d. Voqelweide, Oedichte. 

Notes : 8/)iWew-funkelnden ; (gfefemicfen-geschmiickt; 
under atunden-ah und zu ; kapfen-achHuen. 



• « 






\ 



dniUftmUff of Sotonto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GERMAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: W. H. vanderSmissen, M.A. 



■^ 



I. 

(a) Modernize and translate into English : 

Vom Himel hoch da kom ich her : 
ich bring euch gute newe mehr ; 
der guten mehr bring ich so viel, 
davon ich singen und sagen will. 

Euch ist ein kindlein heut geborn 
von einer Jungfraw auserkorn, 
ein kiudelein so zart und fein : 
das sol ewr freud und wonne sein. 

Es ist der Herr Christ, unser Gott : 
der wil euch fiiru aus aller not ; 
er wil ewr Hciland selber sein, 
von alien sunden machen rein. 

Er bring euch alle seligkeit, 
die Gott der Vater hat bereit, 
dasz ir mit uns ira himelreich 
solt leben nu und ewigleich. 

Martin Luther. 

1. Discuss the effect produced by Luther's transla- 
tion of the Bible on the German language, describing 
the condition in which he found it, and the motives 
which led him to adopt that particular dialect as a 
" Schriftsprache." 

2. Point out resemblances in the above extract to 
the " Volkslied," and mention the chief sources from 
which German hymns were drawn. 



8. Mention some of the leading hymn-writers of 
the 16th and 17th centuries, quoting from some of the 
hymns. 

4. Discuss the effect of the Reformation on German 
Jiternture. 

(h) Modernize and translate into English : 
Ich hab von Gabriel vernommen, 
Der Herr werd morgen zu uns kommen, 
Bey uns halten ein hohes fest, 
Und uns solches verkunden lest, 
Und will sohawen, wie wir hauszhalten 
Auch wie wir unsrer kinder walten, 
Wie wir sie auch den glauben lehrn, 
Auch wie sie Gott forchten und ehrn. 
Nach dem wirdt er uns leicht genaden. 
Darumb so thu die kinder baden, 
Strel ihn und schmiick sie ullesand 
Und leg ihn an ihr feyrgewand, 
Kehre das hausz, und strew ein grasz, 
Auff dasz es hierinn schmeck des basz, 
Wenn Gott der Her kompt morgen rein 
Mit den lieben Engelen sein. 

5. Give some account of the author, and of the 
play from which this extract is taken. 

0. Sketch the condition of the German drama in 
the 16th and 17th centuries, and give some account of 
one or more plays of this period, not including the one 
from which the above extract is taken. 

(c) Translate : 

Also was ist dir fur eyn Ehr, 

Wann riihmst die AltenTeUoSchen sehr, 

Wie sie f Ur ihre Freiheyt stritten 

Und keynen boesen Nachbarn litten, 
Und du achtst nicht der Freiheyt dein, 
Ranst kaum inn deim Land sicher sein, 

Last dir dein Nacubarn sein Pferd 
binden 

An deinen Zaun fornen und hinden ? 
Sollt auch solch Feyger art gebiiren. 
Dasz sie soil Kron und Scepter f iihren ? 

FlSCHAllT. 






A 



I 



I 



he 

in 

no 



•\ 



7. Give some account of the author and his chief 
works. 

(d) Translate : 

Der Oast antwort entlich gar prechtig 

Unser aller Qott ist allmechtig, 
Der alles kan, was er nur will : 

Sonst, halt ich, sein der Mausz nicht 
viel, 
Die solche pracht und herligkeit 

Der nahrung haben diese ;;eit, 
Als ich in meiner Residentz 

Genisz aus guldcnen Credentz 
Und wenn ihrdas selbstwoltanschawen 

Mit ewm Kindern und der Frawen, 
So ziht mit mir die Stad hienein : 

Da wolln wir ei-t recht frcslich sein, 
Essen und trincken herfur langen, 

Das etwas anders sol herprangen 
Denn diese arme betteley ; 

Und ihr meint.das nichts bessers sey. 

Froachmeiiaeler. 

8. Give a sketch of this poem, and name the author. 

9. Account for the prevalence of didactic poetry in 
this period. 

10. Estimate the influence of English upon German 
literature, mentioning the principal English authors 
who found favour in Germany, and also some of the 
German authors influenced by them. 



i 



SltittitV0Utf of Soirottto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18l«|, 



f 



Till HI) YKAll. 



GI]RMAN 

HONORS. 
GOETHE. 



JCxnmiw.r: W. H. vanderSmisskn, M.A 



1 



T. 

Transliitc the following passages, indicating the con- 
n(!ction of each with the plot of the play, with 
ilhistiaUve niiotation.s, and explanatory comtncnts: 

(a) Si(! hiiicn niciit die folgciiden Gesange, 
Die Seelen, ilenen ich die ersten sang ; 
Zerstoben ist das freiindlicho Gedrunge, 
^'eiklungen ach ! dcr ci.ste Wiederklang. 
Mein Lcid ertont der nnhekaunten Mengo, 
Ihr Beifall selbst niacht incineni Hcrzen bang; 
IJiid wns sich sonst nn ineinem Lied erfreuet, 
Wenn e.s noch lebt, int in der Welt zerstteuet. 

(b) So sehreitet in deni engen Bretterhaus 
J^eJi ganzen Kreis der Schopfung aus, 
Und wandelt mit bedaeht'ger Schnelle 
Vom Himmel diirch die Welt zur HoUe. 

(c) Such' Er den redlichen Gewinn! 
Sey Er kein schelleniauter Thor ! 
Ks tviigt Verstand und rechter Sinn 
Mit wenig Kiinst .sich solber vor; 

Und wenn's (Mich Ern.st ist was zu sagen, 

Lst's notliig Worten nachzujagen ? 

Ja, euro Reden, die so blinkend sind, 

In donen ilir der Men.schheit Schnitzel krauselt, 

Sind nuunjuicklich wie der Nehelwind, 

Der hcrbstlich durch die dlirren Blatter sjiuseltl 



((/) Dciii Ilt'niiclistfn.wnsiincli dti (icistciiipfiitii^i'ii. 
Driingt innuur t'lc.ml iiinl Ircinilfr Sttill'sicli jiti; 
Wonii wir /uin (Jutni dicscr \\'(!lt ;4:i'laii;;(i). 
Dan lii'is/t iliis Hi'ss'rc 'Vvw^ iiml Wiilm. 
Diu uiiN <la.s LcIk'II «;u1icii, hfiriiclir (li'liililc 
Krstan't'ii in dcin irdisclicM (!i wiilili'. 

Woiin lMiantasi»i hIcIi .sojist, init kiiluu'in V\\\>f, 
\hu\ lioiriitiii^svoll /iiiii ICwijLfon orwoiterl, 
St) ist (in klcinci' Hauiii ilir mm <j;»'mi;^. 
Wenri (jlUck aut'CJliick iiii /oitfiistni«lcl Hi'lici- 

tort. 
Die Sor,<j;(' Mi,stct ylcidi iiii tit'fVn Hci-^^on, 
Dort wirki't sie ;4cliciiin' Sclmiutzoii. 
Unruliif^ wicj^t sic sirli imd stiiivt Lusl imd llnli; 
Sio dcckt sich stcts mit iiciit'ii AJaskcii /n, 
ISio mag als Mans iind Hot", als Wcili imd Kind 

ersclitincn, 
Vis Feuor, \Vas.ser, D«»lch und (iiit; 
t)\\ Itt'l'st vor alli 111 Avns niclit triti't, 
Und was dn nie vfilicivst das mus/.l dii stetM 

beweinen. 

(e) Ich bin dor Ooist dor stets vtvncint I 

Und das niit Keclit ; doini alios was ontstolit 
1st M'orth das/< os /,n (irimdi- ,L;i'lit; 
JJrnni bosser wiir's das/, niclits i-ntstiindo. 
80 ist donn alios was ihr Siindo, 
Zcrstorung, knvz dns Bliso nonnt, 
Mein oij^ontliohos Elotnont. 

(/) Was willst du arnior Toui'ol gebon f 

Ward oiiios Monsclion Geist, in soinoni liolion 

Strobon, 
Von dcinos Gloidion jo gofasst ? 
Doph bast du Spoiso, die niolit f-attigt, hast 
Du rotbos Gold, das obiio Kast, 
Quocksilbcr gloicb, dir in dor Hand zerrinnt, 
Ein Spiol, bei doiii man nio gowinnt, 
Ein Miidchon, das an nioinor Brust 
Mit Aeugelnscliondem Nacbbar.sicb vorbindot, 
]>er Ehro schono Giittorkist, 
Die wie ein Meteor vovscliwindot. 
Zcig' mir die Fruclit, ilio fault, oli man sie liricbt, 



\ 



- 



Und Dtiumo, die sich tiiglieb nou 



iogrunon I 



Iiei- 



" 



(//) thiM/, (It-m Mi'ii.s.'lii'ii iiiclit>i V*t)llkt)iiuii'iio.>. wiitl, 
Kiiiplind' it'll iiiin. Dn i^iili.st /u diostT Wuiiiu', 
|)ir iiiirli tltn (iMltciii Mali' iiml iiiiliur l)iin;^4, 
.Mir tb'ii (Jt'tMliitoii, ilcii ii-h sdioii jiiclit lurlir 
I'liitliclindi kimn, WfttUMT <,'loi('li, kalt iiihI t'lucli, 
Mii.'li vur iiiir scllt.st oriii('(lii<,'t, uinl zu Nicht.s, 
Mit (!iiirm VVoiLliancii, tiiMiie (iiiltcii wuiuiult. 
Kv t'aclit in inciiitr lirust <>.iv tvihlcs Feiici' 
Nacli Jt'iicin ■(•liliiit'u I5il(l ;;(iscliiit'tl<j[ an. 
Si) taniiir ifli voM nt'j^icr<l(i zu tii'iius/, 
IJjul iiii (lemii/ viirHcliinaclit' i(;h iuii;h l5o^ici*<lc. 

Faufft, W I. 

2. Skoteli tlic tolliivviiijL; scene's, witli (|U()tati()ns, 
slioNviii^ tlu'ir (joniicctioii uitli tlii' plot : Prohti;^ iin 
Hiinnii'l ; Spazier/^fanj,' ; Walil und Hiilik'; TrUlu'r Taj,'- 
Fekk 

.']. Sinn np the ovickMico as to the original plot 
ilcsignt'd l»y (^(U'tlu* for this phiy, particnhirly with 
roferenco to this introduction of Muphisto. 

II. 

1, Givo Honio account of tho following periods of 
Oootho's life, outlining his literary activity in each, 
and the products thercol:* in particular : caieer at Strass- 
hurg ; stay at Wetzlar ; early Weimar period ; first 
journey to Italy. 

'2. Show by (piotations and otherwise your ac(iuaint- 
ance with WUhclin DIcinterH La/irjahre, and compare 
it with FtiiisL 

li. Give an estimate of Gothe's powers a.s a lyric poet, 
with quotations. 

4. Sketch and criticise " Egniont," or " Tonjuato 
TaHso," with (piotations. 






snnfuetfiiUi? of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



ITALIAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: W. II. Fraser, B.A. 



I. 

Tianslate : 

(a) Ci6 vuol dire che lo spettacolo d'una creatura 
umana, alia quale s'abbia amoie, basta a temprare 
la solitudine. M'avca dapprima lecato questo 
benefizio un povcio bambino muto, od or me lo 

5 recava la lontana vista dun uouio di gran merito. 

(b) Mio Dio, accetto tutto dalla tua mano; ma invig- 
orisci si prodigiosa inento i cuori a cui io era neces- 
sario, ch'io cessi d' ^sser lore tale, e la vita d'alcun 
di loro non abbia perci6 ad abbreviarsi pur d'un 



10 



giorno ! 



(c) Lasciai passar piti d'un miglio, poi dissi al conte 
B.:— 

Suppongo che si vada a Verona. 
— Si va piil in la, rispose; andiamo a Veneaia, ove 
15 debbo eonsegnarla ad una commissione speciale. 

(jl) To faceva la storia di tutto il bene ed il male 
che in me s'erano i'ormati dall'infanzia in poi, 
discutendo meco stesso, ingegnandomi di sciorre 
ogni dubbio, ordinando quanto meglio io sapea 
20 tutte le mie cognizioni tutte le mie idee sopra ogni 
cosa. 



(e) Oh Irldio benedica tutte le anime generose, che 
non s'adontano d'amare gli sventurati! Ah, tanto 
piti le apprezzo, daccht, negli anni della mia cala- 
25 init^ Tie conobbi pur di codarde, che mi rinnegarono, 
e credettero vantaggiarsi, ripetendo improperii 
contro me. 

(/) Schiller allungava le labbra, ed avrei scomesso 
ch'ei pensava ti-a s^ : — S'io fossi soprintendente, 
30 non porterei la paura fino a quel grado; ne il 
prendersi un arbitrio cosl giustificato dal bisogno, 
e COS! innocuo alia monarchia, potrebbe mai lipu- 
tarsi gran fallo. 

1. 8'ahbia {\. 2). Why reflexive? Why subjunctive ? 

2. gran (1. 5). When is this adjective abbreviated 
and when is it not ? 

3. invigorisci (11. 6-7). Turn into the negative. 

4. benedica (1. 22). Why subjunctive ? 

5. Show in tabular form the iiTcgularities of vuol, 
suppongo, si vada, rispose, debho,facev(i, sciorre, sapea, 
benedica, corobbi. 



Translate : 



II. 



Chi non h mai uscito di luoghi piccoli, dove 
regnano piccole ambizioni ed avarizia volgare, con 
un odio intenso di ciascuno contro ciascuno, come 
ha per favola i grandi vizi, cosi le sincere e solide 
v'lrib. sociali. E nel particolare dell' amicizia, la 
crede cosa appartenete ai poemi ed alle storie, non 
alia vita. E s'inganna. Non dico Piladi o Piritoi, 
ma buoni amici e cordiali, si trovano veramente 
nel mondo, e non sono rari. I servigi che si possono 
aspettare e richiedere da tali amici, dico da quelli 
che dk veramente il mondo, sono, o di parole, che 
spesso riescono utilissime, o anco di fatti qualche 
volta : di roba, troppo di rado ; e 1' uomo savio e 
prudente non ne de' richiedere di si fatti. Piu 
presto si trova chi per nn estraueo metta a peri- 
colo la vita, che uno che, non dico sponda, nia 
rischi per 1' amico uno scudo. 

Leopardi. 






III. 

Tmnslate into Italian : 

(a) At a time when so much attention was being 
given to ancient art in Italy that modern art was 
being neglected, Michael Angelo had resort {rlcor- 
rere) to a stratagem in order to teach the critics 
the folly of judging such things according to 
fashion or reputation. He made a statue which 
represented a sleeping beauty, and, breaking off an 
arm, buried it in a place where excavations {scava- 
mento) were being made. It was soon found, and 
was lauded by critics and by the public as a valu- 
able relic of antiquity. When Michael Angelo 
thought the time opportune he produced the broken 
arm, and, to the great mortification of the critics, 
revealed himself as the sculptor. 

(6) 1. You should have told me that last night; I 
could have asked Charles to come. 2. He can 
neither read nor write. 3. It is generally believed 
that Rome was founded by Romulus. 4. This is 
the most interesting book I have ever read. 5. 
Whatever he undertakes to do, he does it diligently. 
6. That old man has been in my service for 
twenty-one years. 7. We told him it was not the 
time for arguing. 8. Who.se books are these ? 9. 
Of these three pictures this is the one I should 
prefer. 10. We went to America in a steam-boat 
and came back in a sailing-vessel. 

IV. 

1. Write a short biographical sketch of Torquato 
Tasso, with dates. 

2. " To Carlo Goldoni belongs the honor of being the 
first dramatic reformer of the 18th century." Enlarge. 

3. Write notes on II Tesoretto, Orlando Furioso, 
Italia Liberata dai Goti, I Promessi Sposi, naming the 
author in each case. 

4. Give some account of the writings of Guldo 
Cavalcanti, Cino da Pistoja, Dante, Villani, Alfieri. 

V. 

Dictation at 12.00 o'clock, 



S^nfbtii8(i$ of toi^olli^t 






ANNUAL UXA^llNATIONS rlSdl. 



THIRD YEAR. ^ ''^ 



...filJIV/! 



ITALIAN, 

HONORS. 



Emminer : Wm. Oldright, M.A., M.D. 



1. Give syntactical rules for the use of the definite 
article. lUiistvate by short sentences. 

2. Mention the difierent comparatives of adjectives, 
state how they are formed and illustrate by examples. 

3. Give rules for the agreement of the past participle. 

4. Point out and illustrate the principal o'rthogi-aphi- 
cal changes in the transition from Latin to Italian. 

'). Translate : 

Canto i' armi pietose, e il Capitano 
Che il gran sepolcro libero di Cristo : 
Molto egli opro col senno e con la uiano ; 
Molto RottVi nel glorloso acquisto : 
E in van 1' Inferno a lui s'oppose, e invano 
S' arm6 d' Asia e di Libia il popol misto ; 
Che il Giel gli die favore, e sotto ai santi 
Segni ridusse i suoi compagni erranti. 

Musa, tu che di caduchi allori 
Non circondi la fronte in Elicona,. 
Ma su nel Cielo infra i beati cori 
Hai di stelle immortali aurea corona, 
Ti; spira al petto mio celesti ardori, 
Tu rischiara il mio canto, e tu perdona 
Se intesso fregi al ver, se adorno in parte 
D' altri diletti, che de' tuoi, le carte. 

La Gerus Lib., Canto I. 

7. What other poems, ancient or modern, resemble 
the above in their opening lines ? 



7. lafronte. Whose ? Supply the Italian word or 
words to remove the ambiguity. 

8. aurea corona. Paraphrase. 

9. Translate : 

Seato 

E chi potrebbe 
Rapirtene 1' acquisto { Ella t* adora ; 
In sine al giorno estrenio 
Sar6 tuo ; Tito h giusto. 

Annio. 

11 so, ma temo. 
lo sen to che in petto 
Mi palpi ta il core, 
i*Jfe so qual sospetto 
Mi faccia temer. 

Se dubbio h il contento, 
Diventa in ainore 
Sicuro tormento 
L'incerto piacer. 

Lu Clem, di Tito, Act I, Sc. 3. 



Tito, 



E dove mai s' intese 

Piti contumnce infedeltk! Poteva 

II piu tenero padre un figlio reo 

Trattar con piti dolcezza ? Anche innnocente 

D'ogni altro error, saria di vita indegno 

Per questo sol. Deggio alia mia negletta 

Disprezzata clemenza una vendetta. 

Vendetta ! Ah Tito ! e tu sarai capace 

D'un si basso desio, che rende equalo 

L'ofFeso all oti'ensor ? Merita in vero 

Gran lode una vendetta, ovc non costi 

Piti che il volerla. II torre altrui la vita 

E facoltii comune 

Al piu vil della terra ; il darla h solo 

De' Numi e de' regnanti. Eh viva. . ,In vano 

Parian dunque le leggi ? lo lor custode 

Le eseguisco cosi ? Di Sesto aniico 

Non sa Tit,o scordarsi ? Han pur saputo 

Obliar d'esser padri e Manlio e Bruto. 

Ibid., Act III., Sc. 7. 



i ■ i 

i ,! 



»H.a 



to. Substitute full proso forms for any sliortenod 
or poetic forms in the al)ove extracts. 

11. Rewrite in prose form the second stanza of 
Annio'g speech. 

12. Translate : 

Quest! fenomeni di contratture e catalessi (con- 
traetm'ea and catalepsies) noi 11 abbiamo tutti 
nettamente osservati nel caso tipico di istero< 
epilcssia (hysterO'epilepHy), che form6 oggetto di 
varie comunicazioni col l)r. Seppelli. E noi siamo 
jierfettamente sicuri di averli ottenuti al di fuori 
di qualsisia suggestione. Infatti, sebbene allora, 
(era nel 1881), non si parlasse ancora di auggeatione 
nella produzione dei fenomeni ipnotici, noi per6 
ponevamo ogni cura a prendere tutte le precauz- 
ioni contro qualche cosa di piti che noi temevamo, 
ciofe la aimulazione. Quando cominciammo le 
nostre ricerche sull' ipnotismo, eravamo sutto 
I'influenza di una forte dose di scetticismo; dubit- 
avamo che il sonno fosse completo, che la coscienza 
fosse soppressa. Temevamo quindi ad ogni mo- 
niento che la nialata potesse interpretare, con la 
line'ifza propria delle isteriche, cio che si attendeva; 
quindi, dal principio alia fine delle nostre esperi- 
oDze, una serie infinita di precauzioni per pnrci al 
coperto da ogni inganno, perche i fenomeni si pro- 
ducessero nelle condizioni della piu assoluta spon- 
taneity, ed una serie di verifiche e di controlli, 
alcuni dei quali, come quelli sulla magnete, ci 
condussero a important! risultati, che hanno valso 
a metterne in luce I'azione suggestiva. 

Comunicazione Sull 'Ipnotismo, 

pel Prof. A. Tamhumni. 



! : 



:.\ 



T==T 



eittiflier0(t|? of Toronto 



« 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



TirilU) YKAU. 



ORIENTALS. 

PASS. 



r, . (J. M. HrUSCHFELDKH, 

Examiners: | .,. p. McCuudy. 



1 . Translate : 

• T" -l)"' v-^- t;itI -t 

:D^DT»?a3 £Tiyn:ki nnn oben bDtc'T ri&tn ns:? 
^?a-nfi^ : i32?-'ni^ ins?^ b-^kt nin-i mn-^&^ pn-^ja 

pniSD^ •'bi)2 -1^3 n^iri "^n = iDi^^ni niD^nri '^nm 

■•7 Vi^ lisnbi : bitoi' p_i2 c^^s^ yi ^sronD 5^im?a 
isa. xi. 12-17. : nbi3? •'T vi«''n^nT n:?a 

2 Explain the use of the Imperfect and its equivalent in 
the above verses. Parse tho words marked *. Give the 
construction of both clauses of tho last verse. 

3. Translate : 

: nn QiDbnb mm n''b2> wb n?3Tri3 "irt n^!^s^6S^ 
^ipnb tiiiiii d:'?iy ripBb : d-'i:\ "lii^b or tr^nnb 

Isa. xliii. 5-7. . Tjpn •^ITD'; fi<b3 CT^a^ TSfei "l^S))??? 



]uivalent in 
(jfivo the 



4. Deriv(( Qij^^j^^j . Piirso ptniJ ""•' give tho niouii- 

inga of t\w Kill, Piol, initl Ff'|tliil of p^n . I'urHe "TlSi^. 

Hiiii intloct till! Iiii|M>nitiv() iui«l fnipurfoct of tiiiH vut-b in the 
Hiunt) stt'iu. 

r». TiiiiiNlate : 

iriD^ nn np^"* d^b i^ip^ nn "^Dst n^n-ib ^?2»"i nr 
is.i xii. V. \. J n3D-> b^itDi D®ai mn-'b it 

6. Upon what tMistoins in tho pliroHcology of tho above 
verHe based. Dcoliuo "^^ . lutloct f^j^i ; hImo tl»e Perfect 

of the same stem. 

7. TnuiHhite ; 

-Biia ^5pn 'n72>tT ^ir^a^rn dbtfii-'m mn^n iTan 
^5 bi^ n&^-^n:*' '.soj^n in7a»i ^s^b^a ^xip y^i^n 

.. t T T I . II .. I • 1 - ll- I 

rrTi'p^i ionsTp n-'^jst nb^ : bn:i "laoT "jiBaTp 6«'''?i9 
'i\->-\y n;a':jb -la^i^ aiicb i73ip?a)a ^s"" yo3 Q'''i^ 

Jer. iv. 6-7. : ^i^'ii "j-jj^Ta np'^S^yl 

8. Par.se Tfi^JH '^^^ Hj'^IItl • ^^^® ^-'^^ Perfect and 
Imperfect of ^^i iu uH the stems. 



Ji->&5:sfi{:s:i 

' ' ' •■! If , 

C3? ri^nnb 
Dii 15&7??? 



,- ■♦ 



.- •♦ 



Slti(iiet:«Ui? of SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 
HONORS. 



(HEBREW TEXTS.) 



E, . f J. M. FlIllSCHFKi; 



DER. 



1. Translate : 

■inp2?7ap TIBS '\!:n"'.n ib i^» qitji i:?^a rrjnii nstirf n 
•^^^ ^pi?ai pi^n ns bs i-is:? bsrin : nob ts&c ^ribn 
5pri"; C65 J msb'' «b -nDbn n?an«n "^^ ns nb^n nb 
nin^iT T:>n n:?-i n^nn DS5 ^nin*' i^b a3?T T^a -"Sira 
nb:^ tii5 ""D "^m mn- 'jIk nis:?'' i^b -^2 : nb:? i^b 
fi^y'} i^b 173 :k55*ij m-ifift : d-ii^inDn T'nn:?-bfi5 inio 
Amos iii, 4-s. : 5^^5T j^b 172 Hm -nn"" "^anfi^ 

2. Supply the vowels in the verbs left unpointed above. 
Explain more fully tlie metaphors here employed. From 
what source are the illustrations f Amos generally taken 1 
How is this to be accounted for ? 

3. Translate : 

'^•'nb:??! 'c : "in npy • '^''inssbn n?2-i y: ^CT^ip:? ni2 ^t-is 

']^Dsb nb^jsi "^^O^ns tD^nn^ n^3?a^ D^-)S:?a ps^^a 

Y^'s pbn y.:';"n72 isr'z" its:? : onp^ i-irr^^ n:ri?3 rii^ 
ny D^ppn "^Ta -ii:'n"'^n c^bn ^rlK ro3? n^^ nstiTa 

mn"' Q^pi^ n?2;i : mn^ mpn:2 n^ir -[^nb b-:^b'j>n 

nDtD "-sn d-ibriri m'bi:'-: nD^anps^n cii^a -^nbi^b D2&5 

T T : • T -' ' 

Micah vi. 3-6. 



|v 



#-' 



4. Point fully the words above marked •. Account for 
the divorgont i)ointing3 of n?3 • I'arse pjj^ and inflect the 
tense. 

5. Translate : 

tD:nss< ny-} cnx ']-»by yT •'o']Si : in-'b^avjiT lan&iT 

ns^-ipnin n^:rp2^ nnn-ia nb^a : -i^5<b inib^avisi 

5 b»it:-"|n ri» riDira *^b?3 Ti^'b^a?-) n^ibs^ 

Isaiuh vii. 4-6. 

6. Parse 't^': . What are the Imperative and Pari;, of 

the same stem ? Decline fTQDT • What is the meaning of 
the lust word in this extract 1 To what rase did the person 
named belong ] What is the proof ] 

7. Translate : 

: HD^bs? n;^3n nb5;i j^b rinptc T">5'/a *^iDnb "^nsi ^b 
D''xBi ib -ni:? '^-■da n^ipb ib nni rinn?a bi^a 

• T ■ J ■' If I I T : IT ; 

dbD : d^^!^ iDb?: bs drn"i<p3?? d"pn p!j5 'i^in? bD 
nj-'bs iDi?aD tribn nn«i dn 'i-'bi? TiJai^^i iD^'' 

Isaiah xiv. 7-10. j J^b'SJTSD 

8. Point and parse p^^^p^, '\'2yit tT^bn- Pai'se 

nnD> "l"n2? • What is meant by the first claiise of the 
second of the above verses ? Give the syntax fully of the 
second olpuse of the same verse. 

9. Translate at sight : 

-imTsa •■3?ps5 ^3 dbx i-isb iim nss b^&ts :ibT t» 

1^^ T ' : .. I TT-;iT 't; •- 

^T's' nn?aiui Tibis dos'i b^ dbi:? nn?aipT ns)-ia 

T T t; (T 1 T T I 



i 



(!itif\ier0Uti of Euro!itu. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 

HEBREW SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 



hkcamineri* : 



J. M. HiRSCUFELDEU. 
J. F. McClJRDY. 



i 



\ V 



1. Give the rules for the use of numerals in Hebrew. 

2. Translate : Every yeai- ha.s twelve inonths or (and) 
three hnndi-ecl and sixty-five days. Six days in every 
seven were !i;iven to man for lahour, and one is the 
Sabbath. 

li. Give a s,'eneral statement of the function of the 
so-called tenses in Hebrew. 

•i. Explain h(nv the Perfect may be used of future 
events, and clas.sify the cases in wluch it may be so 
employed. 

5. Translate : The Prophet of Israel said : 1 saw a 
great vision, and behold my people had become strong 
and numerous through their faith [because they be- 
lieved] in God ; and their captors had ceased from off 
the earth, and those whom they had served became 
servants to them. 

6. In what cases may the Imperfect be used of 
present events ? Compare such usage with that of the 
Perfect also as used for our Present. 

7. Translate : Our enemies gathered themselves 
together, as bees do, while we were re-building our 
beautiful. <'ity. But we remembei'ed that Jehovah 
saves those who fear him and serve him ; and so wp 
were delivered from those who hate us. 

8. Define the functions of the Jussive and Cohorta- 
tive. 



■ • > 



^ 






I 



iSiiiutietflfUtt of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



! i 



UlUENTALS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner 



'8 ; •} 



J. M. HiRSCHFELDER. 
J. V. McCURDY. 



ARABIC. 



1. Translate : 

Fa lamina wafawu '1 liariinia akania bihi mh 

¥ 

.sa'a 'I 'lahu 'an yukirna wa karraba '1 karabina 
wa kaday I innnasika wa bassara 'ahlahu bi 
hurugi nabiyyina Muhammadi" salUiy '1 'lahu 
'alayhi wa .sallama. 

2. Parse tvdfatvu. Ex|)lairi the change in the last 
syllable. Inflect kuddy in the Perfect. 

3. Give the Hebrew etymological equivalents of the 
verbs and nouns occurring in this extract. Account 
for the form vabiyyi. 

4. Translate ; 

Fa ra'ay 'arda" bayda'a hasanata" tazhu bi 
hudratiha fa 'ahabba '1 nuzula biha li yusalliya 
wa yat^gadday fa talabu '1 ma 'a fa lam yagiduhu. 

5. Parse tazhu, yusalliya, yagiduhu. Account for 

the tense and mood in each case. Compare the moods 
in Arabic with corresponding forms in Hebrew. Dis- 
tinguish between the uses of wa and fa. 



{ 



I 






6. Decline the ndjective haaan in all numbers and 
both genders. Inflect the imperfect and imperative of 
talaba. 

7. Translate : 

Kala 'I hudhudu fi nafsihi 'inna Sulaymana 

kadi stagala bi '1 nuzuli fa 'rtafa'a 'ilay nahwi '1 sama'i 
wa nazara 'ilay tilli '1 dunya wa 'ardiha. 

8. Inflect kola in Perfect and Imperfect. Give the 
3 sing. Peri, of the derived stems. 



I 



t 



^ni\^nnitp of CTotonto. 



HUri'LKAlENTAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



PSYCHOLOGY : THE WILL 



Examiner : J. Mark Baldwin, M.A., Ph.D. 



Candi'lates may omit one question. 



) 



1. How do you distinguish the states of will from 
other states of consciousness ? Define afi'ect, end, 
volition. 

2. What is the most general psychological stimulus 
to \-olition / Say what you can of the psychology of 
desire. 

3. Explain the two great theories of the physical 
basis of the sense of eflbrt. What are the elements of 
character ? How is character related to will ? 

4. What is meant by volitional apperception ? Criti- 
cise the theory that choice is the outcome of motive- 
forces. How do you explain choice ? Is a motive a 
force ? 

o. Can a man choose any one of his motives and 
realize it ? After volition, is it true that he could 
have chosen differently ? Is choice ever motiveless ? 
Justify your answer. 

G. Criticise accidentalism, and external determinism. 
Explain in what sense the will is free. In what sense 
is its activity conditioned ? 

7. Explain Sully's view of the sense of obligation. 

8. Suppose I hold a strictly mechanical theory of 
brain and nerve action : what views of the relation 
of mind r\nd body in voluntary movement are open to 
me i 



^\ 



!^ 







IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 










1.0 



I.I 



1.25 



M jg^ Ik: 
" 1^ ■ M 



u 

Viau 






6" 



•** 



^ 







Photographic 

Sciences 

Coiporation 







23 WIST MAIN STREr 

WEftSTir.N.Y. 145M 

(716)i72-4S03 






f 



^ 



4. 



y 



s 



I! ' 



ammetfiiftv of sTotouto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. McD. Duncan, B.A. 



1. What assistance is lent by the doctrine of evolu- 
tion to the formation of a physical theory of (a) con- 
science ; (b) free-will ? 

Point out the logical consequences of such a 
theory. 

2. (a) How are animal wants transformed into 
motives ? 

(6) Are motives necessarily determined ? And if 
so, does this determination exclude freedom ? 

3. Can a moral action ever be constituted by desire ? 
In other words is desiring ever equivalent to willing f 
And if so, what is the real distinction between desire 
that is identical with will, and desire that cannot be so 
identified ? 

4. Explain the sense in which desire and thought 
may be called conditions antecedent to willing and the 
sense in which desire and thought enter into an act of 
will. 

5. Is Mill's doctrine, that some pleasures are intrin- 
sically more desirable than others, compatible with the 
position that all desire is for pleasure ? 



% 



6. Define moral good. How do we gains a ufficient 
knowledge of ultimate moral good for the guidance of 
our conduct ? 

7. " Thus we inherit from the Greek philosophers 
both the principle of morality, and the articulation of 
that principle." Grekn. 

Trace the development in the articulation of this 
principle among the Greeks, and in modern times, and 
point out the condition on which its further articulation 
depends. 



\ / 






f 



I 



ft 



iinftirr0ftt> of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



i! I 



PSYCHOLOGY. 

HONORS. 



Examvner : J. Mark Baldwin, M.A., Ph.D. 



EXPERIMENTAL AND THE WILL. 

1. Explain in detail Bain's theory of the origin and 
development of volition. Is spontaneous movement 
with the laws of pleasure and pain sufficient to account 
for complex voluntary movement ? If not, why not ? 

2. What meanings do Sully and Bain, respectively, 
give to the terms "motive" and "deliberation"? What 
does Bain make of "freedom ?" What are the nature 
and limits of my power to hold an idea before me by 
attending to it ? 

3. Argue the " Innervation" question. Show its 
bearings on the theory of the will ? 

4. State and illustrate Weber's law. Explain the 
"psychological" and "physiological" interpretations of 
it. 

5. How would the doctrine that sensation is an 
apperceptive process lead one to expect some such law 
as Weber's ? How would the pruiciple of "nervous 
summation" lead one to expect it ? 

6. Give a rdsiiTn^ of the main results reached by 
experiments in Psychoraetry. What light do they 
throw on attention and will ? 

7. Explain Helmholtz's and Lotze's theories of the 
perception of space. What evidence is there for the 
existence of "local signs ?" 



itH 



8. State the main facts established concerning the 
localization of motoi* and sense functions in the cortex 
of the brain. What light do they throw on the asso- 
ciation of ideas, on memory, on the so-called "speech 
faculty?" 

9. What do you understand by a psycho-physical 
conception of mind ? Is it a materialistic conception ? 
What assumptions are necessary to justify the experi- 
mental method in psychology ? 



TSfaoBSummimi 



I 



{LUi 



4_ 



Unihfvnttp of r or on to. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



HISTORY OF ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY. 

HONORS. 
* Examiner : Thomas H. Mitohell, B.A, 



1. Briefly describe the general tendency of each of 
the three periods of ancient philosophy. 

2. Empedocles has beet* described as an eclectic, 
uniting the fundamental ideas of his two immediate 
predecessors. Show the justice of such a designation 
by a reference to his system. 

3. What fault common to all preceding systems, does 
the philosophy of Anaxagoras begin to remove ? 

4. " The philosophy of Socrates is the positive com- 
plement of the sophistic |)rinciple." Explain. 

5. Give a brief positive exposition of the Platonic 
ideal theory, and indicate the important sources of its 
es.sential elements. 

6. Gontrast the philosophic methods of Plato and 
Aristotle. 

7. Discuss the tenability of the stoic theory of 
morals. 

8. " Philosophy has nut infrequently resigned some 
wide and fruitful territory iti order to return upon 
some narrow strip of land." 

Illustrate the truth of this statement by an in- 
stance from the history of ancient philosophy. 



t I ! 



i I! 



Ui; 



h 



ilntiifV0U|? oc STotoiito. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIOiNS : 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



MEDIAEVAL PHILOSOPHY AND (JlCEliO 
DE EliMBUS. 



Ejcaminer: Tuos. H. Mitchell, B.A. 



I. 

1. What was tile most important controversy during 
the Hrst period of the mediaeval philosophy 'i Indicate 
the respective positions taken in this discussion by 
Johannes Scotus, Hoscellinus, and Ahelard. 

2. State accurately the meanin*,' ofthe motto, " Credo 
ut intelligam," and show that upon the whole this was 
the watchword for the first centuries of the scholastic 
movement. 

8. " Voluntas est superior intellectu." (live some. 
explanation of this statement, the name of its author, 
and an nccountof the doctrine to which it was opposed. 

4. Indicate some of the principal results of the 
scholastic philosoph^''. 

II. 

6. Translate : 

Quid igitur est ? inquit ; audirc cnim cupio, quid 
non probes. 

Give in substance the answer of Cicero to this 
question. 

6. Translate : 

Quodsi ne ipsarum quidem virtutum laus, in 
qua maxime ceterorum philosophorum exsultat 
oratio, reperire exitum potest, nisi derigatur ad 
voluptatem, voluptas autem est sola, quae nos 



Hpi 
1)111 



'y 



vocist a<l so ct alHciut Hunpto tiatiira, noii iiotest 
(!NS(; ilii))iiun,(|nin id nit siiinnitiin ut(|iu! uxtrcinuin 
lioMoruiii ouiiiiiiiii, hoaluiiuu vivuru uiliil aliud sit 
niMi cum voluptatu vivore. 

Meiition sonic of tlio argutnonts nsod \>y Torqua- 
tus to estahlisli the al)()vu position. 

7. Transliitc : 

Ac(|Uaiii ij^ittir proiumtial;it sentoiitiaiu ratio 
adhibita pi'liMiuii divinaniin iiiiniaiuiriiiiKpie ;onim 
scifiitia, ([uac potust aijpollari rit^ siipioutia, deindu 
adiuiictis virLiitHius, (puis i-jitio reruin omnium 
domitias, tu voluptatum ,sat<'llite.s ot ministras esse 
voluisti ; ([uarum aduo omnium sentt'iitia pronun- 
tial)it primuni do voluptatu, luhil csso ei loci, non 
moJo ut sola ponatur m sunuui boni sedo, quam 
(piaorinuis, .sod no iilo quidem modo, ut ad hones- 
tateni applicotui'. Do vacuitato doloris eadem 
sentontia erit. Huiciotur otiam Carneades, nee 
ulla ilo suanno bono ratio aut volupLatis nou 
dolendivo particeps aut honcstatis expurs proba- 
bitur. Itaronnipiet duas, de ((uibus etiam atipio 
etiam considorot. Aut onim statuet nihil esse 
bonum nisi honostum, nihil malui.i nisi turpe, 
cetera aut onniino nihil habere momenti aut tau- 
tum, ut nee cxpetenda nee fugienda, sed eligenda 
'nodo aut reicienda sint, aut anteponet eani, quam 
cum honestatt! oniatissimam, tum etiam ipsis ini- 
tiis naturae et totius perf'ectiono vitae locuplota- 
tam videbit. Quod eo licpiidius t'aciet, .si |)orspex- 
erit, roruni inter eas vorborumne .sit controversia. 

What is your own conception of the Summum 
lionuni ? 










lii 




[ 


1 




, 


i 




2!8niiitt0ftp of roronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD EXAMINATION. 



THE WILL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 



Examiner: J. McD. Duncan, B.A. 



1 1 



! i 



iHiM 



1. (a) Mention some typical statements of the ques- 
tion of freedom in willing. 

(b) How would you defend a doctrine of freedom 
from the charge of contradicting the law of causality ? 

2. (a) By what criteria does Calderwood distinguish 
first principles of conduct ? 

(6) Are first principles of conduct known intui- 
tively ? 

3. State accurately the relation each to the other of 
" volition," " motive " and " end." Answer the follow- 
ing questions : 

(a) Can a volition have different motives in 
different cases ? 

(6) Is a motive the antecedent and a volition the 
consequent ? 

(c) Can a right volition have a wrong end ? 

4. Indicate the method of psychological evolution- 
ists in accounting for the facts of moral consciousness. 

5. What view did Hobbes take of the ethical stan- 
dard, and how was this view opposed by Cudworth 
and Cumberland respectively ? 

6. Describe and examine critically Cudworth's 
ethical position. 



.- 4j 



qaes- 



7. Is Locke's account of moral responsibility and 
freedom consistent with the doctrine that the sole 
determinant of action is pleasure ? 

8. Give an accurate statement of Butler's ethical 
doctrine, and point out what you think to be defects 
in that doctrine. 



^^^ 





■ 


— ^ 


1 

( 


; i ■ 
■ J ; 

li 

; t 


■ i 
i 



JJi 



■iljaBBB 



(EAitfuerttUi^ of Sotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. ' 



THIRD EXAMINATION— (SECOND EXAMINA- 
TION LAW). 



HISTORY OF ENGLISH LAW. 

HONORS. 



Hon. David Mills, LL.B. 



Examvners: [ g^^' S^^^ ^''''' ^ 
( Hon. W. Proudfoot 



1. What were the provisions of the statute de donis ? 

2. What were the moans by which an estate tail 
could be barred ? 

3. What were the provisions of the statuty quia 
emptores, and what change did it effect on tenures ? 

4. What evils were the statutes of Mortmain inten- 
ded to prevent : how were they from time to time 
evaded : and liow were these evasions frustrated '( 

o. When was land made deviseable : did the first 
statute authorize a devise of the whole land : if not, 
when was it that the whole became deviseable ? 

6. State the principal provisions of the statute for 
prevention of frauds and perjuries in regard to con- 
veyances of, and contracts respecting, lands ; as to 
other contracts, and as to trusts. 

7. What was the reason for enacting the statute of 
distributions, and state generally its provisions ? 

8. What ameliorations in the criminal law have been 
made since the beginning of the 19th century ? 






<r: 



4f' 



C%ntiitt0itff of Cotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMIXATIUNS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAH. 



ENGLISH COi\>TlTUTl()NAL LAW. 

HONORS. 



„ _. (Hon. Wm. Proudfoot, J. 

Exafmnevs: | ^^^ ^^^^^ Mills. LL.B. 



1. Explain the sanctions by which the conventions 
of the Constitution are enforced. 

2. State the various circumstances under which a 
dissolution of Parliament by the Sovereign is a proper 
proceeding. 

3. Describe the present constitution of the Treasury 
Department, and explain what is meant by the issue of 
a commission to execute the office of the Lord High 
Treasurer. 

4. State the constitutional means for securing the 
harmony of the several powers of the State in the fol- 
lowing cases : 

(1) Where there are variences between the Crown 
and Parliament on questions of administration. 

(2) Where there are variences between the Crown 
and Parliament on questions of legislation. 

(3) Where there are variences on the subject of 
privilege. 

(4) Where the two Houses differ as to proposed 
Legislation. 

5. Explain the territorial origin of the Peerage. 



I 



■) 



6. Describe Chart»ir Governments, and Proprietary 
GovernmentH, as forms of colonial government, and 
describe the in.stitutie's in England after which they 
were mof lolled. 

7. How much of the Common L'lw do British sub- 
jects carry with them into a colony founded by dis- 
covery and settlement, and what are the powers of the 
Crown as to legislation, taxation, and the administration 
of justice, at common Law, in such colony ? 

8. Explain fully why the Sovereign alone could not 
give to the Province of Quebec, the Constitutional 
System created by the Quebec Act of 1774. 



I 



■^ 



I 



«ntlier0Utf of Soronlo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



■^ 



I 



CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY- 



Examiners . 



(A. T. 
IJ. M. 



Thompson, B.A, 
McEvoY, B.A. 



1. Trace the early history of the royal power in 
England. 

2. What were the several obligations of Lord and 
Tenant under the Feudal Systems ? 

3. Write short notes on: Danegeld, Trinoda Necessi- 
tas, Scutage, Gemot of Salisbury, Cabal. 

4. Compare the rule of the House of York with that 
of the House of Lancaster ? 

5. What were the conditions upon which William 
and Mary accepted the throne of England ? 

6. Explain the nature of Parliamentary Sovereignty, 
and show that its existence is a legal fact fully recog- 
nized by English Law. 

7. What do you understand by " the supremacy of 
the rule of law " as applied to the British Constitution ? 

8. What is the constitutional importance of the 
House of Lords ? 



t 



\ 



2iitifiier«ftff of Coronto. 



NUFt'LKMKNTAI. KXAMINATIONH : 1891. 
THIRD YEAR. 



ARTS. 

POLITICAL SCIENCE. 



) 



Examiners 



(A. T. Thompson, B.A., LL.B. 
\ J. M. McEvoY, B.A. 



1. Outline the constitution and the functions of the 
WHa7u 

2. Wljat changes in the English constitution were 
introduced l>y the Norman Conquest ? 

3. Describe the Angevin system of administration. 

4. What were the political results of the Reforma- 
tion in England ? 

.'). Write brief notes on : Ship Money, Bate's Case, 
Undertakers, Compulsory Knighthood. 

6. Describe the state of parliamentary representation 
during the reigns of Georges I., II., and III. 

7. If the Ministry were outvoted in the British 
House of Commons on an important question describe 
the various steps that would require to be taken by 
the Queen and her advisers before any other important 
business could be constitutionally transacted by the 
English government. 

7. " The security which an Englishman enjoys for 
personal freedom does not really depend upon or origin- 
ate in any general proposition contained in any written 
document." — Dicey. Explain fully. 



I!, i 



r 



V 4 ' 



n 



! , ♦ 



. r 



I I 

i t 



Bni\^nnit9 of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



\ 



POLITICAL SCIENCE. 

ECONOMIC THEORY. 

HONORS. 



Examiners 



J A. T. Thompson, B.A. 
tJ. M. 



McEvoY, B.A. 



N.B. — Candidates are requested not to attempt more than eight 
questions. 

1. Show how the mediaeval doctrine of Usury was 
undermined by the doctrine of Interest. 

2. Describe the " Balance of Bargain " system. 

3. Compare the attitude of ( ?hild and Hume towards 
the Balance of Trade theory. 

4. Comment on the Maxims of Quesnay. 

5. Distinguish the essentials and non-essentials in 
the teaching of Malthus. 

6. In what case did Adam Smith consider " Pro- 
tection " desirable. 

7. " What Smith sought to establish was the free 
competition of equal industrial units ; what in fact he 
was helping to establish was the free competition of 
unequal industrial units." Explain and comment upon. 

8. " Back to Adam Smith." In what sense is this 
desirable. 



\ 



9. State and criticize the " Iron Law of Wages." 

10. Examine the doctrine laid down by Ricardo that 
the relative values of commodities are governed by the 
relative quantities of labor bestowed on their produc- 
tion. 

11. Wherein doea List find the teaching of Smith 
and his school defective. 



:! 



' ill 



\ 



CAnfuetttfti^ of Toronto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD EXAMINATION (SECOND EXAMINATION 

LAW.) 



JURISPRUDENCE. 

HONORS. 



) 



Examiners 



f Hon. David Mills, LL.B. 
\ Hon. W. Proudfoot. 



1. Give the various meaning of the term law ; and 
with which of its different significa ions has jurispru- 
dence to deal ? 

2. How is Ethic distinguishod from Law ? 

3. Enumerate the sources of law and, and state 
which is the principal source now. 

4. What is the general division of fliitecedent rights 
in personam, and give a sketch of them under each 
division ? 

5. What are the elements of a contract, and when is 
it deemed to be perfected when entered into by corres- 
pondence ? 

6. What p,re the remedial or subsequent rights in 
personamc and how do they arise ? 

7. Who are abnormal pei'sons. What variations in 
status in natural persons cause them to be abnormal ? 

8. What is adjective law, and enumerate the subjects 
with which it deals ? 



) 



^AnfUetfliftp of STarontd. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



CHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY. 

PHYSICS. 



« . ^ f I. E. Martin, B.A. 
Examines : | ^ ^ ^^^^^ ^^ 



1. Define heat. What effect has it on a body by 
which it can be me/i»«ared ? 

Describe the method of graduation of a ther- 
mometer. 

2. Define latent heat and thermal capacity. 

The latent heat of water in melting being 80, 
find the temperature by mixing .5 gm. of snow at 0" 
with 23 gm. of water at 20^ 

3. What effect has the height of the barometer on 
the boiling point of water ? 

Why does the water in a closed vessel not bcil 
when the thermometer rises ? 

4. State the laws of rejlection and refractio7i. 

Why does the bottom of a vessel appear deeper 
when empty than when tilled with water. 

5. Define focal length of a lens:. 

The object is 6 feet on one side of a lens and the 
image is 1 foot on the other side. What is the focal 
length of the lens. 

6. Describe the compound microscope, and show how 
its magnifying power can be determined by direct 
observation. 



■\ 



\ 



r\ 



7. t)e8cnbe Buiiseii's battery anrl the bicromate Idcl, 
showing how they avoid polarization. 

8. Qive the constraction of the tangent galvano- 
meter, and show how an electric current is measured 
by it. 

9. Compare the results of electrolysis of sulphuric 
acid, a solution of common salt, and a solution of sodium 
sulphate. 



1^ 



' t 



\ 



V 



^ 



\ 



) 



^ ^ ^ - 



tuifurriftv of SToronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: IH9I. 



THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS. 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND 
MINERALOGY. 

ORGANIC (JIIE\irSTRY. 

FIRST PAPER. 



\ 



ExaminerH . 



(W. H. Pike. M.A., Ph.D. 
( 'I'. Proctor Hall, M.A., Ph.D. 



1. Describe the bulmvior of the fatty acetones on 
oxidation. An acetone Ce H12 O gives on oxiilation car- 
bon <li()xi(ie and an acid distil I ate, from which nilver salts 
are prepared. Tmc percentage of silver in these salts 
io 59.04 % and t»> jo ^ respectively. From these data 
deduce the prob-.iile constitutional formula of the ace- 
tone, and give a method of synthesis of ihis body. 

2. Describe the method of preparati'>)n of the ethy- 
lamines, and of ethyl-ammoniinu hydrate, and a 
method of separation of ethylaniine from a mixture of 
ammonia, eth}damine, diethylamine and trietliylamine. 
Give as far as you can the physical properties of these 
bodies. 

3. Bj' what means can diethylamine be distinguished 
from its isomers, the four butylamines and the two 
propy-methyl-amines ? 

4. Give fully the various chemical properties implied 
in the constitutional formula 

= C— O.H 

H - C— ck 
H - C-O.H 



= C-0. 






H. 



\ 



^ 



By what ronction^' can tlio HyntheHis of Huch a 
Hiilwtanco bo accoinpliHluxl i 

What iiuxliHcation of tho Htoniic theory has hcon 
Hiii^gc.sted to oxplaiii tho uxiHtonce of Hcveral bodies of 
this formula ? 

5, .What changcH in tho phyHicat and chemical pro- 

EertioH of acids accompany thu exchange of " an acid 
ydrogen " for the ethel group? 

DiscusN tlio fullowing caNes : ethyl-Hulphuric acid, 
acetic ether, oxali** jiUior, sulpliurouH ether, ethyl giy- 
collate, carbimic ether, ethyl orthocarbonate. 

0. Illustrate the following statement: "A number 
of organic compoundN, other than acids and alcohols, 
are known in which one or more hydrogen atoms may 
be replaced by sodium." 

7, Give a short account of the chemistry of one of 
tho following classes: Guanidines, Mustard Oils, Ke- 
tonic Acids. 

CH, 

8. Upon what evidence is the formula || adopted 



ethylene lather than 



OH, 
CH 



CH, 



mmmmm 




6 



\ 



8tnfliet0lto of Soronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.— SECOND PAPER. 



CHEMISTRY AND MINERALOGY. 

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 



„ _ . , J. Proctor Hall, M.A., Ph.D. 



{ 



W. H. Pike, M.A., Ph.D. 



1. What bodies are formed by the action of each of 
the following subtances on the sodium compound of 

?henol. Carbon dioxide ; Chloroform ; Bromine ; 
'etrachloride of Carbon ; Methylene Dichloride ; 
Trichlor Ethane (CH, — CCl,). Give equations in each 
case. 

2. Give a short account of the chemistry, (reactions, 
preparations, and physical properties) of phenyl-hydra- 
zine. Also of the salts of diazo-benzene (including 
diazo-amido-benzene.) 

3. On what facts is the statement based, that only 
one mono-derivative of benzene exists, and that in 
consequence the six h^'^drogen atoms are symmetrically 
situated. 

4. Describe the practical methods of replacing one 
or more hydrogen atom^ by bromine in fatty and 
aromatic compounds. 

5. Write constitutional foriimlae shewing the relation 
between Rosaniline, Triphenyl-Methane, Aurin (or 
Rosolic acid) Phenol-phthalein and Fluorescein. 

6. Write a short description of Naphthalene and its 
derivatives. 

7. The physical properties of organic compounds are 
considered to be dependant upon the number, nature, 
and arrangement of the constituent atdms. To what 
extent is this true ? 



• .• 



^i 



ii: '•' ;iT'' %• *r"y*z^ 



/. 



.'■■' ■> 



Winl\$tvnits of Cotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS; 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



DEPARTiMENT OF NATURAL SCIENCE. 

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 



Exami'ner 



f T. 

'*■ jw. 



T. Proctor Hall, M.A., Ph.D. 
H. Pike, M.A., Ph.D. 



1. Compare the properties and method.s of prepara- 
tion of Benzyl alcohol, and Phenol, in illustration of 
the statement that Benzyl alcohol resembles the fatty 
alcohols, whilst the phenols exhibit peculiar and 
characteristic variations of these properties. In what 
way are these variations affected by tlie introduction 
of a nitro group as in the case of Nitro phenol ? 

2. Name the substances denoted by the following 
for:nulae : 



CH. CH. 



CIT. 



H 



I 



OH. 



CH,-CH 



CH. S. H I C=N 



CH. 



/ 



CH. 



0=NH 

\ 
NH. 



N-C.H,. 



Write formulae for the bodies indicated by the 
following names : 

(a) acetyl-amido-acetic acid, 

(6) ortho-nitro-meta-brom-benzoic ether, 

(c) nitro-ethane, 

(d) azo- benzene. 



(I > 



4 ^ 



3. Give a sliort account of the Chemistry (prepara- 
tion, reaction and physical projverties) of Glycerol ; 
including in your description reasons for the formula 
used. Can you suggest any theory for its frequent 
occurrence in plant life. 

4. How may aniline be converted into the follow- 
ing compounds : benzoic acid ; phenyl ether (phenyl 
phenate) ; benzene ; benzene sulphonic acid ; toluene. 

5. The Silver Salt of an organic acid gives the fol- 
lowing numbers on analysis : — 

% 
Silver, 65.45 

Carbon, 14.55 

Hydrogen, 0.61 

The Silver Salt treated with Ethyl iodide forms 
an ether with vapour density 5.96 (air = 1). Determine 
the probable formula of the acid. 

6: Discuss fully the arguments on which the formula 
of anj' one of the following substances is based : Ben- 
zene, Glucose, Napthalene. 

7. Sliow by equations what occurs when : 

(") propyl iodide is heated with silver cyanide 

(1)) the product of the action (a) is boiled w^ith 
dilute hydrochloric acid 

(c) the product of reaction (b) is subjected to elec- 

trolysis 

(d) the product of reaction (a) is treated with 

nascent hydrogen. 



tittintmiti? of 8orotitd» 



SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



r 



\ 



ARTS. 

CHEMISTRY. 



Examirier : G. Chambers, B.A., M.B. 



1. (a) The vapour density of a compound gas is 22 
(Hydrogen = 1) ; what is its molecular weight ? Ex- 
plain fully how you arrive at yoar rtr^ult. 

(b) The vapour density of Ammoiiium Chloride is 
said to be abnormal. Explain. 

2. Calculate the weight of Oxygen required to bum 
10 litres of Hydrogen measured at 26°C., and 745 m.m. 
Bar. 

3. How could you prepare Hydrogen Sulphide ? 
Write equationc illustrating the reactions which occur 
when Hydrogen Sulphide is — 

(a) burnt in air. 

(6) mixed with Chlorine gas. 

(c) passed into a solution of Ammonium Hydrate 

(d) passed into a solution of Lead Chloride. 

4. The elements Nitrogen, Phosphorus and Arsenic 
are said to belong to the same natural family. Explain 
this statement. 

5. State the grounds on which the elements are 
divided into metals, and non-metals. 

6. Qiva an account of the Chemistry of any one of 
the following elements : Sulphur, Silicon, or Silver. 



Sin(urr0ft|^ oC Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



ZOOLOGY. 



Examiner : J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



~) 



1. Write an account of the natural history of the 
Rhizopoda. 

2. Describe fully the structui'e and the reproduction 
of the Turbellarians. 

3. Give the classification of Hirudinea, mentioning 
the commoner Canadian forms. 

4. Describe fully the anatomy of the Tunicata, 
pointing out the characters which connect them with 
the Vertebrata. 

5. Describe briefly some of the parasitic forms of 
Crustacea, showing how their parasitic life has modi- 
fied their structure. 

0. What is meant by protective mimicry ? Give 
examples. 



\ 



> 



CAtillirtoUv of Coronto. 



i( I 



\ 



) 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



THIRD YEAR. 



NATURAL SCIENCES. 

VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY. 



Examiner: J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



1. A leaf falls to the Hurface of the ground contain< 
ing a certain nmount of Nitrogen ; trnce the change 
which this Nitrogen undergoes until it is again used to 
form plastic materials in a green plant. 

2. Explain fully the significance of Iron in the 
nutrition of plants. 

3. Give an account of the various unorganized fer- 
ments in vegetable tissues, and explain the nature o! 
their action. 

4. Describe briefly the production of heat by plants. 
How is this process affected by external conditions ? 

5. What is meant by turgescence of the cell f How 
is it brought about ? Explain its significance for the 
physiology of the plant. 

G. Give an account of the structure of lenticels, and 
of their functions. 



t 



I 



r 

I I 



I 



r 
/ I 



ainf^ersuv of Covonlo. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATI0N8: 1801. 



THIRD YEAR. 



ECONOMIC MINKRALS OF CANADA. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. Ores of Silver: 

Statu thuir composition, anil give their location. 

2. Nickel: 

Under what conditionM does ihiH metal occur in 
in Canada? 

Where are the principal deposits ? 

3. Mineral Waters : 

How are the Canadian varieties classified ? Give 
the principal localities in which they occur ? 

4. Fire Clay : 

State its essential composition and ({ualities, and 
where it has been found in Canada in workable (juan- 
tities. 

How would you conduct a rapid qualitative 
examination of a specimen, to ascertain its value ? 

5. State the composition, location of workable 
deposits, and uses of : 

Stibnite, Mispickel, Serpentine, Marble,Pyrol»;site, 
Hydraulic Limestone, Asbestus, Muscovite, Soapstone, 
Shell Marl, Agate. 

6. Name, with their respective localities, the Cana- 
dian minerals used in Jewelry. 

7. Classify the coals found in Canada. 

Give their geological position and location. 

8. From what geological formations, and where, '.v /e 
sandstones and limestones suitable for building pur- 
poses been obtained ? 

NoTi.— Only the more notable deposits need be given. 



\ 



f 



cM 






r 



2iiii(tin*0(t|^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : ISOl. 



THIRD YEAR. 



CRYSTALLOGIIAPHY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. Define : plane of symmetry, constant form, twin- 
ning plane, re-entering angle, clino-pinacoicl, sphenoid. 

2. Upon what does the notation of crystals depend ? 
Indicate, in the symbols of any recognized system of 
notation, the planes of crystal composed of a combi- 
nation of a square ])rism and a square pyramid of the 
Tetragonal system. (A vertical face fronts the obser- 
ver.) 

3. Sketch in outline the following, and give the 
name of a mineral occuring in each form : 

(a). Pyramidal cube. 

(b). Rhombohedron. 

(c). Combination of hexagonal prism and pyramid. 

(d). Monoclinie prism. 

(e), Scalenohedron. 

(/). Cube with angles truncated. 

4. Hemihedrism and Tetarohedrism. 

State what is meant by these terms, and give the 
laws governing the same. 

Into what classes are hemihedral crystals of vsys- 
tem I. arranged ? Give an example of each. 



(J 



win- 
ioi3. 

11(1 ? 
Ill of 
nibi- 
'the 

l)ser- 



5. Describe the holohedral forms of the Monoclinic 
system. 

Give a diagram to show the positions of the various 
geometrical elements of the crystals of the system, 
and the forms resulting when any of these elements 
are modified or replaced. 

Name six minerals crystallizing in the system. 

G. Pseudomorphs : 

What are these, and how do they originate ? 
Name two examples. 

7. What forms are present in the following combi- 
nations : 

(a) Pyramidal cube with cube angles truncated. 

(6) Cube with angles replaced by six triangular 
planes. 

(c) Rhombic :lodecahedron with edges truncated. 

(d) Rhombic dodecahedron with edges bevelled. 



the 



mid. 



the 

sys- 









liL. 



Siinfbtroiti) ot Stocontd. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GREEK. 



Examiner : William Dale, M.A. 



*,* Candidates taking Honor Philosophy (3rd year) take the lirst 
half of this paper. 

Notice to fourth year pass men : 

Candidates are requested to fold up the papers on the two autliora 
separately, and to place them in separate envelopes. 

Candidates are cautioned against coniining their attention to 
either one of the two authors : no Candidate will pass who 
omits the questions on parsing and syntax : in parsing aorists 
distinguish between first and second. 

PLATO, MENO. 
1. Translate carefully : 

(«) AN. IIoWoO 76 8iov<n /jLaiueadai, & SwK/Jare?, 
aXXa TToXu fidWov oi Toyrot? StSovTe? dpyvpiov rtav 
vkasV TOVT(ov S' en fiaXKov ol Tourot? eimpeTrovre'i, 
ol irpoarjiiovTe^' iroXv Se uaXia-ra irdvTtov ai 7r6\€t9, 
iaxrai aijTOV<i eiaa^iKveiadat koI obx i^eKavvovaaif 
€4X6 Tt9 ^evo<f emyeipei to'ovtov ri iroulv eXre aartx;. 

2il. IloTepov 06, & "Kvvre, rfilKriKe rit ae t&u ao- 
(f)iaT&p, ^ Tt oin-ft)9 avTOK ;^a\67ro9 el ; 

AN. Ovhe fui Ala eytoye at/fyeyova tram ore avrcov 
ovhevi, ov8^ &v aXKop edaai/ii to>i/ e/i&v obSeva. 

Sn. "Aireipo^ ap^ el iravrdtrcun r&v dvSpatv ; 

AN. Kal etijv ye. 

2n. IIco? o3i/ dv, & BatfjLovie, etSeirji; irepl rovrov 
Tov TTpdyfiaToi;, etre rt dyaOov e^et ev kaxnw ehe 
<j>\avpov, ov TrauTdiraaiv dtreipo^ eXri<i ; 

AN. 'PaSiO)?" T0VT0V<; yovv olSa otoi elaiv, eir oiv 
d'ireipQ<i avTuv elfu etre fi'^. 



n 



Sn. MdvTi<t el icTox?, A"Ai'iiTe' tVe? otto)? 76 a\\o)s' 
olafla Tovrcav tr^pi, e^ &v auTo? \i<y€i<; Bavfid^oifi' ui>. 
aWa yap oh toutou? e^riTovfiev TtW? elan', trap o&f tii' 
Mei/ft)!' d^iKOfievo^ fio^dT}p6<; yevoiTo' ovtoi fiiv 7«p, 
64 cw ^ovkei, ea-Tcoaau oi ao^icnai' WKKa hrj eKeiuov^ 
elitk ijfuu, Kai rov irarpiKOV Tovte eraipov evepysTijaov, 
<f>pd<Ta<: avT(o, irxph riva<i u^iKOfjteuo^ ev Toa-av'^r) 
TTokei T>;y dperfjv ijv vvu Brj iyca Bit']\dov yevoir' oLv 
a^io<; \6yov. 

AN. Tt he avTO) ob crv e^ypaawi ; 

Sfi. 'Aw' oV^ fikv eyut o)/j.tju SiBacrKaXovf tovtow 
elvat, elirov, dXKa ^vyyavo'' ouSev Xeycov, (i? av (f)ffi' 
Kal lato^ Ti \iyei<;. dXKa av 8f) iu tw fiepet avrto 
eiirk irapa jiva^ e\6r] 'AOrjvaicov etTre ovofia otou 
fiovkei. 

AN. T/ 8e kvo<i dvdpcovov ovofia Bel uKovaat ; orrp 
yap av ivTV'wj 'A6i)vamu t&u Ka\&u Kuyadcjv, ouSei? 
€(TTiv oi; 01) peXTici) av-'ov Troi^a-ei rj oi ao(f>i<TTai\ idv 
irep ideXji ireiOeadai. 

Sn. WoTcpov 8e offToi 01 Ka\o\ Kuyadoi dtro toO 
ainofioTov eyevovTO toiovtoi, Trap' ovSeuot p,a66vre^ 
BpMi<t fievToi aWou? hibdtTKeiv oloi re 8vT€<i ravra, a 
abTol ovK efiadov. 

(b) Xil. <i?epe 81], TTeipcofiedd troi ehrelVy rt kari ayrnia' 
aKQirei oZv el roSe dirohe')(et avro elvaf earco yap 
8f) rifiiv TOVTO cryrifia, o fiovov t&v ovrtov rvyxdvet, 
y^p(i>fiarL del eirofievov. iKav&<i aoi, ri aWtwv ttw? 
^^TCt? ; eym yap Kav outo)? dya'jran)v ei fioi dperrjv 
eiTrotf. 

MEN. 'AWa toOto 76 euT/^e?, w Sw/epaTc?. 

Sn. ITw? \e76t9 ; 

MEN. "On <T)^f]fid TTOv ecTTi Kara rov aov \6yov, 
h del 'xpoa literal, eteu' el 8e Brj rrju p^oiv Tt? fifj 
(f)ai7} ec8evai, dW^ ebcauta)? hiropol marrep rov (^X^' 
fiaro<i, ri hv o'iei aoi drroKeKpiadai ; 

Sn. Td\i;^7; eycoye' Kal el /xiv ye r&v ao^wv Tt? 
eiij Kai hpurriK&v re Kal dyojvKrriKOiv o epofievo^, 
eirroijx &v avrm on ifiol fiev etprjrai' rd 8e firj opOm 
Xeyeo, aov epyov Xa/i^dveiv Xoyov Kal iXiyxeiv. el 
Be &(nrep iy<u re Kal av vvvl ^iXoi ovre<i fiovXoivro 
dXKrfXoi^ BiaXeyeadai, Bet Br} rrpaorepov ttw? Kal 
BiaXeKriKoarepov drroKplveadai. tari 8i lamf; to Sta- 
XeKTiKcorepov fit) fiovov rdXrjdi) drroxplvec dai, dX\d 
Kal 8t cKeivcov o)v dv Trpoau/xoXoyrj •^'^evat 6 ipoyrco- 
fieva. rreipdaofiai Brf Kal iyco ao^ ovro)^ elireiv. 



! I 



V 

Ul>, 

uf cii' 

ijcrou, 
it' &v 



Xeye yap /moi' TeKeurfju Ka\et<! ti ; roiavSe 'Kiya>olov 
7re/3Jt? Kol iavarov' iravra ravrti raifTov ti Xe7ft)" 
\'(Tm<i B' hv T/fiiv XlpoStKO^ fiia<hipo(To' aWa av ye 
TTov KoKeh Treirepavdai ti Kal T€T€\evn\Kevni' to 
ToiovTov 0ov\o/.iai Xiyeiv, ovSiu troiKiXov. 

2. Parse and explain tlio syntax of : 

(<i) iTriTpiirovTe'}, iSxrai, eirfu, etrTtotrav, evepyeTTjcrov, 
eXdrj, oTov, OTtp, t&v KoXutv KayaOow, /SeXr/a). 

(h) TTeip&fieOa, aTrohe)(€i, AyaTT^v, ehv, diropot, ^po<i- 

OfJLoXoyf), TUVTOV. 

3. What is the subject of this dialogue, and what 
the conclusion reached ? What is the bearing upon the 
argument of (l) "the images of Daedalus," and (2) the 
electric eel. 

EURIPIDES. ION. 
Translate carefully : 

(a) xnrepfiaXKovaa^ yap eyei, 

OvaToh ebSaifioviaf 
aKivrjTOV h^opiidtv, 
TeKVtou ol<t &v KapTTOTpo^Ol 
XdfnroxTCV iu daXd/xoi^ 
TraTpioKTi vedpihet: ^^aij 

BiaBeKTOpa ttXovtov 
eo? i^ovret ck iraTeptav 
eTepot<; iirl TCKVoif;' 
iiXKa T€ yhp iv xaKoiff 
avv T evTV^lai^ <f>lXou, 
Bopi T€ ya TTorpla (fiipei 

awT^piov bCXxdv. 
ifioi fiev ttXovtov re 7rdpo<{ 
^aaiXiKOtV OaXdfKov t' elev 
Tpo(fial KijBeiot KcBv&v TeKVcav. 
Tov atraiBa 8' diroaTvyui 
^iov, u) re BoKei, yfreyo)' 
txeTa Be Kredvatv fieTpltov /Stora? 
euTratSo? e')(pifiav. 

1. Give the syntax of ej(ei, evBatfiovCat^ TeKi)(ou, 
e^oi^re?, aXxd^ BopL 

(b) IIA. 6 TraJ? Be irov Vrti^; iva trv firjuiT 179 wirai'i. 950 
KP. TedvrfKev, & yepaie $7]p(rlv cKTedek. 
HA. TedvTjK ; 'AnroXXav 8' 6 Ka«09 ohBh ■^pKeaev ; 
KP. obic ^picea/' AiBov B' iv B6fAoi<i irai^eveTai. 



l1 



IIA. rk ydp viv i^idrjicev ; ov yhp Bi) <rv ye. 

KP. i}/iiei9, iv Sp4>vil <nrafiyau(oaaPT€^ iriirXoK. 955 

HA. ovBe fi/i^Set aoiri^ ^Kdeaiu t€kvov ; 

KP. ai ^Vfi<f>opai ye kuI to \av6dveiv fiovov. 

IIA. Kol TTW? ev &VTptp trai^a ahv \i7r«i/ erXi;? ; 

KP. irw h' ; oiKTpd, rroWh (TT6fiaTo<; eK^oKova eirr}. 

IIA. <^ev' 

T\i]fia)u av ToXfit)^, 6 8i ^eo? p,a,\\ov <Tedev. 950 
KP. el traihd y eZScf yeipa^ iKrelvovrd fioi. 
IIA. fiacTov Bkokovt ^ 7rpo9 ovyKaXaK ireaelv ; 
KP. ivravd' Xv om i)v &oik eiratrx^^ ^f ^fiov. 
IIA. <rot 8' i<i Tt S6fi;v ^X6eu CK^aXeiv riKvov ; 
KP. CO? Toi/ ^eov auxTOvra rou y ainov yovov. 905 
IIA. otpMii 86p.tov a&v SXffo^ a>9 yeifid^eTai, 
KP. T^ Kpara Kpxy>^a<if & yepov, oaKpvppoeh ; 
IIA. ai Kat Trarepa <rbv Bv(TTV)(pvvTa<{ elaopSiv. 
KP. Ta dvrjTh, roiavT' ovBeu iv rain^ fievei. 
IIA. fiij pvv St oiKTCDU, dvyarep, dvTe')(a)p.eda. 970 

2. Parse fully : c'^re^etV, ■^pxecrev, ^vvpBei, ireaelvy 
B6^r]<i, awrovraf oixTtov. 

3. Scan 11. 968-970, marking the caesura and naming' 
the metre. 

4. Where is the scene of this play laid ? Describe 
the suiToundings of the place. 

5. The plays of Euripides have been clnssitied as 
dramas of (a) 'p^ot, (h) character, (c) situation. What 
is the meaning of such a classification, and under what 
head would the Ion fall ? 




I 



955 

<r eTTij. 
u. 950 



9G5 



(UnlUeiTKiftff of Cotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATI0N8 : 1801. 



CANDIDATES FUR B.A. 



GREEK. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. C. Roueutson, H.A. 



970 



amiiif^ 



tsciibe 

lied as 

What 

• what 



I 



1. Translate: 

KatTot Tore ravra hfi^nrepa, Alar'x^ivi), ov9' v-rrkp 
evepycTtov iiroiovv oUt liKlvhvva kiaputv. d\\' ob Bid, 
Tavra ttdoUvto rov<i Karai^evyovTa<i i<f) eavTov^, hW' 
vTrep evoo^ia<: koI tz/at)? ijOeXou toii Seivolf avrov^ 
BiBouai, opdm kui Ka\Si<i ^ovXevo/xevoi. Trepan fiev 
yap uTratnv avdptbTroi<{ eo-rt tov ^iov Odvaro^, k&v 
ev olKi<TK(p T<9 avTov Kadeip^a<; Trjpfj' Set Se Toy? 
hyaOov^ 'ivBpa<i ey^^eipecu fi€i> iiiraaiv aei Toi<i Ka\oh, 
ryv b,ya6i)v irpo^aXKofievovi; iKiriBa, ^epeiv S' o Tt 
&v 6 6eo<i BiB^ yevvaid)'!. tuvt iiroiovv oi Vfierepoi 
trpoyovoi, rav9^ v/i.et? ol TrpecrjSvTepot,, ot AaKeBaifio- 
viovi oh 0t'\ou? 6vTa<i ovo €V€py6Ta<;, dWa iroWtl 
Tr]v TToXiv r}pSiV TJBiKr}K6Ta<} Kat fieydXa, iireiBij 
@i]/3aioi Kparrja-avTe^ ev XevKxpoit dveXtlv i7re)(€i- 
povv, BceKooXvaare, ov (jyofirjOevTe^ Trjv totc Hi}^aioi<i 
pdifiijv KOL So^av VTrdp)(pv(rav, ovB* virep ola ireiroirf- 
KOTtov dvdpcoTrtov KtvBvvevoreTC BiaXoyia-dfievoi. 

Demosthknes, De Corona. 

2. Explain the connection of the above passage 
with Demosthenes' line of argument, and the reference 
in Tavra dfi^orepa. 

3. Explain what is secured by the position which 
the following words occupy : icopoav, irpotevro, ddvaTo^, 
iu oiKi<TK(p, €y)(eipeiPf xaXoh, 7rpol3aXXofiivov<i, vficU, 
AaxeBaifioviovii, ovraf, Kal /leydXa, Sr}^aloi<i, BiaXoyiad' 
fievoi. 



Hi ! 



4. Translate: 

'E7rft8>; Toii'vv ») ^lil> fvaf/Sii^i Kal hiKaia yfrf)<fio<i 
&7ra<n BeBtiKrai, Btl Be /jh;, cbv eoix^, Kaivep oh ^i\o- 
\oiBopop Hvra, 8ia t«? vtto tcutuv f3Xa(T(f>vnia^ 
(ipr]fieva'i uptI ttoWwu kuI yjrevhoiw nina n'tvayKaio- 
Tar' etVt»i> irepl avrov, Kal Bei^ai t/v i)P teal rii'tov 
poLBim'! ovT(o<i apyei tow kukw Xeytii', Kai \oyow 
TiVa? Biaarvpei, anTO? '•iprjKCD't h tk oik &v cu*ii;ffe 
r&v fierpi'fov au6p(07rcov (pdiy^aadui ; — d yap Aiokoi 
ij 'PaBduav6v^ fj M/i/tu? 7}v 6 Kmijyopojv, aWa fit) 
aTrepfio\6yo<i, Trepirpi/Mfxa dyopa'i, 6\edpo^ ypafifxa- 
Tcy?, oVk &u avTou olfiai ravr eiTreip ovB' &v ovrtas 
iTraydeh \6yov^ iropiaaaOai, wcnrep iv rpay^Bi^ 
^oo)vra S) yfj Kal i]\ie kuI uperi] kuI to. Toiavra, Kat 
TTiiXtu avveaiu Kal iraiBeiap eTnKa\ovfi€Pop, jj tci 
Ka\a Kai ra ala-^^pa BtayiypwarKeTar ravra yap 
BtjTTovdev ^Kover avrov \eyopTO<i' col Be hperijif & 
Kiidapfia. rj roh aot? Tt? p-arovaia ; tf Ka\uiP r) /li) 
ToiovTWP Tt? Bidyvoi)<Ti<i ; iroBep ») Trwv d^ioaOhn ; 
TTov Be TratBeia'i (toi Befits fxvi)adP)pat, ^? rail' p,ep o)? 
ii\r)6c!}<} TCTV^^rjKOTtop ovS' &p eh eiiroi irepl avrov 
ToiovTop ovBep^ aWa Kai> erepov \eyopTo<i epvdpid- 
aeiep, toU B' cnrdKeK^Oeiai, p,ep wairep av, Trpoairoiov- 
fxevois B' xrrr' dpaia-dijaiaf to to?V aKovovTa^ d\7eii' 
TToietp, orav XcyaxTip, ov to BokcIp ToiovTot'i etpai 
irepUaTiv, 

Ibid. 

5. Explain clearly tlio allusions to yEschines' his- 
tory, speech, or style ol' oratory, contained in this 
passage. 

6. State inoro c ;>licitly the criticism iuiplied in 
&<nrep ev rpaytpBia ^o&vra. 

7. («) Tianslate: 

'Ek yap avTov tov ao^ov tovtov TrapaBeiy/uiTa^ 
atfioXoyTjKe vvv y fjp.a'i vtrdp^eip eyvwafiepovi ep,€ 
fi^v Xeyeip vnep t^? Trarpt'So?, avrop B' vvep <i>tXi7r- 
TTOV ov yap &v fieTaTreidetv vfid^ e^tjrei /mt) rotauTi/? 
oiiaijii T^9 vrrap^ovarji} v7ro\ijy^€(i)<i irepl eKaripov. 

Ibid, 
(b) TOV (To:{)ov TOVTOV TrapaBeiyfxaTO^. Explain. 
X€7et»'. On what occasion ? 
ov yhp hv ficTaireideiv, k.t.X. Is Demosthenes' 
inference legitimate or sophistic ? Why ? 



' tA 






8. Translate: 

Ti ydp TOi 'TOiv iTpotrioKijrmv i^ fjti&v ov yiyo- 
uev ; ob yhp filov ye ^fxeU avdpaymvov fff^iotKafxtv^ 
hW' e/f irapaho^oXoyiav roh p.tff ^/xa<i i^vfiev, 
obx^ 6 fiku T&v Wtpauiv ^aaiKev^, 6 rhu^Adto Siopv- 
fa<?, TOP 'EWt^CTTovTov Hev^w:, 6 yfju xal HBeop tow 
"E\\r)va<t alr&v^ 6 roXfi&v iv rai^ imaToXaU ypd- 
<f>eiv Bti 8«a7r6rij<i iarlv dtravrav dvdpayrroiv d0* 
i^Xiov ai/i6i/T09 M^^( Svofiipov, vvv ov irepl tou 
Kvpio^ hiptov elvai iryeovi^erat, dW' ^Sij irepl rfj^ 
ToO 0-(u/iaTO9 (Ttarripla^ ; koI tow avroit^ op&fiev t^ 
re h6^r)<i Tavrij^ Kai rij^ iiri rou Hepaijv ^efwviai 
^^lUtfUvoif^, ot Koi TO lepbu rfKevOiptaaav ; @^^at 
Be, ®^^ai,, TToXtf daTvyelrtov, fied' ■fip.ipav p.lav ix 
fiicf)^ T^9 'EX\a8o9 hvrjpiraarai, el Kai hiKaitoi^ 
irepX r&v il!\o>i/ ovk opdw ^ovKevadfievoi, dWd Trfv 
ye deoffXd^eiav koi t^i/ d^poavvr^v ovk hvOpcatrlvfo^ 
dWd haifjLOvitoi KTrfadfievoi. AaKcBaifiOPioi 8' oi 
raKahroapoi, irpoaray^dfievoi /xovov rovrtov t&v Trpay- 
fi/'-(ov i^ dp')(rj<;, oi r&v 'EWi/fO)!/ ttot^ h^ioi)vre^ 
r]yep.6ve<{ elvai, vvv 6fir}pevaovT€<i xal t^v cvfupopa^ 
iTTiBei^iv TToiijaofievoi fieWovtriv a>9 'A\e^avSpov 
dvatrffirreadai, tovto Treiaofievoi Kai avroi xai ^ 
iraTpU ri dv iKeivfp Bo^jj, Kat iv rfj rov KparovvTov 
Knl irporjBiKTifievov fi€Tpi6Tr)Ti Kpidijaofievoi. 

iEscHiNES, In Ctesiphontem. 

9. Explain the historical allusions in the above 
passage. 

10. (a) Translate: 

'^Ov ToaovTov Karaye\q. t^9 tt/jo? vp,d^ <f>i\oTifiia<{, 
mare Trjv fiiaphy Ke<f>a\riv Tavrrjv Kat imevdvvov, fjv 
0^0^ irapd irdvTa^ tou? vofiovi yeypa(f)€ <TT€4>avia<rat, 
fivptuKif KaTaTeTp.vjKe Kai tovtodv fiiadoifs etXij^e 
rpavpkaT0<i iK irpovoia^ ypa<f>d<i ypa<b6fi€vo<ij Kai 
KaraKeKovBvXiarrai^ mare avrov olfiai to, twv kovBv- 

\(ov tyvij ep^cw iri ^vepd' 6 ydp dvdpamo^ ov 

Ke<f>a\ijv dWd trpoaoBov KeKjifrai,. 

Ibid. 

(b) Explain the allusions in these lines. 

virevdvvov. Write a short note on the mean- 
ing and appropriateness of this epithet. 



I i 



n. (a) Translnto: 

Kau 5' vTrtpTTr}Si]<ra'i ri/v ^iKaltiv airoXoytav trapa- 
KoK^ AT)fioa6evt)if, fxiiXiaTa fiiv fif} irpoahixfode, 
firfB iv apirfi rovO' vfi&v firfBei^ KaraXoyil^iaOo), h^ 
&i> iwavepofievov li.Trjat^tivTO'i el xaXiaj} ^rjfioa-$ii>r)v 
Trpa)To<i ava^OTjajj " ndXei, KiiXei," iirl aavTov KaXeh, 
iirl Tov<i vofiowi /vaXfif, i'nX t»;v BijfiOKpariau xaXei^. 
&i> £' dpa i/fiiv Bo^j) uKovfif, h^imauTe rhv ^ijfioa- 
divqv 70V avTov ipoirov uTroXoyeiaOai ovtrep Kaiyiti 
icarijyopijKa, 

Ibid. 

(h) Tov abrhv rpoirop. Stftto what this wa,s, and 
iEschines' motive in making the request. What order 
did Demosthenes follow, and on what pretext ? 

12. What reasons can be assigned for the postpone- 
ment and for the re-opening of the case ? iiy which 
side waa the case probably re-opened ? 

13. V hat characteristics of yEschines' oratory, wlie- 
ther excellences or defects, and what mnnnerisnis <lo 
you find in the extracts given for translation ? 

14. Explain tlo meaning of the terms; dea-fioderai, 
vofio6iTai, Kpto^vXof;, Trpoehpia, 6 Atoj'fffm^ov v6fxo<i^ 
Tpirjpap')(iKo<i vufMos, ira pdarj/jio^ pi'jTup, eXXe^opi^eiP, 
^(TV^ia VTToyXo?, irpofiovXevixa. 



liii 



QinfUeriifttf of roronto* 



ytap irapa- 

TOP itaXfU, 
iav KoKeh, 

'TTep Kaytb 

Ibid. 

wa.s, nnd 
liat ordor 
? 



K 



)ostpono- 
'y wliich 



"!•,> , wlic- 
•riHins do 
? 



ANNUAL KXAMINATlONSi 1801. 



(JAN 1)1 DA IKS KOIt n.A. 



CI!EI:K. 

HONORS. 



Jt!xaininei' : Wimjam Dale, M.A. 



l'I>ATO. 
Traiislatc : 

OvKOvif Kill aWoBi, S^rjv, 7ro\Xo;^ou alaBavofitOa, 
ojav ^id^Q3VTai riva irapa tov Xoyicrfiou iin0vfi(ai, 
Xoi^opovPTci T€ avTov Kat dvp.ovp.evov t^ ^M^op.€v<p 
iv aiiTto ical axnrep Svoiv (naaial^ovroiv ^vpp,a^ov 
Tw Xoytp yiyv6p,€Vov rbv 6vp,6v tov toiovtov ; rat? b' 
eiTidvpiaif avTov Koivtovqaavra, aipouvTO<i Xoyov p.rj 
Beiv, AvT ITT pdrreiv, olpui at ovk &v <f)dvai yevop.€Vov 
TTore iv aavTcp tov toiovtov aladca-6at, olp,ai 8' ov8^ 
iv a\\(p. Ov p.a tov Ala, e<\»), Tt hi ; ^v 8' otov 
Tit ocTjrai uBiKeiv, ov^ oarfii &v y€vvainTepo<; y, to<t- 
oVTfp ^TTOV BvvaTai 6pyi^e<T0ai Kat ireivtov Kal piy&v 
Kal oKKo OTiovv t&v toiovt(ov 'irua'xtov vn' iKclvov, 
OV hv otijTai SiKaico'} Tama 8pav, Kal, 6 Xiyta, om 
iOeXei 77/30? tovtov ainov iyeipeadai 6 dvp.6t ; 

Republic, IV. 

I. raw S' iTn^vp.iai<i...dvTi'TrpdTT€iv. What different 
intorprotation.s ? 

'2. o Xey(o. What is the moaning? 

8. Ex[)lain biieily the connection of the passjij^e with 
the ''eiieral arj'iinient. 



Translate : 

OVkovv, cIttov, & rXau/eaij/, ovto<; rjBr) auT09 eariv 
6 vofM^, hv TO BiaXeyeaSai irepaivei ; hv Koi 6vTa 
voryrhv fiifioiT &v rj r^f 8ylr€a><i Svva/AK, f^v eKeyofiev 
7r/£)09 airrd, ^817 rh ^&a eTrf^eiptiv airo^Xkiroiv xai 
7rpo9 airrd. aarpd re xal TeXevraiov Bfj rrpo? ahrbv rbu 
ijXiov. ovTio Koi orav Tt? tw Sidkiyea-dai i'in')(eipfj, 
&vev iratT&v t&v aiadi^aewv Sta rov \070u eV axno h 
etrriv ?KatrTov opfia, k&v fi") InroaTfj, irplv &u avrb & 
e(TTiv brfaBov abTr} vorjaei \dfi'p, eV avr^ y^yverai r^ 
ruv voijTov Tekei &a'irep e/cetvo? Tore ^7rt tw tov oparov. 
UavTaTToai fiiv ol>v, eifyr}. Tt'oSv; ob BuiKeKTiKrjv rav' 
TT)v rrjv iropeiav Ka}i£i<i ; Tlfiijv; '^Biy€,^vS' iyo}, 
Xvai^ re airb r&v Bea-fi&v xal iieratnpo^i} hirb t&v 
<rKia>v errl t^ etSatXa Koi to <f)m Kal ix tov KaTayeiov 
et9 rbv ijXiov eVai/oSo?, Kai ixei 7rpo9 fiev to. i,&d t€ 
Kal ^vTct Kal TO TciO rjklov 0el)<? er dSwafila y9\€7reti/, 
Trpno 8e tA iv vSaai (fyavTaapaTa 6eia KaX oKia^ t&v 
ovTtov, aXX ovK elBmXmv <rKid<i Si eTcpov toiovtov 
<^fii)T09 (1)9 7r/309 rjKiov xpiveiv dirotrKid^opAva'i^ irdaa 
avrrj fi irpayfiaTeta t5)v TC'yywv, &? Si'qXdofiev, TavTTjv 
c'xei Ttjp Svvafitv Kal iTravayayrfv tov ^eXiiaTov iv 
'^jrvXV '^pb'i TTjv TOV dpi<TTOv iv TOt? oi/ai deav, axTTrep 
Tore TOV r-a<j)€<TTdTov iv acofiari irpb<{ Tr)v tov <l>avo' 
TaTOV iv Tft) (TMfMlTOeiBel T6 Kal opaTQ) TOTry. 

' Ibid., VII. 

1. hv..,7r€paiv€i. Explain. 

2. TTaaa amt] k.t.X. What is the meaning ? 

3. What is Plato's illustration to distinguish between 
the oparbv and the vor)T6v, and what is the object of 
the distinction ? ' - 
Translate : 

'H Si (rvyyvtofir) Kal obS' orraxTTiovv aficKpoXoyia 
ouT^9, AXXA KaTa<}>p6vr]<rt^ &v -^fieh iXeyo/iev tre/juvv- 
vovre^, 0T€ Tr}V TToKtv atKi^ofiev, c»9 ei p,^ ri? inrepfie- 
^i)pAvr}v <f>v(Tiv e^ot, ovttot &v yivoiTo dvijp dyadof, 
el p,rj 7ral<i atv ebdi/^ iral^ot iv KaXjOK Kal kTTiTijSevoi 
Ta TotavTa irdvTa ft)9 peyaXoirpeTr&'i KaTairaTijaaa' 
airavTa Tatha obS^v <f>povTl^€if e^ OTrolatv &v Tt9 
iTriTi]Sevfj,dT(OV iirl rd iroXiTiKa Icov TrpaTTr/, dXXd 
Tip,a, idv <i>f} fjkovov evvovi elvac t^ TrXijdei. Tldvv 
7" e<f>ij, yevvaia. TaOra Te 8»;, etfyijVj €j(pi dv xal 
TovTtov oKKa dSeX^'d Srip.oKpaT{a, Kal etij, m eoiKev, 
^Seia iroXiTeia Kal dvap-)(o^ Kal iroiKtXij, taoTrjTd 
Ttva 6p.oia><{ iaoi<i t€ Kal avi<Toi<i Siavep,ovaa. Kal 
udX', etjyrj, yvmpipu Xiyet,<i. Ibid,, VIII. 



N 



i!f 



/. 



\ 



&■ 



1. Illustrate from history either to prove or disprove 
the remarks of Plato in this passage as to the spirit 
of democracy. 

Translate : 

"KvSa §«;, 0)9 SoiKev, & <f>i\e TXavKtov, 6 ira^ kiv- 
Bw<vi avOpanr^, kuI Sect ravra fiaKiaTa irrifieXifTioVj 
07rci>9 iKCUTTO'i '^fx&p T&v aXXo)!' /xaOri/xdrtov &/i6\f)<ra9 
TovTov Tov fiaOijfiaTOf; Koi ^ryrrjTt)^ xal fiadrfr^ 
ecrat, idv nroOev 0I09 t rj fiadeiv koi i^evpeivj Tt9 
ai'TOV woirjau hwarov Koi iiriarrifiova^ ^iov koX 
"Xpiiarov Kai irovijpov hiar/ir/v^o icovra, rbv /SeXr/o) c'/e 
r&v 8vvaro)v ael travra'xpv aipelaOat, xai dvaXoryi^O' 
fievov irdvra ra vw St) pridevra, ^vmidifieva d\\i;\ot9 
Kol Siaipoifbeva Trpo^i aperrjv ^iov irw ^X^t? el8evat, 
ri KoXKo^ TTevia rj TrXovrtp Kpadiv Kat fierct iroia^ 
T«/o9 ^ux^9 lf€<»9 KOKov fj cuyadov ipyd^erai, Kat ri 
eir/iveiat xal Svayiveiai xal IBiatreiai Kat dpyaX kxI 
la)(y€^ Kal a<T0€veiai Kai evfiddeiai Kal Bva/JtdOeiai 
Kat irdvTa rd TOMvra r&v ^vaei "rrepi "^vyriv 6vr(iiiv 
Kal r&v iTriKTtjrcDV rl ^vyxepavvvfieva npot dWrika 
epyd^erai, &are ef dirdvroav avr&v Bwarov elvai 
avWoyiadfievov aipeiadai^ wpo^ rijv t^9 "^vytj^ 
(fivtrtv atropkkirovra, rov re xeipo) Ka\ rov dfieivm 
jSutv, X^^P'*> /*tT KoKovvra 89 avrrjv iKetae d^ei, 6*9 
TO dBiKtoripav ylyvetrdai, dfieiva, 8e Qari<i et9 to 
BiKuiorepav, rd Se d\\a rrdvra Xji^lpeiv idaet,' etapd- 
Kafiev ydp, ort l^&vrl tc Koi reKevrrjaavri avrti Kpa- 
riarrj aipeai^. hSa/iavrlva); 8rj Set ravrrp/ rrjv So^av 
e^ovra etVAtSou livai, otto) • &v fi koX iK€t dviKTrXrjKro^ 
inro rfkourmv re Kat r&v roiovrmv kokuVj Kal fiij 
ifirreamf €t9 rvpavvlSa^ Kat d\\a<! rotavra^ irpd^eK 
7ro\\^ fiev ipydaijrai, Kat dvijKeara Koxd., en Si 
aihro9 fiei^m rrddri^ aSXd yv& rov ftearov del r&v 
roiovrtov $iov aipeurdai Kai 4>€vyeiv rd tnrep^aXXovra 
eKarepmae Kal iv r&Se r^ ^ly Kard rb oxwarbv Kal 
iv travri rm hreira' ovrta ydp evBaifiove<rraro(i 
yiyverai dvOpama^. 

Ibid., X. 



(1 



T 



I ! 
! I 



\ 



(fr> 



\ 



&ni»tvuit» oC STotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GREEK. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. C. Robertson, B.A. 



&■' 



1. Translate : 

(a) '^n? e^a6\ "E/ctw/j 8' ov ri Kaaiyvi^Tto dirldrj'^ev. 
AvTiKa S" i^ oj^ifov <tvv revyeaiv oKto yafiafy^ 
YlaX\G)V 8' o^ka Sovpa Kara arparov ayxero iravTrj^ 
*0 -pvutov fiaxitraadai, eyeipe Se <f)v\oTnv aivtjv. 
Oi S' eKe\i)(Pr}aav Kal ivavrlot earav 'A^ai&v 
'Apyeioi 8' VTrexf^ptfaaVi, X^fav hk <f)6poiOy 
^au 8e Ttv adavdrav e^ ovpavov darepoevTo^ 
Tptoalv dXe^^aovTa KaTeXOifiew w? iXeXtj^dev. 

Homer, Iliad VI. 

(0) At 7ap air ovaro^ efij efiev ctto? aWa fiaX atv(o<i 
AetSo) /i^ 87] /lot dpaavv "lEiKTopa Sto? 'A^tWey?, 
yiovvov AiroT/Aiyfa? 7r6\to9, TreSt'orSe 8i7]Tai, 
Kal 8}] fiiv KarairaiKrrj dyt]uopir)(} oKeyeiinj^iy 
rl /Lttif e'x^ea-K , eirei ov ttot ei/t wMjovi fievev avoptav, 
'AWa TToXu irpodeea-Ke, to 8j/ /iiei;o9 owSevl etKtov." 

'^n? <f>afjbivr} fieydpoto SieaavTO fiaivd8i X<n}, 
WaWofxevq KpaBiijv dfxa S* du^irroXoi kiov avrfj. 
Avrdp tVet irvpyou re «a« hv8pS)v l^ev ofxCKoVy 
"Ea-rr) 7rafT>;i/acr' eVt Tei-)(el, tov S* evoTjaev 

EiXko/xcvov irpocrdev TToXto^* ra^^ee? Se /iti/ tTnrot 
"EXkoi' <i«7^8eaTa)9 KoiXai tiri vr]a<i 'A^atwi'. 

//>/(/., XXII. 



I 



(c) 



W I 



Kpik Trerroc, ri fioi eoSe hih a-rrioii eatrvo fit^Xotu 
"T<Traro<i ; ov ri Trapo? 7^ XeXeififievo^ ep')(eai oluv, 
'A\XA TToXv irptaTO^ ve/ieai repeu' avdea Troirjf; 
Ma/fpa 0i^h<{, irp&Toi Be poat trorafiSiV d^iKuvei^y 
UpciTO^ Be (TTaOfiovBe \i\aieai inroveeadai 
'E<T7ripio<}' pvv aCre iravvararofi' ^ cv y avuKTOt 
'O(f)da\fiov irodeeii}, top av^p KaKo<i i^aXdaxrev 
^vv \vypoh erdpoiaif Sa/juia<rdfievoi} (ppiua^ otv^, 
O^Tt?, hv ov trm ^fii 7re<f>iryfjkevov etvcu SXedpou. 
El Bij 6uo^pov€oi<t iroTi^p^fK T€ yevoto 
EtTreti/ oinrr) kcivo^ e/toe fiivo(; '^XaaKa^ei. 

Homer, Odyi^sey IX. 



(d) 



With explanatory notes where necessary : 
" Nvu fiiv Brj fidXa nrdyyv «oaco9 kukov rfyifxdi^ei, 
'n? aieX Tov ofioiop ayei, deo^ a>9 tov ofiolov. 
Ufj Bt) rovBe ftoXo^pov AyeK, hueyapre av^fara^ 
Ylraypv hvirjpov, BaiT^u inroXvfiavTijpa ; 
*^0? iToXXf}<i ipXifjai TTapacTCLf ^Xiy^erai &fiov<}y 
Alr/^duv a/c6Xou9, ovx aopat ovB^ Xi^tp-a^. 
Tov y el HOI, Boir}<i OTadjiSiv pvrijpa yeviaOaif 
^TjKOKopov T efievai daXXov r ipiifMuri tf>opijpai, 
Kal Kep opop iriptop f^eydXrjP iirir/ovpCBa deiTO." 

Ibid., XVII. 

2. (a) Write a note on ao-T6/3O£VT09. 

(6) Explain the tense used in KaraTrdvari, eyecK, 
iratTTrivaa ^ cXkop. Distinguish ofiiXop and ttXtjOvI. 
Explain force of Bi) (1. 4), and top (1. 10). Is anj'thing 
gained by the addition of Ta;^e69...*Ajtotwi;? 

(c) Write a note on the rhetorical arrangement 
of the extract. Explain the force of 76 (1. 6). Write 
a note on the use of KaK6<i and dyado^ in Homer. 

(d) Write a note on the use of a)? and top in m top 
ofiolop (I. 2f. Explain the force of re... re (1. 8). What 
is noteworthy in the form of 1. 5 ? 

3. The Homeric simile. 

4. Answer any two of the following questions: 

(a) No other single book of Homer is perhaps 
more comprehensively' typical than the twenty-second 
book of the Iliad, in character-drawing, use of the 
divine element, use of simile, and in variety of action. 
Explain and illustrate. 



n 



f^ 



(6) " Enlargement of the primary Iliad." Ex- 
plain fully. 

(c) " Homer's manner is eminently noble," M. 
Arnold. "Homer lacks dignity," Chautauqua text- 
book. Examine these statements. 

(d) What is un-Homeric in the follomng trans- 
lations ? 

" Behold Ulysses, no ignoble name, 
Earth sounds my wisdom and high heaven my fame." 

Od. IX. 

" Poor dame I she little knew 
How much her cares lacked of his case." 

II. XXII. 

" Where constant vows by travellers are paid, 
And holy horrors solemnize the shade." 

Od. XVII. 

" Great Hector of the motley helm thus spake to her 
responsive " 

" The solid heap of night 
Shall interpose and stop mine ears against 
Thy plaints and plight." 

•^ ^ ^ " Jl. VI. 



<« n 



Thy barbarous breach of hospitable bands 
The god, the god revenges by mj'' hands." 

Od. IX. 

" So pass mankind, one generation meets 
Its destined period, and a new succeeds." 

11. VI. 
5. Translate : 
rOP. (5 Td<i dXefiaTa) ylrv)(^a<}' fi6\i<i vfifiiv eatodrjv, 

Vlpa^ivoa, TToWw uev oj^Xoi, iroW&u 8e Tedpitnroiv, 
iravTci KprjTrlSe^:, iravra ■)(\afivBt)<f)6poi av8pe^' 
a B' 6S6<i aTpvTO<;' to 8' eKaaripcj afjb/Aiv dnoiKeU. 
nPAS. Taud' 6 7rdpapo<! Tqvo^' eir eo'^fcna 7a? e\a/3' 
evddiv 
iXeov, ovK otK7)(riv , otto)? firf yeiTove<i &fie<i 
aK\.d\ai,(;, tror epiv, ^dovepov kukov, aliv ofioioi:. 
POP. fit) \eye rov rebv duBpa^ ^iXa. Atv(ova loiavra 
r& fjkiKKoy TTapeovTQ^' oprj yvvai^ &>? iroOopfj tv. 
dapaet Zwirvplcov^ yXvKepov t6«o?' ov \67et tnr<j)vv. 
nPA3. aicddverai to ^pe<f)o<i^ vol rdv trorviav. POP. 

KdXo<i d7r<Pvi. 
IIPAH. iItt^us" fidu rfjpo^ TO, irpoav — Xsyo/ie? Se irpoav r)vd 



(1 



f 



fravra — virpov Kal <f)VKo<t «7r6 aKuifW ayopdtrBcov 
^v0e (fiepcov a\o? afifiiu, dpr)p T/3t?<cat8c«a7ri;;^yc. 
rOP. ;^w^o? TavTtj ej^et, <pd6po^ dpyvpio}, Ato/e\€t8a?. 

Theocuitus, XV. 

(a) cKKvaiaevurai irKareidahoiaai diravTa. Trans- 
late, and illustrate from the above extract. 

(/>) Explain 1. 3, alkv ofxoio^ (1. 7), Tav iroTviav 
(1. 11), and the syntax of ^x^o) (1. 2). 

(c) What indication do you find in the extract 
that the women are conscious of their dialect ? 

(d) In what spirit are koKo^ Att^w (1. 11), and 
&7r(f)w (1. 12), uttered ? 

(e) What is your opinion of the reality of the 
two womens' irritation ? 

6. (ft) Translate the following extracts : 

(6) Assign each to its apppropriate character, 
giving both the English and the Greek name : 

TMV 'Ofit'ipov eirmv tovto ^i/ fiovou Kari'^eiv, on 
ovK dyadov iroXvKOipavii)' eh Koipavo<; eaju). 

yeipoTovovfxevo^ e^o/ivvadai to? apxa^, ov dua- 
Kdv (T'^oXa^eiv. 

8€ivb<i Bi Kol Tot? deoh fih iTrevj^eadai. 

Seiv6<{ Be Koi iravBoKevcai Koi reXwi'fyerat koX 
fiTjBeixiav epyaaiav aia-)(pav aTToBoKifidaai' (iravBoKevaai' 
Illustrate from Ar. Ranae). 

^(oporepou "rneiv. 

K\vBo3po<i yevop,evov, epmrdu et tk /*^ fiefivtjTai 
7(av irKeovTCdv. 

Theophrastus, Characters. 

{(') How does elpcopeia as used by Theophrastus 
differ from the irony attributed to Socrates ? Explain 
what is ujoant by the irony of Sophocles. 



/ 



/ 



mnt\}fvntt9 of SToronto* 



AiNNUAL liXAMlNATION.S; 1891. 



CANDIDATI<:S FOR B.A. 



GREEK. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. C. Robertson, B.A. 



I. 

T. Translate : 

(ft) KA. Kal fiyv To8' etV^ fiij irapa yvdofirjv efioi 

AF. yvcofiijv (lev ladi fir) hia'^OepovvT ijxk. 

K A. 'r)v^(a deoh heicra^ av wS' epSeiv raSe ; 

AT. eiirep Tt<>, ei5a)9 7' eu to8' e^enreiv reKo'i. 

KA. t/ 8' tiv SoKel (Tot Upiafioi, el rdS' rjvvffev ; 

AT. eV 7rot«t\ot9 au Kapra fioi ^ijvat 8oKei. 

KA. fMi) vvv TOP nvdpwTTeioi' alSea-Ofjii yjroyov. 

AT. (fit'jfxT] je fiei^Tot B)]fj,6dpov<; fieya adevei. 

JvA. o 8' d(f)66vr]r6<i y ovk eiri^rjXoi; iriXet. 

AT. owTot yvvaiK6<i icmv i/xeipeiv /Jt,d')(7]'i. 

KA. Toh oX^tois ye Kal to viKaadat, Trpkirei., 

AT. ?} Afai ai) i'iKi]V ryvBe B)]pio<i TtVtv ," 

KA. TTiOov, ifp(iTo<; Traptf ye /jltjv ckSdv ifioL 

(/>) fcVt-t 8' avdyKa<i eSo XeTraSvou, 
<})pevb<: TTvecov Bvc-ae^rj jpoiraiav 
dvayvov uviepov, Tudev 
TO TravTOToX/jLov (j)poveiv /xeTeyvco. 

(c) TO yap SoXwaai 7r/30? yvvaiKo^ rjv (7a(\)5><i' 
iyo) 8' vTroTTTo^ e)^dpb<i y -rraXaiyev/jf;. 

{d) Kal p.-t-jv 6 ^pri(Tpb<; omer eK Ka\vfip,dT(ov 
earai 8e8op«o)9 peoydpov vvp.^i]<i BiKr]v' 
\ap,7rpo'i 8' eoiKev r)\iov Trpo? tij/ToXa? 
nrvewv ecrrj^eiv, ware Kv/MaTo<; SUrjv 
KXv^eiv Trpo? avydf rovSe 7n]p,aT0'} irdXv 
fiei^ov <})p€VQ)acD 8' ovKer ef alviypdroyv, 
Kat p.apTvpelT€ avvZp6pa><i t')(yo'i KaK&v 
piVTjXaTOvarj tmv irdXai. nreiTpaypevtav. 

Aes(JHYT,its, Agamem7ion, 



il 



(e) firfSdfi 6 travra vifimv 

0eiT ifia yuatfia Kpdro^ avrirraXov Zci)^, 
fit)^ iKivvcaifH Beoif^ oaiuK 6ol:>ai<i •jrorivtaaofieva 
fiov<f)6poK Trap 'Clxeavov Trarpo? atr^earov iropop, 
fiifb' hXiToifju "KoyoK" 
fidXa fioi tout' ififiivoi 
Koi fitftroT iKTaKeiT). 

Ibid., Promefhevs Vinctus. 

2. (a) Explain clearly the meaning of lines 1-4. In 
what lines is there a twofold meaning ? Discuss the 
question whether the episode of the pui'ple tapestries 
has an important bearing on the ethical questions 
involved in Agamemnon's death, or is introduced purely 
for dramatic efl'ect. 

3. (6) Why could Aeschylus not regard the hereditary 
curse as the chief cause of Agamemnon's tragic fate ? 
What does he represent as the cause, and what bearing 
has this passage on the question ? Does this cause of 
his death (a) necessarily, {b) actually, coincide with 
Clytemnestra's motive in killing him ? 

4. (c) What important differences exist between the 
Homeric and the Aeschylean form of the myth ? Why 
would the Homeric account be inconsistent with 
Aeschylus' conception of the tragedy ? 

5. (d) Explain clearly but briefly the meaning of 
the passage. What dramatic purposes are served by 
the introduction of Cassandra in this scene ? 

6. (e) Where and why does the chorus express a 
different opinion ? State clearly the ethical problem 
of the Prometheus Vinctus. What is the solution 
indicated by the poet ? 

II. 

7. Translate : 

(a) "E/wBv itpixaTe iidyjxv, "Epm^ o? ip KT^fia<n TrtTTTet?, 
h^ ip ficiKaKovi vapetaK P€dpi8o<! eppv)(€v€K' 
<j)oiTSi^ 5' inrepTTOPTioii ip r dypopofioK avKaU, 

Kai a otn*' hdapdrmp <f>v^ifj.o<; ovBei^ 
oHd' dfiepCmp <ri y dp0pdyirtop, 6 8' e'xatp fiefitjpep. 
aif Kal BixaUop e^Uovi <f>pipa^ trapa<nra<i etrX "Xxofia 
ai) Kai roBe i/etAC09 dphp&p ^vpaifiop ep^6t9 lapd^av 
piK.l 8' ipapy})<i ^\€<f>dpa)p Xfiepot eVKkitrpov 

pvfi(f)a<i, T&p fjteydXcop TrdpeSpo^ ip itp'^aU 
decfjL&p' afiM')(o<i yhp hfiiraifyt deo'i ^ k.i^pohira 



: 



, 



in 



? 



(/>) AIM. '^^ o^v daveirai koi 0avov<r' 6\ei riva' 

KP. ij KawaTreiX&v wS' itreJ^ipxai, 6paavs ; 

AIM. rl<i 8' ear' aTretX^ Trpov /eev^? yvdtfia^ Xiyeiv , 

KP. /fXatwv (f>p€v<o<rei^, i)P ^pevtov auTov «ev6f. 
757. AIM. fiovXet \iyeip ri Kal Xeywv p/ifikv kKvuv ; 
756. KP. f^waiKw &p Bov\evp,a, fii) /ccariXXe p.€, 
756. AIM. eifiri warfjp ^<t0\ elfrov &v <t ovk cS (f>pov€lv. 

KP. a\rj0e^^ «XX' ob tovS' "OXv/tiTroi*, laO' on, 
yaipodv iirl yfroyoiai BewdacK ip>e. 
ar/(vy€ to fita-o^, m Kar Sfi/iar avriKa 
•irapovTt 0vij<TKri TrXrjaia t^ vvfi<f>l(p. 

Sophocles, Antiyove. 
(c) ot?' olfv yeTuovTtov KuTriyaipovroop KaKOi<{ 

TOW TOV&*' to"a)9 Tot, Ket /SXeTToi/Ta /a^ 'irodovv, 

Bupopt' &p olfua^ecap 4v XP^^9 8op6<i. 

01 yap KOKol yvdtfMiuTi rdyaffop i^epotf 

e^oi/Te? ohK laaffi, trplp Tt? iK/daXfj. 

ifiot TTiKpoi reOprjKep, 17 (v. 1. ^) Ktipoit yXvKw, 

avTw fi^ TepTTPo^' wp yap ripdadij Tu^^eti/ 

iicr^aaB' avr^, ddparop, ovirep ijdeXep. 

ri B^a 7ov8' iireyyeX^p &p xdia ; 

0€OK ridpijKep oliTo<i, ob Keipotaip, o{;. 

7rp09 tout' *OBv(T<T€V<i €P K€PoU vfipi^iTtO' 

"Aia^ yap auTot? obKer i<TTip, &XX' ifiot 
X{7ret>v dpia^ koI yoow Biolyerai. 

Ibid., Ajax. 

8. (a) Explain the reference in vTrepiroPTiof and 
in dr/popofioi^, the meaning of t&p /xeydXtov. . . .0e<rfiwp, 
the syntax of <r (1. 4) and the force of Kruifiaai, ai y, 
oJBIkovs, ^ft^ rapd^a^, apwxp^. 

9. (a) The following is given as the scansion of 1. 5 : 
> : -w - I _- I L_ , t_ II — , _- I i_ , _^ ,1 

Explain this scheme and indicate in a similar 
manner the scansion of lines 1-3, which have the same 
structure. 

10. (6) What is the gain supposed to be made by the 
transposition indicated ? " The introduction of Haemon 
an invention of Sophocles " ; what does he gain thereby ? 

11. (c) Translate both readings in 1. 6. What is 
noteworthy in the S3'ntax of 1. 5, and the scansion of 
1.9? 

12. Show the connection of the five Staaima of the 
Antigone with the action of the drama. 

13. What limitations are found in the Ajax and the 
Antigone to the use of a Tritagoniat ? 






ill 



(c) 



(e) 



nr 

14. 'rranslatc, witli liiid' Dxphiiialory ni)f.os: 
(a) IIKIIC. (ipviOe^ uvdpdi'TroKTi vvv eiaiv Oeoi, 

ol>i Omeov auTuU'i, dWa fiii A/' ou rtfi Ati. 
FPIS. ft» (xoype ^wpt, /a»; 6io)u Kivei (f>peva<} 

Beimw oTTWs' /J.)} (Tov ykvo<i vavnAedpov 
Atov fiUKeWr) 7! av hvaarpi-y^D AUrf^ 
Xiyvvt Be aoyfia koI hufiwv •nepitrrvyh'; 
KaTai6a\(0(TT} rrov AtKV/J,viai<i ^oKalt. 

aKovere Xefo. 

riEI}^. ovofta he aoi ri earrt, TrXolov, ij kuvP) ; 
IPIS. ^lpt.<!Ta-)(£ta. IIEI!^. l\npa\o^,7j'!^a\afii,via; 
(d) elSoTef 6p6ai<: Trap' (p.ov I IpoSt'/cro K\detv eirrrjTe rb 
Xonrnv. AiusT()iMiANi;s, Ares. 

TrpoiTQv uvi> i)p.lv BoKei 
i^KTOiaai Toi'? TToXfra*? Kd({)e\eii> ra Seifiara, 
KCi Tt9 rjfiapTe acf)aXei<{ ri ^l^pvi'i^ov iraXaifrp.aaiv, 
iyy€vea6at, <l)T}fii ■^prjvai roh oXurdovaiv Toie 
alriav cKOeicri Xv<7<ii ra.'i vpuTfpdi' itfx.apTia'i. 
elr aTifjLou <pj]fit '^pTjvat fxrjBa'' eiv ev tj) noXei 
Kal yap ala^ov cam rov^i p-ir i>av/xa-^}i<Tni'7a<i f.iiav 
Kai IlXarata? €ii6u<i eliua kuvti Bov'Kmv heairoTat. 

{^f) ft)<? piya Bvvaadoii irainn^oi) rto Bv' olSoXu). 
(f/) XijKvOiov uTruiXeacii- 

(h) ET. a\X' ou^iMV TrpomcTTa fikv p.oi to yeu-^'i etTr' av 
evOv^ 
TOV Bpu/itaTo^. A I. KpeiTTov yap i]v aoi vi) A/ 
rj TO aavrov. 
RT. eTreiT airb tSw Trpd^TMV eirmv ovBev TraprJK av 
upyav, 
dXX' (iXayep t) yvvi] Tt" p,oi yw 8oOXos" oiiOiiv ^ttoii, 
^w BeaTTOTTji; ")(>] irapdevwi yfj ypav^ av. Al. 

eira BrJTa 
ovK cnroOavelu ae ravT e-)^pr]i> ToXp,a>VTa ; RT. 

fia TOV 'AttoWw 
Bt^fioKpaTiKov yap ai'jT tBpmv. Al. tovto p,kv 

^aaoVf <o Tuv. 
ob (Tol yap €<TTi TrepiVaTOv KaXXiaTa irepi ye 
TovTov. 11)1(1.., Ranae. 

15. Give aro-uments tor and a<j;iinst the followinf; 
three views of the main purpose of the Avcs ; that it 
favors the schemes of Alcibiadcs, that it is a warninj^ 
against Alcibifules, that it i.s written purely to pleitse 
and not to instruct. 

16. What inferences may be drawn from the fre- 
quency of parody in Aristo})hanes '. 



QlnfUf mflff of roronto* 



ANNUM. KXAMINATI0M8 : 18H1. 



UANDIDATEH FOR B.A. 



CRRKK. 

HONORS. 



Examhier : William Dale, M.A. 



ARIMTOTLK. 
Translate : 

AeyopTCi yhp irepl rov i^dov^ oh \eyofiev Sri (roif)6^ 
■q ffvvero^ aW on irpao^ ij aaMftpatv, iTraivovfiev Si 
Kol TOP ao6ov Kara 71)1/ i^ip' ratp e^etop he rct^ 
4'7raiP€Th<! aperat \eyouep. Atrr^? Se x^v dpeiij^ 
ob(Tii<}, T^? /x^p SiaPorjTiKrj'i -7^9 Sk ^diicij^, rf flip 
8iaP0'r)TiKr) to irXeiop cV BiSatrKoXla^ ^et Kat rrjp 
yivecTip xai rfjp av^aip, Bionep CfiTreipiat Seirai koX 
ypopov. r) 8' rjdiKr) ef l^ou? ir^ptrfiveTai, odep koX 
Towofia ea^ijKC fiiKpop irapeKKXiPOP dvb tov edovt, 
'Ef o5 KoX hifKop OTt ovhefiUi tS>p rfdiK&p dpertap 
^vtrei ripUp iyylpcTai' ovdep yap t&p <f>vaet 6pt(op 
a\\(09 idl^erai, olop 6 \ido<i (ftvcrei Korto <f}ep6fMepofi 
ovK &p idiaOeif] &P(o <f>€peadai, ovb' &p fivpiaxK ainop 
edl^jf Til avto piTrTCiP, ovBe to irvp /caro), ovS' aXKo 
ovSev T&p o\\«i)9 7r€<f>vK6Tiop a\\o}f &p ediaOei'i]. 
Out' dpa <f>vaei ovTe irapa <f)v<Tip eyyiPOPTai ai 
dp€Tai, dWa ire^vKoai uev rfpUp Se^acdai ai>Tav, 
TeXeiovfievoi^i Be Bia tov edoii^. 

Kthics, I., II. 

1. iiraiPQvp.€P...e^ip. Explain. 

2. Exphiin Aristotle's use of the word ^wtris. 



Trail h1 ate : 

OvK (If ovi> th) (SovXtvrov to Tt\«v AWa ra tt^os* 
rh ri\i) Oi/W Bif rh kuO' tKatrra, olnv tl a pros 
ToOio 1^ TriTTtmai a»? Sift' aiaOijaeti)^ y^p ravTa, Ki 
8k (tti (SovXevaerai, tl<i ^TTttpov »/f«. WovKevjov ^t 
*fal trponipejhv to at>T6, ttX^v n(f>(opiafievou //St; to 
irpoaiperoV to 7rtp ^« tT/v fSovXfj^i trpoKpiB^v irpoai- 
pfTuv carir. I lauerat 7<i/j SKa<rTO<i ^r)i &v ttw? irpd^ei, 
i'nnu cts ainov npaydyp rffi' np^t')u, koI avTov etv to 
yyov/xevov tovto yap to Trpoaipov/xevou. A»)\oi« 5f 
TOUTO *al tX TWf dp^tUMU TToXiTei&v, A? "Of.tijpoK 
^fiifielro' 01 yap /SaaiXel^ li TrpoeXotVTO din'iyy^XXoi' 
TtZ St'jfi((i "OuTo^ hi Tov Trpoaiperov fiovXevrov 
opiKTov TO}v t'0' /;/tii/, Kal ij irpoaipetri'i hv tit) L'iov- 
XevriKt) ope^is' rtou e^' r}(itv' ix toO ffovXevtraaOai 
yap Kpivavrt^ opeyofieda Karh rfjv ^ovXtvaiv. 

Hid., III. 

1. o{;« Af oiJy...To T^Xov. Why? 

2. aladtjaecoii yap ravra. Explain. 

3. Explain Itrietiy the rolntion of irpoatpeaK to dperij. 

Translate : 

Oi);^ ofioiQXi Si TO laov ^v re Tot? BiKa(oi<} kuI tV 
TTj (f)iXia <f)aiveTai e^etv eari yap iv fieu Tot? Bi,Ka(oi<i 
Xaov TrpoiTw? to kut d^'iau, to Be Kara troaov 8ev- 
Tt'pruv, tu 8e Tji <f)i,Xia to /ztV Kara Troaov TrptoTtov, to 
Be kut' d^iav Bevrepui^. AfiXou 8\ edv ttoXv 8iu<t- 
rij/xa ylyvi]Tai dperPi'i rj KaKia<i rj einrop(a<{ 17 Ttvov 
dXXov ov yap tTt (jiiXot eia(v, aW' 01/8' d^iovaiv. 
'KficfiauearaTov Be tout' tVt t&v decoV TrXeiaTOu yap 
ovToi TTucrt Tot? dyaBol^ vTrepe^ovaiv. APfXov Bi kuI 
eVt Taif ^aaCXetav ovB^ yap TouTotv d^iovaiu elvai 
(f>{\oi 01 TToXv KaraBeeaTepoif ovSr rolt dpiaroi^ fj 
o"O0a)TaTot9 01 fxrjBeub^ d^iot. 'A.Kpi^r}«; fiev ovu ev 

TOtV TOlOVTOl^ OVK eCTTlV OpKTfJLO^, CO)*? TtVos' ol <^iXoi' 

TToXXSiP yap ii(})aipovfievuiu tri fxei/ei, ttoXv Be -^^wpia- 
6evTo<i, olov TOV 0eov, ovKeri. "OQev «at d-jropelrai, 
fj,r] ttot' ov (SovXouTai 01 ^iXoi, toZ? (fiiXot<i to, fieyLara 
T&v dyaOcoi', uloi> Ocovf euvav ovBe yap tri (f){Xoi 
iaourai avrol'i, ovBe 81} dyadd' 01 yap (fiiXoi ayadd. 

IbUL, VIII. 

1. hriv yap ...BevTepeo<i. What is the meaning ^ 
Would it hold for all forms of government according 
to the Greek conception !" 

2. Define <piXUi and ^iXavria after Aristotle. What 
is the position of (ptXi'a in Aristotle's moral system ? 






'riHiiHliit(> ; 

Aet S»/ TO ^^ov Trp(ivirdp)(^eiif ttoi? oUfloi' Ttjs 
aperrjfi, aripyou to KaXop kuI ivtr^epatvov to atV- 
;^p6i/. 'l*i/c veov f)' rt7ft)7»)« opdrif rvj^elv irpot dotrifv 
"XaXeirbu fit) vtro roiovTots Tpa<f>evTa v6p.oi<f to yhp 
tr(o<l>p<')va)f Kal Kaprvpixm l^tfu oi);^ t)hv roU ttoWok, 
a\\a)9 Te Ka\ i>ioi<i. A(6 t'ouoif 8el TtTu^dai ri)v 
Tpo(f>tiv Koi rh iTriJt)hevp.ara' ovk eurm yap \vTrrif>a 
avvqdi) yivofieva. Oti^ Uavov 8' Tawv viov<i 6Vto9 
Tpo(fyti<i Kal ^TTifieXeia^ rvyelv 6pOt)>{, n\\' tVetSr/ Kal 
dvBpo)dhTa<i Bet eTriTTj^eveiv aura kuI edil^eadai, Kal 
Trepi ravTu Beolixed' tiv rofian), Kal o\a>s' 8»; irepl 
trdpTa T()U diov «/ yiip ttuWoI dvdyKrj fiaWov ff 
\uyf{f trtidap^oixTi Kal ^rjfilai^ t) tm KaXfo. 

I hid., X. 

1. wepl "rrdura rov ^iov. What i.s the Greek concep- 
tion of the sphere of law '. How does Aristotle detine 

2. ry Ka\t[t. VVhttt is the meaning { 

TranHlatc! : 

To p.h' ovv 7n;piTTuu e)(pv<n Travret oi tov "^lUKpd- 
Tov<i \6^/<;i Kal TO KOfiyjrov Kal to Kaivoiofiov Koi [to] 
i^ijTrfTiKov, Ka\o)<; S^ Truvra Xarto^ ■^dkeTrov, eVet «at 
TO vvD etitiifievov 7rXijdo<t Set /*;/ XavOdveiJ on yiopa<i 
Sefjfftt Tois' TOcroyTotv Ma^vXtovlai r; Tivo^ aX\T}<i 
direpavTov to TrXydo^'^ e^ ^f dpyoi rreuraKia'^iXiot 
BpeylrovTui, Kal irapa tovtov<; yvvaiKOiv Kal Oepairov' 
Tfi)V CTepo^ "X^o? 7roA,Xa7r\a<7to9. Set fi,eu ouv vttoti- 
deadai Kar eu^^u, /j,t)htju ficvroi dovvarov. — Xiyerai, 
8' ft)? 8et rou voixo6hi]u irpo'i Svo /SXefropTa ridevai 
Toi/? v6aov<i., Trpos" tc ttjv ;^«apai^ Kal TOV<i av6p<i>Trov^, 
tT/. 8^ KaXm eyei irpoadelvai Kal Trpo? tou? yeirvi- 

MUTat TOTTOVi}, el 8e4 TtJU TToXlU ^]V ^ioV TToXefllKOU (ov 

yap iiovov dvayKalov iariv avrr^v roiovrot<i -x^prjadai 
Trpo? Toi^ TToXefiop ottXoi? a 'x^pija-ifMa Kara tIju oiKeiau 
^^a)/^a^' earlv, dXXa Kal Trp6<i tou? e^co tottou?)' el Si 

Tt? firj TOIOVTOV UTToSexeTai ^iov, flt}T€ TOV c8tOV fl1}T€ 

TOV Koivhv Tp)<i TToXertS, ouco^ ovBeu t^ttov Set 4>o^<i- 
poiif elvac Toh TroXei-Uoif, fi)) fiuvov eXOovaiv eh Trjv 
y(i}pav dXKa Kal a7r[f\^joi;cn;'. — Kal to ttXjJ^o? 8e 
T^? KTt'fcrew'i opdv Bel, fuj iroTe ^cXtiov erepo); 
Siopia-ai, TM o-o0(U9 /xdXXov. 

I'olitlcs, 11. 

1, What i.s Avistotle'.s deKnition oH iroXnaa! 

2. ^iov TToiXefiiKov or ttoXltckov. Which do you prefer 
and why ? Wlxat is the meaning of the latter rwadiug i 



w 



HI 



9Anftier0fti;^ ot Cotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOU B.A. 



GREEK. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: William Dale, M.A. 



I ^ 



1. Translate: 

TaOra (lev rr^v YlvBiifv -ypijaai Trporepov fiera Se 
CO? iXOelv jovi ayyiXov^ e? Sf) to "Apyos;, itreXdeiv 
iirt TO SovKevT'^piou, xai \eyeiv r^ ivrfakfieva. Tov<i 
Bi TT/oo? TO, Xeyofieva viTOKplvacrdat, ii><i eroifioi tiVt 
'Apyeiot iroieeiv ravra, rpnjKovTa erea eipqvijv 
(nreiadfievoi AaKeSai/AOPcoiat, koI tjyeofievoi Kara to 
^fAiav 'rrdarji; tj)? o-u/Aua^^ti;?" Kairoi Kara ye ro 
hUatov yiueaOai rr^v ■fiyefioviriv itovT&v, dW' o/xtoi 
<r<f>i uTTO'Xpav Kark to ^/iiav ■^yeo fiivoiai. 

Herodotus, VII. 
Explain kutu ye to hUaiov. 

2. Translate : 

'ISmicrafiai 8^ roaovTO, on, el Trai^Te? avOpattroi ra 
oiK'qia Kaxa i<; fieaov avveveitcaiev, aSXd^aadou 
iSovXofieuob TOicri TrXrja-loiai, iyKvyfravre^ 6,u c? ra 
r&u 7r€\a9 Kaxa, daTraalaxi ixmroL abrSyv diro- 
^epoiaro vtriaoa rk iaeveUavTo. ovrto Br) ovk 
'Apyelotffi aX<T')(iara TreTrolijTai. 'l^ya> 8k oc^e/Xo) 
Xeyeiv to, Xeyoixeva, freideadal ye firjv ob iravrdiraai 
6(f>eiX(o' Kai fjuoi tovto to ?7ro? c^cto) i<s irdvra rov 
Xoyou. 

Ibid. 

What is meant by the " malignity " of Herodotus ? 
Is there any ground for the charge ? 



3. Translate : 

Trjv fi^v Bt) Tpoi^rjviTjv, t?)? ^PX^ Uprj^lvo^, ainUa 
alpeovort, emairofievoi ol ^dp^apoi. Koi eiretra t&v 
iiri^arioiv avTr)<; tov KoXKicnevovra (vyayovreii iirl 
TTJi} Trpcopr)'^ T^? vr]o<} eVi^a^av, BiaSe^iov nroievficvoi 
TOV elXov T&u 'E\A,»/i'ft)i' irp&TOV koi koXKkttov. rt[> 
Be a-<f)ayia<T9evTt rovrtp ovvofxa rjv AeaV Tajfa B' &v 
71 Kol TOV ovv6fiaTO<i iiravDoiro. 

Ibid. 
Quote any other {Greek or Roman) instances 
where superstitious significance was attached to names. 

4. Translate: 

"EA,\»;<7i fxev Ti(rafi€u6<! \^.vTi6yov ^v 6 6v6/jievo<i' 
o5to9 yap Brj enreTo tm (TTpaTevfiari tovt^ fidvTi^' 
TOV, iovTU 'HXelov Kal yeveo^: tov ^JafiiBeav K\v- 
TidBr)v, AaKcBaiuovcci etroirjcravTo \€u><T<fiQTepov. 
Ti(rafji€va} yap /xavTevo/. ev^ ev AeX(l>oiai irepc yovov, 
avelXe rj Hvdir), ay(ova<i toj)? fieyiarov; avaip^aea-6ai 
irivTe. 6 fiev Bt) djiapToav tqv '^prjarTrjpiov, nrpoael-^^e 
yviivacloici, <i? avaiprjaofjuevo^ yvfiviKov<} ayS)va<i. 
daK€(ov Bi TT.ivrdedXov, Trapd ev irdXaKTfia eBpafie 
viKOLV OXv/xTTidBa, 'lepayvvfKp tm 'AvBpi'fp eXdcou eV 
epiv. 

Ib:d., IX. 

KXvTidBvv. What difficulty is involved in this 
reading ? 

Explain irapa ev. . . . OXvfiTTidBa. 

5. Translate : 

Kal orra fiev Xoyat elirov enaaToi fj fieXXovTe<i 
TToXefiTjaeiv ^ ev avTb> i'jBij Sura, ■)(aXeirov ttjv uKpi- 
^eiav avTr)v T&v Xex^^vTOiv Bia/xvij/ioveva-ai ^v, e/Moi 
T€ &v oi;To? rjKOvaa Kal rot? aXXodev irodev ifiol 
dtrayyeXXovaiv' &>? S' 6,v eBoKovv e/xol CKaaroi irepl 
T&v del irapovTciV Ta BiovTa fidXiaTa elirelv, i'xpfiev^ 
OTi eyyvTara t^? ^Vfi7rdifr)<: yva}ii7}<i Ttav tt\iy0w9 
XeyOevTtov, outws e'iprjTai. to, B' epya t&v irpayBev- 
Tiov ev Tu> iroXifia) ovk eK tov TrapaTvyovTOf TTwaavo- 
^fievoi rj^imaa ypd(f>etv, ovB^ a)? efiol eBoKei, dXX' oh re 
o{;to9 Trapfjv Kal irapa t&v dXXtov oaov BvvaTop 
aKpi^eta irepl CKaoTov eire^eXdoav, eirvrrovu)^ Be 
evpicTKeTO, BioTi oi •rrap6vTe<i Toh epyoK e^aarot? ov 
Tavrd irepl t&v avTOiv eXeyov, hXX' «b? exaTeprnv Tt? 
ebvola^ rj fivrifxr}^ ^X°'" '^"'^ ^^ ^^^ aKpoatnv lorto? to 



a 

V 

\ 

I 
n 
I) 

V 



fjkf} fiv6a)8e<; ain&v arepirkarepov (f)av€tTaf oaoi Se 
^ovXijaovTai t&v re yevo/ievcov to ffa^h^i aKoirelv kuI 
T&v fieWovThW TTork ai0i<i Kara to avSpdiireiov toiov- 
T(ov Kat TrapairXrjtriuv iaeadai^ cD^eXifui Kpiveiv aiira 
dpKovprayi ^^ei. KTrjfid re eV ael fiaXf^v ^ deydavicfia 
t'9 TO irapa'x^prip.a ukovuv ^vyKeirai. 

Thucydides, I. 

Point out any irregularities of construction in 
this passage. 

What is the government of (ivrjiii)'; ? The mean- 
ing of TO fii) /jbv6cJoe<{ ? 

The force of Tt- in Krrjfid re ? The subject of 
^vyKciTai. 

6. Translate ivith explanatory notes : 

(h) Tey€VT}fi€vr]<f 8^ t^? viKr}<i roh "SiVpaKoaioii} Xafiirpa^ 
^^7) Kal Tou vavTiKov, Trporepov fiev yap et^o^ovmo 
Ta? /x6Ta Toy Aijfioadevov! vaw i'ire\6ovaa<i, 01 fiev 
'AOrjvaiot iv iravrlhrj advfiia<! Tjcrav koX 6 irapaKoyo'i 
avTol^ fjueya^ fjvy ttoXv Be fid^tav en t?)? arpareia^i 6 
/ierayLteXo?. vroXecrt yap TavTat,<i fiovatij '^Brj ofioiorpo- 
TTOt? 67reX^6i^T€9, Bij/jLOKpaTOVfievui'; re &a7rep Kal 
avTol, Kal vav'i Kal XirTTovi Kal /MeyiOt} €')(pv(TaK, ov 
hvvdfievoi eireveyKeiv ovre ck iroXhTeia^s Tt fieTa^o\rj<{ 
TO htd^opov avToU, ft) TTpocrfyovTO &v, oih' e« irapa- 
aK€vf}<; TToXXw Kpeiatrov^, <x(f>aW6nevoi Be to. TrXe/w, 
TO T6 Trpo avrSiv rjiropovp, Kal iirecBi] ye Kal Tat? 
vavalv eKparridriaav, o ovk av wovto, ttoXXco Btj /jloX- 
\ov en. 

Ibid., VII. 

(c) 'Ett* S' ohv Tot9 'qyyeXfievoi'i ol 'Adrjvaioi vav<i t€ 
€iKO(riv ofiai<} eirKrjpovi', Kal cKKXriaiav ^vveXeyou, 
p,iap >j,€V eh6v<i Tore irp&Tov e? ttjv IlvKva KaXovfieptjv, 
oinrep Kal aXXore eUadecrav^ ev fjirep Kal tov<{ rerpa- 
Koaiov^ KaTairavaavTe^ Tots 7revraKiayiXioi<! eylnj<f)i- 
aavTO ra Trpdyfiara irapaBovvav eXvat, Be avTmv 
oTTotToi Kal oirXa 7rapex"VTaf Kal fiiadov /irjBeva 
<j)epeiv firjBefiia hpyrj, el Be fit), eirdparov eiroiijaavTo' 
eylvovro Be Kal aXXac varepov irvKval eKKXrja-lac, d<j) 
&v Kal vofio6eTa<i Kal raXXa ei^^iaavro e? tj)j/ 
iroXcTeiav. koi ovy 7]xt<TTa Brj rbv irpcoTOV yjpovov 
eiri ye ifiov ^A07]vacot <})aivovTai eC TroXtTeuo-ai/TC?' 
fierpia yap rj re e<? tou? oXiyov^ Kal tou? ttoXXov^ 
^vyKpaaii eyeveTO, Kal eK TTOvijpcov t&u irpayp-drotv 
yevofiev(ov tovto irpoiTov dvijveyKe ttjv ttoXcv. 

Ibid., VIII. 






I 




mnibtxnita ot SToronta* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GREEK. 

TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: W^illiam Dale, M.A. 



t) 



(a) Mey larrjv 8e fioi hoKel 8ia(f)opav e^eiu to 'P(ofiaio)P 
troXiTCUfia tt/oo? to ^eXriov, iv ttj irepl 6e5)V hioKri-^ei. 
Kai fiot BoxeiTO irapa rot? aWot? avOpdmoK oveiBi^o- 
fitevoVi TovTo <Tvvk)(eiv --a 'Vcdiiaiwv Trpdyfiara, \erjf(o 
he Tr)u Sei<Ti8aifxoviav. eVi toctovtov yhp CKTerpay^ 
SrjTai Kal irapeKTrjKTai tovto to fi€po<i Trap' avToU 
€t« re Tou? KUT IBiav ^iov<; Kal tu KOiva Trjv 7ro\€«i)9, 
&(TTe fif) KaToXiTreiv virep/SoX^v. & Kal So^eiep &v 
•troWoh elvai Oavfidffiop. ifioi ye fifjv SoKovtrt tov 
TrXij^of? yo-piv TOVTO TreTTotijKevai. Ei fiev ycip fjv 
<TO<f)&p (tvopSiv TToXirevfjLa avvayayeiv, tcro)? obBiv ^v 
UziayKaini; 6 ToiovTO<i TpoTroi. eVcl 8e irav TrKrjdo^ iarTiv 
e\a<f)p6v Kai 7r\r]pe<i eindvfimv irapavofitov, 6pyf]<i 
aXoyov, Ovfiov 0taiov X^tTreTot, TOt<? dS^XoK t^o^oK 
Kal T^ TOtavTTj TpaycpBia Td, irX-qdij avvk'^dv. AtOTrep 
04 TraXaiol SoKOvai fioi ra? Trepi de&v evvoia<;, Kal rct^ 
virep T&v iv oBov SiaX'^yJrei'i ovk eiKfj, Kal a)<; €TV)(ev, 
eU TO, 7r\i]dT) irapeiaayayeiv ttoXv he fidWov ol vvu 
eiKfi Koi akoya'i eK^oKXeiv avTa. Toiyapovv ;^a)/3*9 
Ttav aXXfov, ol to, Kotva '^^eipi^ovTa, irapk fikv Tol'i 
"EWt^o-jj/, eav toXuvtov fiovov irKTTevOioai.v, ainc- 
ypa^el<! evorTee heKa, koi c(f)payiha<i ToaauTa^y Kai 
fidpTvpa<i onrXaaiovfi. ov hvvavrai Tr/peiu ttjv iriaTtv 
frapa he 'Fiofiaioiq, KaTo, re ra? dp-)(a<i Kal Tr/aeff/Se/av 
ttqXv Tt 7r\^^09 ')0}riiJi,a.T(av 'xeipi^omei, hi avTfjf Trj<i 



I 

1 



, I 



KOTCl 70V OpKOV TTtfTTetOV TTjpoOdl TO Kad/JKOV. ICal 

iraph fikv Tot? aWoi<i (TirdvLov eajiv eupeiv aireyo- 
fievov avhpa rwi^ hr}p,o(Ti(ov, icaX KaOapevovra Trept 
raVra' irapa Be toU 'Pwua/o/.? cirdviov eaTi to 
\afieiu Tiva ira^Mpap.evov eVt ToiavTj] irpd^ei. 

{b) AN. X6'7', a) TaXaiTrMp" , avro'i (ov XP^''? """"P^*- 
TO. TTcWa <ydp rot pi]fiar t] Ttpx/rai/To Tt, 
rj hvo'^epdvavT , r] KaTOiKriaavrd 7ra)9, 
Trapia'^e t^tovi^v toU a</)ft)i'r)Tot? ripd. 
no. aW €^ep&' Ka\&<; yap e^ijyet ov fioi' 
•wpSnov fiev abrou top 6e6u ttoiovucvos 
dptoyov, evdev /la' wS' dveaiijaev fioXelu 
6 TrjaSe tjJv yrjf; Koipavo<i, 8iBov<i e/jiot 
iJ'^ai T aKofjai t da(f)a\f:i ^vv e^nSy. 
/cat Tuvr d(f)' iz/i-oir, w ^evot^ ^ovX^^crofiai 
Kill TaivB' dBeX^uii' Kal irarpoi trvpeiv efiol, 
h 8' ^\6ov ijBrj fTOi deXtii Xe^ai., irdrep. 
yr)<{ ex iraTpeoaf e^eXi'jXa/jiai, (f>vya<i, 
TOt? o"ot? 'iravdp-)(oi<; ovveK evdaKelv Opovois 
yovfi •net^vKUi'i 7)^ low yepauepq,' 
ui>6' &v fi 'Ereo/fXT/v, Oiv ^vaei vecorepo'i, 
yrjt i^eaiaei', oi/re, viKi)aa>i \6ym 
ovT eiV e\t7;^o^ ^eipos' ovS" epyov fioXiou, 
TToXiv he ireiaafs. S)v iyco fidXicrja fiev 
Tt]i> cri}v '\Lpivvv alriav elvai, Xeyco' 
eireiTa kutto fidvTecov ravrrf kXvmv. 
iirei yap yXOou "Apyo<; eV to ^.vpiKov, 
'Xa^a)v"ABpaaTov irevdepov, ^uva>p.6ja^ 
eaTqa e/jLuvrrf 77)9 oaonrep 'A^/a? 
•nponoi KaXovurai Kul rerip,r)vrai Bopei, 
0770)9 TOP e7nrdXoy)(pu if 0»))Sa9 o-toXov 
^vv Tolas' dyeipa^ tj ddvotfii •navBUui'i 
fj TOVf TuB' eKTrpd^avTa<i eKfidXoi/J.t 7779. 
elev. TV BrJTa vvv d<^i,yixevo<i KVpto ; 
ffoi TrpoaTpoTraLovi, w "rrarep, \iTa9 ej((i)v, 
ai/TOf T ifiavrov ^Vfi/xd^wv re tmv ifiSiv, 
o'l vvv ^vv eTTTa rd^eat ^vv kind re 
Xo7;^at9 to 0jJ/3j?9 ireBlov afK^earaai, irav 

(c) To B^ Bi) fiera tovto, co? eocKS, ireipM/xeOa ^r)Teiv 
T€ Kul (iTToBeiKvi/vai, t/ TTOTe vvv KaKtof ev Tat9 tto- 
Xeat TrpaTTeTai, Bt o ov-^ ovTCot oiKovvTai, icai t/j/09 
&v apticpOTaTov fieTa^aXovTOf eXOoi ek tovtov top 
rpoirov T»)9 •7roXtTeia9 7roXt9, fidXiara fiiv evot, el Be 



h 



h 






/A?7, Bvolv, ei S^ fiT], S Ti oKiyiarotv tov dptdfiov Kal 
afiiKpoTaTtoif ri}V Svvafiiv. WavTUTraai fidu oii>, i<^r}. 
'^Sivot fitv Toivvv, Tj}^ B" iydit nera^aKovro't BoKOVfieu 
fiot, tvecv Be7^ai on fieTaneaoi av, ob fiev toi afiiKpov 
ye ovBi paBiov. Bvvarov Be' Tivot ; e<f>t}. 'Ett' avTO 8;;, 
ijv B' eym, elfii, h tw fier/iar^ Trpoeiicd^ofieu KVfxari' 
elprfasTai B ol>v, ei, Kui fteXXei yekoirl re arep^fo)? 
&(r7rep KVfta iKyeXuv xal aBo^itt KaraKXvaeiv. trKOirei 
Be h fieWn Xeyeiv. \eye, e<f)r}. 'Eoi> /u.i;, ^i> S' iym, 
^ 01 ^iX6ao(j>oi. ^aaiXevatoatv iu raiv 7r6Xe<Tiv ^ oi 
^aaiXeK re vvv Xeyofievoi Kal Bvvaarai <f)i,Xo<ro<f)tj- 
cutcri yvrjtfiti)^ re Kai Ixavw ical rovro ck raviov 
^VfiTretTj), Evuap.i^ re TroXiTtKr) Kal (f>iXo(Tod>ia, rtov 
Bi vvv TTopevofieutov ;^a)pU €(f> eKurepov at TroXXal 
(fivaei^ e^ dvdyK7}<i hTroKXei<T0a>atv, ovk e<TTi KoucStv 
•navXa, St ^iXe TXavKtov, rai; iroXeai, BoKUt 8* ovBk 
T&' cuf0p(o'irivfp yevet, oifhe avrt) t) TToXneia fjuij irore 
irpoTepov (fivfj re elt to Bvpotov koi (^gJ? ^XIov iBrj, 
■^v vvv Xoytp BieXr)Xv6an€v. hX\d tovto eartv, S 
e/iot TTuXai oKvov evTiGrjai Xeyeiv^ optavri ok iroXv 
TTopa So^av prj^tjaeTai' ^aXeTToi^ yap IBeiv, on ovk 
&i' aAXr) Tt? evBaifMov^aeiev ovre IBia ovre Brjfioaia. 
Kal o<i, ^12 S«t)«paTe<r, €(}>r], toiovtov eK0€l3XriKa<i pfjfi'i 
re Kal Xoyov, ov elirojv rjyov eTrl ae irdw 7ro>-\ou<f ts 
Kai ou (f)auXovi vvv outwv' olov pi-\fravTa<: rd iftdria 
yvfivov^;, Xa^6vTa<; o n eKoxnto irapervyev oirXov, Oelv 
BiareTa u,evov^ a>9 davfxdaia epyaaofjiivov:' oixi ei fjui) 
dfivvei ',& Xoyrp Kal iK<f>ev^et,, toi qvti rmda^ofiepo^ 
BatacK liKTjv. 



^ 



Sln(\iet*0ftff of (Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATTONS. 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR W.A. 



QiWM HISTORY AND HISTORIANS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. ('. R* ujeuthon, B.A. 



XoTi:. Not niorcnliaii tlii'cc (|uoHli()HH in miy Bootion nuiHl 1>c iit- 
toiii|»1(Ml niilcM.'t Lliruf ijiucrttioiiH in ciicli liuvi' previously 
licfii im>\M'io(l. 

I. 

1. What was the hiw of Syi-iico.siu.s ? Stato its 
cniiscs and results. 

w. Skotcli tho history of party strnf,'glos in Athens 
(liuinti;' the Poioponnesian war. 

'). Tlit'ophrnstus roprosnnts thv Oligarch as saying 
Tov ^rjaia Trpcorav rSw KaKbiv ifj iroXei yeyovevai alriov. 
Explain, and illustrato by the policy of the oligarchs 
in other parts of Greece. 

4. (Jontrast the aspirations of the tliree democratic 
leaders, Thoniistocles, Pericles, and Cleon. Examine 
tlie statement that Pericles' policy was largely to blame 
for the snbsefpient degeneration of tho Athenian state. 

."). " The peace of Philocrates was not only a turning- 
point in AthenifMi history, but also a natural climax 
to the events of the previous tliirteen years." Explain 
these staten»ents. 

(J. What influence had the Persian wars on {a) the 
cause of Pan-Hellenic union, (/>) the development of 
Athens ? 

7. Trace the causes, the leiisons for the failure, and 
the results of the Sicilian expedition, 



i ! 



n. 

8. " To strip tlu! oinclcs from IIcioiIoIiih' lilstory 
would lit' to tlfprivf it d" il > ilccpcst luiity ninl its 
most c'luiiactcriHtic clmrm." iv\[>Iiiin luwl illustrj\t<?. 

i). What is thf attitude 1)1' the (Jmok mind fcowanls 
fucfc !* Illiistn»t(! t'l-om Jl('V(»dotiis and TluicydideH. 

10. " As a lilstoriati, HcvodotUH fulls (;l)i('lly l>y in- 
attriitioii or insensibility to political caiiM! and etlcct." 
lliuKLrato. 

11. Contrast the conceptions of History cntertalnt'd 
hy Herodotus and by Tliucydides. In what respects is 
Herodotus nearer than Tliucydides to the modern 
conception ? 

Iti. Analy/e any one of the Foliowiiiji; speeches : 
Nicins' tirst speech on the Sicilian expedition ; H<^r- 
mocrates' speech at Camarina; Pericles' Funeral Ora- 
tion : the speech of the Corcyraeaii envoys ; Alcibiatles' 
speech on the Sicilian expedition. 

ly. Skoteli the psycholofjy of Tliucydides. 

III. 

14. What was tlie effect of shivoiy on Athenian life ? 

1.5. What inferences may ije drawn from the names 
j.jiven to the (Jreeks by llomer, ll^rodotU'^, and the 
Romans ? 

10. "Such a chai'aoter as Aspasia was out of jtlace 
in a Gieek community." Examine this statiMnent. 

17. "The incn]'abl(> jiassiou for smiill jiiitonomous 
states, ceaselessly antM^onistii; with each other, wliicli 
is the most striking' (iliaracteristic in Greek poliiical 
life." illustrate from dilfcrent periods of (Jreek history. 
Wliat were the results of this policy for Greece itself 
and for posterity ? 

18. Sketch the political life, and estimate the influ- 
ence, of (iiiy I'H'o of tlio followinn' : Themist('cle^, Solon, 
Miltiades, JJemosthenes, Clvon, Pericles, Aristides 

19. " The law of trea.son neither could nor ought to 
be enforced iigainst an Jict which was an error of jude-. 
nient, not of intention." What was the Atheninn 
practice in this respect, and what were it., results :" 

20. Compare the position of an Athenian citizen in 
the tim(^ of Pericles with that of a Ciiniidian citizen of 
t(f-day in respect to political power, pul>lic office, liability 
to taxation, and the fraudng and administration of the 
laws. 



'J 



<:;> 



TV. 

21. Trace tl>i' ili'velopincnt of ilic ClrtM'k doctriru' of 
XciiicHis From FltniuT down to Kuripidif.s, Ilow vviis it 
indiiciicud l>y tlic ovciits of (In'ok hi.ston ? 

22. " As wo roiul such linos as those : 

' Whnt little town '>y river or scn-shoi-i', 
Or nioiuit.'iin-biiilt with pciicrftd ciladel, 
fs otnptiod of its folk, thi.< pious morn V 

or these* f)n the jiinhtin<,'a!e*s noutr • 

' JVrhups th(! self-.samo sonji,' tliat I'oiind u path 
Thi'ouffh tho sad heart of fintl), when, sick for 
honii', 
She stood in tears amid the alien corn ; ' 

we ask, Whaj (Inished (Jreek scholar has ever so vividly 
recalled the nwiinier of the Greeks '" What is your 
conce|)tion of ' the manner of the dreeks,' which Keats 
in these lines is said to have reproduced !* 

23. Sketch the history of the relation bei^ween 
morality and relitjion among tho Greek.s. 

24. Under tlio three heads of (a,) nature and treat- 
ment (»f ])lot, (/>) d(!velopment of character, [c) concep- 
tion of tho purpose of the drama, show the diHbrenco 
between tlio drama of Aeschylus and Sophocles and 
tho dranui of Shakespeare. Show how the peculiar 
orif^in of tho Athenian drama limited its range, and 
estimate the artistic; gain und loss involved. 

25. Quintilian says, " Beauty belongs to countries 
that lie besiile the sea, level and pleasant." Was this 
the (irook view, judging from tlieii" literature ? In 
what respects did the Greeks not .share in 'the modern 
feeling for nature', awd the modern attitude to .scenes 
of historical oi- biograpliical interest ? 

20. Compare tho theology and view of life of the 
three groat Tragic poets. Of which of them may it 
most tiuly be .said that it was his .•lim to ' ju.stify the 
wavs of (lod to men' i 




IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 









'^^^% 







< < 







1.0 ^tm^ 

s U£ liii ■2.2 
'^ Ml ... Kb 



I.I 



£ lii 12.0 

u 

■luu 



1125 IIIIU 11.6 




Photographic 

Sciences 

Gorpraation 










<^ 



*♦** 

' V 







'•3 WEST MAIN STREfT 

iVEBSTER,N.Y. MStO 

(716)t72-4S03 



■^ 






i 



.^ 



c 



^ 



in 



2iin(tieti»ft|? of Corontd. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: William Dale, M.A. 



XoTK.— Voii iue ic(iiiestc(l not to attempt more than ten questions. 

1. Translate and explain : 

Alio -yap iofiv a tic «v airoSoit} Swicpartt SiKaiwc, 
Tnvg T tTraKTtKouc Xoyouc Km to oplZEadai kuOoXov. 
ravra ydo iariv afKJKO Tripi apxTjv tTTttxr/jjUijc* aXX' 
6 nh> SwKparijf ra KadoXov ov xiopiara tKolti oiidl 
Tovg 6pt(T/<owc. o'l S' i\iopi(Tav (sc. the Platonists) 
Ka\ ra Toiavrn tmv ovrtov l^iag 'Trpoattyopivaav. 

Aristotle, Metai->k., M. 

2. Discuss tlio ailequacy of the Apology as a defence 
(jf Socrates. What do you take to have been the real 
grounds of condeuniation ? Give reasons. 

Interpret (a) ta-i rig iiwKportje, aoipftq nvrjp, 
T« Tt f.iiTHopa ippovTtrrTi)(: Koi ra vvb yi)g av£^r!T»}ica>"S" kui 
T<n> i'lTTCO Xoyuv KpiiTTio TToitov. (li) SwKparj} (fni}a\v 
a()iKi'iv Tovq Ti viovg dia(j)9kpovTa Ka\ deoiig ovg i] iroXig 
\'Of.d^u oi» vofiiZovril, enpa St Sa/juovta Katva. 

What traces of the real Socrates do we find in 
tlie Reinihlic ' 

3. What was the problem of philosophy which Plato 
set himself to solve ? 

What does Plato mean by lUa ? What by tSm 
roi) ayaBov ? 

What arc Aristotle's objections to Plato's theory 
of ideas ? Are the objections valid ? 

Explain ») oi>8' aWo ovQiv (sc. rayadhv) trXiiv Tr\g 
tcfas' / woTf fHiTainv tarai to licog. 



4, Describe the higher education of the gnardian.s. 
What is the nature and object of dialectic? What 
cautions are to be used in .selecting those who aie to 
pursue this study? Why? What similar limitation 
do we find in the Ethicsl Would either Aristotle or 
Plato have recommended astudent to pursue exclusively 
the study of philosophy in the University ? Why ? 

Explain 6 fiiv yap avvoiTTiKbg ^laXeKTiKog. 

6. Show what influence political events had on 
Greek philosophy, illustrating your remarks by refer- 
ence (a) to Platonism, (6) to Stoicism. 

6. What resemblances do we find (a) in the Ethics 
and the Re2)uhlic, {b) in the Ethics and the Republic 
on the one hand, and Stoicism on the other ? 

7. Describe after Plato («) the origin of tyranny ; 
(b) the tyrant. Is the description historically true of 
Greece ? Why does he dwell at such length on this 
subject ? 

8. " Let who will make the laws of a Ttation, only 
let me make its songs." Compare and contrast this 
sentiment with Plato's theory. What are Plato's 
objections to poetry ? To what extent are they true ? 
What do you conceive to be the true theory of art ? 
One critic denounces modern Art as "a rebus," anothei- 
as "petty or vile:" would Plato have condemned it for 
any, or for all, of these reasons ? 

9. State and explain Aristotle's doctrine of the 
mean as an explanation of apsri). What do we learn 
from the Ethics of Aristotle's Ethical method ? Con- 
trast briefly Plato's ^iXoao^ia with Aristotle's Octopta. 

10. " No philosophy ever attempted to be more prac- 
tical (in the best sense of the word) than Platonism." 
Explain this. To what extent is Plato on historical 
ground in the Re^Jublic ? 

11. Exjjlain after Aristotle <pvatKi) aptrt), 'i^ig, opOog 
Xo-yoC) vpoalpeaig, to KaXof, (ftpovticriQy I'lEovti, rit TtAof, 
fitya\oipv\ia, \vtpjtia ^pv^iilq. 

12. Give Aristotle's criticisms on the Spartan form 
of Government, and examine his objections to Plato's 
communism. 

13. What contributions were made to the science of 
Ethics by the Stoics ? Show how Stoicism became the 
connecting link between paganism and Christianity. 
Explain the Stoic conception of natiira. 



I 



\^ 



I 



14. "Stoicism is the most .self-contradictory of all 
ancient systems of philosophy." Explain this. 

15. Translate and explain : 

(a) 17 iToXiQ — yivofiivn nlv ovv tov Z,i]v tVfKti', 
ovaa S? TOV tv ^r\v. 

(J)) rCov ^vau 1) iroXig tor/, icai o avO^HOTTot: rfivau 
iroXiTiKov ^<i»ov i(tt(. 

(c) 6 -/«(> liov\iv6fi£VOf; toiKi ^rfTfji' (cat avaXviiv 
TOV elpiifiivov Tpovov llairep SidyQUfifia' km to ta-)^aTmi 
iv Ttj (tvaXv<TH irp<i)Tov tivai tv ry yevtan. 

(d) ^i}\ov yap on twv yt Svvdfiewv oi/K tnriv (sc. 
ri tvSaifiovla). 

(e) apiTT] Se itSiairoTOV, rjv TifiCov Ka\ arifid^ufv 
nXiov Koi sXoTTov aiiTtit; tKaarog t^ei* aWta tXofxivov' 
Oebg avaiTiog' 

16. Point out the causes which contiibuted to the 
rise of the Post-Aristotelian systems of philosophy. 
What are the common features of those systems? 
Explain the philosophical position of Cicero. What is 
the meaning of : " Opinionis coTnmenta delet dies, 
natura indicia conjirmat." 

17. Translate and explain : 

(a) Quaestio de natura deorum, quae et ad 
agnitionem animi indcherrima est, ct ad moderandum 
religionem necessaria, 

(6) Haec in philosophia ratio contra ouiuia 
disaerendi nullamque rem aperte iudicandi proj'ecta 
a Soerate, repetita ab Arce,jila, conjirmata a. Carneadc 
usque ad nostram viguit aetatem. 

(c) Antlocho enim Stoici cum Peripateticis re 
concinere videntiir, verbis discrepare. 

(d) Et cum, quattuor genera slnt corporum, 
vicissitudine eorum, mundi continuata natura est. 

(e) Magnam molestiam, suscepit et minime nc- 
ccssariam primus Zeno, post Gleanthes, deinde Gliry- 
sippus, commenticiarumfabularum reddere rationem, 
vocabidoi'um, cur quidque ita appeUatum sit, causas 
explicare. 



SAnftierfiffti^ of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ROMAN HISTORY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: William Dale, M.A. 



Note. — Any Jour questions may be omitted. 

1. Translate : 

Filium eius Paalli, q\d ad Gannas, quam ter- 

giversanter perniciosatn reipublicae purjnam, inierat, 

tarn fovtitev in ea mortem ohUiraf. Give an account 

^of the Paullus here described and explain from Livy 

the meaning of ter (fiver Hauler . 

2. Translate with explanatory notes : 

(a) Nomiinatae iain antea eonsidibus provinciae 
erant ; turtx sortiri iussi. 

(b) Kegat consilii rem esse Scipio invenis, f alalia 
dux hiiiusce belli. " Audendum atque agendum, non 
consultdndum" ait " in tanto malo esse." 

(c) Senatus ex equestri ordine post pugnam 
Cannensem suppletus est. (Narrate the circumstan- 
ces of this lectio in detail), 

3. (a) Give an account of the financial difficulties 
of Rome during the early years of the 2nd Punic War, 
so far as can be gathered from Livy's narrative. 

(6) What are the difficulties in determining the 
ex act route of Hannibal's passage over the Alps ? 

4. Translate: 

Remote Carthaginia metu auhlataque imperii 
aemula, non gradu, sed praecipiti cursu, a viHute 
descitum, ad vitia tranacuraum ; vetua diaciplina 
deaerta, nova inducta : in aomnum a vigiliia, ab armia 



ad vnluptatrn, a ni(]oili» in otinm covi'crsa civHan 
Would yon accept Uuh as a trtio account of the cause, 
and the progress of the Roman Revolution? Give 
reasons for your answer, and support your reasons by 
adducing facts and dates. 

5. Describe clearly the political position at Rome 
during the years B. C. 04 and 60 : treating the ques- 
tion under the following heads : (1) The governing 

{>arty; (2) Pompeius; (3) Caesar; (4) Cicero; (5) Cati- 
ina; (6) Crassus. 

6. Translate : 

Horum XVI. annorum opera quis, cum universa 
obver.sontur oculis animis(jue omnium, partibus 
eloquatur ? Sacrnvit parentein suum Caesar non 
imperiojSed religione: non appellavit[eum].sed fecit 
Denm. Revocata in forum fides, sunnnota e foro 
seditio, ambitio campo, discordia curia; sepultaeque 
ac situ obsitae iustitia, aenuitas, industria civitati 
redditae ; nccessit magistratibus auctoritas, Sena- 
tui uiaiestas, iudiciis gravitas ; compressa theatra- 
lis seditio ; recte faciemli omnilms aut incussa 
voluntas, iniposita necessitas. Honorantur recta, 
prava puniuntur. Suspicit potentein humilis, noi^ 
timet. Antecedit, non contemnit, humiliorem po- 
tens. Quando annona nioderatior ? Quando pax 
laetior ? Diffusa in Orientis Occidentisquc trac- 
tus, et quidqnid meridiano aut septentrione tinitur, 
Pax Augusta per (omnia) onines terrarum orbis 
angulos a latrociniorum nietu servat immuncs. 
Foi'tuita non civium tantummodo, sed urbium 
damna Principis muniticentia vindicat. Restitu- 
tae urbes Asiae. Vindicatae ab iniuriis magistia- 
tuum provlnciae. Honor dignis paratissimus. 
Poena in malos sera, sed aliqua. Superatur ac- 
quitate gratia, ambitio virtute. Nam facere recte 
cives suos Princeps optiraus fauiendo docet ; cura- 
que sit imperio maximus, exempio maior est. 

Velleuis, II., c. 126. 

Compare this account of the the reign of Tiber- 
ius with the conception you have formed of that reign 
from the narrative of Tacitus. 

7. Refer to particular facts and circumstances in 
Tacitus, in ordei* to substantiate or explain or disprove 
the assertions in this pa-tsage from Velleius. 



8. Give an account of the various sources of public 
revenue during the reigns of Augustus and Tiberius, 
and explain the mode of collection. 

9. Give some account of JiLuiua Blnesus, Salluatius 
Criapu8, Tacfarina8,Lutoriu8 Pritcua, Caaaiua Severua, 
Flancina. 

10. Translate and explain : 

(a) Auguatua cuncta diaoordiia civilAua feaaa 
nomine principia sub impf.i\uin aocepit. 

(b) Moderante Tiberio ne plurea quam quattuor 
candidatoa commendaret, aine repulaa et ambitu deaig- 
nandoa. 

(c) Denia in diem aaaibua animam et corpus 
aeatimari ; hinc veatem, arma, tentoria, hinc aaevitiam 
centiirionum et vacationea munerum redimi. 

(d) Labeoni, quod praeturam intra atetit, com- 
mendatio ex injuria. 

(e) Hinc Gracchi et Saturnini, twbatorea plebia, 
nee minor largitor nomine aenatua Druaua. 

11. State as clearly as possible the advantages and 
disadvantages respectively that accrued from the estab- 
lishment of the Empire. 



1 



Cftnf Her nets of Toronto* 



ANNUAL KXAMIXAT10N8: 1891. 



FOURTH YKAR. 



LATIN. 



Examiner : William Dale, M.A. 



Note. — (1) No Candidate will pass who omits the questions on 
parsing and syntax ; in explaining tlie syntax of verbs 
explain always the reason tor the mood. 
(2) Candidates are warned against confininK tiieir attention 
to eitlier one of tlic two authors pre8crU)od. 

1. Translate carefully : 

(a) Lsdem consulibus atrox odii Agrippina ac Lolliae 
infen.sa, quod .secum de matrimonio principia cer- 
tavisset, molitur crimina otaccusatorem, qui obice- 
ret Chaldaeos, tnagos, iiiterrogatumque ApoUinis 
Clarii simulacrum super nuptiisimperatoris. exim 
Claudius inaudita rea multa de claritudine eius 
apud senatum praefatus, sorore L. Volusii genitam, 
maiorem ei patruum Cottara Messalinum esse, 
Memmio quondam Regulo nuptam (nam de Gai 
Caesaris nuptiis consulto reticebat), addidit perni- 
ciosa in rem publicam consilia et materiem sceleri 
detrahendam: proin publicatis bonis cederet Italia, 
ita quinquagiens sestertium ex opibus immensis 
exuli relictum. et Calpurnia inlustris femina 
pervertitur, quia formam eius laudeverat princeps, 
nulla libidine, sed fortuito sermone, unde ira 
Agrippinae citra ultima stetit. in Lolliam mitti- 
tur tribunus, a quo ad mortem adigeretur. 

{h) Qtiindecim dierum alimenta urbi, non amplius, 
superfuisse constitit, magnaque deum benignitate 
et modestia hiemis rebus extremis subventum. at 
hercule olini Italia legionibus longinquas in pro- 
vincias commeatus pcA'tabat, nee nunc infecundi- 



tato laltomtnr. h»m1 Africam notins («t A«'{,'y|ttum 
exorccniiuH, iiiivil)ii.s(nu' ct casions vita populi Uo- 
inani peniilssa o.st. 

Tacituh, Annals XII. 

2. Parse an<l oxplain the syntax of: 

((t) Odd, cciidviHHH, ohicfiveJ, inffrrogatum, rea, 
f/enitam, eon»ulfn, c'dcret, qidnqiKUjlenn, HeHtertium, 
exuli, ultima, n<llgeretur. 

(b) Oonstltit, rebus, Hubuentiun, navlbus. 

IMJNY. 

1. (a) Translate witb explanatory notes : 

Oblitine smnus ut nuper f)ost adoptionem non 
desierit seditio, sed cooperit ? Inritamentum istud 
irannn et fax tuinnltus fuisset, nisi incidisset in 
te. An dubium est nt dare posset imperium 
imperator qui reverentiarn aniiscrat, auctoritate 
eius ofFectum cui dabatur ? 

Pliny, Panegyricua, VIII. 

Adoptionem. Explain the meaning in this con- 
nection. 

(6) Translate : 

Memoranda facies ! delatorum classis permissa 
omnibus ventis coactaque vela tompestitibus 
pandere iratosque fiuctus sequi, quoscumque in 
scopulos detulissent. luvabat prospectare statim 
a portu sparsa navigla et apud illud ipsum mare 
apere principi gratias, qui dementia sua salva 
ultionem hominum tci'rarumque diis maris com- 
mondasset. Quantum diversitas temporum posset 
tum maxime cognitum est, cum iisdem quibus 
antea cautibus innocentissimus quisque nunc 
nocentissimus affigeretur. 

lb., chap. XXXV. 

Delatorum * * ventis ; explain the meaning* 

(c) Translate: 

Cepisti tamen et adfectus nostri et judicii 
expevimontum, quantum maximum praesens capere 
potuisti, ilio die quo sollicitudini pudorique candi- 
datorum ita consnluisti ne ullius gaudium alterius 
tristitia turbaret. Alii cum laetitia, alii cum spe 
recesserunt : multis gratulandum, nemo consolan- 
dus fuit. Nee ideo segnius iuvenes nostros 
exhortatus es, senatum circumirent, senatui sup- 




plicaront, atquo ita a principo sperarent honoren. 
si a Hcnatu putiHsent. Quo quidom in loco, si 
quibuH opus oxoinplo, adiecisti ut to itnitarentur. 

Ib.y chap. LXIX. 

2. Parse and explain the syntox of : 

(6) coada ; detulissent ; atatim ; dementia ; poa- 
aet ; commendaaael : iiadeni ; afigeretur. 

(c) pndori ; turharet ; multia ; gratulandum ; 
conaolandua fuit : quihua ; exemplo. 

3. Upon what occasion waa the Panegyrioua deli- 
vered ? To what extent does Trajan deserve the praises 
bestowed on him by Pliny ? 



I 



li -I 



rill 



Wlnay^tvuitp oi STovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



LATIN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. C. Kobertson, B.A. 



I. 

1. Translate : 

(rt) Nunc et campus et areae 

Lenesque sub noctein susurri 

Composita repetantur hora, 

Nunc et latentis proditor intimo 

Gratus puellae lisus ab angulo 

Pignusque dereptum lacertis 

Aut digito male pertiuaci. 

(h) Quo pinus ingens Hbaque populus 

Umbram hospitaiem consociare amant 
Ramis ? Quid obliquo laborat 
Lympha fugax trepidare rivo ? 
Hue vina et unguenta et nimium breves 
F'ores amoenae ferre jube rosae. 

(c) Nulla certior tamen 

Rapacis Orci fine destinata 
Aula divitem manet 

Herum. Quid ultra tendis ? iEqua telius 
Pauperi recluditur 

Regumque pueris, nee satelles Orci 
Callidum Promethea 
Revexit auro captus. 
{(1) Immunis aram si tetigit manus, 
Non sumptuosa blandior hostia 
MoUivit aversos Penates 

Farre pio et saliente mica. ' 



I'l 



9 



(c) Eripe te morae ; 

Ne semper lulum Tiber et iEsulae 
Declive contempleris arvum et 
Telegoni juga parricidae. 
Fastidiosara desere copiam et 
Molem propinquam nubibus ardnis; 
Omitte mlrari beatae 
Furaum et opes strepituinque Roma^, 
(/) Ego apis Matinae 

More modoque 
Grata carpentis thyma per laborem 
Plurimum circa nemus uvidique 
Tiburis ripas operosa parvus 

Carmina fingo. Horace, Odea. 

2. Translate, with a concise statement of the previous 
context of a and h : 

(a) Non ego, nobilium scriptonim auditor et ultor, 
Grammaticas ambire tribus et pulpita dignor : 
Hinc illve lacrimae. " Spissis indigna theatris 
Scripta pudet recitare et nugis addere pondus," 
Si dixi : " Rides," ait, "et Jovis auribus ista 
Servas ; fidis enim manare poetica mella 
Te solum, tibi pulcher." Ad haec ego naribus uti 
Formido, et luctantis acuto ne secer ungui, 
" Displicet iste locus," clamo, et diludia posco. 

(h) Caedimur et totidem plagis consumimus hostem 
Lento Samnites ad lumiua prima duello. 
Discedo Alcaeus puncto illius ; ille meo quis ? 
Quis nisi Callimachus ? Si plus apposcere visus. 
Fit Mimnermus, et optivo cogromine crescit. 

(c) Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur iambus, * 
Pes citus ; unde etiam trimetritt accrescere jussit 
Nomen iambeis, quum senos redderet ictus 
Primus ad extremumsimilis sibi. Non ita pridem, 
Tardior ut paullo graviorque veniret ad aures, 
Spondeos stabiles in jura paterna recepit 
Commodus et patiens, non ut de sede secunda 
Cederet aut quarta socialiter. 

Ibid., Epistles. 

3. Translate: 
(a) tandem haurire parat demissis flumina palmis 
innixus dextro plena trahens umero. 
cuius ut accensae Diyades candore puellae 
miratae solitos destituere choros, 



<-w- 11 



prolapsum leuiter facili traxere liquore : 

turn sonitum rapto corpore fecit Hylas. 
cui procul Alcides iterat responsa ; sed illi 
nomen ab extremis fontibus aura refert. 
his, o Galle, tuos raonitus servabis amores, 
formosura Nymphis credere tutus Hylam. 
Write a note on the difficulties in the last line. 
(h) causa peroratast. flentes me surgite, testes, 
dum pretium uitae grata rependit humus, 
moribus et caelum patuit : sim digna merendo, 
cuius honoratis ossa vehantur auis. 

Propeetius. 
causa, testes. Explain. 

4 Translate: 
(a) Phaselus ille, quem videtis, hospites. 
Ait fuisse navium celerrimus, 
I^eque ullius natantis impetum trabis 
Nequisse praeterire, sive palmulis 
Opus foret volare sive linteo. 
(h) Sed tamen in tantis maeroribus, Ortale, mitto 
Haec expressa tibi oarmina Battiadae, 
Ne tua dicta vagis nequiquara credita ventis 

Effluxisse meo forte putes animo, 
Ut missum sponsi furtivo munere malum 

Procurrit casto virginis e gremio, 
Quod miserae, oblitae moUi sub veste locatum, 

Dum adventu matris prosilit, excutitur, 
Atque illud prono praeceps agitur decursu, 
Huic manat tristi conscius ore rubor. 

Catullus. 

Battiadae. Explain. Ut missum sponsi, etc. 
Show the connection of this simile with the rest of the 
poem. 

II. 

1. This ode is not to be translated. 

Quid dedicatum poscit ApoUinem 
Yates ? quid orat de patera novum 
Fundens liquorem ? Non opiraae 
Sardiniae segetes feraces, 
Non aestuosae grata Calabriae 
Armenta.non aurumaut ebur Indicum, 
Non rura, quae Liris quieta 
Mordet aqua taciturnus amnis. 



mrrm^rmmmmsmmmm. 



i 






Premant Galena falce quibus dedit 
Fortuna vitera ; dives et aureis 
Mercator exsiccet culullis 
Vina Syra reparata merce, 
Dis carus ipsis, quippc tor et quater 
Anno revisens uequor A tlanticum 
Impune. Me pascunt olivae, 
Me cichorea lovosque nialvae. 
Frui paratis et valido mihi, 
Latoe, dones at precor integra 
Cum mente nee turpem senectam 
Degere nee cifchara carentem. 

(a) Give in two or three lines the main thought 
of the ode. 

(6) Show how each of the six sentences is con- 
nected with, and aids in developing, this main thought. 

(c) Show the poetic force or appropriateness of 
the following words, (i.e. how do they add definiteness 
or emphasis to the development of the leading thought 
of the ode): novum, opimae, grata, Galena, aureis, Syra, 
leves, turpem. 

(d) Indicate the words that gather special em- 
phasis from their position, and show tlie appropiatencss 
of this emphasis. 

2. Write an estimate of Horace, based upon what 
the Odes and Epistles reveal to us of him, as (a) a 
moralist, (b) a literary critic, (c) a courtier, 

3. Point out any illustrations you find in the extracts 
given for translation of the .special characteristics of 
the style of Horace, Propertius, or Catullus. 



!! I 



^1 li ! 



t: 



^nlitttuHii of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CAN DID AT KS FOR B.A. 



LATIN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J, G. Robertson, B.A. 



1. Translate : 

(a) Anna aniens capio ; nee sat rationis in arinis : 
Sed glomemre inaiiuni bello et concurrere inarcem 
Cum soeiis ardent animi. Furor iraque mentem 
PriBcipitant ; pulchrunique mori succurrit in armis. 

Ecce auteni tclis Panthus elapsus Achivum, 
Panthiis Othryades, arcis Plioebique sacerdos, 
Sacra niaiiu victosque deos parvumque nepotem 
Ipse trahit, cursuque amens ad limina tendit. 
' Quo res summa loco, Pantliu ? qiiam prendiraus 

arcem ? ' 
Vix ea fat<is cram, gemitu quum talia reddit : 
' Venit suniiria dies et inelnctabile tempus 
])nrdanife. Fiiimus Trees; fuit Ilium et ingens 
(Horia Tencroruni. Ferus omnia Jupiter Argos 
Transtulit' 

Virgil, Mneid II. 

{h) Incij)it etfari, mediaqne in voce resistit : 
Nunc eadeni, laVjente die, convivia qurerit, 
lliacosque iterum demens audire labores 
Exposcit, pendetque iterum narrantis ab ore. 
Post, ubi digressi, lumenque obscura vicissim 
Lima preuiit, suadentqiie cadentia sidera somnos, 
Sola domo moeret vacua, stratisque relictis 
Incubat : ilium absens absentem auditque videtque 
Aut greinio Ascaniuni, genitoris imagine capta, 
Detinet, infandum si fallei'e possit amorem. 

Ih, IV 



(c) Quo fessum rapitis, FaMi ? tn Mnxiimis \\]v cs, 
TJnus qtii nobis cunctando lestituis rem. 
Exciulent alii spirnntia molIinH jera. 

Credo equidu)!!, vivos ducciit de iimnnore vidtus; 
Orabunt eausas melius, co'liquoiiieatuH 
Describent radio, et singentia sidera dicent ; 
Tu regere imperio populos, Romane, niemento ; 
HcB tibi erunt artes : pacisque imponero nioreni, 
Parcere subjectis, et debellare supcrbos." 

IK\l 

(d) His demum exactis, perfecto munero diva*, 
Devenere locos Itietos, et anicena virccta 
Fortunatoruni nemonun, sedesque V>eatas. 
Largior liic carnpos jether et liunine vcstit 
Purpureo, solemque suum, sua sidera norunt. 

lb., VI. 

This last line, says Myers, ' touclies with a myste- 
rious t'orlornness the felicity of the underworld.' 
Explain how this effect is secured. 

(e) Quern fugis ? extremum fato quod te adloquor, 

hoc est. lb., VI. 

In Book IV., Dido asks ^neas, ' Mene fugis V What 
is the difference in meaninfif or effect ? 

2. Translate, with brief explanatory notes on the 
form, force or syntax of the italicised words : 

De. Hie ad me attinet, 

Quando ita u<jlt frater, de istoc ipse uidarit. 
Sed quis illic est quern uideo procul? ostne Heglo 
TrlbaUs noster ? Si satis eerno, is est hercle. uah, 
Homo amicus nobis iaiu inde a, 'paero I di boni, 
iVe illi modi iam magna nobis ciuiuni 
Penuriast antiqua uirtute ac tide. 
Haud cito mali qitid ortum ex hoc sit publice. 
Quam gaudeo ! nbi etiam huius generis veliquias 
Restare uideo, uiuero etiam nunc lubet. 
Opperiar hominem hie, ut salutem et conloquar. 
He. Pro di inunortales, facinus indignum, Geta I 
Quid 'iiarras ? Gk. Sic est factum. Hk. Exilian 

fiamilia 
Tam inliberale facinus esse ortum ? o Aeschin(% 
Pol haud paternum istuc dedisti. De. Videlicet 







■ : i 

i i : 


Lj 




iii 



Do psnltri.i Imc audinit, id illi Jinnf dolofc 
Alieno. Pntcr olus ?j /./*/// ])ontlit. oi milii, 
Ufcinam hie prope adcsset jilicubi at(ine aadirct 

Ikicc ! 
He. Nisi facient quae Uloa aequonist, baud sic 

aufcreiit. 
Ge. Si de.seris tu, periimuH. 11 K. Cnae dixeri». 
Neqtie f'aeiam nequo mo satis pie posse arbitror. 
De. Adibo. Sabieve Heijionein pbiriuiiuin 
Tiibeo. He, Ob.tequaerobarn ipsuin. Sabie Deniea! 
1)e. Quidantem? Hk. Maior Hlins <?<os Aescliinu.s, 
Queni fratri adoptnnduiri dedisti, neque boni 
Neque Vihcr aVifif uvctiin oltlciumst uiri. 

TiSHKNCE, Adelphi. 

Donatiis tells us that in the original by Menander 
Hegio's place is taken bj- a brother of Sostrata. What 
has Terence gained bv the change ? 

3. Translate, with brief explanatory notes, where 
necessary ; 

El^ Tibi ego rationem reddam, stiniulorumseges ? 
]lluc regredere ab ostio I illiic, sis. Vide, lit 
Incedit ! At scin' quomodo tibi res so ha bet ? 
Si hodie hwi-cle fiisteni cepcro aut stiinulum in 

nianum, 
Testudineum istum tibi ego grandiVjo gradnin. 
Sta. Utinain nie divi adaxint ad suspendiuni 
Potius qiiideni, (]uam hoe pacto ajmd to serviara ! 
Eu. At ut scelesta sola secuni niurniurat ! 
Oculos lierclc ego istos, improlia, ettbdiam tibi, 
Ne nio obsorvare possis, quiil i-eiuni gerani. 
Abscode ! etiam nunc ! etiam nunc ! etiam ! ohe, 
Istic adstato ! Si hercle tn ox istoc loco 
Digitum tnmsvorsum aut unguom latum excesseris 
Ant si respexis, donicum ego te iussei'o : 
Contitnio hercle ego te dedam discipulam cruci. 

Plautus, Aulularia. 



4. Translate, with brief explanatory notes where 
necessary : 

(d) Flic plaudat nitidi praeconis filins inter 

Pinnii api cultos juvones juvenesque Innistae. 
Sic libitum vano, qui nos distinxit, Othoni. 

[OVER.J 



(h) Caecus adulator, diruscjuc a ponto sntcMrs, 
Diguns Ariciiios «|ui njondicaiet ad nxes, 
i31anda<nie dovexae jaetan^t hasin, rhcdac 
Ncntu ina^n.s rliuinhiiin stiipuit : nam plMi-inia 

dixit 
In laevuni convursu.s : at illi doxtra jacebat 
Bollua. Sic pu<,'na!s C'ilicis laudabat ct ictuw, 
Et )>egnia et pneros indo ad volaria raptos. 

(c) Quid facias taleni sortituH, Pontics, survuni ? 
Nenipc in Lucanos aut Tusca ergastula niittas. 
At vos, Trojugenae, vobis ignoscitis, et quae 
Turpia Cerdoni, Volesos Brutumquti decebunt. 

(d) Arpinas alius Volscorum, in nionte solebat 
Posct've mercedes, alieno lassus aratro: 
Nodosajn post hacc t'rangebat vertice vitem. 

Juvenal, Satires III., IV., VIII. 

ir. 

1. " Such a character as that of yEneas is ill 
fitted to fill the leading role in a poein of action." 
Explain, and exannno how far this is due to Virgil's 
poodiar character and tastes. Is yEneas' character 
untrue to nature as well i' 

2. Illustrate from the satires read Juvenal's stan- 
dard of conduct, his tastes and his prejudices. 

3. " New Comedy is a mixture of Earnestness 
and Mirth." Show how the New Comedy, as .seen in 
the y)lays of Plautus and Terence, has equally close 
relations to Tragedy and the Old Comedy. What new 
elements did it depict ? How was the natui'e of the 
plot in the New Comedj' affected by its representation 
on the ?ame stage as Tragedy .and the Old Comedy ? 



SlniM(r«fl|^ oC srovonto« 



xVNNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOll B.A. 



LiVTIN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : William Dale, M.A. 



Translate : 

Non enim sumus ii, quibus nihil verum esse 
vifleatur, sed ii, qui omnibus veris falsa quaedam 
ndiuncta esse dicamus tanta similitudine, ut in 
lis nulla insit cevta iudieandi et adsentiendi nota. 
Ex quo exstitit illud, niulta esse probabilia, quae 
t[uaniquaui non percipeventur, tamen quia visum 
(luendam hal>erent insignem ct inlustrem, iis 
sfipientis vita regeretur. 

Cicero, de Natura Deorum, I. 

1. ii quihus ; ii qui What schools are 

meant. 

2 Write brief explanatory notes on nota, perciper' 
entur, viautn quendam. 

Translate : 

Videtisne igitur, ut a physicis rebus bene atque 
utiliter inventis tracta ratio sit ad commenticios 
et fictos decs ? quae res genuit falsas opiniones 
erroresque turbulentos et superstitiones paene 
jiniles. Et formae enim nobis deorum et aetates 
ct vestitus ornatusque noti sunt, genera praeterea, 
coniugia, cognationes omniaque traductaad sirnili- 
tudinem inbecillitatis humanae ; nam et perturba- 
tis animis inducuntur; accepimus enim deorum 
cupiditate.s, aegritudincs, iracundias ; nee vero, ut 
fabulae ferunt, bellis prbeliisque earuerunt, nee 
solum, ut apud Homerum, cum duo exercitus con- 



niiill 



IIP! 



trarios alii tlei ox alia parte defendeient si'd etiiuii, 
ut cum Titanis, tit cum Oii^nntibu.s, siui propria 
bolhi gesseruut. Haoc ct *licuiitur et cretlmitur 
Ntultissime et plena sunt futtilitatis Humma«'(|Uo 
levitatis. 

De Nat lira Deoram, II. 

1. Videtitine. . . .deos. Explain briefly. 

2. PerturbatiH animiB induountur. What is the 



meanincr. 



I I 






i ! ! t 



i ^!:i 



I ;i! ■' 

ill 



Translate : 

lam vero animum ipsum mentemquo hominis, 
rationem, consilium, prudentiam qui non divina 
cura peitecta esse pcrspicit, is his ipsis rebus mihi 
videtur carere. De quo dum disputarem, tuam 
mihi dari vellem, (.Jotta, eloquontiam. Quo enim 
tu ilia modo diceres ! quanta primum intellegentia, 
deinde consequentium rerum cum primis coniunc- 
tio et compi'ehensio essot in nobis ; ex quo videli- 
cet, quid ex quibusque rebus efficiatur, id(|ue 
ratione concludimus singulasque res definimus 
circumscripteque complectimur ; ex quo scientia 
intellegitur quam vim habeat qualisque sit, qua 
ne in deo quidem est res uUa praestantior. Quanta 
vero ilia sunt, quae vos Academici infirnuitis ot 
tollitis, quod et sensibus et anirao ea, quae extra 
sunt, percipiraus atqiie oonprendimus ! 

De Nat Deor., II. 

1. Expain consequentium rerum : ratione concludi- 
mus ; scientia. 

2. Ea, quae extra suht. What is the meaning ? 

Translate : 

Non animadvertunt, inquit, omnia di, ne reges 

quidem. Quid est simile ? Reges enim si scientes 

praetermittunt, magna culpa est ; at deo ne excu- 

satio quidem est inscientiae. Quern vos praeclar« 

defenditis, cinn dicitis earn vim deorum esse, ut, 

etiamsi quis morte poenas sceleris effugerit, expo- 

tantur eae poenae a liberis, a nepotibus, a. posteiis. 

miram aequitatem deorum ! Ferretne civitas 

ulla latorem istius modi logis, ut condemnaretur 

lilius aut nepos, si pater aut avus deli quisset ? 

Quinam Tantalidaruni internecioni modus 
Faretui- ? aut quaunam uinquain ub moiteiii Myrtili 
Poeniii lueiulis dabitiir aatiab supplici ? 



Uti'uin pootau Stoicos dcpnivarint, an Stoici poe- 
tis iluiluriut aiiotoritiitoin, non facilo dixcrini ; por- 
teiita ('niin al) utriscjuc ot Hagitia diciintur. 

IJe Nat. Dear. III. 

1. Explain the connection of thi« i)aHsago with tho 
general argument. 

2. Poen'hH Infiudis. What caHo. 

Translate : 

Ab Athensen.sibiiH, h)cntn sepulturae intra urbem 
ut darent, inipetraro non potui, quod religiono .so 
inipediri dicerent, noquo tainen id antca cuiquam 
concesserant : quod proximum fuit, uti in quo 
voIUmuus o'yiunasio euin sepeliromus, nobi.s permi- 
serunt. Nos in lobilissimo orbis terrarum gyni- 
nasio Acadomiae locum delegimus ibique euni 
conibussimus posteaque curavimus, ut eideni Athe- 
nienses in eodeni loco nionumontuni ei niarmoreum 
faciendum locarent. Ita, quae no.sti'a ofticia fue- 
runt pro collegio et pro propinquitate, et vivo et 
mortuo omnia ei pracstitimus. Vale. D. pr. Kal. 
luM. Athenis. 

CiCEUo, Kphi. ad Famil, IV, 

1. Diccrenf. Explain the mood 

2. Write a brief note explanatory of the extract. 

Translate with explanatory notes : 

Non numquam nece.ssitati, qxiae par.s ratiotiis 
est, parui. Egi enim quasdam a sonatu iussu.s, quo 
tamen in numero f uerunt ex illaThraseae divi.sione, 
hoc est ad exemplum perti-nentes. Adfui Baeticis 
contra Baebium Massam : quacsitum est an danda 
esset inquisitio ; data est. Adfui rursus isdeni que- 
rentibiis do Caecilio Olassico : quaesitum est an 
provincialos ut .socios ministrosque procon.sulis 
plecti oportcret; poenas luerunt. Accu.savi Murium 
Pri.scum, qui, lege repetundarum damnatns, uteba- 
tur dementia legLs, cuius soveritatem inmanitate 
eriminum exccsserat ; i-elegatus e.st. Tuitus sum 
lulium Hrtssum, utincustoditiim nimis etincautum 
ita miiiime malum ; iudicibus acceptis in senatu 
rciinansit. Dixi proxime pro Vareno, postulante ut 
sil>i invicom evocai't^ testes liceret; impetratum est. 
In posterum opto ut ea j)otissimum iubear quae me 
deceat vel sponte iecisse. Vale. 

Pi.iNY, Epist. VI. 



T 



I I 



I i 



I ^ . ! 



B: 



linMvnitti of s:oroiito. 



AN^MJAL KX AMI NATIONS: 1801. 



CANDIDATES B'Oll U.A. 



LATIN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : William Dale, M.A. 



1. Translate : 

(a) Con.sules deiiide Fabianis artibus, qmini debel- 
lar(3 poHHoiit, bellum traxisse : idtbeduH inter omnis 
nobiles ictiuu, nee linern ante belli habituroN qimui 
consulcni vero plebeiuni, id est hominem novum 
fecissent : nam plebeios nobiles jam eisdom ini- 
tiates esse sacris ot contemnere plebom, ex quo 
conteunii a patribus desierint, ooopisse : cui non 
id apj)arere, id actum et quaositum esfe ut inter- 
regnum inirtitur, ut in patrum potestate comitia 
essont ? id consulos ambos ad exercitum morando 
quaesissc, id postea, (piia invitis iis dictator esset 
dictus comitiorum causa, expugtiatum esse ut 
vitiosus dictator per au<j;uves fieret : babere igitur 
interroguum cos, consulatum unum eerte plebis 
Komanae esse: populum liberum babiturum ac 
tlaturum ei, qui magis vere vincere quam diu im- 
perare malit. 

lb. XXII., e. 34. 

Explain plebeioN nobiles ; eisclem .... sacria ; inter' 
regnum .... easent ; vitiosus dictator. 

(h) Primum eos citaverunt qui post Cannensem 
cladem agitasse de Italia deserenda dicebantur : 
princeps eorum L. Caecilius Metellus quaestor turn 
forte erat : jusso deinde eo caeterisque ejusdem 
noxae reis causam dieero, quum purgari nequissent, 
pronuntiarunt, verba orationemque eos adversus 



1 1 ..-"IT 



ii ^ 



\H 



rem publicam habuisse, quo conjnratio dcscremlae 
Italiae causa fiwet. Secundum eos citati nimi.s 
caliidi exsolvendi jurisjurandi interprete.s, qui cap- 
tivoium ex itinere regres,si clam in castra Hanni- 
balis solutuni, quod juraverunt redituros, robantur. 
His superioribusque illis equi adempti, qui publi- 
cum equum habebant. tribuque moti aerarii omnes 
facti. Neque senatu modo aut equestri ovdine 
regendo cura se censorum tenuit. 

lb. XXIV., c. 18. 

Explain jurisjurandi, publicuvi equum, aerarii. 

Parse aolutum. 

2. Translate : 

Sed postquam res eorum civibus, moribus, agris 
aucta, satis prospera satisque pollens videbatm*, 
sicuti plernque luortaliuni habeiitur, invidia ex 
opulentia orta est. Igitur regos populique fiuitumi 
bello tentare, pauci ex auiicis auxilio esse ; nam 
ceteri metu pevculsi a pbriculis aberant. At Ro- 
mani domi militiaeque intenti festinare, parare, 
alius alium liortari, hostibus obviam ire, libei tatein, 
patriam, parentesque armis tegere. Po.>t, ubi peri- 
cula virtute propulerant, sociis atque amicis auxilia 
portabant, magisque dandis quaui acoipiundis ben- 
eficiis amicitjas parabant. Impei-iura legitumum, 
nomen iinpevii regium habebant ; delecti, quibus 
corpus annis iniiruiuui, ingenium sapiontia vali- 
duui erat, reipublicae consultabant ; hi vel aeiate 
vel curae similitudine patres appellabantur. Post, 
ubi regium imperium, quod initio conservandae 
libertatis atque augendae reipublicae fucx'at, in 
superbiam douiinationemque se convortit, immu- 
tato more annui. .mperia binosque imperatoi'es sibi 
fecere ; eo modo minume posse putabant per Hcen- 
tiam insolescere animuin humanum. 

Sallust, Catilina, c. 6. 

Write brief comments on habentur, legitumum, iwi- 
l^eratores, licentiam, more inmutato. 

3. Translate : 

(a) Nomei: patris patriae Tiberius, a populo saepius 
ingestum, repudiavit; neque in acta sua iurari 
quamquam ceiisente senatu permisit, cuncta mor- 
talium incerta, quantoque plus adeptus foret, tanto 
86 magis in lubrico dictitans. uon tamen ideo 



fncicbat fidem civilis aniini ; nam legem maiestatis 
rerlnxerat, cui nomen apud veteres idem, sed alia 
in iudiciuiu veniebant.si quis proditione exercitura 
aut plebein seditionibus, denique male gesta re 
publica maiestatem populi Romani minuisset : 
facta arguebantur, dicta impune erant. 

Tacitus, Annals I., c. 72. 

Write brief comments on acta, civilis, veteres, Tnaiea- 
totem. 

(h) Ceterum Germanicus aliis quoqne miraculis 
intendit animum, quonim praecipua fuere Mem- 
nonis saxea effigies, ubi radiis solis iota est, voca- 
lem sonum reddens, disiectasque inter et vix per- 
vias arenas instar montium eductae pyramides 
certamine et opibus regum, lacusque eftbssa humo, 
superfluentis Nili receptacula; atque alibi angus- 
tiae et profunda altitudo. nullis inquirentium spa- 
tiis penetrabilis. exim ventum Elephantinen ac 
Syenen, claustra olim Romani imperii, quod nunc 
rubrum ad mare patescit. 

76., Annals II., c. 61. 

Write notes on Memnonis, eductae, instar, spatii^, 
nunc, 

(c) Sed praecipuus adstricti moris auctor Vespa- 
sianus fuit, antiquo ipse cultu victuque. obsequi- 
um inde in principem et aemulandi amor validior 
quam poena ex legibus et metus. nisi forte rebus 
cunctus i;iest quidam velut ox'bis, ut quern ad 
modum temporum vices, ita morum vertantur ; 
nee omnia apud priores meliora, sed nostra quoque 
aetas multa laudis et artium imitanda posteris 
tulit. verum haec nobi^ in maiores certamira ex 
honesto maneant. 

lb., Annals III, c. 56. 

Write brief comments on velut orbis, artiwm, verum, 
.... maneant. 



1 


WW 


1 


fill 


i 1 

' i 


'1 1 



1 iia ! 



I-; i! 

i 






ill 



Ihl' 



eAnfUernftv of Coronto< 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



LATIN. 

TRANSLATION AT SIGHT. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: J C. Robertson, B.A. 



1. Translate: 
(ft) Priinum ego me illorura, dederim quibus esse poetas, 
Excerpam nuniero : neque enim concludere vei-sum 
Dixeris esse satis ; neque si quis scribat uti nos 
Sermoni propriora, putes hunc esse poetam. 
Ingenium cui sit, cui mens divinior atque os 
Magna sonaturum, des nominis hujus honorem. 
Idcirco quidara, comoedia nccn3 poema 
Esset, quaesivere ; quod acer spiritus ac vis 
Nee verbis nee rebus inest, nisi quod pede certo 
Differ t seraioni, sermo merus. "At pater ardens 
Saevit, quod meretrice nepos insanus arnica 
Fili"s uxorem grandi cum dote recuset, 
Ebrius et, magnum quod dedecus, ambulet ante 
Noctem cum facibus." Numquid Fomponius istis 
Audiret leviora, pater si viveret ? Ergo 
Non satis est puris versum perscribere verbis. 
Quern si dissolvas, quivis stomachetur oodem 
Quo personatus pacto pater. 

(6) Multas per gentes et multa per aequora vectus 
Advenio ad miseras, frater, ad inferias, 
Ut te postremo donarem munere mortis 
Et mutam nequiquam alloquerer cinerem. 



IrTT 



Mliiilf 



i>i 



in 



ii fi<] 



Quandoquidein fortuna mihi toto abstulit ipsuni, 
Heu miser indigne frater adempto mihi, 

Nunc tamen interea haec,prisco quae more parentui-i 
Tradita sunt tristi munere ad inferias, 

Accipe fraterno multum manantia fletu, 
Atque in perpetuum, frater, ave atque vale. 

(c) Jam primum saxis suspensam banc aspice rupem : 
Disjectae procul ut moles, desertaque mentis 
Stat domus, et scopuli ingentem traxere ruinam. 
Hie spelunca fuit, vasto submota reeessu, 
Semihominis Caci facies quam dira tenebat, 
Solis inaccessam radiis ; semperque recenti 
Caede tepebat humus ; foribusque afRxa superbis 
Ora virum tristi pendebant pallida tabo. 
Huic monstro Vuleanus erat patar: illius atros 
Ore vomens ignes magna se mole ferebat. 
Attulit et nobis aliquando optautibus aetas 
Auxilium adventumque dei. Nam maximus ultor, 
Tergemini nece Geryonae spoliisque superbus, 
Alcides aderat, taurosque hac victor agebat 
Ingentes ; vallemque boves amnemque tenebant. 
At furiis Caci mens effera, ne quid inausum 
Aut intractiitum scelcris^^o dolive fuisset, 
Quatuor a stabulis praestanti corpore tauros 
Avertit, totidem forma superante juvencas. 
Atque hos, ne qua forent pedibus vestigia rectis, 
Cauda in speluncam tractos, versisque viarum 
Indiciis raptos, saxo occultabat opaco. 
Quaerenti nulla ad speluncam signa ferebant. 

{d) At nunc natus infans delegatur Graeculae alicui 
ancillae, cui adiungitur unus aut alter ex omnibus 
servis, plerumque vilissimus nee cuiquani serio 
ministerio adcommodatus. Horum fabulis eterrori- 
bus teneri statim et rudes animi imbuuntur ; nee 
quisquam in tota domo pensi liabet quid coram 
infante domino aut dicat aut faciat. Quin etiam 
ipsi parentes nee probitati neque modestiae par- 
vulos adsuefaciunt, sed lasciviae et dicacitati, per 
quae paulatim impudentia inrepit et sui alienique 
coutemptus. lam vero propria et peculiaria huius 
urbis vitia paene in utevo matris concipi mihi 
videntur, histrionalis favor et gladiatorum equo- 
rumque studia ; quibus occupatus et obsessus ani- 
mus quantulum loci bonis artibus relinquit ? 



quotum quemque invenies qui domi quicquam 
aliud loquatur ? quos alios adulescentulorum ser- 
mones excipimus, si quando auditoria intravimus ? 
ne praeceptores qnidem uUas crebiores cum audi- 
toribus suis fabulas habent; colligunt enim dis- 
cipulos non severitate disciplinae nee ingenii 
experimento, sed ambitione salutationum et imece- 
bris adulationis. 

(e) L. lulio Caesare C. Marcio Figulo consuUbus 
filiolo me auctum scito salva Terentia. Abs te 
tam diu nihil litterarum ? Ego de meis ad te 
rationibus scripsi antea diligentei, hoc tempore 
Catilinam, competitorem nostrum, defendere cogi- 
tamus; iudices habemus, quos voluimus, summa 
accusatoris voluntate. Spero, si absolutus erit, 
coniunctiorem ilium nobis fore in ratione peti- 
tionis ; sin aliter accident, humaniter feremus. 
Tuo adventu nobis opus est maturo ; nam prorsus 
summa hominum est opinio tuos familiares, nobiles 
homines, adversarios honori nostro fore : ad eorum 
voiuntatem mihi conciliandam maximo te mihi 
Usui fore video. Qua re lanuario mense, ut 
constituisti, cura ut Romae sis. 

Cicero. 

2. To what authors would you assign selections a, 
6, c itnd d ? 



I'! 



2ftnfuet«ftff of Sotronto, 



ANNUAL KXAMlXAriONS: 1S'.)1. 



'JANDIDATKS FOR B.A. 



ASTRONOMY. 



liM^ 



ii '' 
Si I |i 



e.xami'imH . -^j^^^^^ McGowan, B.A. 



1. Explain the terms, azimuth, altitude, right as- 
cension, declination. 

An rbserver, N. Lat. 30° observes the meredian 
altitude of a star to be 75°. What would be the me- 
ridian altitude of the same star be to an obs''''ver, 
N. Lat. oO°, and what is the declination of the star ? 

2. Explain how the supposition that the earth 
rotates about an axis accounts for the apparent motion 
of the stars, and that this, with a rotation of the earth 
about the sun, accounts for the apparent motions of 
the sun. 

8. What determines (1) the sidereal day, (2) the 
solar day. 

Explain why the latter is not constant, and 
define mean solar day. 

Calculate in ordinary minutes the approximate 
difference between a sidereal day and a mean solar day. 

4. Account for the Seasons, and explain why the 
summer is longer than the winter. 

.5. Explain by means of a diagram why at this time 
of the year the nights are shorter in Toronto than in 
New Zealand. 

The Sun's N. declination is now 18°; within 
what part of the earth's surface will there not be a 
sunset or a sunrise within 24 hours ? 

6. Give a short account of the Nebular Hypothesis, 



7. State Kuploi's Laws. 

Supposing the orbits of the planetn to be circles, 
and bciny; ifiv\'n that M.irs is ].0 tinioH as far away 
from the sun as the earti), dncl approximately the length 
of Mara' year in our days. 

8. Define Parallax, and shew how having found the 
parallax of the sun its distance may be calculated. 

How is the distance of a star found ? 

9. What is inferred from each of the folluwinir: 

(1) The moon is observed to have always the 
same portion of her surface towards the earth. 

(2) (Certain spots visible near the centre of the 
sun's disc aie seen lurther east on the disc day after 
day ; they aie seen again in the same place after about 
27 days. 

10. Explain how it is that eclipses can occur, and 
why they occur so seldom. 



w 



i' 



Sliii^eriUff of ITovoitto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: 1801. 



» 



m 



m 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ASTRONOMY. 

HONORS. 



KxaminetH : 



( John MoUowan, B.A. 
\ Alfred T. DkLury, B.A. 



1. Explain the use of the pendulum in proving that the 
earth rotates on \tn HxiH. 

ITow many houtH Hre required tor the revolution of its 
plane of vibration iu lutitudo 30°? 

2. In the tranuit inatruniunt find tli» uquatoritil inltti-valH 
of the wires and mIiow how ihey are employed to correct 
imperfect oV^HervationK. 

Htate which ntarH are IwHt for determining the equa- 
torial interval!*, giving reasonH. 

3. Find th*) latitude by HimultaneouH obHervationH of the 
altitudes of two known staru. 

Explain the method of proueduru where there in only 
one observer. 

4. Find by FlamHteed's method, the pc . tiou of the first 
point of Aries. 

Find the latitude of the place at v/hich the greatest 
angle between the ecliptic and the horizon is a right angle ; 
and at this place find the least angle between the ecliptic 
and the horizon. 

6. Define mean time and equation of time and calculate 
the eflfeot on the equation of t'.me of that pari which arises 
from tlie obliquity of the ecliptic. 

Reduce the local time at a given meridian to the oor- 
rwponding sidemal time. 



1! !! 



6. (Jbtniii the ^flnorHl ilifterHntiul equHtioii ut refraction, 
Aiir) dnducn BrnHley'H forinuU. 

7. Show h<»w to Hnd the pHmllax of h '..Uy having given 
iU borizontttl [Mirallax. 

Find the pHnillax in duoliiiatioii and huiir-ungle. 

8. If T be one year, I the periodic time of H planet, and S 
their synodioal iwriod prove - «■ := tk o . di»tinguiihiog the 



Show how the Btatioiiary ptwitioim and the retrograde 
motions of planetn ar« uece«iiary conseqiienoen of the earth'n 
own motion. 



TT 



.-. 1. , . I 
-1 :n-.i 



<!nn(iirr0Up of Covonto. 



ANNUAL EXA\i IN ATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



! 



■iliiii:! 



V,i 



'*m 



MODERN GEOMETRY. 

HONORS. 



Examiners • I ^^^^-^^ T. DeLury, B.A. 
£.xaminei8. | j^^^^^ McGowan, B.A. 



1. What are tlie advantages and the disadvantages of 
triUnear as compai-ed with Cartesian co-ordinates 1 

A linear equation denotes a straight line. 

Using only this theorem and the definition of the 
co-ordinates, shew what is denoted by ciu + J^ + 07 = 0. 

2. Find the condition that two given straight lines may 
be perpendicular. 

If the general « (r.ation of the second degree denotes 
two straight lines, fill ! tiC condition that they may be at 
right angles to eacu Ot!,; 

The straight line a. i ifinity is perpendicular to every 
straight line. 

3. Find the equation of the straight line through the 
intersection of the two lines (l^, wi,, n,) (l^, m^, nj, and 
parallel to 7 = 0. 

The imaginary line 

(?, + ilt)a + (m, + im^) /8 + («i + m,) 7 = 0. 
has only one real point. 

4. Obtain the equati>>n of '.^he circle circumscribing the 
triangle of reference. 

All conies through the circular points are circles. 

5. Find the equation to a conic inscribed in the triangle 
of reference. 

Find the c i-ordinates of the focus of a parabola in- 
scribed in the triangle of inference, and the equation of it? 
<JirectriA, 



0. Find the contro ..f la^ -f iti^^ -\- ny^ « 0. 

Form the equation of tlio tangents to this conic from 
a given point, and infer the equation of the asymptotes. 

7. A strui^'lit line cuts a [lencil of four lines ; shew that 
the aiiharnionio ratio of the range on this line is equal to 
that of the [)encil. 

How many values has this ratio for different arrange- 
ments of the four points 1 

8. Discuss the equation aS = kyB- 

0, A, B, C, D are five points on a conic, 0. variable and 
A, B, C, D fixed; shew that the anharmonic ratio of the 

pencil {O, A BCD} is constant. 

9. Prove Brianchon's theorem, and give an explicit tan- 
gential interpretation to the proof. 

10. Reciprocate, the auxiliary conic being a circle. 

( 1 ) " Parallel tangents to a cii'cle touch at the extrem- 
ities of a diameter " (any origin). 

(2) " If two circles have a common j)art, they cannot 
have more than two real common tangents " (origin within 
both circles). 

An ellipse reciprocates into an equilateral hyperbola ; 
find the locus of the origin. 



I ll 



li! 



I 

■ I 



{UniUftKiiUi^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATKS Foil J) A. 



HIGHER PLANE CURVES. 

HONORS. 



Examiners • -^ ^^^"'^^ '^- ^^ ^^'«^' ^^•^• 



1. How many conditions determine the general curve of 
order n 'i 

Shew that the following forms properly represent the 
general curve of the second order, and from them infer 
general properties of conies ; 

(1) ( oa' + fey + 1 ) ( a'aJ + 6V + 1 ) =■ c 

(2) {x-aY + {y-tif=^{ax-\-by + cY 



(3) 






Discuss similarly as a cubic form 

(a,.x- + \y + c,«)» + (\a^ + bjj -\- c^ f 

2. If cf the «2 points of intersection of two curves of tlie 
»ttli degree np lie on a curve of the j^th degree (^ < " )» 
the remaining n (n — ^> ) will lie on a curve of the 
(n — p )th degree. 

If two cubics touch each other in thi-ee collinear polutM, 
their other points of intersection will be collinear. 

3. If n is the order of a curve its class h n {ii — 1 ) 

If the proof were interpreted tangentially it would read, 
"If n is the class of a curve its degree is n (u — 1 )." 
Point out the paradox and state wherein the explanation lies. 



4. Write down th« nnalytical outulitions for a node, a 
cusp, and an inflexion. 

Define tlm Hessian, and obtain its eqiuition. 

Sliew tluit a double point on tlie cnrve is a double 
point on the Hessian, and that at such a point both curve« 
have the same nodal tangents. 

5. A proper curve of degree /t cannot have more than 

^ \y- double points. 

A curve can have its trilinear coordinates expriemed 
as rational integral functions of degree n of a single 
jiarameter : (1) find the oi'der of the curve : (2) shew that it 
has the maximum number of double points. 

6. Find the number of normals that can be drawn from a 
given point to a curve of degree ?t . 

Account for the fact that among curves of the second 
degree, four no 'mals can be drawn to an ellipse, three to a 
parabola, two to a ciicle and two to a pair of lines. 

7. Fi'.d the envelo|;e of the first polars of points on the 
curve xy = a'^ with respect to the curve a.-* -f 2/* ~ <*'• 

8. Define diameter, and in the general curve find the 
equation of the diameter corresponding to a given direction. 

The locus of the ])ole8 of tiie diametei-s of the folium 
of Descartos, a;* + // — 3 axy = , is a folium, and prove 
that this last folium is the Hessian of the original curve 
turned round the double point through an angle tt . 

9. Discuss the number and the nature of the foci of a 
curve of the nth class which touches the line at infinity 
y times and has both /and J as/ — tuple points. 

Find the number and position of the foci of the 
lemniscate ( x'^ + y'^ )^ — a'^ {x^ — y'-* ) = 

Shew that every focus of a curve is a focus of its 
evolute. 



h <! 



^fT 



snniueriiUff oC Coronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONU : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



DIFFKKHNTIAL EQUATIONS. 

HONORS. 



p «-.^»v. «„ (John McGowan, B.A. 
Ernimvners: | ^lfued T. DeLurv. B.A. 



1. A (Ufferetitial equation of thu 7t'^ order han n, niid can- 
not bavu more than n, indcpt'iident tirut integrals. 

Explain by geothetry why two indei)endent constantH 
must appear in the solution of the equation of the second 
order. 

2. Detine singular solution, and state the classes of equa- 
tions which do not produce Hingular Holntions. 

What different loci does a discussion of the differential 
equation alone give. 

Find the singular solution of 

/»2;y2 — 2pXy -f 2^' — X« = 

and also its complete pi-iinitive, and compare the results. 

3. The primitive of a linear equation consists of two parts: 
(1) a {Mirticular integral of the equation ; (2) the primitive 
of the equation when the right hand side is made zero. 

If a single particular solution of ip (Z>) ^ =s be known 
the order of the equation (f) (D) y =» V can be lowered by 
unity. 

4. In finding a particular integral of ^ (Z>) y » F, if 

1^ (Z))f-' = aD-'' {I + AiD + A^D^ + Ac.) and V be 
of the «"^ degree in x, the series (1 -f Ai D + A^D'^ + Ac.) 
may have the terms of highttr order than D'* neglected. 

Solve D*{D~ \)y - »;« e* . 



6. Show how to Holve equationi which expresi a relation 
between two differential co efficients, also those from which 
the variable x is absent. 
Solve the equation 



dty 



dy 



^ ' dx^ X dm 

by changing} the independent variable. 



a 



- 



6. Find the two series, one finite and the other infinite, 
which are particular solutions of LegendreH equation 

(1 _ ««) ^^ _ 2a5 A + M (n + I) y — when n is a 

positive integer. 

7. Show how to find the trajectory of a system of curves. 
Find the orthogonal trajectory of r' «« «* cos 2ft 

8. Deduce the condition that Pdx + Qdy f Rd» ■■ U 
mpy be derived from a single primitive ; and show geometri- 
cally that this is a particular case, the more general one 
being that in which it is derived from two equations. 

Solve the equation (y + «)</*■+• <iy + </»■- , 



ifi^ill 



llf'W 



Bnibnnitii of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 181)1. 



CANDIDATES FOU B.A. 



QUATERNIONS. 

HONOKS. 



I 



I, a 

'] 3 



'i 



,. . ( Alfked De Lury, B.A. 

hxaimners : | j^^^^. ^cGowan. B.A. 



1. If «i , «j , . . . . «,j are known vectors, and pi , /), , 
.... pn known functions of two independent parameters, 
the equation ,« =s pi «i •\- p^a^ . . . . -\- pnOn denotes a sur- 
face. 

a , li , y are non-coplanar vectors ; shew that if 

x'^ •{• y^ + z^ = , the equation ft as yza + «aJ/9 + xyjr 
denotes a cone of the fonrtli order. 

2. a, ,3 , y are coinitial coplaiiar vectors ; shew that if 
xa -\- yfi -\- zy := where x -^ y -{• z ss , these vectors 
terminate in a straight line. 

The mid-points of the diagonals of a complete qu'idri- 
lateral lie on a straight line. 

3. Define quaternion and shew that it involves four 
numbers. 

Exhibit a quaternion (1) as the sum of a scalar and a 
vector, (2) as the product of a tensor and a versor. 

p and q are two quaternions ; shew that in general 
pq is not equivalent to qp. When are they the same ? 

4. Interpret a;'i and shew its relation to ,3« , 



What inferences from the following equations : 
Va,3 » ; S'Jt,3 = ; Sufiy = ;j2 = — 1 ; p^ — q^ 1 

5. Find the equation of the straight line through a given 
j)oint and per|)endicular to u given plane. 

Find al,S(> the length of this perpendicular. 

Find the equation of the plane through three given 
points. 



6. Shew that ;he equntion of the circle whose centre is 
given by the vector y an I whose radins is a is 

//2 _ 2%* -I- ^2 + a^ =. 0. 

Interpret //- — 25*^// +?'* + «* when // is not a vector 
to the curve. 

If /' be any point on a cii'cle, any fixed point, the 
locus of the point in which the tangent at P intersects the 
line which bisects OP at right angles is a straight line. 

7. For the ellipse S(t*p(t sa 1 find 

(1) Tlie condition that two given vectors may be 
parallel to conjugate diameters. 

(2) The locus of a point T which moves so that the 
peri)endicnlai' from the centre on the ))olar of T, is constant. 

8. The goneral scalar equation of the second degree 
denotes a surface of the second order. 

Find the equation of the tangent cone from a given 
point to the ellipsoid Sf><pf> = 1. 

9. Find the equation of the polar reciprocal of 

the origin being the vertex, and the auxiliary circle being of 
unit rndins. 

10. Prove (1) flSuiSy « rai3.Sr>'i + V^r^Sali + VyaSt^H 
(2) S{Va[iVYo) = SwlS^iy ~ Say.Stn 
Tf the sides of u spherical quadrilateral taken in order 
are a, 6, c, d, sliew that the diagonals »? and »J', iiitei-sect at an 
angle given by the equation 

cos a cos c — cos b cos d 



cos = 



sin (J sin <?' 



ii 



Siinfbft0ft|? of rovotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDID .TES FOR B.A. 



HIGHER ALGEBRA. 

HONORS. 



E, f John McGowan, B.A. 



1. Prove that a deterniinant remains unchanged in value 
if the signs of the elements be changed in every alternate 
member of a set of linen consisting of either diagonal and 
the lines parallel to it, the diagonal itself being one of the 
lines left unchanged. 

Without reducing the determinants prove 



\a + b - Cf 
b, 



a , b , c 

b , c , a 



a , b 



'., c 

■\r c — a , a 

b , c + o. 

2, How many minors of order p has a determinant of 
order n ? 

Prove j ane \ = '!^aijAij, and show the signs of the 
terms are determined. 

Expand in powers of a; the determinant which has a; 
for each constituent of its leading diagonal. 

.3. Any minor of order p in the system il,-.v is equal to the 
complementary minor of its conjugate in A multiplied by 
AP-\ 

Prove 

o X y z 
X AH O 
y HB F 
z G F C 
(ax^ + by^ + cz^ + 2/yz + 2gxz + 2hxy) 

where A, H, ... stand for complementary minors of a,h, ... 
in the second determinant. 





a h g 


= 


h b / 




<7 / c 



^S 



4. The value of ary minor of order fi of the determinant 
j C{jb , the product of the two determinants { a^ I and 
I buc , can be expressed ua the sum of products of cor- 
responding minors of order fi of the determinants | aa | and 

\bik\ . 

6. A skew syn>metric>i] determinant of odd order vanishes 
and of even order is a perfect square. 

Find the number of terms in the square root of th;s 
latter determinant. 

6. A cubic determinant can be expressed as the product 
of n factors lineo-linear in two sets of alternate units, and is 
the sum of [n^ ordinary determinants each of order n. 

7. Show how to eliminate x between the equations 

<»o + «i « + «i«* + &c. -f Otn X™ = 

ft, + *i « + ^ a^ + *c- + 6« aJ» = 0. 

If these equations are homogeneous in x, y and z the 
resnltant of elimination will be of order mn in y and z. 

8. If fi (it) = aiix"-! + a^x^—^ + .... + a„t- prove 

I /* («i) 1 = I «« I C* («! , a!2. Xn). 

9. If the coordinates of the angular points of a tetrahe- 
dron are {x\ , y\ ,z\)---.{x^,y^, z^ and its volume is V ; 

1, 1, 1, 1 



6F = 



X- 



1 i 



'"j > "'i > ^i 



yi. y,. y,. y* 



*»' h 



By taking the origin of coordinates at the centre of a 
circle circumscribed round a triangle whose angular points 
are (aji yi) &c., show by forming the products of the deter- 
minants 

j «!, 2/1, -R 

35-2, 2/2, R 

' a^s, ya, -R 

Form the Jacobian of the equations 
ax^ + 2bxy 4 cy"'' " 0, 
ai a;2 ■\- 2li xy + cj y* = 0, 
and hence write out their eliminant, 



^1. 


yi. 


— 


R 


«2, 


ya, 


— 


R 


X3, 


ya. 


— 


R 



that ^SR = oAc. 



iltiiliet0ft|? of ITotontd. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



PROBLEMS, 

HONORS. 



)' ' ' 



ii'. 



m 



Examiners . 



f Alfred T. DeLury, B.A. 
(John McGowan, B.A. 



NoTK. — Candtdatea will enclose the Problems numbered with Roman 
and Arabic numerals in separate envelopes, indorsing the 
envelopes accordingly. 

I. From any two points P and <^, tangents PA, PJi, QC, 
QD are drawn to a conic : prove that the four intersections 
of PA witii QC, I'B with QD, PC with QA, PD with QB 
are coUinear. 

II. Two conies are described with a common focim and 
their corresponding directrices fixed : prove that if the sum 
of the reciprocals of their latera-recta be constant, their 
common tangents will touch a conic section. 

III. In a uiiicnrsal curve ci the third order whose double 
point is given by the parameter a: shew that if <, , t^, t^ are 
the parameters of three points in a straight line 

_i- + -'_ + --! 0. 

a — <, a — <j a — t^ 

IV. OA and OB are two straight lines at right angles and 
P H variaole point in OA : find the envelope of the inverse 
of OB with respect to P, the inversion being given by 
rr^'^ 1. 

y. Find the locus of points on the ellipsoid Spfp at 1 
the normals at which intersect the normal at a point on the 
surface given by the vector a, and find the equation of the 
surface on which all these normals lie. 

VI. If a, 6, c, (2 be the sides of a spherical quadrilatisral, 
a and '^' its diagonals, and if a and c, b and d, d and S^ 
intersect at angles 0, tp, 4> respectively, shew by Quaternion 
analysis that 
gin a sin e oos 6 ■{■ txahhiud cos tp ■{' tan S tin d^ ooa (1/ mt 



1. From a point in the oircumferenoe of m circle a line 
e<|UHl in length to the radiim of the circle is Hrnwn at random 
and from its extroinity a Hecund line equal to the former is 
drawn at random : what is the chance that the second will 
meet the circumference of the circle t 

2. Three sides of a regnlnr |)olygon of in sideu are chosen 
at random : prove that the chance that they being produced 
will form an acute-angled triangle which will contain the 
polygon is 

(n — 1) (n — 2) 
(4„_1) (in — 2)' 

3. Obtain the curve whose radius of curvature is equal to 
its normal but measured in the opposite direction. 

4. Assuming that the primitive of 

~ 4- ( 1 3 ) y ■■ is of the form of v ■■ it 4- - : 

ax* \ X*' ' X 

prove that it is given by 

u ^ A sin (x + a), V ■■ il COB (x + a). 

5. Prove that 
sin' a, sin^ a cos «, sin a cos^ a, cos' a 
sin' /S, sin^ fi cos /9, sin /5 cos* /?, cos' /S 



sin' /, sin* y cos /, sin / cos* y, 



cos' y 



sin' 8, sin* 8 cos d, sin 8 cos* 8, cos' 8 
sin (a— (5) sin {u—8) sin (a—y) sin (i^—y) sin (/5— «?) sin {y—8) 

6. Prove that the determinant whose principal diagonal 
is C|, c,, c,, . . . ., Cn, elumeiits on one side of this diagonal 
each equal to », and on the other side each equal to 6, is 
equal to {af(h) - 6/(a)| -r (a — 6) where 

/(«) SB (ci — a) (C2 — a;) (c„ — x) . 




•r 
1 



> , 111 



ii 



mnfutriftff oc Sotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



PROBABILITY, 

HONORS. 



tr^^<».i«...o . jJt'HN McQowAN, B.A. 
Examiners: | ^lfked T. DeLurv, B.A. 



1. What is the cluuice (1) that one of two excluaive 
events should happen, (2) that one and o'he only of two 
independent events should happen? 

Two ])ersons toss n shilling in turn on the conditions 
that the firat who tosses two heads in succession wins the 
shilling and when one fails in tossing a head the other takes 
his turn : find the value of each man's expectation. 

2. Two players A and B want respectively m and n points 
of winning a set of games, in which their chances of winning 
a single game are p and q respectively where p + q = I '. 
show that A'a chance is represented by tSe first n terras of 
either (p + y)»»+n-i or;>"»(l - 7)-'"'. 

3. A bag contains 10 balls which may be either white or 
black and before a trial is made all numbers of euch are 
equally likely ; a ball is drawn and found to be white and 
replaced ; a second ball is drawn and found to be white : if 
the last is replaced the chance of drawing a black ball is 9 
to 42. 

4. Two men A and £, who have a and 6 counters respect- 
ively to begin with, play a match consisting of separate 
games, and the winner of a game receives a counter from 
the loser : find their respective chances of winning the match, 
which is supposed to be continued until one of the players 
has no more counters, their chances being even on any game 
and no game being drawn. 



1/ 



ive 
wo 



5. Find the ohnnoe that A Aged a; ihell be dead, having 
lurvived tt aged y, y > x. 

Find the value to A of an Hnnuitjr on his life to he 
enjoyed by B and C to long an either of them ehall live. 

6. A iMraon who hu a life annuity a wishes to secure to 
his fHinily after his death an income equal to his present 
expenditure. What |K>rtion of his income must be paid in 
the way of an annual premium to an assurance ofBoe 1 

7. How many lines can be drawn to intersect a given line 
of length a / 

During a rain-storm a circular pond is formed in a cir- 
cular field. If a man undertakes to cross the field in the 
dark what is the chance that be will walk into the pond 1 

8. A line is divided at random, and one of the parts again 
divided at random : the chance that a triangle may be formed 
by the parts is log 2 - ^ . 

9. On u table a series of equidistant parallel lines is 
drawn, and a cube is thrown on the table : supiXMiing that 
the diagonal of the cube is less than the distance between the 
consecutive lines, find the chance that the cube will rest 
without covering any part of the lines 1 



ms 
^he 
ces 

its 

ng 
1: 

of 



or 

^re 

nd 

if 

^ 9 



5Ct- 

ate 
om 
oh, 
era 
me 



Hii 



i! 



CAnttiet0ft« of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ELECTRICITY. * 

HONORS. 



EoeaMiners 



:{t 



C. McKay. B.A. 
E. Martin, B.A. 



1. Define the electrostatic unit of electricity, and show 
its connection with the C. G. S. fundamental units. 

2. Give the theory of the Leyden jar. Show how to 
determine practically the capacity of a given jar. What is 
a farad f What is the meaning of specific indited rr capacity 1 

3. On a conductor removed from the iiiflueme of all 
electrified bodies a charge of given amount can be dis -ibuted 
in only one way. 

4. Describe the construction and method of use of "hom- 
son's ^uadrant Electrometer ; also Lippmann's Capillary 
Electrometer, 

5. By what different methods could you measure the 
difference of potential between the two carbon points of an 
arc light 1 

6. Sketch the development of the modern dynamo. 

W hat are the characteristic features of the Thomson- 
Houston dynamo? 

7. Find the best arrangement of a given number of cells 
to produce the strongest possible current in a given circuit. 

8. The joint resistance of a divided conductor, the resist- 
ances of the parts being r\ , r^ , r, respectively, is 

r\ ri r, 

r-i ?*, -f- r, ri + t\ r-i 



\ 



> 



mn 



t 



t 



9. State fully the hypothesis of electrolysis proposed by 
Grotthuss and Clausius. 

10. State Joule's Law concerning the heat developed in a 
conductor. 

How would you conduct an experiment to verify th« 
law \ 

11. Show how to determine the intensity of the earth's 
magnetic force at any place in absolute units. 



> 



/ 



h, 



f 



h, 



siniUfrsfta^ of Coronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



ACOUSTICS. 

PASS. 



Examiners 



{ IvA E. Martin, B.A. 
• JA. C. McKay, B.A. 



1. " It can be shewn, by a variety of experiments, 
that sound is the result of vibratory movement." 

Describe two experiments, and explain " vibratory 
movement." 

2. Define period, frequency , ivave-length. 

A tuninpf fork makes 256 vibrations per second. 
The velocity of sound being 340 metres per second, 
find the wave-length of the note produced. 

3. Define pitch and intensity of sound. 

A locomotive moving at 100 ft. per second, carries 
ii steam whistle which produces 1000 vibrations per 
second. The velocity of sound being 1100 ft. per 
second, determine the pitch of the note heard by a 
person standing close to the rails before and after the 
locomotive has passed. 

4. Write down the equation connecting the velocity 
of sound in a solid with its elasticity and density. 

The elasticity of a solid being 121 X 10', and its 
density being 8.1, determine the velocity of sound 
through it. 

5. Explain echo, interference, beats, nodes, antinodcs, 

One fork makes 25G vibrations and another 260 
per second. How many bciUs will be produced when 
sounding together ? 



/ 



6. Describe a graphic method of determining the 
number of vibrations per second of a tuning-fork. 

7. State the iaws of the transverse vibration of strings. 
Why is the base string of a violin wrapped around 
with metal w ire ? 

8. Define harmonics, and explain the principle of 
resonance. 

A closed organ pipe can produce only odd har- 
monics. 



/ 



^n(torr«ft9 of Toronto 



ANNUA!, KXAMINATIONS; IHHl. 



CANDIDATIJS Foil B.A. 



HYDRODYNAMICS. 

HONORS. 



ExamiiteTH : 



f IvA E. Maktin, B.A. 
\A. C. McKay, B.A. 



1. If Q denote the it'easnro per unit of volume of any 
qijHutity conuectwl with the properi ie8 of ii fluid, investigate 
the rate of increase of Q in a fixed rectangular space d.c, tly, dz 
whose centre is {x, y, z). 

Deduce tlie rat«^ of increase of the (I) mass per unit of 
volume, and (2) momentum per unit of volume. Interpret 
the results by deducing the equations of motion in the 
Eulerian form. 

2. Define Force- Votential and Veiocity- Potential. 

Obtain the relutions between the inipulHive pressures 
and the resulting change of velocities of a fluid under given 
impulses. 

Prove that, if w be the impulsive j)reHMure, <f and ^* 
the volooity potentials immediately before and after the 
impulses act, V the potential of the inijmlses, 
(II -\- p (V -\- <p^ — y) is constant. 

3. Define atream-lines, steady motion, irroftitionood motion, 
aimply connected region. 

In a simply connected region, (1) the stream-lines in 
a fluid moving irrotating cannot form closed curves, (2) the 
velocity function (ip) cannot be a maximum or a minimum 
at a point in the interior of the fluid, (3) the velocity 
cannot be a maximum but may be a minimum ai a point in 
the interior of a fluid. 



4. X)efi\nijtou)-/'u iction. 

fti a liquid moviiiK irrotntiuimlly in two (iimnnsiouH 
prove that tlio lino-rate of iinTHantt of tho Kow-fiinution (V') 
along any curvo at any point \h equal to the linn-nite of 
increano of tlio velocity-function (^) nlonjf an orthogonal 
curve at the point. 

6. Define ^ow, circulntion and rotation. 

The circulation round any plane curve is equal to twice 
the surface integral of the rotation taken over itH area. 

6. A mass of fluid filling a right circular oylinder uioveit 
from rest under tlie action of the forces 



jir- - 



uy 



ux 



0, 



Shew that the fluid rotates with an angular velocity 
which varies inversely as the square of the distance from the 
axis, an'l increases uniformly with the time. 

7. A vase in the form of a surface of revolution, and 
having a finite horizontal aperture in its hase, is kupt con- 
stantly full : dutormine tho rate at which liquid munt be 
poured in. 

8. Prove and interpi-ut thf following formula for the 
eneigy of a liquid moving irrotationally : 

the integration extending round the boundary. 

9. Define vertex linen, vorl/ixJilame^U, 

Write down the difiurontial equations of the vortex 



lines. 



Shew that 






is constant along a vortex line. 




i 






/ 



i 



2Eiti(brt0ft9 of rotonto« 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



ACOUSTICS AND ELASTICITY. 

HONORS. 



Eccarmners 



JIvA E. Martin, B.A. 
( A. C. McKay, B.A. 



( 



I 



ACOUSTICS. 

1. Define harmonic motion, harmonic curve. 

Two harmonic curves which have equal wave 'engths 
can .'ilways be compounded into another harmonic curve 
with the same wave-length. 

Express Fourier's Theorem analytically. 

2. Obtain the equation 

(Py _ Tji£ fy 

for the transverse vibration of a string, and shew that the 
general solution of this equation represents the transmission 
of two arbitrary foims along an unlimited line in contrary 
directions. 

Deduce the time of vibration. 

3. '• If the peg of a violin be turned so as to alter the 
pitch of the lateral vibrations very considerably, it will be 
found that the pitch of the longtitudinal vibrations has varied 
very slightly." Discuss and explain. 

4. Define a musical interval. How is it measured 
Illustrate by a curve the relation between intervals and 
numerical ratios. Describe the construction of the Diatonic 
Scale. 

5. At a station on a railway 'passed at full speed by a 
train, a certain musical note is sounded ; explain the differ- 
ence of the sounds heard by a person in the train ao it 
approaches to and recedes from the station. 



ELASTICITY. 



.1 



6. 1£ (/,w»,Ji) (/',m*,n") be the direction-cosines of a line 
near the point {x,y,z) of a body in the natural and strained 
states respectively shew that 

71 7 /I I \ f ^^ I ^" 

{* ns £ (1 -J- a — e) 4- m. ~, \- n. —r ' 

ay az 

<tc., whore e is the elongntion in the direetion of (/,m,n). 
Deduce the condition thiit there may be aline of iio rotation. 

7. Define Shearing Strain and determine the amount of 
shear along any two lines at right angleH to each other due 
to any small strain. 

The shear in a given plane is greatest for two lines 
making angles oi ■15*' with the axes of the conic in which 
the given j)lane cuts the elongation conic. 

8. If we take any two element planes in a body at a 
point the component of the stress per unit of area on the first 
along the normal to the second is e(iual to the component of 
the stresp per unit of area on the second along the normal to 

the 11 at. 

If at a point in a body there be a plane on which the 
stress is zero, the lines of action of the stresses on all other 
planes at this point lie in this plane of zero stress. 

9. The work done in terms of the final stress [N\.Ni, 
A^j,7'i, '/'2,7'g) on the surface of a small volume dv in produc- 
ing the small stain (rt,6,c.si,Sj,«a,) is 

J {Nya + A\h + N^c + 2 ^isi + 2 T^s^ + l\i^,). 
Simplify the above expression in the case of an iso- 
tropic body. 

10. A beam is supported at the ends and loaded at a 
point distant a, h from the supports with a weight W, show 
that the depression of the weight below the points of support is 

W. aW _ 
3^./. {a + b) 



I tmMtfm\»nf^v^mfmmf}mw 






nni\}tvtHi» of CTotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOK RA. 



LlwVST SQUARES. 

HONORS. 



jr, . j IvA E. Martin, B.A. 



1 . Wliat is nieimt by the probability of an event hap])en- 
ing? 

Upon what asKiiniptions do we say that the probability 
(y) of an enor (x) ocouri'ing 's connected by the equation 

— /i2a;2 
y = ce "'^ . 

Shew that the probability of an error taken at random 
being numerically less than x is expressed by 

Vtt 

2. What do you understand by observations of equal 
precision, and how is the jnecision of a set of observations 
determined ? 

Shew that the probable error of a single observation is 



0.6745 






Are you oatjoly satisfied with the process of arriving 

at tMs vesndt ? 

3. Win.t is 1, i'Pit hy the weight of an observation ] 

Deu"'i)8tii>.te that the probable error of an observation 
of weight uiT .' is 

0.6745 ,11^1^ 
V ,i — 1 

Deduce the probab' ; error of the general mean 



4. Define nhsermtion equations, nnrmnl eqnntionn. 
Describe tlip procoss of fimling the most probable value 

of each of the unknown quantities involved ii> a set of 
oLservation equations. 

Form the normal equations correwponding to the follow- 
ing observation equations 

X z= \0 : 1/ — X = 7 : y = 18 : y — z=9 : x — »«2. 

5. Define conditioned observations. 

Describe the general method of obtaining the most 
probable values of quantities from observation equations, 
the quantities being restricted to certain conditioned equa- 
tions. 

(). In what way is the principle of Least Squares used to 
deduce empirical formula from a number of physical observa- 
tions. 

A plotted curve resembles a parabola. How would 
you proceed to take observations to determine its moat prob- 
al)le equation. 

7. The density of a body was determined ten times, with 
the following results : 

(1) 9.n0i' (2) 0.G73 (.3) 9.004 (4) 9.659 (5) 9.677 
(6) 9.G62 (7) 9.6(53 (S) 9.G80 (9) 9.645 (10) 9.654 

Find the probable error of the mean and of one obser- 
vation. 

8. Tiio exterior angles of a triangle ABC are measured 
I, m and n times and the respective means of each set of 
observations ai-e a, b and c. find the most ])robable value of 
tlie angle A of the tiiangle, and the probable error of this 
value. 



.1 



Hi 



wm 



9Ani\>tvnH9 of ^oirotito. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATfONS: 1801. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



PHYSICAL OPTICS. 

HONORS. 



p . f A. C. McKay, B.A. 

^'^"^'^^"^'■''•■il. E.MAUTIN. B.A. 



1. State your conception of the Imniniferoiis ether, 
giviDg reasons for uny prttpertie.s you may ascribe to it. 

Give the argument and experiments from which 
we conchide thnt the Emission Theory is false. 

2. StJtte fully the conditions that must necessnrily 
he fulfilled to produce interference l)aiids. 

Why must the two images in the fundamental 
experiment he formed close together ? 

8. Account for the lectilincar propagation of light. 
Why do we not have rectilinear propagation of 
sound ? 

4. State Mains' law of inten.sity of polarized ligiit, 
and account for it theoretically. 

Describe minutely how you could verify the law 
by experiment. 

6, Define tuave surface. Find the equation of the 
wave surface in a biaxal crystal. Determine its form, 
and apply it to find the direction of the refracted rays, 
for any selected cry.stal. 

6. Account for the phenomena of circular polarisa- 
tion by means of the Undulatory Theory. 

Describe minutely the essential parts of a Sacch- 
arimeter. 

7. Show that " the angle of polarisation by reflec- 
tion " is that of which the tangent is equal to the index 
of refraction. 



L-.. 



I» 



Account tor tho phononiunon of total refloxion. 

8. " Tho cevtral spot of the shadow of aHnmll circu- 
lar disc, cast by rays divor;;iug from a distant point in 
its axis, is as brightly illuininatod as if the disc had 
not been ifiterposed." Explain. 

9. Give tlie theory of construction of (1) a Nicol 
prism, (2) n Rqchon prism, (3) a Rochon lunette. 



> 







IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




1.0 



I.! 



■so "^^ 

S! 1)4 



III 

■tt 



lAO 



L25 IIU 



■ 2.0 

li 

!.6 



6" 



^ 



^ 








PhotDgraphic 

Sciences 

CorpOTation 



23 WIS> MAIN STRIET 

WiBSTill,N.Y. 145M 

(716)«73-4S03 







^ 



^ 



M 



vV 



snnfDttfiift!) of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



THERMODYNAMICS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner 



iners : < j 



A. C. McKay, B.A. 
E. M AUXIN, B.A. 



1. State and discuss the principle of the conservation of 
energy. 

Define adiahatics, perfect yas, absolute temjjerature. 

2. Show tiiat for any perfect gas Cp and Co differ by a 
constant. 



Prove that -7/' 



p_ 
p 



d]) 

d(> 



, wiiere /> is the density. 



3. State the substance of Clausius' investigation of the 
principle of equivalence of transformations. 

" Thus we see that Clausius' theorem, ' the entropy of 
the universe tends to a maximum,' is by no means identical 
with, though it is closely connected with, Thomson's theory 
of dissipation of energy." Explain fully. 

4. Form the fundamental equations in the case of saturated 
vapour. Show from the equations that if saturated steam 
be expanded in a nou-couducting envelope, there must be 
partial condensation. 

5. In the case of a perfect gas show that the increase of 
entropy and energy are respectively 

Cp log-^ -7i?log-^,and (Cp - li) (T - T^), 
-'o Po 

where the gas passes from the state (7\, p^) to {T, p). 

6. Show that if a gas changes its volume without change 
of temperature, tlie quantities of heat absorbed or given ofT 
form an arithmetical series, while the volumes form a 
geometrical series. 



7. Establish Clausius' tlieorem of stationary motion 

iS(»itj2) = ^pV+ iS(i?r). 
Deduce Boyle's law in the case of a gas. 

8. Describe Pouillet's Pyrheliometer. Show it enables 
us to calculate the amount of heat radiated from the sun. 



.1 



-( 



I 



CAttllitvfiiUtt of ^oirotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B,A. 



MATHEMATICS OF CRYSTALLOGRAPHY. 

HONORS. 






Escaminer : F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. A crystal of Anglesite (triraetric) comprising the 
basal, vertical prism, one side polar and two front 
polar planes, presents the following angular values : 

V:V, in front, = 103° 38', 
B:P_ =127° 45', 

B:iP = 157° 33', 

B:|P = 140' 27'. 

Calculate the length of the axes, (x = 1). 

2. Prove that the angle P:P over the summit of a 
reffuiar octahedron = 70° 32'. 

3. In a combination of three trimetric prisms, 
J V, V, 2 V, the following measurement is obtained : 

V:V in front = 112° 20'. 
Find i V : ^ V in front, and 2 V: 2 V in front. 

4. A trimetric crystal, (P and V planes) presents the 
following : 

V:V in front = 102° 22' 
V.V " =126° 58'. 
Required the inclinations of P:P over a front, 
side, and middle edge. 

5. Determine the length of the vertical axis of a 
Rhombohedron which measures 87° 40' over a polar 
edge. 



T 



\» 



2Atiflirt0it9 oC Sorotito* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR, ARTS— THIRD YEAR, LAW. 



ETHNOLOGY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: F. C. Jeefrey, B.A. 



1. Define the facial angle, and discuss its value in 
ethnological classification. 

2. What characteristics differentiate anthropoid apes 
from pithecoid men ? 

3. Discuss from ethnological and anthropological 
stand points, the probable permanency of : 

(a) Home Rule in Ireland. 

(b) The French Republic. 

(c) The Dominion of Canada. 

4. Describe the various theories as to the cradle of 
the Indo-European family, and name its divisions. 

5. Give an account of the Neandertal skull, and in- 
dicate its significance. 

6. What is mejint by the expression prehistoric, as 
used in anthropology ? 

7. What light does anthropology throw upon the 
origin of political institutions ? 



V 



T 



f 



SinfDfrttftff of (Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : ISfll. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 



1. Describe Bacon's Essays in general, and repro- 
duce any one of them. 

2. Give brief accounts of Sir Philip Sidney's two 
prose works. 

3. In considering the Discredits of Learning, Bacon 
(in the Advancement, Bk. I.), finds three classes that 
arise from ' Errors and Vanities in the studies them- 
selves,' and other classes tliat arise from 'Peccant 
Humours.' Give as many of these classes as you can, 
explain what is meant by each of them, and enlarge 
on those which seem particularly characteristic of 
Bacon's view, or of the tendencies of his time. 

4. (a) Describe concisely Lyly's Euphues. (b) De- 
scribe the fashion called Euphuism, and the kindred 
tendencies in literature, (c) Whence did the.se fa.shions 
arise ? (d) Illustrate V>y definite references how they 
affected the literature of the period subsequent to the 
publication of Euphues. 

5. What were the remote, and what the immediate 
circumstances which led to the writing of the Ecclesi- 
astical Polity ? What are the characteristics of Hook- 
er's mind, ideas, and style exemplified in Bk. I. ? 

6. Describe Marlowe's characteristics as a dramatist, 
illustrating by definite references to his works, 



f, 



T 



7. Point out peculiarities in style and veraification 
which may serve to distinguish the following passages 
from one another, and to indicate that they belong to 
different stages of Shakespeare's career : 

(a) A cause more promising 
Than a wild dedication of yourselves 

To unpath'd waters, undream'd shores, most certain 

To miseries enough ; no hope to help you, 

But as you shake off one to take another; 

Nothing so certain as your anchors, who 

Do their best office, if they can but stay you 

Where you'll be loath to be. Besid >s you know 

Prosperity's the very bond of love. 

Whose fresh complexion and whoso heart together 

Affliction alters. 

(b) The current that with gentle mtirmur glides, 
Thou know'st being stopp'd impatiently doth rage ; 
But when his fair course is not hindered. 

He makes sweet music with the enamell'd stones . 

Giving a gentle kiss to every sedge 

He overtaketh in his pilgrimage, 

And so by many winding nooks he strays 

With willing sport to the wild ocean. 

Then let me go and hinder not my course : 

I'll be as patient as a gentle stream. 

And make u pastime of each weary step. 

Till the la.st step have brought me to my love ; 

Atid there I'll rest as after much turmoil 

A blessed soul doth in Elvsium. 

(c) C/Ould great men thunder 

As Jove himself does, Jove would ne'er be quiet, 

For evei-y fretting, petty officer 

Would use his heaven, for thunder ; 

Nothing but thunder ! merciful Heaven, 

Thou rather with thy sharp and sulphurous bolt 

Split'st the unwedgoable and gnarled oak 

Than the soft myrtle : but man, proud man, 

Drest in a little brief authority, 

Most ignorant of what he's most assured, 

His glassy essence, like an angry ape. 

Plays such fantastic tricks before high heaven 

As make the angels weep. 



7 



1 



T 



^nfUfviiftsf of Soroni0« 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: IHttl. 



FOURTH YKAR. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 



1. Describe the characteiH and funotionn in !.oir 
respective dramas of Falconbridge and Lady Macbeth. 

2. Point out clearly and concisely the points (apart 
from versification) which differentiate The Tevipent 
from the plays of Shakespeare's second period. 

3. Discuss the question of unity of plot in the case 
of the Merchant of Venice, (what criticisms have been 
made in this regard — how may the obstacles to unity of 
interest have arisen— how and in what degree Shakes- 
peare has overcome them, etc.) Bring forward any 
other typical examples with which you may be familiar, 
of the degree to which Shakespeare regards this unity, 
and of the methods he adopts to maintain the interest. 

4. State concisely the argument advanced in behalf 
of the theory of divided authorship of Henni VIII. 
Employ the following passages to exemplify these 
arguments as far* as regards style and versification. 

(ia) We must not stint 

Our necessary actions, in the fear 
To cope malicious censurers ; which Qver, 
As ravenous fishes, do a vessel follow 
That is new trimm'd, but benefit no jurlher 
Than vainly longing. What we oft do best. 
By sick interpreters — once weak ones — is 



Not onrfs, or not allowVl ; what worst, as oft, 
Hitting a grossor quality, is cried np 
For our bost net. If we shall stand still, 
Tn fear onr motion will be uiock'd or oarp'd at, 
We should take root here where we sit, or sit 
State-statuos ouly. 

(h) Cromwell, I did not think to shed a tear 
Tn all my miseries ; but thou hast forc'd nie, 
Out of thy honest truth, to play the woman. 
Let's dry our eyes; and thus far hear me Cromwell ; 
And; when I am forgotten, as I shall be. 
And sleep in dull, cold marble, whei-e no mention 
Of me more must be heard of — say, I taught thee ; 
Say, Wolsey, that once trod the v ays of glory, 
And sounded all the depths and shoals of honour, 
Found thee a way, out of his wrack, to rise in ; 
A sure and safe one, though thy master miss'd it. 

5. Express in simple, concise language, as clearly and 
accurately as you are able, the meaning of (a) in ques- 
tion 4 ; also the meaning of the following passages : 

(e) It is religion that doth make vows kept ; 
But thou hast sworn against religion. 
By which thou swear'st against the thing thou 

swear'st, 
AnCi mak'st an oath the surety for thy truth 
Against an oath ; the truth thou art unsure 
To swear, swears only not to be forsworn ; 
Else what a mockery should it be to swear ; 
But thou dost swear only to be forsworn ; 
And most forsworn, to keep what thou dost 

swear. 

(d) My thrughts, whose murther yet is but fan- 

tastical, 
Shakes so my single state of man that function 
Is smother'd in surmise. 

(e) And dare me to the desert with thy sword, 
If trembling I inhabit then, protest me 

The baby of a girl. 



6. Explain what is italicised in the following : 

Sleep that knits up the ravell'd aleave of care. 
The ahard-hwne beetle with his drowsy hum. 
My mind she has ruated and amazed wy sight, 
What news on the Rialto. Dobbin, my Jlll-hwse. 
And see my wealthy Andrew, dock'd in Hand. 
Bring them with imagined speed unto the tracuet. 
To trash for over-topping. 
Thy banks with pioned, and twilUd brims. 
Thus hidling in the. wide sea of my conscience. 
That in mine ear I durst not stick a rose 
Lest men should say, Look where three farthings 
goes." 






ti 






Uni\itvuu» ot Covottto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



KNGLISH. 



Examiner: W. J. Alexander, Ph.D. 



Note — CandiilatcH for Honors are to answer the questions in Section 
A only ; other Candidates will answer any six questions, but 
not more than six. 

A. 

1. Cont'-ast Shelley's attitude towards nature with 
Wordsworth's, illustrating by definite references to 
their works. 

2. Illustrate some of the more characteristic pecu- 
liarities of Carlyle's way of thinking l»y definite refer- 
ences to those of his works which are assigned for 
special study. 

3. Name the writers of eight of the following pas- 
sages, and indicate in what connection each passage 
occurs : 

(a) A violet by a mossy stone 

Half hidden from the eye ! 
Fair as a star when only one 
Is shining in the sky. 

(h) We look before and after, 
And pine for what is not : 
Our sincerest laughter 

With some pain is fraught. 

(c) Perhaps the self same song that found a path 

Through the sad heart of Ruth, when, sick for 

home, 
She stood in tears amid the alien corn. 

(d) Ah, but a man's reach should exceed his grasp, 
Or what's a heaven for ? 



!Ji 



((?) The old order clumgctli, yielding,' place to new, 
And God fulfils himself in many ways. 

( f) Will no one tell me what she says '. 
Perliaps the plaintive nunibers flow 
For old, unhappy, far-off things. 
And battles long ago. 

((/) Though babbling only to the vale 
Of sunshine and of flowers 
Thou bringest unto me tale 
Of visionaiy hours. 

{h) A noise like of a hidden brook 
In the leafy month of June, 
That to the sleeping woods all night 
Singeth a quiet tune. 

(i) Let us alone. Time driveth onward fast, 
And in a little while our lips are dumb. 
Let us alone. What is it that will last ? 
All things are taken from lis, and become 
Portions and parcels of the dreadful past. 

{j) lift me as a wave, a leaf, a cloud ! 
I fall upon the thorns of life ! I bleed ! 
A heavy weight of hours has chain'd and bow'd 
One too I'ke thee : tameless, and swift, and proud. 

{Ic) The light that never was on sea or land, 
The consecration, and the poet's dj-eam. 

{I) A grief without a pang, void, dark, and drear, 
A stifled, drows}', uninipassioned grief, 
Which flnds no natural outlet, no relief, 
In word, or sigh, or tear — 

4. On the ground of the various peculiarities exhi- 
bited in the following " unseen " passages, determine 
the writer, assigning your reasons in each case : 

(a) Oh, good gigantic smile o' the brown old earth, 
This autumn morning ! How he sets his bones 
To bask i' the sun, and thrusts out knees and feet 
For the ripple to run over in its mirth ; 

Listening the while, where on the heap of stones 
The white breast of the sea-lark twitters sweet. 



This is tlie (loctriiie, simple, ancient, true ; 

Such is life's trial, as old earth smiles and knows. 
If you loved only what were worth your love, 
Love were clean gain, and wholly well for you : 

Make the low nature better for your throes ! 
Give earth yourself, go up for gain above ! 

(6) A soul, that, watch'd from earliest youth, 
And on thro' many a brightening year, 
Had never swerved for craft or fear. 
By one side-path, from simple truth ; 

Who might have chased and claspt Renown 

And caught her chaplet here — and there 

In haunts of jungle-poisoned air 
The flame of life went wavering down ; 
But ere he left your fatal shore, 

And lay on that funereal boat, 

Dying, ' Unspeakable' he wrote 
' Their kindness.' and he wrote no more : 
And sacred i? the latest word ; 

And now The was, the Miglit-have-been, 

And those lone rites I have not seen, 
And one drear .sound I have not heard. 
Are di-eams that scarce will let me be. 

Not there to bid my boy farewell. 

When that within the coffin fell 
Fell and flash'd into the Red Sea, 
Beneath a hard Arabian moon 

And alien stars. To question, why 

The sons before the fathers die. 
Not mine ! and I may meet him soon ; 

But while ray life's late eve endures, 

Nor settles into hueless gray, 

My memories of his briefer day 
Will mix with love for you and yours. 

(c) If Thou indeed derive thy light from Heaven 
Shine poet in thy place, and be content ! 
The star that from the zenith darts its beams. 
Visible though it be to half the earth, 
Though half a sphere be conscious of its brightness. 
Is yet of no diviner origin. 
No purer essence, than the one that burns, 
Like an untended watch-fire, on the ridge 
Of some dark mountain; or than those which seem 
Humbly to hang, like twinkling winter lamps. 
Among the branches of the leafless trees. 



r^ 



HI' 



(d) Doubtle.sH it will be despised as a weakness by 
that lofty order of minds who pant after the ideal, 
and arc oppressed by a general sense that their emo- 
tions are of too exquisite a character to find fit objects 
among their everyday fellow-men. I have often been 
favoured with the confidence of these select natures 
and find them concur in the experience that great men 
are ovei"-estimated, and small men insupportable ; that 
if you would love a woman without ever looking back 
on your love as a folly, she must die while you are 
courting her ; and if you would maintain the slightest 
belief in human heroism, you must never make a pil- 
grimage to see the hero. I confess I have often meanly 
.shrunk from confessing to those accomplished and 
acute gentlemen what my own experience has been. 
I am afraid I have often smiled with hypocritical 
assent, and gratified them with an epigram on the 
fleeting nature of our illusions, which any one moder- 
ately acquainted with French literature can command 
at a moment's notice. Human converse, 1 think some 
wise man has remarked, is not rigidly severe. But I 
herewnth dischai'ge my conscience, and declare that I 
have had quite enthusiastic movements of admiration 
toward old gentlemen who spoke the worst English, 
who were occasionally fretful in their temper, and who 
had never moved in a higher sphere of influence than 
that of parish overseer ; a7id that tlie way in which i 
have come to the conclusion that human nature is 
lovable — the way I have learnt something of its deep 
pathos, of its .sublime mysteries — has been by living a 
great deal among people nioi'e or less common-place 
and vulgar, of whom you would, perhaps, hear nothing 
very surprising if you were to inquire about them in 
the neighbourhood where they dwell. Ten to one 
most of the small .shop-keepers in their vicinity, .saw 
nothing at all in them. For I have often observed 
this remarkable coincidence, that the select natures 
who pant after the ideal, and find nothing in panta- 
loons or petticoats great enough to command their 
reverence or love, are curiously in unison with the 
narrowest and pettiest. 



ii* 



(e) Of all curses that which searches deepest is the 
violent revelation through infinite darkness — a revela- 
tion like that " sudden blaze which far round illumi- 
nated hell," of a happiness or a pflory which once and 
forever has perished. Martyrdom it is, and no less, to 
revivify by effect of your own, or passively to see 
riviviHed, in defiance of your own fierce resistance, the 
gorgeous spectacle of your visionary morning life, or of 
your too rapturous noontide, relieved upon a back- 
ground of funeral darkness. Such poisonous transfi- 
gurations, by which the paradise of youthful hours is 
forced into distilling demoniac misery for ruined nerves, 
exist for many a profound sensibility. And, ns regards 
myself, touch but some particular key of laughter 
and of echoing music, sound but for a moment one 
bar of preparation, and immediately the pomps and 
glory of all that has composed for me the delirious 
vision of life re-awaken for torment ; the orchestras of 
the earth open simultaneously to my inner ear ; and, in 
a moment I behold, forming theniselves into solemn 
groups and processions, and passing over sad phantom 
stages, all that chiefly I have loved, or in whose behalf 
chicHy I have abhorred and cursed the grave — all that 
should 110^ have died, yet died the soonest — the bril- 
liant, the noble, the wise, the innocent, the brave, the 
beautiful. With these dreadful masks, and under the 
persecution of their malicions beauty, wakens the worm 
that gnaws at the heart. Under that corrosion arises 
a hatred, blind and vague, and incomprehensible even 
to one's self, as of some unknown snake-like enemy, in 
some unknown hostile world, brooding with secret 
power over the fountains of one's own vitality. 

5. Compare Eve of St. Agnes, Fra Lippo Lippi, and 
Enoch Arden, so as to bring out the distinguishing 
characteristics of the three authors. 

B. 

6. Give a concise account of Scott's life and work. 

7. What does Coleridge consider to be the merits 
and defects of Wordworth's poetry ? 

8. Describe, with critical comments, EITHRR Shelley's 
Adonaia, or Coleridge's Ancient Mariner. 

9. Compare Middlemarch and Waverley. 



K^ 



f) 



I 



^nftierttftff of ^Totontd. 



ANNUAL KXAMTNATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



ENGLISH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: W. J. Alexandeij, Ph.D. 



1. Describe in general term.s the Faerie Queen, and 
illustrate the nature of Spenser's {genius by definite 
reference to his works. 

2. Give as concisely as possible the most important 
facts with regard to the following: — The SkephenVs 
Calendar, Suchuille, 11 Penserosu, Hero and Leander, 
Donne, George Chapman. 

3. Describe the character of the songs which are a 
marked feature of the later poetry of the period (reign 
of Charles I.) and name the principal writers of them. 

4. What are the chief merits and defects of the five 
books of Paradise Lost assigned for special study ? 
What is the character of Milton's mind and temper as 
revealed in his poetical works ? 

6. Describe Paradise Regciine. Discuss the question 
whether or not this poem has any connection, artistic 
or other, with Paradise Lost. 

6. Name the author of each of the following passages : 

(a) Let me not to the marriage of true mind 
Admit impediments. Love is not love 
Which alters when it alteration finds. 

(6) Drink to me only with thine eyes 
And I will pledge with mine ; 
Or leave a kiss but in the cup. 
And I'll not look for wine. 



m'^ 



!lii 



(c) Leave ini', L<a'c, which ruuclicst h\it to dust; 

Ami tlion, 111}' niiuil. uspim to higher tilings ; 
Grow rich in that which nov«jr tiiktith rust; 

VVhiitt'Ver I'lidcs, imt finrnig jilojisiirc liringM. 
I>raw in thy heiuns, and lunnl)lo all thy might 

To that MWcet yolko where lasting freedoms be; 
Which breaks the clouds, and opens forth the light, 

That doth both shine and give us sight to see. 

take fast hold ; let that light be thy guide 

In this small course which birth draws out to 
death, 
And think how ill becoineth him to slide. 
Who seoketh heaven, and comes of heavenly 
breath, 
Then farewell, world ; thy uttei-most 1 see : 
Eternal love, maintain thv life iii me ! 

((/) 1 sing of brooks, of blossoms, birds, and bovvers, 
or April, May, of June, Jind July-Howers ; 

1 sing of May-poles, hock-carts, wassails, wakes, 
Of bride-grooms, brides, and of their i))'i(lal-cakes. 

(e) Sometimes walking not unseen 

By hedge-row elms, on hilhjcks gretin. 
Right against the eastern gate 
When the great sun begins his state 
Rob'd in Hames and amlier light 
The clouds in thousand liveries (light. 

(f) Lord, I confess too, vvhen I dine 

Tha pulse is thine. 
And all those other gifts that be 

There placed by thee ; 
The worts, the purslain, and the me.ss 

Of water-cress. 

(g) Yet in these thoughts myself almost despising, 

Haply I think on thee, and then my state, 
Like to the lark at break of day arising 
From the sullen earth, sings hymns at heaven's 
gate. 

(h) Long though it be, at last I see it gloom. 
And the bright evening star with golden crest 
Appear out of the East, 
Fair child of beauty ! glorious lamp of love ! 
That all the host of heaven in I'anks dost lead, 
And guidest lovers through the night's sad dread, 
How cheerfully thou lookest from above. 



And seomst to laugh atweene thy twinkling 

light, 
As joying in tho sight 
Of these glad many, which for joy do sing, 
That all the woods thein answer, and their echo 

ring ! 

(i) Fame is the spur that the clear spirit doth raise 
(The last infirmity of noble minds) 
To scorn delights and live laborious days. 

(j) They left me then, when the gray-hooded Ev'n 
Like a sad votarist in palmer's weed, 
RoHe from the hindmost wheels of Phoebus' wain. 

(k) Then as a nimble squirrel from the wood 
Ranging the hedges for his filbert food, 
Sits pertly on a bough his brown nuts cracking, 
And from the shell the sweet white kernel taking. 
Till with their crooks and bags a sort of boys. 
To share with him, come with ao great a noise 
That he is forced to leave a nut almost broke 
And for his life leap to a neighbour oak. 



■w 



11: 



i':ii: 






StniHeviDiUtt o( Toronto* 



4 SLl'l'LKMKNTAL KXAM1NAT1UN8 : 1»U1. 



FOURTH YEAH. 



FRENCH. 



Kxaminiir: J. SgirAiu, B.A. 



I. 

Translate : 

Tout ttinouroux, do sa maitressc, 
8ur Hon Cfuur ou tUtis son tiroir, 
PoHsudo uii gage qii'il caresHc 
Aux jours do rogrot ou d'ospoir. 

L'un d'une chovolure noire, 
Par un sourire cncouragd 
A pris uno bouclo quo moiro 
Un reflet bleu d'ailo de geai, 

L'autro a, sur un cou blanc tiui ploie, 
Coupe par derriore un flocon 
Ketors et tin conimo la sole 
Que Ton ddvide du cocon. 

Un troisifeme, au fond d'une boito, 
Reliquaire du souvenir, 
Cache un gant blanc, de forme etroite, 
Oil nuUe main ne pout tenir. 

J^maux et Camdea. 
What are the characteristics of Gautier's poetry ? 



■7*n 



m 

III' !, 



II. 

Translate : 

D'oii vient done aujourd'hui, ^ 

Mon cousin, que ta porte est si bien verrouill^e ! 
Par les saints ! je croyivis ta dagiie plus rouillee ! 
Et je ne savais pas (ju'elle cdt hate a co point, 
Quand nous te vcnons voir, de reluivj a ton jioing ! 
C'est s'y prendre un peu tard pour faire le jeune homnie! 
Avons-vous (les turbans ? Serait-ce qu'on nie nomine 
Mahom on Boabdil, et non Carlos, repond ! 
Pour nous baisser la herse et nous lever le pont ? 

Hcrnanl, Acte III, Sc. 7. 

1. Point out the cases of rime riche occurring in the 
extract. What are the limitations to its use in French 
verse. 

2. In what respects does Hugo's poetry ditier from 
Gautier's ? 

III. 

Translate : 

Vous etes niais, Charles, lui disait-elle. J'aurai 
bien de la peine t\ vous apprendre le monde. Vous 
avez et^ tres mal pour monsieur des Lupeaulx. 
Je sais bien que c'est un homme peu honorable ; 
mais attendez qu'il soit sans pouvoir, alors vous 
le m^priserez a votre aise. Savez-vous ce que 
Madame Campan nous disait ? " Mes enfants 
tant qu'um homme est au minist^re, adorez-le ; 
tombe-t-il, aidez a le trainer a la voirie. Puissant, 
il est une espece de dieu ; ddtniit, il est au-dessous 
de Marat dans son dgout, parce qu'il vit et que 
Marat dtait mort. La vie est une suite de com- 
binaisons, et il faut les dtudier, les suivre, pour 
arriver a se maintenir toujours en bonne position." 

Eughiie Qrandet, 

1. Who was Marat ? 

2. What striking contrasts exist between Hugo and 
Balzac ? 

y. hien d/t la peine. Why de la 1 

4. attendez qu'il soit Why subjunctWe ? 



Translate : 



IV. 



Lorsque la nuit venait., il quittaic sa place et 
allait s'asseoir au coin cle la chemin^e, toujours 
silencieux et revant. A quoi ? Talvanne le savait 
et il se serait bien gard^ de le lui demander, dans 
la crainte de provoque)* quelque crise de colfere. 
Sans treve, I'eponx songeait a la jeune femme 
niorte, et niaudisaait la destin^e qui la lui avait 
prise. Quand il parlait, pousse par le besoin 
fitrieux do sepancher, c etaient toujours les m^mes 
re'criniinations : Pourquoi la luort de cette femme 
de vingt-huit ans, forte, belle, heureuse, utile, 
lorsque tant de vieillards inalheureux, languis- 
sants ne tenant plus ni k rien, n'achevaient pas 
de mouiir ? Quelle atroce injustice que cette loi 
de I'existence des ^tres qui condamnait la jeunesse 
et la beauts, et dpargnait la decrepitude et la se'ni- 
litd? 

Le Dodeur Rameau. 



-^ 



,rw 



I ! 



i::;:' 



.1 li! 

il; 



1 : i 



% 



catttfUeriBiftfi of coronto« 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



FRKNCH* 



Examiner: W. C. P. Bremner, B.A, 



I. 

Translate : 

(a) Figaro. Le poste n'^tait pas mauvais, parce qu' 
ayant le district dej pansements et des drofjues, je 
vendais souvent aux hommes de bonnes mddecines 
de cheval... 

Le Comte. Qui tuaient les sujets du roi. 

Figaro. Ah ! ah ! il n'y a point de remade 
universel ; mais qui n'ont pas laissd de gu^rir 
quelquefois des Galciens, des Catalans, des Au- 
vemats. 

Le Comte. Pourquoi done I'as tu quittd ? 

Figaro. Quittd ? C'est bien lui-m^me ; on m'a 
desservi aupr^s des puissances. 

(h) C'est une histoire qu'il a forgde en arrivant de 
Madrid, pour donner le change aux galants ct les 
^carter; elle n'est e^icore que sa papilla, mais 
bientdt... 

(c) Fig. La v'l^, la v'l^. 

Le GomJe. Qui clone ? 

Fig. Derri^re sa jalousie, la voila, la voil^. 
Ne regardez pas, ne regardez done pas. 

(d) C'est bien mettre k plaisir de I'importance k 
tout! Le vent pent £Voir dloign^ ce papier, le 
premier venu, que sais-jo / 



I; 






1. le premiei" venu. Translate. All are welcome, 
(c) Barth. Ah, ah, notro ami, cela voiis contrarie 
et vous dt^grise un peu ? Mais n'en d(?campez pas 
moins & I'instant. 

Le Comte (part) J'ai pensd iiie trahir ; (Haut) 

ddcamper! Monti'ez-moi votre brevet d'exemp- 

tion ; quoique je ne sache pas lire, je verrai bientot. 

Barth. Qu' d cela ne tiennc. II est dans ce 

bureau .... 

(/) Barth. (criant.) Qu' est-ce (jue j'entends done ! 
Le cruel barbie)* aura tout laissd tomber par 1' 
escalier, etles plus belles pieces de mon nt^cessaire ! 

id) Voyez le grand malheur pour tant de train ! On 
ne voit goutte sur I'escalier (II montre la clef au 
Comte,) Moi, en montant, j'ai accroch^ une clef.... 

Le Barbier de Seville. 



Translate 



XL 



(a) Au lieu de dix chrdtiens que je dus t' accorder, 
Je t'en veux donner cent ; tu les peux demander. 
Qu'ils aillent sur tes pas apprendre h. ta patrie 
Qu'il est quelques vertus au fond de la Syrie ; 
Qu'ils jugent en partant qui m^ritait le mieux, 
Des Fran9ais ou de moi, I'empire de ces lieux. 

(6) Je voudrais que du ciel le barbare secours 

De mon sang, dans mon coeur, eflt arrSt^ le cours, 
Le jour qu'empoisonnd d'une fiamme profane, 
Ce pur sang des chr^tiens brftla pour Orosmane, 
iie jour que de ta soeur Orosmane charmd. . 
Pardonnez-moi, chrdtiens ; qui ne I'aurait aime ? 

(c) Approche, malheureux, qui viens de ra'arracher, 
De m'6ter pour jamais ce qui me fut si cher ; 
Mdprisable ennemi, qui fais encor paraftre 
L'audace d'un hdros avec Tftme d'un traitre ; 
Tu m'imposais ici pour me dishonorer. 
Tes maux vont dgaler les maux oii tu m 'exposes, 
Et ton ingratitude, et I'horreur que tu causes. 
Avez-vous ordonnd son supplice ? 

Zaire. 

1. Give the principal parts of all the verbs in (a). 

2. e(it arr^td (6) why subjunctive ? 

3. Explain the position in the play of each extract. 

4. Scan lines 1 i, o, 6 of extract (a). 



III. 

Translate : 

C'(^toit dans ces rinntes h6telleries, prdpar^s par 
le grand Esprit, que nous nous reposions t!t I'ombre. 
Lorsque les ventd descendoient du ciel pour bal- 
ancer ce grand c^dre, que le chateau aerien bfi,ti 
sur ses branches alloit flottant avec les oiseaux et 
les voyageurs endorraif? sous ses abris, que rnille 
soupirs sortoient des corridors et des vofltes du 
mobile Edifice, jamais les merveilles de I'ancien 
Monde n'ont approch^ de ce monument du desert. 
Cliaque soir nous allumions un grand feu et 
nous batissions la hutte du voyage avec une dcorce 
6\ev4e sur quatre piquets. Si j'avais t6e une 
dinde sauvage, un ramier, un faisan des bois, nous le 
suspendions devant le chSne embras^, au bout d'une 
gaule plantde en terre, et nous abandonnions au 
vent le soin de tourner la proie du chasseur, Nous 
mangions des mousses appel^es tripe de roche, des 
decrees sucrdes de boi leau, et des pommes de mai, 
qui ont le gofit de la p^che et de la framboise. Lo 
noyer noir, I'erable, le sumac foumissoient le vin 
k notre table. Quelquefois j'allois chercher parmi 
les roseaux une plante dont la fleur allongde en 
cornet contenoit un verre de la plus pure rosde. 

Atala. 

1; C'^toit. Write a note on the ending -oit. 

2. qv£ le chdteau. Explain que here. Write a note 
on the use of the circumflsx accent. 

3. Shew by sentences the use as auxiliaries of devoir 
and pouvoir. 

4. Write an article on the Past Participle. 

IV. 

Translate : 

Lorsqu' en 1826, pour faire taire certains mau- 
vais bruits qui exageraient la portde philosophique 
et la tendance d'incrddulitd de ce premier ouvrage, 
I'auteur crut devoir le comprendre dans I'ddition 
de ses (Euvres completes, il I'accompagna, comme 
cetait son droit de Notes et de refutations qui 
font aujourd'hui de cette lecture le plus singulier 
melange. L'ecrivain de 1826 se critique, se gour- 
mande, se dement, se raille au passd sur tous les 



tons. II se croit corrigd, mais il ne Test pas. Ses 
Notes je I'avoue, sont impatientantes : il ne se 
taiice que pour se louer ; il nous fait souvenir k 
tout instant de ce mot do La Rochefoucauld qu'il 
cite " On aime mieux dire du ir\al de soi que de 
n'en point parler " Si, dix ans plus tard, en 1836, 
M. de Chateaubriand, vieilli et hors de la scene, 
d(lgag^ da vantage de son r61e ofhciel de 1826, 
n'ayant plus 1^ en face de lui M. de Villfele et la 
Congregation, et ce portefeuille de Ministre du 
Roi perdu d'hier et toujours en perspective, — s'il 
s'^tait mis k donner uno troisi^me Edition de 
VEaaai, je me figure, sans trop de crainte de 
me tromper, qu'il aurait fait d'autres Notes 
critiques sur et contre ses Notes de 1826, et 
qu'il aurait donnd raison plus souvent k ce 
jeune et liore auteur qu'il dtait alors, au temps de 
Londres et dans les ann^es de I'exil. 

Sainte-Beuvb. 




^niiptv»it» df Coironto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



FRENCH. 



Examiner: J. Squair. 



I. 

Translate carafuUy, adding notes where neceflsary to 

explain the poetical language, allusions, &c. 

En se quittant, chaque parcelle 
S'en va dans le creuset profoud 
Grossir la p&te universelle, 
Faite des formes que Dieu fond. 



Les ramiers de nouveau roucoulent 
Au coeur de deux jeunes amants, 
Et les perles en dents se inoulent 
Pour I'f^crin des rires charmants. 

Sur le cresson de la fontaine 
Oh le cerf boit, I'oreille au guet, 
De sa main cach^e il ^grfene 
Les grelots d'argent du muguet. 

Le monstre, sous sa chair splendide 
Cachait son fant6me inconnu, 
Et I'oeil de la vierge candide 
Allait au bel dphfebe nu. 

Je vois, de Janvier k d^cembre, 
La procession des bourgeois, 
Les solons qui vont k la chambre, 
Et les Arthurs qui vont au bois. 

Un jour louche et douteux se glisse 
Aux vitres jaunes du i-alon ^ 

Oh figurent, en haut lisse, 
Les aventures d'ApoUon, 



Jl-^" 



IT.- 

Translate : 

Le vieil empereur niort, vito il fait les doux yenx 
A I'empire ! A-t-il pas sa France tres clirdtienno ? 
Ah la part est pourtant belle, et vaut qu'on y tienne ! 

Croire que mon amour e(it si peu de mdinoire ! 
Que jamais ils pourraient, tous ces hommes sans 

gloire, 
Jusqu'^ d' autres amours, plus nobles t\ leiir grd, 
Rapetisser un cceur oh son nom est entrd 

C'est toi ! ne m'en veux pas de fuir, 6tre adord 1 

Des couronnes, fort bien! mais des t^tes !. .cherchez. 
Des nains I que je pourrais, concile ridicule, 
Dans ma peau de lion, emporter comme Hercule ! 
Et qui d^maillotds du manteau violet, 
Auraient la tete encor de raoins quo Triboulet ! 

III. 

Translate : 

Ni les veiTues qui ornaient ce visage martial, ni 
le teint de brique, ni les bras nerveux, ni les hail- 
Ions de la Nanon nVpouvant^rent le tonnelier, qui 
se trouvait encore dans I'&ge oh le coeur tressaille. 

Cette pi^ce, dont les deux croisdes donnaient 
sur la rue, dtaient planchdide ; des panneaux gris, 
h moulures antiques, la boisaient de haut en bas ; 
son plafond se composait de poutres apparentes, 
(^galement peintes en gris, dont les entre-deux 
^taient I'emplis de blanc en bourre qui avait 
jauni. 

Apr^s avoir 6i4 ses gants, il se frotta les mains h 
s'en emporter la peau, si I'dpiderme n'en eiit pas 
4i6 tann^ comme du cuir de Russie, sauf I'odeur 
des mdl^zes. 

La fiatterie n' eraane jamais des grandes S,mes ; 
elle est I'apanage des petits esprits, qui reussissent 
a se rapetisser encore pour mieux entrer dans la 
sphere vitale de la personne autour de laquelle ils 
gravitent. La flattorie sous-entend un intt^ret. 



-^1^ ,, 



IV. 

Translate into French : 

Olydnin's lodgings were almost at the end of the 
village. Occasionally, in the distance beyond the 
Terek, in the very direction from which Olydnin 
had come could be heard the sounds of shots — on 
the Chechnya heights or the Kumitsky plain. 
Oly^nin felt in good spirits after his three months 
of camp life ; his strong body was clean and com- 
fortable after the dust and fatigue of the campaign ; 
all his limbs felt rested, and full of serenity, and 
strength. His mind was also clear and free from 
troubles. He recollected that while he was in 
pe;il he had behaved well, and that he had been 
received into the good fellowship of the heroic 
Karhatzin. The Coaaacka. 

V. 

(For Pass Oandidates only.) 

1. Give an outline of the life of Voltaire. In what 
departments of literature was he most active? What 
are the characteristics of his prose style ? 

2. Define Chateaubriand's position in the develop- 
ment of French literature. 

3. Name and characterize briefly the most important 
poets of the 19th century. 

4. Write notes on : La vie cle Marianne, Le Viable 
Boiteux, Voyage autour de ma chamhre, Nodier, Elle et 
Lui, Octave FeUillet, Le Pere Goriot, La Hai'pe, Sainte- 
Beuve, 

VI. 

(For Honor Candidates only.) 

Refer the following extracts to the periods and 
schools to which they belong. Give concisely and 
definitely your reasons in each cose. 

(a) A vantage de V extreme Laideuv. 
L'fige a fand les Roses de Nais ; 
J'ai vu p^rir la Beauts de Lydie : 
Revers pareil menace en vain C\4ifi ; 
Cl^ls jamais ne peut ^tre enlaidio. 

(b) J'aime de vos longs yeux la Inmifere verdAtre, 
Douce beauts ! mais tout aujourd'hui m'est amer, 
Et rien, ni votre amour, ni le boudoir, ni TArtre, 
Ne me vaut le soleil rayonnant snr la mer 




Et pourtant aiino/-iiioi, tenilro camv I Soyez more, 
Mdmc pour un ingrat, nit^ino [)our un nit'chaiit ; 
Ainaiite on sdjur, soyi;/. la douceur t^plk^uitsre 
D'un glorioux automnu ou d'un Noloil coiichant. 

Courto tUchc ! La toinlte attend ; elle est uvidc ! 
Ah ! lai8Hez-inoi, inon front pose sur voh genoux, 
Oofttor, en regrettiint I'dtd blanc et torrido, 
De rarri^re-siUHon le rayon jaunc et doux ! 

(c) Quelle efit la fin de tout? la vie, ou bien la tc ndic ? 
Est-ce I'onde oh. Ton flotto ? Est-ce I'ombre ou Ton 

tombe ? 
De tant de pas crois^H quel est lo but lointain ? 
Lo bercean contient-il I'homine ou lo destin i 
Sonime8-nouH ici-bas, dans nos niaux, dans nos joios, 
Des rois prddestinds, ou de fatales proies ? 

Seigneur, dites-nous, dites-nous, O Dieu fort, 

Si les nids soyeux 

Sont faits pour les oiseaux ou pour les oiseleurs. 

(d) Et sue ce mot elle donna k sa fille un baiser 
ptuifiionnd qui la rdveilla. L'enfant ouvrit lesycux, 
de grands yeux bleus comme ceux de sa uiilire, et 
regarda, quoi ? Rien, tout, avec cet air seiieux 
et quelquetbis s^v^re dcs petits enfants, qui est un 
niystfere de leur lumineuse innocence devant nos 
cr^pnscuh's de vertus. On dirait qu'ils se sentent 
anges et qu'ils nous saveut hoinmes. 

(e) Le tempa. Rien n'est plus long, puisqu'il est 
la mesure de I'dternit^ ; rien n'est plus court, puis- 
qu'il manque k tous nos projets ; rien n'est plus 
lent pour qui attend, rien de plus rapide pour qui 
jouit ; tous les bommes le negligent, tous en regret- 
tent la perte. 

(/) II relut sa lettre. Elle lui \.?xxit bonne — 
Pauvre petite femme ! pensa-t-il avec attendrisse- 
ment. Elle va me croire plus insensible (ju'un 
roc; il eAt fallu quelques larmes la-dessus: niais, 
moi, je ne peux pas pleurer ; ce n'est pas ma faute. 
Alors, s'^tant verse ile I'eau dans un von e, Rodol- 
phe y trenipa son doigt et il Inissa toniber do haul 
une grosse goutte, qui tit une tache pale sur 
rencro ; puis, che>chant k cacheter la lettre, le 
cachet Amor nel cor se rencontra. 



^itftietttfttt of doroiuo. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIOXS: 1891. 



FOUIITK YKAK. 



FIIKNCH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. Squair. 



1. Sketol) Hugo'H Iif(! subsi'f|ucnt to 1851. 

2. To what jx'riodH of Ilnrjo's life (\o Notre Dan lo 
<le Paris, and Qaatir-mrnjt-trcize bolong ? What 
striking tlifftu'cncos of stylo are thoro in theso works f 

3. Dofino accurately tho position each of the follow- 
innf extracts holds in tho work to which it belongs : 

(a) Doiix piocoH (^tai(!nt hrafjuoos do la chausst'o 
du boulevard sur utie s<nile fa(;ade do maison, le 
niagasin Sal land rouj-ics, et tiruiont sur la fa(;ade a 
ontranc(!, a toute vok'o, u qut!l(|Uos pas do distance, 
a bout portant. Cette imiison, ancion hotel bj\ti 
en pierre do taille, fendue par les boulets comme 
par des coins do for, s'ouvrait, so Id/ardait, se cre- 
vassait du haut en bas. 

i. Translate this extract. 

(6) Loui8 Capet, qiCon ajvpelle. II no voulait 
pas. 7>fmp, dcoutoz done. Dire que le 13 Janvier 
il faisalt cuire des niarrons et qu'il riait avec sa 
famille ! Qmind on Va couch/ de force sur la. 
bascule, qu'on appelle, il n'avait plus ni habit ni 
souliers ; il n'avait que sa chemise, une veste 
piqu^e, une cnlotte de drap gi'is et des bas de sole 
gris. J'ai vu 9a moi. 

i. Explain the italiciAcd portions. 

ii. Show tho appropriatncss of the language used 
here by this individual. 



((!) Gtiuvahi filiht.sHilit ct'H sp'n'iih'K i<n'tifiit:diMH 
tlfi /' CHpvU rcvp.vavt Hur hi'i vu'me, tpu font. In 
/)en»f^)' piii'filff il hi coidrufve. I hV'di^mont, inpiiu* 
jiprcXs ('xiimcii, pmivaiton uiur lo ilc'voiuunont ilo 
liUntrniu!, son iiliiHluntion stoHiiin, hoii (l(<Mijit«!roH- 
MniTR'nt HH|)crlK( > Quoi ! on jin-sonco do toutus Ioh 

f;uoulos (l(! la gncrro civile ouvoitos, attestor 
'hnnianiti' ! 

i. Translate the italiciHcd portion. 

ii, Witli what problom dooH Gauvain find hiniNcif 
confronted ? 

(d) Nous n'ossii v(M'f)nH pas do donnorau locteur tino 
iddo de CO noz totrafcdre, do cctto houcho on for h 
cheval, ilo ce potit (pil j,'anoho ohstrm' d'uti soiircil 
roux on broussaillos tandis (pio I'mmI droit dis|)ar- 
aissait entiferement sons nnc t'nonno vorruo, do cos 
dont8 ddsordonnoos, dbrt'ciidos (;i\ ct lj\, cotnnio Ics 
crdneaux d'uno fortorosse, do cotto Itivro calloiiso 
Htir laquolle uno do cos dents ompidtait coninie la 
ddfense d'un dldphnnt, do oo nionton fourchu, (it 
Burtout do la physionomio rdpnndne sur tout cola. 

i. Translate the extract. « 

ii. Point out carefully its Romantic characteristics. 

(fi) ()k ot Iti, on voit ddbouchor sur los rampes les 
cavornes tdndbrouses do la science qui H^entrec.on- 
pent (lana ses entraillea. Partout sur sa surface 
I'art fait luxurier t\ 1*0511 ses arabesques, ses rosaces, 
et ses dentelles, 

i. Translate the extract and explain carefully the 
italicized words. 

ii. How would you justify Hugo's frequent digres- 
sions ? 

(/) Cependant le ravage s'aggravait. II y avait dcs 
dcorchures et in^nie des fractures aux mats, (jui. 
emboitds dans la charpente de la quille, travcrsent 
les dtages des navires et y font comme de gros 
piliers ronds. Sous les frappements convulsifs du 
canon, le miLt do mizaine s'dtait Idzardd, lo grand 
m^t lui meme dtait cntamd. 

i. Translate the extract. 



graml 



(7) Snr Hon vior^o iiu^tal nion &mo avait auHsi 
Son mij^ustt' orlgiim «'crito coiiiiiiu ici, 
Kt H^tiiH <lont<) i\ C(U(' (|Uult|U(! 'niMoriplion Hfixnio, 
Kt, ri'(!Ht-P(' \u\H, iiui nit'io ? \uw coarun.fe einprointol 
Mais (luH paHHanis auKst, <riinp6rioux paHsants 
Qui vont toiiiourH au c<i'ur par lo chomin doBHcnH I 
Qui, lonujuo lo hasuid jum«ju j\ nous Ich npporto, 
Montor.t notrc oHcaiior ct pounxent noire parte. 
Qui "ionnont bion souvont fcrouvor l' hommo au 

mtirit lien, 
Et (|ui lo font tinier pour d'autrAH que pour Dieu ; 
Los passions, hdlas ! tourbe nn jour accouruo, 
Pour visiter nion Hme ont niontd de la rue, 
Kt du quulquo couteau ho faisant un burin, 
Sans respect pour le vevhe dcrit sur son airain, 
Toutes, niolant ensomblo injure, orreur, blaHphbmo, 
L'ont ray^e en tons sens. 

i. Point out item by item how this extract fits into 
its context. 

ii. Explain carefully the italicized portionn. 

(h) Lo jour baisse ; on attoint quelquo coUino chauve 
Quo I'A-pre solitude ontoure, inunenso et fauvo, 
Et dont pas mfime un arbre, une roche, un buisson, 
No coupo rimmobile et lugubre horizon ; 
Les tchaouchs, aux lueiirs dos premiJjres dtoiles, 
Piquent des pieux on torre et ddroulent Ics toiles ; 
En cerclo autour du camp les feux sont allumds ; 
II est nuit. Qloire h Dieu ! voyafjours las, donnez. 

i. Outline the poem to which this extract belongs. 

ii. Comment on the last line. 

(i) Millions ! millions ! cluUeaux ! listo civile ! 
Un jour je descendis dans les caves de Lille ; 
Je V is ce morne enter. 
Des fantfimes sont 1^ sous terre dans cles chambres, 
Blt^nies, courbt^s, ploytJs ; le nichis tord leura membrea 
Dana aon poignet de fer. 

Sous ces vodtes on souflre, et V air semhle un toxiqne; 
L'aveugle en tA,tonnant donno k boire an phthisiqne ; 
L'eau conle h longs ruisseaux ; 

Presque enfant i\ vingt ans, d(^ja vieillard k trente, 
Le vivant chaque jour sent la mort pdntJtrante 
S'infiltrer dans ses os. 

i. Translate the italicized portions. 




ii. Explain what the extract means. Show how it 
iUustrates Hugo's unfairness, and also liis socialistic 
tendencies. 

ili. Criticize the extract as a piece of poetry. 
(j) Oh ! laissez-moi pleurer sur cette race morto 
Que rapporta I'exil et qu' I'exil remportc, 
Vent fatal qui trois fois d^j^ les enleva! 
Reconduisons au moins ces vieux rois de nos pferos, 
Rends, drapeau de Fleuru8, les honneurs militaires 
A Vorijlamme qui s'en va ! 

i. Explain exactly the historical facts referred to in 
lines 2 and 3. 

ii. Explain the italicized words. 

(k) Enfin, tout au fond, pr6s de la porte, se tenait 
debout dans Tob-scurite, immobile comme une 
statue, un vigoureux horame ch memhres trapus, k 
harnois militaire, d casaqiie atinori^e, dont la face 
carr^e, 'percee d'yeux d Jieur de Ute, fendue d'une 
immense bouche, ddrohant ses oreilles sous deux 
largea abat-venta de cheveux plaU, sans front, ten- 
ait d la foia du chien et du tigre. 

i. Translate the italicized portions, 
ii. Point out the characteristic Romantic expressions. 
. (I) — Toi, rfegle le depart, car nous sommes presses, 

Moi, je vais dire un mot au drole que tu acin ; 

A tout hasard. Peut-il me servir ? Je I'ii'nore. 

Ici juequ' k ce soir je suis le maitre encore. 

Je me vengerai, va ! Comment ? Je ne sais pas ; 

Mais je veux que ce soit effVayant ! De ce pas, 

Va faire nos appr^ts, et h^te-toi. 

>K « » « » 

Une marquise 
Me disait I'autre jour en sortant de I'dglise : 
" Quel est done ce brigand qui, Ik bas, nez au vent, 
Se carre, I'ceil au guet et la hanche en avant, 
Plus d^labrd que Job et plus fier que Bragaj ?e, 
Drapant sa guouserie avec son arrogance, 
Et qui, frola-sant du poing sous sa inanche en 

haillons 
L6p4e d lourd pommeau qui lui bat lea talons, 
Promene, d'une mine alfciere et magistrale, 
Sa cape en dents de scie et ses bas en spirale ? 
i. Translate the italicized portions. 

ii. Criticize the extracts under {I) precisely from the 
Cla»sicist stand-point. 



SilnfUtirisUi? of Sotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. Squair. 



Translate into English: 

(a) Li reis Marsilies i fist molt que traditre : 
De ses paiiens 11 vos enveiat quinze, 
Chnscuiib portout une branche d'olive, 
Noncit^rent vozcez paroles ineJi.smes. 

A voz Franceis im.coiiseil en presistes, 
Lod^rent voz alqaes de legerie. 

(b) Vairs out les oelz et molt tier le visage, 
Gent out lecors et les costez out larges; 
Tant par fut bels, tuit si per Yen esguardent. 
Dist a Rollant : " Tot fols, por quel t'esrages ? 
Qo s^t horn bien que jo sui tes padrastre." 

(c) Reis Corsablis il est de I'altre part ; 
Barbarins est et molt de males arz. 

Gil at parlet a lei de bon vassal, 
Por tot I'or Dew ne voelt estre codarz. 
Es V08 poignant Malprimis de Brigal, 
Plus cort a piet que ne fait uns ohevals. 
Devant Marsilie cil s'escridet molt halt : 
" Jo conduirai mon cors en Rencesvals ; 
Se truia Rollant, ne lairrai que nel mati" 



(d) Oliviers sent qn'ii est a mort lutfrez. 
De lui vengier jamais ne li iert sez; 
En la grar)t presse or i fiert come ber, 
Trenchet cez hatiste« et cez escuz boclers, 
Et piez et poinz, espalles et costez. 
Qui IvLi veaiet SarrazinS desmembrer, 
Un mort sor nitre a la tt^rre jeter, 
De bon vassal li podust remembrer. » 

1. Parse the words in italics 

2. Derive carefully, letter by letter, showing whether 
the changes are regular or not ; portoui, paroles, costez, 
parUt, vengier, fieri, por, escridet, out, sez. 

3. Give the modern equivalent of the following 
words, and explain why they have changed : portout, 
out, set, sui, tea, piet, trm8,podust. 

4. Vassal, her, nafrez, escuz boclers. Derive these 
words. Write notes on the changes of mefining they 
have undergone from earliest times till the present. 

5. Rewrite extract (d) in modern Fiench prose 
form. 

II. 
Trai)slate into English : 

(a) Ab ! gentis rois, quant Diex vos fi$' croisier, 
Toute Egypte doutoit vostre renon ; 

Or perdes tout quant vos voles laissier 
Jherusalem estre en chativoisons. 
Quar quant Diex iist de vo.s election 

Et signor de sa venjance, 
Bien deussies monstier vostre poissance 
De revengier lea mors et les chaitis 
Qui por vous sont et por s'amor ocis. 

(b) Cueurs d'ennuy pieca morfondus, 
Dieu mercy, sont sains et jolis ; 

Alez vous en, prenez pais, 
Yver, vous ne demourres plus : 
Les fourriers d'Este sont venus. 



' 



I 



Translate into Englisii 



III. 



En I'ost de Grece furent quei, 
en crieme sunt et en esfrei. 



trop luT meschiet, ce lur est vis. 
mult i a ja des lur ocis 
et des bleciez et des navrez 
tels duot sunt cil dedens grevez. 
rei Thelamon plaignent et pliirent ; 
la u il gist vunt tuit et curent ; 
grant pour unt que il ne muire. 
mais ce lur dient bien li mire, 

3u'ainz nagueres sera tuz sains ; 
e ce seieiit fi et certains ; 
nes e apoente pas la plaie, 
ne cuident pas qu'a mort le traie. 



croisier, 



ZfttifHettiUtt of ^otonu. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



FRENCH. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: W. H. Fkaser, B.A. 



Translate 



I. 



(a) Montons, montonH encore. D'autres cieux fdcon- 

Sont, par deli!l nos cieux, d'etoiles inondds. 
Franchissant notre azur, rnon hardi telescope 
De notre amas stellaire a perc^ I'enveloppe ; 
Hors de ce tourbillon monstrueux de soleiis, 
J'ai vu I'infini plein de tourbillons pareils ; 
Oui, dans ces gouffres bleus, dans ces protbndeurs 

sombres 
Dont la distance dchappe au langage des nombres, 
II est — je les ai vus — dez nuages laiteux, 
Des gouttes de lunii^re aux rayons si douteux, 
Qu'un ver luisant cachd dans I'herbe de nos routes, 
Jette assez de lueur pour les ^clipser toutes. 

PONSARD. 

(6) A gauche, une trainee de roches labourdes et 
dfecharn(?es s'allonge en promontoire jusqu'k une 
arcade de gr^ve durcie, que les hautes marges ont 
ouverte et d'oii la vue par trois c6t^s plonge sur 
rOc^an. Sous la bise qui siffle, il se ht^risse de 
flots viold,tres ; les nuages qui passent le marbrent 
de plaques encore plus sombres ; si loin que le 
regard porte, c'est une agitation maladive de vague.s 
temes, entre-croisdes et disloquees, sorte de peau 
mouvante qui tressaille, tordue par une fifevfe in- 



yrieure ; de temps en tomps, uiio raie d'^cume qui 
les traverse marque un soubresaut plus violent. 
Cii et \h, entre les intervalles des nungea, la lumibre 
•yeoupe quelqufis champs glauques sur la plaine 
uniforme ; lour dclat fauve lenr conleur malsaine, 
ajoutent t\ I'dtrangett? et aux mesures de I'horizon. 
Ces sinistres lueurs changeantes, ces reflets d'dtain 
sur une lioule de plomb, ces scories blanches col- 
Ides aux roches, cet aspect gluant des vagues, don- 
nent I'idde d'un creuset gigantesque, dont le mdtal 
bouillonne et luit. Taine. 

(c) L'un, d'une vertu haute et austere, d'une 
probity au-dessus de nos mffiurs, d'une vdrite k 
r^preuve de la cour, pliilosophe sans ostentation, 
chrdtien sans faiblesse, courtisan sans passion, 
I'arbitre du bon godt et de la la rigidity des bien- 
sdances, I'ennemi du faux, I'iuni et le protecteur du 

mdrite, le zelateur de la gloire de la nation, le cen- 
seur de la licence publique ; enfin un de ces hom- 
mes qui seniblent etre comme les restes des ancien- 
nes mceurs, et qui seuls ne sont pas de notre si^cle. 
L'autre, d'un gdnie vaste et heureux,d'un candeur 
qui caractdrise toujours les grandes kmen et les 
espriis du premier ord re, Tornement de I'^piscopat, 
et dont le clergd de France se i'era honneur dans tous 
les sifecles ; un dv^que au milieu de la cour ; I'hom- 
me de tous les talents et de toutes les sciences, le 
docteur de toutes les ^glises, la terreur de tous 
les siecles, le PSre du dix-septiSme si^cle, et a qui 
il n'a manqud que d'etre no dans les premiers 
temps pour avoir dtd la lumiere des conciles, I'jlme 
des P6res assembles, dicte dos canons, et prdsidd 
k Niede et a Eph^se. 

Massillon. 



i 



A 



Translate into French 



II. 



h 



(a) Marius was by birth a man of the people 
in the best sense ; he sprang neither from the 
proud nobility nor yet from the low populace 
of the Forum. Family honours he had none, 
liberal education he had none; his temper was 
rude and coarse, and on provocation brutally 
ferocious ; he had little eloquence or skill in civil 
affairs, but he was not without a certain cunning, 
with which he tried to supply their place. On the 
other hand, he was a good soldier, and a good 
officer, and we see no reason why we should not 
add a good general. He rose from the ranks to 
his consulships mainly, if not wholly, by his own 
merit. Fbeeman. 

(b) His Imperial Majesty comes first, and all 
alone ! I have often seen him, and always find 
the same difficulty in analyzing my own impres- 
sions, or conveying them, as to that impassive, 
reserved, changeless, dark, far-removed counten- 
ance. * * Only a flatterer could call the proud 
cold face handsome, and only an enemy would, I 
think, style its austere constraint and lofty discon- 
tent ill-lookinof. It is a typical Japanese man's 
foce in many points. You would see a thousand 
such in a week's travelling hereabouts, but this 
one stands apart in character as in elevation, 
touched in its most ordinary lines? and lineaments 
with an almost marble reticence and an iron-clad 
refusal to be common, even if nature stamped it 
common, in so much that the slightest bend of the 
brow in salutation appears to be the result of a 
superhuman effort of reluctant will. One would 
say this is a Mikado of the past, who is obliged 
to belong to and to bow before the too prevailing 
present, but who, nevertheless, keeps his secret 
soul ap'.rt in the stem and great society of his 
ancestors, and " with the far-off company of anti- 
que Shinto gods." 

Edwin Arnold. 



> 



Cltifliet0ftff of eoronto* 



SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



FRENCH COMPOSITION. 



Examiner : J. Squair, B.A. 

Write an essay in French on any one of the follow- 
ing topics : 

(a) L'avenir du Canada. 

(6) Comment on fait la politique au Canada. 

(c) Les plaisirs de I'hiver. 

(d) L'alliance entre la France et la Kussie. 

(e) Perrette et le pot au lait. 



_j| 



i) 



.; 



if 



Winibttnitp of Cotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



gi:rman. 



Examiner: G. H. Needler, B.A., Ph.D. 



•»• Candidntes for Honors iiro required to write all aniwera in 

Uermuu, 

I. 

Translate : 

JGallciiftctii. (J<J <[kU I'm '•J^Jcnfitctilcbcn SluflenbKcfc, 
91«o rr tern ^^iUlty^cift niibfv ift, alo foitft, 
Unt ct'iic 'i^\\\)\t fret l)ot an tni? 3ri)icf|a(. 
Sold) cin iDJomriit iraro ale* id) i» rev %\d)t, 
Xk vor trr ii\\^\m "iiUmx voibcirtliifl, 
Wctrtiifcnyoll iiii cincn 53aum AflflMU, 
^fnauiU fa I) in tk (fbcnc. Die gcucr 
XcH Caf^fr«J branntcu tilflcv Mivd) ten S^lfbcl, 
2)cr ffiaffcn tumpfcd 9ifluM)cn unterbrfld), 
Dcr 3lunfcn 9lut finfiJrniirt niir tic ©tiUe. 
^Icin rtflnjcg Ccbcn c^iiijV vciflanrtcncd 
Unt tilnfticjcc, in tiefein 2luc\cnblt(f 
2ln mcincm tnncren ©ciiic^t ijoriibcr, 
Unt) an tc© nadjftcn aWovnend ©rincffal fnapftc 
Der abnun0v)oUc ©cift tic fcrnf^c 3ufunft. 

Da faflt'" id) alfo ju miv fclbft : ®o iMclcn 
©cbirtcft tu ! Sic fol^icn tcincn ©tcrncn, 
Unt fc0en, wie auf tine f\ro§c 9innuncr, 
3br Slllcg auf tcin cinjiii .&aupt, unt ftnb 
3n tcinc^ ©lilcfpfi ®d)iff mil tie flefticAcn. 
3)od; fommcn wirt tcr taiy wo ticfc allc 
I)a« (Sd)i(ffal wietcr au^cinantcr ftrcut, 
9lur wen'flc werten trcu bci tir »erl)avvcn. 
iCcn ijiiJdu id) wiffen, tcr tev tveuftc mir 
SPon aUcn if*, tie tiefcs Sa^cr cinid)lic§t. 
©icb mir cin 3cid)en. ed)icfial! Dcr foU'g fein, 
!Der an bcm nficbflcn aWor^cn mir j^ucrfl 
Snt^cgcnfommt mit eincm 8icbecsjctct)cn." 

ScHiLi.iiK, Wallenste'iTis Tod. 



1. Der an devi na('h>*iev Movjfoi iti/ir zufVftt 
Entr/P(j&iilcornmt mif, einem LieheHzeiclien. 

Who (lid this turn nut t<> bo ? Show liy a nsfer- 
enco to suhsciiuunt events whctlicr this sign proved 
true or falHo. 

2. Sketch briefly the chiiniuter of Max Piccolomini 
and the part he plays in Wallenntein. 

II. 

Translate : 

Es argert mich iedesinal, w "ch seho, dass 
man aucn Gottes liebe Blumen, cuon so wio uns, 

in Kasten getheilt hat, und nach ahnlichen Auszer- 
lichkeiten, ntiiulich nach Staubluden-VerHchiedon- 
hoit. Soil doch mal cine Eiiitheiiung statt finden, 
HO folgo nuiti d<Mn Vorschlafjo Thoopiirasts, der die 
Blumen mehr nach dom Qeiste, niimlich nach 
ihrem Geruch, cintheilen woUto. Was mich be- 
trifft, 80 habe ich in der Naturwissensohaft mein 
eigenes System, und demnaeh theile ich Alles eiii : 
in Dasjcnige, was man e.ssen kann, und in Dasje- 
nige, was man nicht essen kann. 

Hi;iNE, llarzreise. 

1. Give your estimate of Heine, the man and the 
writer, as he shows himself in his HarzreiHe. 

2. State concisely Heine's relation to the Romantic 
School. 

III. 
Translate : 

" Das ist ein<^ Kapelle, nicht wahr ? " fragte sie, 
als sie an seiner Seite in den feiorlich dammernden 
Eaum eintrat. " Du kannst e^^ immerhin so nen- 
nen," erwiderte er, " es ist das Grabmal unserer 
Kdnigin Luise ; hast Du von der schon einmal 
etwas gehort ?" Sie schiittelte das Ilaupt. " Nun, 
siehst Du," erklarte er weiter. " sie wird bei uns 
zu Lande wie eine Heilijje geliebt und verehrt, 
well sie so gut war." Er hatte dera Aufseher 
gewinkt, dasz er seiner nicht bedUrfte, und jetzt 
stand er mit ihr vor dem Marmorbilde der ruhen- 
den Konigin. Plotzlich fuhlte er, wie des Madchens 
beide Hiinde seinen Arm ergriften ; er wandte sich 
zu ihr und sah sie halbgeoffheten Mundes mit 



/ 



T 



/ 



] 



(fi'oszon Auf^cn nuf iIen Bildwork niederstarro n 
Es war dor AuHdruck, den cr an j( netn Abendu 
do8 Faust in ihron ZU^en bcrnerkt naite. 

Wh.denhuuch, Die lieUif/e Frau. 

1. an jenem Abende den FavM.. What evening is 
here referred to ? 

2. Toll the story of Di9 Danaide. 

IV. 

Translate : 

Erhabtier Oeist, dii gabst mir, gabst mir alles, 

Wiirum ich bat. Du bust mir nicht umsonst 

Dein Angesicht im Feuer zugowendet. 

Qabst mir die berriiuhe Natur zuin Konigreich, 

Kraft, sie zii fiihlen, zu genioszon. Nicht 

Kalt 8tauncnd«!ri B)!Hi:ch erlaubst du nur, 

Vergonnest mil- in ihre ticfe Bnist, 

Wie in den Busen eines Fi-eunds, zu schauen. 

Du fuhrst die Reihe der Lebendigen 

Vor mir vorbei und lehrst mich meinc Briider 

Im stiilen Busch, in Luft und Wasser konnen. 

Und wenn der Sturm im Wnlde braust und knarrt 

Die Riesenfichto stUrzend Nachbnrasto 

Und Nachbnrstamme quetschend iiiederstreift, 

Und ihrora Full dunipf h(»hl der Hiigel donnert, 

Dann fuhrst du mich zur sichnrn Hohle, zeigst 

Mich dann mir nclbst, und meiner eignen Brust 

Geheime ticfe Wunder oHhen sich. 

Und steigt vor meinem Blick der reine Mond 

Besanftigend heriiber, schweben mir 

Von Felsenwanden, aus dem feuchten Busch 

Der Vorwelt silberne Gestalten auf 

Und lindern der Betrachtung strenge Lust. 

Goethe, Faust, Pt. I. 

1. At what point in the drama is thir monologue 
delivered ? Describe Faust's relations with Mephis- 
topheles from here to the end of Pt. I., omitting the 
Walpurgisnacht and tho Walpurgisnachtstraum. 

2. Erhabener Oeiat, du, gabst mir, gabat mir allea 
Warum ich bat. 

Who is the erhabener Geiat, and under what 
circumstances had he been previously cal!^: *" upon by 
Faust ? 



V. 
Translate : 

(a) Fi-eilich ware os ein herrliches Bin** nm unaern 
Itjtellekt, wenn er fur sich besUinde, also urspriing- 
liche und reine Intelligenz ware und nicht oin 
blosz sekundares Vermbgen, welches notwendig 
auf eineni Willon wurzelt, vermdge dieser Basis 
aber eine Verutireinijjung fast aller seiner Erkennt- 
nisse und Urteile zu erleiden hat. Denn ware 
dies nicht, so konnte er ein reines Organ der Er- 
kenntnis und Wahiheit sein. Allein wie es jetzt 
steht, wie selten werden wir da ganz klar sehen 
in einer Sache, bei der wir irgendwie interessiert 
sind ! Es ist knum mciglich : denn bei jedem 
Argument und jedem hinzu kommendcn Datum 
spricht sogjeich der VVille mit, und zwar ohne dasz 
man seine Stinnne von der des Intellt'kts selbst 
unterscheiden konnte, indem ja beide zu einem 
Ich versch'nolzon sind. Am deutlichsten wird 
dies, wenn wir den Ausgung einer uns angelegenen 
Sache prognosti7/ieren wollen : da verfalscht das 
Interesse fastjeden Schrittdes Intellckts, bald als 
Furcht, bald als Holinuiig. — Schopenhauer. 

(b) Im Grenzenlosen sich zu finden, 

Wird gern der einzelne verschwinden. 

Da lost sich jcder Uberdnisz ; 
Statt heiszem Wiinschen, wildem Wollen, 
Statt last'gem Fordern, strengem Sollen 
Sich aufzugnben, ist Genusz. 

Weltseele, komm, uns zu durchdringen ! 

Dann mit dem Weltgeist selbst zu ringen, 

Wird unsrei- Kvafte Hochberuf. 

Teilneliniend fUhren gute Gei.ster, 

Gelinde leitend hochste Meister 

Zu dem, der alles schafft und schuf. 
Und umzuschaffen das Geschaffne, 

Damit sich's nicht zum Starren waffne, 

Wirkt ewiges, lebendiges Thun. 

Und was nicht war, nun will es werden, 

Zu reinen Sonnen, farbigen Erden ; 

In keinem Falle darf es ruhn. 
'•■" ' Es soil sich regen, schaffend handeln, 
' Erst sich gestalten, dann verwandeln ; 

Nur scheinbar steht's Momente still. 

Das Ewige regt sich fort in alien, 

Denn alles musz in Nichts zerfallen, 

Wenn es im Sein beharren will. — Goethe. 



/ 



Qlnftotrisftt? of STorontd. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GERMAN. 



Examiner: A. F. Chamberlain, M.A. 



I. 

1. Tnuislate into German any jive of the following: 
(rt) Whoever would do good in the world, ought 
not to deal in censure. We ought not to destroy, but 
rather construct. 

(/>) There is no business, no avocation whatever, 
whicli will not permit a man, who has the inclin.^ ion, 
to give a little time every day to study. 

(c) P]veiy good writer is to be read, and dili- 
gently ; and when the volume is finished, is to be gone 
throuoji aij;ain fiom the beginning. 

{d) A wise man knows an ignorant one, because 
ho has been ignorant himself ; but the ignorant cannot 
recognise the wise, because he has never been wise. 

(e) The reason why borrowed books are seldom 
returned, is that it is easier to retain the books them- 
selves than what is inside of them. 

(/) No man having leisure to learn all things, a 
wise man must be sure to lay hold on that which is 
most useful. 

(<;) Knowledge is of two kinds. We know a sub- 
ject ourselves, or we know where we can find informa- 
tion upon it. 

(Ji) Ambition is often overtaken by calamity, 
because it is not aware of its pursuer, and never looks 
behind. 

(^) Talkiiiy,- and eloquence are not the same : to 
speak, and to s])eak well, are two things. A fool may 
talk, but a wise man speaks. 



2. Translate into English any Jive oi the following, 
noting carefully gi'ammatical ana idiomatic peculiari- 
ties: 

(a) Wir wollen sein ein einig Volk von BiUdcin, 
In keiner Noth uns trennen iind Oefahr. 
Wir wollen trauen anf den libchstou Gott 
Und uns nicht furchten vor der Maclit dor 
Menschen. — Schillkk. 

(6) Was uns Not ist, uns mini Heil 
Ward's gegrlindet von den Viitern ; 
Aber das ist unser Teil, 
Dasz wir griindea fiir die Spatern. — E. Gkibel. 

(c) Ja, einst bricht ein Alorgen an, 
Der nie wieder weicht der Nacht ; 
Wo der Kampf ist abgethan 

Mit des Bosen dunkler Macht. — de Wettb. 

(d) Eine schbne Menschenseele finden, 

Ist Gewinn ; ein schdnerer Gewinn ist, 

Sie erhalten, und der schonst' und schwerste, 

Sie, die schon verloren war, zu retten. — Herder. 

(«) Keine Spmche driickt Sachen aus, sondern 
nur Namen ; auch keine menschliche Vernunft also 
erkeiint Sachen, sondern sie hat nur Merkmale von 
ihnen, die sie mit Worten bezeichnet. — Herder. 

(/') Der Mensch auf der rohesfcon Stut'e nahrt 
sich uberall von der Jagd, wozu seltener der Fischfang 
kommt ; erst von der Jagd geht er zum Noniadenleben, 
zur Viehzucht iiber. — Geiger. 

(g) Die Juden sollen besondere Heimlichkeiten 
von dem Namen Gottes gewuszt haben. Das lasse ich 
aber gut sein und wUnsche nur, dasz das Andeuken an 
Gott und eine jede Spur, daraus wir ihn erkennen 
konnen, mir und alien Menschen iiber AUes grosz und 
herrlich sein moge. — M. Claudius. 

(h) Das ganze Land von der Elbe an, in der Breite 
und in dei* Langc, bis an die Heidenschaft in Littuuen 
und bis jenseit Ungarn, alles hiesz Wenden. Das geht 
aus ihrer Sprache hervor, denn sie weichen daiin nicht 

sehr von einander ab. — A.US der Sachsischen Chron jk. 

(i) Dieserauszergewohnliche Mann stain in te aus 
Genua. Geboren mit eineni uuwiderstehliclien Drange, 
indie hohe See hinauszui'ahien, sasz er aJs Kind, schuu- 
end und sinnend, stundenlang am Ufer des Meeies und 
ging schon init seinem vierzehnten Jahre zu schitie. — 
Karl Gude. 



i 






I 






I 






/ 



n. 

1. Write a conciw account of tlie formation of the 
plurals of German nouns, illustrating your answer by 
proper examples. 

2. Write sentences indicatinj; clearly the sense in 
which each of the followlrtg words is used in German : 
hofentlich, aviuj, ijdegeu, umiid'glich, zerrlnnen, 
spotten. 

3. Mention the chief points with regard to the form- 
ation and use of compound nouns in German. Give 
examples showing clearly the rules and the exceptions. 

4. Compare the uses of the Infinitive in German and 
in English. 

III. 

(a) Translate into German : 

Henry VIII. appointed Sir Thomas More to 
carry an angry message to Francis I. of France. 
Sir Thomas told him tlrnt he feared, if he carried 
such a message to so violent a king as Francis, it 
might cost him his head. " Never fear," said the 
king, "if Francis should cut off your head, I would 
make every Frenchman now in London a head 
.shorter." " I am obliged to your Majesty," said 
Sir Thomas, "but I much fear if any of their heads 
will fit my shoulders." 

(6) Translate into English : 

Droben stehet die Kapelle, 
Schauet still ins Thai hinab ; 
Drunten singt bei Wies' und Quelle 
Froh und hell der Hirten Knab'. 

IVaurig tcint das Glbcklein nieder, 
Schauerlich der Leichenchor ; 
Stille sind die frohen Lieder, 
Und der Knabe lauscht empor. 

Droben bringt man sie zum Grabe, 
Die sich freuten in dem Thai. 
Hirt^knabe, Hirtenknabe ! 
Dir auch singt man dort einmal. 

LuDWiG Uhi.and. 
[ovkb] 



IV. 

1. Write brief notes on : Hilihilnrimfulied, N other, 
KaiMvckro'iiilc, BIctvmr von A id, (rottfricd von 
l:itnin»})nrt/. 

2. Indicate fcho state of German iitei'atnre in the l.")tli 
and IGth centuries, mentioning the chief writ' s iind 
their principal works. 

3. Give some account of Friedrich von Spee and his 
writings. 



amUftfitfttf of Cotonto. 



ker, 
von 

.-)tli 
md 

his 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GERMAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: W. H. vandkhSmissen, M.A. 



Il 



I. 

(a) Translate : 

(16 si sich liete geleit 

anir alte bettestat, 

si bereite aber ein bat 

init weinenden ougen : 

wan si truoc tougen 

nahe in ir gemiiete 

die aller meisten gUete, 

die ich von kinde ie veriuim. 

welch kint geteto ouch le alsam ? 

des einen si sich gar verwac, 

gelebete si morne den tac, 

daz si benamen ir leben 

umbe ir herren welte geben. 

1. Conjugate liete, geleit, truoc, vemam, verivac, 
gchen. 

2. What phonetic changes are exemplified in the 
modern forms of hat, ougen, gemiiete, vemam, umbe ? 

3. Indicate the pronounciation in M. H. G. and N. 
H. G. respectively of aber, ie, veimam, leben. 

4. Name the author, and give an outline of this work, 
pointing out its more prominent medieevai character- 
istics. 



I ' 



(6) Translate : 

Kiinc Oonstantin dor gap so vil, 

als ich es iu bescheideu wil, 

dcni stuol ze Rome, sper, kriuz undo krSno. 

zehant der engel lAte schre : 

ow6, ow6, zem dritten w6 ! 

ez stuontdiu kristenheit mit ziihten 'och6ne : 

Der ist nfl ein gift gevallen ; 

ir honec ist worden zeiner gallen. 

daz wirt der werlt her nS«h vil leit. 

alle fiirsteu lebent nfl mit eren ; 

wan der hce^.ste ist geswachet. 

daz h4t der pt'afien wal gemachet : 

daz si dir, suezer got, gekleit. 

die pfaffen wellent leien reht verkeren. 

der engel h&t uns wkv geseit. 

5. Write explanatory notes on this poem, particu- 
larly on lines 11 and 12, and show how it exhibits the 
political opinions of the author. 

6. Give some account of the author's career, and of 
the times in which he lived. 

7. Conjugate gap, heacheiden, schre. 

(c) Translate : 

M einem grlienen achmardi 
truoc si den wunsch von pardis, 
bSde wurzeln unde ris. 
das was ein dine, daz hiez der gral, 
erden wunsches uberwal. 
Repanse de schoy si hiez, 
die sich der gral tragen liez. 
der grM was von sblher art ; 
wol muoser kiusche stu bewart ; 
die sin ze rehte solde pflegn, 
die muose valsches sich bewetrn. 

8. Give some account of the poem from which this 
extract is taken, and of its author. 

9. Conjugate kom, such, tragen, liez. 

{d) Translate : 

" Nu si, swie stare si welle ! ine l&ze der reise niht 
hin zuo Priinhilde. swaz halt mir geschiht. 
durch ir unmS,zen schoeno muoz ez gew&get sin. 
waz, ob mir got gefiieget, daz si mir volget an den 

Rin?" 



Sd wil ich iu daz rdten " sprach dd Hagone, 
" ir bitet Sifrit mit iu zo tragene 
die vil starken rcise : daz iut nu min rki : 
sit imo daz ist klindec, wie ez umb die frouwen 

Stat." 

10. Scan the stanza. 

11. Give the rules for the construction of the Nibe- 
lungeustrophe, and indicate the general character of 
M. U. G. versification. 

12. Indicate the part played by Gunther, Brlinhilde, 
Hagen, and Kriemhild respectively in this poem. 

13. To what source do we owe a knowledge of the 
previous relations between Siegfried and Brlinhild ? 
Sketch the tale cf the Nibelungenhort, and of the loves 
of the two characters just mentioned according to this 
source. 



?»■ 



uni\»tvnit9 of Soronto< 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 18U1. 



CANDIDATES FOll B.A. 



GERMAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : G. H. Nkeuleh, B.A., Pu.D. 



I. 

A Translate into modern German : 

Thiu menigl thiu dar stuont inti giliQrta quudun 
thaz thenar gitun uuuri, andcre quudun : ' cngil 
sprah zi imo.' Tho nntlingita ther lieilant inti 
quad : ' nalles thurah niih thisiu stcmnia quam, oh 
tnurah iuuuih. Nu i.st (hiom thesses mittilgar- 
tos, nu thor huroi-.to thcsses mittilgartcs uuirdit 
eruuorpt'an uz. Inti ih, ob ill erhaban uuirdu fon 
ordu, ailiu thinsu zi mir sulbemo.' Thaz quad her 
gizeihanOnti uuelihcmo todo sterbenti uuari. Th5 
antlingita imo thiu menigl : ■ uuir gihOrtumea fon 
theru 6vvu uuanta Christ uuonSt zi Cuuidu ; inti 
vvuo quidistu : gilinptit zi erhet'anne mannes sun ? 
Uuer ist ther mannes sun ? ' Th5 quad ther heil- 
ant : ' noh nu ist lucil lioht in iu. Geet unz ir 
lioht hab€t, thaz iuuuih tinstarnessi ni bifuhe ; thie 
dar in tinstarncssc geet ni uueiz uuara her ferit. 
Mit diu ir lioht hab€t, giloubet in lioht, thaz ir 
liohtes barn sit.' 

Tatian. 

1. Give the principal parts of atuont, gihorta, qua- 
dun, quam, eruuor^fan, erhaban, thinsu. 

2. ist, geet. Give the infinitive and the present indi- 
cative (sing, and plur.) of each of these verbs. 

3. ther herosto. Decline in the singular (all gcndera.) 



I ' 



B TranslaiO into EngliHh : 
So or yiuuisHo thjfr l)ird.iul uuur dKihtin Krist giboran 

uuanl, 

thuht ur Mar in t'^Hti niihilo inkiiHti. 
Zi inio er ouli thu ladota tliiu uulsuii man thoih H^gcta, 

niit in gintuant or tliingon ioh filu liulingon. 
Thia /lb di.scoia or fon in, hu thcr stdrro giuuon uuas 

queinan '/A in, 

hat sio \z ouh biruahtin, bi thaz sclba kind irsfialitin. 
' Oidiiot mill,' quad or, ' dnauuart bi thos stc^rron fart, 

86 fdret, oiscot thfiro bi tliaz kind sure. 
Sin (liucot iollcho ioli filu giuuaralldio, 

sliumo duct ouli tlidnno iz mir zi uuizzanno. 
In uuillu faran bt^ton nan (so riot mir filu mdnag man), 

thaz ill tharziia gitliinge, ioli imo ouh geba bringo.' 

OnFmo, Kvangelienhdrmonie. 

1. ^'.'rito out in full tho present indicative and the 
preterite indicative of one strong verb, and of one weak 
verb from this extract. 

2. Decline er, ih, (sing, and plyr. of both.) 

li 

1. Give the three periods in tlie development of the 
High German language, shewing the main changes it 
underwent in passing from stage to stage, and explain- 
ing why dirterent dates may be given as approximately 
marking the border-line between the MHG. and NHG. 
periods. 

2. Which 0* the High German dialects furnished the 
principal lii/erary monuments of the OHG period ? 
Give their geographical position, and assign each of the 
following to the proper dialect : Tatian, Ludwigslied, 
St Emmeramer Gebet, Otfrid. 

3. What is the most thorough-going change notice- 
able in the German vowels when we compare tho 
MHG. with the NHG. period ? Illustrate by an ex- 
ample for each vowel, 

4. Give the MHG. equivalents of the following 
words, writing notes on changes in the vowels or con- 
sonants of each : — baum, durum, haus, farbe, lieh, treue, 
Sonne, achlawje, geier, blatt. 



m. 

Translate into modern German ; 

Daz evangelium zolit una, daz daz himilrih 
kolih Hi demo hdtihdrro, der den iiiorirenis f ruo in 
Hinan uutnkarten Hamenoti dei uuerhliuti. Uuer 
uuirdit rehtero kikagenuiArZzit demo h^Hh^rren, 
denne unser hCrro der heilige Christ ? der dir 
rihtet alia die er kiMCUof, als6 der hdkHhSrro rihtet 
die imo untortfinen. Der huoHh6rro ladoto alien 
den iac die uuerhliuto in sinan uuinkarten, sume- 
Hche fruo, .sumeliche ze mittemo morgene, sume- 
liche zi mittemo taga, sumliche ze n6na, sumeliche 
ana demo {i.banda oder in suelthemo cite si imo 
zuo chomon. Alsd nc gistilte unser hdrro der 
almahtige got vone anakenge dcre uuerlti unzi ana 
den onte die predigdre ci sentenna zi dera Idra 
sineru iruuelitono. Der uuinkarte pizeichinet die 
gotis S, in der dir kisezzet unde kenhtet uuerdent 
elliu rcht als6 diu uuinreba kerihtet uuirdit in 
demo scuzzelinge. 

Weaaobrv/nner PredAgt. 

Note. — gistilte - Hess ab ; acuzzelinge • Schossling 
(Zweig.) 



Slnfiffrifttf of Coronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIUNH: ]H»1. 



C'ANDIDATKH Foil B.A 



GKUMAN. 

HONORS. 
GOETHE. 



] 



Examiner : W. H. vanderSmissen, M.A. 



I 

Translate ; 

9W(§bHcfcnbc, mf^rcbcntc bu ! 

I'ippcn I wai cntbflud)t wo^d 
Sold^m furc^tbarcn ©riHuclfdjlunb. 

Denn bcr 93iJ«arHflc wol)ltl)<itifl frfdjefnenb, 
SGolf^flrimm untfr fd;afwolliflcm 9LMie§, 
Ifflix tfl er TOcit fcfjrecfltdKr aid bed brelfiSpfiflcn 
^unbcd fHadjcn. 

Slenflfllid) laufdjcnb Pc(>n wi'r bo, 
SSann? wte? roo nur bxi^t'^ ^eroor 
eoldjcr Jilrfe 
Stefauflauernbed Ungctl^Qm ? 

Goethe, Faust, Act III. 

1. Show the connection of this passage with the 
plot. 

2. Contrast the languajjo and versification of this 
passage with that of Goethe's " Iphigenie." 

(/>) Sie schleicht heran, an abortausend Enden 

Unfruchtbar seibst Unfruchtbarkeit zu spenden ; 
Nun schwillt's und wachst und lollt und iiberzieht 
D(M' wiisten Strocke widerlich Gebiot. 
Da horrschot Well' auf Welle kraftbegeistet, 
Zieht sic'h /uriick >nid cs ist nichts gcloistet, 



Was zur Veraweiflung mich botuigstij^en konnte I 
Zwecklose Kraft unban. iiger Elemcnte ! 
Da wagt ineiu Goist sich solbst zii UborHiegon ; 
Hier mocbt' ich Uampfen, diesj; mocht' icb besiegen. 

Ihid, Act IV. 

3. How is the wish expressed in the last two lines 
carried out in the last act ? Illustrate your reply by 
quotations. 

4. Describe the dSnouement of the play, and show 
how it agrees with the pact between Faust and Mepliisto 
in Pt. I., giving quotations. 

II. 

1. How do Goethe's autobiograpical works reveal his 
personal characteristics as a man and an author ? 

2. Estimate the effect of Goethe's Itnlian journey on 
the development of his genius, specifying the works 
particularly influenced thereby. 

3. Contrast Mei-sfer's Wanderjahre with the Lehr- 
jahre, and give some account of the former. 

4. Estimate the value to German literature of 
Goethe's friendship with Hchiller, stating what works 
of the former in particular received an impulse fr(»m 
the latter, and illustrating your answer by allusions 
to Schiller's correspondence. 

III. 
Translate with explanatory notes : 

SULETKA. 

Kaam dasz ich dich wieder babe, 
Dich mit Kusz und Liedern labe, 
Bist du still in dich gekehret ; 
Was beengt und driickt und stJiret ? 

Hatem. 

Ach, Suleika, soil ich's sagen? 
Statt zu loben mocht' ich klao:en ! 
Sangest sonst nur meine Lieder, 
Itnmer neu und immer wieder. 

Sollte wohl auch diese loben, 
Doch "^'o siiid luir oingesclioben ; 
?«iicbt von Hatis, nicht Nisami, 
Nicht Saadi, nicht von Dschami. 



/ 



Kenn' ich doch der Vtiter Menge, 
Sylb' urn Syll«e, Klang uin Klange, 
Im Gediichtnisz unverloren ; 
. Diese da sind neii geboren. 

Geatern wurden sie gedichtet. 
Sag": hast du dich neu verpflichtet ? 
Hauchcst du so froh-verwegeii 
Freinden Athem uiir entgegen, 

Der dich eben so belebet, 
Ebon so in Liebe schwebet, 
Lockend, ladend zum Vereine, 
So harmonisch als der meine ? 

SULEIKA. 

War Hateni lange doch entfernt, 
Das Madchen hatte was gelernt, 
Von ihm war si e so schon gelobt, 
Da hat die Trennung sich erprobt. 
Wohl, dasz sie dir nicht t'remde scheinen ; 
Sie sind Snleika's, sind die deinen. 

GoETHK, Divan. 

1. Who was Snleika ? Describe Goethe's relations 
to her in real life, and show how the poet has idealized 
it in the "Divan." 

2. Give the tithis of three of the other books of this 
work, and indicate the nature of their contents. 

3. Mention some cf the poems written by Suleika, 
with quotations. 

•k Trace the origin of Goethe's studies in Oriental 
poetry, and name some poets who followed his lead in 
this direction. 



f 



1 



eAtiiiifv0(t9 of srototito^ 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH EXAMINATION. 



GERMAN. 

HONORS. 



JEsca'mi'ntr : A. F. Chamberlain, MA. 



I. 

Translate into English : 

(a) Sie bliiben schon in Feld und Wald die Blumen 

lenzgeboren, 
Der Lerche Sang, der Drossel Schlag dringt hell zu 

unsern Ohren, 
Der Ostergloeken froher Klang verkiindet Aufer- 

stehen, 
Der Genius des Lenzes zieht durch Feld und Wald 

und Hohen 
XJnd Rosenknospenbrechenauf beim Lied der Nach- 

tigallen, 
Und Jubelhymnen weihevoll dem groszen Gott 

erschallen. 
Sie bluheii schon in holdem Schmuck, von heilgem 

Licht umflossen, 
Die Geistesblumen rein und schon, der Wahrheit 

Schosz entsprossen. 
Ein groszer Geistesfriihlingtagt, die Geister ma( htig 

ringen, 
Fiir Wahrheit, Freiheit, Recht und Licht die Flam- 

menschwerter klingen. 
Sie bliihen schon im lichten Kleid, der Wihrheit 

Licht geweihet, 
Von dir, o groszer Diesterweg, die Saaten ausge- 

streuet. 
Die Bahnen hast du uns gezeigt, worauf zu Gottes 

Kuhme 



'TT 



111 



li 






ErblUht ein edles, treues Volk zum freien Menschen- 

thume. 
Drum nahen heute huldigend wir dir, deui groszen 

Todten, 
Der kiihn fur Wahrheit, Freiheit stritt, als Winter- 

frbste drohten. 
Und Dank und ew'ge Liebe sei dir, Geistc»held, ent- 

boten. 
O dass in jedem Lehrerherz die heil'gen Gluten 

lohten, 
Die brannten einst in deiner Brust t'tir alles Gute, 

Wahre ! 
O, dass der Gei»t von Diesterweg uns all' zusam- 

menschare, 
Damitein hohesldeal imKanipf verwirklicht werde: 
Ein/*W8 Volk auf /mem Grund aufGottes schbner 

Erde ! 
Ein Lehrerstand, an Geist, Geniuth ini 8inn des 

groszen Todten, 
Die Jiigendbildner (lot und schd'it, der Wahrheit 

treue Bo ten. 
Da8 deutsche Volk, so stark und fromni und test 

wie seine Eichen, 
Ini Schmuck der alton LieV, und Treu' den heil'gen 

deutschen Zeiche)i. 
Das deutsche Volk.gesinuungstreu ini Ringen nach 

Vollendung, 
Am tapfren Seliwert den Palinenzwin.Lf nach gott- 

gewollter SeuJung. 
Sie bluhen schon I Die Ostei'giusz'eiittlanniicn unsre 

Herzeii, 
Dns.s glUhen inigetriibt und rein der Freude helle 

Kerzen. 
Sie bluhen schon beim Becherklang, des Frohsinns 

schbnstc Tricjbe, 
Sie bliihen schon nach deutschcr Art, GeniUthlich- 

keit und Licbe, 
Sie bluhen schon ! Dies soi niein flrnsz ini gastlich 

freien Siegen : 
Wir wollen, schlaget alle ein, in dieseni Zeichen 

siegen ! 

Klkin-Bochum. 



(h) Das war eininal ein Jubeltag ! 
Bei Sedan fiel der grosze Schlag : 
Mac Mahon war ins Gain gegangeii. 
Der Kaiser und seiii Hoer gel'angen, 
IJnd blitzschnell Hog die Siegespost 
Am Draht nacli iSUd und Nord und Ost, 
Da gab's ein Jubeln ohne Maszen, 
Von Flaggen wogten alls Straszen, 
Vieltausendstiinmig schoU Hurra, 
Und waren noch fvanonen da, 
So schosz man aucli Viktoria. 
Doch jedenfalls die Wacht am Rhein 
Ward angestimmt von groszund klein; 
Denn auch durch der Unmiind'gen Mund 
Wird Gottes Lob von alters kund. 
Und einer von den kleinsten Jungen, 
Der hat am laut'sten mitgesungen : 
Die bunte Mutze auf dem Ohr, 
Die Hosleiii fiott im Stiefeirohr, 
Marschiert er wacker mit im Chor, 
Beteiligt sich den Morgen lang 
An jedeni Sclirei und jedem Sang ; 
So wichtig nahiri's der kleine Wicht. 
Als ging's ohn' ilm entschieden nicht, 
War so mit LeiV) und Seel' dabei, 
Als ob er selbst die Rheinwacht sei, 
Hat drum den Glockenscblag vergessen 
Und komiut zu spat zuin Mittagesson. 
Mit heiszen Wangen, rotem Kopf, 
Mit ott"ner Brust, vevwehteui Sehopt', 
Erscheint er endlich siegesmatt — 
Die andern waren schon halb satt — 
Griiszt obenhin, setzt sich zn Tisch 
Und greift nacb seinem Loffel frisch, 
Jedoch der biedre Vater spricht : 
„ Fritz, ungebetet iszt man nieht!" 
Worauf mein Fritz vom Stuhl ersteht, 
Die Hande faltet zum Gebet, 
Und weil sein Kopf noch stark zerstreut, 
Giebt's, wie der Geist ihm just gebeut, 
Spricht : „ Lieber Gott, magst ruhig sein. 
Fest steht und treu die Wacht am Rliein, 

Amen !" 

Friedrich Karl von Gekok. 



Ii. 



'I I 



i ' 



III 



n. 

Translate into EngliHh : 

(rt) Herzlich tut mich erfrewen 

die froelich sumuieizeit, 
All tnein gebliit vornewen ; 
der mei vil wollust geit. 
Die lerch tut sich erachwingen 
mit ihrem helleii achall ; 
lieblich die voeglin singen, 
vorauz die nachtigal. 

Der kuckuck mit seim schroien 
macht froelich iedeinian. 
Des abends froelich reien 
Die meidlin vvolgettin. 
Spazieren zu den bruiinen 
Ptlegt man in diser zeit, 
All welt sucht freud und wunne 
mit reisen fern und woit. 

VoLKHLiED, deti XVI. Jahrh. 

(b) Und huob an von Socrato zesagesi : wie der 
vnrechtenclich von <len sineii wer worden geur- 
teilt : und doch «les nit wiHt etitriiniien, wie wol 
er geinbcht hett: uinb das ur die forcht zweyer 
dingen hynneme, die den nieiiscrhen alien pinlich- 
est sy n gesehen wenlen : (his ist die furcht des 
kerckhers, und die f(»rcht des tods. Darnach 
ertzalt er die gefengkniisz Platonis, und die kesti- 
gung und pyn Anaxagore und Zenonis : »md (on 
die selben) mancher volekern unrechte verdam- 
njung. Ki* ineldet ouch da.s ellend Rutili und 
Boecij, und der andern aller die. Boecius in deni 
buoch de consolacione sagt mit unuerschultem 
tode verderbt worden syn. 

Nicola us von Weil. 
111. 
Translate : 

(a) In dem walde sUeze doene 

singent cleiniu vogelin. 

An der heide bluomen schoene 

bliiejent gegen des maien schin. 

Also bluet min. hoher muot 

mit gedanken gegen ir giiete, 

diu mir richet min gemliete, 

sam der troum den armen tuot. 

Ulrich von Liechtenstein. 



(6) Swer tiutsch wil ebene tihten 
der inuoz sin herze rihten 
ftf mangerleie 8prd,che. 

swer waent, daz die von Aehe 

redent als die von BVanken, 

dein 8uln die miuse danken. 

Bin ieglich lant hd<t sinen site, 

der sim lantvolke volgct mite. 

An spr&che, an mdze und an gewande 

ist underscheiden lant von lande, 

Der werlde dine st6t liberal 

An sprlLche, an m^ze, an w4ge, an fal ; 

ist aber niht tugent in diesem drin, 

Schilt man si danne, daz \kze ich sin. 

Hugo von Trimbero. 

IV. 

(a) Translate into Modern German : 

Quad tho " Sum man habeta zuuenc suni. 
Quad tho der jungoio ton then themo fater, " fater, 
gib mir teil thero dhti, thiu mir gibure." her tho 
teilta thia eht Nalles after miinegen tagon 
gisamonoten alien ther jungoro sun clilentes fuor 
in verra lantscaf, inti thar ziuuarf sina dht lebento 
vix'nlu.stigo. 

Ammonilis, Evaiufellen Havfiwnie. 

(b) In gudes miima ind in thes christi^lnes folches 
ind unser b6dher6 gehaltuissi, ton thesemo dage 
frammordes.sd fram s6 mir got gewizci indi mahd 
furgibit, so haldih tesan initmn brnoder, s6s6 man 
mit rehtft stnati bruodher seal, in thifi thaz er mig 
so sama duo, indi mit Ludheren in nohheiniu 
thing ne gegangu, the minan willon imo ce scad- 
hen wer Jh^n. 

ScHWUR DER KoNlGE zu Strosaburg, 842. 
V. 

1. Write notes on the authors of extracts III.a, 
III.6, IV.a. 

2. Enumerate the words in parts II., III., IV., that 
are now entirely obsolete, and mention those that have 
taken their place. 



!|r^ 



i. I 



I i 



i> 



•% 



nn\\$tv»iti^ of Soronto, 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ITALIAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : Wm. Olduight, M.A., M.D. 



1. Give the variou.s forms of relative and interro- 
gative pronouns and adjectives, with rules for their 
use. Illustrate by example in each case. 

2. Give the various uses of the preposition da, 

3. How do you form the comparatives of adjec- 
tives i Illustrate by examples. 

4. Compare Italian and English in the use of the 
intinitive and participles. Give examples. 

5. Translate : 

MoRTE. In caso che tu non parli col tuo pensi- 
ero o con pertjoiui che tu abbi dentro alia strozza, 
alza pin la voce e scolpisci meglio le parole : che 
se mi vai boibottando tra' denti con quella vocina 
da ragnatelo, io t'intendero domani, perchfe I'udito, 
se non sai, non mi serve meglio che la vista. 

Mouo. Jienche sia contrario alia costumatezza, e 
in Francia non si usi di parlare per essere uditi, 
pure perche siamo sorelle, c tra noi possiamo fare 
senza troppi rispetti, parlero come tu vuoi. Dico 
che la nostra natura e usanza comune e di rinno- 
vare continuamente il mondo ; ma tu fino da prin- 
cipio ti gittasti alle persone e al sangue ; io mi 
contento per Io pi^ delle barbe, dei capelli, degli 
abiti, delle masserizie, dei palazzi e di cose tali. 
Ben h vero che io non sono pero mancata e non 
manco di fare parecchi giuochi da paragonare ai 
tuoi, come verbigrazia sforacchiare quando orecchi, 
quando labbra e nasi, e stracciarli colle bazzecole 
che io v'appicco per li fori ; abbruciaechiare le 



i I 



carni dcgli uorniiii con iHtanipo rovcnti chc io fu 
che ohHi v'iiiipi'ontino per bellcz/a ; ronnaru lu tcstu 
dt'i bambini con fauciature u altri int'ejiriii, niut- 
tendo per coNtuuio cho tutti gli uoniini del pauNC 
abbiano a ))ortai'e il capo di una figura, couiu )\o 
fatto in America o in AHia; .stoipiare la gontc colle 
calzaturo snelle ; ciiiuderlu il nato e faro clie gli 
occhi le Hcopi)ino dalla stroUura dei l)U8tini ; o 
conto altre cose di questo andaru. 

»(. dentro alia strozza (a) What other prepo- 
sition does dentro take ? (b) Translate : He in withiv, 

7. Give the principal parts of all iiTogular verbs in 
the above extract. 

8. Point out any nouns which are irregular or 
peculiar in the formation of the plural. 

9. Translate: 

Gran cosa e questa. O chu tutti gli oriuoli 
fallano, o il sole dovrebbe esser levato gia h piil di 
un'ora : e ((ui non si vede nfe pure un barlunie in 
oriente ; c(m tutto che il cielo sia cliiaro e terso 
come uno spechio. Tutte le stello risplendono 
come fosse la mezza notte. Vattene ora all' Alma- 
geMto o al 8acrobosco, e di' che ti assegnino la 
cagione di questo caso. To mi ricordo aver letto 
poco fa in un libro moderno di uno Spagnuolo, che 
1 Peruviani raccontano cne una volta, in antico, fu 
nel paese loro una notte lunghissima, anzi stermi- 
nata ; e che alia tine il sole uscl fuori da un certo 
lago, che chiamano di Titicaca. Ma insino a qui 
ho pensato che queste tali, non fossero se non 
ciance ; e io I'ho tenuto per fermo, come fanno 
tutti gli uomini ragiono \'<ili. Ora che io m'avveggo 
che la ragione e la scienza non rilevano, a dir 
proprio, un' acca; mi risolvoa credere che queste 
e simili cose possano esser vere verissime : anzi io 
sono per andarc a tutti i laghi e a tutt'i pantani 
ch' io potro, e vedere se io m'abbattessi a pescare 
il sole. Ma che e questo rombo che io sento, che 
par come delle ali di uno uccello grande ? 

10. Gran. State its peculiarities, and mention any 
other adjectives which undergo similar changes. 

11. Compare all inegular adjectives and adverbs in 
the above extract. 



K 



u io fo 
o teste 
i, inet- 
1 paeisc 
oiiiu l)o 
itu coUe 
clio fr\i 
itini ; c 

prepo- 
wlthiit. 
'orbs ill 

:ular or 



oriuoli 
h pill di 

umu ill 
e terso 
)lendono 
r Alma- 
^nino la 
ver letto 
uolo, che 
,ntico, fu 
i stermi- 
un certo 
no a qui 

se non 
le fanno 
'avveggo 
10, a dir 
le qucste 
: anzi io 
[ pantani 
i pescare 
ento, cho 



12. Translate into Italian : 

What are you doing hero in this room ? Thcro 
aro a hundred things to be done, and you are losing 
time, and not one of them is executed (eaeguire). 

Pardon, sir, I think that getting ready (aUesHre) 
the trunk (haule) is one of the things necessary to 
bo done. 

I want you for something more important. 
Cause the trunk to be filled by the women. 

The women are about the mistress ; they aro 
occupied for her, and there is not a chance even 
to see them. 

This is my sister's defect. She is never con- 
tented. She would always like the servants occu- 
pied for her. A month does not sufiice her to get 
ready to go on our country trip (viUegiatura). 
Two women employed a month for her. It is an 
insutlerable thing. 

Add that, the two women not sufiicing her, she 
has called (still) two others in assistance. 

And what does she do with so many people ? 
Is she having some new dress made in the house ? 

Dictation to be given at 4.30 p.m. 



tion any 

!S. 

iverbs in 



II 1 ^ M WI MW 






liL^ 



nmbftttlttt of Soronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH i 181)1. 



CANDIDATKH KOU B.A. 



ITALIAN. 

H0N0R8. 



Examiner : Wm. OhDUioHT, M.A., M.D. 



1. Translate : 

Questi In caccoiu per ogni villa, 

Fill cli(* r avri rimcssa iieU' Inferno, 
Lit on(l(! iiividia prima (li)iai'tilla. 

Ond' io por lo tuo mo' pt^nso e discerno, 
Che tu mi sej^ui, od io hpvo tua guida, 
E trai rotti di (pii per luogo cterno, 

Ove udirai lo di.speratc strida, 
Vedrai gli anticlii Hpiriti dolonti, 
Clie la Hecoiida morte ciancun grida : 

E vederai color, ehe son coiitenti 

-Nel fuoco, pcM-elie .spernn di venire, 
Quaiido che sia, alio bcate genti : 

Alle quai \m se tu vorrai salire, 
Aiiima Ha a cio di me pin degna: 
Con lei ti lasciero nel mio partire ; 

Che qnello Imperador che la.ssu regna, 
Perch' io fui ribellante alia sua legge, 
Non viiol che in sua citta per me si vegiia. 

In tutte parti iiupera, e ([uivi regge : 
Quivi e la sua cittade, e 1' alto seggio: 
felice colui, cui ivi elej'ge ! 

Ed io a lui : Poeta, io ti rieliieggio 

Per quello Iddio,che tu non conoscesti, 
A cio ch' io fugga questo male e peggio, 

Che tu mi meni 1j\ dov' or dicesti, 
Si ch' io vegga la porta di San Pietro, 
E color, ch tu fai cotanto mesti. 

Allor si mosse ; ed io li tenni dietro. 

Dante, Inferno, Canto I., 11. 10!)-136. 



\W 



'4.. 



2. DoHcrilm iti brief tliu plan and division of Dante's 
great work. 

3. Write notes on vUl<t, prima dipa.rtiUa, lo tao 
me', tua f/uido,, trarrottl, ntridd, San Pletro, 11 teiiiil 
dietro. 

4. Translate : 

Ed io, die riinirar mi stava inteso, 
Vidi genti Canj^ose in quel pantano, 
I^rnudo tatte, o con senibiante ofi'cso. 

Questi si ])ercotean non pur con niano, 
Macon la testa, e col petto, e co' piedi, 
Troncandosi coi denti a brano a brano. 

Lo buon Maestro dissc : Figlio, or vedi 
L' anime di color cui vinse 1' ira : 
Ed anche vo' che tu per certo cvedi, 

Che sotto r acqua liagente clie sospira, 
E fannopnllular quest' acipia al sumnio, 
Come r occhio ti dice n' che s' aggira. 

Fittinel limo dic(m : Tristi fiunmo 
Nell' aer dolce che dal Sol s' allegra, 
Portando (huitro aecidioso fummo : 

Or ci attristiam nella belletta negra. 
Quest' inno si gorgoglian nella stroz/,a, 
Chh dir nol posson con parola integra. 

Co .• girammo della lorda pozza 

(iiand' arco, ti'a la ripa secca e il mezzo, 
Con gli occhi volti a ehi del fango ingozza. 

Venimmo al pie d' una torre al dassezzo. 

Ibid, VIII., 11. 109-130. 

5. Point out any words and expressions in this 
extract which d'^er from modern Italian prose forms. 

G. Mezzo. Give the different pronounciations and 
meanings. 

7. Translate : 

Ecco la fiera con la coda aguzza, 

Che passa i monti, e rompe mura ed armi ; 

Eccocolei che tutto il mondoappuzza : 
Si eomincio lo mio Duca a pai'larmi ; 

Ed accennolle che venisse a proda 

Vicino al tin de' j)asseggiati marmi : 
E (piel la sozza imagine di froda 

Sen vennne, ed arrivo la testa e il busto; 

Ala in su la riva non trasse la coda. 



ittj's 

hto 
(ill III 



La faccia sua ora faccia d' uom pfiusto, 
Tanto benigna avea di fuor la polle ; 
E (V un serpente tutto 1' altro t'usto. 

Duo branche avea pilose infin V ascelle : 
Lo (Icsso, il petto, ed ambedue le coste 
Dipinto avea di nodi e di rotelle. 

Con pih color, .sommoso c soprapposte 
Non fer mai in drappoTarfcari n^ Turehi, 
Ne fur tai tele per Aragnc iraposte. 

Conic tal volta stanno a riva burchi, 
Che parte sono in acqua e parte in terra,. 
E come 1^ tra li Tedeschi lurchi 

Lo bevero s' assota a far sua guerra ; 
Cosi la fiera pessima si stava 
Su r orlo, oho di pietra il sabbion sorra, 

Thid, XVn., 11. 1-24. 

8. Parse lines .5 and 0. 

9. Write notes on mnra, infin' I'ascelle, color 
aommeae e Koprappoatc, fer, Aragnc, di pietra il sab- 
bion aerra. 

10. Describe the intluen".e of Dante, Tasso, and 
Ariosto, respectively, and account for their popularity. 

11. Write a short paper on the place anil influence 
of the Medici in Italian literature. 

12. Characterize the writings of Metastasio and two 
of the most noted of his cotemporaries. 






;i «i 



l:i' 



2lnitifr0Uv of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ITALIAN. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : Wm. Oldright, M.A., M.D. 



1. Translate 



EGISTO. 



Con una madie, die il consorte ha spento, 
Men dolgo io, si. Quello immolavi ai nostro 
Amor ; non dei questo immolar del pari 
Alia uiia sicurezza ? 

CLITENNESTRA. 

Oh tu, di sangue 
Non sazio mai, ne di delitti ... Oh detti !... — 
l)i finto auiov me gia cogliesti al laccio : 
Tuoi duri modi posciaassai mel fero 
Falcse, oime !.. Pur nel mio pectoionntro 
Pur troppo aucor verace e viva fiamma ; 
E ii sai, troppo ?... Argomentar puoi quindi 
S' io potrei non amare uno innocente 
Unico figlio mio. Qual cor si atroce 
ru6 non pianger di lui ?... 

EGISTO. 

Tu, che d'un colpo 
Due n' uccidesti. Un ferro stesso al padre 
Tronco la vita, e in note atre di sangue 
Vergo del figlio la mortal sentenza. 
II mio troppo indugiar, la sorte, e scaltro 
L' autiveder d' Elettra, Oreste han salvo. 
Ma che percio ? nomi innocente un figlio, 
Cui tu pria '1 padre e il regno poscia hai tolto ? 



iin>~-«. 



CLITENNESTllA, 

Oh parole di sangue ?... Oh figliuol niio, 
Privo di tutto, a chi tutto ti spoglia 
Nulla non desti, se non dai tua vita ? 

Alfieri, Oreste, Att I., Sc. 4. 

2. Parse the second and third lines. 

3. Give the principal parts of all irregular verbs 
in the first speech of /Egistheus. 

4. Difinto amor, &c. Parse this and the next line. 

5. Scaltro. Compare in meaning v, ith astuto and 
fm^bo. 

6. Qnul cor al atroce non 'piu, &:c. Fill up the ellipsis 

7. Translate : 

ELETTRA. 

Va corrl durique al tuo destin, se il vuoi... 
Ma tardi Hon, spero, i suoi passi. — Amarmi 
Che non poss' io la destra anco d'un ferro, 
Per trapassar di mille colpi il petto 
D'Egisto infamo ! Oh cieca n:adre ! oh come 
AfFascinta da quel vil tu sei ! — 
Ma pure... io trenio;... or se 1' irata plebe 
Fare in lei dul suo re vondcttu ?... oh cielo ! 
Seguasi. — M?. chi vien ? Pilade ! e seco 
II t'ratello non 6 ? 









PILADE, ELETTRA, SEGUACl Ml PILADE. 



1 ' 



ELETTRA. 

Deh ! dimnii: Oreste?... 

PILADE. 

1)' armi oi cinge la -. .,:,i:= : v'^ certa omai 
i.a i»teda nostv.M. Or'o si i»^pi;[ ia Egisto ? 
Vedestil tu ? 

Kr.:"rri<A h 

Vidi, e .."Henni indarno 
I.a forsennata sua cons'/vi.: : fuori, 
Per qiiesta porta, oUa .^caglio.ssi ; e disse, 
Che volea di se fare a Egistto scudo. 
Ito era duu(jiio ci pria fuor della nggia. 



!. 4. 

verbs 

t line. 
and 

jllipsis 



PILDAE. 

Che agli Argivi mostrarsi osato egli abbia ? 
Dunque a quest' ora ucciso egli 6 : felice 
Chi primiero il fevia ! — Ma piti dappresso, 
Maggiori odo le strida... 

ELETTRA. 

"Oreste?" Ah fosse 1... 

# 

PILADE. 

Eccolo, ei vien nel furor suo. 

Ibid, Att v., Sc. 5 & 6. 

8. 8e il vuoi. Write a note upon il. 

9. Point out in the above passage all poetic forms 
and substitute the more common ones. 

10. Give plurals of va, mille, cieca, quel vil, re, chi 
vien, seco, vedeatil tu, and the singular of armi, stHda. 

11. Give synonyms for primiero, ito, indarno, and 
point out any differences in meaning. 

12. Translate : 

" Abbiamo i nostri anni .... pur troppo, eh 
padre molto reverendo ! . . . ." 

Chi fosse stato li a vedere, in quel punto, fu come 
quando, nel mezzo d' un opera seria, s' alza, per is- 
baglio, uno scenario, prima del tempo, e si vede un 
cantance che, non pensando, in quel memento, che 
ci sia un pubblico al mondo, discorre alia buona 
con un suo compagno. II viso, 1* atto, la voce del 
conte zio, nel dir q\ie\pur troppo! tutto fu natu- 
rale : U non c' era politica : era proprio vero 
che gli dava noia d'avere i suoi anni. Non gi^ 
che piangesse i passatempi, il brio, 1' avvenenza 
della gioventu : frivolezze, siocchezze, miserie ! La 
cagion del suo dispiacere era ben piii soda e im- 
portante : era che sperava un certo posto piu alto, 
quando fosse vacato ; e temeva di non arrivare a 
tempo. Ottenuto che 1' avesse, si poteva esser 
certi che non si savebbe piti curato degli anni, non 
avrobbe desiderate altio, e sarebbe morto con- 
tento, come tutti quelii che desideran molto una 
cosa, assicurano di voler fare, quaudo wiano arri- 
vati a ottenerla. 

Manzoni, 1 Promesei Sposi, Ch. XIX. 



mimm. 



UYiW^tvMti oC STorotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATKS FOR J3.A. 



SPANISH. 

HONORS. 



Examiyirr ; Wm. Olduight, M.A., M.D. 






1. Translate: 

Venlad es que nuestro pais no e.s de a(|nello.s 
(|ue .se conocen a. priniera ni .sei^anda vista, y si no 
temi(^rainos que nu.s llamascii atrcvido.s, lo coinpara- 
riaiiios de buena gana a u;?os juegob do uiaucs 
sorprendentcs 6 ine.scrutables para el que ig'nora 
su artiticio, que estribando en una grandisinia 
bagatela, .suelen, despues de sabidos, dejar asoni- 
brado de hu poca p'-rspicacia al niisiuo que .se 
devano Ioh .hcsos por buscarle.s eau-sas extranas. 
Muclias veces la faita de una cau.sa deterniinante 
en las cosas, nos hace creei- que debe de haberlas 
prot"unda.s paiu niantenerlas al abrigo tie nuestra 
penetracion. Tal es el orgullo del lionibie, que 
m4s quiere declavai* en alta voz que las cosas son 
inconiprenRibles cuaudo no las coniprende ^1, 
que cout'esar que el ignorarlas puede depender de 
su torpeza. 

Knapp'8 Reader, p. 9. 

2. Compare all irregular adjectives and adverbs in 
the above extract. 

3. priviera .... buena .... (jrande .... V/hat are 
the rules regarding the elision of the.se adjectives ? 

4. Translate : 

Dos medios se les occurren enteramente opues- 
tos ; huir 6 defenderse. Huir es el proyecto del 
padre de Berta, es el recurdo que mas se acomoda 
& su cardcter pacitico. Huir lejos .... muy lejos 
.... al fin del mundo. 



KS3 



''f.r- 



Poro el amadc UavcH replica diciondo : — 

i Huir ! i Quu dispaiato ! i A(16nde podrdinoH ir qu« 
no nos siga i i Doiulo podromos ocultarnos (juu 
no nos dcHCubm? Vaya, no hay que pensar on 
seniejante desatino. Lo quo debemos hacer c» 
poner pit's en pared y defendernos. 

Ihkl, p. 09. 

5. Give the principal parts of all irregular verlis in 
the above exti'act. 

0. Translate : 

La ciencia poUtica progreso ; hizose un ramo de 
ella la ciencia adniinistrutiva, <le la cual ni aun cl 
nonibre cunocieron nuestros antepasados. Se supo 
que la centralizacion del poder, necesaria en cual- 
quier Estado, conio eondicion inqn'escindible del 
orden, ni estaba refiida con las garantias do las 
libertades civil y politica, ni con la intervencion 
de los pueblos en sus intcreses locales. Conoci6so 
en tin, ([ue colocando en el centro de la nionarquia 
el gobierno y sus resistencias nioderadoras, no 
debia ya encontrar en las tracciones sociales csas 
resistencias cuyo buen efecto s&lo puede proceder 
do su unidad parlanientaria ; y que la concentra- 
cion de los puderes del Estado era la dnica eondi- 
cion do que se nacionallcen, por decirlo asf, el 
orden y la libertad, el trono y las garantias indi- 
viduales. Ihid, pp. 190-1. 

7. estaba re H Ida. . . .habcrlas fvofundas (1st selec- 
tion). State significations and uses of estar, ser, h'her 
and tener, respectively. 

8. la cual .... cuyo .... qua .... quien. Write a 
short paper on their uses. 

9. Translate into Spanish : 

Such was the celebrated rout of the Garellano, 
which cost the French about eight thousand men, 
all their baggage, the best artillery of Europe, and 
the iri'eparable loss of so beautiful a kingdom. 
Italy, which had seen that powerful army, the 
multitude .ind equipment of which appeared to be 
about to devoui in a moment the feeble enemy 
which it had before it, saw it in a short time un- 
done without a battle, and almost without damage 
or loss to its conquerors. Gonzalo owed this 
victory to the superiority of his talents, the choice 



n 



quo 
{lie 
oil 

es 



of his position, and to the constancy with which 
ho maintained himself fifty days boforo the enemy 
witliout Hwervinjj for a moment from his proposal 
on account of the enormous difficulties and labors 
which opposed him. 

10. Name two royal writers of the 13th and 14th 
centuries, and describe their influence on Spanish lite- 
rature. 

11. Write a short paper on Cervantes and two of the 
most noted of his co temporaries. 

12. Name the best known Spanish poets of the pro- 
sent century, and describe the works of any two of 
them. 



DICTATION AT 4.30 P.M. 



I1 



BniMtrtiUj? of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMlNATlONHi 1H91. 



CANDIDATES FdU D.A. 



f 



SPANISH. 

HONORS. 



I 



Examiner ; Wm. Oi-DRIOHT, M.A., M.D. 



1. Point out and illustrate (a) the principal ortho- 
Krapliicai changes in Spanish words in their transition 
fi'oin the Latin : {h) the inHuenco o^. any other language. 

2. (Hvo Hipifactical rules for Vie use of the definite 
article, and illustrate by short Spanish sentences. 

;j. Write a short paper on the fornis and uses of the 
superlatives relative and absolute respectively. 

4. When is the preposition d used before the object 
of a transitive verb ? 

Give rules for the agreement of the past partici- 



ple. 



Translate : 

Rita. Yo te lo dir(^. La madre de dofia Paquita 
di6 en escribir cartas y mas cartas, diciendo quo 
tenia concertado su casaraiento en Madrid con un 
caballero rico, honrado, bien quisto, en suma, cabal 
y perfecto, que no habia mas que apetecer. Acosada 
la senorita con tales propue^tas, y axigustiada 
incesautemente con los sermones de aquella ben- 
dita tia, se vio en la neccssidad de responder que 
estaba pronta d, todo lo. que la mandasen...Pero 
no te puedo ponderar cuanto llor6 la pobrecita, 
qa4 afligida estuvo. Ni, queria comer, ni podia 
dormir...y al mismo tiempo era preciso disimular, 
para que su tia no sospechara la verdad del caso. 
Ello es que cuando, pasado el primer susto, hubo 
lugar de discurrir escapatorias y arbi trios, no hal- 
lamos otro que el de avisar & tu amo; esperando que 
si era su carifio tan verdadero y de buena ley como 







IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 






^^. 







m^ 



>* 



vA 



•■**\* 




^^ 



1.0 



I.I 



11.25 



u^ Bii |I22 

2f lift "" 



^1^ 




Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 




23 'VBT MAM STREiT 

WEBSTiR,N.Y. USM 

(716) •72-4503 






'^ 






1 



6^^ 



nos 4mbip. ponderado, no consenthia que su pobre 
Paquita pasara d manos de un desconocido, y se 
perdiesen para sienipre tantas cavicias, tantas la- 
grimas y tantos suspiros estrellados en las tapias 
del corral. A pocos dias de haberie escrito, cata 
el coche de coUeras y el mayoral Gasparet con sus 
medias azules, y la madre y el novio que vienen 
per ella •, i-ecogimos & toda prisa nuestros merinaq- 
ues, se atan Jos cofres, nos despedimos de aquellas 
buenas mugeres, y en dos latigazos llegamos antes 
de ayer d Alcala. : XjA detencion ha sido para que 
la seftorita visite £ otra tia monja que tiene aqu.', 
tan arrugada y +an sorda como la que dejamos 
alld. Ya la ha visto, ya la han besado bastante una 
por una toda.s las rellgiosas, y creo que manana 
teinprano saldremos. Per esta casualidad nos... 
Moratin El Si de las Niflas, Acto I , Escena 9. 

7. Point out in the above extract any idiomatic 
uses of verbs. 

8. que la mandasen. Why la ? 

9. Translate: 

I). Diego. Muy bien. Sientese V...y no hay 
que asustarse ni alborotarse (Si^-ntanse los dos) por 
nada de lo que yo diga : y cuenta, no nos abandone 
el jiiicio cuando mas le necesitamos. .Su hija de 
V. estd enamorada... 

Da. Iuene. I Pues no lo he dicho ya mil veces ? 
Si senor, que lo estd, y bastaba que yo lo dijese 
para que. . 

D. Diego. ; Este vicio maldito de interrumpir 
6. cada paso ! Dejenic V. hablar. 

Da. Irene - Bien, vamos, hable V. 

D. DiEgo. Est£ enamorada ; pero no estd enam- 
orada de mi. 

Da. Irene, i Qud dice V. ? 

D. Diego. Lo que V. oye. 

D\, Iuene. Pero^ qui^n le hacontado 6. V. esos 
disparates ? 

D. Diego. Nadic. Yo lo s^, yo lo he visto, nadie 
me lo ha contado, y cuando se lo digo d V., bien 
seguro cstoy de que es verdad...Vaya, i qud llanto 
es ese ? 

Da. Irrne. Uorando. ; Pobre de mi 1 

1). Diego ; A (\w6 vicnn oso ? 

Da. luiiNE. j Porque me ven sola y sin mfedios, y 



)re 
se 
la- 
)ias 
:ata 
sus 
nen 



porque soy una pobre viuda, parece que todos me 
desprecian y se conjuran contra mi ! 

D. DiEQO. Senora doria Irene. . 

Da. Irene. A1 cabo de mis aBos y do mis acha- 
ques, verme tratada de esta manera, como un estro- 
pajo, como una puorca cenicienta, \amos al decir , . 
I Quidn lo creyera de V. ?. .; Vdlgame Dios ! ..j Si 
vivieran mis tres difuntos !.. Con el tiltimo difunto 
que me viviera, que tenia un genio como una ser- 
piente . . 

lb. Acto III. Escena 11. 

10. Give the principal parts of the irregular verbs 
in the first speech. 

11. Sidntese V. Of what word or v^ordsis V. a con- 
traction ? Translate : " Gentlemen, have you my horse ? " 

12. Translate: 

El Consejo de Salubridad consulta al Ministerio 
de Gobernacion, la siguiente iniciativa de adiccion 
d los articulos del QSdigo penal que tratan de la 
adulteracion de los comestibles y bebidas. 

" 1. ** Se considerard adulterado un comestible 
6 bebida : 

" I. Cuando se le mezela alguna sustancia 6 sus- 
taucias con el objeto de auinentar su voluraen 6 
su peso. 

" II. Cuando le sea sustraido parcial 6 totalmente 
uno 6 m^s de sus componentes. 

" 2. ^ Se considera falsificado un comestible o 
bebida. 

"I. Cuando se sustituye completamente 6 en 
parte alguno de los componentes esenciales del 
efecto. 

" II. Cuando sea imitacion de otro efecto y se 
venda con el nombre de aquel." 

Nosotros que tanto hemos atacado al Consejo de 
Salubridad cuando veiamos su inaccion, no pode- 
mos mdnos de felicitarle ahora, que se dedica d pres- 
tar 6, la sociedad un gran servicio, un servicio que 
acaso pasard desaperci bido que no se estimard en lo 
que vale, pero que significa nada menos, que un 
gran pasu hacia la higiene publica y que atenuar 
una de las grandes causas de la mortalidad, en esta 
gran ciudad en donde la vida media es tan pequefia 
y en donde la atm6sfera, la tierra y hasta el suelo, 
y hasta (il cielo, parecen conspirar contra la salud 
de los desdichados habitantes. — (Extract from 
Our rent Medical Journal.) 



I'i 



»nftier»U9 of STotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ORIENTALS. 

PASS. 



Examiner 



.,. fJ. M. 
*• IJ. F. 



HiRSCHFELDEB. 
McCUUDY. 



1. Translate : 

mn^ b:p* : iina mn"" bip risa mn^ bip* : d-^ai. 
QTPT.l" ' p3Sbn n"i» nx mm '\^'W''^ fi-'Tii^ "i-:itij 
mn"> bip' : u^^^^^ "In i?a3 P'l^'l V^^^ ^5? "''s? 
mn"" SffliT ntj" bia^ab mn-"'" : ox nisnb isn 
i«r rii^ Tj"]!^ mm "jni i;3?b t:? mm'* : obi^b •]b'i^ 

Ps. xxix. 3-7; 10-11. ^ dibffiS 

2. What is the occasion and subject of this Ppalm 1 What 
is the special relevance of v. 10, 11, in this connection? 
What mountains are alluded to in v. 6 ? How was "ITIIIB 
otherwise named, and by whom 1 ' 

3. Derive blUDS i^- ^^)- ^^^^ other significations of ■\^^* 

than those found here, and explain their association with the 
root. What is the force of the participles used in this pass- 
age t Account for the pointing of "nn^ (^- ^)' 

4. Translate: 

i5-'7a";-bD -"S' : ^^5B -li&^^b ^D>ab5 tji^ib isrijis titf* 
I5ni3ffi ■'^y" : mn 1)33 ^5''3tti la^b? ^01??? ''3? 
aan-n nstt n'^':Mot riiin^a t2»T natri d''5ntB dna 
•^BSi t^ 5m*"' -lya" : nB^53i tt'Ti n ""S "^i^t bpy 
sn^ »15T 5iin ^D ■li'^^a'' niDJpV' : :|0"in5 ^^s8Vdi 

Ps. xc. 8-12. • f1^?0 



• 



5. Define tho sort of construot relation exemplified in the 
phrase "TiSg lli^^ i"^- 8). Could "nj^ be used as well hero 
in place of ^1^573 t Why do you tliink ijljij is uued in 
V. 9, and not the more common poetic form employed in v. 
10? What is the origin of the expression employed in v. 
126? 

6. Parse fi© (v. 8) ; Q^rn. n. »"** nSl^DT (v. 10) ; 
51in (^- ^^)- Write the last named word wit.i the pro- 
nominal suffix expressed. 

7. Write as many Hebrew words as you know of those 
employed in the early chapters of Proverbs for different kinds 
of mental actions and qualities. 

8. Translate : 

bi^n b5;3p nib» nnofnn': b^ i\x(n ■'n*; »inn m>n* 

innp-" »inn nb-ibn" j av ""T-DaD inn3>i'> nss^ 
nan' : i^n*' bi< Q*'n->'' iBD?an nsiij •'Tana in'' b» bss 
inap)"'/ : in nD3-i i^inn b^ niTsbri '>n-' Kinn nb-ibn 

I T T I • ■• • • -I IT "I 

9. Explain the less obvious allusions in this passage in 
which Job speaks of the ill-omened day of his birth. Derive 
^-li-\533 (v. 5). Parse ^p"! (v> ^)> and write the uncon- 
tracted form. Correct the pointing of tn?2b^ (^' ^)i ^^^^ 
explain the new word thus obtained. 



, 



i* 



.;,: 



CAnfUrrttUj^ ot CToronto* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: 181)1. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 



(mUACTIC POKTRY.) 
Examiners : -j 



J. M. HlUSCHFKLUER. 

J. F. M(jCuudy. 



1. Translate : 

: njDb citji^T p-insb 5?iin my asn-'T dsnb "jfi* 

:nrn ci'^iip wm mn-' t^Njv njasn nbnn'° 

di^'' :D'"'n ms^D ^b is^dtt '^-'tt'' lani "'^ "'^^ 

Prov. xi. 9-12. u^fejn '^jinb ^nabn ^b n^aDn siTsDn 

2. What moods are employed in ver. 9 ? Parse and 
explain the pointing and accentuation of pO^^^ • Parse 

tl65"l'' (^'- 10)' What parallels may be cited for such a 
usage 1 How do you account for the Imperfect at the end 
of V. 12? 

3. Translate : 

■^nsiDa'' J nnrifi^ n&D?i Qiycs bD b^T a-iDia wti 

•• I • : T -1 1- » - 1 • T I ^ . T 1 •• > 

fi''>3Dn'* :nb ion i:kb tjnttji n^asn isiSTari -lisa 

- -I .. • V .. It 

• T I I T • : A ! I • 

fi'i^nb D-iTS nbrs" taip"'-) d-ibT nfin^a i',:? nnp 
ir^T "i!Di?3 -iTsiti d-i-^nb nni^'' : Tii^tsnb rcji ris^^n?) 

••IT" - T - : - I 

Prov. X. 11-17. : nsn)a nnDici 



I 



4. PnvHO tlie words niiirkod •, iind hIiow liow tlin iiourm 
auirmj; them iire fonned from tliiiir reK[)«ctivo roots. 

5. TmiiMlato : 

■>Di< Qbii^" : q'i:> in^5v q^n ■'sm nbi-^ b?33>b dij^ 

mbn: H'jjs?" : -mm t*'bx c^nb^ bs^i b!s bi^ ujiix 

Job V. G-y. . -ifiQ^a y^i/i'i:^ m&^bSD npn '\''»i 

(i. Hiipply tlm vowds that are not written hero in vh. 8 
on<l 9. Wliat ti;,'ur('s of verbal rliotoric arc employed in 
this extract / W'iiat is the probable explanation of v. 7 61 

7. Translate : 

- T ,. T J T » 

: DtiDTTTa ^"St &^bT ^Tp"^ 6^b D^^aTT Tibs n^ d*p' KbT 

T T 1 • •• » It 

■'SIS iTai bD n-'n-'H "ins ni?:'' ck'* ^•'DnsTm pjn •>b 

•■ -I I- : »' » Ti ,/ I .. . ., 

Job xiv. 11-16. : qbsfi TH^ 

8. Parse "iiyn (v. 12) and *T33Js^ (v. 15). Inflect the 
former word. What is the special significance here of the 

USD of ns'^bn (^'- 1'^)'^ 

9. What n)ay be said of the literary peculiarities of 
Didactic as compared with Lyrical Poetry in Hebrew 1 To 
what class of composition would you refer the book of Job 1 
Give your reasons. 



Znniiirv0ft|) 0^ SToronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATION : 1801. 



1. 



V'^ i' ' 
: y'' 



ill I 
! It 



i! J I ' I 



! 



FOURTH YEl^R. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 



(L\RICAL POETRY.) 
., . „ f J. M. HiRSCHFEI.DER. 



1 . Translate : 

la-'n"' HTsn imjas:? bD -isoi^'' :^b:i'Ti ■'T' "^ni^s 

: bni:i Jib's"" iti^nb b^-\ anb n^l ^pbn''"' : ^n-i»"i'' 

nmn ''mT5>b ^nib''^ pmn bs^ mrr^ nfii^f 

Ps. xxii. 16-20. 

2. If "Jii^S (v. 17) is to be amended, bow may it best be 
done 1 Illustrate from six derived stems represented in the 
above passage the notional relations existing between them 
and the simple stems. 

3. Parse and derive "impb^S (^* ^^)- I^erive J^^y (v. 

17) jnb''Js^ (v. 20). Give the syntax or the last two words 
of V. 20? Explain the tenses rf v. 18. Distinguish vari- 
ous words for "seeing." 

4. Translate : 

mn^" : ^"'ini&^b&s bs isobT nnn bipn yi^tDV 
qo^nbj*" •'^iViD V-'iJ'? 'a•^p12^ "^ri^a v^''? •'iTii^nK 

Ps. xxvi. 6-10. • ""7^ ^^)ri or ja-'-i n?aT 



I 



■ 



■i. Point ill full vs. 9, 10. The Septiiagint translates 
3'73'l2Jb (^' '') ^y Tov hKQvaai. What is your opinion of the 
tiue pointing ] Parse the word as it stands. Derive V^?3 

(v. 8), giving the original meaning. Explain the cohorta- 
tive in v. 6. 

6. Translate : 

: ns :2"in b:2r ^^b mati ^?n'^?? 2?pi: ^b^" V^" 
nsn" :t3b?3"' Kb ib''n nnni nViwnb Dion npo'" 
m?a)a b-'anb'" : inonn Q''bn-'^b vfc^'v b^ mn*' v^ 

• -I I- : - t •• I . ' 

Ps. xxxiii. 16-19. ; Ijy*)^ atTiTlbl dtt3S5 

til T ■ ' 

7. In connection with v. 18 give various words for wait- 
ing (trusting). Derive nj?TGJIn (^ ^'^)- ^'^^^^ l^lS^T (^• 
^^) y tPIT^nb (^'- 19)- Distinguish the synonyms for 
" saving" occiining in this passage. Add another (compare 
the Assyrian). 

8. Give characteristics of Psalm poetry, from the points 
of view of artistic structure ; origin ; subjects ; purpose, 
original and secoiidaiy. 



I 



CAnfUftfiiUtt of croronco« 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIQNS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner 



■••{ 



J. M. HiRSCHFELDER. 
J. F. McCURDY. 



HEBREW SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 

1. What is to be said of tlie Participle in Hebrew (rt) 
as to its construction ; (h) as to its so called tense func- 
tion ? 

2. Translate : The shepherd was sitting at the door 
of his tent when suddenly a rider appeai*ed at a dis- 
tance. He WMs sitting on an Arabian camel, which 
looked very tired for he had come a long journey that 
very day. 

3. Distinguish the two Hebrew infinitives in con- 
struction and usage. 

4. Translate : 1 knew for certain [as soon] as I saw 
the man who had been looking for me [so] veiy dili- 
gently, that he was intelligent and honest and that he 
would be a faithful servant to the city. 

5. Criticise the practi(;e of transferring the case ter- 
minology of the classical languages to Hebrew. What 
kinds of relations and conditions may be indicated by 
the direct object in Hebrew ? Explain the uses of fij^ 
from its origin. 

6. Translate : The king of Judah sent messengers to 
the king of Israel, saying, " let us look one another in 
the face." By this phrase the people of old time.s did 
not [mean to] say: " let us visit one another as friends," 
but: " let us meet one another in battle." 

7. Critici.se the following sentence, and if it is 
wrong, write it so as to make the proper sense : 

n5^ 0171^53? b»-i»"» t3B»>T n^^T 



it'' 



\i 



2iiniiier0it|^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ORIENTALS. 

HONORS. 

ASSYRIAN. 



Examiners 



• JJ. F, 



J. M. HiRSCHFELDER. 
McCURDY. 



1. Translate : 

V • *vv 

eli epseti annati libbi figug ma isaaruh kabitti assi katiya 

♦ VV V VV * V vv 

uaallg Assnr i\ Istar Asaurltii adke emukiya sir&ti sa Aasur 
u Istar umallu katu'a ana niati Musur u raati Kusi ustSsera 

V V _ ^ 

harranu ina mStek girrlya XXII sarrani sa ahi tamdi kabal 

V ♦ 

tamdi u nabali ardani dagil paniya tamartasunu kabittu ina 

VV VV V 

mahriya issunim ma unassiku sepSya. 

2. Parse the words marked * and titice the development 
of these forms from the original. Account for the sibilant 
in Kusi. What other name did that country bear among 
the Assyrians ? 

3. Account for the forms of the endings in epaeti, A88U7'llu 
and tdmdi. Inflect e^ic^ and umallu in the prosier tense, 



II 



4. Translate ; 

W V 

ana unununute niuti Assur emuk sarrutlya sa ana 
kidrisunu uszizu iutene'd ainat linintti sudHak^ya aniuti 
aiinati israu rakbesun adi sipiitisunu isbatunim ma emurQ 

V V V 

epset surratisun sarrani aunQti isbatunim ma ina biriti 

V , V 

parzilli iskati parzilli utamraeha kati u sepe 

^^ * 

V V V V 

f). Purse and explain the forms utzizu, istene^H, audadke. 
What is the Proto-Semitic word for " iron " 1 What light 
does the word throw on Semitic phonology and civilization. 

6. Write as proper words and translate the following 
Assyrian transcript : 

arka-nu sarrani an-nu-ti ma-la ap-ki-du ina a-di-ya ih-tu-u 

la is-su-ru ma-mit ilani rabuti tabtii e-pu-us-su-nu-ti im-sii. 

7. Give a brief account of the early history and civiliza- 
tion of Babylonia up to the expulsion of the Elamites. 



9 



CanfMfirtiftff of CTotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIUNS : I8»l. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ORIKISTALS. 

HONORS. 

COMPARATIVE SEMITIC GRAMMAR. 



(» 



Exwniners 



•I 



J. M. HiRSCUFELUEB. 
J. F McCURDY. 



1. OlaHsify the languages of tlio Semitic taiuily and 
the principal dialects in each. 

2. Which of these languages furnishes the best 
material for comparative giammatical study ? What 
are some of its disadvantages in this respect ? What 
would you say of the relative richness of Assyrian in 
Proto-Semitic inHexional forms? 

3. What characteristics has Hebrew in common with 
Arabic which are not shared by the other languages ? 

4. Give a list of the consonants of Proto-Semitic 
with their historical representation in Arabic, Hebrew, 
Aramaic and Assyiian. 

5. Give proof that the guttural system of Hebrew 
and Aramaic is incomplete as a representation of the 
Proto-Semitic sounds. Account for the history of the 
gutturals in Arabic as compared with the other langu- 



ages. 



6. Classify the non-guttural consonants of the Semi- 
tic system according to the relative positions assumed 
by the organs of speech in their pronunciation. 

7. What important question in the history of civiliza- 
tion is connected with the development of the cunei- 
form writing of ancient Babylonia ? Give a summary 
presentation of the arguments for and against the 
theory of a pre-Semitic origin of that system. 






f 



1 

) 



^nibtvuHs of Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATI0N8 : 1891. 



FOURTH EXAMINATION. 



LOGIC. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner: J. McD. Duncan, B.A. 



1. What primary assumptions underlie inductive 
inquiry, and on what ground do these assumptions 
themselves rest ? 

2. Illustrate by an example the value of hypotheses 
as subsidiary to induction. What conditions must a 
legitimate hypothesis fulfil ? 

3. Indicate the relation between an argument from 
analogy and a perfect induction. 

4. Shew how oKservation, induction and deduction 
are employed in establishing the proposition that : — 

The economical efl'ect of the employment of 
slave labour is exhaustion of the soil. 

5. Illustrate by an example each of the four meth- 
ods of inductive inquiry. 

6. Explain fully the process of verification. 

7. What are the fallacies incident to the employ- 
ment of the four methods of inductive inquiry ? 

8. Explain the maxim : — Exceptions pi^ove the rule. 



( 



f 



1^ 



Slnfurnvftp of CToronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINAT10N8 I 1801. 



CANDIDATES Full a A. 



MI]NTAL PHILOSOPHY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: Tiioh. II. Mitchkm,, B.A. 



1. What tlovuu foiiHidt'i- the true imtme and metliotl 
of psyclidlotjic'iil in<|uiry ? 

2. Stiitd nnd explain tlio .stops involved in the con- 
struction of the representation of the external world. 

.'I. What important ideas ar«! involved in tht! sim- 
plest act of nunnory { (Jive a inistaUen opinion us to 
the ori<j,in of one of these ideas, and refute it l»y a 
statement of your own theory. 

4. " The knovvh^dtje of real exis^,enco," says Locke, 
" depends upon tlui eonl'ormity of our ideas to external 
thinifs." Show that thi.s is an untenable position. 

5. Every event has a cause. What is the orif]fin of 
this judfruient according to: (1) J. S. Mill, (2) Kant, 
(3) Herbert Spencer, (4) yourself ? 

i). Define emotion ami contrast it with mere sensa- 
tion. (Jive some explanation of the general fact of 
sympathy, indicatin}^ the conditions upon which it 
depends, jind the aids by whicli it may be developed. 

7. Indicate some breaches of reasoned continuity 
which have not been bridged over by the Evolutionary 
Deduction. 









( 



Bnibtv$iit9 ot Coronto. 



\ 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



METAPHYSICS 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. Mark Baldwin, M.A., Ph.D. 



i) 



1. Compare in some detail the Aristotelian, Kantian, 
and Herbartian conceptions of Metaphysics. 

2. Explain Lotze's division of the material of Meta- 
physics. "What is your view of the relation of Meta- 
physics to positive science ? To psychology ? 

3. What theories of knowledge are open to the 
materialistic Monist ? If you were disposed to refute 
him, how would you do it ? 

4. Expound Lotze's doctrines of physical causation, 
space, and time. 

5. What are our subjective criteria of objective 
x'eality ? Have we any right to believe that they give 
us reality apart from consciousness ? Argue the case. 

6. What is Lotze's view of the relation of God to the 
world ?j^ Compare it with Green's view. 

7. " Idealism requires a relative theory of knowledge, 
and necessarily issues in phenomenalism." Is this 
true ? Give your reasons. How did Hamilton attempt 
to escape this conclusion ? 

8. Can we deny objective reality in the process of 
knowledge and yet justify subjective reality ? If so, 
can we objectify the idea of God without identifying it 
with the world ? Discuss these questions. 



!^3ia 



(anfUftttftS of SToronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMIXATIONS : 1801. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY. 



HONORS. 
Examiner : J. Mabk Baldwin, M.A., Ph.D. 



Candidates may omit one question. 

1. Give the links of Descartes' argument from self 
to the external worUl Compare it with Green's argu- 
ment from self to the external world. 

2. Expound Spinoza's doctrines of Substance, Attri- 
butes, and Modes. Is the doctrine of '• attributes" 
implicit Idealism ? 

3. Compare Leibnitz's theory of " Monads" with the 
" Atoms" of Democritua and the " Reals" of Her- 
bart. 

4. " Fichte's denial of the ding an sich of Kant was 
a repetition of Berkeley's denial of the external sub- 
stance of Locke "; is this true ? Explain the historical 
elements involved in the comparison. 

5. What was Reid's contribution to the development 
of thought ? What did he mean by " irresistible be- 
lief" and " common sense ?" Does he answer Hume ? 

6. Kant assumed that the categories were not ob- 
jectively valid ; Reid, that the intuitions were object- 
ively valid. Do you find any ground for a choice 
between the two positions ? 

7. What is meant by the " identity philosophy "? 
Who founded it ? Compare Hegei's " Absolute with 
Spinoza's '- Substance." What advantages has the 
Hegelian conception? 



8. What 18 there coiniuon to 
lution philosophies ? Explain 
Criticise Mr. Spencer's theory of " Unity of Compo 
sition of Mind." 



the Hegelian and Evo- 
' transfigured realism." 



9. Analyze the cun-ent of Modem Philosophy into 
its several problems ; and designate what in yoni- view 
is the most important cotitribution made to each since 
Kant. 



CAnliier«iti? of SToronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



PHILOSOPHY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : Thos. H. Mitchell. 



ARISTOTLE'S ETHICS. 



1. 

1. What do you consider the necessary characteristics 
of the greatest good ? 

2. Compare the Greek and the modern cc icepuions 
of virtue. 

3. Reproduce Aristotle's answer to the question : In 
what cases is a man an involuntary agent ? 

4. Give a brief exposition of courage and indicate 
some of its spurious forms. 

o. With what great line of argument from the 
Nicomachean Ethics may j'^ou assail and sweep away 
all sensational theories of morals ? 

II. 

Translate : 

(a) K.ai irepi fikv rovrtav iirt rotrovrov elprjtrdo}' TrdKiv 
8' iTtaveXdtofiev iirl to ^ijTovfievov ayaubv, ri ttot' &v 
etrj. ^aiuerai, fiiv <yap aWo iv aWi; irpd^ei ical 
T€;^i/i7' aXKo rfhp iv iarpiKi) koX arpariffiK^ kou to?? 
XotTrat? op.olai'i. Tt oiv eKaarrj^ T&yadov ; ^ o5 
ydpiv TO, Xonrit irpdrTerai ; tovto 8* iv larpiKfi iihf 
vyieia, iv arparrj^iie^ 8i vixri, iv oUoSofitK^ 8' oucia, 
iv aX\f> 8' aKKOf iv dm-daj) herrpd^ei Kai irpoaipiati 









rh Ti\o>i' TOVTov yap Sv^Ka to Xot/irk Trpdrrovai 
Travrei}. "no-r' ei ri rSiv frpaKT&v unrdvrtav iari 
T^\o9, tout' hv etrj to irpaKrov ivyadov^ el Be nXeicot 
ravra. 

(6) ' Ort fiiv oliu etTTiu r} hperrj r/ ^Oikt) fieanrr)^, Kal 
TTtuv, Kai on fieaoTrjf; Bvo KUKt&v, rrj^ fiiv Ka6' irrrep- 
0o\iju TTJ^ Si kut' SWei-ilrif, Kal on Toiavrr] earl Stct 
TO aToy(a(TnKr) tov fiiaov ehai too itf to*? •/rddeci, 
Ka\ rah irpd^eaiv, Uav&i eXprfraij. Ato Koi epyov 
ian (Tirovhalov eluai' iv ixdarq) ykp to p.i<Tov Xa^eiP 
epyov, olov kvkKov to fieaov ov iravro^ dWh tov 
elSoTo^. Ot)Tu> B^ Tul TO uif opyiKdfjvai travTo^ KaX 
j>u.BioVy Kat TO Bovvai Apyvpiov xal BaTravrjaai. to B* 
^ Kal otTov Kal oTe koi o5 evcKa Kal &?, obK^Ti iravTO'i 
ovBe fi^Biov Biimep to eC Kal airdviov Kal iTraivcTov 
Kai KoKov. 

(c) ^uopia-fievfop Be tov Te eKovaiou Kal tov iiKovaiov, 
irepl •trpoaipeae(o<; erreTai BieXdeiv olKeioTaTou yitp 
etvai BoKet ttj dpeTfj Kal fiaXXov to, '^drj Kpiveiv t&v 
irpd^efov. 'H trpoaipeait Bf/ exovaiop fiev ^aiverai, 
oil TavTov Be, aX\' eirl ifKeov to eKovaiov tov fikv 
yhp eKovaiov Kai 'rratBe<} Kal T&Wa ^(aa Koipcovei, 
irpoaipeaeay'i B' o{f, Kal to. e^ai(f>vt]<i eKovaia fiev 
\eyofiev, kuto, irpoaipeaiv S" ov. 01 81 Xeyovre^ 
ai/Ttjv iiridvuiav ^ Ovuov ^ ^ovXrjtnv ij Tiva Bo^av 
oifK eoiKaatv opdm Xiyeiv. 

(d) Tet fiev oliv t^? iuTcaTlaf ov irdvv <rvvBvd^€Tai' ob 
yap p^Biov firjBafiodev Xafi^dvovTa irSun BiBovaf 
To;^e(B? 700 iiriXelTrei 1) oixrla tou? lBuaTa<i BiBovTa^, 
oOtrep KoX BoKnvaiv aarioToi elvat' inel 6 ye toiovto^ 
Bo^eiev &v ov fiiKpm ^e\Tuov elvat tov hveXevdepov. 
Ei/taTo? T6 700 eaTi Kal vtto t^? rfKiKia^ Kai vtto t^9 
diropla^y Kol eirl to fieaov BvvaTui eXOelv. "E^^ct yap 
Tct TOV iXevdepiov' Kal yap BiBuai Kal ob Xa/i^dvei, 
obBeTepov S' w? Bel obB' eiJ. E4 Be tovto idiadeit), ^ 
7ra>9 aX\(ii>9 /leTafiaXoi, etr) &v e\ev0epio^' Baxrei yhp 
ol^ Bei Kal ov X^q-^erai Sdev ov Bel, Ato Kal BoKel obx 
etvai <pav\o^ to ^6o<i' ov yhp fio-)(6ripov ouS' dyevvoO^ 
TO tnrep^dWeiv BiBovTa Kal /xr} Xafi^dvovTa, '^Xidiov 
Be. *0 Be TOVTOV tov Tpoirov oaatTOfi ttoXv BokcI 
^eXrlmf tov dveXevdepov elvai Bid Te Ta elptjfjieva, 
Kal 6ti 6 fiev axfxTiel ttoWou?, 6 Be ovOiva' dXX' ovB' 
avTov. 



' 



I 



snnfueroftv of Toronto, 



ANNl/AL KXAMlNATIO^Hi im»l. 



(;ani)II)atks vow ha. 



KANT. 

HONORS. 



£xamh)er: J. Mauk Baldwin, M. A., Ph.D. 



«*«CiuuU(latoH may omit uny Hinglo qneHtlon after the flftli. 

1. Translato : Wir werden dahor Erfalinm^jt iilier- 
haupt /ergliedorn miissen, luii /.w .selien, wns ii) diest'in 
Piodukt <ler Sinne und des Voistaml(?.s enthalteii, tind 
wie das Erfahrungsurtljoil sulbst moglich ist. Ziini 
Onmde lio«t die An.scliauung, «loren icli inir Imwiisst 
bin, d. i. Wahrnolii>uin<j die bios den Sinnen an<j;ehi)ifc. 
Aber zweitons j^oliort audi dazu das Urthoilen. Dieses 
Urtheilen kann nun zwiel'ach scin : eistlich, indeni ieh 
bios die Wahrnehmnngen vorglelclie und hi oiiiein 
Bewusstsein meinos Zustandes, oder z\veit(.'ns, da icli 
sic in einein Bewusstsein iibeihaupt verbinde. Das 
erste Urtheil ist bios ein Wahrnehniungsurtlieil. und 
hat sofern nur subjective Giiltigkoit, es ist bios 
Verkniipfung der Wahrnehmungen in meinoni Ge- 
niUthszustande .... Dadurcli entspriugt kcino Allgo- 
nieingiiltigkeit und Nothwendigkeit des Urtheiles. 
. . . , Es gcht also noch ein ganz andores Urtheil voraus, 
ehe aus Wahnehmung Erfahrung werden knnn. Die 
gegebener Anschauung muss unter einem Begritf sub- 
sumirt werden, der die form des Urtheilcns iiberhaupt 
in Ansehung der Anschauung bestimmt, das enipirischo 
Bewusstsein der letzteren 'n eineni Bewusstsein iiber 
haupt verkniipft und dadurch den empirischen Uv- 



theilen AUgemeingiiltigkeit verschatt't ; duiglelchen 
Begrifl' ist 
Proleg., § 20. 



ei 1 



q 

reiner 



C5 

Veistandesbegriff" a priori. 






I) 



II 



I 



2. Rxpiuid Kiim's s h«w of tlio Micmi'iitsof oxporionco 
as iiitiiiiHtt'd ill thu abovo |)iivsii;{o, Ntating ciuaily tlio 
iiii'/uiini,' he crrnvt^VH by Uio wo"' i AhhcIkuuukj, Wahv- 
lu/naii III/, Hi'i/ri/f, /'Jijn/in.iiif, auil tiioir rolation to oin' 
aiiotliur. llliistnito with Kant's (ioctririo of causatiun. 

'I. Statt! iukI uxatnino in dutail Kant's arginnuntH for 
tlu! II pi'ioi'i cliariictfr of simc^o aixl tinio. Can wo get 
inatlicMuiticH or natiuo-scionco without a I'vioi-l for- 
malism of space and timu ? 

1 What ail* the " catogorios" ? What kind of oh- 
JHCtivo validity does Kant give them / 

5. Can you bring }uur criticisms of formal space 
also against formal categories of Intellect (Verstand) ? 
Can we i-eihNtate valid iiituiloctual knowludgo without 
reinstating objective space and time ? 

0. What is the problem of Kant's Transcendental 
Dialectic!? His solution? In what sense is Kant 
agnostic ? What is the function of transcendental 
apperception in the system ? 

7. Outline Kant's criticisms of the traditional theis- 
tie proofs — especially the Anselmian. What in the 
relation of the notion of design, in Kant, to the cate- 
gories. 

«S. Stiito the lelation of Kant's critique of Practical 
Ileason to th(^ other critiques. Explain his doctrines 
of right and duty. How does he reach the objective 
groundjjig of the moral law ? Is he entitled to it ? 

!>. What <lo you understand by the Neo-Kantian 
pliiluso[)liy i What otfect does it have on the Kantian 
svstem to lemove the doctrine of noumena ? 







• I 



i 



V 




( 



:) 



CAtifUfrivflff of Sovonto* 



SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH EXAMINATION. 



LOGIC. 



Exami/ner: J. McD. Duncan, B.A. 



1. Define Induction. 

2. Are the following to be regarded as instances of 
inductive reasoning ? 

(a) All the planets shine by the sun's light, for 
this is true of each separate planet. 

(6) All the angleo , " «ny triangle are together 
equal to two right angles, for this is true of the triangle 
ABC. 

3. Upon what principle is all inductive reasoning 
grounded ? How is this principle itself established ? 

4. Explain fully what is meant by the eauae of an 
event. 

5. Distinguish between Composition of Causes and 
Combination of Causes. 

6. Explain fully the different steps in the Deductive 
method. 

7. Discuss the value of aa analogical argument. 

8. Exemplify the use of the Method of Conconcidant 
Variations. 



i 



1 



mni\^tvuit9 ot STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



ETHICS. 

HONORS. 



!:■: 




/ 



Examiner: J. Mark Baldwin, M.A., Ph.D. 



*,* Candidates may omit one question. 

1. Examine the Intuitional Theory of the right. Is 
it true that what a man ought to do is always right ? 
Is it true that what is right ought always to be done ? 
Illustrate your answers. 

2. Sketch the psychological antecedents of an act of 
tree choice. How is it possible to " change one's mind " 
in regard to the rightness of a course of conduct ? 

3. Define the place of sympathy in the ethical sys- 
tem ; g've in detail any historical views which occur 
to you of the ethics of sympathy. 

4. Give a brief history and criticism of the " Ethic 
of Evolui'.on." 

5- Where does ethics fall in the metaphysical system? 
Wi^at is the relation of the categories c* duty and right 
to the knowledge categories? State the moral argu- 
ment for the existence of God. 

6. Outline the history of the free-will controversy, 
and show the bearing of the question upon the ethical 
problem. 

7. Expound Green's theory of the ethical end. Ex- 
amine Bentham's and Mill's Utilitarianism. 

8. Explain the so-called "ethical formalism " of Kant' 
What fault have you to find with it ? 

I 



mmmmm 






i 



■^ 



) 



dnftieirfidtQ of {Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE. 

POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY. 

HONORS. 



„ . f J. M. McEvoY, B.A. 

ExamxneTB : '^ ^ ,j, Thompson. B.A. 



NoTB. — Candidates are requested not to attempt more than eight 

questions. 

1. What, according to Aristotle, is the purpose of the 
State ? 

2. What does Aristotle mean by saying that the 
State is prior to the family and the individual ? 

3. Estimate the value of Aristotle's criticism of 
Plato. 

4. In what way does Marsilius of Padua anticipate 
the theory of modern Constitutional Government r 

5. In what sense is Machivael the first purely 
scientitic student of politics ? 

6. Compare Rousseau's theory of the origin of civil 
Government with that of Hobbes. 

7. What were the defects in Rousseau's political 
theories as applied to the France of his own time ? 

8. The doctrine which bases the State upon a con- 
scious union of individuals to secure certain definite 
advantages has historically been of importance in its 
relation to two questions : (1) the right of revolution ; 
(2) laissez faire. Explain veiy briefly. 

9. "Political problems do not primarily concern 
truth or falsehood." — Burke. Examine this- position. 

10. Briefly compare the teaching of Benthara and 
Green as to ti)e object of Law. 

11. Can the doctrine of " the survival of the fittest" 
be applied to human society ? 



SAntUettttttt of ^ToroiUo* 



ANNUAL KXAMIXATIONS: 18»1. 



CANDIDATK8 FOR B.A. 



POLITICAL SCIENCK. 

HONORS. 



Examinera; | ^- T- Thompson B.A. 
i J. M. McEvoY, B.A. 



N.B — Candidates are requested not t(i attempt more than eight 

4uestiona. 

ECONOMIC HISTORY. 

1. Sketch the history of the Teutonic Haiise in 
England. 

2. Describe the position of the nunliaeval viUoin. 

3. Explain the causes for the decay of the Craft 
Guilds. 

4. Trace the development of the Poor Laws during 
Elizabeth's veigii. 

5. Show the importance in English Economic His- 
tory of the woollen industry. 

6. Distinguish the various stages in the growth of 
English foreign trade. 

7. Describe the origin of the Bank of England, and 
explain its connection with the financial measures of 
the government of William III. 

8. Trace the progress of the East India Company, 
down to the beginning of the eighteenth century. 

9. What were the social effect of the "Enclosures" 
of the eighteenth century ? 



more than eight 



nic Hanse in 



I- Laws during 



10. Compare the Merchant Guild with the modern 
Joint Stock Company. 

11. Illustrate historically the relative advantages 
and disadvantages of the Factory system of Industry. 

12. Sketch the history of factory legislation in Eng- 
land. 



Economic His- 



ttnilietiittt of ttat^nto. 



8UPPLKMENTAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR 



ARTS. 

POLITICAL ECONOMY. 



Examiners 



■•{ 



J.. M. McEvoY, B.A. 

A. T. Thompson, B.A., LL B. 



1. DoeH density of population tend to increase or to 
diminish the per cnpila productiveness of & nation ? 
Apply your conclusions to determine the importance 
of the Malthusian doctrine of population. 

2. If it were deemed desirable to encourage the 
manufacturing of steel in Canada would you do so by 
levying a duty on imported steel, or by giving a bonus 
])er ton for ail steel produced in Canada ? 

3. Examine the soundness of the two fundamental 
assuiiiptions upon wh' ih the laimez /aire doctrine of 
the functions of Government proceeds. 

4. " Value depends on supply and demand." 
What limitations and explanations does this state- 
ment require ? 

.5. " Rents tend to rise with industrial propers." 
Examine this statement. 

6. On what principles would you proceed to deter- 
mine what was "fair wages" between master and 
workman in any given industry ? 

7. Describe some of the more important plans re- 
cently advanced for the uniting of labour ana capitf.1, 
and examine the expediency of each from an ecou^mic 
standpoint. 



ilnftteriiftv of Toronto* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: 1801. 



CANDIDATES FOR RA. 



POLITICAL ECONOMY. 



r^n^u^^^ . r J. M. McEvoY, B.A. 
ExammevB : | ^ ^ Thompson, B.A. 



1. What is Political Economy ? 

2. Illustrate the use of indiiction and deduction in 
Political Economy. 

3. State and criticize the * Wage Fund Theory.' 

4. " Landlords were able to pocket the whole advan- 
tage of the Corn Laws, and the people suffered that 
rents might be kept up." Explain and criticize. 

6. What are the functions of money ? 

6. State arguments for and against the adoption of 
bimetalism. 

7. Is a government justified in taxing the rich for 
the benefit of the poor ? If so, to what degree ? 

8. Distingush the various meanings attached to the 
term " socialism." 



^nivtvnltp of SToronlo* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



INTERNATIONAL LAW. 

HONORa 



i 



« ^^. ^^.. (Hon. William Proudpoot, J. 
Exarmnera. ^^^^ j^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^UB. 



1. Explain and illustrate the right of self-preserva- 
tion as a doctrine of International Law. 

Narrate fully the following matters, and state 
how far each is justified by the right of self-preserva- 
tion : the burning of the Caroline ; the seizure of the 
Danish fleet and the bombardment of Copenhagen ; the 
case of the Virginius ; the English claim to the valley 
of the Ohio against prior discovery and occupation by 
the French. 

2. Explain and illustrate the modem rule of Inter- 
vention. 

3. Explain fully the limits that International Law 
imposes to the use of violence against the inhabitants 
of the enemies country. 

4. What distinction is there between military occupa- 
tion and conquest in the legal relation of the enemy to 
the government and people of the occupied territory ? 

5. Answer fully who are recognized as legitimate 
combatants ? 

6. What is the law at the present time as to the 
carriage of enemy's goods in a neutral ship ? Of a 
neutral's goods in an enemy's ship ? 



7. State whether a neutral state can, without a 
violation of its neutrality, permit the army of a bel- 
ligerent to pass through' its territory? What if the 
permission is given to both belligerents ? 

8. A ship of war belonging to one belligerent captures 
a merchant vessel within neutral waters, how fer may 
the neutral interfere and upon what ground is that 
interference upheld? State in what respect such 
a proceeding differs from the proceeding of a prize 
Court? 



eanftietttftp of l^Torotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



FEDERAL CONSTITUTIONAL LAW. 

HONORS. 



i I 



Exarainf.ru 



r Hon. Wm. Pkoudfoot, J. 
\ Hon. David Mill, LLB. 



1. State the various sources 
Law and Custom of Canada. 



of the Constitutional 



2. What parts r)t' our Constitutional l^aw are outside 
the British Noith America Act, and what parts are 
under the Legislative control of the Parliament of 
Canada, as a constituent body ? 

3. Name the various departments of the Federal 
Administration, and give an account of the duties of 
each department. 

4. State the provisions of the British North America 
Act, 18G7, for the Creation of Courts, of Civil and 
Criminal jurisdiction, and for the appointment of 
Judges, and point out in what respect the federal plan 
of government is departed from, in these provisions, 
relating to the Judicial Department of Government,* 
Provincial, and Federal. 

5. State the historical circumstances which establish 
the proposition, that the constitutional powers vested 
in the President and Congress of the United States, 
were not grants from the States, but powei-s acquired 
from the King and Parliament of Great Britain by 
force of arms. 



6. Give an account of the Executive Government of 
the United States, and state how far the Senate is en- 
trusted with executive functions. 

7. What provision does the Constitution of the 
United Stub's make in refen-nee to Bills uf Attainder, 
and in reference to Kx post facto Laws ? 

8. What provision does the Constitution make as to 
the subject of impeachment : who nmy be impeached ? 
VVliat are lawful grounds for impeachment ? In whom 
is the power to impeach lodged ? By what body are 
impeachments tried ? What is necessary to a convic- 
tion ? What is the punishment when the impeached 
party is convicted ? 



FOUKTIl VEAU. 

FEDERAL OONSTITUTIOSAL LAW- 

(Hon. Wm. Pkoud'""?: •'g 
tominers; {Son. David Mills. LUB. 



Quebec Act, Wl*. ^, Gox-nnietit 

2 State «Ut changes "f'^.'^J^e iri^aiction of the 

otle'luntry ^XttTtu "na'Vct of 1791, and by 

r^^.^:&fX';>: «j- — ^^^^^ 

1. The constitution oE the re 

and Parliament. .Miction of Parliament. 

2. The Legislative 3ur.sdcUon ^^.^^^ ,, 

3. The general ^cheme *^; the . ^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ 
justice in both Canada and the ^^,,,,,,tion 
•^ 4 In what respect 1^ thej^ana d 

similar in principle^^^^^^^^^^^^ the United 

in what respects is i^ 

^^^^'' • of the constitution of the United 

areas. ^^t^vpsslv denied to the 

^ 6 Knumerate the P"*'™ Sttnd relate the cu- 
J■...^ states by *«^nC;^"iction. arose, 
cumstances out ol wm^- 



V(. 



J. 

.B. 



7. J)eHcribu the .hxlicial Dcpnitiueni uf the Federal 
Governniunt of the United States. 

8. What provision is \m\t\v uiulei' the Unite'l Stateo 
Constitution for the j?overnniont of tho 'lurritories, 
and what for the a«hnission <if m-w States ? How 
have the TtMjitories been governed, and what are the 
preliminary conditions to tlie adtnissionof newStateM? 



ons 



of the 



lovninent 

bion of the 
91, and by 

^it. 



joverument 

lament. 
tiiBtration of 
of Canada. 
Constitution 

Lingdoi". an<i 
• the United 

of the United 
iwers of Con- 
denied to the 
relate the cir- 
OB arose. 



1 ' 



mniuerilto of Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH i 1H9I. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE. 

PUBLIC FINANCE. 

HONORS. 



Examinern 



. / J. M. M 

• \A. T. T 



McEvoY, B.A. 
HOMPSON, B.A. 



Note. — Candidatea ara ruquoated not tu attempt more than eight 
queationfl. 

I. Describe the functions of the Interstate Commerce 
Commisnion. Would it be desirable to subject Cana- 
dian railroads to a similiu control ? 

2 What are the best principles upon which to 
found a Mysteni of taxation / 

3. Discuss the relative advantnges and disadvan- 
tages «>f direct and indirect taxation. 

4. Suggest a Ny.sten) of Municipal taxation for 
Toronto. 

5. Does sound policy deninnd the payment of 
National Debts ? If so, with what rapidity should the 
payment proceed ? 

6. Distinguish between the principles which should 
govern the management ot Municipal Debts on the one 
hand and National Debts on the other. 

7- What arguments can be adduced for and against 
the municipal management of ' natural monopolies' ? 

8. Is a city justified in granting bonuses for the 
encouragement of private enterprises ? 

9. How should a (l>overnmcnt deal with its public 
lands ? 

10. Trace the history of the science of Finance. 

II. Are paper notes money ? Whut bearing, if any, 
has thi.s question on Government policy ? 



wmimmmm 




2ain(tiet0ftfi of ^rotroiuo* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR 



III 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY 
AND MINERALOGY. 

INORGAMC CHEMISTRY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : T. Proctor Hall, M.A., Ph.D. 



1. Give an account of recent corrections of atomic 
weights, as related to Mendelejefi's table. 

2. An element whose specific giavityis 18.4 forms a 
compound with sulphur and oxygen containing b.7% 
of sulphur and 65.22% of the metailii base ; also a 
chloride containing 37.09% of chlorine. Find its pro- ^ 
bable atomic weight. 

3. How may the impurities likely to occur in com- 
mercial strong sulphuric acid be detected and removed ? 

4. Explain the action and use of the ordinary oxi- 
dizing and reducing agents. 

5. Name the sources of compounds of nitrogen and 
of phosphorus. Make a table of the chief compounds 
of each, so as to show the varying atomicity of these 
elements, and the similarity in the two series of com- 
pounds. 

6. Write equations, showing the action of hydrogen 
.sulphide on the chlorides of the metals of the second 
group (Hg, Pb, Sn, etc.) in acid solution. 



7. What propertiers are characteristic of metallic and 
noii-uietallic elements respectively ? Is hydrogen a 
metal ? 

8. Describe the methods employed to determine the 
heat of neutralization of acids and bases, and sum- 
marize the results. 



UniMtvniiy of Sotonlo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



NATURAL SCIENCE— DIV. I. 



EMBRYOLOGY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



1. Give an account of the development of the noto- 
chord, and the formation of the mesoblastic somites. 

2. Sketch the formation, and trace the history of 
the Wolffian body and Wolffian duct. 

3. Give an account of the development of the Spleen, 
Liver and Sympathetic Nervous System. 

4. Describe fully the condition of the heart and cir- 
culation of the blood at the end of the fifth day. 

5. Describe fully the development of the ear in the 
Mammalia. 



( 






\ 



nnni 



JRni^tvnits of 9:ovonto« 



A^NUAL EXAMINATIONM : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND 
MINERALOGY. 

HISTORY OF CHEMICAL THEORY. 



Examiner : T. Proctoh Hall, M.A., Ph.D. 



1. Write a brief history of the science of chemistry 
prior to the year 1800. 

2. In what respect did Dal ton's tlieory differ from 
former atomic theories. What was, and what is, the 
evidence in its favor ? 

3. Why were the atomic weights changed ? (Make 
your explanation intelh'gible to one familiar with the 
old system only). 

4. Trace the influence of Prout's hypothesis on 
modern chemical theory. 

5. Give an account of the Philogiston theory, and 
of its overthrow. If for philogiston we read ' energy', 
how near does the theory come to modern views ? 



1 



(!iinfV)rt0fttf of ITorontn, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



NATURAL SCIENCE DIV. I. 

PHYSIOLOGY. 



Examiner : J. J. MacKenzie, B.A. 



1. Give a full account of the electrical currents in 
muscle and nerve. 

2. Describe fully the physiology and mechanism of 
the absorption of fat in the small intestine. 

3. Give an account of the so called pressor and 
depressor nerves and explain their action. 

4. Discuss the various views as to color vision. 

5. Discuss I'uliy the subject of heat in the animal 
body. Upon what does it depend, and how is it main- 
tained. 



I' 






\ 



Sftnlbernftff of Covoitto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS 1891. 



(u 



FOURTH YEAR. 



NATURAL SCIENCES— DIV. I. 

COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 



Examiner: J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



1. Give an account of the primonlial cranium, and 
compare it with the adult craniinn of the Amphibia 
and Mammals. 

2. Give a description of the Pelvis of the Lizard and 
Pigeon, and trace its modifications in intermediate 
forms. 

3. Describe concisely the heart and main vessels in 
the Ichtyopsida and Reptilia. 

4. Discuss the homodynumy of the 3rd, 4th, and 
10th cranial nerves. 

.5. Describe the origin, and discuss the significance 
of the Thyroid, Epiphysis and Hypophysis. 

C. Indicate briefly the comparative anatomy of the 
Oesophagus, Stomach, and Intestine in the Fishes, 
Birds, and Mammals. 






^i 



amibtmftff of Covotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAK 



NATURAL SCIENCES— DIV. 1. 

HISTOLOGY. 



Examiner : J. J. Mackknzie, B.A. 






1. Describe minutely the blood supply of the spleen 
and bone marrow. 

2. Give an account of the nerve tracts in the spinal 
cord, medulla pons and cerebrum. Explain how this 
has been determined. 

a. Describe fully the histologj' of the small intestine. 

4. Give a complete account of the histology of the 
skin. 

5. What is the structure of the .suprarenale ? Sketch 
the development of this organ in the embryo. 



V 



iSlnitirr0ft|^ ot Cotottto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



PALi:i)NTOL()GY-VERTi:BRATA. 

HONORS. 



I'/xandner : F. G. Wait, M. A. 



1. Write a short paper on Homotaxis. 

2. Describe, with examples, the different kinds of 
tins and of teeth which are met with in fossil fishes. 

3. In what formations, and under what generic 
names do representatives of the <'ollowinji; orders oi' 
groups tirst occur : 

(^helonia, Dinosauria, Cursores, Pedimaiia, 
Crocodilia, ri-ot)()seidia, Phocidae, (^astoridae, 
0|)hidia, tScyllidae. 

4. Briefly characteiize any five of the following 
geni'ra. State their zoological relation, iind range in 
geological time : 

Mylodon, Ma.stodon, Zenglodon, Echidna, 
Gastornis, Ct»nxtodus, Acipeasi, Carcharlas, 

Dinoceras. 

5. Name the more important fossil genera of tht 
order of Edentata. State also their geological and 
geographical distribution. 

6. Name the ancestral, fossil types of the modern 
Horse. Give the iieolo'dcal range of each. 

7. Characterize the amphibia. Point out in what 
respects the living and fossil forms resemble, and in 
what the}' differ from one another. 

How are the fossil forms classified ? 
Give the more important genera of each order 
and their range. 



' 



#s 



Uni^^tvttitp oC STotonto. 



AKNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



CRYSTALLOGRAPHY AND ADVANCED 
MINERALOGY. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. Dimorphism : 

Define this term as applied to minerals, and give 
its causes. 

The following minerals, whose chemical formulae 
are as follows, are dimorphic : 
C, S, A(j, S, Fe S,, Ti 0,, Sb, 0„ Ca G 0„ (Ba, Co) GO,, 

Give the names and different foi'ms assumed by 
each. 

2. Write a hort paper on twin crystals, referring 
especially to their modes of formation and of growth, 
and to their essential parts. 

Give an example from each of the six systems, of 
minerals presenting this phenomenon. 

3. Distinguish (a) between inclined and parallel 
hemihedrons, (6) between vertically direct and verti- 
rallv alternate hemihedrons. 

4 .'-Jtate the chemical formula and leading characters, 
i^'d idiig crystallographic and blowpipe, of: Corun- 
Jam, Topaz, Emerald, Turquois, Azurite, Zircon, Ti- 
taiiite, Bornite, 

5. Cliaracterize the Phosphates and Arseniates. 

Shew in what points they resemble, and in what 
they diti r fro»r; one another. 



• JJar==.-=i 



I 



6. Describe the group of the Feldspars, generally, and 
any one member of the group particularly. 

7. What is the action of Hydrochloric Acid on : 
Sphalerite, Garnet, Magnetic Pyrites, Natrolite, 

Chabazite, Pyrolusite, and Apatite ? 

8. What Minerals are represented by the following 
formulae : 

m S As. AgUs S,, Sb, 0„ 3 Pb, P 0, + PbC 
3 Ca, P, 0. + Ga CX Al, Si 0„ Fe, P, 0, + 8 if. 0. 

9. Distinguish between Unisilicates and Bisilicates. 
Give examples of each. 



(; 



SAnftoersftff of Cotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



NATURAL SCIENCE, DIVISION I. 

MODLUN BIOLOGICAL PROBLKMS. 

HONORS. 



Eeaminer : J.J. MAcXeafZiE, B.A. 






1. Contrast the theorifs of LauiMtirck and Darwin on 
the production of Spocitis. 

'2. G.ve Jin ac(!onnl of, and discuss tlie various 
theories of Heredity. 

3. Outline Wi ismann's views as to tlie significance 
of sexual reproduction in Natural Selection. 

4. Describe the formation of the polar bodies, and 
discuss the views as to their significance. 






SInilitroUjp of Coroitto, 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



CANDJDATf:a FOR J 5. A. 



NATURA L SCIENCE— DIV. I. 

PHYSIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY. 






Examiner: J. J. Mackknzie, B.A. 



1, Discuss the origin offuts in tluj animal and vege- 
table kingdom. 

2. Detail the experiments whieh show that some 
albumenoids may replace the higher proteids in the 
nutrition of the animal. 

8. Give Bunge's view <m the resorption of iron in 
the animal body. 

4. Describe the methods of preparation of artificial 
urea. Show what beaiing these have upon ourktiow- 
ledge of its structural foi'unila. 

Discuss the origin of urea in the body ami its 
relationship to other nitrogenous excreta and extrac- 
tives. 

5. A ball is thrown from the hand : trace the full 
history of the energy expended in propelling the ball. 

6. Give an account of the effects of the presence or 
absence of oxygen upon the development of micro- 
organisms. Discuss the cause of the difference in yeast 
fermentation in the pre.sence and ab-sence of oxygen. 



ZAtiitiriraiiv of Sotonto. 



' 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



FOURTH YEAR 



DEPARTMENT OF (CHEMISTRY AND MINER- 
ALOGY. 

PHYSICAL CIIIIMISTIIY. 

HONORS. 



h'xaminer: T. PjiOCTou IIam,, M.A., J'h.I). 



' 



N.B. -You art) roquuHted tu nuluut luiy four of theti* questions. 

1. At liifrli pifssuH! tlif volniiics of liy<lr(i;,'t'ii and 
carbon dioxidf do not follow HoyltVs l(i.\v. How ai« 
tlio d(fviations oxplairuMW <'»m tlus law lie so stattMl 
that such doviations do not occur i 

2. How may the critical temperature of a Itody be 
inferred from its properties [a) in the liciuid state, and 
(h) in the jjaseous state ? 

li. Describe those methods foi- the <leterminatiou of 
molecuhu- weiifhts wl.ich depend upon changes in the 
vapor-pressure oi* in tlie freezing point of solutions. 

4. Discuss the nature of Affinity. 

;'). What relation do tiie masses of the substances 
})resont in a chemical reaction bear to (I) the rate of 
change, and (2) the final product ^ 

(J. What views are now held re<;ardiny: the nature 
of solution? State tlie laws ui' osniatio pivssure in 
dilute solutions. Discuss the theory of dis.sociati(jn 
into ions. 

7. By what experimental method is the statement 
establithed, that the heat, set free when a compound is 
formed, is exactly vijiial to the heat, which must be 
supplied to decompose this compound. 




ii 



■^ 



^, 







IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 



J 




M./y 




.*^% 






1.0 






1.1 l.-^Ka 



11.25 




Hiotograidiic 

Sdences 

Ccrporation 






•t 



\ 





<^ 




A. 



<^-V 








O^ 



2S VVIST MAIN STREET 

WEBSTER, N.Y. 14SS0 

(716)«72-4S03 



'^ 






' i 



1 



lii 



6 



Cliiftiftflifta^ of Coronio, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 
CANDIDATES FOR B.A. 



GEOLOGY OF CAI^ADA. 

HONORS. 



I 



Examiner : F. G. Wait, M.A. 



1. Widte a geological sketch of the coal fields of 

Canada. „ ^ , • u 

9 Give an account of the geology of Ontario, hav- 

tions represented. 

3. State the geological /eatures of that portion of 
the Dominion lying west ot Manitoba. 

4 What different theories have been advanced to 
expiarthe manner of filling of mineral veins ^ 



ll 



tii-i.i ^uj. 1 1. I I iiiimiii mil 



/ 



s 



"■»1T>9!Jf|^ 



WLnl\^tvuit9 of siototito* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST EXAMINATION AND PIMMAUY. 



ANATOMY. 



j' 



( M. H. AiKTNs, B.A., M.D., M.RC.S., En'j. 
Jilxaminern:\ J OHis Ferguson, M.A., M.D., L.F.P.S., 
Glas. 



1. Describe the Superior Extremity of the Huineius. 

2. Describe the bony surfaceis entering into the for- 
mation of the Ankle joint. 

3. Describe the Soleus nmscle. 

4. ])escribe the pronator radii teres muscle. 

5. Describe the internal lateral ligament of the 
Ankle joint. 

6. Describe the Pancreas. 



Ifi 



2linft)ct0ft|? of srovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: ISHl. 



KTRST EXAMINATION. 



ANATOMY. 

HONORS. 



\ 



(M. H. AiKiNS, B.A., M.D., M.RO.S., Eng. 
Examiners: < John Ferguson, M.A., M.D., L.F.P.S., 
( Glas. 



1. Describe the External Surface of the Occipital 
bone. 

2. Describe the bony surfaces entering into the for- 
mation of the Elbow joint. 

3. Give the relations to each other and to the tibia 
of the tendons of the Sartorious, Gracilis and Seiniten- 
dinosus Muscles. 

4. How is the head of the Astragalus supported 
when the body is in the erect position ? 

5. Describe the popliteus muscle. 

6. Describe the left side of the heart. 



) 



) 



Sftnllier«U9 of Covonto. 



ANNUAL K.XAMINATIONS , 1801. 



FIRST EXAMINATION. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner : A. B. Maoallum, M.B., Ph. I). 



1 . Classify the tissues of the bod}'. 

2. Describe the course of the blood in the heart. 

'S. Name the digestive ferments, and describe their 
properties. 

4. Describe the corpuscles found in the blood, and 
state what are their functions. 

5. What are the mechanisms in the alimentary 
canal which promote resorption ? 

*C. Describe how the functions of the eye are per- 
formed. 

*7. Discuss the question of the origin of tho energy 
in the animal body. Why should starchy food give 
less energy than an equal weight of fat ? 

* For Honors ouly . 



) ■ 



1 

I 



2Anflift0lCji^ ot CTotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



FIK8T YKAH AND PHIMAUY. 



BlOLOCY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Exitminer: J. J. Mackenzie, B.A. 



NnTK:. —Honor Candidates take all the queationii. Pass and Primary 
Candidates any six. 

1. Give an account of the structure and reproduction 
of the Liver-fluke (Distomura). 

2. Describe briefly tiie parasitism of the Tape WoriiKs. 
Show liow they are adapted to their mode of life. 

3. Compare the mode, of re.s[)iration in the Insecta 
and Crustacea. 

4. Give an account of the circulatory system of the 
Frog. Point out the chief diff*erences between the 
circulation of the blood in the Frog and in Man. 

5. Discuss the differences between animals, colourless 
plants and green plants in respect to their nutrition. 

G. What is meant by cross fertilization in plants ? 
Give some of the special adaptations to bring this 
about. 

7. Give an account of the germination of the seed 
in Angiosperms. 



S^nfUerttCti^ of {Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FIRST YEAR AND PRIMARY. 
MEDICINE. 



liNORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner: Graham Chambers, B.A., M.B. 



Note. — Candidates are permitted to une Gaa Charts, and Tables of 
Logarithms. 

1. (a) Explain the phenomena which attend Chemi- 
cal combination. 

(6) Describe in detail the difference between a 
chemical compound and a mechanical mixture. 

2. Write a formula of a gas which gives on analysis 

Nitrogen = 97.67 
Hydrogen = 2.33 

100. 

3. If 357''''- of the gas in question two at 17"'C. and 
721"""- Bar weigh .615 grams, what is the probable 
molecular weight ? 

4. Explain, with illustrations, the meanirg of the 
following terms : (a) Reducing Agents, (6) Metals, (c) 
Bases, (d) Acids, (e) Salts, (/) Divalent, (g) Disso- 
ciation. 

5. Write equations showing the action of Clilorine 
gas upon the following : 

(a) Potassium Iodide ; 
(h) Powdered Antimony ; 
(c) Ammonia ; 

{(I) Solution of Hydrogen Sulphide ; 
(«) Strong and weak solution of Potassium Hy- 
drate, 



1 Tttbles of 
I Chemi- 
tween a 

■ 

analysis 



'''C. and 
robable 

of the 

»ls, (c) 

Disso- 

lilorine 



6. The elements Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Arsenic, and 
Antimony are said to form similar compounds. Explain 
this statement. 

7. Write the formula of an Alum. ITow do the 
physical and chemical properties of this group of com- 
pounds assist in the classification of the elements ? 

8. Describe and explain in what way the presence 
of a substance not itself taking part in a chemical 
change may cause a reversal of the action. Thus a 
solution of Iodine and Sulphur Dioxide gives Sul- 
phuric Acid and Hydriodic Acid, whilst dry Sulphuric 
and Hydriodic Acids give Sulphur Dioxide and Iodine. 



»}■ 



SXnftierfiifttf of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1««1. 



SKCOND KXAMTNATION AND I'KIMARY. 



ANATOMY. 



Examiners 



("John Ferguson, M.A., MD., Tor., 

-l L.R.O.P., Edin. 

( W. H. AiKiNS, B.A, M.D., M.R.C.S.. Enq. 



1. Describe the Odontoid Process of the Axis. 

2. What arc the characters of the Lumbar Vertebrae. 

3. Describe the External Surface of the Occipital 
Bone. 

4. Describe the Lesser Trochanter of the Femur. 

5. Give tho Muscles attached to the Os Calcis. 

6. Define Synarthrosis, Amphiarthrosis, Diarthrosis. 

7. Describe the Anterior Common Ligament of tho 
Vertebral Column. 

8. State the attachments and actions of the Crucial 
Ligaments of the Knee. 

9. Describe the Orbicular Ligament of Superior 
Radio-Ulnar Articulation. 

10. Give tho nerve supply to, and the actions of, tho 
Muscles of the Orbital Region. 

11. State the origin of the Latissimus Dorsi. 

12. Describe the Sheath of tho Rectus Abdominis 
Muscle. 

V). Describe the Course and Insertion of the Tendon 
of the Tibialis Posticus. 

14. Give the Course of the Superior Tliyroid Artery. 



i\ 



15. Draw a diagram showing the relations of the 
Arteiy Vein, and Median Nerve in the Arm. 

IG. Describe the blood supply to the stomach. 

17. State the parts supplied by the Obturator Nerve. 

18. What Muscles aso supplied by the Ulnar Nerve ? 

19. Draw a diagram of, and describe the Lachrymal 
Apparatus. 

20. Indicate the area of Cardiac dulness. 



s. 

al 

or 
he 



nis 



Ion 



ry. 






'/. 



) 



Bni\^$v»iiti of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



SECOND EXAMINATION AND PRIMARY. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 



Examiner : A. B. Macallum, M.B., Ph.D. 



] 



1. What are the characters of the bile salts ? Des- 
cribe thoir origin, function unci destination in the 
body. 

2. Make a sketch of the lateral view of the cerebrum 
and indicate thereon the positions of the visual,auditory, 
antl motor " areas." 

3. Describe the functions of the vagus nerve. 

4. Describe the mechanism of accommodation in the 
eye. Show by diagram liow tiio cornea and lens afiect 
the rays of light penetrating tlie eye. 

5. Describe what occurs in the heart during a cardiac 

cycle. 

G. Give a full account of the phenomena of muscle 
cunti'action. 








<5 



8 



CAnfUetiiitff of Sotonto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



I 



SECOND EXAMINATION. 



PHYSIOLOGY. 

HONORS. 



Eccaminer: A. B. Macallum, M.B., PhD. 



1. Write a full account of the history of the fat in 
the animal body. 

2. Describe fully the anatomical and physiological 
relations of the medulla, Pons Varolii, crura and cortex 
cerebri to one another. 

3. Describe the development of the spinal cord, and 
of the spinal and sympathic nerves in the embryo. 

4. Give a full account of the conditions which deter- 
mine renal secretion. 

5. State what is meant by Electrotonus, and show 
wherein the condition differs from that produced by 
polarizing currents. 

6. Under what condition.s, and how, is the respira- 
tion of the tissues carried on ? 



Cftnlnerttiti^ of STotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONM: moi. 
SECOND KXAMFNATION AND PinMAHY. 



HISTOLOGY. 

pakSs and honors. 



Examiner: Geo, Acheson, M.A,, MB. 



* For Honors only. 

1. Describe the various forms of cartilage, and tell 
where they are found. 

2. Describe a transverse section of the radial 
artery. 

U. What i.s the difference between the striated 
muscle fibre."* of the heart and those of the .skeletal 
mu.scles ? 

4. De.scribe fully the elements of simple ndenoiil 
ti.ssue, taking as an example (me of the solitary glands 
of the intestine. 

5. Enumerate the different structures to be seen in 
a transverse section of the spinal cord with its mem- 
branes. 

*(). Give the minute anatomy of a lobule of a 
functionally active mammarj- gland, and compare it 
with a salivary gland. 

*7. Describe how you would prepare a fresh mam- 
malian eye so as to shew the histology of the retina ; 
and what would you see in a vertical section ? 



#f?*Ti^'te^i!"~ 



7JB< I 




ClnflierttUj? of 8oronio« 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



SECOND EXAMINATION AND PRIMARY 



ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner: Graham Chambers, B.A., M.B. 



NuTK.— Candidates are permitted to use Gas Charts, and Tables of 

Logarithms. 

1. A compound of Oxygen, Nitrogen, Carbon, and 
Nitrogen gives an analysis : 

Carbon = 40.51 % 
Hydrogen = 7.90 % 

In a determination of the Nitrogen by the absohite 
method .31 grams, of the compound yielded 41.9 c.c. 
of Nitrogen at 16°C. and 751 mm. Bar. 

The vapor density of the compound was found to 
be 3.15 (air = 1) ; write its formula. 

2. (a) Write constitutional formulae for the following 
organic compounds : Dimethyl-Ethyl Methane, Diethyl 
Ketone, Ethyl-Methyl Ether, Trichloracetic Aldehyde, 
Urea, Phenol, Benzoic Acid. 

(b) Write names for the svibstances denoted by 
the following forraulae : 



CH. 



CH, 



CH,— C— OH CH, 



C,H, 



, CH, 
"^NU, 



NH, 

/ 

CH, 

I 

c=o 



\ 



OH 



CH, 



CH3 
CH, 
^ONa 



lARY. 



., M.B. 

, and Tablea of 
Carbon, and 



the absolute 
Ided 4-1 i> c.c. 

wa-s fouTul to 

the following 
bane, Diethyl 
tic Aldehyde, 

js denoted by 



8. Starting with Ethyl Alcohol how could you pre- 
pare the following substances : Ethyl Chloride, Etnyl- 
Amine, Ethyl Aldehyde, Dimethyl Ketone, Acetic Acid, 
Diethyl Ether, Kthyl Acetate. Give equations in each 
case. 

2. (a) Write thi constitutional formulae of all the 
isomeric Alcohols of the formula C^HjoO. 

(6) Illustrate by equations the action of oxidizing 
agents upon each of these Alcohols. 

5. Ketones. How prepared ? What is action of 
(a) Nascent Hydrogen ; (6) Penta-Chloride of Phospho- 
rus, and (c) Hydrocyanic Acid upon Ketones. 

CH,OH 

6. The organic compounds | and 

COOH, 
CH, 

CHOH are said to have 

I 
COOH 

both Alcoholic and Acid properties. 

What do you understand by this statement ? 

7. Point out the resemblances between Ammonia and 
Amines. How are Amines distinguished from Amides ? 
What is the action of Nitrous Acid upon (a) Amines ; 
(6) Amides ? 

8. Give reasons for the classification of organic com- 
pound into the Fatty, and the Aromatic series. Compare 
the chemical properties of Ethyl Alcohol and Phenol. 



1 

N 



C 



CH3 
CH, 
^ONa 




ill 



I 



'! 11 



«nWft«H» of «oconto. 

PASS AND HONORS. 
■ E«.mi«r.- O. B. AV.BON, M.D. 

-r-:r'sr^- ;t 

Tr. Nucis Vom ' ^^^ 

Aq. fttl Misce. 

Which preparation would you aac, and why? 

2. ^^'^^- . ,„U9 describe the physical 

^ame its v^"«^%tr^^^^^ Give general 

characters of each and state so^^u ^^J 
medicinal properties oE eacn, 

3. CoWio^T-How jepared. ^^^ ^^^^ .^ ,,, 

What varieties of it are 
"^^^ Whit 'other Pharmaceutical preparation has a 

similar use ? ^^^^^^.„g; i^e propor- 

4. Name ingredients ot^ ^^^^^ ^^.e: 

tion of the principal ing ed^^nt a ^^^^^^ ^^^, 

Dover's powder^ Gregoi y « g.,iocynth Co, 
ders, Pulv. Jalapae Co., Extract ^ ;' 



id give 
rations, 

iions of 



vhyl 

physical 
general 



;■». State stvpn'i'tli and dosp of tli<! following: 

Syr. Ferri lodidi, Syr. Chloral Hydrat., and Tinc- 
tures of Belladonna, Cannabis Ind., Catechu, Colchicum 
Seed, Diijitalis, Hyoscyainu.s, Iodine, Lobelia, Nux 
Vomica, Opium, Podophyllin, Strophanthu.s, and Vale- 
rian Ammonitit 

6. State composition and strength of the following 
ointments. Explain reason for use of the bnse employed : 

Ung. Acid Salicylic, Chrysarobjn., Gallae cum 
Opio, Hydr-ir^. Ammoniat., Hydrarg. Ox. Rub., Sul- 
phuris, Zinci Oxid. 

7. Cinchona Alkaloicl». 

Name the Salts of those now used. 
State solubility of each, and dose of each. 

Which kind of Cinchona bark is used in making 
the Pharmaceutical preparations ? 

Name those preparations, and state strength and 
dose of each. 

8. Digestive Ferments. 

Name the chief ones now used. 
State the source of each. 

Explain the part performed by eac'i in assisting 
digestion. 

What kind of medium does each act best in — 
acid, alkaline, or neutral ? 

Give dose of ea'jh, and describe a method of 
administering which shall make it effective. 



it is the 
n has a 
! propor- 



litz pow- 



1 1 1! 



niii 



f 



^ni\}tvuit9 ot SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS ; 1891. 



SECOND EXAMINATION. 



ANATOMY. 

HONORS. 



rJoHN Fkhgu.son, M.A., M.l)., Tok., 
Examiners:-^ L.R.C.P., Ei)[N. 

( M. H. AiKiNS, B.A., M.D., M.R C.S., Eng. 



1. Describe accurately the Great Omentum. 

2. Explain the blood circulation through the liver. 

3. Describe the deep peritieal fascia. 

4. Explain the formation of the external and in- 
ternal abdominal rings. 

5. What are the parts of the Spermatic cord, and 
the course taken by each ? 

6. Describe the duct of the Submaxillay gland. 

7. What important parts surround the Middle ear? 

8. Trace the right optic nerve from the eye to its 



origins. 



9. Draw a diagram of the Sphenoidal fissure, 
marking the structures passing through it. 

10. Name and describe the peduncles of the Cere- 
bellum. 

11. Draw an illustration of the plantar arteries, 
naming on it the various branches. 

12. Describe tiie t'oniiatioi), position and relations of 
the foramen of Winslow. 



i'.i. State tliu iifivt; supply to the following imiHcle.s: 
Gracilis, Obturator Externu.s, SeinitendinoHii.s, Tibialis 
Auticus, Plantaris, Trtmsversus Pedis, Trapezius, Dia- 
phragm, Serratus Magnus. 

14. Describe the actions of tlie muscle of Mastication. 

15. Describe the upper extremity of the Radius? 

1 0. The Thumb is cut oti" at the middle of the first 
])halanx. What structures are divided ? 



mm 




smiuerttfti^ of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



THIRD EXAMINATION. 



SURGERY. 



' 



Examiners : { Frederick W. Stranoe, M.R.C.S. 



E. McKenzie, B.A., M.D. 



1. Define: 

(a) Fracture. 

(6) Simple fracture. 

(c) Comminuted fracture. 

((if) Compound fracture. 

(e) Complicated fracture. 

(/) Impacted fracture. 

Q) Partial fracture. 

(Ji) Describe the treatment of a simple fracture of the 
clavicle in the middle third. 

2. Describe the process of repair in an incised wound. 

3. Describe the signs of dislocation of the hip upon 
the dorsum ilii. Give method of reduction by manipu- 
lation, 

4. Hffimorrhago from a wound involving the radial 
artery. IIow would you control it ? Give reasons for 
your treatment. 



8liiiiier«fi|? of Soronio. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: IM9I. 



THIRD KXAMINATION. 



SURGICAL ANATOMY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



f 



Examiner: Grisoouy Ff.nt, M.B., L.R.C.P., Lond, 
M.R.C.S., Eno. 



1. A laborer is accidentally Htruck on the head by a 
pickaxe, the point entering the brain in the region of 
the right parietal eminence. Beginninir at the Hurt'ace, 
name in order the ntructures pierced before reaching 
the brain. 

2. Describe the steps necessary for tying the Subcl- 
avian Artery in the tnird part of its course. Why is 
this portion of the artery most frequently chosen ? 
How is the collateral circulation carried on ? 

3. The forearm is amputated in its lower third by 
the circular method. Name the structures cut. 

4. Locate and describe the inguinal lymphatic glands, 
and state whence they receive their aflferent vessels. 

5. Qive the surfacc-iiiarkiiii<n i'ur the following struc- 
tures: Lateral Sinus, Common Carotid Artery, Internal 
Abdominal Ring, Fissures of the Right Lung, Femoral 
Artery, Fissure of Rolando. 

6. The Popliteal Space, its boundaries, contents, posi- 
tion of contained parts, including the neighboring 
bursae. 



! 






Win\b$v»tt» of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD EXAMINATION. 



MRDICINE. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examinev: J. E. Graham, M.D. 



"I 



1. Give the clinical history, pathology and treat- 
ment of Acute Lobar Preumonia. 

2. Give the symtoms and treatment of Acute Dysen- 
tery. 

3. Describe the conditions which result from (1) 
Mitral Regurgitution ; (2) Mitral Obstruction. State 
briefly the important points in the differential diagnosis 
between these two lesions. 

4. Give the symptoms, diagnosis, Prognosis and 
treatment of Acute Nephritis 

*5. Name the principal causes of Cerebral Abseses, 
and give the symptoms and management of that con- 
dition. 

*6 Give the symptoms and treatment of Acute 
Exenia, and of Chronic Ezema Erj'thematosum. 

* For Honors only. 



r 



canftoer0ft|? of STovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIRD EXAMINATION AND FINAL. 



THERAPEUTICS. 



Examiner : James MacCallum, B.A., M.D. 



Note. — Third Year Students will take qneBtiona 1, 2, 3, 4, 6. 7. 
Final " " " 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8. 

1. Describe the action on the Heart and Vessels, of 
Digitalis, Caffeine, Atropine, Alcohol, Nitro-Glycerine, 
Veratrum Viride. 

2. Describe the mode of action as Antipyretic, of 
Quinine, Antipyrin, Salicylic Acid, Cold. State the 
indications for, and contra indications to, the use of 
each. 

8. Enumerate and contrast the various hypnotics and 
anodynes. 

4. Mention the officinal Anthelmintics, their doses, 
and the cases in which each is especially applicable. 

5. What are the indications for administering stimu- 
lants in certain stages of disease. 

6. " The means for the removal of dropsical fluid are 
suitable in all cases, be the cause what it may, unless 
the dropsy be of renal origin." Discuss this statement, 
illustrating it by the various drugs used in cases of 
dropsy. 

7. "In old persons who suffer from dyspnoea, the 
result of Bronchorrhoea, and in whom shortness of 
breath follows exertion, strychnine i? the best remedy 
we have." Why ? 






N. " The use of drujjs for the relief of constipation ia 
capable of division into two parts. First, the use of 
remedies to unload the bowel which has become filled ; 
second, the use of drugs which will so influence the 
intestines as to cause evacuation and normal activity, 
i.e., drugs which will cure the tendency instead of 
giving relief." Name the drug.-* of the two classes, 
their doses, mode of administration, and the conditions 
under which each is to be prefened- 



0lnftier0Uv of SToroiito, 



I 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : I8tfl. 



THIRD YEAR. 



GENKRAL PATHOLOGY- 



Examiner: J. Caven, M.D., L.R.C.P., Lond. 



* For Honors only. 



1. What is Necrosis ? State in general terms the 
causes of Necrosis in the animal body. What are the 
results of Necrosis as regards the necrosed tissue ? 

2. In what tissues is Metaplasia (transformation 
from one kind of tissue to another without passing 
through an embryonic stage) found to occur ? Give 
examples, both physiological and pathological. 

3. Enumerate the diseases classed as Infective 
Qranulomata. Why are they properly so-named ? Give 
cause in each, if known. 

4. What is your basis of division in classification 
of new growths ? Enumerate the Carcinomata, indicat- 
ing the main histological diffeiv'^nces. 

•5. Why are the Bacteria called Schizomycetes ? 
Give Cohn's classification of the Bacteria. 

*0. Give the life history of the Trichina Spiralis. 



f1 






i 



J 



^ 



CAnftoftrsfttf of CToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: IKOI. 



TIIIKJ) KXAMINATION AND FINAL. 



! 



OBSTETRICS. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiwr: H. S. Griffin, B.A., M.B., MM, CM. 



I 



1. Describe the location and structure of the uterine 
ligaments. 

2. Describe fully the use of antiseptics in obstetric 
practice. 

11 Mrs. A. B., aged 27, multipara, three months 
pregnant. After a heavy washing on Monday she was 
taken in the night'witli bearing-down pains and flow- 
ing. Early Tuesday morning she was found to be still 
flowing and in pain. The discharges had been thrown 
away, and no information could be gained of what had 
passed. Give the management of the case. 

4. In what cases of puerperal haemorrhage may the 
tampon be used ? Describe the method. 

5. Mrs. C. D., confined March 12th, labor normal, 
lochia profuse. On the loth the lochia suddenly cea.%ed, 
temperature 1()0°F. She complained of chilliness, but 
no rigor or pain. Slight tenderness over the hypo- 
gastriuni, and uterus somewhat enlarged. Give diag- 
nosis and treatment. 

6. Give the causation and treatment of (a) after- 
pains ; (6) mastitis ; (c) ophthalmia neonatorum. 

7. What conditi(ms justify the use of the forceps ? 
Describe Tarnier's axis-traction forceps, and state their 
advantages. 



\ 



m 



8. Mrs. K. v., aged 30, Hi'Nt had HyinptoniH of prog- 
nancy early in December, though inenHtruation occurred 
an usual. The Hyiiiptoms perMiHied until February I5th, 
when «he sudtlenly felt Hevero pain in hynogastric 
region, followed by faintncNH ; pulse 128 ana feeble; 
face pallid. After two hours she rallied. The follow- 
ing day had bearing-down pains, bloody discharge 
from the vagina, ard expulsion of decidual membrano 
after eight hours. One week liter bho had another 
attack ot pain in the same region with threatened 
collapse from which she recovered with difficulty. Dis- 
cuss diagnosis and treatment. 



CAnftiemftv or ororonto* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONK: IH9I. 



POUHTIf KXAMINATIOX AND FINAL. 



SUllGEKY. 



/,' . ,»>, •» ^„ } Fredeiir'k W. Stuanoe, M.RC.S. 
nxammers • -' ' 



•■{ 



B. E. M<;Kknzie, B.A., M.l). 



1. l)cHCi'ib« Teale's Amputation of tho Thigh. Name 
the .structures dividerl, ami describe the after treatment. 

1. Nuine the conditions neces.sary for a successful 
re-scction oi' a joint. State, in detail, the process of re- 
section of the Elbow-joint, including the after treatment. 

8. Describe the process of rei)air in the Shaft of a 
long bono after a well adjusted fracture. How would 
you treat a compound fracture of the Thigh ? 

4. Define Phlegmonous Erysipelas. Give the signs 
and symptoms, local and constitutional, of Phlegmonous 
Erysipelas of the Hand and Arm State the treatment. 

5. What is Glaucoma ? Describe its surgical treat- 
ment. 



( 



( 



anfUersUff of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FINAL EXAMINATION. 



SURGICAL ANATOMY. 



Examiner: Gregory FjfiRfi, M.B., L.R.C.P., Lond., 
M.R.C.S., Eno. 






' ) 



1. The Brachial Artery is obliterated at the junction 
of the middle with the lower third of the arm. How 
is the circulation carried on ? 

2. The lower end of the femur is fractured just above 
the condyles. ])escribe the displacsment of the frag- 
ments, and explain the cause. 

3. Give the surface-makings for the following struc- 
tures : Anterior Borders of the Lungs, Brachial Artery, 
Bifurcation of the Trachea, Spleen, Fissure of Sylvius, 
Anterior Tibial Artery. 

4. A maniac attempting suicide cuts his throat in 
the thyro-hyoid space. Name the structures that may 
be divided. 

5. Describe the dissection necessary to expose the 
Right Kidney from the loin. 

6. Femoral Hernia. Why more frequent in women ? 
Course taken by the intestine. Covering of the hernia. 
Method of applying taxis. Boundaries of Crural Canal 
and Crural King. 



6 



( 



anfDevttUv of srotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH EXAMINATION AND PINAL. 



MEDICINE. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner: H. H. Wright, M.D. 



1. Give the characters, mechanism, modifications and 
significance of the various forms of tubal breathing. 

2. Give the symptoms and diagnosis of Pyuria, 

8. What are the morbid anatomy, phenomena and 
diagnosis of tubercular meningitis ? 

4. Give the causes, phenomena and diagnosis of the 
Typhoid condition or state, apart from Typhoid fever. 

5. Write a paper on Epidemic dysentery — including 
definition, causes, anatomy, secondary effects and diag- 
nosis. 

6. What are the asserted advantages of the cold bath 
treatment of Typhoid fever, with full directions for its 
use, and the accepted contra-indications and dangera. 



SAnfUtrciftff oC Sototito* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH EXAMINATION AND FINAL. 



GYNAECOLOGY 

HONORS. 



Examiner : Allen Baines, M.D., CM., L.R.C.P., Lon. 



1. Mention causes and symptoms of Vesico Vaginal 
Fistula. Describe operative procedure necessary for 
cure. 

2. Mention causes and symptoms of Pho-Salpinx. 
Describe operative and palliative treatment. 

3. Mention diseases with which Ovarian tumor may 
be confounded. 

Give differential diagnosis between Ovarian Tumor 
and Pregnancy. 

4. Give the varieties and symptoms of Fibro- 
myomata of the Uterus, with appropriate treatment 



5. Give causes, symptoms and treatment of Pelvic 
Abscess. 

No. 5 is for Honor men only. 



Uni\^tvnitp of Cotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMNATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH EXAMINATION AND FINAL. 



MEDICAL JURISPHUDENCE. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner: W. Winslow. Oqden, M.B. 



Note. — Candidates for Pass take the questions on ^y not marked with 
an asterisk. Honor men take all questions. 

1. Indicate the media by which poi.sons reach their 
destination after administration by the stomach. 

2. Name the chemical antidotes for each of the fol- 
lowing substances : (a) Virdigris ; (6) Corrosive Subli- 
mate ; (c) Tartar Emetic ; (d) Sugar of Lead ; (c) Liver 
of Sulphur. 

3. How many forms of Naevi Matemi are observ- 
able, and describe each ? 

4. Enumerate the signs of Virginity in a female of 
sanguine temperament over 14 years of age, and under 
20 years. 

*5. The lungs of a foetus float in water, a.ssume that 
they float from a particular cause, and shew that they 
float from no other cause ? 

*6. A number of adults, male and female, fell into 
deep water together, from a common accident, and 
perished; shew from examination of the bodies whether 
the males or females perished first, and give your 
reasons for so deciding ? 

*7. Sevei-al individuals, male and female, have been 
exposed to noxious exhalations in a confined space and 
have died therefrom. What circumstances would lead 
to a decision in a question of presumption of survivor- 
ship ? 



mnibttnits of sototito. 



ANhUAL EXAMINATIONS: IH91. 



FOURTH KXAMINATION AND FINAL 



MKDICAL PSYCHOLOGY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examine!': Daniel Claik, M.D. 



* Honors. 

1. Define in a few sentences what meanings are 
usually given to the terms: Illusion, Hallucination, 
Delusion, and Insane Impulse. 

2. What is meant by the expression " The Insanity 
of Morality," and how can a person afflicted with it he 
distinguished from one guilty of mere wickedness ? 

3. Give the diagnostic symptoms which indicate 
the difference between Semi-Dementia and Chronic 
Melancholia. 

4. Describe a case of Epileptic Insanity, and give 
crucial tests by which to detect a pretender. 

*5. Give the motor and psychic symptoms which are 
found in a case of Progressive Paresis in the order in 
which they usually occur. State generally the gross 
pathological conditions which are found by a font 
mortem on the contents of the skull. 

*5. There are three distinct exciting causes, one or 
more of which produce Puerperal Insanity. Give the 
diaijnosis and treatment of each. 



IjL. 



0liiflifr»ltv of CToronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 18»l. 



FOURTH EXAMINATION AND FINAL. 



HYGIIINK. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Exatn'mer : Fuancis Rae, M.D. 



• For Honors. 



1. What precautions should be observed to prevent 
infection from a case of Diphtheria ? 

2. Enumerate the disinfectants in most common use, 
and indicate the uses of each. 

.^. What aie the dangers to be apprehended from the 
presence of sewer gas in a dwelling ? By what means 
may it be excluded ? 

4. Describe briefly the powers and duties of local 
boards of health in Ontario. 

5. Describe the various processes employed in the 
purification of water. 

0. What precautions should be adopted in the pro- 
duction and care of milk to ensure its purity, and what 
diseases may be produced by impure milk ? 

*7. Wiite a paper descriptive of a healthy home, 
having regard to the character and location of the site, 
construction of the building, the drainage, heating, 
lighting and ventilation- 



I i i I 

! I ) I 



Olniiifr0ltff oC Sovonto, 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH : 1801. 



FOURTH YEAR AND FINAT. 



PATHOLOGY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner; H. A. MciCalm'M, M.B. 



1. Write a short note on each of the following; {a) 
Coagulation necrosis ; (6) Phagocytes. 

2. Give the changes found in the arteries resulting 
from Syphilis. Whore are such changes of groat patho- 
logical importance ? 

a. Give the steps in the formation of " Aortic 
Aneurism." 

4. Nau)e the different forms of " Liver Cirrhosis." 
Describe one form. 

*5 (a) Describe " Secondary Pneumonias.'* 

{h) What is meant by " Cadiac Pneumonia" ? 

(c) Are they of a Catarrhal or Croupous char- 
acter ? 

*G. Describe fully the changes seen within the glo- 
meruli and tubes in Chronic Nephritis resulting from 
Scarlatina. 

*For Honorri only. 






! I 



ili I I 



■ y> ■ ! 



Slnft)er«up of Sototito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS; 189) 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



BROOM'S COMMON LAW. 



Examiner: J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. State briefly the law as to ratification of a tort ? 

2. Under what circumstances will a husband be 
liable at Common Law for necessaries furnished to his 
wife? 

3. Whiit are the rules for determining whether a 
sum named in a contract as payable for its breach will be 
regarded as a penalty or as liquidated damages ? 

4. Into what classes are bailments divided, and what 
is the liability of the bailee in each case ? 

o. Discuss the ciiminal liability of a person ajffected 
with insane delusions. 

6. What are the respective functions of Court and 
Jury in actions for malicious prosecutio?^ ? 



Vll! 



CAnftoftttUs of Toronto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



BROOM'S COMMON LAW. 
HONORS. 



Examiner : J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. What must be established in order to recover for 
slander of title ? 

2. When will a request for an executed considera- 
tion be implied ? 

3. What are the requisites of a valid local custom ? 

4. Discuss the rule as to merger of a tort in a felony 
so as to suspend the civil remedy until prosecution of 
the offender. 

5. Distinguish between the liability of a trading 
partnership and a non-trading association of persons 
for the acts of a member. 

6. Of what importance is intention in Crin^inaj 

|aw ? 



!f 



(finfiiftttftff of Sotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATION.S : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



INTERNATIONAL LAW. 
PASS. 



1'^ 



Examiner : His Honor Judge Muiu, M.A, 



HALL AND VON SAVIGNY. 



1. When a court of justice in one country is called 
upon to enforce a contract entered into in another 
country, the question arises whetlier or not the contract 
is valid accordinfj; to the law of the country where 
entered into. What other important question arises ? 

2. A person who has resided in Ontario from birth, 
makes his will at the age of 20. Ele subsequently 
icmoves to England, taking the will with him, where 
he dies at the sige of 25. Is the will A-alid or not ? 

[a) Assuming that a minor may, by the law of 
England make a will. 

(b) Assuming the opposite. 

3. Give a brief account of the dismissal of Lord 
Sackville from Washington in 1888. 

4. What were the provisions of the Act of the 
Imperial Parliament of 1870, respecting naturalization ? 

5. Give a short account of the Fenian invasion of 
1866, and of the threatened incursion of Sitting Bull 
in 1879, and contrast the attitude of the American 
Government towards Great Britain in the former with 
the course pursued by them in the latter. 

6. Give the substance of the declaration adopted at 
the Berlin Conference of 1885, respecting the contin- 
uity of occupation of the coast of Africa. 

7. What is the right of angary ? 



|!! 



^niMtvuitp of Coronto. 



ANNUAL B:XAMINATI()NS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



I NT KR NATIONAL LAW. 
HONORS. 

Kxiimiiin': Hrs Honou .Iitikjk Muir, M.A. 



HALL AND VON HAVKJNY. 

1. In II contract niatlo by correspondence between 
])orsni).s vesidiiigr in ditt'evoiit countries, and using dif- 
iorent |}ingua<ifeH, which of the languages of tlie writers 
will be regarded as governing in arriving at the proper 
construction '. 

1. What laws arc applicable in cases of obligations 
arising ex delicto '. Discuss this in connection with 
tlie rule of the Fiench civil code, which says, in Act 
345, " La recherche de l<t paternite est interdite," 

3. " If a holograph testament is privately executed 
at Berlin, it is an incft'ectual act from which no rights 
acci'ue at the death of the testator. But if before his 
death, the French form of testament is introduced, 
according to which a privately made holograph will is 
valid, then by the rule of the code that testament 
would become valid." In connection with this subject 
discuss briefly the juridical rule, " Teinpus regit 
actum." 

4. The Secretary of State, in a communication to 
the Italian charge d'affairs, on the subject of the late 
tragedy at New Orleans, said, that " the government 
of the United States is utterly iniable to give the assur- 
ance which the Marquis Rudini has demanded." What 
was the assurance ? Discuss the subject briefly in 
connection with varying responsibility of any State 
in respect to acts done by 



i_. 



(a) Admin'iHtrative, naval, or military agonts. 
(h) Judicial functionaries, 
(c) Private persons. 

5. Under what conditions may contribution and 
requisitions be levied by a naval force ? 

In this connection refer to the article upon the 
subject by Admiral Aube in the Revue des Deux 
Mondes in 1882. 

6. What was the termination of the claim on the 
part of the government of Russia to sovereignty over 
the Pacific Ocean north of the 'Asi parallel of latitude ? 
Refer to the attitude of the government of the United 
States subsequently in respect of the same subject 
matter. 



Vfc 



> 



CAtiilifr0ftff of Corouto, 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONH: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



CONSTITUTIONAL LAW. 
PASS. 



Examiner: His Honor Judqk Muir, M.A. 



BUUOM AND TODD. 



1. What change in the law of libel was effected by 
Fox's Libel Act, 32 Geo. III. ? 

2. By the terms of the British North America Act, 
in whom is vested the command of the Militia, Naval 
and Military forces of Canada ? 

3. When should the power of disallowing Provincial 
Statutes be resorted to ? 

4. What return was made to the writ of habeas 
corpus in Darnel's case, and with what result ? 

5. May the Speaker of the Senate of Canada be a 

Cabinet Minister ? 

6. Write short notes u,>on: "Articles of War," "The 
King can do no Wrong," "Inter arma silent lerfes." 

7. Give a short account of the attempt to check the 
immigration of Chinese into British Columbia. 

8. State briefly the chief incidents of the attempt 
on the part of the Hon. George Brown to form a new 
administration in 1858. 



Ill 



l\ 



■■-■ 



UL 



?!3niti(rfiiUy of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



CO N STIT JTTION A L L AW. 
liONOR^. 



Examiufiv : His Honor JrrnaE Mum, M.A. 



BROOM AND TODD. 

1. What was the offence charged against the "Seven 
Bishops ?" State briefly the nature of the subject 
matter out of which it arose. 

2. Give the substance of Mr. Justice Blackburn's 
charge to the Grand Jury of Middlesex in the case of 
GovLU'nor Eyre of Jamaica. 

3. Trace in brief outline the disputed question of the 
right to appoint (Queen's Counsel. 

4. " Wo are, therefore, compelled to conclude that 
the action taken tor the removal of Lieutenant-Gover- 
nor Letellier VA'as at variance with Constitutional Law 
and prece^ient, as well as contrary to the spirit and 
intent of the Biitish North America Act." 

Give the reasons. 

5. " The impressment of men for the army was 
declared to be illei^al by an Act of the Long Parliament 
(16 Car. I. ch. 28), except in certain cases." 

Mention the excepted cases. 

6. Give the substance of the iudofment of Lord 
Mansfield on the return of the writ oi habeas corpus 
in the case of James Sommersett, a negro confined in 
irons, on board ship bound for Jamaica. 



I 




7. Give a short account of the proposed commercial 
treaty attempted to be negotiated by the Hon. George 
Blown in 1874. What objections were raised by cer- 
tain chambers of commerce in England, and what 
assurances were given in respect thereto, and by whom? 

8. In 1877, Sir George Grey, Premier of the Colony 
of New Zealand, claimed that the Governor should, as 
a matter of course, accede to a dissolution of the House 
upon the I'cquest of his ministry, under any and all 
circumstances. Give the substance of the despatch of 
Sir Michael Hicks Beach on the subject. 



11 






i ilii 





• i 






Hi 




j 


■ 




If 



rirCf 



i?iinfi}cr0ft|? of ^Tovonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



m 



ip 



constitutional law. 
"honors. 



Examiner : His Honor Judge Muir, M. A. 



FORSYTH. 



1. What opinion was _i,'ivon b\ the law officers of the 
(Jrown in 1S4'2 as to the ])()\vei' of the government of 
Canada to grant an exclusive right of ferry between 
that Province and the United States ? 

2. Has a Colonial Governor power to proclaim 
inartial law, and if so, state under what circumstances ? 
To what extent, if to any, does martial law when pro- 
claimed supersede? the ordinary tribunals ? 

3. In what respects do the privileges of a ship driven 
into a foreign i)ort bj stress of weather ditter from 
those enjoyed in case of an entry under ordinary 
circumstances ? 

4. What material i.s necessary in order to obtain a 
writ of habeas corpus ? In what cases will the Court 
examine into the circumstances under which a prisoner 
has been committee^ ' 

5. When the ct.at^ition <>a v ich a pardon is granted 
by the Crown has been biokeu may the offender be 
referred '.o his origin u i5(in'..;nt'i ' 






6. In October, 1867, one McCardle a citizen of the 
State of Mi,ssi.s.sip[)i was arrested and brought before a 
military commission, which assumed to act under the 
autliority of the United States, for trial, for publishinjy 
in a ne\vspai)er criticisms upon military officers and 
advice to electors not to vote or how to vote, upon cer- 
tain public questions. State in a few sentences some 
of the points in Mr. David Dudley Field's contention. 






i»i|. : 



^Jl 



^nl\itvnU9 of SToronto. 



AVNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



(CJUHHICULUM 1888.) 

COMMERCIAL LAW. 
PASS. 

Examiner: His Honor Judge Muiu, M.A. 



SMITH. 



1. An individual |)aitner in a Hrui of solicitors 
accepts a bill of exchange, in the iiartnersliip name, 
for a loan of money. Is the firm liable upon ifc ? 
Explain. 

2. Explain briefly the arrangement known under 
the civil law by the name of iwvatio. 

3. If an agent place his principal's money to his own 
account at his bankers, without any mark distinguish- 
ing it from his own, what are the rights of the principal 
in ease the banker should fail ? 

4. In general the agent's power to commit his prin- 
cipal to third parties is determinable at will by the 
principal. Mention two exceptions. 

5. Explain the .similarity between a bill of exchange 
and a promissory note after the latter has been endorsed. 

6. Give the definition of the term " salvage." 

7. Where a joint^order is given for several classes of 
goods, is the acceptance of one cla.ss a part acceptance 
of the whole so as to bind the bargain within the 
meaning of the 17th section of the Statute of Frauds ? 



8. Is the reason given in Orace v. Smith, that by 
taking part of the profits he takei< part of the fund 
which is part of the proper security of the creditors 
sound and sufficient or not ? Discuss the subject of test 
of partnership briefly. 

9. A ship's master signs a bill of lading for 100 tons 
of coal, when in fact only 50 tons have been received. 
What remedy has an indontee for value of the bill of 
lading ? 



t 







IMAGE EVALUATiON 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




^5^ 






^ 4^ 



4^ 



^ 



1.0 



I.I 



I^IM 125 
2.0 



u 



MM 






o 



/ 









Sdencjes 
Corporation 



23 WIST MAIN STUfT 

WiBSTEII,N Y. 14StO 

(716) •72-4503 



■^ 










% 




V 









c 



e%nftiet0ftj(^ of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM 1888.) 

COMMERCIAL LAW. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: His Honor Judge Mum, M.A. 



SMITH. 

1. "A," "B," and "C" nre partners in business. 
"X" has an execution against the goods of "A." 
What course should be pursued by the sheriff in respect 
to the property of the partnership ? 

2. In what cases will a Court by its decree put an 
end to a partnership ? 

3. In the case of the death of a partnei', what is the 
rule in the administration of assets where the estate is 
insufficient to pay in full, and where there are partner- 
ship creditors as well ? 

4. Where should a bill of exchange be presented in 
each of the following cases : 

(a) Where no place of payment is specified, but 
the address of the drawee or acceptor is given in the 
bill. 

(6) Where no place of payment is specified, and 
no address given. 

5. " D," " G," " S," and " C " became sureties to a 
banker for the debt oC " R." At the time, and as a 
condition of becoming such sureties, " D" and " G," 
without the knowledge of " S" and " C," obtained from 
" R" a security against liability. What is the rule of 
contribution ? 



6. What are the provisions of 14 Geo. III., cap. 48, 
rebitive to cjarning or wagering policies ? Js it neces- 
sary that the assignee of a poljcy should have any 
interest in tlie life of the assured ? 

7. What is the rule as to length of service where 
the hiring is a general one without mention of time ? 
Is the illness of a servant a ground of dismissal, and if 
so, uncfev what circumstances ? 

8. What is the "right to stop /;( transitu" i Ex- 
plain the character of the ingredient of insolvency, 

9. Policies of insurance were granted on a cargo of 
a U. S, merchant ship which was destroyed by the 
Alabama during vhe late American war, and compen- 
sation was paid by Great Britain as the result of the 
Geneva arbitration, a part of which and more than 
sufficient to cover their loss was received by the 
owners. The underwriters paid as on an actual total 
loss. Were they entitled to recover back the money so 
paid 1 ~" 
nection. 



Discuss the doctrine of subrogation in this con- 



and 



..-r- 






^nftietfiifts ot ^Torontd* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM, 1888.) 

TORTS. 



Examiner: J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. What were the hardships sought to be remedied by 
the Employers Liability Act ? 

2. What is meant by the expression "qualified pri- 
vilege" in defamation ? 

3. What must a plaintiff establish in order to suc- 
ceed in an action of deceit ? 

4. Under what circumstances will a master be liable 
for the wilful and deliberate wrongs of his servant ? 

5. "You cannot convert a contract into a toi't to 
enable you to sue an infant." Explain. 

6. Is the malicious bringing of civil proceedings a 
tort ? 



H 



•t \ 



isnflifir0ft|? of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM, 1888.) 

TOKTS. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. Discuss briefly the liability of a person dealing 
with dangerous articles. 

2. What are the respective functions of Court and 
jury in actions of negligence ? 

3. When can a plaintiff recover in an action in 
Ontario for an injury received outside the territorial 
jurisdiction of our Courts ? 

4. What is the liability of a person inducing the 
breach of a contract to (a) a paity, and {h) a stranger 
to the broken contract ? 

5. Is it a defence to an action of tort to show that 
the plaintiff was a wrongdoer at the time he suffered 
the injury of which he complains ? 

6. What is the effect of a recovery of judgment 
against one of several joint wrongdoers ? 



d I V 



einf\)er»Utf ot Sovonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 18U1. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.75. 



ROMAN LAW. 
PASS. 



Extimhu'v : J I is IToNoii Ji'Ihik Muik, M.A. 



JUSTINIAN. 

1. Mention the two distinct bodies into which the 
citizens of Rome were divided. 

2. What is necessaiy to constitute a perfect tradi- 
tion ? 

3. Distinguish between the rights known as ingnus 
and hypotheca. 

4. Mention the thiee origins of the right of Slavery, 
assigned by Justinian. 

5. " The limits within which the Roman law confined 
the power of a citizen over his property after his death 
were narrow." 

What sj'stem was introduced in order to overcome 
the effect of so strict a rule I 

What provision have we had in English law cor- 
responding to this ? » 

6. " Usufructus est jus alienis rebus utendi, salva 
reruni substantia ; est onim jus in corpore, quo sublato 
et ipsum toUi necesse est." 

Translate. 

7. Explain the application of what was known as 
arrce in contracts of sale. In what respect was the 
rule changed by Justinian ? Did the change apply to 
written as well as unwritten contracts ? 



SAnfUetttfti? of SToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FOURTH EXAMINATION (THIRD EXAMINATION 

LAW.) 



ROMAN LAW. 

HONORS. 



Examiners 



f Hon. David Mills. LL.B, 
( Hon. W. Proudfoot. 



1. What were, in Justinian's time, the chief circum- 
stances by which the personality, either total or partial, 
of a human being was tested ? 

2. Were there any, and what, artificial persons : 
how did they come into existence : and how were they 
terminated ? 

3. What were the things not susceptible of appro- 
priation by pi'ivate persons ? 

4. What were the principal divisions of things sus- 
ceptible of appropriation by private persons ? 

5. What was the power of the head of the Roman 
family over his children, as to their persons, and as 
regards property ? 

6. What was the control of a master of a slave, over 
the person of the slave, and over his property ? 

7. What were the legU actiones : when were they 
supplanted by the formulary system ; and when was 
the latter superseded by the extraordinaria cognitio 1 
State the chief characteristics of each system. 

8. Sketch the progress of a suit in Justinian's time. 



f 






CAniii(tr0ft9 of STotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 18U1. 



CANDIDATES FOR LT..B, 



ROMAN LAW 
HONORS. 






Examiner : His Honor, Judge Muir. M.A. 



JUSTINIAN. 



1. "The Roman family, in the peculiar shape it 
assumed under the jus Quirltium, was modelled on a 
civil, rather than on a natural basis." Explain. 

2. "The do8 of tha wife, belonged to the husband, 
and his rights over it were in the ancient law unres- 
tricted." 

What were the restraints subsequently imposed ? 

3. Mention the formalities requisite in the case of 
the execution of testamentum tripartitwm. What 
other formality was afterwards added, and subse- 
quently abolished ? 

4. What is meant in Roman law by the institution 
of an heir ? 

5. " The pi'oviijion of the les Furia not applying to 
Jidejussores, they were bound for all they nad pro- 
mised, and as each promised for himself alone, the one 
tirst sued had no remedy against the others, until the 
rescript of Hadrian provided one, and gave him what 
was called the beneficiutn divisionis." 

Name and explain the character of two other 
privileges available to the fidejussor. 



■w^ 



6. "Hence, probably has arisen that groundless 
vulgar error, of the necessity of leaving the heir a 
shilling, or some other express legacy in order to dis- 
inherit him effectually." — Blackatone. 

What is the provision of the Roman law referred 
to in the above passage ? 

7. Explain the terms " dies cedit," and '* dies venit," 
in reference to legacies. 



other 



- ""!ii"i*»Bf,v'ii!'«|imffW!rtiffi' aiia 



SUnfUftfitfii? of STovottto. 



AN^UAL EXAMINATJUNS: I8J»1. 



FOURTH YEAK. 



(OUKRICULUM 1883.) 

REAL PROPERTY. 



Examiner : J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. Why are there no manors in Ontario ? 

2. Give exariiples of (a) a vested remainder, (b) a 
contingent remainder, (c) an Executory devise. 

3. What was the doctrine of non-adverae 'possession'} 
How is it affected by Legislation ? 

4. What is the effect of a destruction of a deed by 
mutual consent of the parties ? 

5. " To every assignment of a mortgage the mortga- 
gor should, if possible, be a party." Why ? 

6. A devise to A. without words of limitation. How 
would this be construed (a) at Common Law, (6) under 
the Wills Act ? 



f 



t^x^%^^txuii^ of tTotonto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM, 1888.) 

REAL PROPERTY. 
HONORS. 



Examiner : J. McG. Young, B. A. 



1. When do express covenants run with the land ? 

2. In what different ways may a prescriptive right 
be claimed ? 

3. What is meant by the enactment that a feoff'ment 
shall not have a tortious operation ? 

4. Can a mortgagee purchase at a sale under the 
power in his mortgage ? Why ? 

.5. What is the distinction between the covenants for 
title in a statutory deed and a statutory mortgage ? 

6. State the object and effect o(" the provision that a 
will shall speak from the death of the testator. 



C9nfbfr0fttf of STotonto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



REAL PROPERTY AND WILLS. 



Examiner : J. McG. Young. B.A. 



1. Does a power of sale authorize a mortgage ? 

2. What is the effect upon a vendor's lien of his 
taking personal security ? 

3. What are the vendors' rights under a condition 
for rescission if the purcliaser take objections which he 
is unable or -.mwilling to remove ? 

4. What are the obligations upon fiduciary vendors 
with respect to conditions of sale ? 

5. When will taking possession by a purchaser 
amount to a waiver of title ? 

G. Construe a devise to A nnd his children (a) where 
A has no children living at the time of the devise, 
(b) where ho has. 



*l^ 



SAnfuernftff of STotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINAT10N8 : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOK LL.B. 



REAL PROPERTY AND WILLS. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. What is a good roct of title ? 

2. What can be recovered as damnges for breach of 
covenants for title and quiet enjoyment respectively ? 

3. What is the rule us to payment of interest upon 
purchase money where no time for completion is fixed 
b}' the contract ? 

4. When will compensation for defects in the estate 
be granted after conveyance ? 

5. When will illegitimate children take under a gift 
in a will to children ? 

0. What is the law as to the satisfaction of debts by 
legacies ? 



. 



dnfuetoftj? of Toronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



(CURRICULUM, 1888.) 

CORPORATIONS. 






Examiner : J. McG. YouNO, B.A. 



1. When will a corporation be bound by a contract 
not under seal ? 

2. \yhat must be established to fix a corporation 
with liability for the torts of its servants ? 

3. How far do directors occupy the position of trus- 
tees towards the company ? 

4. Explain the proposition that the prospectus must 
be regarded as the basis of the agreement which results 
from an application for shares and an allotment to the 
applicant. 

5. Discuss tfie liability of directors upon contracts 
ultra vires the Qompany. 



> 



nmnf riUff of sroronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



(CURRK ULUM, 1888.) 

CORPORATIONS. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: J. MuQ. Young, B. A. 



1. What are the powers of a Corporation as to bor- 
rowing money ? 

2. What is the liability of a Corporation with respect 
to contracts ulti'u vires of which it has had the benefit ? 
Give reasons. 

3. Upon whnt principle does the Court act in inter- 
fering with the decision of a majority of the shareholders 
(ii) upon matters afiuctitig the internal management of 
the Company, (6) upon matters involving a change in 
the nature of the Company's business. 

4. Explain and illustrate the distinction as to the 
liability of a Corporatiou upon contracts (a) ultra vires, 
(6) intra vires but irregular. 

5. Discuss the liability of a director for the acts of 
))i8 co-directors. 



i 



Birr^mKmiBsm 



^infbevftUff of 0:otonto* 



s 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM 1888.) 

CRIMINAL LAW. 
PASS. 



Examiner : His Honor Judge Muir, M.A. 



HARRIS AND TASCHEREAU. 

1. What is necessary to constitute a "seditious 
libel" ? 

2. Explain the meaning of constructive breaking in 
burglary, and give an example. 

3. What is necessary to constitute the misdemeanor 
called " forcible entry" ? State the remedy. 

4. " A," the maker of a promissory note, pa3^s it in 
full before maturity, but neglects to take up the instru- 
ment ; the payee endorses it over to a third person for 
value, is he guilty of forgery or not ? 

5. Give a short account of the proceedings before a 
magistrate leading up to the summary conviction of 
an accused person. 

6. On a trial for murder, is evidence on the part of 
the Crown of a former imnuccessful attempt or threat 
to murder by the prisoner admissible ? Explain. 

7. If several prisoners, jointly indicted, are being 
tried together, may the wife of one of them be called 
to give evidence against any of theui ? 

8. What is a reprieve ? In what two cases is the 
Court bound to grant it ? 



9. Explain the following terms :— 
Tales de circumstantibus. 
Peremptory challenge. 
Misprison of treason. 
Embracery, 






L. 



SinfUerffiUff ot STorotito* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CAND [DATES FOR LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM, 1888.) 

CRIMINAL LAW. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: His Honor Judge Muir, M.A. 



HARRI3 AND TASCHEREAU. 

1. What is an indictment ? Give a form in general 
terms in a case of larceny. 

2. What powers has a Judge during a trial to direct 
the prosecution of a person for perjury ? 

3. Mention the special pleas in bar which may be 
set up by a prisoner. 

4. In what manner is the validity of a challenge of 
a juror for favour determined ? 

.5. Mention five chief points in which differences 
exist between the rules of evidence in civil and criminal 
cases. 

6. Why are certain classes of convictions described 
as " summary " ? Describe shortly two kind'^ of appeals 
from such convictions. 

7. In case of the illness of a juryman during the 
progress of a criminal trial rendering him unable to 
continue in attendance, what course should be pursued ? 

8. The prisoner is charged with bigamy. The first 
marriage was contracted in Toronto, and the second in 
Detroit, what additional facts must be established by 
the Crown to secure a conviction < 



9. " 85. Every one who, unlawfully and with intent 
to defraud, by taking, by embezzling, by obtaining by 
false pretences, or in any other manner whatsoever 
appropriates to his own use or to the use of any other 
person, any property whatsoever, so as to deprive any 
other [)erson temporarily or absolutely of the advantage, 
use or enjoyment of any beneticial interest in such 

Eroperty in law or in equity, which such other person 
as therein, is guilty, &c." 

Give the origin of this section, and state any 
objections to the provisions therein. 




\>.'; 



&ni\»nnit9 ot SToronto* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: IHDI. 



CANDIDATES FOR LLB. 



(CURRICULUM OF 1888.) 

EQUITY. 



Examiner : J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. Explain and illustrate the maxim that equity 
looks to the intent rather than to the form. 

2. When will a purchase by a trustee of the trust 
estate be upheld in equity ? 

3. Give an example ot each of the several kinds of 
legacies. Which is the most beneficial to the legatee ? 
Why ? 

4. Explain and illustrate the doctrine of perform- 
ance. 

5. What are the liabilities of a mortgagee in posses- 
sion ? 

6. What are the general rules with respect to the 
cancellation of (a) void, (b) voidable instruments. 



dnflietttUtf of rotottto* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONM: 1801. 



(.'ANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM 1888.) 

EQUITY. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: J. McO. Young, B.A. 



> 



1. In what respects are gifts to charities more fovored 
than gifts to individuals ? 

2. What are the meaning and eftect of the decision 
that a use cannot 1)e limited on a use ? 

3. What distinction is then; in Equity between the 
construction of executory trusts in marriage articles, 
and in wills ? 

4. What are the essentials of a valid donatio mortis 
cmiHCt. Can a cheque be the subject of a donatio ? 

5. When will Equity give relief in the case of the 
non-executipn of a power? 

6. VVhen will specific performance with compensa- 
tion be decreed against a purchaser ? 



finflitrfliftv of ITorontsi. 



ANNrAI- FA'AMINATIONs : JHttl. 



CANDIDATEH FOU LL.B. 



MAINE'S ANCIENT LAW. 



Examiner: J. McG. YouNo, B.A, 



1. What was the law at Rome as to perfecting title 
by length of possession ? 

2. W^hat features have Roman and English Equity 
in common ? 

3. Explain and illustrate the operation of Legal 
Fictions in harmonizing law with the lequirements of 
Society. 

4. " The movement of progressive societies has 
hitherto been from Utatua to Contract." Explain. 

o. Discuss briefly the influence of the Stoic philoso- 
phy upon Roman jurisprudence. 



^ntiier»lt|^ of SovoiUo. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



MAINE'S ANCIENT LAW. 
HONORS. 



Examiner : J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. What was emphyteusis and what later tenure 
resembled it ? 

2. " In the progress of jurisprudence contracts were 
absorbed by pacts." Explain this proposition. 

3. What was the reason of the especial privileges 
extended to creditors at Rome ? 

4. Trace briefly the development of a system of 
Criminal Jurisprudence. 

5. To what does Maine ascribe the origin of private 
property ? 



> 



UnW^nniitBt of Sotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM 1888.) 

CONTRACTS. 
PASS. 



Examiner : His Honor Judge Muir, M.A. 



> r 



ANSON. 

1. In Xenox v. Wickham, a policy of marine insur- 
ance was " signed, sealed, and delivered " by the de- 
fendants, the insurers, but was never accepted by the 
plaintiff, having remained in the defendant's office until 
the loss. Were the insurers liable ? Give reasons. 

2. State the provisions oi the 4th section of the 
Statute of Frauds. 

3. " The most common form in which a forbearance 
as a consideration for a promise is in the compromise 
of an action." 

What elements are necessary to make forbearance 
a good consideration ? 

4. An executor sued for a breach of promise to 
marry the deceased, the promise having been broken, 
and a right of action having accrued in the lifetime of 
the testatrix. The action failed. Give reasons. 

5. What is neces.sary on the part of a debtor in order 
to defend himself in an action successfully by a plea 
of tender ? 

0. Does an action lie for procuring a breach of any 
contract ? If not, then does the exceptional rule ap- 
plicable to the contract of master and servant apply to 
the manager of a theatre and the actors whoiu he 
engages to perform ? 

7. Is there any, and if so, what implied condition in 
an agreement for the letting of a furnished house ? 
Explain the principle involved. 



7 



&ni\itv»U9 of STotomo* 



ANNUAL EXAMINATI0N8 : 1801. 



CANDIDATES FOR LLB. 



(CURRICULUM, 1888.) 

CONTRACTS. 
HONORS. 



Examiner : His Honor Judge Mum, M.A. 



ANSON. 



1. Give the provisions of Lord Tenterden's Act rela- 
ting to contracts of infants, and state in what respects 
it has been varied by subsequent legislation. 

2. "In Molton in Camroux, a lunatic purchased 
annuities, paid the money and died. His administra- 
trix sued to recover back the money on the gi'ound 
that the contract was void." Give the rule of law 
governing the decision. 

3. The acceptor of a Bill of Exchange induced the 
defendant to endorse it, assuring him that he was sign- 
ing a guarantee. The plaintiff was a subsequent bona 
fide, indorsee for value. What was held ? 

4. Define condition 'precedent and wan'cmty, shew- 
ing wherein they are unlike. 

5. " The rules respecting the right to rescind con- 
tracts entered into under undue influence follow, so 
far as equity is concerned the rules which apply to 
fraud, but with one noticeable qualification." Explain. 

6. Will a debt barred by the Statute of Limitations 
constitute a sufficient consideration to support a subse- 
quent promise to pay it ? 



7. The plaintiff, a professional singer, entered into a 
contract for the exclusive use of his services as a singer 
for a length of time, and upon a number of terms, one 
of which was, that he should be in London without 
fail at least six days before the commencement of his 
engagement, for the purpose of rehearsals. He arrived 
two days only before the time agreed upon. 

What was held by the Court in the action for 
having wrongfully put an end to the agreement ? 



'A 



I4L 



CAtiftier»(tff of 0otoitto« 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



FOURTH YEAR 



(CURRICULUM, 1888.) 

ELMSLEY ON DOMESTIC RELATIONS. 



Examiner : J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. For what causes may a master lawfully discharge 
his servant without notice ? 

2. Trace the history of the law with respect to the 
validity of separation deeds. 

3. " Marriage is more than a contract ; it is a Status." 
Explain. 

4. Contrast briefly the rights and duties of a parent 
and a guardian. 

5. What was the common law liability of a husband 
for the antenuptual torts of his wife, and how has it 
been affected by legislation ? 

6. When will an allowanee for maintenance be made 
to a father for the support of his child ? 



^nibnnitvf of rovonio* 



ANNUAL KXAMINATI0N8: 1801. 



FOURTH YEAR. 



ELMSLEY ON DOMESTIC RELATIONS. 

HONORS. 



Examiner: J. McO. Young, B.A, 



1. What are tlio rights and liabilitiu.s of an Infant 
lessor ? 

2. When must a contract of hiring be in writing ? 

3. Can an infant of tender years be guilty of con- 
tributory negligence ? 

4. Discuss briefly the doctrine of restraint upon 
anticipation. How is it affected by the Married 
Women's Property Act ? 

5. What are the principle*, of English law with 
respect to the legitimacy of a child conferred by the 
after-marriage of its parents ? 

r What is meant by the " Emancipation" of a child ? 



r 



9lnf^er»ftp of Cototito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS! 18ill. 



0ANDIPATE8 FOR LLB. 



(CURRICULUM, 1«88.) 

CONFLICT OF LAWS. 
PASS. 



Examiner: His Honor Judge Mum, M.A. 



WESTLAKE. 



1. Is a marriage contrncted in Utah Territory, where 
polygnmy is lawful between a man and a womnn pro- 
lessinp; the Morman faith, both single at the time, 
recognizable in England ? 

2. Do English Courts, in any, and if in any, in 
what cases entertain suits respecting lands situate in a 
foreign country ? 

8. Name three indispensable requisites to the validity 
of marriage to be satisfied by the lex loci aciua. 

4. Where is the " place of contracting" in the case 
of a contract made inter absentee by an interchange of 
letters or telegrams ? 

5. Give the English rule with respect to the mode of 
proving foreign laws in proceedings in English Courts. 

6. Is it allowable to bring actions in English Courts 
against foreign States or foreign Sovereigns ? What 
principle is involved ? 




#' 



^nmetttUji? of crotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



CANmDATTi'.S FOll LL.B. 



(CURRICULUM, 1888.) 

CONFLICT OF LAWS. 
HONORS. 



Examiner: His Honor Judok Muir. M.A. 



WESTLAKE. 



1. " Two causes affecting the tie of umniage, jactita- 
tion of marriage and nullity of marriage ; and two 
affecting the pei.sonal relations of tiie parties during 
the continuance of that tie, divorce a mensa et toro 
and restitution of conjugal rights, were ancient subjects 
of ecclesiastical jurisdiction." 

How was the uniformity of the law when so 
administered preserved ? What cliange took place 
and what new feature was introduced at the time of 
the reformation ? When was the episcopal jurisdiction 
in England abolished ? 

2. Mention an exception to the rule that by the 
comity of nations the laws of foreign countries are to 
be respected. 

3. An English trading company possessed of a pier 
in a port in Spain, instituted a cause of damage against 
an English ship for negligently injuring the pier. The 
ship owners pleaded that by the law of Spaint he master 
and mariners of a ship, and not the owners, were liable, 
as by English law. What was held to be the rule of 
law ? 

4. " B.," a resident in San Francisco, brought an 
action against " C." in England. " C." then commenced 
an action in San Francisco respecting the same subject 
matter. What must be shewn by " B." to enable him 
to restrain " C.'s" action ? 



I 



o. (a) Change <.)f domicile of origin to one of choice. 

(b) Intentional resumption of the domicile of 
origin, after possessing a domicile i)f choice. 

(c) Change of one domicile of choice to another. 
Death happening in itinere, give the last 

domicile in each case. 

6. How may foreign judgments in personam be 
enforced in England ? Mention some conditions affect- 
ing the validity of foreign judgments, the absence of 
which would oust the jurisdiction of the English Court? 



during 



pier 



I 



0inibtV0ft|^ of Croronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



CANDIDATES FOR LL.B. 



JURISPRUDENCE. 

HONORS. 



Examiner : J. McG. Young, B.A. 



1. Lorimer characterizes his work as " an attempt 
to vindicate the necessary character of Jurisprudence 
as a branch of the science of Nature." Explain 
briefly. 

2. Shew (a) why human enactments never attain to 
the full character of positive laws ; and (6) why judi- 
cial sentences may honestly fail to realize the Law of 
Nature in an individual case." 

3. Discuss the statement that the right to be in- 
volves the right to dispose of the fruits of being 
mortis causa. 

4. What are the means by which the community 
declares its Rational will, and what is the relation 
between them ? 

6. Explain the relation of Liberty to (a) Order, (6) 
Equality. 

6. State briefly the function of (a) the Church ; (6) 
the School ; (c) the Press in the formation by the 
Community of its Rational will. 




I li 



»\ 



BlnfUetttfttt of Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



OPERATIVE DENTISTRY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner : J. G. Roberts, D.D.S. 



Note. — Candiilates for Honors will take the whole paper, and Pass 
Candidates only those questions marked with an asterisk. 

*]. Name the materials used for capping pulps. 
Select three you consider the best, and discuss their 
composition and relative values. 

*2. Describe the propei- method of filling with gold 
the approximate cavities in the first and the second 
upper left molar.s. 

*3. Discuss the relative values of the different mate- 
rials used in filling roots of teeth. Which is best, and 
why ? 

4. How should decayed deciduous teeth be treated ? 
Give signs and syuiptoms of Pathological dentition and 
methods employed for affording relief. 

*o. What Pathological results may follow the death 
of the pulp ? How is Pulpitis distinguished from 
Periodontitis ? 



Cinfuetrsftv of Cotonto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



DENTAL PROSTHETICS. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner : G. Adams Swann, D.D.S. 



Cuudiduteii for Honora take whole paper. Paas Candidates only 
those marked with an asterisk. 

•1. Explain the difficulties met with in taking the 
" bite," and give best methods of overcoming these 
difficnltie.s. 

*2. How would you construct a full lower denture 
on a gold base, attaching the teeth with hard solder ? 

*3. Under what circumstances would you attach 
teeth to gold plate with solder, and when would you 
use other methods ? Explain advantages and disad- 
vantages of each. 

*4 Describe conditions which would make it neces- 
sary to extract a tooth, and make a partial denture t<» 
supply its place. Give the different reparative methods 
you would employ at different stages in disease. 

*5. Describe minutely the best method of construct- 
ing or applying clasps. Explain dangers connected 
with their use, and how guarded against. 

6. Describe construction of best form of crown for 
second bicuspid. 

7. A case is presented of lower jaw fractured be- 
tween second bicuspid and first molar. The upper 
first molar on opposite side is missing. How would 
you construct the best form of interdental splint for 
this case ? 

8. Describe the normal articulation of the upper 
and lower teeth, giving the outlines they present. 
Explain the advantages gained by this arrangement : 
1st, with natural teeth ; 2nd, with artificial substitutes, 
especially where all the teeth are replaced. 



■f U"|lU"ll»lfJH^lll 



mnftoetttltff of {Tovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1801. 



DEGREE OP D.D.8. 



MEDICINE AND SURGERY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



W 



Exitminer : L. Tehkey, M.D., CM., M.R.C.S., Enq. 



NoTK. — (Jandidatea for Honors will take the whole paper, aiid Paag 
Candidates only thoae questiona marker^, witn an aateriak. 

*1. Describe a Salivary fistula. Give its treatment. 

*2. Give the diagnosis and treatment of a Fibroma- 
tous tumor growing in the mouth. 

*3. Define an Absces.s, name their varieties and give 
their treatment. 

*4. What is meant by Antiseptic tieatment of 
wounds ? Describe the methods by which it may be 
accomplished. 

5. Describe a Rodent ulcer. 

6. Mention the causes of Necrosis of bone, and 
describe the process of the Seperation of the Seques- 
trum. 






:^ 



i.K^Hn'^-J.iir^i'l'j.t^.li&AViJlsiiiuJii^ilLJS-li 



0inllitr«ltff of Toronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATION81 1891. 



I)K(iRKK OF D.D.8. 



DENTAL HISTOLOGY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner: L. Teskev, M.D., CM., M.R.C.S., Eno. 



NoTI.— CandidAtfiii for Honon will take the whole paper, and Paae 
Candidate* only those queationa marked with an aateriik. 

•I. Describe the structure of the Enamel. 

*2. What are interglobular spaces ? Where are they 
mostly found ? Explain how tney are formed. 

•3. Describe the structure of the Pulp. 

4. Mention the sources of nourishment for the 
Dentine, and explain how its vitality may be main- 
tained after the Pulp has been destroyed. 

.1. Describe the development of secondary Dentine. 






. M 1/ .;''■! 



^nfHerisiUv of Coronio. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : im. 



DEGREE OF D.D.S. 



DENTAL PATHOLOGY. 



Examiner: R. M. Fisher, M.B. 



Note.— Candidates for Honors tnke the whole paper, and Pass 
Candidates only those (luestions marked with an asterisk. 

*1. Give the pathology of an acute infl.>uiiuation 
occurring in a Dental pulp terminjiting by resolution. 

*2. How does the structure <>!' a cicatrix difter from 
the natural integunnent. 

*3. Desciibe the process in healing in the soft tissues 
(a) by primary union, {b) by granulation. 

4. What is [)us ? What other fluids may it be 
mistaken for ? Give ordinary distinguishing test. 

5. Give the pathology of Pyorrhoea Alveolaris. 



^^r^^— p 
P 



rf 



e^infUrrttUff of STovonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



DEGREE OF D.D.S. 



MATERIA MKDICA AND THERAPEUTICS. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner : R. M. FiSHER, M.B. 



No IB. — C/'andidates for Honors take the whole paper, and Paes Can- 
didates only those marked with an asterisk. 

1. Explain the Therapeutical and Physiological 
action of, and the indications for the employment of 
the following drugs : Potassium-Bromide, Morphia 
Sulphate, Aconite, Magnesium Sulphate. 

2. Opium, from what obtained ? Mention its prin- 
cipal preparations. How much of the Tincture would 
be represented by two grains of the pure drag ? 

*3. Iodine, from what obtained ; to what class of 
remedies does it belong ; what is its therapeutical value 
as applied to Dentistry. 

*4. Classify. Give therapeutical and the poisonous 
dose of Bichloride of Mercury, Strichnia, Arsenious 
Acid, Carbolic Acid. What is the antidote for Arsenic ? 

*o. Write a prescription for a mixture containing 
the following drugs in their ordinary doses : Tincture 
Opium, Chloral Hydrate, Tincture Belladona, Spts. 
Chloroform, Syrup Aurantii, add water to make six 
ounces. Dose, one tablespoonful. 

*6. What is the therapeutical action of ice, when 
applied to an inflamed part ? For exami>le, threatened 
Alveolar Abscess. 

*7. Define the following terms : Anaesthetic, Nar- 
cotic, Anodyne, Sialogogue, Epispastic, Rubefticient, 
giving examples of each. 



H 



SinfUeiTBfts^ of ^Toronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



FACULTY OP DENTISTRY. 



ANATOMY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner : Geo. A. Peters, M.B., F.R.C.S., Eng. 



Note. —Candidates for Honors will take the whole Paper, and Pass 
Candidates only those questions marked with an asterisk, 

♦1. Give the origin, insertion, action and nerve sup- 
ply of the Digastric, Mj'lo-hyoid, and Internal Ptery- 
Uoid Muscles. 

*2. Describe the right Pleura, and give its chief 
relations. 

*3. Give the course, relations, branches and distri- 
bution of the Facial Artery as far as the angle of the 
mouth. 

*-K Give the distribution of the Inferior Dental 
Nerve. Also from the point at which it enters the 
foramen in the lower jaw, trace its fibres back to the 
brain. 

5. Describe the bony formation of the nasal cavities, 
and mention the channels of communication between 
then) and their neighboring cavities. 



i 




<!iinllier«U|? of Soronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: ISOI.. 



DEGREE OF D.D.S. 



i 



PHYSIOLOGY. 

PASS AND HONORS. 



Examiner: T. F. McMaiion, M.B. 



NoTK. — Candidiites for Honors will tivko tho wliolc Paper, niul Pass 
C'aiuliiliitcB only those niurkeil with an ustorisk. 

*1. Give brief answers to the followinj^ questions: 

(a) Quantity of blood in body and how deter- 
mined ? 

(b) What part do white corpuscles and red eor- 
puscles respectively take in the coa;.'nlation of the 
blood ? Prove your statements. 

(c) Origin, size, structure, propeities and func- 
tions of tho red blood corpuscles ? 

(d) Enumerate the ^ases of the blood and com- 
pare the percentage of eacli in venous and in arterial 
blood. In what forui does each exist in the blood ? 

(e) Describe peculiarities o, blood of portal vein, 
giving reasons for the same, and compare it with 
hepatic venous blood. 

*2. Describe the structure and functions of an intes- 
tinal villus. 

Compare osmosis and filtration. 

*3. Discuss the cause of the normal beat of the heart 
and the influence of the nervous system therein. 

*4. Clnssif}'^ foods. Where and how are the nitro- 
genous element?- digested and absorbed ; what are their 
uses in the animal econoiny, and in what form do they 
leave the body ? 



5. Enuini'iatt! Itriofly Llic funciidus of: 

(1) The cerobinl cortex ; 

(2) Tho superficial grey matter of corobollum ; 
(8) The medulla oblongata ; 

(4) The spinal cord ; 

(.")) The ganglia on the posterior roots of tho 
spinal nerves. 



ami I'ass 

tions : 
w detcr- 

L-cd vov- 
of tlie 

id func- 

Lud com- 
avtcrial 
ood? 
rtal vein, 
it with 

an intes- 



pha heart 
|in. 

he nitro- 

1 arc their 

d.) they 



mi 



$^ 



enif^emup of Coronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



DEOHKK UK D.D.S. 



CHEMISTRY. 



fCxamintf. W. Theophilus STifAKT, M.B. 



NoTK. -CandidftteN lor HonorH will take the whole pa|iur, ivnd l'a«ii 
CundidatcH only those qitentionH marked with an aaterisk. 

*1. Explain the following terniH : Gravitation, Adhe- 
sion, Cohesion, Chemical attinity. 

*2. How is Carbon Bisulphide prepared ? Give its 
propertied and uses. 

*3. For what purposes aro the following substances 
chiefly usetl : Hydrogen Dioxide, Chlorine, Sulphur 
Dioxide, Iodine and Carbolic Acid. 

*4. Illustrate the conversion of electrical energy 
into Magnetism Heat, Light, and Chemical energy, also 
illustrate the physiological effects of Electricity. 

*5. How is Alcohol prepared i Shew the relation 
that Alcohol Aldehyde and Acetic Acid bear to each 
other, and illustrate by formulae. 

6. Shew, by chemical tests, that Saliva is capable of 
transforming Starch into Sugar. What constituent of 
Saliva is supposed to bring about this change ? 

7. Give the uses and formulae of Amyl Nitrite 
Sulphuric Ether and Iodoform. 

8. Explain a natural classification of the elements 
according to the arrangement of MendelejefF and Lothar 
Meyer. 

What is meant bv the " Periodic Law i " 



wmmm 



w 



n 



r i 



Ciiniiirt0lttf of CToronto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS: 1801. 

In TUJB UNXAHIU AURKULTI'KAL t'OLLBOK, UUKLPH. 

QUALITATIVE AND QUANTITATIVE 
ANALYSIS. 



Examiner : J. BuiiWASH, D. Sc. 



1. Determine three bases and one acid in A. 

2. Estimate the perceiitnge of lime (CaO) in B. 



Slnil3rt»itj? of Toronto* 



AKNUAL, EXAMINATIO.NS: 1891. 



In the Aghicultural Collkge, (juelph. 
THIRD YEAR. 



INOUGAiMC CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner: Frank T. Shutt, M.A. 






1. Give an explanatory outline of the "Periodic 
system of the elenicntst," {Mevd('hji'i)\ usinn; tlie nrj-oup 
Nitroj^^en, Phosphorus, Al•^;enic, Antimony ami Bismuth 
as an iUustration. 

2. A solution of Silver nitrate requires forcomjilete 
precipitation 1.V5 litres of Hy(lro(j;en sulphide measured 
at IT.o'^O and 7(i2'" Bar. 

Find tlie weight in grams of the precipitate and 
of Silver (Ag.) originally in solution. 

3. A Platinum salt is found to have the following 
cemposition ; 

Platinum 48.13 

Hydrogen 2 96 

Nitrogen 13. H3 

Chlorine 35.07 

99.99 
Deduce its formula: 

(Pt = 194.9 : CI = 35.5 : N = 14.) 

4. Give the proofs for the assertion that the molecule 
of Ozone contains three atoms. 



5. Write equations n 'presenting tlu; following re- 
actions : 

(d) lliluriiie ;^;vs on Potassic Iodide in solution. 

(b) Water on Chlorine monoxide. 

((•) Wnter on Nitrorrcn pentoxide. 

(d) Hydrogen sulphide on Arsenic acid, in solu- 
tion. 

(«) Hydiogen Sulphide on Ferric chloride, in 
solution. 

(/) Ammonium Hydrate on Ferric chloride, in 
solution. 

((j) Potassium Hydrate on Aluminum chloride, in 
solution. 

6. State Avogidro's hypothesis, and exj/lain its use 
in determining the molecular weight of gaseous com- 
pounds. 

7. E>:plain what is meant by the valency of an 
rlemenfc. Can an elnuiMit possess dilferent valencies? 
lllustraie youi' nnswers with examples. 



lu following 



I ! 



9lnfi)erfi(ft|? of SToronto, 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



THIKD YEAR. 
In the Aoricultural Collkok, Guklph. 



ORCANIC CHEMISTRY. 



Examiner: Fkank T. Shutt, M.A. 



1. Describe two inethocls for the estimation of Nitro- 
sen in organic substances. 

2. Distinj^uish between Isonierisni and Metamerism. 
Write the .structural foinuilao (if the possible isomers 
of pentane ami dimethyl benzene. 

3. ((/) How is Glycerine couunercially prepared ? 
Illustrate the chemical reaction by an equation. 

(b) Show by foi inulae the relation of Glycerine 
to propane and prop}'! alcohol. 

(c) Why is Glycerine considered an alcohol ? 

4. A solution of Urea s^fave on analysis 94.5 c.c. of 
Nitrogen at 1.5.5°C. and 758""" Bar. What weight of 
Urea was present ? Give constitutional formulae for 
Urea, Carbonic acid (hydrate) and Carbamic acid. 

5. Write a short account of the principal " Albumi- 
noids" as found in the animal and vegetable kingdoms, 
giving as fully as you can their chemical and physical 
characteristics. 



f 



I I 



SAnlUfVttfts^ of rotonto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 



In THK AORICDLTURAL COLLKGE, QdBLPH. 

THIRD YEAR. 



TOPICS FOR EXAMINATION IN AGRI- 
CULTURAL CHEMISTRY. 



Exaravner : R. C. Kedzie. 



■ 1. Why is water so essential to vegetable wrowth ? 
State all the reasons. How can soil moisture be con- 
served ? Direct and remote intiuence of tile <iraining. 
How does surface cultivation prevent drought ' 

2. Relation of the nitre plant to nitrification ? Con- 
ditions favorable for rapid dovelojiment of the plant ? 
Why does a light dressing <>f well rotted manure often 
produce such marked results, t. *j., on an old meadow ? 
Why is mulching so beneficial ? 

3. Relation of bacterial tuljercles on roots of plants 
to assimilation of free nitrogen ? What plants are 
especially alfected by these tubercles ? Importance 
of these facts ? 

4. How are soluble salts of potash and ammonia 
taken up by the soil ? What materials in the soil are 
most active in this conservation ? What basic soil 
materials are least retained ? Since alumina forms no 
part of the ash of agricultural plants, why is clay so 
important a part of good agricultural soils ? 

5. What plants are benefitted by Nald as manure ? 
How is it beneficial ? Influence on the period of ripen- 
ing of plants ? What soils are most benefitted by a 
dressing of Nald ? Dose per acre ? 

6. Value of wood ashes as manure ? Why benefi- 
cial ? Value of leached ashes ? of coal ashes ? Why 
such disparity in value ? 



1 ' ■ 

} n 






.- .' 



8AnllifV0ltff of CToronto. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS: 1891. 

In TlIK AuRlt'ULTUICVL, CuLL£OK, GUKLfU. 



PHYSIOLOGICAL AND STRUUTURAL 
BOTANY. 



Examiner: J. J. Mackknzie, B.A. 



1. Examine the Howcr sulnnittod, and fill out the 
accompanying schedule. 

2. Discuss fully the synthesis of carbohydrates in 
green plants. 

3. Give an account of root pressure. How is it pro- 
duced ? What is its use in the plant economy ? 

4. Discuss the value, to the plant, of the following 
asli constituents: — (Calcium, Silieon, Iron, Potassium. 

o. Describe niiinitoly cork tissue and cork formation. 
What are its functions ? 

G. Give an account of the development of a dicoty- 
ledonous ovule. 

7. Give a descri|)tion of a transverse section through 
a leaf, indicating the functions of the various parts de- 
scribed. 



ri 



\ k> 



I; 



il 



i 



i!Anitifv»Uv of Cototito. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : 1891. 

lit TBI AURICDLTURAL CoLLEOB, OUKLrU. 



ECONOMIC BOTANY. 



Examiner: James Fletcher, F.R.S.O., F.LS. 



1. Explain the terms : Anthracnose, Bacteria, Mildew, 
Rust, Weeds. 

2. Describe the development and give the best 
remedies for the attacks of: 

The Downy Mildew of the Grape. 
The Powdery Mildew of the Grape. 

3. Distinguish between Hard Smut of Wheat and 
Loose Smut of Wheat. 

4. What is Ammoniacal Copper Carbonate ? 

6. When Potatoes are found to be affected by the 
Rot (Phytophtliova iv/edans), what steps should be 
taken to save the crop ? 

6. Give three instances in each class of annual, 
biennial, and perennial weeds. 

7. Give the best method for the eradication of the 
following weeds : 

Shepherd's Purse {Capsella buna-pastor is.) 
Wild Buckwheat (Po/yyonurti Convolvulus.) 
Ox-eye Dai.sy (Cliryaanthenium leucanthemum.) 
Pigeon Grass (SctaHa viridis.) 
Horsetail {Equisetum .) 




IMAGE EVALUATION 
TEST TARGET (MT-3) 




1.0 



U 



11.25 



2.0 



us 

u 



1 40 



HUu 

■4146 



'/ 







/. 










<;' 




V 




HiolDgraphfc 

Sciences 

Ckjrporalion 




33 WfST MAIN STMfT 

tN3iaTlt.N.V. :49M 

(71«)t73-4S03 



4^ <* \ ^r\\ 







^ 



r 






ZiiUtictsUj^ of ^orotito. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 
In thk Aokicultural Collegk, Guelph. 



FEKDING OF AiNlMALS. 



Examiner: H. P. Armsby, Ph.D. 



1. State in detail how the exact nutritive effect of a 
ratioii upon a given animal may be ascertained. 

2. What effects may be produced by the food upon 
the composition of the carcass, and under what con- 
ditions ? 

3. Effects of bodily exertion on metabolism and on 
fattening. 

4. Characteristics and uses of clover as a forage crop 
compared with otiier common forage crops. 

5. Digostibility of clover in the various forms in 
which it is used compared with that of grass. Influ- 
ence of matniity and method of preservation on the 
digestibility of clover. 






^Infiirr0ft9 of Soronto. 

ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 
In the Ontario Agricultural Collbok, Guklph. 



DAIRYING. 



Examimer : Prof, Jas. W. Robertson. 



1. What are the physical properties, and the con- 
stituents of average milk from cows ? 

2. Describe the characteristic points of a good daijy 
cow of any breed. 

3. How may cream be separated from milk ? State 
the advantages and disadvantages of each method. 

4. Write a short description ot the process of butter- 
making, as it should be carried on at a farm dairy in 
Ontario in February. 

5. How does the development of acidity in milk, 
curd, or whey, attect the making of cheese by the 
Clheddar process. 

Give a ration suitable for milking cows, made up 
frcm crops that can be grown on farms in Ontario. 

7. State how you would api)ortion the crops (men- 
tioned in your answer to -No. 6), on forty acres of 
arable land, so as to feed the largest number of cows 
for one year. 

8. What produces "flavour" in butter and cheese? 

9. What are the needs of the dairy interests of 
Ontario, in regard to Standards for milk, and Legisla- 
tion dealing with the adulteration of it 1 



S!nit)rt0(ti? of STotontcti. 



ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 

In TBS AoRinDLTUHAL COLLEGE, QuELPB. 



ECONOMIC ENTOMOLOGY. 



Examiner : James Fletcher, F.R.S.C, F.L.S. 



1. Explain the following terms • Hexapoda, Homop- 
tera, Incomplete Metamorphosis, Maxilla, Ocellus, 
Parthenogenesis, Pseiuloneuroptera, Prolegs. 

2. Name the parts of the body of one Insect in each 
of the following orders : Coleoptera, Hemiptera, Lepi- 
doj)tera. 

3. How do Insects breathe and feed, and how does 
this afF(!ct the question of applying remedies ? 

4. What is the best deterrent wash to prevent l)0iers 
in fruit trees ? 

5. Give a short sketch of the life-histoiies of the 
following : 

1. Cabbage Maggot (Anthomyia brass icve); 

2. Imported Ourrant Worm (Nematus ribesii) ; 

3. The Turnip Flea-beetle {Phyllotreta vUtato): 

4. The Pine Borer {Monohwiamus confusor) 

5. The Ox Bot-fly {HyiMderma bovis.) 

6. Give the best remedies for : 

1. The Oyster-shell Bark-louse (Mytilaspiapo- 

moj'um) 

2. The Pea- weevil {Bruchus pisi) 

3. The Striped Cucumber-beetle (Diabrotica 

vittata) 

4. The Squasli-bug (Anasa tristis.) 

7. In what proportion to its diluent may Paris Green 
be used on the following plants : Apple, Peach, Pear, 
Plum, Potato. 



r 



i i; 



■■!» .v. •«• ■■ 



8AnfUet0(tff of Sorotito, 



ANNUAL EXAiMINATlONH: 1891. 
In thk AoRirirr.TiiRAi, Ooixkhk, Oitxph. 

AGRICULTUHK. 



Examiner: Prof. I. P. Roberts. 



I. 

NoTK. — Read tlio quvutinna through oarcfuHy. All answers should 
be fhori and to the puinl. Avoid wordy detinitionet. Seize salient 
points and prime fa(!turs, as tlie greater always includes the less. 
Do not repeat the questions, but designate them by their numbers. 
Write on one side of tlie paper only. Place your full name on every 
sheet. Take time to review your answers carefully before handing in 
your paper. 

LAND DRAINAGE. 

1. State the eft'ecta of thorough drainage of clay 
lands. 

(a) As to temperature of soil. 

(6) As to chemical changes induced. 

{6) As to physical conditions, 

{cl) As to liberation of plant food. 

2. Should drains run up and down the slopes ? 

3. Why should there be the fewest possible number 
of mains ? 

CULTURE. 



4. Nature i"ai.ses fair crops without culture, 
does she do it ? 



How 



(a) What .should we aim to accomplish by plow- 
ing ? 

(6) What by harrowing and cultivating ? 

(c) What by rolling ? 

{d) Is the grinding and compacting of the soil by 
the horses feet which is necessitated by the present 
methods of culture, beneficial or harmful ? 

'.<" .5. How can moisture best be conserved for the use 
of hoed crops during dry summer weather ? 



6. How can avmlable plant food be added to the 
•soil without thu uso of plants, manures, or fertilizers ? 

7. What factors would you use to bring a field 
which does not require drainage, which wan producing 
a minimum crop, up to a uiaximum yield keeping in 
view the greatest present and ultimate profit. 

MANURES. 

H. Give practical rules for preserving waste of farm 
manures, and state the two jiriiieipal ways in which 
waste is likely to occur. 

9. In what ways do farm manures benefit the laud ? 

10. What is the value of the nitrogen in a ton of 
cotton seed meal containing 40 per cent of albume- 
noids, if nitrogen is worth IG cents per pound ? 

11. Why .sliotild a dre.ssing of superphosphate not 
follow closely a dressing of lime i 

ANIMALS. 

12' Define Heredity, Prepotency Atavism, In-and- 
in-breeding, Line-breeding. 

13. What is the eftect of in-and-in-breeding ? 

14. State in what way and to what extent you would 
use the four great factors of impi'ovement, heredity, 
food, habit, and comfort in improving tlie common cat- 
tle of Ontario with a view to more enonon)ical meat 
production. 

15. How would you proceed to form a new breed of 
sheep which would be able to maintain its valuable 
qualities without a constant infusion of impoi'ted blood, 
and which should really be better adapted to the pre- 
vailing conditions in Ontario than any breed now 
extant ? 

16 Why should horses be fed oftener than, cattle ? 

17. What efl'ect has the weight of the animal on its 
power to pull ? Why can trotters and thoroughbreds 
move taster than horses of the .«ame weight of the draft 
type ? 

18. Name the best breed of swine for Ontario, and 
state at some length the principles to be observed in 
breeding rearing and fattening. 



I 



Wh- 



8An(tier«ftff of rorotito. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONa : 1891. 
In TiiK Agricultural Collkob, Qcklph. 



DRAWING. 



Examiner: C. C. Jamer, M.A. 



N.B, — Only rule or straight edgu uiul triaiigleH iiUowod for thk work. 

1. Draw your pamlunyin in l)lock letters one inch 
lonjr. 

2. Draw a simple farm cart. 

3. 'riucn o;ate posts aro 12 ft. and 4 ft. apart : between 
the tir.'^t and .second po.sts tlie lari^'e (fate is on tlie.svvin^ 
away Ironi the ohservcr at an angle of (iO" wit'.i line of 
po.sts, and between tlie second and third posts the small 

fate is on the swing toward.s the ob.server at same angle. 
)raw the same, stating scale Jind po.sition of observer. 



san^HfinsUff oc ^Toronto* 



SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS : 1891. 



JUNIOR MATRICULATION. 



ARITHMETIC. 



Examiners 



(A. R. 
(I. E. 



Bain, LL.D. 
Martin, B.A. 



16 X 



1. Express in a decimal of 4 places the following: 

( 5 3.5" ■•" 5.5* 7.5' ■*" '^" J 239' 

2. Two distances are measured in inches, and are 
known to be correct within a quarter of a hundredth 
of an inch each way, being 11.87 and 9.95. How far 
can their product be depended upon for accuracy ? 

3. A. starts from Kingston to walk to Belleville, a 
distance of 45 miles, at the rate of 3^ miles per hour, 
and B. starts from Belleville 3 hours earlier, at the 
rate of 2 J miles per hour, to walk to Kingston. Where 
do they meet ? 

4. I sell goods at a profit of 10 per cent, of the first 
cost to me, and for cash I deduct 5 per cent, of the 
selling price. What per cent, of the first cost do I 
gain? 

5. The duty on surgical instrument cases is 35 per 
cent. ; that on the instrument 20 per cent. ; the duty 
paid on a case of instruments invoiced at $30 was 
$7.50 ; find the invoice price of the instruments alone. 

6. (a) What per cent, is realized on money by invest- 
ing in a 3^ per cent, stock at G7 ? 

(6) When money is worth 4 ,ior cent, what ought 
to be the price of stock which pays 21 per cent. ? 



7. A person borrowed money for two years. For 
the first year he paid 6 per cent., and tlie second year 
7 per cent. At the end of the time he paid back $175 
How much was borrowed ? 

8. A. rented a house for one year for S480 ; at the 
end of three months he took in B. aff a co-tenant ; after 
four months more they admit C. ; B. moves out one 
month before the year is up ; how much rent should 
each pay ? 

9. A man rents a house for $28 per month for one 
year. What sum paid in advance would pay the rent 
foi- the year, interest being calculated at A per cent, 
a month ? 



Slnfiierofts of STotonto. 



ANNUAL KXAMINATIONS : ISDl. 



In thk Aijricultukal Collfxik, (Jitklph. 



ENGLISH. 



Examiner: T. C. L. Akmstuong, M.A., LL.B. 



1. Characterize Addison as a satirist; illu.strating 
vour opinion by reference to any of tlie selected num- 
bers in the Spectator. 

2. Discuss after Addison the advantages of cheer- 
fulness as a moral habit, and cheerfulness in its natural 
state. 

S. " We cannot be guilty of a greater Act of un- 
charitableness than to interpret the Afflictions which 
befal our Neighbours as Punishments and Judgments." 

How does the author explain, prove and illustrate 
this statement ( 

4. Give the substance of Addison's paper on the 
utility and pleasure of i)]anting. What poets have 
written on the subject ? 

5. Give Pope's opinions on the following heads, quo- 
ting where you can : 

(a) The use of new words. 

(6) Judging a poem from the rhymes, or by know- 
ing the " easy vigour of a line." 

(c) Suiting the words to the sense. 

(d) Following nature and imitating old authors. 



0. Coinplote the cotiplots in which tlie f(>lh)\viiig 
lines oceur. And state in what connection each couplet 
is used : 

(a) Pride, where wit fails, steps into our defence. 

(b) Drink deep, o